i ' \TUSe Ee ROBIE BAG, » i » Med Be ’ Ny » Bien “7 oe ee eee rs Fee ae eee a nm an Oe A OS A tA PAS ee aT bite ON aee ee Verena ‘ ati ii ee Tree rape ri top thet tea Hea bya enw te . yaa if \ { { : 4 m4 Ho a, tas MARY ete MATT I Be tey Weed a eh Ce tem gegen a te + ue sete oi 4 8 A ‘ asa BT Win Abe a ny ' " + lel pore, ' ete aul waren 4 Ae Yh Pre re ee Poe eee 7 . ‘ A ote alt ve 7 Leia hg o HOP Wa teh heaped wa iH 4 LTE Wem tens Meta relt Remained el Mit eiy bette fall ee had eT rhe heh reine ® rrr t aad ' . ' Vihie { { MU aE e | ge | Len oy L 4 SOT 8s whey Veh MO Oe eet Medais be hw Vegetete Me te 8 ted Bom etd eee ty 3 yr yp , i vt 5 ft { Hat wy yes { ' ‘ ‘ { D Vy tie Orer ers ' Pe vOeeer ree Porter Lat rr) Pree es 7 4 Pant sas * . ’ ’ { { ¢ ee va ‘ ' ‘ tamed HAM Meh eetine + Pee) te Ot Oe ence Ben & ‘ ve ‘ 1 ‘ * iM } y J ' ' ‘ . 4 © beta Ota eee ae te tome ty (tana Witte Vathed o¢ ae Pree bate he i. ; ; itp t ' ard ite { hi i Ofemy fell ; a eA CT ‘ ' ‘ th } ' ' (nae Hite te eh Ort ikee «vy joene a ve ‘ {AA i ‘ ' 4 aa ‘ ' its PALL Tee hematin sa 1 +44 Tia 1 { i] ; tt i see § oe ‘ tal (ie ‘ { otis Ya he tee 5 ‘ My ‘ ) een ' ' hots vs ‘ ‘ if 1.4 | ne [ P ' ‘ 4 ‘ j : ‘4 ‘ cnt ‘ ' Sele 4 isi ‘ J hy ’ . ea ’ 4 F } ' ' bf 423 { } vom ‘ ra : ¢ i i he ‘ dD Oe hee . ' ) : ' ‘ ' ’ ; rahe WR deme eG ) F ) ' ‘ ‘ iid Ay? ' ) ' Grav GAeas va ou a ee erent eee oy » " ' rey ¥ 4 ‘ oe) Bm ties ck en tig 4 aye iy : ‘ wih) ' 4 Ted Wy Vet Merete Mitte a Pun ; } i ‘ ‘ t ‘ i 7 T ! ta h 3 ‘ i ; F aval tie ' ' ' i hee eee 14 ‘ Bhd rete vy ’ ; ie ' ' Viedau st Ce ne tee 0s . LY) td ; ‘ i) ' ’ " ‘ ‘ PL AC Re TRICE Say | ry a | ' Peete ier uted Me Mebane , ‘ ' ‘ ve ‘ " ‘ ‘ « x! ef) i ' ‘ aT : . wr p tetetee wey { ‘ ; t aud ‘ ‘ 7) ‘ 5 ‘ " ‘ ‘ Win 8 ani Ait hem. Weel 4 » , ; Hy tt 7 we ‘ a rs "1 +f PATA PL ney thetarteceiby ee ee . 1 4 4 i ren f i 4 ara hit it " Re tahoe 2 0 BeWs ac bast. eb. Meters en ‘ ’ ' ’ ' " ’ j 4 mit eA anne gets ies wiry } wre ' ' ' : A ‘ any Deh wee vite WS ia ta ‘ a) 4 ’ \ 1 d ‘dans pie “ he (etal Lt wi lis > vhanets ' ' { : me HLT ery , , , ’ Wet treOelle ae ; f } eye i Tat i rt i fer yy doll ey i ; 5 ro as Vath! te baie oy ' ' 4 ’ ; ia ris ' 4 wo vey yr eet ‘ i aval ‘ i heh Wet iteaey fen i ¥ i ' it } ‘ Valin ‘ 1 w ‘ - ‘ ‘7? L a Oe dada ‘ r ‘ ‘ ' th) ag A tiderte ty Pete ede OA) U 6 h@s ~~ 5 , ' ' ’ * 2 ‘ . ’ 4 is rn, eh Use He) bah et ‘ ea ‘ : LV te Veet ¢ « ' « ' pit ge wi ett : ' ' ; fais del! 1a0s4$) Foie br : ’ ( it 4 Hi ar) otebe bh Boat ’ i ' deal ‘ a per 28 We aeis . ; ot ' ee ti? | ud dite } ‘ ; ' ire an a 1) 4 ee ho p + ® ' ‘ . Pry uml tee tee +4 . ’ ‘ t ) 4 Vat te 4 M H ‘ ' als! ’ . 7 i ; te .¥ omeps34 vt . f r ( i Qt a rhe 4 ; ‘ Recrertrr ee ayarrre hath ear tals 1 4 Me * ; ' ; ry ¢ wed J ) ; ‘ ‘ « yy ' é vs ‘ ir) a ’ " Wes fe leis aayyern eM eee ‘ H ’ dete tr “wd ‘ enter arate + felt Pee ey reat yrech wl eer gira 4 ‘ ' : isla ‘ 7) ¢ ’ ‘ of ' i dew . ie ¥ +1, Se + is kA H +) ath ’ } ‘ ] aby ah ae mes He Vee tale rats i ’ ; ‘ | 4 ‘ 4 oven wee bei ‘ ‘ 7 ‘ ‘ ! t we ‘ 4 as te beer Y ‘ ' | i ty ” es ‘ ‘ . ! ' fa ‘ . ‘ 4 ‘ eye 4 a “ wt fs ’ : * ' ; j ein ‘ : we “te : ‘ ‘ 3 ita aye 1D ba \ Ae he Y ‘ \ } ener hie 2 ria te { ' bas , 4: ‘ dane ; te ree . { vee ; fi ’ ’ ' ‘ ‘ “+ ! \ { y ‘ é ‘ tM ‘ . , ue Wl \ a } 4 L-trae +» | b , , ; ' ‘ wy bhp ‘ AA \ “My gaye eo ’ “ H ; walla ? ’ Our c , ‘ { f ) ' L : stinger my AA ; , } ‘ i , i APA @: bee ‘ ' U ‘ . or : ’ re wiyte's viet : . Ot} ‘ (on ea ‘ ; \ Oi SR de hele ‘ Aye & ee 1 ' _“ ‘ ’ iJ . * eo, We ett ae Sten y 5 m ' ‘ ' ‘ é t dai . i Zaye Lat aby : awe Eh Ay te 8. { ' yt ‘ . , tabte a ey = yids NT ARPPRC ate hah 3 tablets te-e Pin t ; 1 ray i} f pak tats Pee TT hy MOI Mel yhde il aaa a F 1 Y } . © i'd ' ‘ a i: ‘ i ‘i$ tj ‘ \ . j rs j } ' ’ ve *! é 4 j ‘ { th . é ; , d F Ctr eee ° > : hf ‘ : ' : : ‘ aen , ( . ‘ ; 3 ‘ ' ‘ aa P fy? ' ’ Pk oe : « nie r Saal) 3 \ F , one : ' ‘ ’ F ae 7 ‘ ee ‘ . ; “7 ' r he ai . “ . \ ‘4 woah y ¢ ; 7 2 ee ee ; ‘ } f i ; > Hue dg t/ bh Pind. ‘ } + Vien ‘ «heteaeeueee : . ‘ pir 2 duels ‘ nites . wha tote j 7 ode i . ' tphgsae q { fH yi U iid tists slate J ‘ : the seuged iW elbow i Perret.) ‘ $ y ’ iy - Met eine a uile Sakis tle ied + de tucliweapoysa wes zigmerti Gd ; j ' ; . s moe dbale tree tere y cetebiter cor ede f ; B { ' sds elakud tighi eet apogee amily detietastet # y ‘ 4 ane t uy . ' be ta Sty Hem D edhe? pent Waid dy en eee Me aneeaeeil \ } ' \ ij My vf: H q : Gide gente tis ‘ + tata edseceand A ' I ‘ ‘ : ; . " pinide H ADECSearrens tire C1 Prey ee PE i ; Wea r f he M : ‘ a ise aude hee ‘ ’ ; p is " ne ; . Post ied tees Lag : 36% \ ¢ 7 +4 ‘ i i j P ilie ' apis) betel gs atk if} cb Merete et lagug st 3 ; ‘ ry REDE el | 2 i a : i ' 40) > bry iT: Ht ’ ’ ‘ i } Lp. HT ‘ j $ y pid ' 7 ; 7 yal 1 F 7 , tare Pen icles Meee ean iy ht cet, ered beh Ceca : ' h y | ot i bs } Peis $: had is ‘ et biked a tM aha oe pay te Be dig aiplaceredy Sat) i ' ' Bill ; ar HY ; ’ 4 i Arig ‘ Lonide 3] % SOU Fittest aude tienur ad | . ' q a ‘ / ha 5 At ; 5 o) pas pA ‘ i , HITED ene e ere erry ata dgts tee tl? Air , ' j ; j ; s 3.4 Perr at? ; midline Rede ee ou eee | MMe pe is bie lune oa) ba hy a wie du sae bolas iy 7 R a, 8 A tt . j MF ; ihay } ' jain) ae ; Pe POP PRri REET ar roria Pere ieee wtiet 5 ; ‘ rit wu : i Y 14 7 [ 8 44,, . t ‘ ‘ ‘ ' D ‘ BAU ERTS rarer ei eee Se kes eM ei eh prutees neyeses, a une . j f bry Mat ) Tien Mit r Oe inet] j Pir r ey te WIRTHHUIEIL LPP er een WO ty Poin 4 , ) “ , ht ’ i bod) peas a Saleh Mil di ed) MMA eu bu da td og As Lita a ud bee tite STE erence eh tei L iin omar: boo 4 ‘ ‘ i PRPs Pheer wel veel} Ora ae) thigah iad tony sara eaphn GMb Heed a Baty cereale wera wawe i ‘ ‘ ‘ diel tae ' at sae agi) ae had he Aba het et od ee } 4 Hn 6G and iu i i y Ws 2 ne Nadie ts has Abeaerd ita Wy PUR ED Ti rere nirie Prion Terres) 62 bd em thd ‘ ; : ‘ by, ve j ‘ 7 Salnded as deta bashigiaahinwae ‘ 20h stidaa ds ys neg i i ‘ F; H ict no i H ) te Jala TP ee? | Wy 3g 48 saas ‘ nai ’ H ¢ “ y ' j } ‘ ’ yd edd te © alae Priest qs ' i i ity j ‘ etd ho ‘ $y hikiw WL Gi geQette-, culty ‘ and ani ‘ ' ‘ | ; a} ; Pineal eter eee Ter ieet cers Fe i 1G a he P } : qa t ' t i sve A) hh 88 Pee eerh Rit ek eal Seed - RVG RON oie Sp Rte 00 igs WOieeiy totes ‘ ; ‘ ' on PA RCT Bes ED ‘ ; i ; Hun ee Ghee a tL BTS Siero et Ter ba ALOR EE TDS AS TE a RiEd Der calibra taht aired RH SH EN ale ay ‘ ie ‘ 4 A, Celkimuniat Lig ih ‘ Sia Wey vise ash e109 “ Cor H Mh. : 7 4 Wed At OP AEE Asp selta ell dag are a vee a fal iA ' pring a8, 'S P i : i : i et . J $ ‘ad i i H tie ie ; eee ie ? ,) eer ? ; ‘ ern ‘ ("i Hae | l is ‘ u pyro Fare ren eee \ ts ta: . i ra ‘ } Ven pe erer oid hid Hn re let Petieas) srt Bold) ad 2 Wadi atadee 4 ) Ts Wik oa ‘ ' nis ‘ ) ‘ A eb ee RBI Bord hd pia a fl . ' 4 } ’ He 4 " SURE a ag td ety hy ‘ us ks, ‘ i * eas tose ea sdatenig ag ele o i 44 i : feyise8 f : 1, sv renee ey are Sa a Ag ant te et bee ce geen tem Oana é a) \ i ‘ 1,1 1S ited Hanae roe bane ry ‘ het TO ia) pit Vee i Bib SURG Tea de 5 | ATT 1 Artie ‘ i ULE i fagad ' any any Wee de etday Alvis) sda yhUraepsadigsasiag int ‘ i i met Merry oe CT RT? AU i init ig Lig ht ana Wiese sedge sietah celeb ae > a) ( ‘ ' Dp OR SAT hat, HA Verge } A he CR Tite ane nse ‘ e ' i Jo ade de dia ta Writs g why ) saa ‘ ' seo yedaee wales pageg (ase erat i ; i ieee Laps ¢ tug Ayts ‘ that hue dha aeih ee wel) Soe cite rane et a Ow rae | Q bread idide fl (9 Teil Soe! a4 7 v4 ¢ Pier er ee bi teh ty ft fed otpee edad noes ada Ph eas Jat outs abel a al ty tha Bh stGs 6) SEI Ae g egag, Tass Cees tener) fb reryennens an mary W148 j ‘ 0 fy ; a} S20 he 1 } Way : ‘ POI Mere douse, sus thushsdibayedty perrer L are wi ’ 7 " + ' ‘ i U Bia i 4 ‘ { et biethapi gree wate tinue eg oe 6282 Fem en ot ' eh Arbaa ail fudeint Di Gi dah eel Bald) eaters { $i SUED eo nt at seuie “ ier eases dee ge ; i ‘ : bhai REET era ue Mie 1evab oy is ema rere Generel Pon ee VD eit fae ‘ CHilada tl t he ted Pea GR bee a det SC AD TAT dada a Obi g air aa itd Wee sa eben sey wath eae eek ee satpage | ; sf Crete NOUR a Wed rina e AA nd capes d SEU PO ATE Hed aL ves 049 WUT Gea Og Oa ene ine 4 wa ' tetiah byt y Pe Hau ew awn enya temed ee ecie cin 3 - me tus ae | Ma vel 4 eu ee heyy can a abi? IS grind ee a te da, ition Sole cer fea wid ere hay a) ‘ oF Cb ee Te ad iu ra its; ' Hien Doth ee ardedinids Hage Va teel ae ae ae 4:9 4) 584 7 : ‘ uvaye i ‘ ‘ at ee a BG tt eis: Henghan nf cha Ge Velen Cea Oa ERO dee Lr eet cet ett eae) cet Be Laie that tha ha he of evasive al elie Sehae oh hoe A a a > a bibs Ee t CEM Soh reset he Wy he 4 Eby Ped i re Bw AAAAAAAA AGA ARARAAAAAE RAAAA sananaaanan AIAVAAIAIAAY : AR Ay A FY AAA ‘a | AA AAWNNAs ; An aA aARRA IAA AAA mA AARaae ~ ™~ MN > ) ‘a ; \; AAAAPAR AR aa AAAAAAAAAAIAAAAAAAARAAAAAAASEY’ PP | : a nAAAt A . WY LE LY) ARAAAAASE ee lala Ania IYANAVAAAAAAAAA AAA manne aaa | f Aria | | vy: y y A\ | =| An ir - 2 AAR PESAR EEE aif AIAIAILA! lm |= a ‘\ > AAAARA Aner A 2 2 ales Aner ap pene ARAN VA) ARAAR AR s Mwvaraeanronmmmnsee AAAAAAANAR AV AE MP mm ae 5 AA RATA Ar Ar’ PARRALR ARAL Gagan AA ea AAAAAAAS AREA ¥ AR AAAh ARAAAAA AA a NZ ; AAAADA é a 2 Zs ale al AlAiZz y—— —\ - = AT A es! IE i \Alalal AAA ae a aiaaaaaaaaar AIAARAA af ARARAA AAANBARARAL AVAMAAABAAAAAAAAAARAAARAAAANAA A AR AR AAA RAAA NAAAA AAANAAA a aA? AAAAAY Aelia AAR BRAAAZ Y VARIAN a Mla AAA AR AAAAAAIA AAA AA Aa AA AAAAA AAR AIAAAR AS — aN, ae WAARAR? AAA AAAAAA. AAA AF ; : AR AA AA AAR RARAANAAACA AAAAAAAANAAAAAN AAAA Wiauiniseesiscsccet ARRAN 44, ARARAAR AAA AF S ARAAA 7 \AAAARA Raaan naan ARAN AAAAAAAAAAAAA Aas, NANANAN 33 Baste AAAaa AAANAAAA A RAMs AAR PAN AANA > > ARA AWAAAAAA, Pe crip A nana cece Cannan Mes nrnannni AARAANA ArT\AAAARA AANANNARY AAP ANARAAM an ,.4 - a AAAAAAAAA AAAAA p A 2 x . a x a Zz " — : ™, — ~ ‘i -_ : * : F : i F; s, ; x 1 : : E me , , JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 27, 1937 BOARD OF EDITORS Rotanp W. Brown Espen H. Tooie FREDERICK D. RossIN1 U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS RAYMOND J. SEEGER C. F. W. MvueEsEesBeck PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GoLDMAN W. W. RusBey BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY AGNES CHASE Henry B. Cotuins, Jr. BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY FranNK C. KRAceEK CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED MONTHLY as f _ nai M use BY THE . WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 450 AHNAIP St. AT Mrenasua, WISCONSIN ERRATA Vol. 27, 1937 Page 4, line 23: for ‘‘Acetocina” read ‘‘Acteocina.”’ Page 4, line 32: for ‘‘Noetica”’ read ‘‘Noetia.”’ Page 4, line 35: for ‘‘mulrilineatus” read ‘“‘multilineatus.”’ Page 4, line 36: for ‘‘murtcatus” read ‘‘muricatum.” Page 12, line 14: for ‘‘Dupoin”’ read “‘Duplin.” Page 63, line 48: delete ‘“‘found.” Page 82, line 19: for ‘‘Birsson” read ‘‘Brisson.”’ Page 83, line 8: for “‘olarctic” read ‘‘Holarctic.”’ Page 128, line 39: for ‘‘MacCullum’s” read ‘‘MacCallum’s.”’ Page 381, line 7 from bottom: for ‘‘Mosoa”’ read ‘‘Mocoa.”’ Page 407, second letter from left in Fig. 1: for ‘‘F” read ‘“B.” Contents, March 15 issue, line 8: for ‘“‘Gyradactyloidea”’ read ‘“‘Gyrodactyloidea.” No. Espen H. Tooie BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY Pa tee: Siig Morrison , eo SOCIETY ates es | ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY ‘ | - a 3 z i W. Ww. RUBEY . ; GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Re as: ata Cai Le «dL. R. Swanrow : BOTANICAL socter c aie AN : mt ANTHROFOLOGIOAL SOCIETY eae yet = 2 * r 4 Fs eT he Eps Fe ns > Wy a 1p . see oe IS ods + Journal of the Washington ntadeniy of Sciences This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Neadere of Sciences, ee (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members Si Academy; (2) % proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated socieeeta notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The. JOURNAL i is issue monthly, on the fifteenth of each month. Volumes correspond to calendar yea ae: _ Manuscripis may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. Iti is urge ntly quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the Journat and confor m t manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, s fee onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. oe) Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good pare, Footnotes should — be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not — _ assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they vader to a correct other than obvious minor errors. Bec, is 3 Illustrations in excess of one full-page halftone or two full-page line dati may te a be paid for by the author. Line drawings are preferred. ee | Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will concise” betes | = a to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in heme a form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. a be 7: Ro re et Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Cone ma : bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and ~ date of issue, and reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accordance) witl the following schedule of prices. . tee a i . “ as = 2 Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers at ie : 100 $ .75 $1.20 $1.50 | $2.00 $2.75 i Sa 150 1.25 1.90 2.55 3:25 . 5 3160. So 200 1.75 2.60 3.60 4.50 42426 | ae 250 2.00 3.30 4.65 5.75 5.00, >> eee * 5 4 3 ; Bnvelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address pret in the | corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00: _ Subscription Rates.—Per volume.......... 5 Ee PA BE Foc RNY RRS ONG $6.00 To members of affiliated societies; per volume........... Pe eae eee ENE 2.50 MAGS NUMDETS .-. 5... sigh aiava a diaies Sete ARs te Saag Mie Stn Eee ne eS ee canes 50° Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”’ and — ioe addressed to 350 Ahnaip Street, Menasha, Wis., or to the ARR er, H. G. Avers, — Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C Exchanges—The JourNnAL does not exchange wit other publications. ates oh Tie \ 6 ian TS eae saree Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is s made t to 3s the Treasurer within thirty days after date of following issue. © ae ae OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY Ms a. Tf; President: O. E. Murnzmr, U. S. Geological Survey. pe sally: Corresponding Secretary: N. R. Smiru, Bureau of Plant Tudustegs 2 Recording Secretary: CHARLES THom, Bureau of Plant a ee Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic ‘Survey. . ame if JOURNAL OF THE W ASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 27 JANUARY 15, 1937 No. 1 GEOLOGY.—The Pleistocene Horry clay and Pamlico formation near Myrtle Beach, S. C.\ C. WytHE Cooks, U. 8. Geological Survey. In my recently published report on the geology of the Coastal Plain of South Carolina, the statement is made that late Pleistocene Pamlico time, during which the sea stood about 25 feet above its present level, was preceded by a time of lower sea level.” This state- ment was based on evidence that came chiefly from outside of South Carolina, for I had not seen a contact of the Pamlico formation with underlying beds within the State. Since that report went to press, the canal of the Intracoastal Waterway mentioned on page 125 has been completed through Horry County. The following instruc- tive section on it yields evidence that corroborates that statement. SECTION WEST OF THE RAILWAY BRIDGE ACROSS THE INTRA- COASTAL WATERWAY 23 MILES NORTHWEST OF MYRTLE BEACH, S. C. Feet Pamlico formation: 3. Fine leached marine sand including a few thin beds of clay in the middle part and merging upward into clayey loam....... 2. Fine sand loaded with sea shells, many of which have both valves in juxtaposition. The upper part contains many oysters’ 6 Horry clay: 1. Very dark brown clay containing comminuted plant fragments and woody tissues and diatoms. Cypress stumps and knees are rooted at the top. Some of the stumps extend a few inches above the clay into the overlying shell bed. The top of the clay is per- forated by tubular holes, presumably made by boring creatures. Weencitby watenatmich. tides 2 8 ee rw ae we ee en 3 The presence of rooted tree stumps beneath a thick marine de- posit that evidently accumulated in quiet water gives conclusive evidence that the sea stood lower on the land when they grew than in the immediately succeeding epoch. The name Horry clay, here used for the first time, is proposed - 1 Published by permission of the Director of U. S. Geological Survey. Received October 6, 1936. 2 CooxEe C. W., U. S. Geol. Survey Bull 867: 157. 1936. 1 PARE : a JAM 9.6 1097 2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 1 for bed 1. It is-pronounced O-ree, with the accent on the last syl- lable, as in Horry County, 8S. C., from which it is adopted. The Horry clay contains a large flora of diatoms. A small sample studied by Kenneth E. Lohman of the U. 8. Geological Survey yielded the 53 species in the following list: A—abundant; C—common; F—few; R—rare; *—now living in fresh or brackish water; species not preceded by an * are marine. Melosira cf. M. recedens Schmidt (F), M. sulcata (Ehrenberg) Kiitzing (C), Podosira stelliger (Kiitzing) Mann (C), Cyclotella striata (Kiitzing) Grunow (F-C), C. striata bipunctata Fricke (F), C. sp. (F), Coscinodiscus denarius Schmidt (F), C. excentricus Ehrenberg (F), C. nitidus Gregory (F), C. oculus-iridis Ehrenberg (F), C. radiatus Ehrenberg (F), Actinoptychus parvus Mann (R), A. splendens (Shadbolt) Ralfs (R), A. undulatus Ehren- berg (F), Polymyxus coronalis Bailey (A), Aulacodiscus argus (Ehrenberg) Schmidt (F), Hupodiscus cf. HE. decrescens Rattray (R), Auliscus pruinosus Bailey (R), Actenocyclus ehrenbergii Ralfs (F), Triceratium favus Ehrenberg (F), T. reticulum Ehrenberg (F), Biddulphia cf. B. rhombus (Ehrenberg) Wm. Smith (F), B. sp. (R), Grammatophora sp. (R), Plagiogromma sp. (R), Rhaphonets amphiceros Grunow (C), R. belgica (R), R. aff. R. angularis Lohman (C), R. surirella Grunow (R), Synedra investiens Wm. Smith (R), Leudugeria janischit (Grunow) Van Heurck (R), *Hunotta monodon Ehren- berg (R), Cocconets scutellum Ehrenberg (R), *Diplonets elliptica (Kiitzing) Cleve (R), D. griindlert (Schmidt) Cleve (R), D. weissflogiz (Schmidt) Cleve (F), *Frickea lewisiana (Greville) Heiden (R), Trachyneis aspera Ehrenberg (R), *Navicula peregrina (Ehrenberg )Kiitzing (R), N. aff. N. spectabilis Gregory (R), N. sp. (R), *Caloneis formosa (Gregory) Cleve (R), *Gyrosigma acuminatum (Kiitzing) Rabenhorst (R), *G. ef. G. balticum Ehrenberg (R), G. sp.,. Pleurostgma sp. (F), Amphora pediculus (Kitzing) ‘Grunow (R), *Epithemia zebra porcellus (Kiitzing) Grunow (R), *£. zebra saxonica (Kiitzing) Grunow (R), *Rhopalodia gibberula (Ehrenberg) Miiller (R), *Netechia granulata Grunow (R), *N. cf. N. plana Wm. Smith (R), *N. tryblionella Hantzsch (R). Mr. Lohman comments on this flora as follows: “The facts that the fresh- and brackish-water species are all rare in the Horry clay and that the marine species are abundant indicate a marine to slightly brackish environment at the time of deposition, such as would be found in the seaward part of an estuary or bay beyond the influence of any major fresh-water stream that may have emptied into it. The most abundant species, Polymyxus coronalis, is now known to be living only in the tropics, and this is true also of several of the others, strongly suggesting that the Horry clay was deposited under conditions at least as warm, and most prob- ably warmer, than those existing in the same region today. “Polymyxus coronalis occurs abundantly in the Pleistocene beds pene- trated by a well drilled at Wildwood, N.J., at a depth of 78-180 feet. It also occurs sparingly in the ‘‘blue clay’’ at Philadelphia, which represents its northernmost known occurrence. This species is extinct along the Atlantic coast of North America, and so far as known is living only off the mouths JAN. 15, 1937 COOKE: PLEISTOCENE HORRY CLAY 3 of the Para and Amazon rivers. It has never been found in rocks older than Pleistocene. Another common species, T'riceratiwm favus, has a known range of Pleistocene to Recent. Many other species in the assemblage also occur in Pleistocene beds in the Atlantic Coastal Plain, but most of them are long-ranging species having little significance for age determination.”’ The peaty appearance of the clay and the cypress stumps rooted in it would lead one to suppose that the clay had accumulated in a cypress swamp; but all the trees are rooted in the top of the de- posit, and all the common species of diatoms are marine. It is there- fore evident that the clay was deposited in salt water. Before the cypress trees could have taken root there must have been either a lowering of sea level or a freshening of the water due to other causes. The clay may represent the deposits of a salt marsh that eventually was changed into a fresh-water swamp by the building of barriers across the tidal inlets. As the diatom flora includes several tropical species, it is hardly likely that the clay could have been deposited during a glacial stage. It more probably represents part of an interglacial stage, presumably the early part of that including Pamlico time, after sea level had risen from the low of the preceding glacial stage to approximately its present height but before it had attained its maximum of 25 feet above the present level. The trees may have grown in a flooded estuary freshened toward the end of a brief pause in the submergence. Further flooding of the estuary in which the Horry clay was deposited widened it into a V-shaped bay opening towards the southwest. The bay was separated from the Atlantic Ocean by a low, narrow peninsula composed (at Myrtle Beach) of coarse red- dish-brown sand containing disc-shaped, flat pebbles. In the ‘‘Geol- ogy of the Coastal Plain of South Carolina’ I interpreted this peninsula and the higher land across the bay as having been built above water by the waves and winds of Pamlico time. In the light of newer evidence it seems more likely that they are of Talbot age and that the Horry estuary occupied a valley in the Talbot plain. A somewhat similar occurrence of diatomaceous clay and cypress stumps overlain by marine fossiliferous sand (Pamlico formation) is reported by Mansfield? on the Neuse River about 10 miles below New Bern, N. C. At this place, however, Nitzschia scalaris, a fresh- water species, predominates. The presence of at least two marine 3 U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 867: 7, 153: pls. 1, 4,17. 1936. * MANSFIELD, W. C., U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 150: 134. 1928. 4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 1 species there indicates that the deposit was formed in an estuary to which salt water had occasional access. Although the incomplete list of the diatoms on the Neuse includes no species listed from the Horry clay near Myrtle Beach, the two deposits are probably con- temporaneous, for both are estuarine, both underlie the marine Pamlico formation, and they stand at the same level. If they are contemporaneous, they yield further evidence that there has been no tilting of late Pleistocene deposits in the Carolinas. The lower part of the Pamlico formation at the railroad bridge near Myrtle Beach (bed 2 of the section) is highly fossiliferous. Many of the fossils are well preserved and larger than the usual sizes that the same species attain along the Carolina coast today— an indication of warmer water. Among the organisms represented are unidentified corals; unusually large sand dollars (Mellita quin- quiesperforata); and more than 60 species of mollusks, some of which (e.g. Rangia cuneata) no longer live in the Atlantic Ocean. For the identification of the mollusks listed below I am indebted to Dr. W. C. Mansfield. The collection is especially valuable be- cause all of the specimens were found in place, without possibility of contamination from other beds. As many of the bivalves retain both shells in juxtaposition, it is unlikely that any of them were re- worked. Acetocina canaliculata (Say), Terebra dislocata (Say), T. concava (Say), Mangelia cerina Kurtz & Stimpson, Marginella sp. (immature), Olivella nitidula Dillwyn, Oliva sayana (Ravanel), Busycon caricum (Gmelin), B. caniculatum (Linnaeus), Cantharus cancellaria (Conrad), Alectrion acuta (Say), A. travittata (Say), Ilyanassa obsoleta (Say), Anachis avara Say, A. obesa C. B. Adams, Mitrella lunata (Say), Urosalpinz cinerius (Say), Odo- stomia sp. Turbonilla sp., Secla adamsi (H. C. Lea), Littorina irrorata Say, Crepidula fornicata (Linnaeus), C. fornicata ponderosa H. C. Lea, Polinices duplicatus (Say), Tectonica pusilla (Say)?, Sinum perspectivum (Say), Gly- cymeris sp. (young), Argina pexata Say, Arca transversa Say, Noetica ponder- osa Say, Fossularca adamsi Dall, Ostrea virginica Gmelin, Pecten gibbus gibbus Linnaeus, Anomia simplex d’Orbigny, Modiolus sp. (fragment), Pandora trilineata Say, Venericardia tridentata Say, V. perplana Conrad, Phacoides mulrilineatus Tuomey & Holmes, P. radians (Conrad), P. trisculatus Con- rad, Divaricella quadrisulcata (d’Orbigny), Rochefortia sp., Cardium murica- tus Linnaeus, C’. robustum Solander, Dosinia discus Reeve, Chione cancellata (Linnaeus), Venus mercenaria Linnaeus, Gemma purpurea H. C. Lea?, Tellina sp. ef. T. sayz Deshayes, Semele proficua Poulteney, Abra aequalis (Say), Donax variabilis Say, D. sp., Spisula similis Say, Mulinia lateralis Say (very abundant), Rangia cuneata Gray, Ervilia concentrica Gould, Corbula contracta Say, Barnea costata Linnaeus. The contact between beds 2 and 3 of the section near Myrtle Beach apparently marks the location of the top of the saturated Jan. 15, 1937 MANSFIELD AND MACNEIL: MOLLUSKS ) zone before the canal was dug. The absence of shells above this level may be attributed to the leaching action of rain water that, in percolating downward, dissolved the shells. The absence of shells from terrace deposits higher than the Pamlico has been advanced as an argument against the marine origin of the higher terraces; but most of the higher terrace deposits are porous and have been subjected to leaching for a longer time than the Pamlico formation. The sequence of late Pleistocene events that can be inferred from the sections near Myrtle Beach, on Neuse River, and from other evidence is as follows: First, a lowering of sea level from the 42-foot Talbot stage to a depth estimated by Stearns® as about 60 feet be- low the present level; next, a rise of sea level to approximately its present position and deposition of the Horry clay in estuaries filling valleys cut in the Talbot terrace during the preceding epoch; then, continued rise of sea level to a height of 25 feet, expansion of the Horry estuaries, and deposition of the Pamlico formation; next, fall of sea level to a depth at least 25 feet lower than the present, indicated by submerged channels in Pamlico Sound and elsewhere; finally, rise of the sea to its present level, drowning the valleys and lowlands of the preceding epoch to form the existing sounds and estuaries. I have elsewhere® tentatively correlated the Pamlico formation with the last major interglacial stage, commonly called Peorian— a correlation that seems to be confirmed by the studies of Mac- Clintock and Richards.’ The Horry clay apparently represents the early part of the same stage. PALEONTOLOGY.—Pliocene and Pleistocene mollusks from the Intracoastal Waterway in South Carolina.t W. C. MANSFIELD and F. 8. MacNsEit. In June, 1935, and again in April, 1936, the writers visited the Intracoastal Waterway at North Dam (Location Contract 195) about 3 miles west-southwest of Little River and about 15 miles northeast of Myrtle Beach, 8. C. The canal here traverses a low plain, which as interpreted by Cooke,? is the southward continua- 5 Strarns, H. T., Geol. Soc. Am. Bull. 46: 1941. 19385. , § Cooks, C. W. Tentative ages of Pleistocene shore lines. This JouRNAL 25: 333. 3) 7 MacCuintock, Pau, and Ricuarps, H.G. Correlation of late Pleistocene marine and glacial deposits of New Jerseyand New York. Geol. Soc. Am. Bull.47:317. 1936 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received October 12, 1936. 2 Cookr, C. W. Geology of the Coastal Plain of South Carolina. U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 867: 125-126. 1936. 6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 1 Fig. 1.—Intracoastal waterway canal, June, 1935, at North Dam (Location contract 195) about 3 miles west-southwest of Little River and about 15 miles northeast of Myrtle Beach, 8. C. The rock on which the senior author stands is referred to the Plio- cene epoch (see No. 1 of section). tion of the Pamlico terrace plain of North Carolina. The purpose of this paper is to record the species of mollusks collected at North Dam, both those in place from the different beds in the canal banks and those thrown out by the dredge along the spoil banks. These faunas are compared with those from other areas and certain spe- cies not heretofore recorded from this area are indicated. The section exposed at this locality is as follows: Recent: Feet 6. Cross-bedded white to tam. sand! 22. >..552 ae ee eee 8+ Pleistocene (Pamlico formation): 5. Dark gray, rather fine clayey sand, carrying many fossils (U.S. GeolsSurvey nos. 13424, 138135 5.. oy. eens 2. oe 3+ A> and .(ol une Origin’)... cP... ah ee eee, 3+ 3. Alternating layers of cross-bedded sand and peat, the peat in places grading laterally intovsand. @ieece ee ens o> a. a2 2. Dark gray clayey sand, some of the sand grains large and ir- regular, carrying many individuals of Mulinia lateralis, Ostrea virginica and other shells; this bed changes laterally in char- acter and thickness, being more clayey and fossiliferous where it occupies depressions in the underlying bed and more sandy and cross-bedded as it becomes thinner; in places the lower JAN. 15, 1937 MANSFIELD AND MACNEIL: MOLLUSKS ~I part of the carbonaceous bed (no. 3) rests directly on the Plio- cene (cu. 0) (Wes. Gear survey Nos P3425). . fs. So. oo se. 0-3 Unconformity. Pliocene (Waccamaw formation): 1. Indurated, light gray, highly calcareous marl with a minor amount of rather fine quartz sand, carrying fragmental and en- tire mollusks, corals, encrusting bryozoa and echinoderms (U. 8. Geol. Survey no. 13426)..... (above water level) The species collected from layers 1, 2, and 5, and from the spoil bank are listed below. LIST OF SPECIES FROM LAYER 9 Aceteocina canalicula (Say), Terebra dislocata (Say), Terebra concava (Say), Ilyanassa obsoleta (Say), Anachis avara Say, Epitonium angulatum Say, Melanella sp., Turbonilla, 2 or more species, Sezla adamsiz (H. C. Lea), Crepidula fornicata (Linnaeus), Nucula proxima Say, Arca transversa Say, Noetia ponderosa (Say), Argina pexata (Say), Ostrea virginica Gmelin (?), Anomia simplex D’Orbigny, Mytilus sp., Lyonsia aff. L. floridana Conrad, Phacoides multilineatus Tuomey and Holmes, Cardiwm robustum Solander, Cardium muricatum Linnaeus, Chione cancellata (Linnaeus), Venus sp., Venus mercenaria Linnaeus, Gemma purpurea H. C. Lea, Tellina ef. say (Deshayes) Dall, Semele proficua Pulteney, Cumingia tellinoides (Conrad), Tagelus gibbus (Spengler), Tagelus divisus Spengler, Mulinza lateralis Say, Anatina canaliculata (Say), Barnea (Scobina) costata (Linnaeus). This fauna is of very late Pleistocene age. Of the 26 species all, or nearly all, are now living somewhere along the Atlantic coast. LIST OF SPECIES FROM LAYER 2 Acteocina canaliculata (Say), Cylichnella bidentata (D’Orbigny), Terebra sp., Mangelia cerina Kurtz and Stimpson, Olivella nitidula Dillwyn, Margin- ella apicina Menke, Marginella sp., Busycon caricum (Gmelin), Busycon perversum (Linnaeus), Cantharus tinctus Conrad, Alectrion acuta Say, Alec- trion trivittata (Say), Ilyanassa obsoleta (Say), Anachis obesa C. B. Adams, Mitrella lunulata Say, Urosalpinz cinertus Say, Eupleura caudata Say, Epi- tontum sp., Turbonilla, 2 or more sp., Semicassis inflata Shaw, Ficus papy- ratia Say, Triphora nigrocincta C. B. Adams, Cerzthiopsis subulata Montagu, Vermicularia spirata (Philippi), Turritella sp., Crepidula fornicata (Lin- naeus), Crepidula plana Say, Calyptraea centralis Conrad (?), Polinices (Neverita) duplicatus (Say), Diodora alternata (Say), Nucula proxima Say, *Glycymeris americana Defrance, *Arca lienosa Say, Arca transversa Say, Argina pexata (Say), Noetia ponderosa (Say), ‘‘Fossularca” adams Dall, Ostrea virginica Gmelin, *Pecten eboreus solariodes Heilprin, *Plicatula marginata Say, Cardita sp. (young), *Cardita arata (Conrad), *Venericardia granulata Say, Chama sp., *Phacoides cf. P. waccamawensis Dall, Diplodonta semi- aspera Philippi, *Dzplodonta acclinis Conrad, Bornia cf. B. triangulata Dall, Dosinia elegans (Conrad), Chione latilirata athleta Conrad, Venus sp., Tellina sayt (Deshayes) Dall, Cumzngia tellinoides (Conrad), Abra aequalis (Say), 8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 1 Tagelus gibbus (Spengler), Spzsula cf. S. similis Say, Mulinia lateralis Say, Anatina canaliculata (Say), Corbula barrattzana C. B. Adams, Corbula con- tracta Say, Coral. The sediments of layer 2 were probably deposited during Pleisto- cene time. Of about 62 species listed, 8 are believed to have lived during Pliocene time (marked in the list with an asterisk*) and to have been redeposited in the Pleistocene sediments. The water level in the canal was about 4 feet higher during our last than during our first visit and consequently the lower part of layer 2, seen during our first visit, was under water. All of the pre- sumably reworked Pliocene species were collected during our first visit from depressions in the underlying Pliocene bed and at the time were thought to have been in place in the base of layer No. 2. However, the possibility that they may have slipped down the bank from overlying dredged material, is recognized. The following species are not known to have lived earlier than Pleistocene time: Busycon caricum (Gmelin), Cantharus tinctus Conrad, Alectrion trivittata (Say), Ilyanassa obsoleta (Say), Uro- salpinx cinerius Say, Semicassis inflata Shaw, Argina pexata (Say), Noetia ponderosa (Say), Cumingia tellinoides (Conrad), Anatina canaliculata (Say) and others. LIST OF SPECIES FROM THE UPPER PART OF THE PLIOCENE, LAYER NO. l Olivella mutica Say, Fusinus ef. F. carolinensis Dall, Ilyanassa porcina Say, Nucula proxima Say, Glycymeris americana (DeFrance), Pecten eboreus senescens Dall, Crassinella lwnulata (Conrad), Venericardia abbreviata Con- rad?, Phacoides multilineatus (Tuomey and Holmes), Diplodonta acclinis (Conrad), Cardium sp., Laevicardium mortont Conrad, Venus sp., Tellina sayt (Deshayes), Mulznia lateralis Say, Poromya sp., Corbula barrattiana C. B. Adams, Corbula contracta Say. LIST OF SPECIES FROM THE SPOIL BANK Terebra dislocata (Say), Terebra aff. dislocata (Say), Terebra concava (Say), Conus adversarius Conrad, Conus floridanus Gabb (C), ‘‘Drillia” ebenia Dall (C), ‘‘Drillia’”’ aff. pagodula Dall (C?), Cymatosyrinx lunata (H. C. Lea), Mangilia sp., Cancellaria ef. C. carolinensis Emmons, Oliva sayana (Ravenel), Olivella nitidula Dillwyn, Marginella aff. M. limatula Conrad, Scaphella (Aurinia) floridana (Heilprin) (C), Aurinia obtusa Emmons, Fasciolaria sp. (N), Fasciolaria apicina Dall, Busycon carica Gmelin (P?), Busycon perversum (Linnaeus), Busycon pyrum Dillwyn, Busycon sp. (N), Fusinus carolinensis (Dall), Fusinus sp., Alectrion acuta (Say) (P), Alectrzon vibex (Say) (C), Ilyanassa obsoleta (Say) (P), Ilyanassa trrorata Conrad, Ilyanassa isogramma Dall, Alectrion aff. ambigua antillarum D’Orbigny (C), Anachis avara caloosaensis Dall, Ocinebra alta Dall (C), Kupleura cau- data Say (P), Murex pomum Gmelin, Murex rufus Lamarck, Purpura fluvi- JAN Lo, 19357 MANSFIELD AND MACNEIL: MOLLUSKS 9 ana Dall (C), Coralliophila lepidota Dall, Urosalpinx cinertus (Say) (P), Urosalpinx sp. (N), Ficus papyratia (Say), Petaloconchus trregularis D’- Orbigny (P), Turritella subannulata Heilprin, Turritella sp. (P?), Crepidula fornicata (Linnaeus), Crepidula cymbaeformis Conrad, Crepidula plana Say, Polinices (Neverita) duplicata (Say), Natica canrena Linnaeus, Diodora cf. D. alternata (Say), Nuculana acuta (Conrad), Glycymeris americana (De- France), Glycymeris pectinata (Gmelin), Acar reticulata Gmelin (C), Arca plicatura Conrad?, Arca transversa Say (P), Arca lienosa Say, Arca rustica Tuomey and Holmes (N), Arca (Cunearca) incongrua Say (P), Argina pexata Say (P), Navicula umbonata Lamarck (P?), Navicula wagneriana (Dall) (C), Fossularca adamsi Dall, Noetia ponderosa (Say) (P), Ostrea sculp- turata Conrad, Ostrea virginica Gmelin (P), Ostrea aff. O. trigonalis Con- rad, Pecten eboreus senescens Dall, Pecten evergladensis cf. charlottensis Mansfield (C), Pecten eboreus solarioides Heilprin (W), Pecten ernest- smitht Tucker (N), Amustum mortont Ravenel, Plicatula marginata Say, Anomia simplex D’Orbigny, Modiolus cf. M. gigantoides Olsson (W), Astarte concentrica bella Conrad, Crassinella dupliniana Dall, Crassinella lunulata (Conrad), ‘‘Eucrassatella” gibbesiz (Tuomey and Holmes), ‘‘Eucras- satella”’ mansfieldi MacNeil (C, N,W), Cardita arata (Conrad), Venericardia granulata Say, Venericardia tridentata Say, Chama striata Emmons, Echi- nochama arcinella (Linnaeus), Phacoides radians (Conrad), Phacoides ano- donta (Say), Diplodonta acclinis Conrad, Laevicardium sublineatum (Con- rad), Cardiwm cf. tsocardia Linnaeus, Cardiwum muricatum Linnaeus (P), Chione latilirata Conrad, Chione cribraria (Conrad), Chione cancellata (Lin- naeus), Venus campechiensis permagna Conrad, Venus mercenaria Linnaeus, Macrocallista reposta Conrad, Tellina cf. T. propetenella Dall, Macoma bal- thica Linnaeus (P), Semele bella-striata Conrad (C), Semele proficua Pulte- ney (P), Semelina nuculoidea Conrad (P?), Tagelus gibbus Spengler (P), Spisula aff. similis Say, Mulinia lateralis Say, Corbula inaequalis Say, Barnea costata Linnaeus (P). The capital letters used in the preceding list are explained as follows: (P) probably Pleistocene; (C) present also in the Caloosahatchee marl (Plio- cene) of western Florida but not previously reported from the Waccamaw formation in the adjacent area to the west of the canal; (N) present also in the Pliocene at Neills Eddy Landing, 5 miles N. E. of Acme, N. C.; (W) pres- ent also in the Pliocene in the upper bed at the north shore of Lake Wacca- maw, N.C. Most of the species not followed by a letter probably came from the Pliocene as many of the specimens are incrusted with a hard matrix. The close relationship of the Pliocene fauna or faunas dredged from the canal, to that of the Caloosahatchee marl of western Florida, to that at Neills Eddy Landing on Cape Fear River, N.C., and to that in the uppermost bed on the north shore of LakeWacca- maw, N.C., is indicated by the common occurrence at those locali- ties of certain of the species as indicated in the list. The presence of Navicula wagneriana (Dall) is of particular interest as it has been known heretofore only in the Caloosahatchee marl. No specimens of the genus Rangia were collected from the spoil 10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. VOL. 27, NO. 1 banks. The apparent absence of this genus, which inhabits shallow water, may indicate open and moderately deep water conditions for this area, during Pliocene and Pleistocene time. Three species of mollusks (identified by W. C. Mansfield)— ~ Pecten ernestsmitht Tucker, Pecten eboreus senescens Dall, and Scaph- ella (Aurinia) floridana (Heilprin), and one species and three specifically unnamed genera of echinoids—Rhyncholampus ever- gladensis (Mansfield), a Clypeaster, an Encope and a Coelspleurus, are recorded by Cooke? from this locality. PALEONTOLOGY.—A new subspecies of Pecten from the upper Miocene of North Carolina. W. C. MANSFIELD, U. S. Geo- logical Survey. In April, 1936, F. 8. MacNeil and the writer obtained additional specimens of Pecten, among other material, from exposures along the Chowan River in Bertie and Hertford Counties, eastern North Carolina. The Pecten from certain localities, as noted below, was referred by the writer? to P. (Chlamys) eboreus eboreus Conrad, but he now believes, after procuring better specimens for comparison, that it should be referred to a new subspecies—P. eboreus bertiensis, described as follows: Pecten (Chlamys) eboreus bertiensis Mansfield, n. subsp. Figs. 1-3 Shell large, thin, ovate, inequilateral; hinge line rather short; left valve much more inflated than right; ornamented with 24 to 25 ribs. Right valve of cotype low, ornamented with 25 flat ribs, which are medially shallowly incised over the middle part of the disk and separated by shallow interspaces which are a little narrower than the ribs. The concentric lamellae are mod- erately coarse. Right ear shallowly insinuated and marked with 5 rather strong radials, those near the hinge line being the stronger; left ear with 11 moderately strong radials. Left valve of cotype with 25 ribs, narrower than interspaces and medially suleated over the middle part of the disk and nearly _ flat ventrally. Both ears with about 7 radials. Dimensions of cotypes (U.S.N.M. no. 496224): Right valve, length 86 mm; height 80 mm; convexity 11 mm; length of hinge line 44 mm. Left valve, length 95 mm; height 88 mm; convexity 24 mm; length of hinge line 00 mm. Type locality: Station 11999, from bed exposed at beach to 10 feet above in right bank of Chowan River, three-fourths of a mile below Mount Gould Landing, Bertie County, North Carolina. 3 CooxE, C. W. Geology of the Coastal Plain of South Carolina. U. 8S. Geol. Survey Bull. 867: 126. 1936. 1 Published by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. Re- ceived December 2, 1936. 2 MANSFIELD, W. C. Stratigraphic significance of Miocene, Pliocene, and Pleistocene Pectinidae in the southeastern United States. Jour. Paleontology 10 (3): 175, strati- graphic position 17, 1936. Jan. 15, 1937 MANSFIELD: PECTEN Figs. 1-3.—Pecten (Chlamys) eboreus berttensis Mansfield. n. subsp. Cotypes. 1, right valve. 2, 3, left valve. Slightly reduced. 11 12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 1 The new subspecies intergrades with Pecten eboreus eboreus Conrad and P. eboreus darlingtonensis Dall, but it is more closely related to the former than to the latter. The left valve of the new subspecies is more inflated than the same valve of either of the above subspecies, and it is marked with in- cised ribs which neither one possesses. Other occurrence in North Carolina: Station 12035 (lower bed), station 13814 (upper bed), Colerain Landing, Bertie County; station 1/1230, Tar Ferry, Wiccacon Creek, Hertford County; station 13798, upper bed at Beaver Dam Creek, Martin County; station 12004, Poplar Landing, Mar- tin County. The beds in which the new subspecies occurs are placed in the uppermost Miocene of North Carolina and are believed to have been deposited at a little later time than the Suffolk beds in Vir- ginia at the north and about the same time as the Dupoin mar! at the south. ZOOLOGY.—WNotes on Chinese spiders of the families Salticidae and Thomisidae.| IRvinc Fox. (Communicated by C. F. W. MUESEBECK. ) The following notes and descriptions of new species represent continuation of a report on several collections of Chinese spiders in the possession of the United States National Museum. These spiders were collected chiefly by Dr. D. C. Graham in Szechwan Province, China, during the years 1923 to 1930. Several others taken by Mr. N. Gist Gee at Soochow, Kiangsu Province, are also considered in this paper. Family SALTICIDAE Myrmarachne grahami, n. sp. Figs. 1, 2 Female.—Total length, 7.13 mm. Chelicerae, .72 mm long. Carapace, cephalic part, 1.39 mm long, 1.29 mm wide, thoracic part, 1.29 mm long, 1.09 mm wide. Pedicel, .59 mm long. Abdomen, 3.97 mm long, 1.98 mm wide. Dorsum of the carapace dark brown, sides with a blackish tinge. The furrow that separates the two parts bears white wedge-shaped marks. Chelicerae brown, much lighter than the carapace. Endites orange with fringes of dark hair anteriorly, labium dark basally, whitish distally. Sternum dark brown contrasting strongly with the coxae which are yellowish. Legs orange; upper portion of the femora, the patellae, and tibiae of legs I with distinet dark longitudinal bands at the lateral surfaces; legs II having much less distinct lateral bands; legs III without lateral bands but with the coxae and femora darker at their distal ends. Dorsum of the abdomen blackish with numerous golden hairs, basally with an indistinct transverse stripe. At the basal third clear transverse light bands, one on each side, extend laterad from the dorsum, broaden at the sides and finally are lost in the light 1 Received April 11, 1936. JAN. 15, 1937 FOX: CHINESE SPIDERS 13 venter. The venter bears a broad dark longitudinal band extending from the epigastric furrow to the spinnerets. First row of eyes recurved, the eyes more or less contiguous, the median twice as large as the lateral. Ocular quadrangle wider than long (31/28), occupying about one-third the total length of the carapace. The eyes of the second row very small, closer to the anterior laterals than to the posterior laterals. Upper margin of the chelicerae armed with six teeth of which five are robust while the basal is weak, lower margin armed with seven teeth of which the basal five are close together while the other two are separated. First pair of legs with 2-2-2-2 spines on the tibiae below, and 2-2 on the metatarsi below. Second pair of legs with 2-2-2 spines on the tibiae below and 2-2 spines on the metatarsi below. The third and fourth pairs are with- out spines. Legs, I, 4.18 mm; II, 2.96 mm; III, 3.52 mm; IV, 5.16 mm. For the structure of the epigynum see Fig. 2. Type Locality China: female holotype from Suifu, Szechwan, Province 1000 ft., April 25, 1930 (D. C. Graham). Female paratype from Soochow, Kiangsu, Province (N. Gist Gee). Type: U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1168. This spider is related to M. japonica (Karsch) and resembles it in general coloration. It differs from that species, however, in the structure of the epigynum. Myrmarchne gisti, n. sp. Figs. 4, 9, 12, 14 Female.—Total length, 8.02 mm. Chelicerae, .8 mm long. Carapace, cephalic part, 1.20 mm long, 1.16 mm wide, thoracic part, 1.36 mm long, .92 mm wide. Pedicel, 1.12 mm long. Abdomen, 3.86 mm long. 2.57 mm wide. Dorsum of the carapace dark and reddish brown, the cephalic part much darker than the thoracic and contrasting strongly with it. In the furrow that separates the two parts is found a wedge shaped mark on each side. Chelicerae concolorous with the thoracic part being reddish brown. Palpi with the basal joints brown while the distal have a bluish tinge and are dis- tinctly iridescent. Labium and endites brown, sternum somewhat darker. Legs I clear whitish yellow above and below, with distinct bands on the prolateral surfaces of the basal portion of the femora, the patellae, tibiae, and metatarsi. Legs II the same as I except that the lateral bands are less distinct. Legs III with the coxae, trochanters, and femora dark brown above and below, the other joints concolorous with legs I and II except for a dark spot at the junction of the patella and tibia above. Legs IV with the coxae and trochanters clear whitish yellow above and below but darker at the sides; the femora, distal portions of the patellae, tibiae, and metatarsi brown. Basal third of the abdomen whitish or buff, giving off posteriorly a more or less triangular mark which is bifurcate at the broad side. Middle third of the abdomen dark brown, outlined anteriorly by the whitish basal third and posteriorly by a broad buff portion which is as wide as the dorsum at that place (Fig. 4). Distal portion of the abdomen dark brown, concolorous with the middle third. Venter of the abdomen with a wide median dark band that begins at a point farther than usual below the epigastric furrow and extends to the spinnerets. The space between the epigastric furrow and the beginning of the median band is clear white in color. First row of eyes slightly recurved, the median eyes contiguous and more than twice as large as the lateral. Ocular quadrangle wider than long (32/25), wider behind than in front (32/29), and occupying about one-third the total length of the cephalothorax. Eyes of the second row very small, closer 14. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 1 to the anterior lateral than to the posterior lateral. Upper margins of the chelicerae armed with seven well separated teeth of which the basal three are diminutive while the distal four are robust; the animal’s left chelicera armed with eight teeth on the lower margin of which the basal five are close together, animal’s right chelicera armed with seven teeth. Legs, I, 4.08 mm; IT, 3.32 mm; IT], 3.68 mm; IV, 5.60 mm. First pair of legs with 2-2-2-2 spines on the tibiae below, and 2-2 on the metatarsi below. Second pair of legs with 2-2-2 spines on the tibiae below, and 2-2 spines on the metatarsi below. The third and fourth pairs are without spines. For the structure of the epigynum see Fig. 14. Male.—Total length, 8.71 mm. Chelicerae, 2.02 mm long, Carapace, cephalic part, 1.70 mm long, 1.50 mm wide, thoracic part, 1.82 mm long, 1.14 mm wide. Pedicel, .35 mm long. Abdomen, 3.07 mm long, 1.06 mm wide. Carapace light brown above, the cephalic part somewhat darker than the thoracic, the eyes on dark spots. Sides lighter, bearing at the furrow that separates the two parts a wedge-shaped mark consisting of white hairs. Chelicerae light brown, concolorous with the thoracic part of the carapace. Sternum and endites light brown, the labium darker, these parts contrasting | strongly with the coxae and trochanters of the anterior pairs of legs which are almost white. Dorsum of the abdomen like the female in its coloration having a broad buff portion distally and a dark brown middle third, the de- sign at the basal third not so distinct as in the female (Fig. 9). Abdomen constricted anteriorly and bearing light bands which run laterad in the margin of the constriction. Venter lightest at the epigastric furrow, there- after darkening posteriorly, bearing evidences of a median longitudinal dark band. First row of eyes recurved, the anterior median closer to each other than to the anterior lateral and about twice the size of the latter. Eyes of the second row very small, closer to the anterior lateral than to the posterior lateral being removed from the former by a distance about five-sevenths as large as that which separates them from the latter. Ocular quadrangle wider than long (30/24), occupying more than one-third the total length of the cephalothorax, about as wide in front as behind. Chelicerae roughly wedge shaped, without a distinct lower margin, upper margin armed with ten teeth, of which the most distal points foward while the others are directed inward. For further details regarding the arrangement of the teeth see Fig. 12. The first pair of legs lacking, the second bears Ir-1r spines on the tibiae below. Legs, II, 3.27 mm; III, 4.10 mm; IV, 5.86 mm. The palpal organ is characteristic of the genus, and presents little or no distinguishing features. Type Locality.—China: female holotype and male allotype from Soochow, Kiangsu Province (N. Gist Gee). Type: U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1164. The unique design on the dorsum of the abdomen of this spider will serve to distinguish it from other oriental species of the genus. Fig. 1—Myrmarachne grahami, n. sp., female, dorsal view. Fig. 2—Myrmarachne grahami, n. sp., epigynum. Fig. 3.—Xysticus ephippiatus Simon, epigynum. Fig. 4.—Myrmarachne gisti, n. sp., female, dorsal view. Fig. 5.—Xysticus sicus, n. sp., epigynum. Fig. 6—Myrmarachne vehemens, n. sp., male, dorsal view. Fig. 7.— Plexippus optabilis, n. sp.,epigynum. Fig. 8.—Thomisus transversus, 0. sp., epigynum. Fig. 9.—Myrmarachne gisti, n. sp., male, dorsal view. Fig. 10.—Myrmarachne vehemens, n. sp., male, right chelicera. Fig. 11.—Xysticus croceus, n. sp., epigynum. Fig. 12—Myrmarachne gisti, n. sp., male, left chelicera. Fig. 13.—Rhene candida, n.sp., male palpus. Fig. 14.—Myrmarachne gisti, n. sp., epigynum. Fig. 15.—Rhene tpis, nN. sp., male palpus. JAN. 15, 1937 FOX: CHINESE SPIDERS 15 . ie \ Wipe 4“ Yara yaya LE YL SSNNV ISS /7 SLE Ya Mkt St fd SII, 2% 7, ~ SPS 13 For explanation of Figs. 1-15, see bottom of opposite page. 16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 1 Myrmarachne vehemens, n. sp. Figs. 6, 10 Male.—Total length, 7.62 mm. Chelicerae, 2.48 mm long. Carapace, cephalic part, 1.54 mm long, 1.63 mm wide, thoracic part, 1.19 mm long, 1.45 mm wide. Pedicel, .13 mm long. Abdomen, 2.90 mm long, 1.45 mm wide. Carapace uniform dark brown above, the sides and the suture separating the two parts somewhat lighter. Eyes on dark spots, the spaces between those of the anterior row and the clypeus densely clothed with white hairs. Cheli- cerae lighter, of a reddish-brown hue, oblong and parallel extending directly forward. Sternum, coxae, and endites light brown, labium somewhat darker. Legs light brown above, the tibiae of the first and last pairs darker than the other joints. Abdomen dark brown above and at the sides, anteriorly with a well defined constriction whose margins are much lighter than the dorsum and the sides. Venter with a broad longitudinal dark band extending from the epigastric furrow to the spinnerets. First row of eyes recurved, the anterior lateral separated from the anterior median, which are subcontiguous, by about three-fourths their diameter and much smaller than the latter (5/8). Eyes of the second row very small, closer to the anterior lateral than to the posterior lateral being removed from the former by a distance about five-eighths as large as that which separates them from the latter. Ocular quadrangle wider than long (82/27), somewhat wider behind than in front (32/30), occupying more than one-third the total length of the carapace. Upper cheliceral margin armed with eight robust teeth, lower margin armed with nine smaller teeth (Fig. 10). The legs are without spines below. Legs, I, 5.24 mm; II, 3.66 mm; III, 4.40 mm; IV, 6.42 mm. Palpus characteristic of the genus presenting no important distinguishing features; in general it is similar to that of M. lugubris (Kulez.). Type Locality —China: male holotype from Soochow, Kiangsu Province. (N. Gist Gee). Type: U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1165. This species is allied to M. patellata Strand, but differs from it in the dental armature and in lacking spines on the first tibiae below. MyYRMARACHNE INNERMICHELIS Bosenberg and Strand Myrmarachne innermichelits Bosenberg and Strand. Abh. Senckenb. Ges. 30: 329 pl. 9, fig. 128, pl. 14, fig. 382, 1906. Record.—China: Kiangsu Province, Soochow, male (N. Gist Gee). MYRMARACHNE 7-DENTATA STRAND Myrmarachne maxillosa var. 7-dentata Strand. Zoologischer Anzeiger 31: 568, 1907. Record.—China: Szechwan Province, Suifu, 1000 ft. October, 1930, male (D. C. Graham). Plexippus optabilis, n. sp. Fig. 7 Female.—Total length, 7.32 mm. Carapace, 3.27 mm long, 2.38 mm wide. Abdomen, 3.76 mm long, 2.47 mm wide. Dorsum of the carapace blackish for about a third of the length where the black region ends in an inverse triangle which provides an apex for a much lighter portion at the middle third. In this lighter portion are indications of a longitudinal line which gives off several branches on each side. The basal third of the carapace dark brown, expanding laterad along the sides giving them a brownish color. Clypeus JAN. 15, 1937 FOX: CHINESE SPIDERS 17 light with numerous long hairs. Chelicerae, sternum, and endites light brown, labium darker; coxae concolorous with the sternum but bearing dark markings at the sides. Legs orange, more or less annulate at the distal ends of the femora, patellae, and tibiae above; femora of the third and fourth pairs of legs with broad dark longitudinal bands on the prolateral surfaces. Dorsum of the abdomen with a median light band having anteriorly a longi- tudinal dark line, and breaking posteriorly into four large spots. Sides of the abdomen black and white, the white forming three more or less distinct stripes. Venter light with a distinct longitudinal dark band which is herring- bone in pattern posteriorly. First row of eyes slightly recurved, the medians closer to each other than to the laterals and about twice their size. Eyes of the second row midway between the anterior lateral and posterior lateral. Ocular quadrangle wider than long (43/32), about twice as wide before as behind, occupying more than one-third the total length of the carapace. Posterior lateral eyes about as large as the anterior lateral. Clypeus narrow, one-third the diameter of an anterior lateral eye. Each chelicera armed with a robust black tooth on the lower margin. Tibiae I and II with 2-2-2 spines below, 1-1 on the prolateral surfaces, none above, metatarsi I and II with 2-2 spines below, none elsewhere; tibiae III and IV with 1-2 spines below, 2-2-2 above, metatarsi III and IV with 2-2 spines below, 2-2 above and 1 apical spine on each lateral surface. Legs, I, 5.00 mm; IT, 4.24 mm; III, 5.56 mm; IV, 5.44 mm. For the structure of the epigynum see Fig. 7. Type locality.—China: female holotype from Suifu, Szechwan Province, 1000 ft., October, 1930 (D. C. Graham). Type: U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1166. This species is referred to Plexippus because of its resemblance to P. setipes Karsch in general character. It differs from that species in the struc- ture of the epigynum which is wider than long. PLEXIPPUS CRASSIPES Karsch Plexippus crassipes Karsch. Berliner Entom. Zeitschrift. 25:38. 1881. Record.—China: Szechwan Province, Gongoshien, August 1, 1934, female (D. C. Graham). PLEXIPPUS SETIPES Karsch Plexippus setipes Karsch. Verh. Ver. Rheinl. 36:89. 1879. Record.—China: Kiangsu Province, Soochow, 6 females (N. Gist Gee). PLEXIPPUS PAYKULLI (Audouin) Attus paykulls Audouin in Savigny, descr. Egypte 22: 172. 1827. Hyllus mimus Chamberlin. Proce. United States Nat. Mus. 63: 33, pl. 7, fig. 50, 1924. Records.—China: Szechwan Province, Suifu, 1000, ft., June 1925, female; Kiating, June, 1924, female (D. C. Graham). Kiangsu Province, Soochow, male (N. Gist Gee). TELAMONIA BIFURCILINEA Bésenberg and Strand Telamonia bifurcilinea Bésenberg and Strand. Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges, 303331 ple 9) fic. 153) pl. 13; fie. 357, 1906: Record.—China: Szechwan Province, Chungking, 2000 ft., May 6, 1930, female (D. C. Graham). 18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 1 EVARCHA ALBARIA (L. Koch) Hasarius albarius L. Koch. Verh. Zool-Bot. Ges. Wien 27: 780 pl. 16, fig. 39, 1877. Record.—China: Szechwan Province, South of Suifu, March 25, 1930, male (D. C. Graham). Rhene ipis, n. sp. Fig. 15 Male.—Total length, 5.74 mm. Carapace, 2.38 mm long, 2.87 mm at the widest place. Abdomen, 3.37 mm long. 2.47 mm wide. Dorsum of the cara- pace with a median dark brown portion which is as wide as the first row of eyes anteriorly, and which tapers thereafter to the third eye row where it ‘expands again so that it has almost its anterior width at the caudal end of the carapace. The regions about the posterior eyes are reddish. Surrounding all the eyes but present most thickly at the anterior row are numerous white hairs. Sides of the carapace dark brown with white hairs. Clypeus thickly covered with white hairs. Sternum, basal portion of the endites, and labium dark brown, distal portion of the labium and endites light brown. Legs more or less concolorous with the sternum below, the coxae are somewhat lighter. First pair of legs much heavier and darker than the others. Femora of the posterior legs contrasting strongly with the other joints which are lighter. Abdomen light brown above, with three pairs of large dark pits, posteriorly are indications of lateral white hairs. Sides of the abdomen with white hairs, more concentrated anteriorly. Venter light brown, sparsely clothed with white hairs. First row of eyes recurved, the medians closer to each other than to the laterals and more than twice their size. Eyes of the second row small, very close to the anterior lateral eyes being removed by about a diameter of the latter. Third row of eyes slightly smaller than the width of the carapace at that place, the eyes somewhat larger than the anterior lateral. Ocular quad- rangle wider than long (56/42), much narrower in front than behind (40/56), occupying about four-fifths of the entire length of the cephalothorax. Cly- peus equal in height to about one-half the diameter of an anterior lateral eye. Chelicerae with a single dark robust tooth on the lower margins. An- terior tibiae and metatarsi with 2-2 spines below. Legs, I, 6.60 mm; II, 3.92 mm; III, 4.00 mm; IV, 4.56 mm. The tibia of the palpus bears a small black apophysis distally. The bulb itself is provided with two processes anteriorly which are arranged so as to ue pincer-like. For further details regarding the structure of the palpus see 12, 15, Type locality.—China: male holotype from between Kiating and Yachow, Szechwan Province, July 29, 1929; male paratype from Suifu, Szechwan Province, September, 1929; two male paratypes from Mupin, Szechwan peewince, 3500 ft., July, 1929 (D. C. Graham). Type: U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 67. This species is allied to R. atrata (Karsch), but differs from that species in lacking a distinct and conspicuous design on the dorsum of the abdomen. Rhene candida, n. sp. Fig. 13 Male.—Total length, 5.44 mm. Carapace, 2.67 mm long, 2.67 mm wide. Abdomen 2.97 mm long, 2.28 mm wide. The coloration of the carapace is similar to that of the previous species, R. 7pis, but the central portion is not JAN. 15, 1937 FOX: CHINESE SPIDERS 19 so clearly demarcated from the lateral. In general the dorsum bears much fewer hairs, and in the alcoholic specimen these are not white. Sides of the carapace with distinct marginal stripes of white hairs. Each chelicera bears at its basal third a broad transverse band of white hairs. Sternum, coxae, labium and endites dark brown, labium with the distal portion lighter. The first pair of legs much darker and heavier than the others which are light brown below. The tarsi lighter, with black spots at the basal and distal ends. Dorsum of the abdomen light brown with indications of characteristic dark pits. The caudal end of the abdomen bears a pair of white bars on each lat- eral surface. Venter light brown with a white pubescence. First row of eyes recurved, the medians closer to each other than to the laterals and about twice their size. Eyes of the second row very small, re- moved from the anterior lateral eyes by a distance greater than the diameter of the latter (6/5). Third row of eyes as wide as the carapace at that place, the eyes the same size as the anterior lateral. Ocular quadrangle wider than long (55/42), much narrower in front than behind (87/55), occupying about two-thirds the total length of the cephalothorax. Clypeus equal in height to three-fifths the diameter of an anterior lateral eye. Chelicerae with a single dark robust tooth on the lower margins. Tibiae and metatarsi I with 2-2 spines below. Legs, I, 5.20 mm; II, 3.80 mm; III, 3.68 mm; IV, 4.32 mm. The bulb of the palpus is similar to that of R. cpzs, but differs in the pos- session of a single, poorly defined process anteriorly rather than two processes. The tibial apophysis is pronounced and hook-like. For further details re- garding the palpus see Fig. 13. Type Locality.—China: male holotype from Suifu, Szechwan Province. September, 1929, (D. C. Graham). Type: U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1168. This species is readily identifiable by the broad, transverse bands of white hairs on the chelicerae. Family THOMISIDAE Xysticus croceus, n. sp. Bie. Xysticus ephippratus Bésenberg and Strand. Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Gesell. 30: 261, pl. 10, fig. 161, 1906 (not Xysticus ephippiatus Simon). Female.—Total length, 7.92 mm. Carapace, 3.86 mm long, 3.17 mm wide. Sternum, 1.56 mm long, 1.16 mm wide. Abdomen, 4.65 mm long, 4.55 mm wide. Carapace with a median longitudinal light band about one-third its width which encloses two reddish brown parallel lines that originate be- tween the posterior median eyes and extend to the middle of the cephalo- thorax. Sides of the carapace reddish brown, interrupted by a light sub- marginal stripe on each side. Sternum yellow with reddish maculations, labium and endites concolorous with the sternum, maculations on the coxae more dense except for clear basal and median portions. Femora of the an- terior legs heavily punctate with reddish brown, those of the posterior legs much lighter, with large red spots on the preaxial surfaces; nearly all the joints with reddish brown spots at their distal ends. Each leg bears above a more or less distinct light stripe extending its length. The abdomen, which is in poor condition, is reddish brown with thin indistinct stripes at the edges, the venter and sides are lighter. Kye rows strongly recurved, the first narrower than the second (40/45). Ratio of eyes: ALE:AME:PLE:PME=5.5:3:4:3. Anterior median eyes separated by more than three times their diameter, twice their diameter 20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, No. 1 from the laterals. Posterior median eyes removed from each other and from the posterior lateral eyes by more than three diameters. Median ocular area slightly wider than long (17/16), as wide in front as behind. Clypeus about two and one-half times the diameter of an anterior median eye. Legs heavily spined; tibiae I with 2—1p—2—2—2—1p—2-2-2 spines of vari- ous sizes below; tibiae II with six pairs of spines below; metatarsi I and II with 2—2—1r—2-—2-2 spines below. Legs, I, 9, 12 mm; II, 9.12 mm; III, 5.88 mm; IV, 6.36 mm. Epigynum broader than long, transverse, the sides heavily chitinized. There is no chitinized portion extending caudad almost to the epigastric furrow. Type locality —China: Female holotype from Suifu, Szechwan province, 1922 (D. C. Graham). Type: U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1169. This species was regarded as X. ephippiatus Simon by Bésenberg and Strand, the differences in the epigyna and spinal armature being explained on the basis of injury and technique of handling. The discovery of a Chinese spider that corresponds closely with the description of Simon’s species to- gether with another that appears to be identical with that of Bosenberg and Strand makes it apparent that two species are involved. These two spiders, X. croceus, new species, and X. ephippiatus Simon differ greatly in the struc- ture of the epigyna, and are readily distinguished by these characters alone. Below X. ephippiatus Simon is redescribed, and details regarding the two epi- gyna are shown in Figs. 3 and 11. XYSTICUS EPHIPPIATUS Simon Fig. 3 Xysticus ephippratus Simon. Ann. Soc. Ent. France 10 (Ser. 5): 107, pl. 3, fig. 6, 1880. Female.—Total length, 9.40 mm. Carapace, 3.46 mm long, 3.46 mm wide. Sternum 1.36 mm long, 1.16 mm wide. Abdomen, 6.14 mm long, 6.44 wide. Carapace reddish with the characteristic median light band bearing three reddish streaks that originate between the posterior median eyes and extend to the thoracic groove. From the groove a reddish bar extends obliquely cephaled on each side. Sides of the carapace reddish with lighter submarginal stripes and darker marginal ones. Clypeus and chelicerae with robust black hairs of various size projecting forward. Sternum reddish brown, the labium, endites, and coxae much lighter being yellowish. Legs concolorous with the sternum, the posterior pairs lighter than the anterior, all the legs lighter below than above. Abdomen dark reddish brown above, venter somewhat lighter. Eye rows recurved, the first narrower than the second (39/46). Ratio of the eyes ALE: AME:PLE:PME=6:3:4:3. Anterior median eyes removed from each other by more than three and one-half diameters, from the anterior lateral by two diameters. Eyes of the second row equidistant, sep- arated by less than four times the diameter of a posterior median eye. Median ocular quadrangle wider than long (17/15), as wide in front as be- hind. Clypeus equal in height to about three times the diameter of an anterior median eye. JAN. 15, 1937 FOX: CHINESE SPIDERS 21 Legs heavily spined with the spinal armature irregular. The animal’s right tibia I with 2-2—1p—2-—2-2, right metatarsus I with 1p—2—2-—1p—2-2-2 spines below, the animals left tibia I with 2—2—1p—2—2—2-2, left metatarsus I with 1p—2—2—2—2-2 spines below. Tibiae II with 2—2—2-—2-2 spines below, right metatarsus II with 2—2—2—2—2-2, left metatarsus II with 1p—2—2-1p-— 2—2-—2 spines below. Legs, I, 9.88 mm; II, 9.88 mm; III, 5.96 mm; IV, 6.20 mm. Epigynum oval, with a chitinous extension extending caudad about half the distance to the epigastric furrow. For further details regarding the epi- gynum see Fig. 3. Record.—China: Szechwan Province, Yao- Gi, Mupin, 8000 ft., July 14, 1929, female (D. C. Graham). Xysticus sicus, n. sp. Fig. 5 Female.—Total length, 7.62 mm. Carapace, 2.67 mm long, 2.77 mm wide, 1.62 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 5.04 mm long, 4.95 mm wide. Carapace with a broad median whitish band beginning at the anterior median eyes, expanding to include the lateral eyes, narrowing behind them, and then ex- panding again making the anterior portion shield-like. Posteriorly the band gives off wings so that the caudal border of the carapace is provided with a broad submarginal stripe; at the junction of each lateral wing with the cen- tral band is a large black spot above and below. The cephalic portion of the band with a complex design consisting of a reddish lanceolate of dagger- shaped mark on a brownish shield-shaped background. Sides of the cara- pace reddish with white spots. Clypeus brown below the lateral eyes, but whitish below the median. Chelicerae tan with whitish spots basally, much lighter distally. Labium and endites reddish brown lighter at the centers. Sternum whitish, maculate with red. Legs white and reddish, with the red- dish predominating, distal portion of the femora with noticeable black spots above. Abdomen whitish, densely provided with red spots and markings. First row of eyes recurved, the median much closer to the lateral than to each other, about half as large as the lateral. The posterior row recurved, the median eyes nearer to each other than to the laterals, and about two- thirds as large. Anterior and posterior eyes on well developed tubercles. Median ocular quadrangle broader than long (15/12), slightly wider in front than behind, the eyes subequal. Clypeus much higher than the di- ameter of an anterior lateral eye (8/5). Legs spinose, although there are absences due to injury the arrangement seems to be as follows: the first two tibiae armed below with five pairs of robust spines, the last two with three pairs of weak ones, the first two meta- tarsi with five pairs beneath, the last two with two pairs of spines of which one pair is apical. Legs I, 8. 71 mma PiGatiemmar bile 5: SSamm: PV 715mm: For the structure of the epigynum see Fig. 5. Type locality —China: female holotype from Mupin, Szechwan Province, 3900 ft., July, 1929. Type: U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1170. This species is closely allied to Xysticus lateralis atrimaculatus Bosenberg and Strand, but differs from that species in having the epigynum provided with a pair of heavily chitinized orifices that almost completely fill the basal half of the atrium. 22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 1 XYSTICUS TUNICATUS Boésenberg and Strand Xysticus tunicatus Bésenberg and Strand. Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges. 30: 263, pl. 10, fig. 176, 1906. Record.—China: Szechwan Province, Summer, 1930, 3 females (D. C. Graham). XYSTICUS SAGANUS Bésenberg and Strand Xysticus saganus Bésenberg and Strand. Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges. 30: 261 pl. 10, fig. 155, 1906. Record.—China: Szechwan Province, between Kiating and Yachow, 1200 ft. July 29, 1929, male (D. C. Graham). Thomisus transversus, n. sp. Fig. 8 Female.—Total length, 8.91 mm. Carapace, 3.86 mm at the widest place, 2.28 mm wide in front, 3.56 mm long. Abdomen, 6.04 mm long, 10.00 mm wide. Carapace reddish with a longitudinal median white band which di- verges anteriorly giving off a thin stripe on each side of which is a semi- circular mark. Sides of the carapace with indications of lighter stripes. Sternum, labium and endites yellowish brown. Legs concolorous with the sternum except for the tibiae of the posterior pairs which are dark brown contrasting strongly with the other joints. Abdomen yellowish white, darker at the anterior edges, with a dark median stripe. The five characteristic spots are present, one at the anterior edge of the dark median stripe and two on each side. Venter somewhat darker than the dorsum, bearing two longi- tudinal rows of three spots in the space between the epigastric furrow and the spinnerets. First row of eyes recurved, narrower than the second row, which is also recurved, in the ratio of 5:6. Anterior median eyes two-thirds as large as the anterior lateral, and removed from each other by a distance eleven- fifteenths as great as that which separates them from the anterior lateral. Posterior median eyes two-thirds as large as the posterior lateral, and re- moved from each other by a distance greater than that which separates them from the posterior lateral (24/15). Median ocular quadrangle wider than long (28/16), narrower in front than behind (17/28). Clypeus slightly less in height than the length of the median ocular quadrangle (13/16). Legs sparsely spinose; tibia I with 1p—1p—1p—2-1p spines below, Tibiae II with 1p—2 spines below. Legs, I, 10.74 mm; II, 10.64 mm; III, 6.37 mm, IV, lacking. Epigynum small, resembling that of T. onwstoides Bésenberg and Strand, but differing in the possession of a narrower septum which arises at the caudal border rather than the anterior. For further details regarding the epigynum see Fig. 8. Type locality.—China: female holotype from Shin kai Shi, Szechwan province, 4000 ft., July 6, 1984 (D. C. Graham). U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1171 THOMISUS ONUSTOIDES Bésenberg and Strand Thomisus onustoides Bésenberg and Strand Abh. Senckenb. Naturf. Ges. 30: 251, pl. 10, fig. 166, 1906. Record.—China: Szechwan Province, between Suifu and Kiating, June 2, 1930, male (D. C. Graham). JAN. 15, 1937 TREADWELL: POLYCHAETOUS ANNELIDS 23 MISUMENA TRICUSPIDATA (Fab.) Aranea tricuspidata Fabricius. Systema entomologia, p. 433, 1775. Records.—China: Szechwan Province, Suifu, 1000 ft. May 25, 1930, 2 females; October, 1930, one male; Chungking, 2000 ft., May 6, 1930, 2 females (D. C. Graham). ZOOLOGY.—Polychaetous annelids collected by Captain Robert A. Bartlett in Greenland, Fox Basin, and Labrador.’ A. L. TREAD- WELL, Vassar College. (Communicated by Watpo L. SCHMITT.) This report is based on the polychaetous annelids collected by Captain Robert A. Bartlett on the east and west coasts of Green- land, Fox Basin, and the coast of Labrador. It has earlier been noted (Moore 1902) that the Greenland polychaets have been thor- oughly studied by European investigators and, as was to be ex- pected, few new species appear in the present collection. Many species of the regions visited occur on both the east and west shores of the Atlantic, as recorded in the elaborate monographs on the British Annelids by Wm. C. McIntosh. For most of the species listed below I have attempted to give only the references to the original description and to McIntosh’s account. The collection com- prises sixteen families, twenty-five genera, and twenty-nine species, of which four, Harmothoe levis, Oophylax minuta, Nereis (Ceranto- nereis) bartlettt and Pista groenlandica are new to science. Because of the presence of numerous setae in the stomach of a bearded seal, EHrignathus barbatus, from Fox Basin a portion of the contents was submitted to me for examination. This material contained a good deal of what in land mammals we would call ‘“‘hair balls,’’ composed in this case chiefly of agglomerated setae. Of these the larger number are identical with the setae of Hunoe nodosa and undoubtedly belong to that species. There are also a few large black setae characteristic of the Aphroditacea, but I am uncertain of the species. Half of a Nerezs jaw, badly corroded, was also noted in the material. I do not know that worms in the con- siderable quantities indicated by this sample have ever been re- ported as the food of marine animals before. The saved contents of the stomach of this seal totalled a full three-quarters of a gallon of similarly matted and setae-filled material, intermingled with one or two dozen gasteropod mollusk feet and operculae, several large shrimp, Sclerocrangon boreas, and the remains of perhaps six holo- thurians, Cucumaria frondosa, two to three inches long. 1 Received October 16, 1936. 24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 1 e_ emidde, Figs. 1-5.—Harmothoe levis. 1,prostomium X28. 2, parapodium X35. 3, elytron X12. 4, seta X250. 5, seta 250. Figs. 6-7.—Oophylax minuta. 6, anterior end X280. 7, posterior end X280. Figs. 8-13.—Nereis (Ceratonereis) bartletti. 8, anterior end X10. 9, anterior parapodium X100. 10, median parapodium X100. 11, heterogomph neuroseta 500. 12, posterior notoseta X500. 13, posterior falcigerous neuroseta 500. Figs. 14-16.—Pista groenlandica. 14, ventral view anterior end X7.5. 15, lateral view anterior end X7.5. 16, uncinus X250. JAN. 15, 1937 TREADWELL: POLYCHAETOUS ANNELIDS 25 Family AMPHINOMIDAE SPINTHER Johnston SPINTHER CITRINUS (Stimpson). Cryptonota citrina Stimpson 1854. p. 36. Spinther citrinus Verrill 1873-74, p. 502. A rare species. Stimpson’s species came from Grand Manan, Verrill’s from the Gulf of Maine, and the U. 8. National Museum has some taken in the Bay of Fundy. The Bartlett specimen was taken at Fox Basin. Family KUPHROSYNIDAE EUPHROSYNE Savigny EUPHROSYNE BOREALIS Oersted Euphrosyne borealis Oersted 1843, p. 18, pl. 2, figs. 23-27. A fairly common species in the region covered by the collections. It was recorded by Wesenberg-Lund (1934, p. 24) as a new record for East Green- land. In the Bartlett collection it was taken at E. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75°40’N., 78°50’W., Aug. 1935. Family POLYNOIDAE GaTTYANA McIntosh (Nychia Malmgren name preoc.) GATTYANA CIRROSA (Pallas) Aphrodita cirrosa Pallas 1766, p. 95, pl. 8, figs. 3-6 (teste McIntosh). Nychia cirrosa Malmgren 1865, p. 58, fig. 1. Gattyana cirrosa McIntosh 1900, pp. 285-291, pl. 25, fig. 3; pl. 27, fig. 5; pl. 31, fig. 1; pl. 37, figs. 16-19; pl. 42, fig. 27. Collected 8. of Cape Martineau, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 9, 1933; Fox Basin (N & B) 1933; E. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 41’N., 78° 20’W.., Aug. 3, 1935; Murchison Sd., N. Greenland, Aug. 20, 1926. EVARNELLA Chamberlin (Evarne Malmgren name preoc.) EVARNELLA IMPAR (Johnston) Polynoe impar Johnston 1839, p. 463, pl. 22, figs. 3-9 (teste McIntosh). Evarne impar McIntosh 1900, pp. 353-358; pl. 27, fig. 13; pl. 30. fig. 7; pl. 32, fig. 18; pl. 39, figs. 20-22. Collected E. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’N., 78° 50’W., Aug. 3 and 4, 1935; 4 mi. east of Cape Dorchester, Fox Channel, Aug. 4, 1927; 3 mi. 8. from Salisbury Id., Hudson Strait (N & B)? July 25, 1933; Duckett Cove, Hurd Channel, Aug. 11, 1933; between Hurd Channel and Melville Peninsula, Aug. 7, 1933; S. of Cape Martineau, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 9, 1933; 66° 30’N., 80°W., Aug. 10, 1927. 2 Norcross-Bartlett Expedition, 1933. 26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, No. 1 HarMOTHOE Kinberg HARMOTHOE IMBRICATA (Linnaeus) A phrodita imbricata Linnaeus 1766, p. 1084 (teste McIntosh). Harmothoe imbricata Malmgren 1865, p. 66, pl. 9, fig. 8; McIntosh 1900, pp. 314-327, text figs. 25-30; pl. 25, fig. 6; pl. 30, fig. 1; pl. 32, fig. 10; pl. 38, figs. 14-16; pl. 26a, figs. 1, 3-8, 12. A very widely distributed species showing a considerable degree of vari- ability. Collected at Bight, Shannon Id., N.E. Greenland, July 29, 1930; N. Omenolu, North Star Bay, N. Greenland, July 28, 1932; Cape Alexander, Smith Sound, N. Greenland, Aug. 26, 1932; Cape York, N. Greenland, in dredge ‘‘between glacier and bill of Cape,” 76° 50’N., July 21, 1926; Cape York, N. Greenland, 76° 0’N., July 21, 1926; Parker Snow Bay, N. Green- . land, July 17, 1935; S. part of Fox Basin, 66° 43’N., 80° 07’W., Aug. 27, 1927; 3 mi. from Southampton Id., Hudson Strait, July 31, 1933; Sturges Bourne Strait, W. end of Hurd Channel, Melville Peninsula (N & B), Aug. 18, 19383; Duckett’s Cove, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 11, 1933; N.E. end of Melville Peninsula, entrance to Fury and Hecla Straits, Aug. 5, 1933 (N & B); N.E. of Cape Dorchester, Fox Channel, Aug. 4, 1927; between Hurd Channel and Melville Peninsula, Aug. 7, 1933; E. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’N., 78° 50’ and 45’W., Aug. 3 and 4, 1935; Cove, N. shore of Lyon Inlet, Melville Peninsula (N & B), Aug. 24 and 25, 1933; 8. of Cape Martineau, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 9, 1933; 66° 30’N.; 80°W., Aug. 10, 1927; Labrador, no year given; Saglek Bay, Labrador, Sept. 25, 1925; Coast of Labrador, summer 1925. Harmothoe levis n. sp. The type specimen is 15 mm long and, measured from the outer borders of the elytra on opposite sides, 5 mm wide. The elytra overlap on the dorsal surface and extend laterally so as to cover the basal third of the dorsal cirri. In the type the protruded pharynx is 4 mm long. Under low magnification the elytra have a smooth appearance, tinted faintly-pinkish gray, each be- ing marked near the center (fig. 3) by a group of brown pigment granules. To the naked eye this smooth surface with the prominent pigment is the most characteristic feature of the animal. In the type the pigment is present on all elytra, smallest anteriorly and gradually increasing in size in the fol- lowing ones. In others the color may be absent in the most anterior elytra. The prostomium is characteristic of the genus in that each half terminates anteriorly in a peak beneath which, and invisible from above, are the large anterior eyes. The posterior eyes are also large and lie near the postero- lateral angle of the prostomium. The cirrophore of the median tentacle is large and fills the dorso-median prostomial cleft. Its length is about equal to that of the prostomium (fig. 1). The median tentacular style is about two and one half times as long as the cirrophore, very faintly swollen near the tip, and terminates in a slender filament. The prostomium is colored like the elytra, the cirrophore of the median tentacle is a darker brown, the basal half of the style is colored like the cirrophore, beyond this there is a lighter area, then a darker one of about the same length, then the slight swelling which is colorless. At the base of the filament is a dark spot, the remainder being colorless. The lateral tentacles are scarcely longer than the cirrophore of the median and are colored like it. Their slender apical regions are about as long as the stouter basal portions. The palps are of moderate size and JAN. 15, 1937 TREADWELL: POLYCHAETOUS ANNELIDS 27 taper uniformly to their apices, their general coloration being like that of the median tentacle, the apices white. The tenacular and dorsal cirri are like the median tentacle in form and color but in general are somewhat smaller. The last three pairs of dorsal cirri are very long. Anal cirri had been lost. The protruded pharynx has dorsally ten and ventrally nine soft marginal papillae. The teeth are very sharp pointed and light-brown in color with darker margins. | The first two pairs of elytra are nearly circular in outline, the others kidney-shaped (fig. 3). The pigment patch is located postero-dorsally to the elytrophore scar. Except for a very few clavate cilia on the posterior border, the margin is smooth. Near the outer lateral margin are a few larger stout spines and the whole surface is densely studded with minute spines not shown in the figure. A parapodium from the middle of the body (fig. 2), has a very long dorsal cirrus, both dorsal and ventral cirri lying near the posterior parapodial border, while the notopodial lobe is a little anterior to the neuropodial. The notopodium is composed of a broadly rounded anterior and a very narrow sharp-pointed posterior lip, with a fan-shaped row of heavy setae arising between them. The acicula extends into the posterior lip. The neuropodium is considerably longer and larger than the notopodium. It has a rounded posterior lip, posterior to which the setae arise. The anterior lip is almost rectangular in outline but has a narrow dorsal prolongation into which the acicula extends. The notopodial setae vary in size, the one at the ventral end of the series being hardly one-half as wide or one-eighth as long as the dorsalmost one. They are all (fig. 4) heavy, blunt-pointed, and have rows of toothed plates extending nearly to the ends. The neuropodial setae have long slender stalks widened toward the outer ends. Distally they gradually narrow again so that the apices are about half as wide as the narrowest portion of the stalk. Each (fig. 5) terminates in a terminal hook and a subterminal tooth. Toothed plates extend nearly to the base of the tooth. The type, No. 20222 U.S.N.M., was taken at Angmagssalik, E. Green- land, on Aug. 31, 1931. Another specimen was secured between Capes Martineau and McLaren, at the south end of Melville Peninsula on Aug. 19, 1933, and a third at 66° 30’ N., 80° W., Aug. 27, 1927. This species is closely related to Harmothoe imbricata Linn. EunorE Malmgren EUNOE NODOSA (Sars) Polynoe nodosa Sars 1860, p. 59. Eunoe nodosa Malmgren 1865, p. 64, pl. 8, fig. 4; McIntosh 1900, pp. 291- 296, pl. 27, fig. 9; pl. 32, fig. 3; pl. 37, figs. 20, 22, 24, 26, 27; pl. 42, fig. 28. Collected at Clavering Fiord, N.E. Greenland, Aug. 2, 1930; 66° 30’N., 80° W., Aug. 10, 1927; Fox Basin, Aug. 26, 1927; Center of Fox Basin, Aug. 24 and 25, 1927; 8. part of Fox Basin, 66° 43’ N., 80° 07’ W., Aug. 12, 1927; coast of Labrador, Sept.—Oct. 1925; Fox Basin (N & B), 1933. EUNOE OERSTEDI Malmgren EKunoe oerstedi Malmgren 1865, pl. 8, fig. 3. 28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, No. 1 A species related to E. nodosa and considered by Fauvel (1914, p. 51) as synonymous with it. One important distinction in the specimens in the Bart- lett collection is that H. oerstedi has very prominent spines on the elytra which are not found in FE. nodosa. Collected at Cape Alexander, Smith Sound, N. Greenland, Aug. 26, 1932; Hurd Channel between Bushman Id. and Melville Peninsula, Aug. 17, 1933; S. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’N., 78° 58’W., Aug. 4, 1935; 66° 36’N., 78° 58’W., Aug. 10, 1927. Family NEPHTHYDIDAE Neputuys Cuvier NEPHTHYS CILIATA (Miiller) Nereis ciliata Miller 1789, p. 114, pl. 89, figs. 1-4 (teste McIntosh); Malm- gren 1865, p. 104, pl. 12, fig. 17; McIntosh 1908, pp. 24-27, pl. 66, fig. 9; Dla te ties. 6, Fe Collected between Capes Martineau and McLaren, 8. end of Melville Peninsula, Aug. 19, 1933; Duckett’s Cove, Hurd Channel, Aug. 11, 1933; King Francis Joseph Fiord, N.E. Greenland, Aug. 4, 1936; North Fiord, N.E. Greenland, Aug. 2, 1936. Family PHYLLODOCIDAE PHYLLODOCE Savigny PHYLLODOCE GROENLANDICA Oersted Phyllodoce groenlandica Oersted 1842-438, p. 121 (teste McIntosh) ; McIntosh 1908, pp. 86-88, pl. 58, fig. 5; pl. 68, figs. 4, 5, 6; pl. 78, fig. 7. Collected at Clavering Fiord, N.W. Greenland, July 29, 1930; Disco Id., July 17, 1935 (this specimen is badly macerated and is recorded as taken from a cod’s stomach); at entrance to Straits of Fury and Hecla, Sept. 3, ~ 1933. One bottle, marked simply ‘‘Labrador’”’ contained a much injured specimen too badly broken for identification. It possibly is of this species. Family SYLLIDAE SYLLIS Savigny SYLLIS ARMILLARIS (Miiller) Nereis armillaris Miller 1776, p. 217 (teste McIntosh). Syllis armillaris Oersted 1842-43, p. 118 (teste McIntosh); McIntosh 1908, pp. 188-191, pl. 60, fig. 1; pl. 70, fig. 14; pl. 80 (1910), figs. 8, 8a. Collected at 70° 04’N., 17° 58’W. (N & B); 66° 30’N., 80°W.; and at S. part of Fox Basin, 66° 43'N., 80°07" W.., Aug. 12,1927. Por poem ents Oersted POLYBOSTRICHUS (AUTOLYTUS) LONGOSETOSUS Oersted Polybostrichus longosetosus Oersted 1843, p. 183, pl. 5, figs. 62, 67, 71 (teste Quatrefages). Collected at 8S. part of Fox Basin, 66° 43’ N., 80° 10’ W., Aug. 27, 1927. JAN. 15, 1937 TREADWELL: POLYCHAETOUS ANNELIDS 29 OopHyLax Ehlers Oophylax minuta n. sp. The type and only specimen is very small, hardly 2 mm in length. It was found clinging to another annelid, but this association evidently was acci- dental. The prostomium has a width of nearly twice its length (fig. 6), and near its posterior border are four large eyes, the lateral ones being slightly the larger. The lenses of the median eyes are directed dorsally, those of the lateral ones dorso-laterally. Anterior to these on either side is a much smaller eye. The palps are short and are fused nearly to their ends, this fusion being more complete dorsally than ventrally. Focussing below the level shown in the figure shows a definite cleft between them. The tentacles are heavy, each having a swollen basal portion which abruptly narrows into a cylindrical terminal region, the latter ringed in such a way as to resemble articulations. The first somite is rather short and has on either side a tentacular cirrus which is slightly smaller than the tentacle but is otherwise similar to it in shape. There are twenty-five pairs of parapodia, all prominent, the first one rounded in outline but later ones become gradually more sharp pointed toward the ends. In anterior somites the dorsal cirri are larger than the tentacular but similar to them in form. Beginning at about the sixth para- podium, these begin to narrow toward their bases and throughout the greater part of the body they are cylindrical and extend beyond the ends of the parapodia. There is one pair of short, thick, anal cirri (fig. 7). I was unable to see clearly the anterior ventral cirri but posterior ones are slender and cylindrical and reach about half way to the ends of the parapodia. The para- podia are conical, each having at its apex a small, colorless, posteriorly directed cirrus (see figs. 6, 7). The setae are all compound and prominent, the largest reaching beyond the parapodium to a distance equal to the length of the latter. The basal joint is slender, expanding noticeably at the hetero- gomph outer end. There are two kinds of terminal joints in each somite differing from one another only in length. Their ends are curved to sharp hooks. I was unable to decide whether their concave margins are merely roughened or carry excessively minute hairs. The pharynx has anteriorly a single median tooth and extends as far as the posterior border of the third setigerous somite. The crop extends through four somites. The unique type, No. 20223 U.S.N.M., was collected four miles east of Cape Dorchester in Fox Channel on Aug. 4, 1927. Oophylax is diagnosed by Ehlers (1864, p. 252) as having ‘‘four paired head appendages and eyes, palps more or less fused, seta-bearing para- podium of the first somite similar to later ones.’’ Chamberlin (1919, pp. 166, 167) stated that Oophylaz, with some other genera, is synonymous with Exogone, which he defined (p. 165) as having palps completely fused and rudimentary tentacular cirri, with all tentacles and cirri cylindrical. The specimen agrees more closely with Ehlers’ than with Chamberlin’s diagnosis and I have therefore described it as Oophylaz. Family NEREIDAE NereEIs Linnaeus NEREIS PELAGICA Linnaeus Nereis pelagica Linnaeus 1746, p. 2096; McIntosh 1910, pp. 267—280, pl. 52, figs. 1, 2; p. 160 (1908), figs. 6-6b; pl. 71, figs. 7—7i; pl. 80, figs. 25, 25b. 30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 1 A very widely distributed species but no great number of specimens ap- peared in the Bartlett collections. Collected at 63° 16’ 09’’ N., 84° 21’ 15” W., Aug. 1, 1933; 3 mi. 8. of Salisbury Id. (N & B), July 27, 1933; mouth of Bay of Gods Mercy, Southampton Id., Hudson Bay (N & B), Aug. 5, 1933; a much mutilated specimen in epitokous condition was taken at Duckett’s Cove, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 13, 1933; Coast of Labrador, 1925; 74° 04’ No Al 58 We. (Nie B), July 20,1930. NEREIS ARCTICA Oersted Heteronereis arctica Oersted 1848, p. 179. pl. 4, figs. 50, 51; pl. 5, figs. 65, 68, 69—-70* (teste Quatrefages). Collected at 8.E. corner of Fox Basin, 66° 46’ N., 79° 15’ W., Aug. 13,1927. NEREIS (CERATONEREIS) Kinberg Nereis (Ceratonereis) bartletti,’® n. sp. The type and only specimen is 28 mm long and 0.75 mm wide at the prostomium. The prostomium is colorless. On the peristomium is a faint dusting of brown pigment which becomes slightly more intense in the follow- ing somites and noticeably so on the region from the sixth to the thirtieth, being densest from the fifteenth to the twentieth. Behind the thirtieth this pigmentation continues in a gradually decreasing intensity to nearly the posterior end of the body. Except where it is more intense it is limited to a transverse dorsal band in each somite as long as one half the dorsal body- diameter and leaving uncolored the intermediate regions. In more deeply pigmented somites there are lateral patches on the parapodial bases sep- arated from the dorsal ones by a distinct colorless line. The prostomial length is about equal to its breadth (fig. 8), rather broadly rounded on the anterior border. The tenacles are relatively rather heavy and are well separated from one another. The basal joints of the palps are heavy and extend well beyond the tentacle ends, the terminal joints being mere knobs. Two pairs of prominent eyes are situated well toward the poste- rior border. In the preserved specimen the posterior eyes are about one half covered by the overlapping margin of the peristomium. The posterior dorsal tentacular cirrus reaches to the anterior border of the seventh somite, the anterior dorsal to the anterior border of the fourth, the ventral ones are hardly longer than the prostomium. The dorsal ones are more slender than the ventral and show a small amount of jointing. All dorsal cirri are slender, unjointed, and not especially long. The two anal cirri are as long as the last ten body somites. In the protruded state of the pharynx the peristomium is much wider than the prostomium. In the mid-dorsal line it is about twice as long as somite 2. The following somites increase in length and width as far as the region of the twentieth, while posterior to that they gradually decrease toward the posterior end. The protruded pharynx (fig. 8) has large teeth, each with a terminal fang and five heavy denticulations. The paragnath formula is I, absent; II, not more than ten, in two rows, the larger lying on the inner row; III, a few ob- scure denticles rather widely separated; IV, on either side a roughly tri- angular patch whose apex extends as two rows nearly to the bases of the jaws; V, VI, VII and VIII absent. 3 In honor of the discoverer, Capt. R. A. Bartlett. JAN. 15, 1937 TREADWELL: POLYCHAETOUS ANNELIDS al Anterior parapodia (fig. 9) have a heavy dorsal cirrus extending for about one-third its length beyond the end of the dorsal lobe. This dorsal lobe is an elongated oval in outline, its outer half only slightly narrower than its inner. The setal lobe is a small elevation on the dorsal surface of the ventral lip and the acicula ends in it. The ventral lip of the notopodium is roughly tri- angular in outline, its base extending beyond the end of the dorsal lobe. In the neuropodium the setal lobe has a vertical posterior and a conical an- terior lip, the large acicula ending in the latter. The ventral lip is heavy and shorter than the setal lobe. A parapodium from the middle of the body (fig. 10) has much the same structure as the anterior ones, except that the lobes are more pointed. This general structure persists posteriorly, the only change being that the lobes become still more pointed. In anterior parapodia there are few notopodial setae (three in the para- podium drawn, fig. 9), each having a very slender homogomph basal portion, the terminal joint long and slender and finely toothed along one margin. The neuropodial setae are in two tufts, one above and one below the acicula. In each tuft are two kinds of setae, one form being like those of the notopodium, the other having heterogomph basal joints, the terminal joint a flattened blade that narrows regularly from base to apex which is rounded and slightly curved. Along one margin is a row of bristles (fig. 11). On the second and third parapodia in front of the pygidium are setae not found farther forward. On the specimen examined there is in the notopodium one shown in figure 12. This has homogomph basal joint. The terminal joint is elongated-oval in outline, one end being inserted in the notch at the end of the basal. In the neuropodium are two like figure 13. The basal joint is heterogomph, the terminal short and thick, curved slightly and has a row of bristles for about half its concave margin. Both of these forms of setae are much larger than any in anterior somites and have much darker basal joints. Type, No. 20224, U.S.N.M., was taken in a dredge at 129 fathoms at 74° 04’ N., 17° 58’ W., on July 30, 1931. Family LEODICIDAE LUMBRINEREIS Blainville LUMBRINEREIS FRAGILIS (Miller) Lumbricus fragilis Miller 1788, p. 22, pl. 22, figs. 1-3. Lumbriconereis fragilis Audouin et Edwards 1833, vol. 28, p. 244; McIntosh 1910, pp. 372-376, pl. 62, figs. 1, la; pl. 72, figs. 8—-8ce; pl. 82, figs. 2—2b. All of the specimens in the collection were badly macerated and the identi- fication was made mostly through the structure of the jaws. Collected in summer of 1925, coast of Labrador; Saglek Bay, Labrador, Oct. 1, 1925; Coast of Labrador, Sept.—Oct. 1925. OnvupuHis Audouin et Edwards ONUPHIS CONCHYLEGA Sars Onuphis conchylega Sars 1835, p. 61, pl. 10, figs. 28 a-e; McIntosh 1910, pp. 410-413, pl. 63, fig. 9; pl. 64, figs. 1-la; pl. 75, fig. 7; pl. 84, figs. 5—-5e. In the identification I have followed MeIntosh’s description. The only differences I could find are that the frontal tentacles are more prominent and the nuchal cirri longer than in his statement. There is much variation 32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 1 in the coloration from practically no color at all to a dense brown dorsal pigmentation. Collected at 74° 04’ N., 17° 58’ W., July 30, 1931 (N & B); 74° 21 N° 16° 30’ W., July 29, 1931; E. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’ N., 78° 50’ W., Aug. 3, 1935; 75° 40’ N., 78° 55’ W., Aug. 3, 1935. Family GLYCERIDAE GLYCERA Savigny GLYCERA LAPIDUM de Quatrefages Glycera lapidum de Quatrefages 1865, pp. 187, 188; McIntosh 1910, pp. 477— 481, pl. 55, fig. 4; pl. 64, figs. 9-9a; pl. 76, figs. 1-1b; pl. 85, figs. 3—-3b. Collected at S. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’ N., 78° 58’ W., Aug. 4, 1935. Family OPHELIDAE OPHELIA Savigny OPHELIA LIMACINA Rathke Ophelia limacina Rathke 18438, p. 190, pl. 10, figs. 4-8 (teste MeIntosh); McIntosh 1915, pp. 9-14; pl. 88, fig. 1; pl. 95, figs. 1, 1d. Collected at Hakluyt Id., Whale Sound, 77° 26’ N., 72° 30’ W., July 30, 1935; E. end Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’ N., 78° 56’ W., Aug. 4, 1935; and at latter locality but at 58’ W. on Aug. 4, 1935. Family CHLORHAEMIDAE Brapba Stimpson BRADA GRANOSA Stimpson Brada granosa Stimpson 1854, p. 32. E. end Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’ N., 78° 50’ W., Aug. 3, 1935; King Francis Joseph Fiord, N.E. Greenland, Aug. 4, 1936. Family AMPHICTENIDAE PEcTINARIA Lamarck PECTINARIA GRANULATA (Linnaeus) Sabella granulata Linnaeus 1766, p. 1268. Cistenides granulata Malmgren 1865, p. 359. Collected at Angmagssalik, E. Greenland, Aug. 28, 1931; Parker Snow Bay, off Cape York, July 17, 1935; N. Omenolu, near North Star Bay, N. Greenland, July 28, 1932; Cape York, N. Greenland, Aug. 28, 1932; 5 mi. S. of Cape Chalon, N. Greenland, July 27, 1932; between Capes Martineau and McLaren, Aug. 19, 1933; cove N. shore Lyon Inlet, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 24 and 25, 1933; Duckett’s Cove, Hurd Channel, Aug. 11 and 12, 1933; Hurd Channel, between Bushman Id. and Melville Peninsula, Aug. 17, 1933; S. of Cape Martineau, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 19, 1933; King Francis Joseph Fiord, N.E. Greenland, Aug. 4, 1936. JAN. 15, 1937 TREADWELL: POLYCHAETOUS ANNELIDS 30 Family AMPHARETIDAE AMPHARETE Malmgren AMPHARETE GROENLANDICA Grube? Ampharete groenlandica Grube 1860, vol. 26, pp. 106-107, pl. 5, figs. 3, 3a, 3b. A single female with eggs. All of the tentacles have been lost and I have provisionally identified it as above. Collected at 66° 30’ N., 80° W., Aug. 27, 1927. Family TEREBELLIDAE THELEPUS Leuckart THELEPUS CINCINNATUS (Fabricius) Amphitrite cincinnata Fabricius 1780, p. 286. Thelepus cincinnata Malmgren 1865, p. 387, pl. 22, fig. 58. Thelepus cioncinnatus Verrill 1874, vol. 7, p. 499; McIntosh 1922, pp. 170- 177, pl. 120, fig. 1; pl. 126, figs. 6-6d (var. andreneae). Abundant in the collections associated with Pista groenlandica. The tubes differ from those of P. groenlandica in that Thelepus uses larger and a more heterogeneous collection of pebbles to cover the surface than does Pista. Collected at 74° 04’ N., 17° 58’ W. (N & B), July 30, 1931; 74° 21’ N., 16° 30’ W. (N & B), July 29, 1931; North Omenolu, North Star Bay, N. Greenland, Aug. 26, 1932; 5 mi. S. from Cape Charles, N. Greenland, July 27, 1932; E. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’ N., 78° 40’ W., Aug. 3, 1935; at entrance to Strait of Fury and Hecla, Sept. 3, 1933; 3 mi. S. from Salisbury Id. (N & B), Hudson Strait, July 25, 1933; cove to windward of Cape Charles, W. side of Lyon Inlet, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 18, 1933; be- tween Capes Martineau and McLaren, S. end of Melville Peninsula, Aug. 19, 1933; S. of Cape Martineau, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 19, 1933; 66° 30’ INE. 307 W, Aug. 10, 1927. Pista Malmgren PIsTA FLEXUOSA (Grube) Terebella fleruosa Grube 1860, vol. 26, pp. 102-103, pl. 5, figs. 2 and 2a. Scione flecuosa Wesenberg-Lund 1934, p. 29. The arrangement of the gills puts this species in the genus Pista. Collected at E. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’ N., 78° 58’ W., Aug. 3, 1935. Pista groenlandica n. sp. Common in the collection in association with the commoner Thelepus cincinnatus Fabricius. Their tubes may be distinguished by the fact that they are somewhat smaller than are those of the latter species and the sur- faces of the tubes are covered with sand grains which are smaller and more uniform in size than is the case with T. cincinnatus. The type is 70 mm long and has a prostomial width of 3 mm. So far as can be determined on preserved material the body width is fairly uniform throughout except that there is a noticeable narrowing at the posterior end. 04 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 1 The cephalic margin is not very pronounced and on its latero-ventral side is largely covered by a large latero-ventral lobe of the first somite. Ventrally it is separated by a notch from the high and rather narrow supraoral fold. None of the specimens had been preserved outside of the tube and it was found quite impossible to remove them from the tubes without injuring the tentacles and only a few of these remain on the type. They occur in a dense tuft and when contracted show grooving. No eyes were visible. Dor- sally the first somite is very short, its two halves separated in the mid-dorsal line by a forward expansion of the second somite that carries the gills. A prominent lateral lobe is present on either side of the first somite. Ventrally the two lobes are united by a transverse bridge (fig. 14), and posterior to this each lobe sends out a rounded process, the two nearly meeting in the mid-ventral line. The second somite is very short on the mid-ventral line but widens laterally and is continued dorsally as a larger area carrying the gills. The third somite carries ventrally the first shield which extends over the second somite and is divided into two by a transverse line. Laterally the third somite carries a free lobe which extends forward nearly as far as the anterior border of the first somite (fig. 15). There is one pair of gills situated on the dorsal surface of the second somite. Each (fig. 15) has a heavy base and divides into five (in the one figured) branches which subdivide toward the ends. There is no indication of a spiral arrangement such as has been described in other species of this genus. On the type are twelve well defined ventral shields and behind them a row of very much smaller ones that at about the twentieth somite fade away into a deep groove. A row of ten cirri, of which the two ventral ones are the largest, surround the anus. The first seta tuft is on the fourth somite and there are sixteen pairs. The setigerous ridges increase in size from anterior to posterior ones, the later ones being prominent. The uncini begin on the fifth somite, the tori being very low as far as the setae extend and behind this they protrude considerably from the body. They continue to the posterior end of the body, the latest ones being smaller. The setae are all long and slender, very fine-pointed, and gently curved at the ends. They are bilimbate, the wings being noticeably stri- ated. An uncinus (fig. 16) has a broadly rounded base and one large hook. At the apex there isa much smaller hook and on either side one larger than the apical one. A hook-like projection lies between the uncinal base and the largest hook. In anterior tori the uncini are in single rows but at about the tenth the rows become double with alternate uncini facing in opposite direc- tions. The type, No. 20225, U.S.N.M., and a paratype deposited in the American Museum of Natural History were collected at the east side of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’ N., 78° 40’ W., Aug. 3, 1935. Others were taken 5 miles S. of Cape Charles; at entrance to Straits of Fury and Hecla; at Duckett’s Cove, Hurd Channel; at 74° 04’ N., 17° 58’ W.; and at 74° 21’ N., 16°30’ W. Pista cristata O. F. Miller appears in a number of lists of polychaetous annelids collected from the northeastern coast of North America and MelIntosh (1922, p. 160) lists the species from Canada (Whiteaves), New England and Atlantic coast (Verrill), and Virginia (Webster). In his diag- nosis of the species, McIntosh (p. 158) states that the gills arise from the anterior border of the fourth somite, but later (p. 161) he locates them on the third. In P. groenlandica they are on the third. Other differences are that in P. cristata there are three pairs of lateral lobes on the second, third, and fourth somites, respectively, while P. groenlandica has only one pair on JAN. 15, 1937 TREADWELL: POLYCHAETOUS ANNELIDS 30 the second. The arrangement of anal papillae is quite different, as is the structure of the uncini. Verrill (1882, pl. 11, fig. 2) figures P. cristata, but his figure seems to correspond more closely to P. groenlandica, and McIntosh does not record any personal observations on any American forms, basing his descriptions solely on the European. It seems to me quite possible that the ones described from North America are P. groenlandica. I cannot find that the papers show anything more than a relisting of the species without any critical examination. The relationship between the two species is close. TEREBELLIDES Sars TEREBELLIDES STROEMI Sars Terebellides stroem2 Sars 1835, p. 48, pl. 18, fig. 31 (teste McIntosh) ; McIntosh 1922p. 209-215,pl. 127, fies. 5,9) (oa,10a', ob. A single entire specimen which agrees in all respects with the description given by McIntosh, except that it has only one pair of gills on the second somite, while McIntosh describes two pairs on somites 2 and 3. His figure, however (pl. 120, fig. 3), shows only one pair. Collected at Cove, N. shore of Lyon Inlet, Melville Peninsula, Aug. 24, 1933. Family SABELLIDAE CHONE Kroyer CHONE DUNERI Malmgren Chone dunert Malmgren 1867, p. 116, pl. 13, fig. 75; McIntosh 1923, pp. 295-297, pl. 130, figs. 3— 30. Distinguished from C. infundibuliformis, which is Lene commoner in this region, by the fact that in C. dunerz the thoracic spatulate setae have long sharp points, while in C. znfundzbuliformis they have rounded ends. Collected at E. end of Cobourg Id., Baffin Bay, 75° 40’ N., 78° 40’ W., Aug. 3, 1935. Family SERPULIDAE SPIRORBIS Daudin SPIRORBIS SPIRILLUM (Lamarck) Serpula spirillum Linnaeus 1758, p. 786. Sptrorbis spirillum Lamarck 1818, p. 359; McIntosh 1923, pp. 391-396, pl. 122, figs. 9-9b; pl. 132, figs. 6—6f. Collected in considerable numbers on floating sea weed at mouth of Bay of Gods Mercy, Southampton Id., Hudson Bay, Aug. 5, 1933 (N & B). LITERATURE CITED Aupbouin, J. V. et Mitnze-Epwarps, H. Classification des Annélides et description des especes qui habitent les cétes de la France. Vols. 28-30. Paris. 1832-36. CHAMBERLIN, Rautpo V. The annulata Polychaeta. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zodl., Har- vard Univ. 48: 1-514, 80 pls. 1919. EHLERS, Ernst. Die Borstenwiirmer, Pt. 1, pp. 1-290, 11 pls. Leipsic. 1864. Fapricius, OTHo. Fauna groenlandica. Hafniar et Lipsiae. 1780. FauveE.L, Pierre. Annélides Polychétes. Résultats des Campagnes Scientifiques Ac- complies sur son Yacht par Albert 1°. pp. 1-431, 31 pls. Monaco. 1914. 36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 1 GruBe, ApouteH E. Beschreibung neuer oder wenig bekannter Anneliden. Archiv f. Naturgesch. 26: 71-118, pls. 3-5. 1860. JOHNSTON, GEORGE. The British Aphroditacea. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Vol. 2. London. 1839. LAMARCK, J. B. Anim. sans Vert. Vol. 2. 1818. LinnakEvs, Cary. Fauna Suec., Ed. 2. 1746. Systema naturae, ed. 10. 1758. ——— Systema naturae, ed. 12. 1766. McInrosu, Wm. C. British Annelids. Ray Soc. Monographs. Vol. 1, Pt. 2, Amphinom- idae to Sigalionidae, pp. 215-242, pls. 24-42, text figs. 15-33, 1900; Vol. 2, Pt. 1, Nephthydidae to Syllidae, pp. i-viii, 1-232, pls. 43-50, 57—70, text figs. 34—57, 1908; Vol. 2, Pt. 2, Syllidae to Ariciidae, pp. 233-524, pls. 51-56, 71-87. text figs. 58-94, 1910; Vol. 3, Pt. 1, Opheliidae to Ammocharidae, pp. i—viii and 1—368, text figs. 95-135, 1915; Vol. 3, Pt. 2, pls. 88-111, 1915; Vol. 4, Pt. 1, Hermellidae to Sabellidae, pp. i-viii and 1—250, pls. 112-114, 118-127, 1922; Vol. 4, Pt. 2, pp. i-xii and 251-539, Sabellidae to Serpulidae, pls. 115-117, 128-138, 1923. MauMGRreNn, A. J. WNordiske Hafs-Annulata. Ofvers Kung. Vetensk. Akad. Forh., pp. 55-110, 181-192, 355-410, 22 pls. 1865. Moors, J. Percy. Description of some new Polynoidae with a list of other polychaeta from North Greenland Waters. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 54: 258-278, pls. 13, 14. 1902. Mutuuer, O. F. Zoologiae Danicae Prodromus. Hafniae. 1776. Zoologiae Danicae. Hafniae. 1788. OrrstED, A. 8. Conspectus genarum species unique Naidium ad faunam Danica pertinentum. Naturhist. Tidschrift, Kroyer. 1: 128-140, 3 pls. 1842-43. — Groenlands Annulata Dorsibranchiata. Copenhagen. 1848. Patuas, O. S. Miscellanea Zoologica. 1766. QUATREFAGES, A.de. Histoire naturelles des Annelés marins et d’eau douce. Annélides et Gephyreans. Vol. 2, Pt. 1, pp. 794. Paris. 1865. RatTHKE, H. Beitrage zur Fauna Norwegens. Nov. Acta Leopold Na. Cur., Vol. 20, pl. 1-12. 1848. Sars, M. Beskrivelser og Jagttaegeler over nye eller merkelige i havet ved den N. Mag. Hist., Vol. 10. Christiana. 1835. ——— Om de ved Norges forekommenden Arter of Annelides loegten Polynoe. Forh. de Vid Selek. Christiana. 1860. STIMPSON, WILLIAM. Synopsis of the Marine Fauna of Grand Manan. Smithson. Contrib. to Knowledge. 6: 5-67, 3 pls. 1854. VERRILL, ADDISON E. Brief Contributions to Zoology from Museum of Yale College. Am. Jour. Sci. 7: 498-505. 1873-74. WESENBERG-LUND, EuisE. Gephyreans and Annelids from the Scoresby Sound Com- mittee’s 2nd East Greenland Expedition in 1932 to King Christian’s Land. Med- deleser om Groenland, Vol. 104, Pt. 14, pp. 1-38, 8 figs., 1 chart, 1 table. 1934. ZOOLOGY .—Resistance to intestinal trichinosis in experimental ani- mals induced by feeding metabolic products of encysted trichinae.* L. A. SPINDLER, Bureau of Animal Industry, U. 8. Department of Agriculture (Communicated by BENJAMIN SCHWARTZ). Administration of vaccines by mouth has been found to be of value in some cases in the treatment of certain diseases, and in view of this, it occurred to the writer that metabolic products elab- orated by trichina larvae might be used in a similar manner to produce a resistance to intestinal infestation with this parasite. Attempted immunization by injection of trichina proteins has yielded negative results.” In order to determine, therefore, whether the ingestion of metabolic products of trichina larvae would pro- 1 Received October 7, 1936. 2 McCoy, O. R. Amer. Jour. Hyg. 21: 200. 1935. JAN. 15, 1937 SPINDLER: TRICHINOSIS oO” tect animals against infection with this parasite, carcasses of rab- bits containing encysted trichinae were digested in artificial gastric juice thus liberating into the digestive fluid possible metabolic products of the larvae present within the capsules. The digestive fluid was prepared and the digestive process car- ried out as outlined by Ransom.’ The fluid obtained following the digestion of trichinous’ meat was filtered through a Mandler filter to remove all trichina larvae and coarse undigested particles; be- TABLE 1.—RESULTS OF FEEDING METABOLIC PRODUCTS OF ENCYSTED TRICHINAE No. of Days Percentage of No. of trichinae Neutralized digestive duration Average No. of trichinae in Test animals used given per fluid per animal (ce) Coke trichinae per animal test suns No. animal infection os corel test and control tosh and test control tetand test control 1 4 rats 1,850 8to 12 0 3 663 1,100 60.3 2 4 rats 5,200 10 to 15 0 3 3,910 4,630 84.4 3 4 rats 10,150 G toy 8 0 6 3 , 560 4,950 71.9 4 4 rats 10,000 50 to 70 0 4 1,750 3,300 53.0 5 4 rats 500 | 140 to 200 0 3 128 400 32.0 5a | 2 rats 500 95 to 1001; O 3 170 398 42.7 5b] 2 rats 900 90 to 1107} O 3 395 400 98.8 6 2 rabbits 25,000 | 110 to 125 0 6 5,075 | 12,950 39.1 fi 2 rabbits 26,375 65 to 80 0 4 7,470 | 18,522 40.3 8 2 rabbits? 4 ,000 30 to 60 0 3 200 1.200 16.6 8a | 2 rabbits 4,000 30 to 60 0 3 187 2 15.6 9 | 4 guinea pigs‘ 555 | 100 to 125 0 3 220 55.0 9a | 4 guinea pigs? 555 | 120 to 130 0 3 175 400 43.8 9b| 4 guinea pigs? 555 | 115 to 145 0 3 400 100.0 10 | 3 guinea pigs® 800 60 to 80 0) 3 325 600 54.2 10a | 3 guinea pigs® 800 50 to 85 0 3 563 93.8 1 Digestive fluid heated before feeding. 2 Fluid obtained after artificial digestion of carcass of trichina-free rabbit. 3 Two control rabbits were used in these tests. 4 Four control guinea pigs were used in these tests. 5 Three control guinea pigs were used in these tests. fore administering the fluid, it was neutralized with decinormal sodium hydroxide, using phenolphthalein as an indicator. Rats, rabbits and guinea pigs were the host animals used in the experi- ments. Both test and control animals were infected with equal numbers of trichina larvae, and the test animals were given the neutralized digestive fluid by mouth throughout the duration of the experi- ment; the control animals received distilled water instead of the digestive fluid. , A post-mortem comparison, made 38 to 6 days after infection, of the number of adult trichinae in the test animals with those present ‘Ransom, B. . Jour Agric. Res. 5:819. 1916. 38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, No. 1 in the controls was the criterion for determining whether or not a resistance had been brought about by ingestion of the digestive fluid. The technic involved in these examinations was the same as that outlined by McCoy.* To determine whether animals would be protected from an ex- perimental infection with trichinae by ingesting artificial gastric juice in which trichina-free rabbit meat had been digested, animals in tests 5b, 9b, and 10a were fed fluid obtained by artificially digest- ing uninfected rabbit carcasses. It will be noted that these animals were not protected, since they harbored practically as many tri- chinae as the controls that received no digestive fluid. Ten tests were carried out and the results are summarized in Table 1. These data show that the test animals were protected to a greater or lesser extent against experimental intestinal trichinosis, since the test animals harbored only from 15.6 to 84.4 percent of the numbers of trichinae present in the controls. In tests 5a and 9a the digestive fluid was heated at 50°C for 30 minutes, and in test 8a it was heated at 60°C for 30 minutes, before administering it to the animals. As shown in Table 1, the animals which received the heated digestive fluid harbored from 15.6 to 43.8 percent of the number of trichinae harbored by the controls, showing that the immunizing principle was not destroyed by heating at these tem- peratures. From the tests reported in this paper, it may be concluded that artificial gastric juice in which trichinous meat has been digested contains a substance capable of protecting to a certain extent, rats, rabbits, and guinea pigs from an experimental intestinal infection with trichinae. This protective substance is associated with the presence of trichinae, and is not destroyed by moderate heating. Additional investigations of this problem are in progress. 4 McCoy, O. R. Amer. Jour. Hyg. 21: 200. 1935. JAN. 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: BOTANICAL SOCIETY 39 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES BOLANICAL: SOCIETY 270TH MEETING The 270th regular meeting was held in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club, January 7, 1936, President Joun W. RoBeErts presiding; attendance 100. Mary ExvizaBeTH Pierce, ARTHUR F. SIEVERS, and JEssE D. DILLER were elected to membership. Notes and reviews.—CHARLES THOM called attention to a very complete Medical Mycology by C. W. Dodge. C. R. Baw called attenton to the diamond willows and passed around an interesting example from Alaska. Program.—Notes on the annual meetings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science at St. Louis were given by: H. A. Epson for pathology; A nice M. ANnpzERSEN for physiology; S. L. EmMsweuunr for genetics; Nuit EK. Stevens for general botanical matters; W. J. Zav- MEYER for virus diseases. N. R. Situ gave notes on the bacteriological meetings at New York City, and EK. A. HoLLOWELL on the agronomy meetings at Chicago. 2718T MEETING The 271st regular meeting was held in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club, February 4, 1936, President Jonn W. RopeErts presiding; attendance 93. THora N. Puirr and Drwry Stewart were elected to membership. Notes and reviews.—GEORGE M. Darrow called attention to a new book, entitled Gardens of Color by Henslow, head of Kew Gardens. Program.—Miriam L. Bomuarp: Leaf venation—a useful criterion for distinguishing the poisonous water hemlocks from the harmless angelicas. Pub- lish in this JouRNAL 26: 102-107. 1936. SHIO SAKANISHI: Japanese flower arrangement. Mrs. Hersert H. Grecor: Demonstrations of Japanese flower arrange- ment. 272ND MEETING The 272nd regular meeting was held in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club, March 3, 1936, President Joun W. RoseErts presiding; attendance 137. Orto Brown, F. J. Criper, Guy C. FuLuer, Ernest G. Hott, WattTer V. Kevi, WituiAmM R. Van DERSAL, and Rosert L. WEINTRAUB were elected to membership. Notes and reviews.—C. R. Batt called attention to the use of willow trees as roosting places for blackbirds. M.A. Ratnus gave a description of sheet culture technique for growing young plants. Program.—CHARLES R. ENLow: The agronomy program of the Soil Conservation Service. In the United States, 300,000,000 acres are affected by soil erosion. Of this acreage, 50,000,000 are essentially destroyed, 50,000,000 practically destroyed, 100,000,000 almost depleted of topsoil, and another 100,000,000 now eroding. The Soil Conservation Service has at present 141 projects in operation in 41 states, covering 46,600,000 acres of land. Of this acreage, 39,700,000 are Federal land, and 6,900,000 agri- cultural farm lands. The extent of the agronomic work on this acreage is well illustrated by the fact that 65% of the land on the projects in seven southeastern states is in crops and pastures, and the percentage is still larger in other sections of the country. 40 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 1 The difficulty encountered in developing a national agronomic policy is well illustrated by the varying conditions in Region 7 (Nebraska, Kansas and Oklahoma). This region has a rainfall of from 14 to 50 inches; soils ranging from alkaline to acid; has both water and wind erosion; dryland agriculture, wheat growing, cotton growing, corn production, and general farming. The method of erosion control in use at present by the Agronomy Section consists of rearranging the farm lands to retain soil and moisture. In attempting erosion control, proper rotations, strip cropping, contour farm- ing, pasture management, winter and summer cover crops, change in tillage methods, contouring of pastures, and reseeding of abandoned land, blow land and gullies with commercial and native grasses and other plants, are some of the principal methods of attack. Results of experiments in strip cropping and contour farming from the soil erosion Experiment Stations at Temple, Texas, Tyler, Texas, and Guthrie, Oklahoma, show these practices save much soil and water. At Guthrie, Oklahoma, cotton lost eleven times as much water by runoff as Bermuda grass and 670 times as much soil. Burton F. Kittrz: Native grasses of the prairies and plains. ”"- 2 200 1.75 2.60 3.60" 4.50 4 25 <= yt. 250 2.00 3.30 4.65 5.75 (5.00 | a ae _* Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional Ba $1.00: wes Subscription Hates.—Per Volume. 24, ia. Pun Tacs Gh cee eee eee oa Se $0.00 ai To members of affiliated societies; per volume...................4.. eae ae 2.50 “3 Miele nuiihersy. ©... < @.6 sos We Sa De Oe $6,273.76 Cash-Balance' January; 1; 1936.5. 22.1 cs 0 5 ey eee See 2,368.77 TO bE ACCOUNTEE LOL... us ss, sas 5 4 ane mle ame peel gives cee $8 ,642 .53 Disbursements Kor Secretary a Olliee, LOS 5. 0. ove ee. ieee Ay ome ees $ 7.00 Hor Secretary s Ottice, 1936....... ..40<0.5 «ene we 272.80 Kor Treasurer s ‘Ottice, 1935... 0... ... 22. ade 2.75 Kors reasurers'Otmee, 1936). 2.4... i200. eee 187.80 Hor Journal Oftiee; LOSS... i« ne sah een 35.73 KornJournal Ofnee; TOSG ma. 20. 64 eho ae fee Sie 43.34 Hor Journal Printing, LOSS. . .. 2. tos eo~ vas 27 .38 Rorwournal Printing, L936... ik es oe ao 2,281 .62 Korvounmmalmeprints, 1935... .. so. ade. 6 see + 95.57 For Journal Reprints, 1936.......... Fetes «hia seit 437.17 Bon liustrations, 1956... 6. coe ae Wwe a ee 267 .36 Hor wiiistratloms, bOB7s . 22, . awa «aptwiin ksi as + 20.98 For Meetings Committee, 19385.............. 20.00 For Meetings Committee, 1986.............. 303 .87 For Affiliated Societies Committee........... 2.60 Bank Debit Memos, as follows: DUCK aan Ucsvhcitmereteie eb eee ew Ok $0 .35 SUDSETIDLONG Ss, cane wns sheta le abet om 20 VERN ec ete ete See se Sh MS as Vows .35 .93 otal Disbursements. Wass. Wan ww waa be owe eee eee $4,006 .90 Cash Balance: December.3l, L986 & «0. 55% cau «00st e aston © 4,635.63 OED Cee Ae 2 Cae et ee tek ley Se LS hs 50, a) aE $8 ,642 .53 Nore: Of the above expenditures, $188.43 was paid chargeable to 1935 and $20.98 was paid chargeable to 1937. The Auditing Committee, Howarp 8. RappLeye and GrorGE TUNELL, reported: ‘‘The Treasurer’s records of receipts and expenditures as shown in his account books and included in his report have been examined and found correct. All vouchers have been examined and found to be correct and prop- erly approved. The balance sheets submitted by the bank and the securities ee a a phi ge EOD a Ge fae Marcu 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 135 listed in the Treasurer’s report have been examined. The statement of the assets of the Academy was found correct. No coupons not yet due were missing from any of the securities bearing coupons. The records of the Trea- surer’s Office have been carefully and systematically kept, thus greatly facilitating the work of the auditing committee.” The Board of Editors, F. G. Brick wrEppz, R.W. Brown, and E.H.Too.s, submitted the following report covering the publication of Volume 26 of the Journal for the year 1936: “There were 76 original papers. Forty-four of them were by members of the Academy and 32 were communicated. Original papers were illustrated by 73 line cuts and 17 half-tones. Excess cuts illustrating several papers were paid for by the respective authors. Space in the volume was distributed among the different sciences, as follows: Pages 10 papers on Physics, including Astronomy, Geophysics and RESULT OLIN LE a eG) A eee ne Lions PeeeeC ES Ola CHEMISE Y <8 6 5 Pe eS en gs Le, 2 papers on Medicine including Physiology................ 19.8 10 papers in Paleontology including Paleobotany............ 49.0 MeolS Ol) MtOMOlOEY 0. 1s ee ee Pes oS 32.9 MEME ESEOME OLAV 600. ak ee ict leh wb os ee ee a 84.0 PU TNCE SOME AOOLOT Vid oso Ue a i ee Od oe ee 152.7 Meer ol Genera! SCIENCE. . ois. Se Ss ce ee eee 30.0 Proceedings of the Academy and affiliated societies occupied 34.5 pages, as follows: LE BSD S05 2 A li eRe a Re ee a 6.0 ETON ONCE a2 ee es hee Me ie o's ook 1.4 (ELLER GE) SOGIS i ae ae ei Rn Meera at le Oe 12.0 Peen CAG SOCIGL Yc) Acne eo Ah hn Sk a ns daw a. oes TS. 1 Obituaries occupied 2.6 pages. The Journal is relatively speaking up-to-date with manuscripts eabanited to it.” The tellers, F. G. Tryon, K. 8. Marxuey and L. V. Jupson, reported the election of the following officers: President, CHarLES THom; Non-resi- dent Vice Presidents, THomas Barsour, Cambridge, Massachusetts, and P. W. Bripeman, Cambridge, Massachusetts; Corresponding Secretary, Natuan R. SmitH; Recording Secretary, Oscar S. ApAms; Treasurer; H. G. AveERS; Board of Managers, F. G. BRicKWEDDE and J. F. Coucu. The Corresponding Secretary read the list of nominations for vice-pres- ident submitted by the affiliated societies as follows: Philosophical Society of Washington, FRanK WENNER Anthropological Society of Washington, F. H. H. Roserts, Jr. Biological Society of Washington, H. C. FuLLER Washington Section, American Chemical Society, J. H. H1spEen Entomological Society of Washington, C. F. W. MurseBeck National Geographic Society, A. WETMORE Geological Society of Washington, W. T. ScHALLER Medical Society of the District of Columbia, H. C. MacaTEx Columbia Historical Society, ALLEN C. CLARK Botanical Society of Washington, Joun A. STEVENSON Archaeological Society of Washington, ALEs Hrpiicka 136 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 3 Washington Section, Society of American Foresters, 8. B. DETWILER Washington Society of Engineers, Pau C. WHITNEY 2 Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers, H. L. — CurRTIS Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, H. L. WHITTEMORE Helminthological Society of Washington, Emmrtt W. Pricr Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists, H. W. ScHoEN-— ING ; Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers, C.H. Brrps- — EYE oo Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers, J. H. DELLINGER By vote of the Academy, the Recording Secretary was instructed to cast one vote for the list as read and the vice-presidents were declared elected. President MrINzER appointed Past Presidents McCoy and TucKERMAN to escort President-elect THom to the chair. President THom took over the gavel and addressed the Academy briefly. Adjournment followed at 10:15. CuHarRLES TuHom, Recording Secretary CONTENTS HyproLocy.—Our water supply. Oscar E. Murnzer........... ae CHEMISTRY.—Hydrogen ion concentration and the formation of ¢ pe iy per complexes. K. J. Murata................... 5: ate See x a PALEONTOLOGY. —Clistoorinus a new Carboniferous crinoid genus Hpwin Kaek. 38.05.00 5. occ og Se Botany.—A new type of heterobasidiomycete. G. W. Martin. Sy ote ZooLoay.—North American monogenetic trematodes. I. The 4 re perfamily Gyradactyloidea. Emmett W. Price.......... Seen MatacoLoey.—Two new land shells from Cuba. Pau Barrscn... % PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY......... , hh Aente ba, 2087 - BOARD OF EDITORS yee 3 -Esen H. Toouz i " , ‘BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY ete ASSOCIATE EDITORS oe C. Kracex > CHEMICAL | SOCIETY tes". MONTHLY Sy *¥ ~ me BY. THE a dae sh » | 450° ABNAIP Sr. bo See ar Mexasea, ‘WISCONSIN ithorized January 21, 1933. No. 4 FrepertcK D. Rossini BUREAU OF STANDARDS YMOND J, SEEGER : C.F. W. Mouszsesecx “FHILOSOPHICAT SOCIETY a PSR * | ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY SM 3. Ak GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY ei prise oe =, oc Si Henry 'B. Corirs, Jr. ek ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY E “WASHINGTON sees OF SCIENCES at oe the Act of August 24, 1912, at Menasha, Wis. al rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925, ?. ee CAL Cos SA. « ¥A es ta Vee ee” Re. “ ae PI Saas Ser - * eat nt Fal < i 1" a ee Mote zi F Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, } (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Acad my; proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated ‘societies; notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is: monthly, on the fifteenth of each month. Volumes correspond to calendar ye ir Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It i is urg l quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JoURNAL and conf . manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subhentles i onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should ati be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can gies! undertake to. cet correct other than obvious minor errors. Me me i Illustrations in excess of one full-page halftone or two full-page line foe bd ai be paid for by the author. Line drawings are preferred. = f ey Proof. —In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will eines be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be Peseorin = in final te form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. 3a ke, Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished pile Covers e bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagina date of issue, and re yer will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accordance the following schedule of prices. Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers 50 aaa Puta E btn iat $2.00 100 $ .75 $1.20 $1.50 $2.00 $2.75 — 150 1.25 1.90 2.55 3.25 8.0 +... 3 200 ©: 1.75 2.60 3.60 4.50 4.28... 9% 250 2.00 3.30 4.65 6.75 5.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1. ak Subscription Rates.—Per volume..............+eee0: eR RT YS. wae - $8.0 ut To members of affiliated societies; per volume..................+. teens Single numbers. ..............00005 Fie eRe REE TS Pate cuer sete ete eees -50 Remittances should be made payable to “‘Washington Academy of Sciences” waa < ¥ addressed to 350 Ahnaip Street, — Wis., or to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, — Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D a ee ae 8 Ezxchanges.—The JourNAL does not exchange with other publications. a Missing N: umbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is wale 0 1s the Treasurer within thirty days after date of following issue. 3 eg a ‘ OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: CHaRLES THom, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: NaTHAN R. Situ, Bureau of Plant Industry. Recording Secretary: Oscar S. Apams, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 27 APRIL 15, 1937 No. 4 GEOLOGY.—Sun symbol markings. WautrerR B. Lane, U. 8. Geo- logical Survey. (Communicated by Roland W. Brown.) Situated high upon a mesa spur at the confluence of Fewkes and Cliff Canyons in Mesa Verde National Park, Colorado, is Sun Temple. This ceremonial house was left uncompleted by the Indians when, for an unknown reason, they abandoned Mesa Verde. In 1915, when this ruin was excavated from an accumulation of debris that had become overgrown with cedars, pinyons and brush there was dis- covered at the southwest corner a peculiarly marked stone (Fig. 1) which was described by Fewkes? as follows: This cornerstone (has) a central depressed zone with sharp radiating ridges....A natural object with these characters would greatly affect a primitive mind, and no doubt was regarded with more or less reverence by the builders. ... At all events, they have partially enclosed this emblem in walls in such a way as to enclose the figure on three sides. There can be no doubt that the walled enclosure was a shrine and the figure in it may be a key to the purpose of the building. The shape of the figure on the rock suggests a symbol of the sun, and if this suggestion is correct, there can hardly be a doubt that solar rites were performed about it long before Sun Temple was built. Fewkes further notes that a person sitting in the shrine on Sep- tember 21 observes the setting sun directly before him. Various explanations have been given for this natural figure. It has been referred to as the impression of a palm leaf? and as a fossil Cretaceous spring.‘ Neither of these explanations seems to be an adequate interpretation of its origin. The writer’s attention was focused upon these radial markings subsequent to a visit to Mesa Verde in 1931. Undoubtedly on many previous occasions he had cas- ually seen similar marks on rock exposures for since then they have been observed on the weathered surfaces of many limestone and limy 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received Jan- uary 15, 1937. E FEWKES, J. WALTER. Excavation and repair a ee eae Mesa Verde National Park. Dept. of the Interior, Washington, pp. 20-21 Sia: Mesa Verde National Park guide book, Dept. of ne Interior, Washington, p. 12, or Mesa Words National Park guide book, Dept. of the Interior, Washington, p. 35, 137 138 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 Fig. 1—Sun Symbol, southwest corner of Sun Temple, Mesa Verde National Park, enshrined by protecting walls built by the Cliff Dwellers. Distance between buttresses approximately two feet. Fig. 2—Sun Symbol mark taken from the rim rock of Mesa Verde National Park, near Balcony House. Diameter of bowl averages 7 inches, depth 2 inches. Radial ridges extend outward 8 inches. Lichen growth show whitish in the lower right hand corner. Jointing cracks of recent origin are younger than the Sun Symbol. Specimen now in the U. S. National Museum. Photograph by C. Marshall Finnan. Aprit 15, 1937 LANG: SUN SYMBOLS 139 sandstone beds throughout the Southwest, more particularly on the San Andres limestone, the Carlsbad limestone in the Carlsbad Caverns National Park and sandstone beds of the Carlsbad limestone in upper Dark Canyon, New Mexico, the Comanche limestones of West Texas, and the Kaibab limestone at the Powell Memorial Monument, Grand Canyon. In consideration of the general distribution of these erosion figures as a common phenomenon on certain types of rocks and the preservation of one of them at Sun Temple it seems appro- priate to designate them as Sun Symbol’ markings. Through the courtesy of the National Park Service a specimen of Sun Symbol marking was sent to the writer from Mesa Verde Na- tional Park in 1933 and Mr. C. Marshall Finnan, who made the selection from some twenty or more markings that are already known to exist there, thus describes their occurrence: As a general rule these ‘‘Sun Symbols”’ are found along the canyon rims at the southern end of the mesa among the pinyon and juniper forest. They are only found in one particular brown layer of the Mesa Verde sandstone. This layer, about 4 feet thick, lies just beneath the red top soil and is ex- posed along the rim of the canyons. It is at these exposed places only, that these peculiar erosive characters are evident. The Sun Symbol markings at Mesa Verde (Fig. 2) usually range from 1 to 2 feet in diameter. They are composed of two parts—a cen- tral bowl or basin from 1 to 6 inches deep and a fringe of radial ridges and furrows surrounding the bowl. The figure is usually circular in form and the length of the furrows is about equal to the diameter of the central basin. At their outer ends these furrows blend into the irregularities of the rock surface but where they descend into the bowl they become more prominent by forming troughs which in some instances are as much as an inch in depth. Near the margin of the bowl the radial ridges and troughs plunge downward at an angle whose steepness usually depends upon the depth of the bowl. The Sun Symbol marking looks like a large sunflower impressed in rock. A vertical section cut across the Mesa Verde specimen (Fig. 3) exposed a buff colored sandstone of even texture composed of angular quartz grains 0.15 mm in diameter, cemented by silica with consider- able calcium carbonate and hydrous iron oxide. Though treatment of a sample of the rock with hot hydrochloric acid removed completely the iron oxide and calcium carbonate, an almost imperceptible amount of silica cement still held the grains in place. The rock is of 5 The insignia of the State of New Mexico, the Indian Zia sign or sun symbol, is very similar in form to these natural figures. 140 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 4 Radars | gu ra - “Raslials Secondary : cement Fig. 3.—A sectional diagram of a Mesa Verde Sun Symbol. Fig. 4.—A section made across the area of the radial zone showing the thin band of secondary cement that is deposited at the surface by the evaporated rain water. Note that the band ‘of cement is thickest beneath the radials. AprRIL 15, 1937 LANG: SUN SYMBOLS 141 very uniform texture, but horizontal stratification is suggested by the orientation of slight variations in the cementing materials. On the cut surface splotches one half to three quarters of an inch long are pale buff or whitish due to a greater concentration of calcite, whereas other patches are slightly darker brown from a concentration of iron oxide. Most of the coloration areas have gradational bound- aries; a few are sharply defined. The major axes of these coloration areas lie parallel to the bedding plane. On the weathered surface of the sandstone is a dark, thin, well- defined band 1 to 3 mm deep. This band or capping is thicker over the ridges than in the troughs or furrows. It contains a concentration of calcium carbonate and iron oxide, and effervesces actively when treated with hydrochloric acid. Beneath this thin layer lying within the bowl, the calcium carbonate cement is almost negligible whereas the iron oxide content appears relatively constant throughout the rock except for the small patches above mentioned. Much of the calcite cement has been leached from below the bowl, though the original amount of cementation here may have been less than in the surrounding portion of the rock. When a rock of uniform texture is exposed to weathering, differ- ences in degree and kind of cementation vary the rate of erosion and a smooth surface may soon become irregular and pitted. Rain water falling through the air and in its travels upon the surface of the ground soon acquires carbonic and organic acids and thus becomes a solvent of rock cements. In percolating downward into the sand- stone the water dissolves the binding cement and frees the quartz grains, which, subsequently, are removed by wind, water, and other agencies of transportation. The more permeable areas of the rock are relatively more easily weathered and form initial hollows that catch surface water, thus forming pockets or basins (tinajita) that tend to deepen and expand with each ensuing shower. So long as the rocks remain moist and the climate relatively humid, downward percola- tion of rain water is the dominant process, but in the semi-arid South- west another important agency comes into play. There the greatest amount of the annual precipitation falls during thunder showers in the summer months when the air is dry and warm. The porous surface rocks quickly become saturated during one of these downpours, but dry out rapidly after the storm has passed. Some of the absorbed moisture descends to the water table or an aquifer but most of it in the upper part of the rock is drawn to the surface by capillarity or by plants and evaporated. The water thus leaves the dissolved mineral 142 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 4 matter at or near the surface. Where irregularities develop, protrud- ing slightly above the general level, more rapid evaporation takes place and therefore more dissolved salts are deposited, thus serving to restrain erosion in those areas. The lower areas accumulate more water, suffer more solution, and acquire less salts. Therefore, a differ- ential action is set up, bringing into greater relief the initial variations in surface expression. As a depression forms, it becomes a center for accumulation of rain water. Rills® develop upon the rim, extending outward as they con- duct more and more water to the central basin, and deepen to form radial troughs. If the depression deepens rapidly, the radial lines and troughs follow down into the basin as well as grow farther outward. The Sun Symbol mark is therefore a transient impression made upon the weathering surface of rock and persists only so long as the con- ditions favoring its development are operative. They must come and go as the rock surface is worn down. Thus the Sun Symbol mark is the product of erosion on sandstones so constituted as to initiate these surface effects. So far only Sun Symbol marks in limy sandstones have been con- sidered. Sun Symbol marks are probably far more numerous in lime- stones but apparently less conspicuous. They depend upon the same process for their formation. Hill and Vaughn noted the presence of rills (Karrenfelder) on the Edwards limestone.’ Solution-faceted pebbles,® conspicuously developed in the Pecos Valley, are small ex- amples of the process of solution. In western Texas the Permian limestones, but more especially the blocky exposures of Cretaceous limestone, present cupped weathered surfaces with hard upturned edges bounding the joint planes. As noted by Udden,® algae are present upon the rocks and in the bowls of these depressions but to what extent their products of metabolism contribute to the evolution of the pocked surfaces is not clearly understood. It is, however, evi- dent that rills on rock surfaces do develop quite independently of organisms. In his description of pebbles (later called solution-faceted pebbles by Bryan) he had seen in the river gravels of the Rio Grande near 6 LAUDERMILK, J. D., and Wooprorp, A. O. Concerning Rillensteine. Am. Jour. Sci. 23: 135-154. 1932. 7 Hitt, R. T., and Vauaun, T. W. Geology of the Edwards Plateau and Rio Grande Plain adjacent to Austin and San Antonio, Texas; with reference to the occurrence of groundwaters. U.S. Geol. Survey 18th Annual Report, pt. 2, p. 229, 1896—97 8 Bryan, Kirk. Solution-faceted limestone pebbles. Am. Jour. Sci., 5th ser. 18, 105: 193-208. 1929. 9 UppENn, J. A. Etched potholes. Texas Univ. Bull. 2509: 5-9. 1925. Apri 15, 1937 CHASE: PASPALUM 143 Eagle Pass, Texas, Udden referred thus to furrowings on their sur- faces: ‘‘In very rare cases one may see etched grooves radiating from the elevated center of one of the flattened surfaces of these boulders.’’?° This no doubt is but a reversal of the direction of flow of the dis- solving water that produces the Sun Symbol mark. Again quoting Udden: ‘‘This radiated, furrowed sculpture is one of the most com- mon sculpture forms seen on the bare limestone surfaces in situ in this part of America.’”’ This suggests that he had recognized radial patterns caused by an outward flow of water." So far no cuspated potholes or radial erosion marks have been reported from humid regions” where on similar rocks marginal ero- sion may exceed that taking place over the central portion and the surfaces tend to become convex. In arid or semi-arid climates the marginal areas may receive a protecting deposit of salts, concentrated there by the wick-like action of the rim during the process of solution by rain water and its subsequent evaporation, and so develop con- cave surfaces. BOTAN Y.—WNew species of Paspalum from Tropical America.! AG- NES CHASE, Bureau of Plant Industry. Three of the species here proposed belong to the Decumbentes, a group of Paspalum characterized by the development of the first glume in the lower of the pair of spikelets, sometimes in the upper also. The species, except P. nutans Lam. which is found also in Mauritius, are confined to the American tropics and warm temperate regions. | Paspalum Hintoni Chase, sp. nov. Perenne; culmi ascendentes, 30—45 cm alti, compressi; vaginae carinatae; laminae planae, 3-6 cm longae, 2-5 mm latae, hirsutae; racemi solitarii, longe pedunculati, terminales et axillares, 4-7 cm longi; spiculae geminae, 2.2—-2.3 mm longae, 1.2 mm latae, glabrae; gluma prima nulla aut minutis- sima, gluma secunda spiculam dimidiam subaequans; lemma sterile 3-nerve; fructus subtilissime papilloso-striatus. Perennial, in small tufts; culms ascending, slender, compressed, 30-45 cm tall, the nodes appressed-pubescent; sheaths compressed-carinate, ciliate 10 UppEN, J. A. Flattening of limestone gravel boulders by solution. Geol. Soe. America Bull. 25: 66-68. 1914. 11 Large steep-sided sandstone boulders in the Dog Canyon area of the Guadalupe Mountains show these centrifugal troughs. Also where the dolomitic anhydrites of the Rustler formation are exposed in the Pecos Valley a fine display of large well- developed vertical rills is to be seen. 2 HuMMEL, K. Lésungserscheinung auf Kalkstein an der dalmatinischen Kiiste. Natur und Museum 62: 381-382. 1932. A solution figure (sun symbol) developed in aaa on the Dalmatian coast under conditions simulating those of a semi-arid climate. 1 Received January 28, 1937. 144 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 4 on the margin and hirsute at summit; ligule about 0.7 mm long; blades flat, spreading, 3 to 6 cm long, 2 to 5 mm wide (the uppermost reduced) papillose- hirsute on both surfaces; racemes solitary, terminal and axillary, on long slender peduncles, usually two from the uppermost sheath, 4 to 7 cm long, subarcuate, the rachis about 1 mm wide, pubescent at the very base, other- wise glabrous; spikelets in pairs, 2.2 to 2.8 mm long, about 1.2 mm wide, slightly purple tinged; first glume obsolete on both spikelets of the pair or developed as a very minute truncate scale on a few spikelets; second glume about half as long as the spikelet, 3-nerved; sterile lemma rather firm in texture, 3-nerved, its membranaceous palea well developed but empty; fruit about 2.1 mm long, pale, minutely papillose-striate. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium no. 1611719, collected at 1,080 meters altitude at Vigas, Temascaltepec District, State of Mexico, Mexico, September 22, 1932, by George B. Hinton (no. 1807). This is part of a single specimen received for study from Kew Herbarium and returned to that institution. The species is closely related to Paspalum pilosum Lam., and P. Peckii ¥. T. Hubb., differing from both chiefly in the smaller spikelets and short second glume. It differs also in that the first glume is alike in both spikelets of the pair, whereas in P. pilosum and P. Peckii the first glume is unequally developed in those of the pair. Paspalum Altsoni Chase, sp. nov. Perenne; culmi ramosi, decumbentes; laminae planae, 5-11 em longae, 5-11 mm latae; pedunculi 2—4 e vagina suprema; racemi solitarii, 2-5 em longi; spiculae geminae, 2.5-2.7 mm longae, circa 1.5 mm latae; gluma prima spiculae superioris parva, ea spiculae inferioris quam spicula 2—4-plo brevior; gluma secunda et lemma sterile 5-nervia, gluma quam lemma brevior; fructus subtilissime papilloso-striatus. Perennial in small tufts; culms spreading or prostrate, freely branching, the branches somewhat divergent; sheaths loose, shorter than the internodes, or the lower overlapping, glabrous or the margin ciliate toward the summit; ligule about 2 mm long; blades flat, 5 to 11 em long, 5 to 11 mm wide (the uppermost somewhat reduced), slightly narrowed to a rounded base, very sparsely pilose on the upper surface near the base or glabrous, the margin finely fluted below, the pale midnerve prominent beneath; peduncles 2 to 4 from the upper and middle sheaths, subfiliform, finally long-exserted, the later axillary ones concealed in the sheaths until the maturity of the primary racemes; racemes solitary, 2 to 5 cm long, straight or slightly arcuate, the rachis slender, slightly channeled; spikelets in pairs, the pairs somewhat distant, 2.5 to 2.7 mm long, about 1.5 mm wide, elliptic-obovate; first glume small and nerveless on the upper spikelet of the pair, l-nerved, subacute and one-quarter to one-half as long as the spikelet on the lower spikelet, both glabrous or with a few weak hairs; second glume and sterile lemma 5-nerved, rather firm in texture, with a few scattered hairs or glabrous, the glume slightly shorter than the spikelet; fruit nearly the size of the spikelet, pale-stramineous, minutely papillose-striate. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium no. 1539437, collected in moist sandy crevices on rocks in the open, at about 75 meters altitude, Macreba Falls, ‘“Kurapung River,” in the upper Mazaruni District, British Guiana, September 3, 1925, by R. A. Altson (no. 392). Apri 15, 1937 CHASE: PASPALUM 145 In this species the habit and foliage resemble those of Paspalum decumbens Swartz and P. nutans Lam., but the spikelets are larger with the first glumes of the pair dissimilar as in P. pzlosum Lam. and its close allies. Paspalum petilum Chase, sp. nov. Perenne; culmi graciles, ascendentes, 15-22 cm alti, foliosi; laminae planae, 3-10 cm longae, 3-4 mm latae, glabrae; pedunculi 2-3 ex vagina suprema; racemi solitarii, terminales et axillares, 1-2.5 cm longi, arcuati; spiculae geminae, 1.7—1.8 mm longae, circa 1.1 mm latae; gluma prima parva, obtusa, in margine pubescens; gluma secunda et lemma sterile pubescentia; fructus subtilissime papilloso-striatus. Perennial in small tufts; culms slender, ascending or spreading, 15 to 22 em tall, leafy throughout, the uppermost blade often equaling the inflo- rescence; nodes appressed-pubescent to glabrescent; sheaths mostly over- lapping, densely pubescent along the margin and on the collar; ligule about 1 mm long; blades flat, 3 to 10 cm long, 3 to 4 mm wide, tapering to the often folded base, glabrous, the pale midnerve prominent beneath; peduncles 2 or 3 from the upper sheath, filiform; racemes solitary, 1 to 2.5 cm long, arcuate, the rachis slender, slightly channeled; spikelets in pairs, scarcely crowded, 1.7 to 1.8 mm long, about 1.1 mm wide, elliptic-obovate; first glumes similar on the spikelets of the pair, short, obtuse, nerveless, pubescent on the margin; second glume and sterile lemma 3-nerved or obscurely 5- nerved, sparsely pubescent, the glume two-thirds or three-fourths as long as the spikelet; fruit about 1.6 mm long, pale, very minutely-papillose- striate. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium no. 1298462, collected on wet rocks, China Creek, Konawaruk River [County of Essequibo], British Guiana, September 1906, by A. W. Bartlett (Bot. Gard. Georgetown Herb. no. 8569). In habit this species resembles Paspalum dispar Chase, of Hispaniola, but differs in having smaller pubescent spikelets and first glumes similar on the spikelets of the pair. In P. dispar the glume on the lower spikelet is about two-thirds as long as the spikelet. Paspalum ionanthum Chase, sp. nov. Perenne, caespitosum; culmi ascendentes, 15-40 ecm alti, paucifolii; vaginae compressae; laminae planae aut subinvolutae, 0.5-8 cm longae; racemi 2, subconjugati, ascendentes, 3-5.5 cm longi; spiculae solitariae, 3.4-3.7 mm longae, circa 1.5 mm latae, ellipticae, glabrae, saepius purpur- ascentes; gluma et lemma sterile aequalia, 5-nervia, minute apiculata; fructus subtilissime papilloso-striatus. Perennial in dense hard tufts with numerous short leafy sterile shoots at base; culms ascending, compressed, 15 to 40 cm tall, with a single node above the base; sheaths compressed, those of the sterile shoots short, over- lapping, sparsely hirsute to glabrous, mostly stiffly ciliate, at least toward the summit, those of the culms longer, glabrous; ligule almost obsolete; blades firm, flat to subinvolute, those of the sterile shoots 5 to 8 cm long, 2 to 5 mm wide, those of the culms 0.5 to 4 em long, all ciliate at the very base; racemes 2, subconjugate, ascending, 3 to 5.5 cm long, the rachis about 0.8 mm wide, with a few hairs at base, otherwise glabrous, one of the pair usually naked at the very base; spikelets solitary, 3.4 to 3.7 mm long, about 146 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 4 1.5 mm wide, elliptic, glabrous, mostly purple-tinged; glume and sterile lemma equal, rather firm in texture, 5-nerved, minutely apiculate at the subacute apex; fruit pale, about the size of the spikelet, minutely papillose- striate. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium no. 1037280, collected in the region of Lake Ypacaray, in central Paraguay, in December 1913, by Dr. E. Hassler (no. 12383). This species belongs in the Notata group and is most nearly related to P. almum Chase, of Texas, southern Brazil, and Paraguay. It differs from that in the numerous short sterile shoots, the shorter much firmer blades, in the shorter stiffer racemes, and in the larger spikelets. The type collection was named by Dr. Hassler as a variety of Paspalum notatum Fligge. The varietal name is unpublished and cannot be used as a specific name because it is preoccupied. Paspalum almum was described? from Texas. At the time I hesitated to cite the South American specimens, but further study leaves no doubt that they belong to the same species as the Texas material. Three racemes are not infrequent in the South American specimens and in one specimen there are 5 and in another 6 racemes. A specimen of this species, No. 21 Plantae Pilcomayenses, collected in 1906 in the Gran Chaco by Theodore Rojas, custodian of the Hassler Herbarium, was described by Hackel as Paspalum ovale Nees var. apiculatum Hack.* An examination of Nees’ type of P. ovale, in the Berlin Herbarium, shows that it is not the species to which Hackel applied the name. The name ‘‘apiculatum”’ could not be used because it is preoccupied by P. apiculatum Doell, 1877. The following South American specimens are referred to Paspalum almum: Braziu: Porto Esperanga, on Rio Paraguay, Matto Grosso, Chase 11078, 11095, 11109. Paracuay: Gran Chaco, Rojas 21. Puerto Santa Rita, Rojas 2675 (Hort. Paraguayensis 11071). Rio Verde, Herter 4831. San Bernardino, Rojas 1660. Lake Ypacaray, Hassler 12334. Urucuay: Santa Rosa Cuareim, Herter 336 i (Herter Herb. 82565). ARGENTINA: Mercedes, Prov. Corrientes, Parodi 6370. Formosa, Parodi 2936 (collector unknown). ZOOLOGY.—North American monogenetic trematodes. I. The superfamily Gyrodactyloidea.1. EMMETT W. Pricn, U.S. Bureau of Animal Industry. Genus Darrrrosoma Johnston and Tiegs, 1922 Diagnosis.—Body with constriction about one-third of length from an- 2 This JouRNAL 23: 137, fig. 1, 1933. 3’ Repert. Sp. Nov. Fedde 6: 341. 1909. 1 Continued from This JouRNAL, 27: 114-130. 1937. APRIL 15, 1937 PRICE: TREMATODES 147 terior end; 3 pairs of head organs. Haptor not distinctly set off from body proper, with 2 pairs of large hooks—ventral pair larger than dorsal— articulating at their bases with a long, transverse, cuticular bar, and with 1 pair of marginal hooklets. Eyes present. Intestinal branches without diverticula, united posteriorly. Vitellaria not extending into posterior third of body. Vagina present. Type species.—Daitreosoma constrictum Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. Two species, D. constrictum from Therapon carbo Ogilby and McCulloch, and D. bancrofti from T. hilli Castelnau, have been described from Australia by Johnston and Tiegs (1922); neither of these species is known from North American hosts. Genus EMpLEvUROSOMA Johnston and Tiegs, 1922 Diagnosis.—Body with strongly developed lateral regions; 4 pairs of head organs. Haptor not distinctly set off from body proper, with 2 pairs of large hooks and 1 pair of marginal hooklets as in Daztreosoma. Vagina absent. Other characters as in Daitreosoma. Type species.—Empleurosoma pyriforme Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. This genus contains only the type species; it was described from the gills of an Australian fresh-water fish, Therapon unicolor Gunther. Genus ANcHYLopIscus Johnston and Tiegs, 1922 Diagnosis.—Body without lateral constrictions and without strongly de- veloped lateral regions. Haptor not distinctly set off from body proper, with 2 pairs of very large hooks supported by 2 cuticular bars, and with 14 marginal hooklets. Intestinal branches without diverticula and not uniting posteriorly. Eyes present. Vitellaria extending into posterior third of body. Vagina absent. Type species.—Anchylodiscus tandani Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. Two species have been described as belonging to this genus, namely, A. tandani Johnston and Tiegs from the gills of Tandanus tandanus, and A. gadopsis Hughes from the gills of Gadopsis sp.; both species are from Australian hosts. Genus MurRRAYTREMA Price, 1937 Diagnosis.—Cephalic glands opening to exterior through 4 pairs of head organs. Haptor large, with 2 pairs of large hooks separated by 3 transversely placed non-articulate bars; 14 marginal hooklets. Intestinal branches not uniting posteriorly. Eyes present. Testis and ovary in equatorial zone. Cirrus with accessory piece. Vagina present, opening ventrally and medially. Type species.—Murraytrema robusta (Murray, 1931) n. comb. The type and only species of the genus was described as Ancyrocephalus robusta by Murray (1931) from specimens collected from the gills of Sparus australis Gunther in Australia. Murraytrema (Price, 1937) differs from Ancyrocephalus in having 3 haptoral bars instead of 2 as in the latter genus, and the vagina opens ventrally and medially in Murraytrema and laterally in Ancyrocephalus. 148 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 4 Genus CLErpopiscus Mueller, 1934 Diagnosis.—Cephalic glands opening to exterior through several (4 to 6) pairs of head organs. Haptor discoid, with 2 pairs of large hooks separated by 2 non-articulated bars, and with 14 marginal hooklets. Eyes present. Testis and ovary in equatorial zone. Cirrus simple, with movable accessory piece. Vitellaria extending into posterior third of body. Vagina present, open- ing on left body margin. Type species.—Cleidodiscus robustus Mueller, 1934. The genus Cleidodiscus contains the following species, all being from North American fresh-water fishes: Clezdodiscus bedardi Mizelle, 1926, from Xenotis megalotis (Rafinesque); C. capax Mizelle, 1926, from Pomozis sparoides (Lacépéde); C. floridanus Mueller, 1936, from Ictalurus punctatus (Ra- finesque); C’. formosus (Mueller, 1936), from Pomoxis sparoides (Lacépéde) ; C’. incisor Mizelle, 1936, from Lepomis pallidus (Mitchill); C. longus Mizelle 1936, from Pomozis sparoides (Lacépéde); C. mirabilis Mueller, 1937, from Leptops olivaris (Rafinesque); C. pricet Mueller, 1936, from Ameiurus natalis (Le Sueur) and A. nebulosus (Le Sueur); C. nematocirrus Mueller, 1937, from Eupomotis gibbosus (Linn.); C. robustus Mueller, 1934, from £. gib- bosus (Linn.) and Lepomis pallidus (Mitchill); C. stentor Mueller, 1937, from Amboplites rupestris (Rafinesque); C. uniformis Mizelle, 1936, from Pomoxis annularis Rafinesque; and C. vancleaver Mizelle, 1936, from P. annularis Rafinesque. Genus AcTINOCLEIDUS Mueller, 1937 Diagnosis. Haptor disc-like, flattened, with 2 pairs of large hooks, similar and about equal in length; haptoral bars with bases articulating; 14 marginal hooklets. Cirrus with movable accessory piece. Vagina present, opening on left body margin. Other characters as in Cleidodiscus. Type species.—Actinocleidus oculatus (Mueller, 1934) Mueller, 1937. Representatives of this genus are known only from North American fresh- water fishes; the genus contains the following species: Actinocleidus articu- laris (Mizelle, 1936), from Xenotis megalotis (Rafinesque); A. bursatus (Mueller, 1936), from Micropterus salmoides; A. fusiformis (Mueller, 1934) (syn., Ancyrocephalus cruciatus of Cooper, 1915), from Micropterus dolomieu Lacépéde; A. gracilis Mueller, 1937, from Lepomis pallidus (Mitchill); A. maculatus Mueller, 1937, from Hupomotis gibbosus (Linn.); and A. oculatus (Mueller, 1934), from Hupomotis gibbosus (Linn.). Genus ARISTOCLEIDUS Mueller, 1936 Diagnosis.—Large hooks of haptor dissimilar, those of ventral pair with slender, angular blades and biramous roots, while those of dorsal pair have curved blades and only slightly biramous roots; haptoral bars non-articulat- ing; 14 marginal hooklets present. Cirrus with immovable accessory piece. Vagina present, opening on right body margin. Other characters as in Clerdodiscus. Type species.—Aristocleidus hastatus Mueller, 1936. Apri 15, 1937 PRICE: TREMATODES 149 This genus contains only the type species which occurs on the gills of Roccus lineatus in Florida. Mueller (1936) in his description of this form was in error as regards the position of the large hooks and in the number of marginal hooklets. The large hooks which he termed the ventrals are actually the dorsals and vice versa; there are 14 marginal hooklets instead of 12 as originally given. Genus TETRACLEIDUS Mueller, 1936 Diagnosis—Haptor small, poorly set off from body. Large hooks about equal in size; bars non-articulating. Marginal hooklets probably 14 in num- ber. Vagina present, opening on right body margin. Other characters similar to those of Clezdodiscus. Type species.—Tetracleidus banghami Mueller, 1936. This genus contains only the type species which occurs on the gills of Micropterus dolomieu Lacépéde. It is questionable whether the genus Tetracleidus should be regarded as distinct from Clezdodiscus, since appar- ently the only important difference between the two genera is the position of the vaginal aperture. Genus LeptociEIpus Mueller, 1936 Diagnosis.—Haptor small, poorly set off from body. Large hooks approxi- mately equal; bars rudimentary, non-articulating; marginal hooklets prob- ably 14 in number. Cirrus long, slender, lying in a large coil and passing to exterior through a grooved cuticularized vestibule or accessory piece. Vagina (?). Other characters as in Clezdodiscus. Type species.—Leptocleidus megalonchus Mueller, 1936. The type and only species of this genus occurs on the gills and in the throat of Micropterus dolomieu Lacépéde. This species appears to be the form described by Cooper (1915) as Ancyrocephalus paradoxus. Genus Urocueipus Mueller, 1934 Diagnosis.—Haptor wedge shaped; large hooks of about equal size; bars non-articulating; marginal hooklets relatively small, 14 in number. Vagina absent. Other characters as in Clezdodiscus. Type species.—Urocleidus aculeatus (Van Cleave and Mueller, 1932) Mueller, 1934. The genus Urocleidus contains two valid North American species, U. aculeatus (Van Cleave and Mueller), from Stizostedion vitreus (Mitchill) and U. adspectus Mueller, 1936, from Perca flavescens (Mitchill). Urocleidus angularis Mueller, 1934, from Fundulus diaphanus menona (Jordan and Copeland) was recently removed by Mueller (1936) from this genus to Ancyrocephalus, the latter being used in a general sense. The writer has studied the original specimens of U. angularis and is in agreement with Mueller that this species does not belong in Urocleidus s. str.; however, he sees no reason why it should be transferred to Ancyrocephalus, since it is more closely related to Urocleidus than to Ancyrocephalus. 150 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 Genus ONcHOCLEIDUS Mueller, 1936 Diagnosis—Haptor wedge-shaped, with 2 pairs of large hooks and 2 non-articulating bars; 14 marginal hooklets present, these hooklets relatively large, 6 pairs being arranged around anterior edge of haptor and having their tips directed forward. Cirrus corkscrew-shaped, or simple with spiral fin, usually with immovable accessory piece. Vagina, when present, opening on right body margin. Other characters as in Clezdodiscus. ‘Type species.—Onchocleidus ferox (Mueller, 1934) Mueller, 1936. This genus contains at present 11 species, all being from North America; these are: Onchocleidus contortus Mueller, 1937, from Micropterus salmoides; O. distinctus Mizelle, 1986, from Xenotis megalotis (Rafinesque); O. ferox (Mueller, 1934), from Hupomotis gibbosus (Linn.); O. helicis Mueller, 1936, from Micropterus salmoides; O. interruptus Mizelle, 1936, from Morone interrupta Gill; O. mimus Mueller, 1936, from Lepibema chrysops (Ra- finesque) and (?) Esox reticulatus Le Sueur; O. mucronatus Mizelle, 1936, from Helioperca incisor (Cuv. and Valenc.), Allotis humilis (Giard), and Eupomotis gibbosus (Linn.); O. perdix Mueller, 1937, from Lepomis pallidus (Mitchill); O. principalis Mizelle, 1936, from Micropterus pseudaplites Hubbs; O. semilis Mueller, 1936, from Huwpomotis gibbosus (Linn.); and O. spiralis Mueller, 1937, from Eupomotis gibbosus (Linn.). Genus PrrrocLerpus Mueller, 1937 Diagnosis.—Each large haptoral hook with wing-like blade arising near angle and passing parallel to point for about two-thirds its length. Vagina present, opening on right body margin. Other characters as in Onchocleidus. Type species.—Pterocleidus acer (Mueller, 1936) Mueller, 1937. In addition to the type species, which occurs on the gills of Hupomotis gibbosus (Linn.), this genus contains P. acuwminatus (Mizelle, 1936) from Xenotis megalotis (Rafinesque); and P. biramosus Mueller, 1937, from Lepomis pallidus (Mitchill). Genus HapiLocueripus Mueller, 1937 Diagnosis.—Large haptoral hooks similar but unequal, those of ventral pair about one-half as large as those of dorsal pair. Vagina present (?always), opening on left body margin. Other characters similar to those of Oncho- cleidus. Type species.—Haplocleidus dispar (Mueller, 1936) Mueller, 1937. This genus contains six species, namely, Haplocleidus affinis Mueller, 1937, and H. dispar (Mueller, 1936), from Eupomotis gibbosus (Linn.); H. furcatus Mueller, 1937, from Micropterus salmoides; H. monticellit (Cognetti de Martiis, 1925), from Haustor catus (Linn.); and H. siluri (Zandt, 1924), and H. vistulensis (Siwak, 1932), from Silurus glanis Linn. The species described by Siwak (1932) as Ancyrocephalus vistulensis does not differ from H. siluri (Zandt), except in the number of marginal hooklets and in the character of the vagina. According to Zandt (1924) there are 16 APRIL 15, 1937 PRICE: TREMATODES 151 marginal hooklets in H. siluri, whereas Siwak states that there are only 12 in H. vistulensis; apparently both figures are incorrect, the probable num- ber in both cases being 14. Siwak states that the vagina is non-cuticularized in H. siluri and cuticularized in H. vistulensis. In spite of the differences mentioned above, the two species are identical in other respects, and both are from the same host and from the same region (Poland). The species which Cognetti de Martiis (1925) described as Ancyrocephalus monticellit was collected in Italy from an American catfish. In this species the hooks of the dorsal pair were stated to be the largest; however, it seems probable from the description and figure of the bars and hooks that he was mistaken in the position of these structures, and it is on this assumption that the species is included in the genus Haplocleidus. Genus AMPHIBDELLA Chatin, 1874 Diagnosis.—Body greatly elongated, fusiform; 3 pairs of head organs. Haptor lobed, distinctly set off from body proper, with 2 pairs of large similar hooks and 14 marginal hooklets; large hooks not supported by cuticular bars. Intestinal branches not united posteriorly. Eyes absent. Testis and ovary in anterior part of body, the latter elongated and curved, lying partly in extraintestinal field. Vitellaria confined to region posterior to ootype. Vagina present. Type species —Amphibdella torpedinis Chatin, 1874. The genus Amphibdella contains only two species, A. torpedinis Chatin, 1874, and A. flavolineata MacCallum, 1916, the latter being a North Ameri- can form. Amphibdella flavolineata MacCallum, 1916 Figs. 1—4 Description.—Body elongate, more or less fusiform, 3.8 to 4.8 mm long by 510 to 680u wide. Cephalic glands lateral, prepharyngeal, opening through 3 pairs of head organs situated near anterior end. Haptor lobed, about 425 to 475u wide, armed with 2 pairs of large similar hooks and 14 marginal hooklets; large hooks 150 to 160u long, blade without shoulder- like process near base, otherwise similar to those of A. torpedinis; marginal hooklets about 10u long, one on each lobe of haptor. Oral aperture ventral, median, about 190 to 230u from anterior end of body; pharynx globular, 133 to 152u in diameter; esophagus very short, with a group of unicellular glands on each side; intestinal branches simple, extending to distal limits of vitel- laria, not united posteriorly. Nervous and excretory systems not observed; eyes absent. Genital aperture median, near intestinal bifurcation. Cirrus slender, tubular, about 100u long, with very complicated accessory piece; seminal vesicle conspicuous, S-shaped. Testis single, sinistral, largely ob- scured by vitellaria. Ovary elongated, curved, opposite testis, lying partly in extraintestinal field. Vitellaria extracecal, consisting of large follicles ar- ranged in linear series and extending from level of base of ootype to near posterior end of body proper. Vagina present, heavily cuticularized, near right margin of body immediately anterior to ovary, connected with a rela- tively large seminal receptacle. Ootype relatively slender, its base sur- rounded by unicellular glands. No eggs observed. Host.—Tetranarce occidentalis (Storer) and “‘sting ray.’ Location.—Gills. 152 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 4 Distribution.—United States (Woods Hole, Mass.). Specimens.—U. 8. N. M. Helm. Coll. Nos. 35159 (cotypes), 35204 and 35699. Figs. 1-4.—Amphibdella flavolineata. 1, Complete worm, ventral view; 2, large haptoral hook; 3, cirrus and accessory piece; 4, vagina. Original. Figs. 5-8.— Amphibdelloides maccallumi. 5, Complete worm, ventral view; 6, haptoral hooks and bar (A—large hooks, B—bar); 7, cirrus and accessory piece; 8, vagina. Original. Specimens of this species were collected by Dr. G. A. MacCallum at Woods Hole, Mass., July 6, 1914, and on August 21, 1922, from a torpedo, ApRIL 15, 1937 PRICE: TREMATODES 153 Tetranarce occidentalis and later, July 20, 1923, a single specimen was col- lected by him from a ‘‘sting ray.”’ This species is quite similar to Amphzbdella torpedinis Chatin from which it differs principally in the morphology of the large hooks. In A. torpedinis the blade of the large hook is slender and widens more or less abruptly shortly before joining with the root or biramous portion, thus giving rise to a shoulder-like offset, while in A. flavolineata the blade of the hook is not so slender and tapers uniformly from the tip to the point of union with the root. This difference is, admittedly, slight, but con- stant so far as the writer has been able to ascertain. This shoulder-like offset is clearly shown in the figures of A. torpedinis as given by Chatin (1874) and by Ruszkowski (1931). In addition to the hooks, there appears to be considerable difference in the male copulatory organ. Genus AMPHIBDELLOIDES Price, 1937 Synonym.—Amphibdella Chatin, 1874, in part. Diagnosis.—Haptor not lobed; large hooks supported by a single cuticular bar. Other characters as in Amphibdella. Type species —Amphibdelloides maccallumi (Johnston and Tiegs, 1922). Amphibdelloides maccallumi (Johnston and Tiegs, 1922), n. comb. Figs. 5-8 Synonyms.—Amphibdella torpedinis Perugia and Parona, 1889, not Chatin, 1874; A. torpedinis MacCallum, 1916, not Chatin, 1874; A. mac- callumi Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. Description.—Body slender, 1.1 to 3.56 mm long by 255 to 476 wide. Cephalic glands abundant, forming a band across body anterior to pharynx and extending backward on each side to near level of genital aperture, opening to exterior through 3 pairs of head organs situated near anterior end of body. Haptor not lobed, 210 to 425u wide, armed with 2 pairs of large hooks and 14 marginal hooklets, the large hooks supported by a single cuticular bar; large hooks 133 to 170u long, shape similar to those of Amphibdella flavolineata; marginal hooklets about 10u long; cuticular sup- porting bar slightly curved, 64 to 95u by 19u, concavity directed anteriorly. Oral aperture ventral, median, about 133 to 170u from anterior end of body; pharynx globular, 76 to 95u in diameter; esophagus relatively long. Nervous and excretory systems not observed; eyes absent. Genital aperture median, near intestinal bifurcation. Cirrus slender, tubular, about 175y long; ac- cessory pieces 2 in number, one with single curved tip and other tridigitate, about 130 to 160u long. Testis elongate, median. Ovary elongate, slightly curved, median, pretesticular. Vitellaria lateral, consisting of large follicles uniting and forming a band across body at level of tips of intestinal ceca. Vagina slender, heavily cuticularized, opening near right margin of body at level of middle of ovary, and communicating with a large seminal recep- tacle lying along right margin of anterior part of ovary. Ootype and metra- term not discernable in available specimens. No eggs observed. Hosts.—Tetranarce occidentalis (Storer) and Squalus acanthias Linnaeus. Location.—Gills. Distribution.— United States (Woods Hole, Mass.). Specimens.—U. 8. N. M. Helm. Coll. Nos. 35700 (cotypes), 25701 and 35652. 154 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 This appears to be the species described as Amphibdella torpedinis by Perugia and Parona (1889) and later redescribed by Parona and Perugia (1890) from specimens obtained from Torpedo marmorata in the Mediter- ranean region. Perugia and Parona show that the large haptoral hooks are supported by a single transverse bar, but in the redescription they report the species as having 2 bars; this latter report appears in the light of the present study to be an error. The specimens upon which the above description is based were collected by Dr. G. A. MacCallum at Woods Hole, Mass., and described by him in 1916 as Amphibdella torpedinis Chatin. This species resembles Amphibdella torpedinis and A. flavolineata in a general way but differs from them in having an unlobed haptor and large hooks supported by a transverse cuticular bar. Genus TETRANCISTRUM Goto and Kikuchi, 1917 Diagnosis.—Anterior end with 2 to 3 pairs of head organs. Haptor small, not distinctly set off from body proper, with 2 pairs of similar, and almost equal, large hooks supported by 2 cuticular bars, and sometimes, if not al- ways, with (?) 14 marginal hooklets. Intestine united posteriorly. Eyes absent. Vagina present. Type species.—Tetrancistrum siganit Goto and Kikuchi, 1917. Tetrancistrum longiphallus (MacCallum, 1915), n. comb. Figs. 9-11 Synonyms.—Diplectanum longiphallus MacCallum, 1915; Ancyrocephalus longiphallus (MacCallum, 1915) Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. Description.—Body more or less fusiform, 1.4 mm long by 255u wide; cephalic glands opening through 2 pairs of head organs. Haptor 133y wide, not distinctly set off from body proper, provided with 2 pairs of large hooks supported by 2 transverse bars, and with a number, possibly 14, marginal hooklets. Large hooks about equal in size, 57u long, differing only slightly in morphology; ventral bar 53u long, narrow, bifid at ends; dorsal bar 38u by 15u; marginal hooklets very delicate, about 10u long. Oral aperture ventral, about 95u from anterior end of body; pharynx 75y long by 53u wide; intestine not observed. Eyes absent. Cirrus simple, tubular, about 140u long; seminal vesicle curved, to left of ootype. Testis elongate oval, some- what lobed, about 300u long by 95u wide, postequatorial. Ovary oval, about 150u long by 60u wide, immediately pretesticular. Vitellaria extending from level of pharynx to about 250u from posterior end of body, meeting in median field posterior to testis. Vagina present, opening near right margin of body near level of base of cirrus. Ootype elongated, its base surrounded by long-necked unicellular glands. Egg oval, about 75u long by 50y wide, with relatively long filament at one pole. Host.—Chaetodipterus faber (Broussonet). Location.—Gills. Distribution.— United States (New York Aquarium). Specimens.—U. 8. N. M. Helm. Coll. No. 35702 (cotypes). This species was described under the name Diplectanum longiphallus by MacCallum (1915) from specimens collected from the gills of a spade fish, January 23, 1915, at the New York Aquarium. The material consists of a APRIL 15, 1937 PRICE: TREMATODES 155 few badly preserved and distorted specimens, only one specimen being in a suitable condition for description. A comparison of the available specimens with the description as given by MacCallum shows that the original descrip- tion is inadequate in many respects. The measurements are not in agreement with those obtained by the present writer, the mouth is ventral instead of terminal, and no eyes are present; the cirrus is much shorter than Mac- Callum’s measurements indicate, being about 140y long instead of 250u and the egg is about 75y long instead of 20u as stated by MacCallum. A comparison of this species with descriptions of Tetrancistrum sigani Goto and Kikuchi (1917) from Siganus fuscescens Houttuyn from Japan, and of T. lutiant Tubangui (1931) from Lutianus lioglossus (Bleeker) from the Philippines, indicates that Diplectanum longiphallus MacCallum belongs in the genus Tetrancistrum rather than in Diplectanum, or in Ancyrocephalus where it was placed by Johnston and Tiegs (1922). The small size of the haptor, the similarity of the anterior and posterior hooks, the stalked Mehlis’ glands, and the absence of eyes are characters which suggest affinities with Tetrancistrum rather than with Ancyrocephalus; the absence of squamodiscs alone excludes this species from Diplectanum. Tetrancistrum longiphallus may be easily distinguished from the other two species of Tetrancistrum on the morphology of the large haptoral hooks and of the ventral bar. The hooks of T’. longiphallus have blades more widely curved and longer than those of the other species, and the ventral bar is bifid at the extremities instead of rounded as in T’. siganz. Goto and Kikuchi (1917), as well as Tubangui (1931), state that the marginal hooklets of the haptor are absent in the genus Tetrancistrum. In T. longiphalius marginal hooks were found to be present although the exact number was not ascertainable; these hooklets are very small and trans- parent, and could be definitely detected only after careful study under an oil immersion objective. The fact that these hooklets are difficult to detect suggests that they were overlooked by the above mentioned authors. GENUS INQUIRENDUM Dactytopiscus Olsson, 1893 Diagnosis.—Cephalic glands and head organs (?); haptor pedunculated, lobed, with 2 pairs of hooks, the dorsal hooks being the largest, and having a peculiarly-shaped middle piece; marginal hooklets (?). Eyes present. Testis and ovary entire, equatorial. Cirrus simple. Vagina (?). Type species.—Dactylodiscus borealis Olsson, 1893. This inadequately characterized genus was proposed by Olsson (1893) for D. borealis, a species, found on the gills of Thymallus vulgaris and Coregonus lavaretus. Johnston and Tiegs regard Dactylodiscus as a subgenus of Ancyro- cephalus, but owing to the inadequacy of the description of the type and only species, the writer prefers to retain it as a genus inquirendum until a more complete description is available. 156 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 Subfamily DIPLECTANINAE Monticelli, 1903 Synonym.—Lepidotreminae Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. Diagnosis.—Body, especially posterior half, covered with anteriorly directed scale-like spines; cephalic glands present, opening to exterior through head organs. Posterior haptor with accessory structures (dorsal and ventral) or ‘‘squamodises,’’ consisting of sessile or subsessile dises covered with concentric rows of scale-like spines, or of lamellae, with or without accessory hooks; haptor with 2 pairs of large hooks and basal sup- porting bars, and usually, if not always, with 14 marginal hooklets. In- testinal branches ending blindly, without diverticula. Eyes present, 2 pairs. Cirrus simple or complex. Testis and ovary without lobes. Vagina present. Type genus.—Diplectanum Diesing, 1858. KEY TO GENERA OF DIPLECTANINAE 1. Squamodiscs consisting of concentric rows of paired lamellae.......... MRA ONL ce Rtas ci be a2 3 <<, vine ae oH el Lamellodiscus Johnston and Tiegs Squamodiscs consisting of concentric rows of scale-like spines or spine-like A010) <<) ee og GRE le RG my 2 2. Squamodiscs with backwardly projecting groups of spine-like hooks. ... Ligh <2 CUM Cola 0, <0 Oe bt a ec SL eS Lepidotrema Johnston and Tiegs Squamodiscs without spine-like hooks............ Diplectanum Diesing Genus DipLEcTANUM Diesing, 1858 Synonyms.—Acleotrema Johnston and Tiegs, 1922; Lepidotes Johnston and Tiegs, 1922; Squamodiscus Yamaguti, 1934. Diagnosis.—Squamodises consisting of concentric rows of scale-like spines, without groups of accessory spine-like hooks. Large hooks of haptor sup- ported by 3 transverse cuticular bars. Vagina present or (?) absent. Type species.—Diplectanum aequans (Wagener, 1857) Diesing, 1858. The genus Diplectanum has been considered as identical with Ancyro- cephalus by most recent writers, including Johnston and Tiegs (1922), Fuhrmann (1928), Van Cleave and Mueller (1932) and Sprehn (1933). A review of the status of Diplectanuwm, however, indicates that it must be re- tained as a genus distinct from Ancyrocephalus. Diplectanum was proposed as a genus (not as a subgenus as Maclaren (1903) stated) by Diesing (1858) to include Dactylogyrus aequans Wagener, 1857, and D. pedatum Wagener, 1857. The genus was defined by Diesing as follows: ‘‘Plectana duo sessilia vel pedicellata.—Piscium marinorum ecto- parasitica.—Characteres reliqui ignoti.”’ The two species D. aequans and D. pedatum, which Diesing included in this genus, were named but not described by Wagener (1857a) who later in the same year (1857b) gave a brief characterization of these species; this description was barely generic but apparently enough to validate the species. Diesing did not designate a type for his genus Diplectanum and inasmuch as he listed D. aequans first, Stiles and Hassall (1908) have indicated that species as ‘‘probably type,” therefore, for all intents and purposes D. aequans (Wagener) may be regarded as type by subsequent designation. Apparently the reason that Diplectanum has not been more generally APRIL 15, 1937 PRICE: TREMATODES 157 recognized as a valid genus was owing to the very meagre characterization of the species included in that genus, but if one regards Wagener’s (1857b) description as sufficient to validate the species, as the present writer does, the genus must also be regarded as valid. Wagener’s description is as follows: “Dactylog. aequans (Branch. Labrax lupus) und pedatus (Julis spec. inc.) haben statt einer Schwanzscheibe deren zwei; die Innenflache dieser Organe ist mit in konzentrische Kreise gelegten Stabchen bekleidet.”’ “Die beiden Schwanzscheiben sind durch einen 3gliedrigen Apparat getrennt, dessen dussere Enden die scheerenartig gegeneinander beweglichen 2 grossen Hakenpaare tragen.”’ ‘“‘Die grossen Haken haben stets hautige Scheiden, deren Oeffnung meist von einer festen Einfassung umgeben ist.”’ Van Beneden and Hesse (1863), Stossich (1896) and Maclaren (1903) have given descriptions of a species from Labraz lupus, which they regard as D. aequans. These descriptions are of a worm the characters of which conform to those given above for Diplectanum, and in view of the fact that the worm described by these different authors was from Labrax lupus, the same host as that reported for D. aequans by Wagener, and from the same general geographic region, the writer believes that the species they had before them was D. aequans (Wagener). In view of the above, it appears that Johnston and Tiegs, as well as the other writers who have apparently followed their action, erred in consider- ing Diplectanum as a synonym of Ancyrocephalus, since the type species A. paradoxus, of the latter genus lacks the two accessory structures (squamo- discs) which are characteristic of D. aequans and, accordingly, of the genus Diplectanum. The genus Dziplectanum contains the following species: D. aculeatum Parona and Perugia, 1889; D. aequans (Wagener, 1857); D. americanum n. sp.; D. collinst (Mueller, 1936); D. echeneis (Wagener, 1857); D. fluviatilis (Johnston and Tiegs, 1922); D. girellae (Johnston and Tiegs, 1922); D. longipenis (Yamaguti, 1934); D. pedatum (Wagener, 1857); and D. sczaenae Beneden and Hesse, 1863. Of these species, D. pedatum from Julis sp.; D. sciaenae from Sciaena aquilla; D. aculeatum from Corvina nigra; and D. echeneis from Chrysops aurata, Sargus rondeletii and Pagrus vulgaris are inadequately described, although they probably are distinct species. Only two species, D. collinsi (Mueller) from Roccus lineatus, and D. americanum n. sp., are known to occur in North America. Diplectanum americanum, n. sp. Figs. 12-15 Description.—Body elliptical, 765u to 1.1 mm long- by 210 to 390u at level of ovary; posterior part of body armed with anteriorly directed scale- like spines extending forward almost to level of testis; anterior end of body rounded; cephalic glands present, opening to exterior through 4 pairs of head organs. Posterior haptor 170 to 190u wide, with dorsal and ventral 158 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 Squamodises, and armed with 2 pairs of large hooks supported by 3 trans- verse cuticular bars, and with 14 marginal hooklets. Squamodisces subsessile, about 120u in diameter, each consisting of 20 concentric rows of scales; hooks of ventral pair 76u long, those of dorsal pair 50y long; lateral sup- porting bars 76u long, middle bar 114u long, marginal hooklets about 10yu long. Oral aperture ventral, about 117» from anterior end of body; pharynx about 38 in diameter; intestinal branches not observed. Brain immediately anterior to pharynx; eyes present, 2 pairs, those of anterior pair smaller than those of posterior pair. Genital aperture not observed; male copulatory organ conspicuous, consisting of a simple cuticular tube (cirrus) 38u long and a reniform, apparently heavily cuticularized structure (?) ejaculatory bulb) 87u long by 38u wide, divided by septa into 4 compartments. Testis globular, about 45u in diameter, slightly postequatorial. Ovary piriform, 38u wide, partly overlapping testis. Vitellaria extending from level of posterior margin of pharynx to within short distance of anterior margins of squamodises. Vagina present; Mehlis’ gland conspicuous, surrounding ootype. No eggs observed. Host.—Promicrops itaiara (Lichtenstein). Location.—Gills. Distribution.—United States (New York Aquarium). Specimens.—U. 8. N. M. Helm. Coll. No. 35703 (type and paratypes). The above description is based on 5 stained and mounted specimens, col- lected by Dr. G. A. MacCallum, September 3, 1914, from Promicrops guttatus (=P. ttatara) at the New York Aquarium. Owing to the rather poor condition of the specimens, some of the details could not be made out. This species is easily distinguished from all other species of the genus by the peculiar structure of the male copulatory organ. Genus LepipoTREMA Johnston and Tiegs, 1922 Synonyms.—Flabellodiscus Johnston and Tiegs, 1922; Hmpleurodiscus Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. Diagnosis.—Dorsal and ventral squamodises composed of concentric rows of scale-like papillae, each with a number of backwardly projecting spine- like hooks arranged in a fan-like manner; large hooks of haptor supported by 4 cuticular bars articulating with a more or less complex central piece. Vagina present or absent. Type species.—Lepidotrema therapon Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. This genus and the subgenus Flabellodiscus (also used in the sense of a genus by Johnston and Tiegs), as well as Empleurodiscus, were proposed by Johnston and Tiegs (1922) for small monogenetic trematodes occurring on the gills of Australian fresh water fishes of the genus Therapon. These genera were regarded as distinct on the basis of characters such as the width of the haptor in comparison with body width, on the number of accessory spine-like hooks of the squamodiscs, and on the complexity of the male copulatory organs. In the writer’s opinion these characters are of specific rather than generic value, and Flabellodiscus and Empleurodiscus are dropped as synonyms of Lepidotrema. The genus as here constituted contains the species Lepidotrema therapon ApRIL 15, 1987 PRICE: TREMATODES 159 Johnston and Tiegs, from Therapon carbo Ogliby and McCulloch; L. tenue Johnston and Tiegs, 1922, from 7. hilli Castelnau; L. fuliginosum Johnston and Tiegs, 1922, from 7. fuliginosus Macleay; L. simplex (Johnston and Tiegs, 1922), from 7. fuliginosus Macleay; L. angustus (Johnston and Tiegs, 1922), from 7. wnicolor Gunther; and L. bidyana Murray, 1931, from Therapon bidyana (Mitchell). Genus LAMELLODIscus Johnston and Tiegs, 1922 Diagnosis.—Dorsal and ventral squamodiscs consisting of numerous con- centric rows of paired lamellae; large hooks of haptor supported by 3 cutic- ular bars. Vagina present. Type species.—Lamellodiscus typicus Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. In addition to Lamellodiscus typicus, which occurs on the gills of Sparus australis Gunther, Murray (1931) has described two species, L. pagrosomt, from Pagrosomus auratus, and L. major from Sparus australis. All three of the species are known only from Australia. Subfamily BOTHITREMATINAE Price, 1936 Diagnosis.—Cephalic glands scattered throughout the preoral part of body and not arranged in lateral groups as in other members of family, opening to exterior through 4 pairs of cup-like head organs. Haptor disc- like, with 1 pair of large hooks separated by 2 cuticular bars, and with 14 marginal hooklets; in addition to hooks and other cuticular structures, a row of radially arranged tube-like cuticular structures are present near the margin of the haptor. Intestine single, sac-like. Eyes present. Testis single, postovarial. Vagina (?). Type genus.—Bothitrema Price, 1936. Genus Botuitrema Price, 1936 Synonym.—Acanthocotyle Monticelli, 1888, in part. Diagnosis —With characters of subfamily. Type species.—Bothitrema bothi (MacCallum, 1913) Price (1936). Bothitrema bothi (MacCallum, 1913) Price, 1936 Figs. 16-19 Synonym.—Acanthocotyle botht MacCallum, 1913. Description.—Body elongate, 1.4 to 2.6 mm long by 255 to 390y wide, with distinct constriction in region of pharynx; anterior end angular, with 4 pairs of head organs apparently representing concentrations of ducts of numerous cephalic glands distributed throughout preoral portion of body. Haptor disc-like, 285 to 340u in diameter, its ventral surface concave and bearing 1 pair of large hooks, 14 marginal hooklets, 2 cuticular bars—l ventral and the other dorsal—and 52 to 60 radially arranged cuticular tube- like structures. Large hooks 120 to 133 long, their distal ends sharply pointed and recurved, and separated near their tips by a U-shaped cuticular bar 20 to 25u long by 22 to 30u wide; ventral cuticular bar somewhat H-shaped, 57u long by 40u wide, located between bases of large hooks; radial cuticular structures 65 to 90u long; marginal hooklets 15y long. Oral aperture ventral, 114 to 200u from anterior end of body; pharynx rectangu- lar, 100 to 114u long by 95 to 136u wide, its anterior end with papilla-like 160 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 projections; intestine single, median, sac-like, extending posteriorly as far as limits of vitellaria. Brain antero-dorsal of oral aperture; eyes present, 2 pairs, one pair close together and immediately dorsal of oral aperture and the other pair farther apart and at level of anterior margin of oral opening, Ry ACH S ie, BS WAG O SES Kes &: 2 3S IS oo s SS LAOS aes ROSS Sc Ae, exe = RoC ‘WAS O ‘WW S0'0 ‘WANSO0'O0 Figs. 9-11.—Tetrancistrum longiphallus. 9, Complete worm, dorsal view; 10, haptoral hooks and bars (A—large hooks, B—ventral bar, C—dorsal bar); 11, cirrus. Original. Figs. 12-15.—Diplectanum americanum. 12, Complete worm, ventral view; 13, large haptoral hooks (A—hook of ventral pair, B—hook of dorsal pair); 14, haptoral bars; 15, copulatory organ. Figs. 16-19.—Bothitrema bothi. 16, Complete worm, ventral view; 17, large haptoral hook; 18, supporting structures of haptor (A—ventral bar, B—dorsal bar, C—one of tube-like accessory structures); 19, cirrus and accessory piece. Original, APRIL 15, 1937 PRICE: TREMATODES 161 or slightly more anterior to that point. Genital aperture ventral, median, about midway between ovary and pharynx; cirrus simple, tubular, about 75u long, with complicated accessory piece about 55yu long. Testis single, globular, 130 to 170u in diameter, median, immediately postovarial. Ovary globular, 150 to 170u in diameter, about one-third of body length from anterior end and to right of median line; Mehlis’ gland voluminous, im- mediately preovarial. Vitelline follicles numerous, large, about 40 to 50u in diameter, extending from level of base of pharynx to near posterior end of body. Vagina not observed. Egg triangular, 50u wide, and with polar filament, according to MacCallum. Host.—Lophopsetta maculata (Mitchill). Location.—Gills. Distribution. United States (Woods Hole, Mass.). Specimens.—U. 8. N. M. Helm. Coll. No. 35186 (cotypes), 35704, 35705 and 35706. This species was originally described by MacCallum (1913) as Acantho- cotyle bothi from specimens collected in 1912 from Bothus maculatus (=Lophopsetta maculata). The description contained a number of errors of interpretation of the various structures, which he later (1916) attempted to correct. Unfortunately, however, he carried over into the redescription many of the errors originally made. The most outstanding of the misinter- pretations not corrected in the latter description were in regard to the number of testes, the character of the intestine, and the nature of the radial structures on the posterior haptor. According to MacCallum (1913) ‘‘there are about thirty-seven testes,’’ but actually there is only a single testis located immediately posterior to the ovary and this is the structure labeled “seminal reservoir’ in his figure; the structures which MacCallum regarded as testes were the large vitelline follicles lying over the intestinal cecum and which, owing apparently to some error of technique, took the stain some- what differently from the other follicles. The intestine consists of a single sac-like structure and not 2 ceca as indicated by MacCallum. The radial structures on the posterior haptor are not ‘‘really hooklets’” as MacCallum stated, but are rather heavily cuticularized tube-like pieces imbedded in the haptor. This species is apparently an aberrant member of the Dactylogyridae standing in a position intermediate between that family and the Mono- cotylidae. Its lack of laterally arranged cephalic glands suggests affinities with the Monocotylidae, but the presence of cuticular supporting bars be- tween the large hooks excludes it from that family. MacCallum’s inclusion of this form in the genus Acanthocotyle was ap- parently due to a misconception, since he regarded the tube-like structures on the posterior haptor as structures comparable to the radially arranged spines on the pseudohaptor? of Acanthocotyle. 2 The large terminal disc of Acanthocotyle is probably not homologous with the haptor of the tristomes, monocotylids and gyrodactylids, but is an added structure, the true haptor being the minute hook bearing disc located at the margin of the large disc or pseudohaptor. 162 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 Family CALCEOSTOMATIDAE (Parona and Perugia, 1890) emend. Price, 1937 Synonym.—Calceostomidae Parona and Perugia, 1890. Diagnosis.—Cephalic gland ducts not concentrated into head organs but remaining scattered over a considerable area on either side of anterior end of body, the anterior end being expanded and forming head lappets. Haptor sucker-like but not strongly muscular, with or without large hooks, with or (?) without marginal hooklets. Intestine with short diverticula. Eyes present or (?) absent. Testis single. Cirrus simple, cuticularized. Vagina present or absent. Type genus.—Calceostoma Beneden, 1852. KEY TO GENERA OF CALCEOSTOMATIDAE Via emer se ih Ws gts! o.ccb ioe alg date toa we oe ee Calceostoma Beneden Niacin GORE SOM so. ess) vis 2c ae » Sow So ee ee Fridericianella Brandes Genus CALCEOSTOMA Beneden, 1852 Diagnosis.—Anterior end of body expanded and forming large curled head lappets. Haptor cup-shaped, armed or (?) unarmed. Intestinal limbs with numerous short diverticula. Eyes present. Testis elongated. Ovary branched. Vagina absent. Type species.—Calceostoma calceostoma (Wagener, 1857) Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. This genus contains 3 species, C. calceostoma (Wagener, 1857) (syn., C. elegans Beneden, 1858), C. inerme Parona and Perugia, 1889; and C. glandulosum Johnston and Tiegs, 1922. No representative of the genus has been reported from North America. Genus FRIDERICIANELLA Brandes, 1894 Diagnosis.—Head lappets not as prominent as in Calceostoma. Haptor cup-like, with 1 pair of small centrally placed hooks; marginal hooklets (?) absent. Eyes absent. Intestinal branches with lateral diverticula, united by commisure posterior to testis. Testis single, rounded. Ovary tubular, median. Vagina present, opening laterally near equator of body. Type specres—Fridericianella ovicola Brandes, 1894. This genus contains only the type species which was described by Brandes (1894) from specimens collected from the eggs of Arius commersonii Lac., a fresh- and brackish-water fish from South Brazil. LITERATURE CITED ATKINS, C.G. The study of fish diseases. Trans. Amer. Fish. Soc. 30: 82-89. 1901. DE BEAUCHAMP, P. Isancistrum loliginis n. g., n. sp. Trématode parasite du Calmar et Vinexistence de Solenocotyle chiajet Diesing. Bull. Soc. zool. de France, Paris 37: 96-99) 1912. vAN BENEDEN, PIERRE JosEPH. Mémoire sur les vers intestinaux. viii+376 pp., Paris. 1858. VAN BENEDEN, PIERRE JosEPH, and Hessg, C. E. Recherches sur les bdelodes (hirudi- Fecal et les trématodes marins. Mem. Acad. roy. d. sci. de Belg., Brux. 34: 1-142. 1863 Bosc, Louts AUGUSTINE GUILLAUME. Sur deux nouveau genres de vers. N. Bull. d. sc. Soc. Philom., Paris, An. 4 (51), 2: 384-385. poo. Branves, Gustav. Fridericianella ovicola n. q- Ein neuer monogenetischer Trematod. Abhandl. d. naturf. Gesellsch. zu Hatig 20: 305-311. 1894. APRIL 15, 1937 PRICE: TREMATODES 163 Braun, Max. Vermes. Bronns Klassen u. Ordnung. d. Thier-Reichs, Leipz. 4. 1889-93. BycHowsky, Boris. Beitrag zur Kenntnis neuer monogenetischer Fischtrematoden aus dem Kaspisee nebst einigen Bemerkungen tiber die systematik der Monopisthodiscinea Fuhrmann. Zool. Anz., Leipzig 105: 17-38. 1933. Carus, J. Victor. Raderthiere, Wirmer, Echinodermen, Coelenteraten und Protozoen. (I z Peters; Carus; and Gerstaecker. Handbuch der Zoologie, Leipzig 2: 422-600). 1863. CHATIN, JOANNES. Ltudes sur des helminthes nouveaux ou peu connus. Ann. d. sc. nat., Paris Zool., 6.s.,1:18 pp. 1874. CoBBoLD, THoMAS SPENCER. Note on Gastrodiscus. Veterinarian, Lond. 50 (4. s.), 23: 326. 1877. CoGneTTI DE Martiis, L. Nuovo gryodactylide parassita nella cavita olfattiva di Amiurus catus L. Boll. Soc. d. nat. in Napoli, 1924, 36 (s. 2), 16 (ann. 38): 76-81. 1925. Cooprr, A. R. Trematodes from marine and fresh-water fishes, including one species of ectoparasitic turbellarian. Tr. Roy. Soc. Canada (Ottawa), Sect. 4, 3.s., 9: 181-205. 1915. Davis, H.S. Care and diseases of trout (Appendix IV to Report of U. S. Commissioner of Fisheries for 1929). Bureau Fish. Doc. (1061), Wash., pp. 119-171. 1929. Dissine, Kart Moritz. Vierzehn arten von Bdellideen. Denkschr. d. k. Akad. d. Wissensch., Wien. Math.-naturw. Cl. 13(1): 63-80. 1858. FROISSANT, ALBERT. Contribution a l’étude de quelques trématodes ectoparasites 86. (i) pp. Paris. 1930: FUHRMANN, OTTo. Zweite Klasse des Cladus Platyhelminthes: Trematoda. Handb. d. Zool. (Krumbach), Berl. & Leipz. 2 (3. lief., Teil 2, Bogen 1-8): 1-128. 1928. Goto, SeriTaro. Studies on the ectoparasitic trematodes of Japan. J. Coll. Sc., Imp. Univ., Tokyo 8: 1-273. 1894. Goto, SerTaro, and Kixucui, Hasimz. Two new trematodes of the family Gyrodacty- lidae. J. Coll. Sc., Imp. Univ., Tokyo 39 (4): 1-22. 1917. GUBERLET, JOHN E., HANSEN, Harry A., and KavaNnaGH, JEAN A. Studies on the control of Gyrodactylus. Univ. Washington Publications in Fisheries, Seattle, Wash. 2'(2): 1-13. 1927. Hess, Watter N. The life history and control of Dactylogyrus sp. J. Parasitol. 15: 138-139. 1928. Control of external fluke parasites on fish. J. Parasitol. 16: 131-136. 1930. JoHNsTON, T. Harvey, and Trees, O. W. New gyrodactylid trematodes from Aus- tralian fishes, together with a reclassification of the superfamily Gyrodactyliodea. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. South Wales, Sydney, (186), 47 (2): 83-131. 1922. KATHARINER, Lupwic. Die Gattung Gyrodactylus v. Nordm. Arb. a. d. zool. zootom. Inst. in Wurzb., Wiesb. 10: 125-164. 1895. Lite, Max. Parasitische Plattwiirmer. 1. Trematodes. Sisswasserfauna Deutsch- lands (Brauer), Jena 17: 1-217. 1909. MacCautuum, G. A. Notes on four trematode parasites of marine fishes. Centralb. f. Bakteriol. (etc.), Jena, 1 Abt., Orig., 70: 407-416. 1913. Some new species of ectoparasitic trematodes. Zoologica: Scient. Contrib. N. York Zool. Soc., N. Y. 1 (20): (893)-410. 1915. Acanthocotyle bothi n. sp. Centralb. f. Bakteriol. (etc.), 1. Abt., Orig., 77: 486-487. 1916. Some new species of parasitic trematodes from marine fishes. Zoopathologica, Ny Y..1 (1): ()—(G8)-. “1986: ue Some new forms of parasitic worms. Zoopathologica, N. Y. 1(2): (43)—75. 1917. Macrtaren, Norman H. W. Beittrdge zur Kenninis einiger Trematoden (Diplectanum see Wagener und Nematobothrium molae n. sp.). Diss. (Jena), pp. 573-618. 1903. DE acer Memoire sur quelques insectes. Obs. sur Phys. (etc.), 31: 207— 209. 1787. MizELLzE, Joun D. New species of trematodes from the gills of Illinois fishes. Amer. Midl. Nat. 17 (5): 785-806. 1936. MUELLER, Justus F. (Parasites of Oneida Lake fishes) Part IV. Additional notes on parasites of Oneida Lake fishes, including descriptions of new species. Roosevelt Wild Life Ann. 3 (3-4): 335-373. 1934. Studies on North American Gyrodactyloidea. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soe. 55 (1): 55-72. 1936. New gyrodactyloid trematodes from North American fishes. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc. 55 (4): 457-464. 1936. 164 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 MvELLER, Justus F. The Gyrodactylidae of North American fresh water fishes. Fish Culture 3(1): 1-14. 1937. Morray, Fuorence V. Gill trematodes from some Australian fishes. Parasitology 23: 492-506. 1981. OpHNER, T. Die Homologien der weiblichen Genitalwege bet den Trematoden und Cestoden. Zool. Anz. 39: 327-351. 1912. Ousson, PetER. Bidrag till skandinaviens helminthfauna. 2. K. Svenska Vetenak.- Akad. Handl., Stockholm, 25(2): 41 pp. 1898. Parona, C., and Preruaia, A. Nuove osservazion sull’ Amphibdella torpedinis eee Ann. mus. civ. di storia nat. di Genova (1889-90), 29, 2. s., 9: 363-367. 1 : Preruaia, A., and Parona, C. Di alcunt trematodi ectoparassiti di pesci adriatici. Ann. mus. civ. di storia nat. di Genova (1889-90), 28, 2.s., 9: 16-32. 1890. Price, EMmMett W. New monogenetic trematodes from marine fishes. Smithsonian Mise. Coll. (3286), 91(18): 1-3. 1934. ——— A new term for the adhesive organs of trematodes. Proc. Helminth. Soe. Wash. 1(2): 34. 1934. North American monogenetic trematodes. George Wash. Uniy. Bull. (Sum- maries of Doctoral Theses 1934-36), pp. 10-13. 1936. A new monogenetic trematode from Alaskan salmonoid fishes. Proc. Helminth. Soc. Wash. 4(1): 27-29. 1937. North American monogenetic trematodes. 1. The superfamily Gyrodactyloidea. Jour. Wash. Acad. Sci. 27: 114-130. 1937. Ruszkowskl, J. S. Sur la découverte d’un ectoparasite Amphibdella torpedinis dans le coeur des torpilles. Pub. Stazione Zool. Napoli 11(2): 161-167. 1931. Saint-REemMy, GEORGES. Synopsis des trématodes monogénéses. Rey. biol. du nord de la France, Lille 3(11); 405-416; 4(1): 1-21; (8): 90-107, 1891; 4(4): 186-145; (5): 184-191; (6): 224-230; (7): 253-265. 1892. Complement du synopsis des trématodes monogénéses. Arch. de parasitol., Paris 1(4): 521-571. 1898. Stwak, J. Ancyrocephalus vistulensis sp. n., nowy gatunek przywry, pasorxytujacy na sume (Siluris glanis L.). Ancyrocephalus vistulensis sp. n., un nouveau tré- matode, parasite du silure (Silurus glanis: L.). Bull. Internat. Acad. Polon. sc. eu Lettres, Cracovie, Cl. Sc. Math. et nat., s. B: Sc. Nat. (11), (7-10): 669-679. 1932. SprEHN, C. Trematoda. Tierwelt Nord- u. Ostsee (Grimpe und Wagler). Lief. xo VY heniy, - 19838: STILEs, Co. WARDELL, and Hassauu, ALBERT. Index catalogue of medical and veteri- nary zoology. Subjects: Trematoda and trematode diseases. Hyg. Lab. Bull. 37, U.S. Pub. Health and Marine Hosp. Serv., 196 pp., 1908. StossicH, Micureie. Saggio di una fauna elmintologica di Trieste e provincie con- termina. Program. d. civ. scuola r. sup. Trieste, 162 pp., 1898. STUNKARD, Horace W. Studies on North American Polystomidae, Aspidogastridae, and Paramphistomidae. Ill. Biol. Monographs 3(3): 283-394. 1917. STUNKARD, Horace W., and Duninusz, F. W. Gyrodactylus as a parasite of the tad- poles of Rana catesbiana. J. Parasitol. 20(2): 137. 1933. Tupaneul, Marcos A. T'rematode parasites of Philippine vertebrates, IV. Ectopara- sitic flukes from marine fishes. Philippine J. Sci. 45(1): 109-117. 1931. Van CuEAvE, H. J., and MuELLER, Justus F. Parasites of Oneida Lake fishes. Part 1. Descriptions of new genera and new species. Roosevelt Wild Life Ann. 3(1): 5-71. 1932. Parasites of Oneida Lake fishes. Part III. A biological and ecological survey of the worm parasites. Roosevelt Wild Life Ann. 3(3—4): 161-334. 1934. ; WaAGENER, GuiIpo Ricuarp. Bettrdige zur Entwicklungs-Geschichte der Eingeweide- wiirmer. Eine von der Holléndischen Societét der Wissenschaften zu Haarlem 2. J. 1855 gekronte Preisschrift. Naturk. Verhandel. v. d. Holland. Maatsch. d. Wetensch. te Haarlem, 2 Verzamel. 13: 1-112. 1857. Helminhologische Bemerkungen aus einem Senschreiben an C. Th. von Siebold. Ztsch. f. wissensch. Zool., Leipz. 9(1): 73-90. 1857. WEGENER, GEorG. Die Ektoparasiten der Fische Ostpreussens. Schrift. d. phys.- okonom. Gesellsch. zu Kénigsb. i. Pr. 50(3): 195-286. 1910. Yumageutl, 8. Studies on the helminth fauna of Japan. Part 2. Trematodes of fishes, I. Japan J. Zool. 5(8): 249-541. 1934. ZANDT, FERDINAND. Fisch parasiten des Bodensees. Centralb. f. Bakteriol. (etc.), Jena, 1. Abt., Orig., 92(3—4): 225-271. 1924. ApRIL 15, 1937 HULL: SYRPHID FLIES 165 ENTOMOLOGY.—Some neotropical and oriental syrphid flies in the United States National Museum. FRANK M. Hutu, University of Mississippi. (Communicated by C. F. W. MuESEBECKE.) Several years ago the late Dr. J. M. Aldrich, to whom the writer owed much encouragement in his early studies of diptera, submitted an accumulation of exotic syrphid flies to the writer for study and identification. This material is almost entirely Neotropical in origin, although a certain amount of it comes from the Orient. It was later supplemented by material from the same regions, kindly made avail- able for study by Dr. E. A. Chapin, to whom the writer is greatly indebted for extending the fullest facilities of the Museum. Finally, I wish to thank Mr. C. T. Greene for his helpful suggestions. The present paper presents the undescribed species of syrphids, the types of which are in the U. 8. National Museum. Volucella nitidigaster n. sp. Male.—Eyes densely long black pilose, touching for a distance of length of antennae, with a bare horizontal band about the middle of each eye. The vertex, the greatly swollen front, face and cheeks brilliantly vitreus black, a small whitish pubescent area beneath the antennae, narrowly pro- longed to each eye and on the eye margin intensified and slightly enlarged. There is a narrow brown stripe dividing cheeks and face, beginning at eye but not reaching the oral margin. Antennae, dark brown; arista pale, darker at apex, twenty to twenty-one rayed above. Tubercle of the short obconical face large, evenly rounded. Thorax, scutellum, pleurae and abdomen strongly shining black with a bluish opalescent tinge. The thorax with a narrow anterior band of fairly long upright brassy pile, the remainder of the dorsum with short brassy pile obscured by dense long erect black pile. The lateral and calli bristles appear to be exceptionally long, stiff, shining black. Pile of mesopleurae long and brassy. Scutellum rather higher than usual, the margin without a definite depression but barely flattened at the apex on a small area, where it is also punctate or roughened. Scutellum conspicuous for the thick mass of long black pile on its dorsum basally, in the middle. Squamae black, with brassy fringe. Halteres ivory white. Abdomen with faint suggestion of a brownish area on either side on second and third segments. Legs vitreus shining black, the mid and hind tarsi except terminal two joints dark brown. Wings tinged on anterior joints with yellow. Stigma dark brown. Stigma cell light brown. Length 6 mm. One male. Villa Nogues, Pov. Tug. (R. A.) (1-1921) Type in the U. 8. National Museum, No. 51352. Volucella punctigena n. sp. Female.—Front and vertex, except for a shining black trifurcate spot above antennae and face, except for an obscure spot on either side Just below 1 Received January 16, 1937. 166 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 4 antennae, shining mahogany red and polished. The angle across from eyes at antennae, and the cheeks pale brownish yellow. The yellow of the cheeks is bordered behind and in front with a shining black stripe. Facial knob prominent and face descending to a distance below eyes equal to length of antennae from base to tip of arista. Antennae and arista light brownish yellow, the apical third of the latter blackish, with twenty-two to twenty- five rays dorsally. Eyes short pale pilose. Pile of head and face pale. Thorax shining dark reddish brown, the whole middle anterior three- fourths shining jet black, its posterior margin produced as four vittae, their ends rounded, the outer pair the farthest, none reaching the scutellum. Pleurae blackish, the margins of some segments brownish. Scutellum light reddish brown shining, subtranslucent. Squamae and fringe pale brown. Halteres snow white. Scutellum with a deep depression, its base smooth, a few long black bristles on the margin. Abdomen flattened, almost round, dark blackish in color, the disk of second, third and fourth segments purplish reddish, and the base of the second segment with two small pale yellow translucent triangles, their median and basal edges straight and forming a right angle. The pile of the abdomen short, very thick, whitish, quite erect. Legs largely shining black, narrow apices of femora, basal half or third of tibiae and tarsi light brownish. Pile of legs black. Wings strongly tinged with brown, especially on the veins and cross veins. Length 9 mm. One female. Siquinola, Guatemala. Type in the U. 8S. National Museum, No. 51348. Volucella albipilosa n. sp. Male.—Eyes densely long white pilose, touching for the length of the antennae. Vertex, the swollen front, face, lower occiput and cheeks, except for a narrow shiny brown stripe from eye to oral margin, pale yellowish brown. Ocelli on a slightly raised blackish area. Pile of vertex and front thick, black, longer than that of the eyes. Face and cheeks with a few scattered black hairs on the upper middle of the former and upper posterior corners of the latter; elsewhere pale, appressed, brassy. Occiput from middle downward, long, white pilose, the whole densely punctate white pubescent. Antennae reddish brown, the third joint rounded, slightly concave above. Arista brown with twenty-five rays above. Face descending vertically below antennae to a faint tubercle, thence receding very slightly to the cone shaped tip of the epistoma. Thorax largely and scutellum wholly shining light yellow brown, the anterior half of thorax with a large shining black spot, indented posterior- medially, and with a posteriorly directed continuation at each posterior corner. On the black area may be seen two short broad whitish pollinose vittae situated anteriorly. Pleurae shining black below, light brown above, its pile long and crinkly, pale, with a few tufts of black hairs. Pile of thorax long, anteriorly and narrowly at base of scutellum pale in color, elsewhere black. Lateral margins of thorax including humeri and post calli with several long black bristles, but none before the scutellum or on its margin. Scutellum without depression. Squamae and its fringe and stem of halteres dark brown; knob of the latter white. Abdomen, its margin inrolled, almost entirely light reddish brown, the narrow posterior edge of the third segment, and apico median triangle, a very small basi median triangle on the second segment and the suggestion AprIL 15, 1937 HULL: SYRPHID FLIES 167 of a narrow connecting vita black or blackish. First segment blackish. Venter the same light brownish color. The whole abdomen subtranslucent. The pile consists of conspicuous long white appressed tufts in each anterior angle of the third and fourth segments, and the very long erect surface pile of the fourth segment. Abdomen everywhere covered with short appressed black bristles. Legs dark brown to blackish, black pilose or bristly, except that the tibiae posteroventrally and the tarsi ventrally are appressed golden pilose. Ex- treme apices of femora paler in color. Wings hyaline, except for stigma, with four quite small dark brown spots on the cross veins in the middle of the wing. Length 15 mm. One male. San Martin, Mexico, May 27, 1922 (KE. G. Smyth). Type in the U. 8. National Museum, No. 51357. Volucella lunulifera n. sp. Male.—Eyes densely long blackish pilose, widely touching. The small vertex swollen, the front and face and cheeks brilliantly vitreus black, a little silver pubescence beneath the antennae, a small spot of yellowish brown, triangular in shape near the eye margin of either side just below the level of the antennae, and a similarly colored narrow stripe dividing face and cheeks, beginning at the eyes and running to oral margin. Pile of face, cheeks, occiputal and front pale whitish; of vertex black. The face does not descend very deeply. It is bluntly obconical and the tubercle is large, oval and evenly rounded. Antennae dark brown. Arista paler, fifteen rayed above. Thorax shining black, in places purplish and bluish opalescent. The scutellum shining vitreus black with a brassy cast, the marginal depression deep and conspicuous. Pile of thorax abundant, rather long, upright, pale brassy, with a few longer slender black hairs intermixed especially before the scutellum. Scutellum basally and marginally pale, the long marginal bristles black. Pleurae black, golden pubescent above, pale pilose. Squamae dark with blackish fringe, halteres pale yellow. Abdomen shining black with an opalescent cast, with sharply defined pale yellow basal spots on the second segment, narrowly medially, oval on its posterior edge, i.e., subtriangular, and prolonged laterally part of the way down the sides. Third segment with similarly colored very small spots on anterior corners; fourth with a narrow lateral marginal stripe. Abdominal pile entirely erect, pale. Legs shining black, very narrow apices of femora and bases of tibiae and the tarsi brown. Wings hyaline, brownish anteriorly and an apical half, cross veins clouded, the stigma brown and the stigmal cell yellow. Length 7.5 mm. One male. Iquitos, Peru, Mar.—Apr. 1931 (R. C. Shannon). Type in the U.S. National Museum, No. 51355. Volucella cubomaculata n. sp. Female.—Eyes very short pale pubescent. Front and vertex shining black, vitreus. The face and cheeks light clay brown or yellow, in the middle of the face with a narrow dark brown stripe from oral margin to antennae; a similar stripe, lighter in color, separating cheeks and face from eye to oral 168 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 margin, and another between cheeks and occiput. Face rather pointed, tubercle quite low, evenly rounded, not deeply excavated above. Antennae light reddish brown, arista darker, twenty-four rayed above. Side of dorsum of thorax, pleurae, scutellum, except its margin darker, all light yellowish brown. The dorsum in the middle dark blue black, opalescent, with coppery lights. Bristles, including those of scutellum where the apical two are most prominent, and the prescutellar row, all black. Pile of thorax exceptionally short, of quite appressed, brassy color; on the pleurae a little longer but similarly colored pile. A few short black hairs on scutellum. Squamae dark brown with brown fringe; halteres ivory knobbed. Abdomen with first segment entirely and basal two-thirds of second pale subtranslucent yellowish brown. Third and fourth segment each with a pair of basal yellow spots not reaching the sides, widely separated medially, the last pair rather cubical in shape, the first pair more irregular in outline. Elsewhere the abdomen is shining blackish. Legs dark brownish black, black pilose, all the femora a lighter shade of brown. Wings with apical two-fifths grey or smoky, not diagonally marked, the basal part of the wing yellowish, the stigmal cell brownish grey. Length 8 mm. One female. Iquitos, Peru, Mar.—Apr. 1931 (R. C. Shannon). Type in the U.S. National Museum, No. 51353. Volucella lumina n. sp. Female.—Eyes densely pale, short pilose. Front above antennae light brown, above and on vertex very dark brownish red, a median stripe black, everywhere shining. Face and anterior part of cheeks pale brownish yellow or clay yellow, vitreus, a narrow median stripe of reddish brown reaches from oral margin to antennal base, and a similar stripe separates cheeks and face and is followed by the same color on the posterior section of the cheeks. Occiput pale, very pale punctate-pollinose, and its pile pale. Short pile of front and vertex black and the whole top of the very large obtuse tubercle densely short black bristly. Face deeply excavated below antennae. Face short obconical. Antennae dark reddish orange infuscated apically. Arista pale, thirty-one to thirty-three rayed above. Thoracic dorsum on the sides light brown, in the center widely black with a very strong bluish and coppery opalescence. Scutellum light brown, subtranslucent, opalescent. Pile of thorax short, brassy, subappressed, on the posterior half mixed with some black pile. Black lateral, scutellar and prescutellar bristles greatly strengthened and exceptionally long, at least as long as the scutellum in midline. Squamae pale brown with darker fringe. Halteres ivory white with brownish stalk. Pleurae brown, densely clothed in middle with long appressed brassy hairs. Abdomen shining black with bluish opalescence on the base of the second segment with a pair of large, sharply graduate yellow, translucent spots, divided medially by a little less than their own thickness. Abdomen some- what denuded but with both black and brassy hairs. Legs everywhere very dark reddish brown appearing practically black, clothed with jet black bristles and pile. Wings much larger than abdomen, on outer diagonal half dark brownish; the brown widest posteriorly, the basal half of wing yellowish; all the veins brown. ApRIL 15, 1937 HULL: SYRPHID FLIES 169 Length 12 mm. One female. Ramupasa, Bolivia, December (W. M. Mann) (Mullford Biological Expedition). Type in the U. 8S. National Museum, No. 51349. Microdon aurifacia n. sp. Male.—Head shining black except on the sides of the face where it is dark mahogany brown. Face with abundant pale brassy pile directed down- ward, glittering. Occiput with similar but scanty pile. Vertex and front black pilose, a few pale hairs above the frontal depression. Antennae very long and slender, the first joint as long as second and third, the third five times as long as second. Arista concolorous, shorter than third joint. Eyes scanty, aes pubescent below. There is a narrow bare vertical non pilose stripe on the face. Thorax shining black, the anterior half covered with short appressed pale brassy pile, very dense and startlingly brilliant from in front. Posterior half with similarly appressed black pile. Pleurae dark mahogany colored, black pilose. Scutellum shining black with two very stout black spines, set fairly wide apart, at outer angles of scutellum, reddish in color, and cloaked with black pile. Scutellum deeply sulcate medially and about twice as wide as long in the sulcate midline. Abdomen shining black, thick short, apically pointed, with flared basal margins on the second segment, its pile through the middle and on the lateral margins short appressed, pale, brassy; elsewhere black. Legs, except the mahogany brown tarsi, entirely black; black bristly ex- cept on the ventral surface of all the tarsi, where it is golden brown, almost et Posterior basitarsi flattened but not exceptionally large or thick- ened. Wings smoky, especially on the apical half. A stump of a vein protrudes into the first posterior cell from the third longitudinal vein. Length 15 mm. Two males, one female. Itaquaquecetuba, Peru, Nov. 18 and Sept. 20. The female lacks the pale brassy pile, which is evidently a sexual character. Type in the U. 8. National Museum, No. 51370. Allograpta flavomaculata n. sp. Male.—Related to Sphaerophoria micrura O. 8S. The head bears a wider stripe of black on the face and front. The slant from oral margin medially to cheeks and occiput is greater, and the pile of the upper occiput is black in flavomaculata and white in micrura. Scutellum with a well marked hemi- _ circle of black in the center. The scutellum of micrura is entirely pale. How- ever, there are differences in the markings of the abdomen which are here described. First segment with a very small yellow spot in the anterior basal corners of the segment. Second with a narrowly interrupted band in the middle of the segment, the band reaching the side margins, the median interruption short, that is, the inner ends of each spot, drawn out and tapering to an abrupt point. Third segment with a similar band, not interrupted, widest just back of lateral margin, the median area pointed sharply above and below, as if the band had been interrupted and bridged by a small oval longitudinal spot. Fourth segment with a still wider band practically as thick in the middle as near the sides. The outer third of this and the pre- 170 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 ceding band is directed posteriorward at an angle of forty-five degrees. Last segment with four small yellow spots, the inner pair sub-triangular, the right angle basal and medial. Length 9 mm. One male. Bogota, Colombia (B. Guevara, coll.) Type in the U. 8. National Museum, No. 51375. Meromacrus vittata n. sp. Female.—Vertex, middle stripe of front, shining black, the sides of the front long, yellow tomentose, the shining black face and cheeks obscured by pale whitish pollen, and long white pile. Occiput silvery pollinose, pale pilose. A few black hairs on vertex. Eyes bare. Antennae reddish brown, the dorsal edge of third joint blackish. The arista pale yellow with brownish tip. Thorax obscurely shining black, with three very sharp continuous greyish yellow vittae, confluent just before the scutellum, and another on either side on the posterior half which does not reach beyond the suture. On the outer edge of the suture, and on the humeri, a conspicuous tuft of bright yellow tomentum. Pile of thorax and scutellum long, dense and yellow, the ground color of the latter pale brownish yellow subtranslucent. Squamae and halteres pale brownish yellow, the latter with a dark annulus on the stalk. Abdomen shining black, metallic, the first segment grey dusted in the middle. The second third, fourth and fifth segments with narrow opaque yellow posterior margins, and the fourth post marginally with a reddish brown border or spot, not reaching the sides. Pile of abdomen extraordinarily appressed, except on the side margins, all pale in color. Legs entirely light reddish orange, pale pilose, the only black vestiture being the basi-spinules on the hind femora. Wings hyaline; anterior margin pale brownish, the extreme base strongly orange brown. Length 10.5 mm. One female. Villa Nouges, Tug., Jan. 1929 (R. A.). Type in the U.S. National Museum, No. 51953. Meromacrus lineascripta n. sp. Male.—Eyes bare, narrowly touching. Vertex raised and swollen. Ground color of head, except beneath facial stripe, shining black, the lower vertex, very narrow sides of front, and the face broadly, except for the wide bare middle stripe, and the cheeks narrowly along the posterior eye margins, all pale whitish pubescent or pollinose. The pile of the vertex is black. Else- where on the face it is snow white. Antennae dark greyish brown, the third joint but little longer than wide, the arista wholly pale yellow. Thorax black, obscurely shining, a very narrow midline pale yellow pubescent, and a very narrow transverse band widely separated medially and not reaching either side, a continuous, slightly wider prescutellar band, covering calli and scarcely wider in the midline. A diagonal stripe runs from base of suture along inner edge of humerus, to extreme anterior thoracic margin, all pale yellow tomentose, almost white. Humeri bare. Scutellum blackish basally and on the sides, otherwise reddish, everywhere like the thoracic dorsum, thick, appressed short black bristly. Pleurae black, heavily whitish dusted. Squamae pale with darker fringe. Halteres cream colored. Abdomen largely pale orange, the first segment, the base of the second AprRIL 15, 1937 HULL: SYRPHID FLIES 171 YY liza sengle te! oh ear Cee " e Verret eters tina i ’ ‘ tt Srey, anette Pa heyyy Aye yy Mia yp ys \ a y! aut } Vy yeep al MT \" Prag tly yh | ea | UN Any Ty ty ! : prin yytyas nt SLRS ly ANAM. Per ' Sp vans BRE ip gerre ak phat yg N Wi whe Fig. 1.—Eristalis flavoscutellata n. sp. (termination of abdomen). Fig. 2.— Eristalis brevillosa n. sp. (termination of abdomen). Fig. 3.—Nauszgaster nausicaa n. sp. (thorax). Fig. 4.—#ristalis brevillosa n. sp. (hind femora). Fig. 5.—Volucella cubomaculata n. sp. (abdomen). Fig. 6.—Volucella punctigena n. sp. (abdomen and scutellum). Fig. 7—Hristalis flavoscutellata n. sp. (hind femora). Fig. 8.—Volucella lumina n. sp. (abdomen and scutellum). Fig. 9—Braziliana vittithoraz n. sp. (front view of face). Fig. 10—Meromacrus lineascripta n. sp. (dorsum of thorax and abdomen). 172 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 narrowly blackish. Hypogium reddish, pale dusted. The narrow posterior margins of the second, third, and fourth segments faintly shining cream color, bare. The apex of the first segment bordered conspicuously with the pale cream colored tomentum, but not reaching the sides. Outer third of second segment basally with long black hair extraordinarily appressed directed posteriorward. Remainder with many appressed short golden spinules. Pollen of hypopygium ripple-like. All the femora thick, the hind ones extraordinarily so, the thickening of all largely basal, on the third pair flattened ventrally. Legs light brownish red, the femora darker basally, all the femora basiventrally and the last sternite with remarkably curious tufts of thick, very long, crinkly whitish pile. Wings with anterior border brown, the costal cell yellowish. Length 12 mm. One male. Ivon Beni, Bolivia (W. M. Mann) (Mullford Biol. Expedition, 1921-1922). Type in U. 8. National Museum, No. 51371. Nausigaster nausicaa n. sp. Female.—Eyes bare. The raised and swollen front, the square area about the base of the antennae, a very narrow median line bisecting the golden pollinose area between the square spot and the vertex, the wide median facial vitta, and a narrow one on the cheeks from eye to oral margin, all shining steel blue. The remainder of cheeks and face, including a band below antennae, the entire occiput except just behind vertex, densely yellow pubescent (pilose) and short pale pilose. The blue area above antennae with a few pale hairs, the remainder bare. Antennae quite large, the third joint twice as wide and twice as long as the second, all bright brownish orange. Arista bare, brownish. Thorax brilliant steel blue, slightly purplish, with four conspicuous wide stripes or vittae of pale pollen, the outer one not interrupted at the suture, all running the full length of the thorax, the angles before the suture on either side with a yellow pollinose area and the stripe enclosed by the outer and inner pollinose vittae on either side is a rich brassy color with just a suggestion of bronze. Clothing of thorax ultra microscopic, black on the dark areas, light on the vittae. Pleurae and scutellum entirely bright steel blue. Squamae pale; halteres yellow. Abdomen largely dark steel blue, obscurely shining. The first segment and base of second dusted with whitish. The narrow posterior borders of second, and third each continuing narrowly along the side margins, the posterior margin of the fourth more widely, triangularly produced medially as a large spot, all bright golden pubescent. Abdomen everywhere micro- scopically short black bristly. Legs largely very dark reddish brown, the femora apically, the tibiae basally, more blackish, all covered with pale short appressed pile, except where it becomes golden on the posterior tarsi ventrically. Wings clear hyaline. Stigma brown. Length 7.5 mm. One female. Montevideo, Uruguay (Tremoleras) Dec. 20, 1930. (Penarol). A remarkable and beautiful species. Type in the U. S. National Museum, No. 51369. APRIL 15, 1937 HULL: SYRPHID FLIES 173 Eristalis flavoscutellata n. sp. Female—Very close to E. obscurus. Front and vertex with black and yellow pile mixed, the former predominating. Face shining black, its pile pale. Facial knob prominent and bare. Antennae light brownish orange, dorsally blackish on the third joint. Arista reddish throughout, quite long and bare. Eyes very short whitish pilose. Thorax and pleurae black, dully shining with long reddish yellow pile. Scutellum light brownish orange, with thick but rather short golden pile. Abdomen large, swollen, shining black, the second segment on either side with obscure reddish, shining spots and suggestions of similar ones, but smaller, similarly placed on the third segment. Narrow posterior margins of second, third and fourth segments opaque pale yellow. Pile of second seg- ments short, black and yellow intermixed; on third segment black; on fourth segment, except on the narrow base, entirely pale and erect. Only the black pile subappressed. Legs with black femora, apices narrowly pale, the mid tibiae reddish, all the tarsi bright orange, orange pilose. Hind femora quite thick, shining black, with a few long pale bristles beneath and shorter thick erect black ones above. The hind tibiae black, with a dense dorsal (ventral when tibiae is adjacent to femora) fringe of black cilia. Wings hyaline with a conspicuous quadrate brown spot in the middle. Length 10.5 mm. One female. Hiquito, San Mateo, Costa Rico (Pablo Schild). Type in the U.S. National Museum, No. 51363. Eristalis brevivillosa n. sp. Female.—Vertex and front considerably swollen. The ground color is obscurely shining, dark brown above, becoming quite pale brownish yellow below on face. Front, vertex, face almost entirely covered with pale brown- ish yellow pollen, slightly darker on vertex, almost golden on the face, and obscurely punctate on the front. The antennae are small, set below the middle of the profile, and from base to vertex the front is thickly short black pilose. The eyes are very short yellow pubescent above, and there is some brassy pile on the upper part of the face. Tubercle medium sized, slightly more shining. Occiput from just past cheeks nearly to vertex is blackish, white dusted. The upper occiput exhibits a creased margin running to the corners of the eyes. Antennae pale brownish orange, the third joint oval. One and one-half times as long as wide. Arista pale, long, slender, bare. Thorax black, dully shining, densely brown pollinose, two or three short median vittae are suggested but obscure on the anterior half; pile thick, short, nearly erect, brassy in color, becoming reddish on the lateral margins of the dorsum where the ground color is reddish brown. Pleurae black, whit- ish dusted, with tufts of long golden hairs on the upper mesopleurae. Scutellum large, broad, evenly rounded. Opaque rust red or rust yellow, its dorsum thickly beset with stubby black bristly hairs, a few golden ones laterally and ventrally on the margin. Squamae very large, reddish brown, its fringe yellow; halteres light yellow. Abdomen very dark brown almost, but not quite black; mostly opaque, but with a shining jet black band interrupted medially on the middle of the third segment; a similar maculation on the fourth, both reaching the lateral margin, and both shaped somewhat on their inner ends as exclama- tion marks, the lateral tips of which are also dilated. Second segment with 174 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 a pair of small obscure reddish spots. First segment basally, on either side, pale yellowish white. Fifth segment shining black in posterior half, basally with a pair of small quadrate golden pilose spots, and similar ones more irregular in outline, similarly placed on the fourth segment. Legs largely dark vitreus reddish, mahogany colored on posterior femora, the narrow apices of the face and mid femora, the bases of all the tibiae the first four more widely, pale yellowish. The tarsi are a lighter shade of dull yellowish brown. Hind femora not greatly thickened, but widest for a short distance before apex and sharply enlarged from this end. Hind tibiae flattened, slightly arcuated, but not ciliary fringed and not spurred apically. Wings almost hyaline, yellowish tinged. Stigma sharply dark brown in color. Length 10.5 mm. One female. Lima, Peru, 2000+ ft. (Piches and Perene) Soc. Geogade. Type in the U. S. National Museum, No. 51364. Eristalis flavovillosa n. sp. Male.—Eyes touching. The swollen vertex, front, face and cheeks black, the latter shining, the facial knob slightly shining, the remainder densely whitish grey pubescent. Facial tubercle rounded, low, inconspicuous. An- tennae dark brown, the narrow base of the third segment light brown. Arista very long, thickened on basal third, brown in color, pale apically, and bare. Vertex, upper occiput, front and upper face covered with thick long shaggy, bright yellow pile. Eyes densely short whitish pilose. Thorax black, obscurely shining, densely brown pollinose and very densely long shaggy yellow pilose, the pile erect, plush-like, bright in color, but nowhere golden. Scutellum similarly pilose, in color pale brownish yellow, obscurely shining. Squamae and fringe and halteres light brown. Abdomen black, obscurely shining. On the second segment with a bluish coat, the sides of that segment in the middle with a light yellow spot or triangle, its posterior border horizontal, its inner angle acute. Posterior margins of first, second, third and fourth segment narrowly opaque yellow, the bases of the third and fourth and the yellow posterior margin of the fourth with a yellowish grey opaque band, equally narrow, all of them uninterrupted. With the exception of half a dozen long black bristles on either side of posterior margin of fourth segment, the pile is everywhere erect, very long, very dense, bright yellow. The pile of the venter is still longer, and paler. Femora, except the narrow yellowish brown apices, shining black, about the middle brown pollinose. The hinder pair moderately thickened. Fore tibiae on apical half, mid tibiae on apical sixth, hind tibiae on apical three- fifths, blackish, remainder light brownish yellow, everywhere yellow pilose, except on the apical half of the hinder pair, which is black ciliated below. Hinder tibiae somewhat arcuated and flattened. All the tarsi brown, the hind tarsi lighter, the other dark. Pile of femora yellow. Hind femora apico- ventrally with long black bristles. Wings largely hyaline, faintly brownish, especially about the center. Length 14 mm. Two males. Suifu, Szechuan, China (D. C. Graham, coll.). Type in the U.S. National Museum, No. 51952. Spheginobaccha melancholia n. sp. Female.—Head shining black, the sides of the face, the cheeks, the narrow lateral eye margins of the front up to where a transverse band is formed in APRIL 15, 1937 HULL: SYRPHID FLIES 175 the depression, all shining silver pubescent. The vertex and front especially the former, remarkably swollen and tumid, evenly rounded, the eyes at the posterior angles widely excavated so that the occiput is here quite thick. Antennae situated at upper two-thirds, without prominence, the third joint dark brown, a little longer than the first two evenly rounded and bearing a black bare, basally thickened arista. Pile of head scanty, short, everywhere pale except on the vertex. Ocelli placed far forward. Thorax black, obscurely shining, with short dense reddish brown pubes- cence, and suggestions of two quite narrow vittae, and an equally narrow trace of a horizontal band across the suture and not interrupted in the middle. Scutellum and pleurae similarly colored and pubescent, the latter on the lower pleurae whitish. Squamae pale yellow; halteres light brown. Abdomen black, shining, shorter than wings, with a pale obscure yellow spot of some size on either side of the second segment near the base. Pile of the abdomen largely pale. Some appressed black bristles on posterior borders of the segments. Legs, black, the femora very narrowly at the apices, the basal halves of all the tibiae pale yellow. Hind femora slender. Wings uniformly dark blackish or fumose, slightly paler posteriorly. Wings everywhere black pubescent. Length about 15 mm. Two females. Prang Bon, 30 mi. N. W. of Saigon, Cochin China, July 19, 1932, (M. Piolane, coll.). Type in the U.S. National Museum, No. 51372; paratype in the author’s collection. , Korinchia nova n. sp. Female.—Vertex and front, except just above antennae, black, shining the upper portion of the latter pollinose (greasy in the specimen) and the extreme lower front shining brown. Face and cheeks light yellowish brown, interrupted by a shining dark brown stripe on the anterior portion of the cheeks from eye margin to oral margin. Antennae dark brown. Third joint oval, one and a half times as long as wide, unusually large. Arista very long, bare, basally yellowish, apically white. Eyes bare. The ocelli are situated on a raised area and the width of the vertex is less than the width of the third antennal joint. Thorax black, obscurely shining, a band across from the humeri, jutting a little way posteriorly in the middle, another band on the sutures, inter- rupted widely in the middle, and a prescutellar band, pale yellowish grey pollinose. Scutellum tricolored, the narrow impressed rim pale greyish yellow, the middle light brown, the base black, all except the rim shining. Pile of thorax and scutellum short, rather thick, brassy in. color, slightly longer before the scutellum, and still longer on the margin of the scutellum and with curious tufts of long flattened golden pile on the sides of pos- terior thoracic disk and calli, directed backward. Pleurae dark brown, largely bare, with a vertical stripe of pale pollen, pale pilose up the middle. Squamae whitish with yellow border. Halteres brownish yellow. Abdomen black, obscurely shining, the lateral margins everywhere nar- rowly reddish and a triangular spot on the basal angles of the second segment narrowly meeting medially. The short dense bristles of the abdomen ap- pressed, black on the black areas except that the basal borders of each seg- ment are narrowly golden bristly. All segments including the first, with a 176 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 4 narrow posterior, opaque yellow pollinose border, golden appressed bristly. Side margin of abdomen with short brassy pile. Legs largely pale yellow, waxy in appearance, except fore tarsi and tibiae blackish, the latter with postero-lateral hemicircle of pale yellow in the middle. Pile of legs short, largely pale. The hind femora apically, particu- larly beneath, black bristly, a few black bristles on the posterior tarsi, the anterior pair entirely so. Hind femora slightly infuscated postero-medially, quite slender, without tooth or spicules. Wings nearly hyaline slightly yellowish basally. Stigma pale yellow. Length 12 mm. One female. Ningyuenfu, China (D. C. Graham, coll.). Type in the U.S. National Museum, No. 51360. Braziliana vittithorax n. sp. Female.—Vertex quite swollen, brilliant shining metallic steel blue. Ocelli bright red. Eyes widely apart, bare. Whole face, where not pollinose, shining steel blue, glittering. The pollinose band of the face is ripple-like with large bare punctate spots, the outer margin of the metallic stripe coppery. Front across the middle black pollinose, trimaculate, leaving along each eye margin above and below the antennae, three whitish semi-oval pollinose spots. A conspicuous depression or trough transversely before scutellum. Facial pile pale. Vertical and upper frontal pile black, everywhere scanty. Antennae light brownish, blackish apically. First joint as long or longer than second and third; third pointed. Arista a little longer than third joint, basally pale. Thorax opaque black trivittate, the outer vittae as broad wedges directed acutely backward, not proceeding past the suture anteriorly; the median one narrow, running full length; all three vittae confluent before the scutellum. Ground color on mid-dorsum steel blue, shining, whitish dusted anteriorly and around the shining anterior thoracic tubercle. Pleurae silver dusted except on the totally bare and brilliant pteropleurae (anterior part only). Scutellum shining metallic blackish. Squamae white with blackish border. Halteres brownish yellow. Abdomen brownish black, a pair of oval, yellowish spots, pointed at either end, diagonally placed on the third segment, touching only the basal margin and widely separated. Suggestions of similar spots on the fourth and fifth segments which cannot be made out very definitely. Abdominal pile very short, scanty, pale. Legs pale brownish yellow, the mid-femora, except narrow apex, the apical two-thirds of slightly thickened hind femora, and distal posterior tarsi blackish. Wings hyaline, stigma brown. Length 8 mm. One female. Antigua, Guatemala, June 17, 1923 (E. G. Smyth). Type in the U.S. N. M. No. 51376. Aprit 15, 1937 OBITUARY 17 @Obituary WitiiaAM Magsor Braman, Chief of Inspection and Editing of the Topo- graphic Branch of the U. 8. Geological Survey, died at his home in Wash- ington, March 2, 1937. He was born February 20, 1867, at which time his father, the late Rear Admiral George Beaman, was stationed at Annapolis. After making a special study of Civil Engineering and Topographic En- gineering at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, he joined the U. S. Geological Survey in 1889 and was in charge of topographic field parties until he became inspector of field work, in 1907. With the exception of a furlough in 1922 for duty with the War Department, in Brazil, this position was held until the World War during which he served as major in the Corps of Engineers. In 1918 he was appointed to the position he held at the time of his death. Major Beaman was-the inventor of the Beaman arc used on telescopic alidades and transits and was author of the chapter of the Topographic Instructions of the Survey on topographic mapping used widely in colleges. He was a member of the Board of Surveys and Maps of the Federal Govern- ment, the American Society of Civil Engineers, the Society of American Military Engineers, the Washington Society of Engineers and the Washing- ton Academy of Sciences. CLARENCE BLOOMFIELD Moors, noted American archeologist, died March 24, 1936, at his home in Philadelphia, Pa. He was born in Philadelphia, January 14, 1852. After graduating from Harvard University in 1873, he traveled extensively in Eurasia, Africa and South America. His earliest published article described the ruined temple of Boro-Budur, in Java, then little known. An accident, while hunting big game, injured his eyesight and he turned to exploration of the mound cul- tures of the Southern States. His first work, on the shell heaps of the St. Johns River, Florida, appeared in the American Naturalist, 1892-1894. From then on two expeditions were made each year, with the summers devoted to preparation of the ‘‘Reports,’’ which were published at Mr. Moore’s ex- pense in the Journal of The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and freely distributed to the scientific world. One volume, privately printed, has been republished in Indian Notes and Monographs by the Heye Founda- tion. In 1915, Mr. Moore graciously surrendered to the Heye Foundation all surveys and prospect data, prepared for his own further exploration of Red River, the gift thus making possible the work of M. R. Harrington on Cad- doan Sites in Arkansas. Generous gifts of archeological objects, from time to time, enriched the collections of Peabody Museum at Harvard University, Phillips Academy, and other institutions, but the great C. B. Moore Collec- tion was given to The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, for the benefit of his native city. In 1929, with the reluctant consent of the donor, the Academy sold the collection to the Museum of the American Indian, Heye Foundation. The great body of material amassed in Mr. Moore’s col- lection and accurately recorded in the twenty-two volumes of the ‘Re- ports” is an indispensable source of information and an inspiration to all archeologists working in the southeastern United States. Mr. Moore was a member of the American Association for the Advance- ment of Science, the Anthropological Association, and many other American and foreign societies. 178 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 4 Reverend Jutius ARTHUR NIEUWLAND, of the Congregation of the Holy Cross, died suddenly of a heart attack in the chemical laboratory of the Catholic University, Washington, D. C., on June 11, 1936. Father Nieuwland was born on February 14, 1878, at Hansbeke, Belgium. While still a child, he was brought by his parents to this country, the family settling in South Bend, Ind. He received his A.B. in 1899 at the University of Notre Dame. Father Nieuwland won distinction in two fields of science—biology and chemistry. In the latter his work was more recent and was perhaps more widely known, but, as Professor of Botany at the University of Notre Dame from 1904-1918, as the founder and first editor of the American Midland Naturalist, and as the author of about a hundred papers on the taxonomy of flowering plants and ferns his reputation as a botanist was well estab- lished. In 1918, Doctor Nieuwland became Professor of Organic Chemistry at the University of Notre Dame and was serving in that capacity at the time of his death. He was Dean of the College of Science, 1918-1922. Doctor Nieuwland’s chemical studies were devoted largely to an extension of the work involved in the Doctor’s dissertation entitled Some reactions of acetylene, which he had submitted in 1904 to the Faculty of the Catholic University of America. During eighteen years of chemical research he worked indefatigably and became an outstanding authority on the reactions of acetylene, the preparation of organic derivatives of acetylene and of other related compounds. These studies included the fundamental researches underlying the synthesis of duprene, one of the so-called synthetic rubbers; and the preliminary steps leading to the preparation of lewisite. As already noted, Father Nieuwland received the degree of Doctor of Philosophy from the Catholic University in 1904. The degree, Doctor of Science, was con- ferred upon him by the University of Notre Dame in 1911. In 1933 he was awarded the Morehead medal by the International Acetylene Association for outstanding work in acetylenes, and in 1935 was awarded the Nichols medal, the highest honor awarded by the American Chemical Society. At the presentation of the latter medal, Dr. J. M. Weiss, chairman of the jury of award, pointed out that Father Nieuwland at the risk of his own life had experimented with acetylene reactions—research shunned by most investigators because of the danger of. explosion—until he so controlled these reactions that they could be studied in general laboratory work with comparative safety. In recognition of his achievements in the advancement of science he was awarded the Gregor Mendel medal by Villanova College a short time before his death. On January 10, 1937, the University of Notre Dame held special memorial services in honor of her distinguished son and scientist. Ex.invu THomson, noted electrical engineer and director of the Thomson Research Laboratory at Lynn, Mass., died March 13, 1937. Doctor Thomson was born at Manchester, England, March 29, 1853. He graduated from Central High School, Philadelphia, Pa., in 1870. In 1890 he received an honorary A.M. from Yale; an honorary Ph.D., Tufts College, 1896; an honorary Sc.D., Harvard, 1909, Manchester, 1924; and a LL.D. from the University of Pennsylvania, 1924. From 1870 to 1880 he was professor of chemistry at Central High School, Philadelphia, and from 1880 he was electrician for the Thomson-Houston and General Electric Companies. At the Massachusetts Institute of Tech- nology he lectured on applied electricity, and from 1920 to 1922 was acting Apri. 15, 1937 OBITUARY 179 president of that institution. His researches and publications deal with the phenomena of alternating current induction, high potentials and high fre- quency apparatus, production of fused quartz, electric welding, and many other phases of applied electricity. For his great accomplishments he was honored with the Grand Prix, Paris, 1889-1900, and in succeeding years he was the recipient of the Scott, Rumford, Edison, Cresson, Fritz, Hughes, Kelvin, Franklin, and Faraday medals. Doctor Thomson was a member of the National Academy, Franklin Insti- tute, Philosophical Society, American Academy, and of numerous other American and foreign societies. He was a Chevalier and Officer, Legion d’honneur. Dr. WiLtLiAM ALANSON WuiTtTs, for the past thirty-four years Superin- tendent of St. Elizabeth’s Hospital and for many years a member of the Washington Academy of Sciences, died of influenza and pneumonia on Sunday, March 7, 1937, in his home at the institution of which he was the distinguished head. Dr. White was born in Brooklyn, N. Y., January 24, 1870, the son of Alanson and Harriet Augusta White. He was graduated from Cornell Uni- versity in 1889 and two years later received his M.D. degree from Long Island Medical College. While a student at Cornell, Dr. White’s interest in psychology was aroused and fostered by his friendship with Dr. Bert G. Wilder, an eminent authority on the nervous system. This special interest in the human mind and its disorders led logically to the first professional work at the New York State Hospital at Binghamton, where he labored from 1892, the year after his graduation in medicine, until 1903. In that year, having become Second Assistant Superintendent of the Binghamton institution, he was called to assume full charge of St. Elizabeth’s Hospital at Washington, D. C. Nothing could more strikingly portray the exalted stature of Dr. White, both as administrator and as scientist, than the transformation of St. Elizabeth’s Hospital during his life there. Coming as a young man of thirty- three years to assume charge of an institution long a football of politics and needing to rely exclusively upon politically controlled resources and per- sonnel, he effected the necessary change of regime, rehabilitated and enormously extended its physical equipment, and made it a place of beauty and comfort. He sustained opposition and criticism, weathered the storms of transition, and survived accusations leading to numerous congressional investigations. Himself a leading factor in the renaissance of psychiatry, he was a pioneer in the practical application of the developing resources in that field until the old Government Hospital for the Insane, a mere custodial asylum for the hopeless, became one of the greatest institutions for the care and cure of the mentally ill, a training ground for many brilliant recruits to the psychiatric profession, and a research center of rich fruitfulness. Dr. White’s contributions to the literature of psychology and psychiatry were numerous and came in a steady stream throughout his professional life. Much of his earlier writing was in collaboration with Dr. Smith Ely Jelliffe, the volume on Diseases of the nervous system bearing both names. They were also associated in editing journals of psychology and psychiatry. One of the most important of Dr. White’s books is An outline of psychology, written in 1909, and now in its fourteenth edition. His latest volume, Twentieth century psychology, was based on the material for the series of Salmon lectures he delivered before the New York Academy of Medicine. 180 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL, 27, NO. 4 Dr. White became Professor of Psychiatry at George Washington Uni- versity in 1904 and taught the same subject to the students of the Army and Navy Medical Schools. He was a teacher wherever he appeared and his frequent contributions to the program of medical societies constituted a continuous post-graduate school for his professional associates. These ac- tivities led to recognition in the educational field by honorary degrees con- ferred upon him by Boston University, Washington University (St. Louis), Georgetown University, and George Washington University, the last at the convocation held February 22 of this year. Dr. White was a Fellow of the American Medical Association and of the American College of Physicians; a member and former president of the American Psychiatric Association, the American Psychopathological Asso- ciation, the American Psychoanalytical Association; also president (1930) of the International Congress on Mental Hygiene; sometime president of the Washington Institute of Mental Hygiene and of the Washington Acad- emy of Medicine. His membership in the Washington Academy of Sciences resulted in several notable addresses before that body. CONTENTS GroLoey.—Sun symbol markings. Water B. Lana....... a3 ae tr “hota Borany.—New species of Paspalum from ber: America, A an Ei ay 4 CHASH 3.2.08. PPM, oY ae 5 piu Ca iee perae e Zoo.ocy.—North American monogenetic trematodes. I. The e family Gyrodactyloidea. Emmutr W. Pricy................. ENTOMOLOGY.—Some neotropical and silaatal d flies in United States National Museum. Frank M. Hout........ . fe OprruaRigs: Witt1amM Masor BraMAN, CLARENCE BLOOMFIELI D Moorz, Juuius ArtHuR NigsuwLanp, Exisu Txomso | Wituiam ALANSON Won. This Journal is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals © Vou. 27 May 15, 1937 No. 5 JOURNAL OF THE ASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS - Rotanp W. Brown Espen H. Toout Freperick D. Rossini S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS Raymonp J. SEEGER er Ws MunsmBeck PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY : " ENTOMOLOGICAL “SOCIETY E. A. GoLDMAN | me W. W. Rusey BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY — GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY ~ AcNneEs CHASE Henry B. Cots, Jr. BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Frank C. Kracek ee CHEMICAL SOCIETY | on Gi Oi PSR PUBLISHED MONTHLY aah 5 BY THE . ~ TVA + Boece: WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES =~ aie ee 450 Aunaip Sr. i ae . . at MrnasHA, WISCONSIN af Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Menasha, Wis. Acceptance for mailing be a spacey rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. ‘Authorized January 21, 1933. . eee a * dy) % roe pete j aM : % oe, one Sas i J ournal of the Washington Academy of Sciences in ee tt a ae M. anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is oie re ey am quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the Jounna and conform th Sy manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good pa pa per. Footnotes mere be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not — cb assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. 7 % Be . Illustrations in excess of one full-page halftone or two full-page line drawings may be paid for by the author. Line drawings are preferred. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that nyse, te be submitted in final — form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. rae a i all ‘ bo. Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Capene ae bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and y ; date of issue, and reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in ee with the following schedule of prices. Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers — 50 ee 3 Kw » ies are $2.00 . 100 ay fi $1.20 $1.50 $2.00 $2.75 150 1.25 1.90 2.55 3.25 3.50 | 200 L768 2.60 3.60 4.50 4,25 250 2.00 3.30 4.65 5.75 5.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. — yt Subscription Rates.—Per volume. .................+5 tc. ee 2 eae To members of affiliated societies; per volume................... eat tee 2.68 LG PUPAE ai 55 ss 408 Se Gao ue ns em wns bs oe Se ee Sat ee oe -. 50 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Bg cma of an wat: addressed to 350 Ahnaip Street, Menasha, Wis., or to the Treasurer, H. 6.2 Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C Exchanges.—The JourNaL does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within thirty days after date of following issue. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: CHARLES THOM, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: NATHAN R. Smiru, Bureau of Plant Industry. Recording Secretary: Oscar S. Apams, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Treasurer: Hmanry G. Avmers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 27 May hosts? No. 5 GEOPH YSICS.—Structure of continents and ocean basins.1. RicHARD M. Frevp, Princeton University. (Communicated by Joun A. FLEMING. ) While I consider it an honor, as well as a pleasure, to be asked to address the Philosophical Society of Washington on this most com- prehensive subject, I hasten to assure you that I am fully aware of the difficulties of the task, not the least of which are my own in- abilities to do full justice to so fundamental and important a problem. Perhaps my principal excuse is that I have had an excellent oppor- tunity to observe the work of my colleagues in geological-geophysical synthesis during the past decade at fairly close range; by that I mean particularly the advantage of taking part in the inception, planning, and execution of several cooperative research programs and expedi- tions which are directly related to the topic assigned to me for this evening. On the other hand, I do not propose to stress any particular hypothesis as to the origin of continents and ocean basins, but rather to submit to you a historical review of the data and, more particu- larly, the lack of data which have led geophysicists and geologists to propose certain working hypotheses; for it seems to me that such a review is highly essential at a time when there appears to be a sudden and rapidly increasing cooperation between geophysicists and struc- tural geologists in the attempt to discover the major structures of the lithosphere. There is still, however, some danger that full cooperation may be delayed by misapprehensions as to the proper relative func- tions of the geophysicist and the geologist in their specific fields. With the recent development of theoretical geophysics, certain questions have been posed which, although of some theoretical in- terest, are not highly methodological. Granted that the theoretical geophysicist has the realm of the sublithic portion of the earth prac- tically to himself, the same does not hold true for the so-called “crust,” or outer lithosphere. Too often the theoretical geophysicist implies that rocks are merely, physical-chemical types of matter, 1 Address before the Philosophical Society of Washington, January 30, 1937. Received February 13, 1937. 181 182 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 5 without paying any particular attention to the essential, natural structural controls of their origins. For a seismologist to state that a certain layer or zone of the earth “‘behaves like a granite’’ does not necessarily lead to the conclusion that it is granite. Or, to put it in another way, if the surface of the suboceanic lithosphere should be proved to have large areas of granite, the geologist would know that these areas represented the roots of profoundly eroded mountain ranges; possibly an ancient pre-Cambrian erosion surface. To the geologist, therefore, a granite ‘“‘outcrop”’ suggests a long and com- plicated structural-erosional (geomorphological), as well as petrologi- cal-chemical, history. The function of the geophysicist is to adapt the principles and techniques of physics and physical chemistry to the solution of geo- detic and geological problems. The function of the geologist is to demonstrate what the major structural geological problems are which, in his estimation, particularly require the aid of the geo- physicist; and to help the geophysicist interpret the data which he provides. In making this statement I do not wish to imply that geo- physics should be merely the handmaiden of geology, and I certainly do not wish to imply that geophysics should be the mistress of any pet geological hypothesis. An exceedingly close and sympathetic union is, however, absolutely essential if we are to realize the full potentialities in earth science. The geophysicist, as this title implies, is deeply concerned with the developments of his techniques, includ- ing those “border line problems” which require the help of the theo- retical and experimental physicist. In a sense, he bridges the gap between the physicist and the geologist. He also has the advantage over the geologist, in that the application of his techniques to the study of materials is subject to relatively accurate and rigid analysis; and he comes nearer to what we might term the mathematical type of scientist. On the other hand, the geologist, by means of his tech- niques, is able to produce certain fundamental observable data re- garding a relatively small quantity of the lithosphere. In almost every case, the broad areal, as well as the downward continuity, of his major structures can not be directly observed, and, therefore, must be inferred from their traces and trends as exposed in the ele- vated and dissected areas of the continents. Progress in the study of the lithosphere is seriously retarded when the geologist fails to take full advantage of the techniques and data provided by the geophysi- cist; or, when the geophysicist, in his more deep-seated studies and speculations, fails to appreciate the important surficial data which May 15, 1937 FIELD: CONTINENTS AND OCEAN BASINS 183 have already been provided by the geologist. Further, many geolo- gists do not yet seem to fully realize the essential aid which the geo- physicists can render in greatly extending the area, as well as the depth, of geological surveys. This statement applies particularly to approximately five-sevenths of the surface of the globe, which, at the present geological “‘instant,”’ is covered by water and ice. Naturally, until the last decade, the geologist has had to confine his studies to the continental lithosphere, and in these studies he has relatively recently been greatly aided by the geophysicist. In no branch of earth science has this union of geophysics and structural geology been more effective from the scientific, as well as the economic, point of view than in the locations of ore deposits and oil wells. Those really responsible for the development of the mineral resources of our country have clearly demonstrated the importance of including geo- physics as an essential technique in geological surveys. But what I wish to emphasize particularly this evening is: (1) The outstanding influence which that great terra incognita, the suboceanic lithosphere, has had on geologic speculation as a whole; (2) upon what meager data this influence depends; and (8) the future role of the geophysicist in helping to provide the data. Since such great responsibility rests upon the geologists, it would indeed be unfortu- nate if archaic or unnecessary geological hypotheses were to hinder or delude the geophysicist in the application of his talents and meth- ods. As we all know, the principal values of a hypothesis, as well as a theory, are the trends which it suggests for further research; the major difference between a crank and a scientist is that the latter insists upon a ‘‘working hypothesis’—one that still further stimu- lates the critical application of old and the development of new tech- niques. But we must remember that even geologists are human, and, once having originated or espoused a hypothesis, they are apt to defend it beyond the point where it helps to promote fundamental research. One hundred years ago, Ehrenberg noted that the calcareous and siliceous tests of microscopic organisms found in deep sea deposits also played an important rdle in the formation of continental de- posits. By 1870 most geologists were firmly convinced that the British Cretaceous chalks, limestones, and also the glauconitic and radio- larian deposits, such as those of eastern North America and the San Franciscan area, were originally deposited in oceanic depths. It is important to note that C. E. Dutton gave his important paper on The causes of regional elevation and subsidence before the American 184 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 Philosophical Society in the spring of 1871. In the spring of 1889, I believe in this very room, Dutton first proposed the theory of isos- tasy to account for the gradually reversed reliefs of relatively con- tiguous areas of the face of the earth. It is also important to note that Dutton was primarily a geologist, with only scanty geodetic data at his command, and it was not until Hayford, Pratt, Airy, Bowie, and others had continued the investigation of Dutton’s ‘‘work- ing hypothesis’ by means of the available, gradually increasing, num- ber of geodetic and gravity data that the theory of isostasy may be said to have become a major geophysical-geological hypothesis. The father of the hypothesis was, however, a geologist, not a geophysicist. It is rather surprising how little attention structural geologists paid to the idea of isostasy, with the exception of a few such as Barrell and Lawson, until about twenty-five years ago, when, first in Europe, and then gradually in the United States, the concept of low angle overthrusts, nappes, and relatively great horizontal translocations of the lithosphere, as exemplified in the Scottish Highlands and the Alps, appeared to be in sharp contrast to isostatic principles. During the past twenty years, it has been this battle between the present cham- pion of isostasy, Dr. Bowie, and many of the leading structural geolo- gists of Europe and America, which has served to illustrate the growing importance of the application of pendulum gravity to the solution of major problems in structural geology, as particularly exemplified by the recent studies of Meinesz, Thom, Bucher, Cham- berlin, and Longwell. But, to return to the purely sedimentary, or stratigraphic, aspect of the problem. Gradually, within the last fifty years, paleontologists and stratigraphers have acquired the data which proves that the bulk, if not practically all, of the continental sedimentary formations, including limestones, were laid down in relatively shallow water— certainly not in oceanic depths; and thus quite independent of, and, to a certain extent, in spite of other data, arose the concept of the relative permanency of oceanic basins and continental platforms throughout geologic time. This statement is particularly true in rela- tion to the Atlantic oceanic basin and its continental margins. A grow- ing appreciation of the major relief pattern of the face of the earth, together with relatively meager geological and geophysical data con- cerning ocean basins, seemed to indicate, according to J. W. Gregory, that the said major relief pattern had ‘‘been shaped and distributed in accordance with some ancient, deep-based plan.’’ In 1887 W. L. Green proposed his Tetrahedral Hypothesis, under the title of Ves- May 15, 1937 FIELD: CONTINENTS AND OCEAN BASINS 185 tiges of the molten globe, in order to explain the origin and persistency of continental platforms and oceanic basins. This essentially con- tractional hypothesis, founded on the apparent similarity between the relief pattern of the globe and the geometric principles involved in the gradual evolution of a spherical tetrahedron from an original spheroid, was accepted by many of the leading geologists of his time, and is still included in Hobbs’ 1931 edition of Earth features and their meaning. I shall not attempt to summarize the many and serious difficulties which the structural geologists discovered in attempting to harmonize a purely contractional hypothesis with their growing data on the structure of the observable portion of the lithosphere, but shall pass on to the epitome, or ultimate goal, of all students of the history of the Earth—paleogeography. The fundamentals of modern stratigraphical and paleogeographic techniques have been supplied by workers from many lands, but the profound influence of E. O. Ulrich’s splendid researches in North American Paleozoic stratigraphy, resulting in 1908 in the production of an excellent series of paleogeographic maps by Charles Schuchert, can not be overestimated. These two outstanding Paleozoic paleo- geographers, together with their British and European colleagues, tacitly, and almost unconsciously, accepted the dictum of the per- manency of oceanic basins, in spite of the fact that they found con- siderable difficulty in providing suitable physical means for the es- sential intercontinental migrations of both marine and terrestrial organisms. May I again remind the audience that the theory of the permanence of oceanic basins was originally proposed by geologists, not by geophysicists. The necessity for the intercontinental migra- tions of organisms led to the postulates of either “land bridges”’ or of “rafting,” the bulk of the paleogeographers preferring “land bridges.’”’ Thus, while diastrophism and the periodic flooding of the continents by shallow seas are accepted by all geologists as the basis for the delimitation of geologic periods, relatively permanent oceanic depressions seem to be required, in order to accommodate the surplus of water which must exist even during the maximum inundations of the continents. For geologists, the outstanding events of the second decade of the 20th Century were the World War and the Wegener Hypothesis of Drifting Continents. I well remember how a well-known geologist de- livered a stirring and satirical denunciation of this hypothesis in 1916 before a relatively small anti-German group at the Harvard Club in Boston. Only a few months later, this same geologist had 186 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 5 become the chief exponent of the Wegener Hypothesis in this coun- try. This is a single example of the irritating and stimulating effect which the Wegener Hypothesis has had on the rank and file of geologists. Among the many discussions of the Wegener Hypothesis, perhaps the best is that given by Gregory in his presidential address before the Geological Society of London in 1929. Under the title, The theory of permanent oceans and continents, he gave an excellent summary of all the physiographic, structural, paleontological, stratigraphical, and paleogeographical evidence both for and against all existing hy- potheses on the origin of continents and ocean basins. He clearly recognized the need for the exploration of the sub-Atlantic litho- sphere, and concluded his address with the following interesting statement: The combined evidence of stratigraphical geology, paleontology, and the distribution of the existing animals and plants proves that there was no ocean entitled to rank as the Atlantic during the Paleozoic and Mesozoic eras, and that its formation began at the end of the Cretaceous, and was effected mainly after the widespread mountain-forming movements of the Oligocene. In 1936, under the title of Recent developments in the geophysical study of oceanic basins, I had the temerity to suggest, ‘“‘that the sub-At- lantic lithosphere constitutes a vast area of downwarped Pre-Cam- brian and Paleozoic geology, fully comparable in the complexity of its subsidiary stratigraphic, structural, and paleogeographic features to the wowarped Pre-Cambrian and Paleozoic geology of the sur- rounding continental areas...In the late Tertiary (and early Quaternary) there may still have been some subaerial remnants whose land areas were temporarily enlarged by the climatic events of the Pleistocene.” Since making this statement, I still further sug- gest that there may have been profound, local, Quaternary move- ments in the basin itself; and that these movements may have affected ocean level, especially if there were coincident movements in the floor of the Pacific. In a sense, geologists today may be classified as pro- or anti- Wegenerians. Most of the pro-Wegenerians are European, although we have a number in the United States and Canada. It is hardly necessary to remind you that the Wegener Hypothesis suggests that the Pacific was the one and original oceanic basin, and that the pres- ent pattern of the continents is like a picture puzzle, North and South May 15, 1937 FIELD: CONTINENTS AND OCEAN BASINS 187 America having broken away from Europe and Africa at the close of the Paleozoic. Thus the Atlantic is supposed to have been growing bigger and bigger throughout the Mesozoic and Cenozoic eras, at the expense of the Pacific, while the great American continental rafts slowly but surely plowed their way southward and westward. During the last twenty years, the geophysical debate on this hypothesis has centered around such questions as: (1) The possible mechanism for continental drift. (2) The possibilities for determining the rate of the drift. Or, in other words, if the continents are drifting they may have drifted the distance required by the hypothesis. Up until ten years ago little or no positive data, other than a few soundings, existed on the condition of the suboceanic lithosphere. Thus the principal argu- ments put forward by the geologists in support of the Wegener Hy- pothesis were confined to: (1) The marginal patterns of the conti- nents as exemplified in the outlines of the submerged continental margins. (2) The supposed lithological, structural, and stratigraphical similarities of the torn continental margins. When one doubting American geologist was asked why he proposed to restudy the Old Red Sandstone of the Scottish Highlands, he humorously replied: “To see if I can discover the tail of a new species of Devonian fish whose head I have recently collected from the coastal cliff of the Gaspé Peninsula.’’ Even the fish is assumed to be moving westward at the time of its demise. With the possible exception of isostasy, and the postulate of the geosyncline, no hypothesis has so served to stimu- late further and more varied geological and geophysical investiga- tion, both applied and theoretical, as has Alfred Wegener’s suggestion of drifting continents. In my own case, at least, I can affirm that the hypothesis has strongly influenced my motives in attempting to ob- tain, through geophysical means, original data on the structure of the submerged continental margins of the sub-Atlantic lithosphere. To sum up present opinion regarding the Wegener Hypothesis: 1. A number of structural geologists, especially those who are thor- oughly familiar with Alpine tectonics, are in favor of continental drift. 2. An increasing number of geophysicists and astronomers find it an attractive working hypothesis, without perhaps sufficient interest in its origin or the reasons why it was formulated. 3. Nearly all paleogeographers, and most American structural geologists, are against the hypothesis, and this, in spite of the fact that it was originally proposed to mitigate, if not entirely overcome, 188 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 most of the serious difficulties imposed on the student of Paleozoic paleogeography by the earlier dictum of the permanency of relatively large oceanic areas. 4. The hypothesis, at least, attempts to solve an important dilemma; namely, it does away with the necessity of Paleozoic land bridges and yet allows for sufficient oceanic area at all times during the structural evolution of the earth. This problem of the quantitative constancy of the hydrosphere has become of increasing importance in major geological problems during the past few years. It has not yet been definitely determined whether or not the hydrosphere has materially decreased or increased throughout geologic time. Undoubtedly a large amount of water has been temporarily removed from the hydrosphere as connate water and permanently as water of crystallization; on the other hand, an appreciable amount of juvenile water must have been added to the hydrosphere by volcanoes, both continental and submarine. During the past five years, the study of the submarine canyons which dissect the drowned margin of the continental shelves has led to the sug- gestion that the general ocean level may have been temporarily re- duced, over a mile, during the Pleistocene. These submarine canyons were first called to the attention of geologists by J. W. Spencer in 1903. The recent revival of interest in submarine canyons is princi- pally due to new data produced by the skillful geophysical methods of the U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey, and the mapping and dis- cussion of the data by F. P. Shepard. Shepard suggests that the canyons are entirely of subaerial origin, cut during the Pleistocene, when the ocean level was reduced approximately 3,000 to 6,000 feet by the temporary accumulation of ice on the continents. R. A. Daly, the exponent of a similar hypothesis in relation to the origin of coral reefs, will agree to the reduction of ocean level some 250 feet, but cites what he considers to be insurmountable geophysical difficulties in such a reduction of ocean level as demanded by Shepard. Daly and others have also attempted to explain the origin of the canyons by other means,” but no geologist believes that the canyons could be 2 Daly suggests that the canyons have been eroded by the submarine scour of ex- ceedingly muddy and super-saline waters, which he postulates occurred at the margins of the Pleistocene ocean. In a recent letter, E. B. Bailey suggests that submarine earth- quakes might ‘‘help’’ Daly’s hypothesis. H. H. Hess and Paul MacClintock agree with Shepard that the submarine canyons must be of subaerial origin, the result of the req- uisite reduction of sea level. They, however, in order to overcome what they consider to be the difficulties of a 20,000 to 50,000 foot ice sheet on the continents, suggest what is, apparently, a still more comprehensive astronomical, geodetic, and geophysical difficulty, namely, a relatively rapid and recent change in the ellipticity of the surface May 15, 1937 FIELD: CONTINENTS AND OCEAN BASINS 189 explained by recent pronounced differential movements of the con- tinental margin and ocean floor. Yet it is particularly interesting that the mouths of these submarine canyons dissect the boundary of one of the most pronounced topographic features of the submarine litho- sphere, with the possible exception of the foredeep associated with island arcs. The rise of the application of geophysical methods to the study of the suboceanic lithosphere really began some ten years ago, when F. A. Vening Meinesz first discovered the strip of highly negative gravity anomalies paralleling the East Indian are and associated foredeep. On the U. 8. Navy-Carnegie Expedition of 1928, and the U. 8. Navy-Princeton Expedition of 1932, Meinesz discovered the western end of another negative strip. On the recent U. 8S. Navy- of the oceans, due to a sudden decrease in the rate of the rotation of the Earth, and the consequent drawing of the oceanic waters into the polar latitudes. From a letter on the very important question of submarine surveying and physiography, which Dr. D. W. Johnson allowed me to read to the Committee on Continental and Oceanic Structure at the Edinburgh meeting of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics, I quote as follows: “The student of submarine topography, like the unhappy children of Israel, is forced to make bricks without straw. This is clearly apparent in current discussions of the long-debated problem of submarine canyons, where the investigator must formu- late hypotheses without that adequate basis of facts which detailed maps of the ocean floor alone can give. The hypothesis that submarine canyons are normal river valleys, carved when the lands stood thousands of feet higher than now, involves consequences for the adjacent land areas which do not appear to be realized. The hypotheses which depend upon the subsurface flow of reaction currents of the type described by Ekman, of heavy currents of colder water, or of heavy currents of silty water, seem of doubtful validity because the potency of the cause appears insignificant when compared with the magnitude of the results accomplished. It is equally difficult to see how submarine landslides could effect the headward development of canyon-like depressions which appear to be long, narrow, and deep. As Professor Davis remarked a few years ago, the origin of submarine canyons remains an open question. ‘Recently while studying the supposed meteorite scars of the Carolina coast I have had occasion to consider the effects of underground waters welling up in the form of so-called ‘fountain springs,’ and producing elongated depressions by a sort of headward migration up the coastal plain slope. It is known that the coastal plain deposits carry water under heavy pressure out under the sea, and that such water rises in artesian wells drilled on islands or sandbars several miles off the coast. I have wondered whether it could be possible that some pervious bed or beds of the coastal plain, at least in oc- casional places, carry water under pressure to the edge of the continental shelf. If deep submarine springs should develop there, would not such springs perforce migrate back- ward into the shelf deposits, leaving canyons the depth of which would depend upon the depth at which the upwelling waters escaped on the face of the continental scarp? It will be recalled that such impressive features as the deep and long ‘‘alcoves” eroded in the scarps of lava plateaus in the northwestern United States have been ascribed to just such headward migrating spring action. Submarine canyons cut in continental shelves at present submerged off rocky coasts may have been carved when parts of the shelf were above sea level and served to take in water which then migrated down the dip to the scarp face; or aquifers in the older rocks may connect under ground with overlying pervious formations of the blanketing shelf deposits. “T mention this hypothesis of submarine canyon origin, not because it is now entitled to serious consideration (it occurred to me recently in the midst of other work, and I have not had time to test it adequately, or even to discover whether it has al- ready appeared in the literature), but because it illustrates the difficulty of working without adequate facts.”’ 190 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 Geophysical Union Expedition, which returned this January 15, Maurice Ewing, A. J. Hoskinson, and Harry Hess have proved that the negative strip parallels the West Indian Island Arc to its southern termination. Thus we can now say that a pronounced lineal concen- tration of the greatest known negative gravity anomalies appears to be a common and exceedingly important characteristic of what is suspected as the most profound type of deformation of the litho- sphere, from the point of view of both relief and structure. It is also interesting to note that this statement is equally true for both the Atlantic and the Pacific, in spite of the fact that recent seismic evi- dence strongly suggests important widespread and deep-seated petro- logical and structural differences between these two great suboceanic areas of the lithosphere.’ The geophysical study of island arcs also appears to throw new light on the origin of geosynclines, or those great continental lineal troughs which are characterized by excessive thicknesses of folded and faulted shallow water sediments. It now appears that these great troughs, or furrows, such as the foredeeps, are formed quite inde- pendently of sedimentary load. In the case of island arcs, the parallel geanticline is of such small area that it contributes little or no sedi- ment to the trough while it is being formed. On the other hand, where such furrows are developed marginal to, or within, continental areas, they may be filled with sediments as rapidly as they are depressed, any excess sediment being carried beyond the lineal loci of the de- pressed basement rocks. This evidence that major diastrophic move- ments of the lithosphere may be entirely independent of the shifting 3 During the meeting of the Committee on Continental and Oceanic Structures at Edinburgh, this fall, Dr. Meinesz referred to the distribution of positive anomalies as follows: ‘‘Besides the narrow strip of negative anomalies in the East Indies, another systematic deviation of isostasy has been found: The deeper basins of the archipelago all show rather strong positive anomalies over the whole fields of the basins. These fields of positive anomalies are also found in other parts of the world in (possible) geosynclinal areas; they have been found over the basins of the West Indies (Gulf of Mexico, Sea between Cuba and Mexico, and in a few stations in the Caribbean), in the deeper basins of the Mediterranean (e.g., Tyrrhenian Sea and the northwestern part of the Mediterranean). Most of these basins are considered by the leading geologists to have sunk away in recent times; viz., since the Tertiary or in the last half of the Tertiary. A tentative explanation may perhaps here be suggested. It is difficult to ex- plain these fields of positive anomalies by an increase of density of the crust and a sinking because of a subsequent readjustment of isostasy for in that case it cannot be understood that these basins are still so far out of isostatic equilibrium. The hypoth- esis of convection-currents in the substratum seems to promise more.”’ [It is possible that magnetic studies in these regions of positive anomalies might give additional data on the convection-currents hypothesis.—R.M.F.] Dr. Meinesz closed his discussion with the following statement: ‘‘As many of the features of the gravity anomalies are clearly related to the surface features of the crust, topographical and geological, it seems ad- visable to study them in close collaboration with the geologists and geomorphologists, who have an intimate knowledge of these subjects.”’ May 15, 1937 FIELD: CONTINENTS AND OCEAN BASINS 191 load of sediments is still further being confirmed by the greatly in- creased number of soundings which have been obtained by geo- physical methods in both the Atlantic and the Pacific. Whereas, only a few years ago, the bottom of the Pacific was supposed to be rela- tively flat, we now know, thanks to the excellent work of the U. S. Navy, that it has high relief, probably of much the same type as that of mountainous continental regions. In his recent interpretation of the bathymetric data obtained on the Snellius Expedition, 1935, P. H. Keunen calls attention to the probable existence of submarine troughs, block-faulted mountains, and fault scarps on an even greater order of magnitude, and more sharply defined both topographically and structurally, than exist on the continents. To quote: The theoretical importance of these scarps appears to be considerable. As erosion is practically non-existent on the sea-bottom, and as sedimenta- tion is comparatively slow, it is in itself not surprising to find that a fault - searp, once it is produced, remains standing as a bold cliff, in some cases as much as 3,000 feet high, a feature far more striking than the most pro- nounced subaerial fault scarps known. The chief interest of these scarps is that they prove the rigidity of the bottom where they occur and that they demonstrate the ability of a fault to reach gigantic proportions without the aid of erosional obliteration of the load of the thrown-up limb. It must be further appreciated that these submarine structures are formed under 5,000 to 6,000 meters of sea water, the resulting hydro- static pressure corresponding to a depth beneath the surface of the continental lithosphere of approximately 5,000 to 6,000 feet of solid rock. Thus the suboceanic lithosphere must be quite rigid, not only at the surface but also at considerable depth beneath the surface. Finally, perhaps most important of all, the varied types of evidence just cited necessarily intimate profound diastrophism in the sub- oceanic lithosphere, over great areas, entirely independent of the transference of load through erosion and deposition; in other words, that the fundamental causes of diastrophism may be deep-seated and largely independent of surface processes. In closing this greatly condensed history of the geophysical-geo- logical exploration of oceanic basins, I feel it is necessary to emphasize two particularly important submarine geophysical-geological tech- niques which were started several years ago, and which, within the past few months, have not only produced very important data, but have clearly demonstrated their great potential value. Not only stu- dents of sedimentation, but all students of earth science are deeply indebted to C. 8. Piggot for the remarkable instrument which he has 192 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 developed for procuring 10—14 foot cores of oceanic sediments. Time does not permit, nor should I wish to attempt to anticipate the im- portant data which will result from the study of these and future cores, but it is important to note that Piggot has been the first man to improve fundamentally the method of sampling deep sea sedi- ments since the historic voyage of the Challenger. This is no mean accomplishment in a pioneer field. To supplement the data derived from the samples of the upper few feet of suboceanic sediments, the American Geophysical Union, through its special Committee, pro- moted a project for the seismic study of the submerged portion of the continental shelf. Under the able leadership of Maurice Ewing and N. H. Heck, and with the indispensable cooperation of the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, the Woods Hole Oceanographic Insti- tution, and the Geological Society of America, by means of this im- portant new technique, a submarine seismic profile was run from the wedge-point of the Cretaceous-Tertiary overlap to the edge of the continental shelf. According to this single profile, the wedge of Cre- taceous-Cenozoic sediments thickens rapidly until, at the continental margin, it is approximately two miles thick.* Thus the pre-Cretaceous erosion surface exposed to view in the Piedmont region is at least a mile below the bottom of the bathyal slope at the continental margin. Every effort will be made within the next year or two to discover if this important structural feature continues beyond the edge of the continental platform and eastward under the Atlantic basin. Present indications are that the topographic limit of the Atlantic continental margin may be of no particular structural significance. This prophesy is apparently still further strengthened by the work of Gutenberg and Richter who, after making a careful study of the Atlantic seismic reflections, produced by earthquakes, have come to the conclusion that the Atlantic basin is everywhere underlain by sial, instead of sima; or, in other words, that from 15 to 20 kilometers of continental rocks form the basement of the entire sub-Atlantic lithosphere. Thus the new data suggest not only that there may have been no Atlantic basin in existence during an appreciable portion of the earlier history of the earth, but, more interesting still, that the present Atlantic basin may be due to the downwarp, in post-Paleozoic time, of a vast and now vanished continental area. Such a lost continent could not be a “lost Atlantis’? according to the popular conception of the term, but, if true, it might be called a “lost Atlantica” in the structural and 4 As the wedge thickens oceanwards it may include lower Mesozoic marine sedi- ments. May 15, 1937 FIELD: CONTINENTS AND OCEAN BASINS 193 paleogeographic sense. At any rate, I believe that, by geophysical methods, we shall be able, before long, to procure sufficient data con- cerning the basement rocks of the Atlantic to be able to prove, among other things, whether North and South America ever were connected with the present trans-Atlantic continents. While discussing this possibility with Harold Jeffreys last fall at Edinburgh, he said: “‘I hope that the present sub-Atlantic area was not a continent during the Paleozoic because if it was, I certainly would not know where to put the Atlantic Ocean during the Paleozoic Era.” I agreed that would be a tremendous amount of water on anybody’s mind, even after making due allowances for essential geosynclinal, epeiric, and epicontinental seas. But, as I have previously mentioned, we may already be faced with considerable difficulty in accounting for the origin of the submarine canyons in the continental shelves. In 1909 Daly demanded a reduction of ocean level of some 300 feet to account for the origin of atolls. Today Shepard demands the reduction of ocean level over a mile to account for the subaerial erosion of the now submarine canyons. A short time hence, we may be wrestling with the problem of where to put the Atlantic Ocean during the Paleozoic. I, therefore, suggest that, until we have more data on the topography and structure of the suboceanic lithosphere, we are not in a particularly strong position to check any major hypothesis which attempts to explain the pattern of the face of the earth. On the other hand, we already have sufficient data which strongly suggest theories other than those already proposed; I refer particularly to the data on the pronounced relief of relatively large areas of the bottoms of the oceans. In the first place, this pronounced relief is not particu- larly synonymous with the phrase, ‘“‘ocean basin.’’ We are still apt to think of a basin as a relatively circular depression with a relatively concave, smooth surface. I do not wish to emphasize this conception further than to point out that, in terms of smooth surfaces, a wide shallow basin will accommodate the same amount of water as a smaller but deeper basin. Also, provided the basin remains the same size, its liquid capacity may be increased or decreased by the de- formation of its relatively smooth surface. Thus depressions such as the foredeeps of island ares and fault valleys or grabens, such as the Bartlett Deep, which are developed below the mean basin level, tend to reduce ocean level; while, on the other hand, great positive areas, such as the somewhat misnamed Atlantic Ridge, tend to raise the ocean level. Thus, without necessarily changing the general shape of the basin, the development of many but minor inequalities in its 194 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 surface will alter the liquid capacity; and the chances will always be strongly against the possibility that the elevations and depressions will cancel each other, especially if they are not subject to isostatic compensation. At the present time, we do not have sufficient topo- graphic data to compute the relation of relief of basin surface to basin capacity. Also, we have not sufficient data concerning the structure of the suboceanic lithosphere to determine the space-time relation- ships of the depressions and elevations. We do, however, have seismic evidence as to areas in which deformation is active at the present time. For several reasons, it seems wise to plan our geophysical- geological surveys from the continental margins into the oceanic basins for, in this manner, we shall be able to determine the continuity or discontinuity of structures whose space and time relationships are known. If, for the present, the theory of drifting continents may be considered as a valuable working hypothesis, it is primarily because it serves to stimulate the exploration of oceanic basins, and thus helps to produce new and badly needed data on that great “‘terra incog- nita’”’ of a major portion of the crust of the earth, let that data lead us where it may. Finally, until these data are available, we can not even be sure that the continents are fair geological samples of the entire lithosphere. SUMMARY 1. The attempt has been made to review the growth of ideas, theories, and hypotheses on continental and oceanic structure, es- pecially in relation to their effect on future trends in geophysical- geological research. 2. From the geological point of view, the epitome of the problem is paleogeography, especially the paleogeography of the pre-Mesozoic history of the earth. 3. Emphasis has been placed on the lack of physiographic and structural data on the suboceanic lithosphere, and the importance of acquiring these data. 4. It has been suggested that further data on the topography and structure of the suboceanic lithosphere will throw important light on such major questions as isostasy, geosynclines, and continental drift. 5. Available data on the suboceanic lithosphere suggest that di- astrophism, or the major deformation processes, is relatively inde- pendent of transference of surficial load, such as takes place under the conditions of erosion and deposition. 6. Fortunately, geophysical techniques are already, or soon will May 15, 1937 FIELD: CONTINENTS AND OCEAN BASINS 195 be, available for making a geophysical survey of ocean basins. These techniques, to date, include exact positions and sounding, and deter-. mination of gravity and seismic methods, all equivalent in accuracy to those now used on the continents. Further, the techniques are sufficiently varied so that they can be used to support or check each other. 7. Since the oceans are international territory, they are not the particular business of any nation, and, though the freedom of the seas may be open to debate, the ocean bottom is unclaimed territory. Last fall, the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics, at its Edinburgh meeting, created a Commission on Continental and Oceanic Structure. This Commission is approved and supported by twenty-four nations, and it is hoped and planned that it will help serve to promote effective international cooperation in the explora- tion of the suboceanic lithosphere. 8. The ultimate progress of submarine geophysical-geological sur- veying depends, however, first, on the methods to be employed or plan of attack, and, second, on the increasing use of important con- tributing agencies. While a certain amount of money is, of course, a necessary part of each project, such grants can be greatly reduced by the use of existing agencies. Further, in most cases, the grants will be useless without such important material contributions as sub- marines, cable ships, the specially equipped vessels of marine bio- logical laboratories, and last, but not least, the trained personnel to operate these various types of vessels. So far, we have not found that geophysicists or geologists are particularly good sailors! In conclusion, I wish to express the thanks of the American Com- mittee of the International Geodetic and Geophysical Union to the United States Navy, the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, the American Bell Tele- phone Laboratories, the American Philosophical Society, the British Admiralty, the Geophysical Institutes of Norway and Holland, and the Geological Society of America for their most generous and indis- pensable aid in the exploration of ‘‘no man’s land.’ But, as Dr. Bowie has so frankly put it, present thanks carry the intimation of a desire for future favors. Fortunately, even geophysicists and geolo- gists are human, and particularly the new amphibious variety, who have braved the ocean deep, and who, in fear of being wrecked upon a storm of hypotheses, are crying out for more and more help in their factual surveys. 196 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 BOTAN Y.—Phacelia mustelina, a new plant from Death Valley, California.| FREDERICK V. CoviLLe, Bureau of Plant Industry. Eleven species of the genus Phacelia, family Hydrophyllaceae, are known from Death Valley. One of them, Phacelia perityloides, is a round-leaved, white-flowered perennial. All the others are annuals that have blue, violet, purple, or lavender flowers. In years of good rainfall several of these species are abundant and characteristic plants of the desert landscape, and a few of them are conspicuous for their beauty. Their blossoms occur in a one-sided cluster known as a scorpioid raceme, or scorpioid cyme, which unrolls, as the flowers open, from a tight, flat spiral. From this characteristic of their in- florescence, the species of Phacelia are known as curlybloom. The present paper deals with an apparently new species of this genus, discovered in Death Valley by M. French Gilman. Phacelia mustelina Coville, sp. nov. Planta annua, Phaceliae rotundifoliae affinis, sed foliis ovatis vel oblongis et corolla violacea, quam calyce fere duplo longiore, corollae tubo calycem a circiter duplo longitudine loborum corollae superante; Phaceliae pulchellae etiam affinis, sed caulibus glanduloso-pilosis, corollae latitudine circiter 4-5 mm. Phaceliae rotundifoliae folia orbicularia vel reniformia sunt, et corolla alba, tubo calycem vix superante; Phaceliae pulchellae caules glanduloso-puberulenti sunt, et corollae latitudo 8-10 mm. Plant annual, 3 to 10 cm high, branching; stems, as well as the petioles, leaf blades, peduncles, pedicels, and calyx lobes, pilose with weak hairs, many of them gland-tipped; leaf blades up to 2.5 em long, ovate to oblong, mostly cordate at the base, coarsely and shallowly dentate with as many as 5 large teeth on each side and often with much smaller teeth in the sinuses between the large teeth, the lower leaves with petioles longer than the blades, sometimes twice as long; inflorescence consisting of terminal several-flowered scorpioid bractless cymes, on peduncles 1.5 cm or less in length, the lowest pedicels 5 mm long or less; calyx lobes 3.5 to 5.5 mm long, narrowly oblanceo- late to narrowly oblanceolate-spatulate, obtuse; corolla about 4 to 5 mm across when expanded, 6 to 9 mm long, violet, nearly twice as long as the calyx, the corolla tube usually exceeding the calyx by about twice the length of the corolla lobes, and about 2 to 3.5 mm in diameter at the base of the lobes, pilose above with long weak hairs, an occasional hair gland-tipped, the lower part of the corolla tube glabrous, the lobes rounded, broader than long, about 2 mm wide and 1.5 mm in length, the corolla appendages at- tached by one margin to the corolla tube, linear, narrowed above and with- out a free apex; stamens 5, shorter than the corolla tube, the filaments un- equal, very sparingly hairy toward base but usually appearing hairless even under a lens; ovary and immature capsule sparingly hairy, ovules 40 in the ovary examined, the. style longer than the calyx, sparingly hairy below, bifid at the apex to the depth of about 1 mm; seeds immature 0.5 to 0.8 mm long, pitted. 1 Received January 29, 1937. This is the last paper written by Dr. Coville. May 15, 1937 COVILLE: PHACELIA MUSTELINA 197 Type specimen in the United States National Herbarium, no. 1,630,905, collected June 23, 1935, by M. French Gilman, no. 1810, in Death Valley, California, at the head of Titus Canyon, Grapevine Mountains, tightly wedged in the crevices of a ledge of rhyolite rock, at an elevation above 6,000 feet. Collected also on rock ledges at similar elevations in a branch of Wildrose Canyon, June 138, 1935 (Gilman 1706), and in Wood Canyon, June 18, 1935 (Gilman 1750), both on the west slope of the Panamint Mountains, which border Death Valley on the west. , Probably the nearest relative of Phacelia mustelina is P. gooddingii Brand, 1913, a species which appears to be the same as P. pulchella A. Gray, 1875. Brand, in his account of the genus Phacelia in the Pflanzenreich (Heft 59, 1913), distinguishes gooddingii from pulchella by its glabrous filaments and its approximately 25 ovules on each placenta. He describes pulchella as having sparsely pilose filaments and 7 to 10 ovules to each placenta.? A careful examination of the original collection on which Phacelia pulchella was based, C. C. Parry no. 182,? and of the original collection from which P. gooddingii was described, Goodding no. 2307, shows that in both speci- mens the filaments are sparingly pilose toward the base, and the ovules are about 50 to 60 per capsule. Both type specimens are branched from the base, the branches ascending and glandular-puberulent. In both specimens the calyx, at flowering time, is about 5 mm long, and the corolla twice as long or sometimes more. I can find no reason for separating gooddingii from pulchella. The type specimen of pulchella came from the vicinity of St. George, southwestern Utah, where it grew on ‘‘gypseous clay knolls.”’ The type of gooddingii came from Las Vegas, southeastern Nevada, little more than a hundred miles from St. George and in the same climatic zone, and was recorded by its collector, Leslie N. Goodding, as growing on ‘‘gumbo flats.” Phacelia mustelina differs from P. pulchella in its glandular-pilose stems, the hairs weak and the longer ones half a millimeter or even a millimeter in length; its non-glandular hairs (mixed with gland-tipped hairs) on the leaf blades weak and often reaching a length of 0.7 mm or more; and its corolla about 4 to 5mm across, when the lobes are expanded. In pulchella the stems are glandular-puberulent, the gland-tipped hairs stout, and probably not more than a tenth of a millimeter in length; the non-glandular hairs (mixed with gland-tipped hairs) on the leaf blades are stout and less than half a millimeter in length; and the corolla is about 8 to 10 mm across when the lobes are expanded. In all our specimens of mustelina the larger leaves are cordate at the base, a characteristic seldom found in pulchella. Mature seeds of P. mustelina are not available for comparison with those of pulchella. Among the phacelias of Death Valley itself the species most closely related 2 Pflanzenreich 59: 105, 116, 120. 1913. 3 See A. Gray, Proc. Amer. Acad. Sci. 10: 326. 1875. Also C. C. Parry, Amer. Nat. 9:16. 1875. 198 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 to mustelina is Phacelia rotundifolia Torr. Our specimens of rotundifolia from the Death Valley region were collected at elevations below 5,000 feet, the lowest at 900 feet. Besides this differences in altitudinal range and the differences between mustelina and rotundifolia cited in the Latin diagnosis, Mr. Gilman writes that the odor of the herbage of the new species is different from that of rotundzfolia and is the “odor of an angry or scared weasel,” a characteristic indicated in the name mustelina. BOTANY.—WNew species and nomenclatorial changes in eastern Asiatic Myrsinaceae.1 Ecpert H. WALKER, U.S. National Mu- seum. (Communicated by RoLanp W. Brown.) This is the fourth paper” the writer has published on the Myr- sinaceae of China and Japan preliminary to a critical revision of this group. The new species and nomenclatorial changes are here pub- lished because of unavoidable delay in the appearance of the re- vision. Ardisia (Subg. Akosmos Mez) brunnescens Walker, sp. nov. Fig. 1 Frutex 3 m altus undique glaber; folia subtus brunnescentia glandulis marginalibus non donata, nervis lateralibus 10—15-jugis, subtus elevatis, venulis elevatis reticulatis, nervo marginali non prominulo vel nullo; in- florescentiae in ramulis glabris lateralibus specialibus subterminales, pani- culato-cymosae vel duplicato-umbellatae, ramulis gracilibus, pedicellis gracilibus nonnihil clavatis; flores 4 mm longae; sepala ovata, obtusa, per anthesim non valde dextrorse imbricata, non-numquam obscure fusco- lepidota; fructus atro-rubescens, nonnihil obscure punctatus. Type in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden, collected by H. B. Morse at Lungchow, Kwangsi, no. 708, distributed by A. Henry. An additional specimen is Wang no. 485, collected in Yun Fou District, West River region, Kwangtung, distributed by Sun Yatsen University. This species seems to resemble most closely A. viburnifolia Pitard in Lecomte’s Fl. Gen. Indo-Chine 3: 821. 1930. In the original description of that species no collector’s number is cited, but a specimen in the New York Botanical Garden, Poilane no. 11914 from the same locality, apparently belongs to Pitard’s species. It differs in having fewer prominent lateral nerves and flowers about half as large as those of A. brunnescens. Ardisia (Subg. Crispardisia Mez) filiformis Walker, sp. nov. Fig. 2 Frutex 1 m altus, ramulis pergracilibus glabris; folia membranacea, 12-19 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- ceived March 27, 1937. 2 Four new species of Myrsinaceae from China. This JouRNAL. 21: 477-480, figs. 1-4. 1981. é Embella scandens (Lour.) Mez and tts eastern Asiaticallies. Lingnan Sci. Jour, 10: 475-480. Maesa hirsuta (Myrsinaceae), a new shrub from Kweichow, China. Papers Michigan Acad. Sci. 20: 231-282, pl. 50. 1935. 199 WALKER: MYRSINACEAE May 15, 1937 Fig. 1.—Ardisia brunnescens Walker, sp. nov. a, Branchlet with inflorescence, nat. size; 6, flower, X5; c, fruit, X5. Drawn from type specimen Morse no. at 2 708. 200 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 cm longa, 1—2.5 cm lata, glabra, subtus paulum lepidota, nervis marginalibus distinctis, nervulis ramosis in glandulas marginales desinentibus; inflores- centiae glabrae, paniculatae, ramulis valde gracilibus; sepala non valde im- bricata, minute punctata; antherae dorso non punctatae; fructus circa 6 mm longus, rubescens, distincte punctatus. Type in the United States National Herbarium, no. 1,273,493, collected under forest at Seh-feng Dar Shan, 8. Nanning, Kwangsi, Oct..19, 1928, by R. C. Ching, no. 8000. Additional specimens seen are W. T. Tsang, no. Fig. 2.—Ardisia filiformis Walker, sp. nov. Branchlet with inflorescence X3%. Drawn from W. T. Tsang no. 22393. 22393, collected May 27, 1933, near Iu Shan village, southeast of Shang-sze, Shang-sze district, Kwangsi near the Kwangtung border, deposited in the Arnold Arboretum; and W. T’. Tsang no. 22567, collected in the same locality June 26, 1933, deposited in Arnold Arboretum and in the United States National Herbarium. This species is distinct in its very slender branchlets, its paniculate in- florescences with almost filamentous peduncles and pedicels, and its slenderly lanceolate, long-acuminate membranous leaves. The marginal glands subtending the veinlets which branch from the distinct marginal nerve are very small and sometimes almost wanting. Its position in the subgenus Crispardisia is thus uncertain. Embelia henryi Walker, sp. nov. Fig. 3 Frutex scandens, ramulis novellis puberulis glabratis; folia coriacea, 20—30 May 15, 1937 WALKER: MYRSINACEAE 201 mm longa, 8-10 mm lata, serrulata, subtus nigro-punctata, nervis lateralibus numerosis, obscuris, subtilibus; flores 5-7, 5-meri, subcorymbosi, pedunculo 4 mm longo, e basi subsquamosa vel subnuda oriundo, pedicellis 3-4 mm longis; fructus globosus, 4 mm longus, atro-ruber, nigor-punctatus. Type in the herbarium of the Arnold Arboretum, collected at Mengtze, Yunnan, by A. Henry, no. 10913; duplicate in the Herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden. Fig. 3——Embelia henryt Walker, sp.nov. a, Branchlet with inflorescences, nat- eee b, portion of corolla of 9 flower showing attached stamens, X8; cc, pistil, <8. Maesa insignis Chun, Sunyatsenia 2: 81, pl. 20. 1934 Maesa hirsuta Walker, Papers Michigan Acad. Sci. 20: 232, pl. 50. 1935. The description of Chun’s species appeared in print while that of M. hirsuta Walker was in process of publication and the manuscript could not be recalled. Subsequently a type collection of Chun’s species was examined and found to differ significantly only in length of petioles. However, such a difference is not a valid character for separating these two species. 202 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL, 27, NO. 5 “Desired by RH Se sSeenerneeae (For explanation of Fig. 4, see bottom of opposite page.) May 15, 1937 DIKMANS: TRICHOSTRONGYLUS 203 Maesa permollis Kurz, Jour. Asiat. Soc. Bengal. 407: 66. 1871 Stout climbing shrub, 2 to 3 m high, the branches rather few somewhat thickened or the ultimate rather slender, densely pubescent with rufous setose hairs almost throughout; leaves petiolate (83-25 mm), the blade thick- membranous, about 25 cm long, 12 cm wide, ranging from 12 to 30 cm long, 4 to 18 cm wide, elliptic or oblong to broadly obovate, rounded or obtuse at base, obtuse to acute or acuminate at apex, distinctly sinuate or serrate- dentate with callose teeth, green and glabrous or nearly so above, brownish and densely rufous pilose or hirsute beneath especially on the nerves, the midrib prominent, the lateral veins terminating in the teeth; inflorescence short, subglomerate or racemose or subpaniculate, shorter than petiole or up to 4 cm long, rather many-flowered, densely hirsute; flowers about 3 mm long, on short pedicels scarcely 1 mm long, white, the bracts minute, about equaling the pedicels; sepals equaling the pedicels, united into a tube almost as long as the limb, ovate, acute, densely hirsute or pilose, the margin nar- rowly scarious; corolla tubular campanulate, glabrous, the tube about 2mm long, lightly lined or smooth, the lobes ovate, narrowly rounded, more or less spreading; stamens included, attached within the tube, the filaments short, the anthers about equal to the filaments, broadly elliptical; pistil with short thick style and indistinctly lobed stigma; fruit about 4 mm long, ovoid, acute or apiculate at apex, reddish, densely hirsute. Distribution.—Southern Asia from Burna to Yunnan and Kweichow. _ Specimens examined in various American and British herbaria :—Kwei- chow: Y. T'stang 4622, 4768. Yunnan: Forrest 29394; Henry 9649, 9649A, 9649B, 11707, 11707A, 11707B, 11707C, 11707D; Rock 2580. Maesa permollis var. effusa Walker, var. nov. Fig. 4 Frutex 3-8 m altus, e forma typica inflorescentibus valde paniculatis ad 9 cm longis differens. Type in the herbarium of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England, col- lected by G. Forrest, No. 12143,in Yunnan; duplicate in the herbarium of the Royal Botanic Garden, Edinburgh. An additional collection is Forrest 13637, collected in the “open. Jungle in aoe o TADne valley, Upper Burma, .. . alt. 2000 ft, April 1917.” ZOOLOGY.—A note on the members of the nematode genus Tricho- strongylus occurring in rodents and lagomorphs, with descriptions of two new species.1 GERARD Dikmans, U.S. Bureau of Animal Industry. (Communicated by Emmett W. PRIcE.) The genus Trichostrongylus was established by Looss (1905) with Trichostrongylus retortaeformis (Zeder, 1800) Looss, 1905, as type species. At the present time the genus contains a large number of species of which the following have been reported from rodents and lagomorphs: _ 1 Received March 2, 1937. Fig. 4.—Maesa permollis var. effusa Walker, var. nov. Type specimen, slightly less than half natural size. 204 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 1. Trichostrongylus fiberius Barker, 1915, from the American muskrat, Ondatra zibethica (= Fiber zibethicus), (?) Nebraska. 2. Trichostrongylus calcaratus Ransom, 1911, from cottontail rab- bit, Sylvilagus floridanus mallurus, Bowie, Maryland. 3. Trichostrongylus retortaeformis (Zeder, 1800) Looss, 1905, from the domestic rabbit, Oryctolagus cunicult, and European hare, Lepus europeaus, Europe. 4. Trichostrongylus pigmentatus (von Linstow, 1904) Hall, 1916, from Lepus nigricollis, Ceylon. 5. Trichostrongylus affinis Graybill, 1924, from wild rabbits, Prince- ton, New Jersey. 6. Trichostrongylus delicatus Hall, 1916, from the squirrel, Sciurus abertt mamus, Colorado. 7. Trichostrongylus colubriformis (Giles, 1892) Ransom, 1911, from hares and rabbits in U.S.S.R. and from Sylvilagus nuttalliz pinetis and Lepus sp. in the United States. As noted by Hall (1916), Barker’s description of Trichostrongylus fiberius is very unsatisfactory. Neither the nature of the bursal rays nor that of the spicules can be determined from his figures and de- scriptions. During the course of the present investigation, tricho- strongyles collected from muskrats originating in New Jersey and Iowa have been identified as Trichostrongylus calcaratus Ransom, 1911. Trichostrongylus retortaeformis (Zeder, 1800) Looss, 1905, has been reported as a parasite of rabbits and hares from Europe, but to date there is no record of its occurrence in these animals in the United States. The one specimen labeled Trichostrongylus retortaeformis found in the Helminthological Collection of the U. 8S. National Museum proved on examination to be Trichostrongylus calcaratus. An examination of rabbit parasites which had been entered in the Helminthological Collection of the Bureau of Animal Industry showed that a bottle labeled Nematodirus sp. from Sylvilagus nuttalla pinetis collected at Howbert, Colorado, contained two kinds of nema- todes, one of which on examination proved to be Trichostrongylus colubriformis; this nematode was found to have been collected also from Lepus sp. in Nebraska. The determination of these latter speci- mens was made by Dr. E. W. Price of the Zoological Division. They are listed in the collection under Nos. 28165 and 28181. We have, therefore, three records of the occurrence of 7. colubriformis as a parasite of the Leporidae in the United States. These records are from Colorado and Nebraska. May 15, 1937 DIKMANS: TRICHOSTRONGYLUS 205 Fig. 1— Trichostrongylus ransomi, n. sp. 1, bursa, right lateral view; 2, bursa, left lateral view; 3, spicules and gubernaculum; 4, dorsal rays of bursa; 5, muscular portion of ovejectors; 6, terminal portion of female. Trichostrongylus calcaratus was reported by Ransom from Sylvi- lagus mallurus from Bowie, Maryland. During the present investiga- tion these nematodes have been found also in the muskrat, Ondatra 206 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 zibethica, and the ground hog, Marmota monax monax. This nematode is also a common parasite of wild rabbits in Louisiana. Trichostrongylus delicatus Hall, 1916, has been reexamined by H. F. Nagaty of the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine and in a letter dated February 28, 1931, addressed to Dr. M. C. Hall, he states that in his opinion 7’. delicatus is identical with T’.. colubriformis (Giles, 1892) Ransom, 1911. (=T7. instabilis (Railliet, 1893) Looss, 1905, and subtilis Looss, 1905.) In addition to the species listed above, two new species, one from a rabbit and the other from a prairie dog, have been found and are described below. Trichostrongylus ransomi n. sp. Fig. 1 Specific diagnosis.—Trichostrongylus: Male 2.25 to 3 mm long by 100u wide just anterior to bursa; head about 8u wide. Esophagus 500 to 600 long. Spicules equal and similar 130 to 140u long; distal part of each recurved rather sharply and ending in a sharp point; there are three short projections on the inner side of the spicule a short distance in front of the termination of the spicule, which give it the appearance of being serrated. The bursa is tightly rolled in such a manner that it is almost impossible to determine the disposition and course of the rays. As in 7’. calcaratus and T. affinis, the ventro-lateral and the externo- lateral rays are the heaviest; externo-dorsals with slender tips but widening considerably at their juncture with the postero-lateral and dorsal rays; dorsal ray lying midway between the two externo-dorsals bifurcating once and terminating in two straight processes. Female from 3 to 3.5 mm long. Combined length of muscular portions of ovejectors 375 to 440u. Distance from vulva to anus about 450y; that from anus to tip of tail 50 to 60u. Eggs 60 to 70u long by 30 to 36u wide. Host.—Rabbit (probably Syluilagus floridanus alacer). Location.—Small intestine. Locality.—Jeanerette, Louisiana, U.S. A. Type specimens.—U. 8. National Museum Helminthological Collection no. 30462. Trichostrongylus texianus n. sp. Fig. 2 Specific diagnosis —Trichostrongylus: Male 2.8 to 3 mm long and 65 to 70u wide in region of proximal ends of spicules. Esophagus 800 to 825u long and about 30u wide near its termina- tion. Spicules unequal in length; right spicule about 85 long and left spicule about 100u long. Right spicule 25u wide at a distance of about 65u from proximal end, narrowing abruptly from that point and ending in a sharp point; left spicule also ending in a sharp point; when viewed from the side both spicules present frontal projections, the one on right spicule located about 20 to 22u from distal end, the one on left spicule about 30u from distal end, both spicules presenting bluntly pointed branches originating near Fig. 2.—Trichostrongylus texanus, n. sp. 1, bursa, lateral view; 2, terminal portion of male, ventral view; 3, tail of female; 4, anterior portion of body; 5, spicules and gubernaculum; 6, muscular portion of ovejectors. May lo. 1937 DIKMANS: TRICHOSTRONGYLUS 207 il [j1;: “thes il-tt wt FTA RAE A (For explanation of Fig. 2, see bottom of opposite page.) 208 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 dorsal border. Gubernaculum paddle-shaped, 55yu long and 15y to 17y wide, with a slight indentation in the end of the handle of the paddle; handle of paddle about 20u long and indentation about 5y long. Bursa symmetrical; ventro-ventral ray small and widely separated from ventro-lateral ray as in other members of genus; ventro-lateral, externo-lateral and medio-lateral rays running parallel toward edge of bursa; postero-lateral diverging from medio-lateral in the dorsal direction; externo-dorsal rays originating at base of dorsal ray; dorsal ray bifurcating about 12 to 15y from distal end, the unbranched tips of bifurcation bending ventrally. Female 4.8 to 5.2 mm long and 85 to 90u wide in region of vulva; head 7 to 10u wide. Esophagus 850yu long by 25 to 30u wide at its distal portion. Combined length of muscular portions of ovejectors, including sphincters, 350u. Vulva 850u from end of tail; distance from anus to tip of tail 60 to 65y. Eggs 70 to 80u by 45 to 50u. Host.—Prairie dog, Cynomys ludovicianus arizonensis. Location.—Small intestine. Localities.—Nolan and Runnels Counties, Texas, U.S.A. Type specimens.—U. 8. National Museum Helminthological Collection no. 30463. The two species described above may be differentiated from other species occurring in rodents and lagomorphs by the following key: KEY TO THE SPECIES OF TRICHOSTRONGYLUS IN RODENTS AND LAGOMORPHS? 1. Spicules more than 550y long; viscera pigmented black. . 7. pigmentatus Spicules less than 500 long; viscera not pigmented black.......... 2 2. Spicules more than 175y long, asymmetrical; distal end of right spicule smooth, of left: spicule serrated. .....1 5... 04 seen eet T. calcaratus Spicules less than 175y long. 2.......'.... sees ek 3 3. Spicules 130 to 155y long, distal ends provided with two blunt recurved hooks; distance from anus to tip of female tail 140 to 165y T. affinas Distal ends of spicules not provided with blunt, recurved hooks; dis- tance from anus to tip of female tail less than. Pats Sone 4 4, Spicules 130 to 140, long, distal ends recurved, ending in . sharp points and with three projections on inner side of each spicule....7'. ransomt Distal end of spicules not provided with projections as above........ 5 5. Spicules equal, 135 to 145u long, terminal hook of spicules long and sharply defined but not high; distance from anus to tip of female tail OT OPA as eee aN eae wh Bal cheek 6 ak etn See T. colubriformis Pmlciles unequal. i ha is os es nes te ee ee 6 6. Spicules similar in conformation to those of T. colubriformis, shorter spicule 145u long, longer spicule 157-172 long; median side of each spicule provided with two long, thin appendages; female tail long CRN STC SO cay tee Re ee amen EY T. retortaeformis Right spicule about 85yu and left about 100u long; right spicule narrow- ing abruptly about 65y from proximal end; both spicules terminate TN Shear rOlant es Agi cet oe Sk se gk ta wg ah T. texianus LITERATURE CITED BarkER, F. D. Parasites of the American muskrat (Fiber zibethicus). Jour. Parasit- 1(4): 184-197. 1915. 2 T. fiberius has not been included in this key because it is impossible to determine its identity from the original description and figures. May 15, 1937 CLARK AND WILLIAMS: BUTTERFLIES 209 GRAYBILL, H. W. A new species of roundworm of the genus Trichostrongylus from the rabbit. Proc. of the U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 66(11): 1-8. 1924. Haut, M. C. Nematode parasites of the mammals of the orders Rodentia, Lagomorpha and Hyracoidea. Proc. of the U.S. Nat. Mus. 50: 1-258. 1916. Looss, ARTHUR. Das Genus Trichostrongylus n. g. mit zwei neuen gelegentlichen Para- siten des Menschen. (Notizen zur Helminthologie Aegyptens). Centralb. f. Bakte- riol., (etc.), Jena, 1. Abt., Orig. 39(4): 409-422. 1905. Ransom, B. H. The nematodes parasitic in the alimentary tract of cattle, sheep and other ruminants. Bull. 127. Bureau Animal Ind., U.S. Dept. of Agri. pp. 1-132. 1911. —_— Two new species of parasitic nematodes. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 41: 363-369. 1911. Scuuuz, R. Ep. Zur Differentialdiagnose zwischen den Nematoden Trichostrongylus retortaeformis (Zeder, 1800) und T. instabilis (Railliet, 1893). Deutsche Tier- arztl. Wochenschr. 39(28): 439-440. 1931. . ENTOMOLOGY.—Records of Argynnis diana and of some other butterflies from Virginia.t AusTIN H. Cuarx, U. 8. National Museum, and Carrouu M. Wiuiams, University of Richmond. The great diversity of geographic conditions in Virginia is reflected in widely varying faunal conditions in different portions of the State. The low-lying eastern portion is a northeasterly extension of the Lower Austral life zone. The mountains in the west are characterized by a southwesterly extension of the Transition zone, with their high- est summits, in the southwest, capped by Canadian “‘islands.’’ Be- tween the Lower Austral and Transition zones is a narrower strip of Upper Austral not very clearly differentiated—so far as the butter- flies are concerned—from the Lower Austral. The Lower Austral zone in Virginia presents some curious anom- alies. Perhaps the most interesting of these anomalies is the occur- rence in localized areas of species of butterflies characteristic of the Transition zone. Such species are Argynnis diana, Satyrodes eurydice, and the typical form of Atrytone dion, which seem quite out of place on the hot coastal plain. Argynnis cybele, common in the Upper Austral and Transition zones, also occurs here. In these same areas Enodia creola is widespread and locally com- mon, and Amblyscirtes carolina is almost everywhere present, though apparently never very numerous. Enodia portlandia and Amblyscirtes textor also are common here, but both of these range eastward to the sea. Atrytone dion dion occurs in the cool boggy hollows between the sand dunes west of Cape Henry; the southern form, A. d. alabamae, occurs further to the northward, in the Dahl swamp in Accomac County. The other species are found, in more or less widely separated localities, along the western border of the Dismal Swamp and in and 1 Received March 2, 1937. 210 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 5 near the swamps bordering the Blackwater and the Meherrin rivers. We have thought it advisable at this time to call attention to this curious feature in the distribution of butterflies in Virginia in the hope that others may be stimulated to undertake investigations in this region. A very large number of records will be necessary before this and other anomalies in the distribution of the butterflies in the Virginian coastal plain can be properly interpreted. Through the courtesy of a number of our colleagues we are privi- leged to include their records with our own. We are under special obligations to Prof. Ellison A. Smyth, Jr., of Salem (formerly of Blacksburg), Va.; to Prof. Lorande Loss Woodruff of Yale Uni- versity, New Haven, Conn.; to Dr. G. W. Rawson, of Detroit, Mich.; to Mr. Herman J. Erb, of Ozone Park, N. Y.; to Mr. C. C. Walton of Richmond, Va.; and to Mr. W. Herbert Wagner, of Washington, Dac: Argynnis diana.—The male of Argynnis diana was described and figured by Pieter Cramer in 1779. The locality he gave for his specimen was “‘Vir- ginia.”’ The species was not again recorded from Virginia until 1895 when Prof. Ellison A. Smyth, Jr., wrote that it occurred in Montgomery County and “along the Blue Ridge,’’ and in 1896 when Dr. Henry Skinner said that “the females found in eastern Tennessee, western North Carolina and southern Illinois are larger than those found in the mountains of Virginia.” In 1899 Sherman Denton mentioned its occurrence in ‘“‘Western Virginia.” In 1916 William C. Wood recorded it from Camp Craig, near Blacksburg, and Professor Smyth recorded it from Blacksburg and said that he had found it in Montgomery, Washington, and Giles Counties. In 1934 and 1935 the senior author recorded it from Apple Orchard mountain in Bedford County. The locality from which came Cramer’s specimen still remained a mystery, for all the later records are from the mountains—territory but little explored in Cramer’s time. This butterfly has a much wider range in Virginia than one would be led to suppose from the few published records. It even occurs on the coastal plain. During the past summer the junior author took it south of Zuni and southeast of New Bohemia in the vicinity of the Blackwater river, and presumably it occurs elsewhere in this region. Its occurrence here in the long settled portion of Virginia would explain satisfactorily how it happened that Cramer was able to secure a specimen, and we believe that eastern Virginia should be regarded as the type locality of the species. The localities from which Argynnis diana is known in Virginia are: May 15, 1937 CLARK AND WILLIAMS: BUTTERFLIES 211 Batu County: Warm Springs (G. W. Rawson); Hot Springs (Col. Wirt Robinson). ALLEGHANY County: Clifton Forge, July 5, 1986 (C. C. Walton). Gites County: (E. A. Smyth, Jr., 1916); Mountain Lake, July 1936 (L. L. Woodruff). Biuanp County: Effna, July 19, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark). DickENson County: Fremont, July 18, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark). WasHineton County: (KE. A. Smyth, Jr., 1916); Damascus, July 13, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Konnarock, July 13, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark). SmytH County: Iron Mountain, July 10, 19386 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Elk Gardens (Miss Umbarger); below Elk Gardens, July 11- 13, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark). Patrick County: Blue Ridge Moun- tain, near Lovers’ Leap, September 1, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark). Monrt- GOMERY County: (E. A. Smyth, Jr., 1895, 1916); Blacksburg (E. A. Smyth, Jr., 1916); Camp Craig, near Blacksburg, taken by C. Harvey Crabill in August, 1914 (Wood, 1916); Poverty Hollow, near Blacksburg, 1933 (H. J. Erb). Roanoke County: Salem (EK. A. Smyth, Jr.). BrpFrorp County: Apple Orchard Mountain (A. H. Clark, 1934, 1935). CHESTERFIELD County: (C. M. Williams). PRincE GEORGE County: Southeast of New Bohemia, July 28, 1936 (C. M. Williams). IsLE or Wicut County: South of Zuni, August 22, 19386 (C. M. Williams). Indefinite records: Along the Blue Ridge (EK. A. Smyth, Jr., 1895); Mountains of Virginia (Skinner, 1896); Western Virginia (=? West Witeinisy (Denton, 1899); Virginia (Cramer, 1779). Although this butterfly is widely distributed over the state it is very local, and in the places where it is found it occurs as a rule only in small numbers. Its favorite haunts are steep damp slopes and ravines where it keeps largely in the woods unless lured to the roadsides or into the open by the flowers of milkweed or ironweed. Argynnis cybele—This species, common in the piedmont region and in the mountains, was found south of Zuni, Isle of Wight County, on September 6, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark). Enodia creola.—This butterfly proves to have a fairly extensive range in eastern Virginia, flying usually, though not always, with E. portlandia. Un- published records are: Near New Bohemia, Prince George County, June 22, 1936 (G. W. Rawson and W. H. Wagner); near Petersburg, Dinwiddie County, June 25, 1936 (C. M. Williams); near Zuni, Isle of Wight County, September 6, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Emporia, Greensville County, August 19, 1936 (C. M. Williams). We have noticed, independently, that both this species and LE. portlandia are invariably associated with the cane (Arundinaria gigantea) which we therefore believe is their food plant in eastern Virginia. Both species are curious in being normally more or less active in the evening until it becomes too dark to see them. Satyrodes eurydice.—Unpublished records for this species are: Langley, Fairfax County, July 5, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Difficult Run, Fair- fax County, September 19, 1936 (W. H. Wagner); Richmond, Henrico 212 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 County, July 1, 1936 (C. M. Williams) ; Quinton, New Kent County, August 30, 1936 (C. M. Williams); Burks Garden, Tazewell County, July 19, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); and near New Bohemia, Prince George County, June 22, 19386 (G. W. Rawson and W. H. Wagner); Emporia, Greensville County, September 3, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark). Neonympha areolatus var. septentrionalis—Apparently widely distributed, though very local, in the coastal plain and lower piedmont; new records are: Lunenburg, Lunenburg County, September 2, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); north and south of Emporia, Greensville County, August 19, 1936 (C. M. Williams); Courtland, Southampton County, August 25, 1936 (C. M. Wil- liams); north of Factory Hill, August 26, 1936 (C. M. Williams); south of Petersburg, Dinwiddie County, August 25, 1936 (C. M. Williams). Cercyonis alope ?pegala.—Dark males from 45 to 49 mm in expanse lacking the posterior eye spot in the yellow band on the fore wing, agreeing with those from New Jersey that are regarded by some as representing a dwarf: form of pegala, have been taken south of Petersburg, Dinwiddie County, July 18, 1936; North of Cypress Bridge, July 23, 1936; and northeast of Homeville, Sussex County, July 29, 1936. These were compared with several specimens from New Jersey and with one (recorded as pegala) from the District of Columbia. Strymon liparops form strigosa.—This butterfly has been taken by Mr. Herman J. Erb near Blacksburg in July. Pyrgus centaureae wyandot.—Unpublished records for the State are: Hay- field, Frederick County, April 28, 1935, frequent (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Sexton Shelter, Skyline Drive, May 26 and June 2, 1935, frequent (W. H. Wagner); Blacksburg, Montgomery County (E. A. Smyth, Jr.). Pholisora hayhurstiz.—Found along the western border of the Dismal Swamp near Suffolk, September 4, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark). Hesperia metea.—Taken at Richmond, April 26, 1936 (C. M. Williams). Hesperia leonardus.—New records are: Meadows of Dan, Patrick County, September 1, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Big Meadows, Skyline Drive, August 27, 1933 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Blacksburg, Montgomery County (EK. A. Smyth, Jr.). Hesperia sessacus.— Unpublished records are: Hayfield, Frederick County, May 17, 1936, common (A. H. and L. F. Clark); summit of Stony Man mountain, Page County, May 24, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Blacksburg, Montgomery County, variable in abundance (E. A. Smyth, Jr.). Atrytonopsis hianna.—New records for the State are: Clifton Forge, Alleghany County, May 12, 1986 (C. C. Walton); Warrenton, Fauquier County, May 24, 1936, frequent (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Richmond, Henrico County, May 12, 1986 (C. M. Williams); Glebe, Westmoreland County, May 31, 1936 (W. H. Wagner). Atrytone logan.—New records are: South of Zuni, Isle of Wight County, August 20, 24, 1936 (C. M. Williams); north of Walters, Isle of Wight May 15, 1937 STEWART AND WEDEL: OSSUARIES 213 County, August 22, 19836 (C. M. Williams); Clifton Forge, Alleghany County, July 26, 1936 (C. C. Walton). Poanes viator.—Found in great abundance near Port Richmond, King William County, on June 7, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark). Amblyscirtes carolina.—This little skipper has approximately the same range within the State as Enodia creola. Unpublished records are: New Bohemia, Prince George County, June 22, 1936 (W. H. Wagner); Emporia, Greensville County, September 3, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Cypress Bridge, July 23, 1936 (C. M. Williams). Panoquina panoquin.—New records for this salt marsh skipper are: New Point, Mathews County, August 23, 1936 (A. H. and L. F. Clark); Lynn- haven, Princess Anne County, September 5, 1936, abundant (A. H. and ih’. Clark). ANTHROPOLOGY .—The finding of two ossuaries on the site of the Indian village of Nacotchtanke (Anacostia)... T. D. Stewart and W. R. WEDEL, U. 8. National Museum. When Capt. John Smith ascended the Potomac river in 1608 he described an Indian village extending some distance along the eastern bank of a large tributary entering from the east near the head of navigation. To this village, ‘“‘with 80 able men,’’ Smith gave the name ‘‘Nacotchtanke’’ (Arber). Later the missionaries, who arrived on the Potomae in 1634, latinized this name to Anacostan (Tooker), whence is derived the present name of the river and city—Anacostia. Except for references to trade relations and skirmishes, both with the English and neighboring tribes, this village figures very little more in written history. The date of its abandonment is not certain, but it was probably during the middle or latter part of the seventeenth century. The Potomac region in general was abandoned by the In- dians about 1700, according to Mooney. There is some question as to the tribal affiliation of the inhabitants of Nacotchtanke. Mooney (map, pl. VII) considers them Algonkins and includes them in the Powhatan Confederacy, but notes that they received Smith peacefully, thus disobeying Powhatan’s orders. Ac- cording to the Handbook of American Indians, Shea considers this group Iroquoian. In substantiation of the historical record regarding the location of Nacotchtanke are the reports of local collectors. In 1889 Proudfit stated (pp. 242-243): 1 Approved for publication by the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received February 19, 1937. 214 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 These fields [from Giesboro Point on the south to within a short distance of Bladensburg on the north] have been under cultivation for many years, and are regularly visited by local collectors, yet they are today, in places, fairly strewn with the wreck of the old village life. In addition to the stone relics... ., it should be observed that an abun- dance of pottery, in fragments, is to be found—one of the unfailing evidences of permanent aboriginal occupation. This statement seems to have been accepted by the investigators who have published subsequently, including Holmes and Ulke. Since the above covers almost everything that is known regarding Nacotchtanke, it is of interest and importance to record the finding of two ossuaries at Giesboro Point during the past year. As is often the case, the burials were discovered accidentally. In the course of grading operations directed toward the extension of Bolling Field, the army flying field, a power-shovel exposed some human bones on September 11, 1936. The District coroner, Dr. A. Magruder Mac- Donald, was notified by those in charge of the work. He pronounced the bones to be those of Indians and ordered them saved; also, he notified the Smithsonian Institution. On the morning of September 12 the senior author visited the site in company with F. M. Setzler, Acting Head Curator of Anthropol- ogy, U. S. National Museum. At this time a skull and a few bones, still remaining 2n sztw, were removed. In the afternoon Dr. Wedel accompanied the senior author to the site. We were soon rewarded by the exposure of a second ossuary which we were permitted to ex- cavate by our own methods. This operation, in which we were as- sisted by Robert Ladd of Washington, required the next two whole days. The details follow. THE SITE At the confluence of the Potomac and Anacostia the eastern shore (Fig. 1) is comparatively low-lying, forming an almost level plain between the rivers on the west and the hills to the east. At the time of our visit the grading operations were far advanced. Since some 7-8 feet of earth was being removed at the point where the ossuaries were located, it appeared that here a natural ridge of sandy soil extended in an east-west direction from the shoreline toward the hills. This agrees with the location of the ten-foot contour line on the Geological Survey map (Fig. 1). Pit no. 1.—This was located some 150 yards from the river bank and about a quarter of a mile south from the line of the Portland May 15, 1937 STEWART AND WEDEL: OSSUARIES 215 Street entrance to Bolling Field. Most of the bones had been removed by workmen and the power-shovel prior to our arrival and had been placed in barrels. From descriptions given by the laborers, as well as from the few bones left in situ, it appears that less than twelve inches of sandy soil covered the bones. The layer within which the latter SS ANACOSTIA Fig. 1—Map showing the location of the ossuaries and the topography in their immediate vicinity. (Based on the Geological Survey map of the District of Columbia, edition of 1929.) were scattered was of about the same thickness. Owing to the uni- formly sandy character of the surrounding soil and to its disturbance by machinery, efforts to define the original edge of the pit were un- successful. It was evident, however, that the area within which the remains occurred was not more than ten or twelve feet in diameter. No record was obtained of any cultural material having been seen. Pit no. 2.—The second pit was encountered by the shovel at the time of our work and was completely excavated by hand. It lay some 216 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 50 or 60 yards due east of the first. The soil covering it was but a few inches deep, and there was some evidence that the uppermost bones had been broken and otherwise disturbed by plowing. No pit outline could be traced, but the bones occurred over an irregular area roughly fifteen feet in diameter and at a depth of six to eighteen inches. The “matrix”? in which the bones occurred was of the same light colored sand as that constituting the ridge. | Burial was clearly secondary but some articulated bones were found. The skulls, most of which were crushed, were scattered throughout the pit, with a somewhat greater number in the lower level. In some instances two or more skulls lay together, but there appeared to be no consistent disposition in “‘nests.’’ Generally the long-bones were grouped in bundles, those of several individuals sometimes being found together. Pockets of calcined human bone were noted, but it was not clear whether this represented cremation or was due to some accidental factor. Mingled with the human bones at one point were a number of deer bones. Cultural material was obtained from the second ossuary, but in very limited amount. There were recovered three small grit-tempered potsherds, bearing impressions of a cord-wrapped paddle. Also, a small crudely made serpentine ornament, perforated and carelessly scored, was found in the dirt thrown out of the pit. Since they were not seen in situ, it is possible that both the sherds and ornament entered from the surface. Directly associated with and partly con- tained in one skull were fourteen tubular shell beads, 6 mm in diam- eter and from 10 to 20 mm long. No metal, glass or other material of European origin was found. THE BONES Since the first pit had been almost completely excavated before our arrival, we could not hope to recover many whole bones for the Museum collections. Alternatively, we limited our collection to those parts of more particular interest, namely, the temporal bone, jaws and teeth, distal end of the humerus, proximal end of the femur, pathological and anomalous bones. The same policy was adopted in selecting bones from the second pit, but here fortunately the method of excavation permitted the recovery of more whole bones. A count of the temporal bones, humeri, and femora from the two pits (Table 1) gives some reason for believing that approximately the same number of individuals was buried in each. This number is above 63 but is not likely to have been more than 70. The smaller number of tem- May 15, 1937 STEWART AND WEDEL: OSSUARIES 217 poral bones recovered from the first pit may be explained by the fact that the workmen and others removed the skulls for souvenirs before our arrival. The excess of temporal bones in the second pit may pos- sibly mean that more skulls than extremities were interred. However, it should be remembered that, when broken, the parts of the long- bones are more difficult to identify than the parts of the skull. It is quite possible, therefore, that we may have overlooked some humeri and femora. : TABLE 1.—NUMBER OF BoNES RECOVERED FROM OSSUARIES Pit No. 1 Pit No. 2 Bone Right Left Right Left Temporal 39 38 63 63 Humerus (distal) 56 36 49 39 Femur (proximal) 50 47 48 40 It is certain from an examination of the bones that both sexes are represented, but not disproportionately. According to the stages of dentition shown in the lower jaws, adults predominate. Four imma- ture lower jaws, the youngest 2-6 years old, were found among the bones from the first pit. Of twelve such jaws from the second pit, the youngest was 1-2 years old. Measurements of two skulls from the first pit give cranial indices of 68.3 and 71.9. Nine skulls from the second pit, all reconstructed and mostly female, have cranial indices ranging from low dolicho- ceimy tochich brachyerany (72.6) @2:7, 75.1, 75.6, 75.7,.77.3;, (9.4, 84.0 and 86.0). Except for the most extreme brachycranic skull, the range is characteristic of the Algonkins (Hrdlitka, 1927). Two other features of the bones indicate that the inhabitants of this site were typical eastern Indians. Ear exostoses are present in 10 per cent of the ears (169), which is only slightly higher than the figure (8.5) reported by Hrdli¢ka (1935) for the Indians north of Virginia. Septal apertures of the humerus are present in 43.2 per cent of the cases (134), and this too agrees well with the figure (40.4) reported by Hrdlicka (1932) for the eastern Indians. These similarities become more impressive when it is realized how different are the figures for other Indian tribes. For example, among the Sioux the incidence of ear exostoses rises to 22 per cent, whereas that of septal aperture falls to 21.5 per cent (Hrdlicka, 1932, 1935). Among the pathological bones recovered were a number, mostly tibiae, bearing lesions generally regarded as having been produced 218 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 by syphilis. It is noteworthy that more of these bones occurred in the first pit, in which also the bones were somewhat better preserved. Another, but minor, pathological condition to which these Indians were extremely susceptible was dental caries. DISCUSSION The finding of two ossuaries at Giesboro Point is further evidence of a habitation site in the vicinity. According to historical record this was Nacotchtanke. Although nothing is known of the limits of this village at the time the burials were made, it is reasonable to believe that it was not very far away—perhaps to the north. It is probable also that originally the burials were deeper, and it is possible even that a low mound was raised over them. The ultimate shallow posi- tion of the bones may be accounted for through the farming opera- tions to which this area was subjected later. The number of individ- uals buried in these pits probably has some relationship to the population of the village, but the time interval involved is not known. The chief reason for reporting these ossuaries is that they indicate some of the burial customs prevailing in this region. When Bushnell, in 1920, reviewed these customs for the Powhatan Confederacy, he knew of only one site at which ossuaries had been found. Since then, in 1935, Judge Graham has reported a group of four ossuaries found at Potapaco (now Port Tobacco), another site marked on Smith’s map. The senior author had the pleasure of assisting Judge Graham in excavating the pits at Port Tobacco, so he was in a position to make comparisons between the two sites. Briefly, it may be said that in appearance the burials were very similar, making due allowance for differences in soil. The scarcity of cultural material in the Anacostia pits is in contrast to those at Port Tobacco. Nevertheless, the type of cultural material encountered—beads, ornaments—is still consistent with Smith’s statement (quoted from Bushnell, p. 28) that, For their ordinary burial they digge a deep hole in the earth with sharpe stakes; and the corpses being lapped in skins and mats with their jewels, they lay them upon sticks in the ground and so cover them with earth. While it is not clear what Smith meant by the term ‘‘corpses,’’ it is possible that he is referring to bodies that have been allowed to de- compose in a charnel house. At Port Tobacco remnants of skins and mats which had been preserved by copper were found associated with the bones in the fourth pit. The finding of calcined bone in the second May 15, 1937 STEWART AND WEDEL: OSSUARIES 219 pit at Anacostia is something new for this area and cannot be clearly explained. The occurrence of pathological bones in the pits, both at Anacostia and at Port Tobacco, with lesions resembling syphilis may be inter- preted in different ways depending on whether or not syphilis is proved to be a pre- or post-Columbian disease. If pre-Columbian, this finding is of little significance historically. However, if post- Columbian, then these burials would date from the historic period and the different incidence of diseased bones in the two pits would take on more meaning. The absence of associated European objects is not contrary to the possibility that syphilis is a post-Columbian disease; it could have preceded Smith to this region. Skeletal remains are rapidly being accumulated from Maryland and Virginia. Already it is recognized that a rather uniform physical type existed among the eastern Indians. Detailed study of this ma- terial eventually should indicate the closer physical affiliations of the various bands. LITERATURE CITED ARBER, Epwarp. Capt. John Smith’s works, 1608-1631. The English Scholar’s Library, No. 16. Birmingham, 1884. BusHNELL, Davin I., Jr. Native cemeteries and forms of burial east of the Mississippi. Bull. 71, Bu. Am. Ethnol., 1920. GraHaM, Wm. J. The Indians of Port Tobacco river, Maryland, and their burial places. (Privately printed) Washington, 1935. Hopecst, F. W. Handbook of American Indians north of Mexico, Vol. IJ. Bull. 30, Bu. Am. Ethnol., 1907, p. 8. Houtmes, W. H. Stone implements of the Potomac-Chesapeake tidewater province. 15th Ann. Rept. Bu. Am. Ethnol. for 1893-1894, pp. 13-152. HrouiéKa, A. Catalogue of human crania in the United States National Museum col- lections. The Algonkins and related Iroquois, etc. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., LXIX, Art. 5, 1927. The humerus: septal apertures. Anthrop., Prague, X, 1932, pp. 31—96. Ear exostoses. Smith. Misc. Coll. XCIII, No. 6, 1935. Mooney, JAMeEs. Indian tribes of the District of Columbia. Am. Anthrop., o.s. II, 1889, pp. 259-266. ProupFit, 8. V. Anczent village sites and aboriginal workshops in the District of Colum- bia. Am. Anthrop., o.s. II, 1889, pp. 241-246. Tooker, W. W. On the meaning of the name Anacostia. Am. Anthrop., o.s. VII, 1894, pp. 389-393. Uke, Titus. Additions to our knowledge of Indian habitations and workshops located at Washington, D. C., and vicinity. Primitive Man, VIII, No. 3, 1935, pp. 67-71. 220 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 540TH MEETING The 540th meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, April 8, 1936, Vice-President R. C. WELLS presiding. Informal communications —T. A. Hrenpricks discussed obtuse-angled cone-in-cone structures from the Missouri Mountain slate of Arkansas. Program.—A. J. EARDLEY: Silts of the lower Yukon valley. T.S. Loverine: Origin of the telluride ores of Boulder County, Colorado. 541st MEETING The 541st meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, April 22, 1936, Vice-President H. D. Misr presiding. Informal communications —L. W. STEPHENSON: Flat-bottomed stream ero- ston by wetting and drying. Little Walnut Creek is a small, intermittent tributary of Walnut Creek which joins Colorado River a few miles east of Austin, in Travis County, Texas. Little Walnut Creek heads in the belt of outcrop of the Austin chalk about 8 miles north of Austin, and flows within that belt in the upper 5 miles of its course. In a stretch a thousand feet or so long, above the iron bridge at the old Sprinkle road crossing (abandoned), 5 miles northeast of Austin, the stream has cut its channel some 15 or 20 feet deep and 70 to 75 feet wide in a rather hard, massive, uniform facies of the chalk. About 300 feet upstream from the bridge a normal fault drops stratigraphically higher and softer beds of the chalk down against the harder facies. The gradient steepens sharply just above the fault as the stream passes from the harder to the softer beds. In its course through the harder facies of the chalk, including the descent from this facies to the softer facies below, a transverse profile of the stream bed is so nearly level that water when present is distributed with almost perfect uniformity across its entire width. When I visited the locality on November 20, 1935, the water was low and was so evenly spread that I waded the stream, scarcely wetting more than the soles of my boots. In the case of a stream cutting its channel by abrasion it is to be expected that the part of the bed carrying the swiftest current will be most deeply eroded. In Little Walnut Creek abrasion is an insignificant factor in the pro- cess of erosion, asthe stream is carrying little or no sand to serve as a cutting tool; solution may play a part in the process, but is probably a minor factor; fragmentation of the brittle chalk, caused by successive wetting by rainwater and drying, is believed to be the effective agent of erosion; the products of this process are easily swept away by occasional flood waters. When water is present in the channel the chalk is protected from the wet- ting and drying process and is not eroded; the banks on either side are sub- jected to the process and are gradually eaten back down to water level; any part of the stream bed that may for any reason rise above water level is subjected to wetting and drying and is quickly reduced to the level in which wetting will protect it. When there is no water in the creek fragmentation due to wetting by occasional local showers and subsequent drying, will take place uniformly across the channel, thus maintaining its level profile. Fragmentation of chalk by wetting and drying is an important erosion process in the channels of many of the streams crossing the chalk formations of the Gulf Coastal Plain. (Awthor’s abstract.) May 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 221 CiypE P. Ross described etched limestones in the Brazier limestone, Borah Peak Quadrangle, Idaho. Program.—J. P. MarBueE: Age of monazite from Mars Hill, North Carolina. Analyses of a specimen of monazite from Mars Hill, N. C., for lead, thorium, and uranium, indicate an approximate age of 584 million years, or upper- most pre-Cambrian. Radiographs showed the mineral, a portion of the ex- tremely large crystal collected by Schaller, to be relatively fresh and unaltered. The age found is in reasonable agreement with the field evidence. As the mineral is extremely low in uranium, further studies are projected. G. A. CoopsrR: Devonian correlations in Michigan and Ontario. SPECIAL MEETING A special meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, April 29, 1936, Vice-President H. D. Miser presiding. Informal communiations —Jostan Bripce remarked on the productive and illustrious life of Dr. A. F. Foerste, recently deceased. D. F. Hewerr remarked on the life and work of H. D. McCaskey, recently deceased. Program.—C. H. Brure, Jr., Northwestern University: Geologic History of South Park, Colorado. — FRANCIS P. ‘SHEPARD, University of Hlinois: Evidence of a greatly lowered sea-level. 042ND MEETING The 542nd meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, October 28, 1936, President M. I. GoLpDMAN, presiding. Program.—RoBeErt F. Grices, George Washington University: Timber- lines as indicators of climatic trends. GEORGE TUNELL and C. J. Ksanpa: Some general conclusions from in- vestigations of the calaverite group. The peculiar face development of cala- verite crystals, which has been known since 1895, was discussed in relation to the crystal structure of calaverite (determined by the authors). Certain adventive (non-structural) diffraction planes were correlated with the com- plex faces. Although a complete explanation of the complex faces and ad- ventive diffraction planes has not yet been found, sufficient progress has been made to indicate that these peculiarities of calaverite will not lead to an alteration in the theory of space-groups or the law of simple rational in- dices, but are rather to be conceived as due to some type of subidiary phe- nomenon in the crystals. (Author’s abstract). WENDELL P. Wooprinc: Depositional environment of Lower Pliocene oil- bearing formations of the Los Angeles Basin, California. 543RD MEETING The 548rd meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, November 11, 1936, President M. I. GoLtpMan, presiding. Informal communications.—J. B. Rersipe, JR., reviewed criticisms of Lauge Koch by eleven of his contemporaries. M. I. GotpMAN reported on a statement by de Margerie regarding the criticism by a group of Danish geologists of the work of Lauge Koch (from C. R. somm., no. 6, p. 97, 1936) as follows: The manifesto carrying the signa- tures of a dozen geologists, Scandinavian and German, criticizing the work of Lauge Koch in Greenland, has in effect no less an object than to discredit the methods of the eminent explorer. Overlooking the invaluable services which Koch has rendered to the study of the Artic regions, these gentlemen pick out trivial errors such as can be found in every human product and 222 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 overlook the outstanding discoveries by which he has enriched and trans- formed in such large measure the picture of the geology of Greenland that one of the signers, Boggild, drew 20 years ago. They even go so far as to re- proach the Danish scientist for having had recourse to the airplane for com- pleting his reconnaissance. There is here a lack of perspective which is positively shocking and one which a purely objective comparison of the texts cannot fail to bring out. It is hard to see what science gains by attacks so evidently biased. C. B. Hunt described a method for obtaining data on total precipitation over an extended period of time. Program.—J. B. Mertz, Jr., Glacial features of the Nushagak district, Alaska. The Nushagak district lies in a remote and little-visited part of southwestern Alaska. The Tikchik Mountains of this district are of particu- lar interest because they are the site of a Pleistocene ice cap which covered an area of 6,000 square miles or more but was not a part of the great ice fields of the Alaska Range and contiguous territory. The central part of the Tikchik Mountains is a rugged fretted upland, composed of comb ridges, pinnacle-like peaks, and high alpine valleys that show all the marks of severe and long-continued glaciation. Along the eastern side of these mountains is a system of twelve nearly parallel lakes from 7 to 35 miles in length, of which ten are connected together into two systems of interlake drainages that discharge eastward and southward. The present Nushagak Valley, which lies east of these lakes, is a great desolate, swampy lowland, composed of glaciofluviatile and outwash deposits which issued from the glaciated mountainous area. The border lakes, though originally barrier lakes, now occupy essentially bedrock basins, and are classified as alpine glint lakes. They have depths ranging from 340 to 930 feet and in their deepest places reach from 300 to 600 feet below sea level. A number of these lakes have narrow fiord-like headwater bays which are separated from the main lakes by bedrock con- strictions or barriers but are as deep as, or deeper than, the main lakes. Both the headwater bays, and the main lakes below these bedrock constrictions, increase rapidly in depth to the maximum, then gradually become shallower toward their lower ends, terminating in bedrock shoals, islands or barriers. It is possible that the headwater bays indicate either a pause in the retreat of the ice sheet, or a very late rejuvenation of glaciation. All the usual physiographic features that are associated with severe glacia- tion are found in the country surrounding these lakes. These features include glacial scouring and plucking, steep-walled U-shaped cross sections, and well-developed cirques in hanging valleys, in the upper parts of the lakes; and morainal deposits at the lower ends of the lakes. Postglacial erosion is relatively slight close to the higher mountains but is perceptibly greater in the lower hills to the east. Another significant physiographic feature is a system of rather well-developed postglacial lake terraces, ranging in eleva- tion from 5 to 65 feet above present lake levels. The ancient valleys, now partially filled by these lakes, were occupied in preglacial time by alpine streams, but in their lower reaches had higher gradients than at present. This deduction is based upon drill-hole records at tidewater, where the outwash fill is known to have a thickness of 200 feet or more. The present interlake drainage was caused by the alluviation of these ancient valleys by morainal and outwash deposits that were laid down as the ice tongues retreated. This alluviation finally raised local base levels of ero- May 15,1937 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 225 sion sufficiently to cause the lakes to spill over into one another, thus estab- lishing the present abnormal system of interlake drainages. The various lake terraces record not only the maximum magnitude of this alluviation, but also the subsequent sequence of lowering of the lake levels. (Author’s abstract.) J. C. Reep: Significance of amygdales in Columbia River lava. Periodic tilting of a fault block in north-central Idaho is reflected by the convergence of bands of silica that fill large gas cavities in lava. The fault block, the Whitebird block, is about 15 miles long and 12 to 15 miles wide. It is bounded on its east and west sides by normal faults. The lava series of about 35 flows with some interbedded unconsolidated sediments that constitute the upper 2,600 feet or more of the block is tilted to the northwest at 17 degrees. The bands of silica in the filled cavities, or amygdales, consist of alter- nating layers of quartz and mixed opal and quartz. The bands were appar- ently deposited horizontally under the influence of gravity. The convergence of the bands indicates tilting of the block between times of deposition of the bands. The amygdales that were examined show a maximum convergence of bands of 14 degrees or reflect almost the complete tilting history of the block. Between the rock around the amygdales and the banded interiors is a zone of concentric layers that ranges from less than a millimeter to more than 10 millimeters thick. The sequence of these concentric layers in all the amyg- dales examined in order from the outside toward the interior is nontronite, greenalite, melanophlogite, erionite, chalcedony, and mixed chalcedony and opal. The minerals were determined by their optical properties, which should be checked by other methods. The concentric layers probably were deposited by deuteric emanations long before the banded interiors were laid down from supergene solutions. (A uthor’s abstract.) JOINT MEETING A joint meeting with the Washington Academy of Sciences was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, November 19, 1936, President O. E. MEINZzER, of the Washington Academy of Sciences, presiding. Program.—GerorGe H. AsHiey, State Geologist of Pennsylvania: The emergence of ideas as illustrated from Geology. 544TH MEETING The 544th meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, November 25, 1936, Vice-President H. D. Misr presiding. Program.—Testimonials for the late Dr. David White of the United States Geological Survey, by H. D. Misnr, W. C. MENDENHALL, CHARLES Burts, F. E. Wrienut, K. C. HEALD, and E. W. Berry. 545TH MEETING The 545th meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, December 9, 1936, President M. I. Gotpman, presiding. GEORGE TUNELL, chairman of the committee to select the first and second best papers delivered before the Society during the year, announced that W. P. Wooprine was awarded first prize and E. T. ALLEN second prize. Vice-President R. C. Wreuts took the chair during the presentation of Mr. Goldman’s presidential address: Petrographic features of salt dome cap rock. 224 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 5 447TH ANNUAL MEETING The 44th Annual Meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club after the adjournment of the 545th regular meeting, President M. I. GOLDMAN presiding. The annual report of the secretaries was read. The treasurer then presented his annual report showing an excess of assets over liabilities of $1,319.48 on December 9, 1936. The auditing committee re- ported that the books of the treasurer were correct. The results of the balloting for officers for the ensuing year were as follows: President, R. C. Wetus; Vice-Presidents, F. C. Catkins, H. D. Miser; Treasurer, A. H. KoscHMANN; Secretaries, G. A. Cooper, M. N. Bram- LETTE; Members-at-large-of-the-Council, R. W. Brown, W. 8S. BurBaANnk, C.H. Dans, Earu InGErRson, J.C. Rrep; Nominee for Vice-President of the Washington Academy of Sciences representing the Geological Society, W. T. SCHALLER. G. A. Coopsr, Secretary. @Obituary BENJAMIN LINCOLN ROBINSON, who a few years ago retired from the Asa Gray Professorship of Systematic Botany, which he had held since 1900, died July 27, 1935. He was born in Bloomington, Illinois, November 8, 1864, and received his A.B. degree from Harvard College in 1887. After taking his Ph.D. degree at Strasburg in 1889 he returned to Harvard Uni- versity as assistant in the Gray Herbarium and became its curator in 1892, which position he held until he retired. With others he was an editor of Synoptical flora of North America from 1892 to 1897. He was editor of Rhodora, the journal of the Northeast Botanical Club, from 1899 to 1928, and also editor of the seventh edition of Gray’s New manual of botany. He was the author of many published papers upon the classification and dis- tribution of the spermatophytes of the United States, Mexico, northern South America and the Galapagos Islands. He was awarded a bronze medal at the Louisiana Purchase Exposition held in St. Louis, 1904, and the Centennial Gold Medal of the Massachusetts Horticultural Society in 1929 ‘for eminent service to botany.”’ Besides being a member of the Washington Academy of Sciences and the National Academy of Sciences, Professor Robinson was a member of seventeen other American and foreign scientific societies. He was president of the Botanical Society of America in 1900, president of the Northeast Botanical Club from 1906 to 1908, and honorary member of the Chilean Society of Natural History. CHARLES HENRY SMYTH, JR., emeritus professor of geology at Princeton University, died at the Princeton Hospital, April 4, 1937, from pneumonia and complications resulting from a fractured hip received in a fall two weeks previously. Doctor Smyth was born at Oswego, N. Y., March 31, 1866. He received the Ph.B. degree in 1888 and the Ph.D. degree in 1890 from Columbia University. He studied at Heidelberg, Germany, 1890-1891. From 1891 to 1905 he was professor of geology and mineralogy at Hamilton College, and from 1905 until his retirement in 1934 he was professor of geology at Princeton University. His chief scientific contributions related to the Clin- ton type of iron ore, the regional geology and mineral deposits of the north- west Adirondacks, the origin of alkali-rich igneous rocks, and problems of chemical geology. Doctor Smyth held membership in the American Association for the Advancement of Science, Geological Society of America, Philosophical Society, New York Academy, and Washington Academy of Sciences. a . 2 CONTENTS Guopuystcs. —Structure of continents and ocean basins. Rica RD PARED Sete ee. . a es ee eee ae BOTANY. a ae mustelina, a new plant from Death Valley, Ca fornia. FREDERICK V. CovILLE..... eee. ee ities . . . ‘ a Botany.—New species and nomenclatorial ee it in eastern Asi Myrsinaceae. Eapert H. WALKER.................. Zootocy.—A note on the members of the nematode strongylus occurrmg in rodents and lagomo scriptions of two new species. GERARD DIKMANS........ coe me, Sete ye Entomotoay.—Records of Argynnis diana and of some éther butt r ES rf flies from Virginia. Austin H. Ciark and Carrouu M. Wie Tita MS eee rere thc. ssie es Say ae eee 1 2 a a ANTHROPOLOGY.—The finding of two ossuaries on the site of Indian village of Nacotchtanke (Anacostia). T. D. Strwar pnd: W... Reey BDEL . 2 ..02she0:.: . seas ie Re: ep mre AS 6, ae PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY........... alt Nea Be dy OBITUARIES: BENJAMIN LINCOLN mes CHaRnEs SMYTH, JR.. ge ate Er PE ane er i), ¥. This Journal is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals e nae i = Ps OE BS ew ; : 3 ca Se Vou. 27 JUNE 15, 1937 No. 6 % hte a hi mae t x Lanes “ee JOURNAL 3 OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Rotaxp W. Brown Esen H. Toore FREDERICK D. Rossini U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS Raymonp J. SEEGER C. F. W. MuerseEsecK PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GotpMAN W. W. Rosey BIQLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY AGNES CHASE Henry B. Cotuins, Jr. BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Frank C. Kracex CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 450 Aunarp St. AT MENASHA, WISCONSIN Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Menasha, Wis. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized January 21, 1933. \ . Rn ade ie) ~ * t at i» * or ye . : “ 4 . A, oe ef» & o- co J ournal of the Washington Academy of Sciences or s This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy or Sciences,. pabliaiese * (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JoURNAL is bee ee ‘ monthly, on the fifteenth of each month. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Gear ea be, Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently Teas : quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JournaLand conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- 2 onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter, = Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas aiahpeets by the author, nor can they undertake to. me Fe correct other than obvious minor errors. ; Illustrations in excess of one full-page halftone « or two full-page line drawings m may es be paid for by the author. Line drawings are preferred. Ree Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally a sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted ‘tobaet, a form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. | Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Coverses "38 bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and date of issue, and i Vet will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accordance with > the following schedule of prices. a Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers — G03 aie sein’ Saas ceye $2.00 100 $ .75 $1.20 $1.50 $2.00 $2.75 150 1.25 1.90 2.55 3.25 3.50 — 200 1.75 2.60 3.60 4.50 4. 25y oe 250 2.00 3.30 4.65 5.75 §.00 “== Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in nthe a i corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4. 00; additional 100, $1 00. aa Subscription Rates.—Per volume.............+++++ wind werk ee aS ..-86.00 aie To members of pees societies; per volume............. eee ae 5 ok Single Wambers ys telcos «dh ns « 200 a 8 2.60 3.60 4.50 4,25 ote re 250 2.00 3.30 4.65 5.75 5.00 S.. Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address puintall the corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additioust 100, rr on Subscription Waies.—Lrer volume... ..id'v. o2+htham osteo Garant eon eee ae ae To members of affiliated societies; per volume. .................. nei ae (2.50 | . Single PUEN EST 6): yp SG ne fain be Mie Ae eB NR Nh sy tee 60 ete &, > A Remittances should be made payable to “Washington keadegeese of Sciences” and WG 0 addressed to 350 Ahnaip Street, Menasha, Wis., or to the bhieape 5 a. x ar Coast and Geodetic Survey, W ashington,. D.C. eee Exchanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other publications. 7 te ee We - j sp 3 ha me E Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim i ‘is made to oe a the Treasurer within thirty days after date of followingissue. _ ets ‘a ee. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: CHARLES Tom, Bureau of Plant Industry. 2, an rl Corresponding Secretary: NATHAN R. Smitu, Bureau of Plant Industry. - ee Recording Secretary: Oscar S. Adams, Coast and Geodetic Survey. ee Treasurer: Henry G. Avenrs, Coast and Geodetic Survey. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Wiel: 21 = Jub to, 1937 Niet 7 CHEMISTRY.—The chemical application of the Raman effect. JamMEs H. H1ssen, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of Washington. The Raman effect is too recent a discovery to have what is gener- ally termed a history. It was early in 1928 that Sir C. V. Raman announced his observation of a new type of secondary radiation which was considered as ‘‘an optical analogue of the Compton effect.’’ This secondary re-radiation has since been known as the Raman effect. This subject has been investigated by most of the leading labora- tories of the world with the result that within less than a decade there have been considerably more than a thousand publications con- cerning it. This widespread interest cannot be attributed solely to the novelty of the new discovery, but is primarily due to its funda- mental nature from the point of view both of physics and chemistry. The Raman effect is essentially another parameter by which the behavior of molecules may be measured, independently of their state of aggregation. Other direct methods, such as x-ray and electron diffraction, have indicated the position of the heavier atoms. These methods, like the Raman effect itself, have certain limitations. For- tunately, as compared with the Raman effect, they are complementary in the sense that what one system lacks the other provides. The infor- mation obtainable from the standpoint of the Raman method concerns the forces between atoms in a molecule in its normal state, to a certain degree the arrangement in space of the atoms, and their amplitudes and frequencies of vibration. In the simpler molecules this leads to a determination of some of the energy levels the molecules possess. These levels are the warp upon which the pattern of the molecule is woven. Finally this procedure yields in many cases the specific type of chemical linkage which exists in a molecule. This information in turn may lead to the calculation of specific heats and other informa- tion of interest to the physicist and to the chemist. Perhaps the best approach to the problem of what is the Raman effect is to draw an analogy between this and x-ray analysis, which is 1 Address of retiring President of the Chemical Society of Washington, January 14, 1937. Received February 19, 1937. 269 270 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 known to some extent by everyone. In the latter case the atoms in the given molecule are bombarded with radiation of very short wave length compared to the size of the molecule. The refraction of this radiation may be recorded on the photographic plate as definite spots which are a function of the interatomic distances. In Raman spectra the molecules are bombarded with radiation of longer wave length in equivalent fashion. The type or wave length of light used, however, is in general immaterial. It may be long wave lengths as represented by the red light or it may be short wave lengths as represented by the far ultra violet. In the case of x-rays one deals essentially with a static situation. In the Raman effect it is not static but dynamic. Fig. 1.—Partial Raman spectrum of nitrobenzene showing the 4358A exciting line. Here it is a question of the motion of the atoms and the molecule and only indirectly their position in space. Nevertheless, as will be seen shortly, the geometric distribution of atoms does influence the result. In effect, therefore, molecules, regardless of the state of aggrega- tion, whether they are in the liquid, solid, amorphous or gaseous state, are bombarded with definite light quanta, that is, ight preferably of a given single wave length, or what is generally termed monochro- matic radiation. When these quanta of energy or photons collide or interact with the molecule, the energy they represent is distributed throughout the molecule in all its vibrational and rotational degrees of freedom. From a spectrographic point of view the results of this interaction are represented, after being transmitted through a spec- trograph and photographed on a plate, as definite spectral lines. If real monochromatic radiation is employed (which is very difficult to realize experimentally), then this results in a single line on the photo- graphic plate corresponding to this incident radiation, plus other lines if definite parts of this energy have been subtracted from the original quantum. These lines correspond to different type of vibra- tion and rotation which the atoms in the molecule may possess. The JuLY 15, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 271 result is the re-creation or re-radiation of light of longer wave lengths which did not exist in the original light but which is re-emitted by the molecules themselves. This will be made clearer by means of a diagrammatic illustration of the apparatus used and a picture of these Raman lines as they appear on the photographic plate. These are shown in Figs. 1 and 2. The source of light illustrated in the first figure is generally a mer- cury arc. This type of arc has four lines, among many others, which are sufficiently intense and reasonably well separated from other lines to be useful for this purpose. These lines, which do not all appear in cs OUI-CE OF = s “ra Cldent radsatrion Photographic Za Ce a Fig. 2.—Experimental arrangement for recording Raman spectra. the figure, are at 2537, 4047, 4358, and 5461 A units. After the selec- tion, therefore, of a given wave length to be employed to excite the Raman lines, the experimental set-up is so arranged that this radia- tion or light will pass at right angles to the end of the spectrograph through the liquid, gas, or other material to be studied. This is to diminish as much as possible any light, direct from the lamp, which might fall on the opening of the spectrograph, the only desired light being that which comes from the molecules to be investigated. Un- fortunately, a spectrograph not only can “‘see’’ the light which is re- flected, or what is generally termed scattered from the molecules after the interaction, but it can also ‘‘see” the light which is scattered from these same molecules in the form of Rayleigh scattering. Neglect- ing polarization, this is identical with the original exciting radiation. The net result of these two scattering phenomena is therefore a series of lines corresponding to the Raman lines not present in the original light and the more intense line corresponding to the original source of radiation. 272 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 The processes thus far described are the essential means used, together with the result obtained. Aseach of these Raman lines rep- resents a given wave length its position is described on the color scale from the ultra violet to the infra red by this wave length. How- ever, for the sake of convenience in comparing the work of different observers, it is necessary to adopt an additional system to describe these lines. The thing which is of importance is not the wave length per se of the Raman lines, but how much energy has been lost by each photon in giving rise to them. This is the energy which each type of vibration takes up, and consequently the results should be given in terms of the difference between the wave length causing these lines and the lines themselves. However, as an additional matter of convenience, it is more use- ful to employ frequencies or wave numbers rather than wave lengths. These frequencies are related to wave lengths by the simple equation, \vy=c, where c is the velocity of light. Each mercury line and each Raman line therefore corresponds to a different value of v which is the number of vibrations per second, or in terms of the number of waves per centimeter, »=c7. As has just been mentioned, it is the difference between the value of 7 for the exciting line and the various Raman lines that is of interest, so that by common agree- ment the results are always given in terms of Az per centimeter, which represents these differences. The line which is closest to the exciting line in Figure 1, therefore, has the lowest value for Av. These may vary from as low as 60 to possibly as high as 4500. The simplest type of oscillator is a diatomic molecule. To give rise to a Raman line at all this molecule must have at least one type of atomic motion. The one most frequently encountered for this simple molecule is the linear oscillation of the two atoms in the direction of the valence forces which hold them together. If there is no definite chemical bond of homopolar nature, as in the case of completely ionized molecules, then no Raman line will appear. In the dumb-bell type of molecule, however, where the atoms are held together by a force which may be likened to a spring, the two oscillating compo- nents will vibrate with a characteristic frequency. This is true of any mechanical system. In this system the frequency vibration may be calculated from the equation for a harmonic oscillator: 1 ae = a) F v —/ /m JULY 15, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 273 In an atomic system reducing this to spectrographic terms, Ay = 4.125 <./f/az, where F is the valence force in dynes per cm. and z is the reduced mass as determined by the relative atomic weights. From this it follows that the greatest amplitude of vibration in centimeters of the atoms is given by the following equation: A RO 10-54/ ! pAr This amplitude varies between 0.06 and 0.09 A. For a triatomic molecule there are two possibilities: the molecule may be linear or nonlinear. For the linear molecule there are three possible types of oscillations, the symmetrical, asymmetrical, and deformation oscillation, known as v,, v., and 6, respectively. These give rise to three Raman lines whose frequencies may be calculated. The nonlinear model possesses the types of vibration indicated in Figure 3. Fig. 3.—The motions of the nonlinear triatomic atom. In general, in polyatomic molecules composed of several atoms, each atom has three degrees of freedom, so that the total represents on degrees of freedom. Of these, three are accounted for by the trans- lational motion and three are described by the rotation of the mole- cule as a whole about its center of gravity. Consequently there are on—6 fundamental modes of vibration and therefore theoretically one Raman line for each mode. This represents a maximum and, as will be seen, is modified considerably by the particular conditions con- cerning each molecular species. The molecules of the type YX; and YX.,, for example, each have four frequencies, and the less symmet- rical molecule X Y2Z six frequencies. The symmetry of the molecule occasionally results in one or more frequencies having the same value, the multiple coincidence of frequencies occurring whenever the mo- tions of the atoms performing the vibration are isotropic in several dimensions. When these are isotropic in two or three dimensions re- spectively they are doubly or triply degenerate. 274 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 Each fundamental vibrational frequency in which all the atoms of the molecule participate may correspond to a vibrational Raman line. The relative motions of the atoms in respect to each other, together with the forces exerted between them and their masses, determine the frequency of this vibration or the magnitude of the resulting Az shift. Except in the case of a diatomic molecule, it is not entirely accurate to state, therefore, that a particular Raman line corresponds to a single type of linkage such as C—H. However, in any given molecule there is usually some frequency originating in the essential vibration which consists chiefly of the linear or deformation oscillations of atoms of particular groups vibrating in unison. In ethylene, for example, there is one frequency which corresponds to the movement of the two CH, groups toward and away from each other. In this case the hydrogen atoms are moving in roughly the same direction as the carbon atoms. As their masses affect but little the C =C vibra- tion, particularly since their motion is in phase with this oscillation, the net result is a characteristic frequency for the ethylenic linkage. In a similar fashion there is possible a motion of the hydrogen atoms toward and away from each carbon atom along the direction of the valence bonds, which gives rise to a frequency termed characteristic of this type of C—H linkage. Consequently, the characteristic fre- quencies and the force constants for various types of oscillation and bending may be determined. This is particularly valuable, first, be- cause the presence or absence of a type of linkage may thus be pos- sibly established, and second, because these frequencies are slightly altered by the proximity of other groups whose masses or effect on the valence force result in an alteration of the characteristic fre- quency. This is helpful in the delineation of the molecular structure of the molecule. Unfortunately, the number of Raman lines which can be elicited from a molecule is not confined to fundamental vibrations, that is, vibrations corresponding to a particular type of motion. Other lines may appear due to overtones (harmonics) of a given frequency or due to combinations. These latter may appear as the sum or difference of other frequencies, the result being in some cases nearly ten times as many lines as are represented by the fundamental vibrations. As a rule, these overtones and combinations have much less intensity than the fundamentals. From this and their numerical values it is sometimes possible, even in a complicated molecule, where a profu- sion of lines appear in the same neighborhood, to make proper as- JULY 15, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 2795 signments. Otherwise it would be very difficult, except in general terms, to state that a given line is due to any particular mode of oscillation. Typical examples of characteristic frequencies and force constants for specific linkage are given in Table 1. TABLE 1.—VALENCE Forcss (F) For DIFFERENT TypEs OF LINKAGE Linkage Frequency FX10-° dynes em C —H* 3050 3202 C-—C 993 4.64 C—O 1030 5.00 C-—N 1033 4.85 N-H 3370 6.20 O-—-H 3650 6.80 H-H 4158 5.05 Cl-—H 2880 aE Br—-—H 2558 3.80 S-—H Zale, 3.78 C-S 650 2.14 SSo 1620 10.60 C=O 1700 EEG o—©@ 1556 11.4 CN 1650 10.40 N=O 1640 11.80 C=C 2120 15.82 C=N 2150 455 C=O 2146 18.50 N=O 2224 20.9 * Aromatic THE RAMAN EFFECT IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY SATURATED ALIPHATIC COMPOUNDS In general the entire spectrum of the hydrocarbons may be di- vided into four groups, the first consisting of those frequencies below Ax 700. These correspond to the deformation or bending motion of the carbon atoms in the chain. From A> 700 to approximately 1100 the lines represent the linear or symmetrical vibrations (v,) of the carbon atoms and their combination frequencies. From Az 1100 to 1470 are deformation (6,) oscillations corresponding to the C—H linkage and finally from Av 2600 to 3100 the linear (v,) oscillations for C—H. The actual magnitude may be illustrated by Av 2918 for C—H in methane, 1450 for C—H (6,) in the higher homologues and 993 for C—C (v,) in ethane. For this region in butane there are no longer single frequencies. The frequencies in the region corresponding to C—H likewise become much more complicated. This is illustrated in Figure 4. VOL. 27, NO. 7 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 276 ‘suoqivooipAy oryeydiye pozyeinyes jo vayoods uosiuvdwo0g—'p “31 q paq qers p J 2) u | H<>0 (H-2) 9 <0 (I-D9 —————_— OOVE 0062 0042 009/ OOv/ 002/ 000/ 008 oo9 OOF 00g Oo OOlE O06 O0LZ OOH/ OO#/ O02/ O0W/ 009 009 O04 O02 te) 92, 7h] 4 ‘ bZ hf M5 dZ 2y > (Syy)2 Waa Hd) OF) x 9 [HY Wo HOTHD Cyr HHO THY) 442) WHI Hd Hd HI WD ai? 47) My 4) CH DHIHOCHY) HD 2 (HY HI HI CHD) “49 HO Hy) Ly 2 IHD) yD) Ha Ha (Ho) NGG) TA) SH) 7/9 JULY 15, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 277 The alcohols show spectra which are quite similar to the spectra of the hydrocarbons with the exception of the frequency occurring near Av 3400 which corresponds to the H—O vibration. In no case, however, do any of these compounds give identical spectra. The ethylene oxides or epoxy compounds are particularly char- acterized by one or two lines near Az 1256 and 1277. In addition there appears a hydrogen frequency greater than Az 3000, which occurs only in compounds having a triangular ring structure or in compounds attached to a carbon which is multiply bonded. The halogen derivatives of the hydrocarbons exhibit characteristic frequencies which are lower than usual, partially owing to the in- creased mass of the halogen. The v, vibrations are Av 710, 600 and 530, in methyl chloride, bromide, and iodide respectively. These are not proportional to the square root of the mass and consequently there is likewise progressively a change in the force constant. The effect of halogen substitution on the C—H vibration is to increase its frequency provided the substitution is made on the carbon atom to which is also bound the hydrogen. Branching of the chains is reflected in altered spectra for all these hydrocarbons. UNSATURATED ALIPHATIC COMPOUNDS With very few exceptions the presence or absence of the functional group C=C may be determined by its characteristic frequency shift which occurs between Ay 1600 and 1680. This is sensitive to groups immediately adjacent, and as it occurs in that portion of the spectrum which is more or less free from other lines, this becomes exceedingly useful in the determination of molecular structure. Ethylene yields As 1620 but propene Ap 1647. This increase remains constant for all hydrocarbon substituent groups. However, if this group is an alde- hyde the frequency becomes Az 1618, and if it is a chloride it is reduced still further to 1608. There is likewise an effect on the characteristic C—H frequencies which are two in number, namely, Av 3002, and 3080. In vinyl chloride these are augmented to Av 3036 and 3134. Two other frequencies appear which remain relatively constant, namely, Av 1290 and 1416. In compounds of the type CH;-CH=CHR there is introduced another possibility, cis- and trans-isomerism. As the effect of intro- ducing one radical in place of a hydrogen in proceeding from ethylene to propene was to augment the C=C frequency by twenty wave numbers, the effect of introducing two radicals on each side of the 278 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 double bond is to augment the frequency by roughly 40 wave num- bers, which gives Ay 1658 for the hydrocarbon substituents in the cvs-isomeric form. The trans- compounds yield a shift or line 15 wave numbers still higher or A 1674. This again is reduced on the substitu- tion of aldehydes, esters, or acid groups. The results are indicated in Table 2. The trisubstituted ethylenes yield a frequency corresponding in behavior to that of the trans- compounds. TABLE 2.—TuHE EFFECT OF DISUBSTITUTION ON THE C=C Suirts “| CH=CH oh % Radical R CH. | CHR Radical R CH. Ve Wh eeepc pes c1s trans C18 trans CH.0O(COCHS) 1649)|1665|1679|| CHCICH; 1640 CH.OH 1646|1658]1677|| CH.C.H; 1640 CHOHCH; 1646 CH.Cl 1640 1671 CHOHC=CH 1646 1676|| CHCl, 1666 (Kirrmann) CHOHCH =CH,. /|1646 1674|| CHBrCH; 1635/1651} 1666 CoH; 1642|1658|1674|| COOH 1638|1645| 1652) C3H; 1642/1658|1674|| COOR 1644] 1655 /(Kohlrausch) Ci, 1642|1658|1674|| CcH; 1631|1642| 1665 OsHu 1642|1658|1674|| H 1620| 1647 Oss 1642|1658|1674|| CN 1628) 1645 (Kohlrausch) CEs 1642 CHO 1618|1625| 1642 / Cis Cl 1608 CH 1659|1673|| Br 1598 NCH, CH.C;Hs5 1642|1658/1674 (CH2)sCsHu 1657 | A brief example of the use of these shifts to determine the presence of compounds may be cited in mixtures of rhodinol and citronellol which are identical except for the terminal groups. These are respec- tively: | | CH; CH; The rhodinol, or a-form, yields Av 1650 and the 6-form 1678. The effect of conjugation as shown in the diolefins is to reduce the ethylenic frequency very slightly. However, if the conjugation is of the nature found in the allenes, C=C =C, no typical ethylenic shift is observed but instead appear one or two lines occurring at A> 1070 and 1130. Allene, like COs, is a linear molecule. The nature of this vibration is such as to allow a coupling between the vibrating com- ponents in such a way that the usual ethylenic shift is split into two components, one of which occurs at a lower frequency, corresponding to the symmetrical vibration, and one appears at a higher frequency, Juny to, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 279 corresponding to the asymmetrical vibration. As the latter only ap- pears very weakly in the Raman effect it does not register, the natural result being that the characteristic frequency in this case appears at a much lower value than ordinarily. CARBONYL COMPOUNDS Carbonyl compounds, like the ethylenes, yield a double bond shift quite characteristic of the constitution of the molecules. These shifts vary from Az 1666 to 1800, depending upon whether the compound is an acid, ketone, aldehyde, ester, or acid chloride, and increase in the order named. The frequency varies slightly on the substitution of different aliphatic radicals in the a-position to the carbon of the carbonyl group; but, as has been indicated, the effect is more pro- nounced if the substitution takes place directly on the carbonyl car- bon. This is likewise shown in a series of esters wherein the frequency remains constant regardless of the ester, but varies widely with the character of substitution on the carbonyl carbon. These effects are indicated in Tables 3 and 4. TABLE 3.—INFLUENCE OF SUBSTITUTION ON THE CARBONYL FREQUENCIES Ap Substance San CES Rico, LG ER Te EST EL A [SU H;CCOX RH2CCOX R:,HCCOX RsCCOX CsH;COX Acid, X =OH 1666 1652 1648 1644 1647 Methyl ester, X =OCH; 1736 life 1732 1728 1720 Ethyl ester, X =OC.H; 1736 1732 1728 1724 IEPA Ketone, X = CH; 1710 1709 1709 1702 1677 Acid chloride, X =Cl 1798 1793 1788 1790 Aldehyde, X =H US 1719 1719 1723 1689 TABLE 4.—CARBOYNL FREQUENCY IN ESTERS OF THE TYPE XCOOR AD PieeeeUn) oe a a X=H X=Cl X=CH; | X=CH-Br | X=CH.Cl | X=CHCl | X=CCl . R=CH; 1717 1780 1738 1740 1748 1755 1768 . R=C2H; 1715 1772 1736 1738 1747 1750 1763 . R=C;3H, 1719 1775 1739 1736 1742 1749 1764 . R=C.H, 1718 1773 1737 1732 1739 1751 1765 . R=C5Hu 1718 1774 1738 1744 1756 1769 Our Whe The remarkable constancy of the carbonyl shift in a series of alde- hydes is illustrated in Figure 5, which shows only those shifts below Av 1750. , The use of the Raman effect in demonstrating keto-enol tautomer- ism is illustrated in Figure 6. Here the normal carbonyl frequencies are slightly augmented owing to the effect of conjugation. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 280 ‘({ddoy puv yosnei[yoy 104J¥) souojoy o1yeydiye jo vajoods uvurvy Aouenbesj MO] OY T.—'G “317 O09/ OO0%/ COZ OO0O/ JOR O09 OOF 9702 Oo TA la nk lel ia Fd HID] DS §49°0D'D <4 ~2 2455S, by5°ph> 727H WD’ OD IH Ey 72°H “DEY fA AAT Agins EH. ‘HD OD DSH 'IDHS5 Gy £19'02'2"H'D"H'IH §49°00°°9 8" wu 49 02 99" wu 5/9 O92 £H2°02 FD oH u Epoo 9: to“ ts EWD ‘OD 25H —42'09 2" O09 OO0b%/ O0& O00/ 008 oo9 OOF O02 Oo suny.15, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 281 From the observations on Raman spectra it has been postulated that diacetyl, acetylacetone, acetonyl, and aldol exist in tautomeric forms. KETO-ENOL TAL/TOMER/S/! 1600crm’ 1/700 1802 CH-CO-CHs CH-CO-Cp CO OCH. Cy (COM)= CH CO OCo/4, CH CO 00> Hg Cht=CH-CH =CAy Fig. 6.—The Raman shifts of the keto and enol forms of ethyl aceto- acetate as compared with similar compounds (after Andrews). ACETYLENIC LINKAGE As is observed in Table I, the force constant for C=C is approxi- mately three times that obtained for the singly-bonded carbon. The effect of substitution is more pronounced than in the case of the ethylenes but shows the same general behavior. Acetylene yields Ay 1960. If one hydrogen is substituted by a hydrocarbon radical this increases to Av 2120 and remains constant. Disubstitution causes both a marked augmentation of the acetylenic frequency and splitting generally into two components which appear at Av 2238 and 2303. The alcohol and ether derivatives sometimes yield three frequencies depending upon the nature of the compound, while on the other hand, halogen derivatives yield but a single line. In addition to this char- acteristic shift for the acetylenic linkage, there appear in these com- pounds two others almost equally constant. These are Av 340 and 3300. The first of these is probably attributable to the v, vibration of the chain and the second to the v, vibration of the =C—H. These effects are illustrated in Table 5. SATURATED CYCLIC COMPOUNDS The cyclopropanes are characterized by strong constant fre- quencies A> 860, 1170-1214, and 3065. The last is clearly connected with the hydrogen vibrations, but appears in no other saturated cyclic compound except cyclopropane and its derivatives. The cyclic compounds from cyclopentane to cycloctane show a progressively decreasing frequency in the Av 860 region. Otherwise they exhibit remarkable similarity. Nevertheless, it is possible to distinguish the cis- and trans-isomers in compounds of such types as the cyclohexanes. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 282 (8)9208 (S)ST9T (FP) S9FT (6) LEFT ($) 6621 (S)OTZI (Z)0ZOT (1)968 NO (2)Z208 (8) TE9T (F)69FT (6) LEFT ($) 2621 (Z) 9021 (Z)EZ01 (¢) £06 *HO000 peorg (6)9T9T (L) PET (Z) 6821 (T)SOZI (€)Z88 OHO (L)0F9T (L)OFFT (Z)SOZI Ig?HO (2) 2908 (1)0S9T (S)F9FI (8) [PFT (Z) F621 (Z) 9021 (Z)6Z01 (1)S68 "H°7OHOHO ($) TS08 (8) 1S9T (G)S9FT (S)FPFI (Z) F621 (F) 2021 (1)9Z01 (O1) 68 *HOHOHO ($)8S08 (S)8S9T (9)99FT (S)EPFI (1)9621 (€)90ZT (€)SZ01 (4)206-688 *"HOOOO*HO (fF) SFOS (8)9S9T ()99FT (S)EPFI (€)96ZI (9)Z0ZT (Z)ZZ01 (8)888 HO*HO (€) L808 (S)ZS9I (Z)99FI (L) LPF (€) L631 (Z)SOZT (O01) (O€0T) (1)Z06-288 W°O*HO (+) (1908) (8) LZ91 (1) Z9FT (9)ZPFI (F) 9621 (9)80Z1 (OT) (SOT) (Z)806-068 Dee (Z) S08 (9)8¢9T (G)SOFT (S)6EF1 (1)S62I (G)20Z1 ()9Z0I ($) 806-188 "HO (¢)0908 (9)ST9T (Z) LOFT (L) LPF (1) 9621 (Z) LOZI (€)SZ01 ($)668 iy SET av U (a —€ }) ANALNAMOIOAD-|V GALOLILSHNG JO SHIONTNOAUY OILSIUALOVAVHO—'9 WI1AV “OT JO o[v08 & UO AZISUdzUT O49 S}UEseId9I S9/qe} 19440 PUL SIG} UL FIGS UVUTEY 944 DULMOT[O; SIseyJUoIed UI JoquINU sy, ; (L)811Z HO=0°HO"H®O (L)811Z HO=0°H"O (8)0Z1Z HO=0°HO'H'O (rece “@eezz “H’O0=0"H'D (S)e0ke (4)gec2 *"HOO=0°HO"H'D (OL) II1Z HO=0'H®)O (z)pece (2)eeee “H*00=0"H"O (Z)9Tse (Z)6Gze (OT)6E2z HOO O nH) (OL)611Z HO=0°HO'H'O (rece (O2)csec “H°00=0"H"D (OL)ESZZ (OL)FIZZ% ‘Hoos oO (OL)9TIZ HO=0°H"O @coee Wneszs “HOO=0"H'D (G)Z0&Z (OL)7é2e “HOO=0°HO'H'D (Heiig HoO— Ocho) O= Ol (L)8822 (2)01Z2 *4*H®°O0=0°H°O (1)0Z8%Z =(1)08ZZ = (OL) 682z HO0= OHO (L)611Z HO=0"'H°O (Hesce (olce “H00=0'H’0 (¢) 808% (OT) EEsz HOO=Oln (L) 811% HO=0"H'O (Oneszca “Ol rice. "HOO=O7HO (G) 108%? (OL) EEZz “OO =O" (L)811Z HO=0°HOHO?(*HO) ()e6cz W)iTece “H'00=0"H"'O (G) 808% (O1)SEZz 18 OOOO) Cig Ho— oO Wo ()e6ez ()rece *H'O0=O0"H'O (G)FO8% (OL) 8EZz HOO OHO (1)8602 HO=OHO="HO ()e6ce (cece “HO0=0"HO (S) F082 (OT) 8EZz WOOO. H® CHGZIG Hoo Ho (10k “Oneezs “HOO=0"HO: ~~ @)crEe (OL) FEZS MIO = OHO 1(G)096T HO=HO III II i suoq1e.01pA av SHIONGNOGUY OINDTTIALHOY NO NOILOLILSHNG AO Laaay AH PL—¢ alavy, JULY 15, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 283 CYCLOOLEFINS As would be expected, the cyclodlefins have a frequency in the region corresponding to an ethylenic group. This is somewhat modi- fied by the ring structure. Appearing at Av 1615 in cyclopentene and A> 1660 in the A! substituted derivatives, these compounds also give rise to a frequency near Av 3060 characteristic of =CH,. Cyclopen- tadiene shows a profound modification of the ordinary ethylenic fre- quency even as modified by the ring structure. This appears at Az 1500. The constant frequencies and effect of substitution for cyclopen- tene and its derivatives are shown in Table 6. The higher homologues such as cyclohexene to cycloheptene give Av 1650 for the normal com- pound, which is augmented to Av 1675 by substitution in the A! posi- tion. AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS While benzene and its derivatives have been more extensively investigated than any other compounds, their spectra are very com- plex. Benzene shows the usual =C—H frequency near Az 3063 and exhibits Av 1605 and 1584. Its derivatives exhibit one frequency for the double bond, namely, Av 1600. This is quite appreciably lower than the shift observed in cyclohexene or in ethylene. While the effect of substitution is in the direction of reducing the ordinary ethylenic frequency, this effect is not so pronounced as in the case of cyclopen- tadiene. Presumably there are 10, or possibly 12, fundamental fre- quencies, at least one of which has been attributed to a carbon isotope of mass 13. Attempts have been made to explain the structure of benzene on the basis of resonating bonds. So far as the Raman effect is concerned, the characteristic valence vibration is that of atomic motion along the line of directed valence which varies with the force constant and the mass of the atoms. Where resonance of bonds may be possible, it is the type of bonds which exist for the longest duration of time which determine the spectra. In short, if there is resonance between a double and triple bond, but the bond type is essentially that cor- responding to a triple bond, then the Raman shift will occur near the usual position for this type of binding. The concept of resonating bond is based primarily on a change in atomic distances obtained from x-ray data. A conclusion based on this evidence is necessarily an extrapolation. In the case of benzene there is little doubt that the formula commonly used to represent benzene is too static and that there is a continuous resonating effect throughout the ring structure _ so that no particular atoms can be stated as being doubly bonded. a JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. ai, NO. 7 284 (#) 2908 (Z) L6S1 (Z) L811 (10801 (+) 2001 (Z)0Z9 NO*HO'H®O ($)6S08 (G)96ST (¢) L611 (Z)O9TT (£)6Z01 (8)SOOT ($F) E29 °ON*HO'H®O ($)0S0E (Z) P6ST. (T)961T (¢)O00T (0)019 HO*HO'H'O (8)SS0s (F)909T (F) LOT (F)9STT (Z)8Z0T (8) LOOT (F)ZZ9 “HN?HN'HYPO (g) S08 (1)009T (1) ITZI (L)6STT (L)FE01 (¢)000T (F) 619 10°HO'H®O spunodumoo [Azueg ‘q (02) 06ST (Z)88IT (Z)SSIT (Z)PLIT (SL)OFIT (1) 8z01 (C1)266 (Z) 129 TW o= OHO (F)6S08 (OL) 96ST (F)061T (F)OSII (Z) L201 (OL)OOOT (Z)S19 (829) *H°OHO= HO'H®O (ST)O6ST (ST)S8II (OL) F00T (¢)0Z9 (supa) *H°*OHO = HO'HO (F)ZS0E (S)009T (F)00ZI (Z)ESTI (F)ZEO1 ‘ (O1)Z00T (S)619 "H°O*HO*HO'HO (+) S08 ee I (F)SLIT (Z)SFIT (F)LE01 (S)ZLOT (F)EZ9 *H°O*HO'H'O 6091 (8) LF0E ($)68ST (1) 1611 (L)9FIT (Z)ZZ01 (SG) $66 (1) 119 DS iO ss e®) (8)6S08 (1) TO9T (S)00ZT (1)8SI1 (1) 01 (8)0001 (1)€29 HO= O— “HO— "HO HO aa (8) 1908 (8) FO9T (S)0ZZI (L)9STT (1)9Z01 (1)666 (G)8z9 HO-— HO-—‘H°O (8)SG0E (OL) 66ST (S)OTZI (S)6FIT (1) 1801 (8)666 (G)1Z9 "HOHO= HO'HO (8) L908 (OL) 66ST (G)SOZI (T)8SIT (1)6Z01 (2) 0001 (¢)ez9 *HO = HO*?HO'H*O (6)6S08 (OT) LO9T (S)S6IT (T)8SII (1)6Z0T (1)000T (G)€z9 HO=0'H'O (8) L908 (OT) TO9T (8)SOZI (L)FSTI (1)6Z01 (1)666 (G) 829 “HO = HO'H'O (G)ZS08 (G)FO9T (Z) S0ZT (S)LSTT (1)6Z0T (8) 001 (Z)0Z9 *HO*HO'H®O (G)FS0E (Z) FO9T ($)602T (1) PSII (1)6Z01 (8)ZOOL (Z)ZS9 "HOeHO SIATCATIOp uoqivo01pAH “se (G)0908 ()F8ST (1) 2908 (1)SO9T (S)SL21T (O01) 266 (¢)¢09 "HOD SR ne Re a aa a a ee Ll SK ele eee Td ee a ee Av] SOATJCATIO(T a Na ee a ae ais a a ee eae SHAILVAINGTG NOILOLILSHNSONOJPT SLI aNV H2NAZNYG AO SHIONGTNAOGAYT IVINGWNVGNOWY—) Wavy, funy 15; 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 285 Nevertheless, it is precarious to consider that the average effect is a bond and a half. The Raman frequency would seem to indicate that in view of the modifications of the ethylenic frequency by ring struc- ture in cyclopentene, in benzene there are double bonds with a slightly diminished force constant. The effect of multiple substitution in benzene is to decrease the C=C shift with increasing substitution, but no two isomers are iden- tical. The more or less constant frequencies observed in benzene and some of its derivatives are indicated in Table 7. TERPENES, TERPENE DERIVATIVES, AND TERPINOIDS The structure of these compounds may be extraordinarily complex. Particularly has it been difficult to differentiate the components of the various mixtures occurring in natural products. From a spectro- graphic standpoint, however, it has been shown that most of these mixtures contain some type of bonding which permits the determina- tion of types of compounds in distillates and, in particular cases, their structures. Limonene has an external double bond which cor- rectly falls in the neighborhood of Az 1650, while the internal double bond Aj 1681 is similar to methyl cyclohexene. The compound dl-AA*- carene gives Aj 1554, 1639, and 1670, as compared with 1641 and 1683 for d-A®-carene. The /-A®-carene has only Av 1685. The sabinenes, on the other hand, give Ay 1653. Geranial and citronellal show very dif- ferent shifts, as likewise do citronellol and linalodl. Some of these dif- ferences are indicated in Figure 7. Those compounds possessing a =CH, group, or equivalent, yield the C—H frequency characteristic of this type of binding. From ecar- vone and limonene are observed Az 3034 to 3085. Pulegone correctly exhibits no such frequency. The appearance of this higher frequency shift in these compounds is in contradistinction to the behavior of the substituted cyclohexenes. Some examples of the use of Raman spectra are found in the analy- sis of many complicated mixtures of terpenes, and the indication of the existence of anethole, isoeugenol, and isosafrole as the trans- rather than the czs-compounds. This is only a casual indication of the many applications of consti- tutional determination by means of the Raman effect to the delinea- tion of the structure of the terpene derivatives. These are of great in- terest in the biochemical fields embracing vitamins, hormones, and compounds of biological significance. VOL. 27, NO. 7 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 286 ‘(1vyyee puw IdAeN Je4jJe) souedse4 o1foADATOd ouos jo vaijyoods uvuIeYyY xy. —', ‘Sy O0zE 0082 00 W 002/ (0.44xaq) BUdUId (OAae 7) QUdUld (044X9q) aUdUIgeS (OAB®7) QUaUIGesS (O44x9q) dUaIeD —~V (OA9e)) aussie) JULY 15, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT | 287 POLYCYCLIC COMPOUNDS AND DIPHENYL DERIVATIVES These compounds exhibit spectra of the expected kind in view of the tenets thus far promulgated. Some lines alter widely with substitu- tion and others remain relatively constant. The ethylenic shift is slightly less than Av 1600 in most cases. ALIPHATIC ORGANIC SULFUR AND METALLO COMPOUNDS AND THOSE CONTAINING NITROGEN The H—S linkage is as characteristic as any other so far described. It occurs at A> 2573 in both organic and inorganic compounds. The C—S line appears at Av 652, with the exception of methyl mercaptan which gives Ap 704. The determination of S—S in the polysulfides is not entirely satisfactory and the assignment of a particular fre- quency to a characteristic vibration is not without objection. Pre- sumably this occurs at Av 510. All the polysulfides and sulfides are easily distinguished from other types of compounds. The N =O frequency appears at about Av 1565 in the nitrites, and 1640 in the nitro compounds and nitrates. The C=N line appears at As 1650 as determined primarily from the oximes. The methyl] deriva- tives of these compounds are the only ones showing a hydrogen fre- quency in excess of Ay 3000 for this type of compound. The isonitriles exhibit two frequencies which appear in the triple- bond region, namely, Av 2146 and 2161. The nitriles, on the other hand, exhibit a frequency which is approximately 100 wave numbers higher. The thiocyanates and isothiocyanates yield frequencies which occur within a relatively narrow range of Av 2106 to 2182. The iso- thiocyanates, however, exhibit two frequencies like isonitriles. These compounds also give rise to a line near Av 630 which has been pointed out as possibly characteristic of the C—S linkage. Metallo derivatives such as zinc or mercury dimethl and tetraethyl lead have their principal frequencies at less than Av 700. Those in excess of this amount are connected with the methyl radicals. There are usually about four frequencies concerned with the metal atom to carbon vibrations, which vary from Az 130 to 700. There is no simi- larity in the frequency shifts in this region between any of these com- pounds. The amines, amides, and imido compounds are characterized pri- marily by the hydrogen shifts which occur from Ay 3319 to 3378 in the aliphatic compounds and from Az 3360 to 3420 in the aromatic ones. The C—N shift as determined for methyl amine occurs at Ay 1033. The carbonyl frequency in the amides is greatly reduced from 288 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 the corresponding frequency in the ketones and appears at 1600 in lieu of 1710. HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS The unsubstituted furanes, pyrroles, and thiophenes exhibit an anomaly somewhat similar to those observed in cyclopentene. There is no C=C shift in the normal position, but one occurs at Av 1486 in furane, possibly at 1140 in pyrrole, and 1404 in thiophene as com- pared with 1500 in cyclopentadiene. The substitution of a radical in place of a ring hydrogen immediately causes the appearance of a reasonably normal ethylenic shift if due allowance is made for ring influence. The normal C = N frequency is also lacking in 3, 4-dimethyl furazan. Unfortunately, furazan has not been studied. The remaining furazans investigated, azoximes and oxdiazoles have at least one C=N shift. This group of compounds is also characterized by C—H lines from Av 3070 to 3349 in some cases. The intercomparison between the spectra obtainable from some of these compounds is given in Table 8. The pyrroles give rise to approximately Av 3140 in all cases, but, in addition, to 3380 when there is a hydrogen attached to a nitrogen atom. TaBLE 8.—THE RAMAN SPECTRA OF SOME FURAZANS, OXDIAZOLES, AND AZOXIMES 3, 4-Dimethy] 2, 5-Dimethyl- 3-Methyl-4- 2-Methyl-5- 5-Methyl-3- 3-Methyl-5- furazan oxdiazole phenylfurazan phenyloxdiazole phenylazoxime phenylazoxime 289(1) 283(1) 649(1) 613(1) 621(1) 629(1) 635(1) 632(2) 709(2) 958(1) 964(1) 923(1) 998 (2) 991(1) 989(2) 982(1) 1043(1) 1030(2) 1020(1) 1036(2) 1055(1) 1069(1) 1108(2) 1102(2) 1168(2) 1175(2) 1183(2) 1308(2) 1278(1) 1305(2) 1320(1) 1396(3) 1461(3) 1438(3) 1451(8) 1442(2) 1439(2) 1463(2) 1502(2) 1482(3) 1483(2) 1499(2) 1546(3) 1546(3) 1541(3) 1559(3) 1579(3) 1598(3) 1591(2) 1576(2) 1601(2) 2938(2) 2957 (2) 2936(2) 2919(2) 2928 (2) 2940(1) 3070(1) 3082(1) 3083 (2) 3071(2) 3065(2) 3091 (2) 3190(1) 3182(1) 3178(1) 3217(1) 3204(1) 3349(1) DEUTERIUM COMPOUNDS If mass alone enters into the ratio of the frequency observed for deuterium to that of hydrogen it is as 1: \/2 or Avp = Adu 1/./2=0.707 < Aix. For CD, is observed 2108, compared with 2915 in CHy. CD, Jonuy 15> 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 289 should give a calculated value of 2065. In CHCl, there are two fre- quencies whose counterparts in CDCl; are very different. These are Ap 1215 and 3019. In CDCl; these become Az 908 and 2256, as com- pared with a calculated value from mass effect alone of 860 and 2140. Consequently, the observed frequency is higher than the mass effect allows, indicating an increased force of linkage in the deuterium com- pounds. Deuterium derivatives have a special usefulness in the as- signment of doubtful vibrations. It will be remembered that in the region between Az 1000 and 1400 there occur many lines whose origin is unknown. If these lines are due to the atomic vibrations of carbon as the principal participant, then these will be altered only slightly by the substitution of deuterium for hydrogen. On the other hand, if the lines correspond to a frequency chiefly concerned with the motion of the hydrogen atoms, then the substitution of deuterium will cause a profound modification of the frequencies as is indicated in the ex- amples just given. SOME APPLICATIONS OF THE RAMAN EFFECT TO ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Thus far have been outlined the nature of the Raman effect, and the mechanism by which the observed Raman spectra may be used to delineate the structure of organic molecules. It has been indicated that in the simpler molecules the modes of vibration of the atoms can be determined, as well as their spacial configuration, their amplitudes of vibration, the forces involved in types of linkage, and the specific heats if all the types of vibration are known; and finally much light can be thrown upon the constitution of molecules by characteristic Raman shifts. Since the known constitution of molecules should give rise to cer- tain types of Raman spectra, it is possible to distinguish alterations of this constitution under different conditions. For example, no one has ever isolated methylene glycol, and yet an aqueous solution of formaldehyde indicates that formaldehyde continues to exist no longer and is converted to methylene glycol. The mechanism of the polymerization of polystyrene and acetaldehyde is demonstrable, and organic and inorganic complexes can be investigated by the change in spectra. These applications are of particular interest in the field of industrial plastics. | The number of molecules in higher vibrational levels at room tem- perature can be determined, in some cases, by the intensities of anti- Stokes lines. These are like ordinary Raman lines except for the fact that they are emitted by molecules already in a higher energy state 290 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 7 than the ground level and consequently appear on the high frequency side of the exciting line rather than the low frequency side. In addi- tion to the magnitude of frequency shifts and their intensities, there exists a third property of Raman spectra which is helpful in the as- signment of different frequencies to their proper origin, and conse- quently in the determination of the types of vibration the molecules undergo. This is the measurement of the degree of depolarization of any given Raman line. Those lines corresponding to symmetrical oscillations are more or less polarized, while those which are unsym- metrical will be depolarized to a greater or less degree, depending on the character of the oscillation. All the principles thus far set forth are equally applicable to in- organic chemistry. THE RAMAN EFFECT IN INORGANIC CHEMISTRY Ordinarily inorganic chemistry has been little concerned with inter- atomic forces or spacial configurations, and has been more or less con- tent with classical formulae and percent composition of the elements. For the average practical purpose this is sufficient, but if one is inter- ested in surface tension, vapor pressure, osmotic pressure, viscosity, and other factors for which the behavior and configuration of the molecules as well as the chemical composition are important, then the Raman-spectra method will give information of value. A perusal of any standard reference book in inorganic chemistry will readily con- vince the skeptic that in spite of the free use of simple formulae, there is a large field of inorganic chemistry concerning which there exists a most profound state of ignorance. The inorganic groups have characteristic frequency shifts just the same as the organic ones and for the same reason. There is, however, a larger scale of diffuseness or lack of clarity which is attributable to a much wider scale of binding, ranging from the completely homopolar type found in organic chemistry to the completely heteropolar type which may exist in inorganic compounds. The latter type gives rise to no Raman lines. Hydrochloric acid solutions, for example, give no frequency shift, but HCl yields Az 2880 in the gas and somewhat less in the liquid. As is to be expected, crystals, liquids, solutions or gases yield shifts depending on the binding forces and on the spacial arrangement of the atoms, that is, tetrahedral, triangular, linear, etc. Allions or molecules of the type RO, or ROs, etc. have their respective shifts somewhat simi- larly spaced. The number of lines and the exact magnitude, how- June bo, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 291 ever, depend on the mass, force, and other considerations named. The shifts observed in the SO, group, while characteristic of that group, are not wholly independent of the cation. The frequency near Av 1000 decreases regularly with different cations in a given periodic group directly proportional to the mass of the cation. The difference is not more than 20 wave numbers. The nitrites yield several lines the principal of which is Av 1325, a symmetrical vibration. The nitrates give Ay 720, 1048, 1357, wherein 1048 is the symmetrical vibration. Sulfates yield At 440, 620, 984, and 1104. A comparison of the spectra of the various nitrates and sulfates is given in Tables 9 and 10. All inorganic compounds (possessing at least a weak homopolar linkage) likewise exhibit entirely different spectra, depending on the atomic constituents, and it would serve no useful purpose to enumer- ate all of them. The method used to delineate structure in inorganic chemistry from the point of view of the Raman effect is the same, in principle, as that employed with organic compounds. A few of many possible examples will be given to illustrate some of the results ob- tained respectively in solution, from solids, gases, acids, and finally from that most peculiar of all compounds, water itself. It has been more or less customary to consider a solution of SO, in water as sulfurous acid. While there no doubt is some H.SO, pres- ent under these circumstances, in the main, this is principally SO, in water, as the spectrum of gaseous SO, is practically unaltered on solution. Similarly it can be shown that the anions of the compounds NaHSO; and K,8,0O,, in solution exist primarily as S.0;= and KHSO, respectively. The compound TiCl, in strong HCl solutions indicates the existence of H.TiCl,. The complex ammonium, cyanide, tungsten, and molybdenum compounds have particular frequencies. In liquids it can be demonstrated that there are mixed compounds formed on addition of PCl; to varying quantities of PBr3, while in the solid state the Raman spectrum from the solid eutectic of NaNO; +KNO; shows a single sharp frequency for the NO; group when freshly prepared, but reverts to two separate shifts after a period of several days. The polymerization of silica in glasses can be shown. The polymerization of gaseous SO; and the depolymerization of S.O¢ can be quantitatively demonstrated since the spectra of the two com- pounds are quite distinct. Concentrated H.SO, gives a spectrum which is quite different from that of dilute solutions of this acid. There are three lines, Av 1048 characteristic of the HSO,7 ion, 982 for the SO.- ion and 908 probably for the un-ionized H.SO, molecule. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 292 “UOIPVAIISGO 94} JO APITBII IG} 07 SB JQNOp & S9zBOIPUL FI SISEqZUOIEd UT UAT SI JIGS UBUIeY 94} MEY AA 1 (01)086 "OSIN pezein (S)826 E19 (Ise) 389 ‘We ’OS9A (OL) 886 E19 (G)ZSP NTI *OSUIN FOIT (O01) 086 F19 (G)LSF *(¥'OS)*1V SOIT (OL) E86 129 (G)ISF ’OSPO 90IT (O1)Z86 029 (G)$SP Oguz (O1)086 €19 (G)ZbP *OS°d 9III (01)Z86 (902) L19 (G)9GF 'OS31N G99T pt (SPIT OTT 8901) (O1)086 FS2-LIL (¢)019 62h 8612 ’OsnO (O9TT) (G)216 (062) 109 LLP *(’'OS)*1V°M LOFT (Z) SSI LOTT (O1)Z86 S19 (G) FSF ’OS*(*HN) 060T (OL) 186 619 (G) LSP pezeinyeg 109° IOIT (OT) 186 G19 (G)09F pezeinyeg 1OS°FN (C)OIILT (OL)F86 €6¢ CPP quo Jad 8] OST 8}jIG8 UeUIe yy worye14U99T0+) soueysqng SHLVATAG ANOG dO VULOGdG NVWVYY—'6 AAV, 293 RAMAN EFFECT HIBBEN Jony 1: 1937 (LT8T) LEOT (1I81) (GG9T) VS9L 6991 6991 18991 9Lb1 OOFT re al VII (Z) LIFT (9EZ1) (Z)OSET (Z) PSST IPPI- 6PEI LGvI— FEI lorl = =(aaael 19ST (Z) ZEST (Z) L981 (6881) (Z)I9ST SHLVULIN] HNOG AO VULOUKdG NVANVY—’O] ATAV {, (OL) 9801 (OI) ZPOT (OL) 6FOT (OL) LFOT (OL) 6F0T (OL) 6F0T (OT)OSOT (O1)6F0T (OT) LP01 (OL) 6FOL (OL) LPO (OL) 8¥F0T (OL) OSOL (OL)9FOL (OL) SPOT (OL) 6F0T (OL) 6F0L (OL)OSOT sq jtys ueoe yy ‘quosoid 1098M 94} 04 ONP 918 UUINOO SIy} UL pozBOIPUI sJIGS UBUIEY OTT, 1 086 (Z)082 (Z)082 (Z)0G2 (Z) 822 (G)IPL-(Z)9TL (Z) TPL (Z)9TL (Z)PSL-(G)L1L (2) 862 (2) 082 (Z)1ZL IoZ CVV poeyvinyeg N& N & pezBinyeg peyeinyeg pe7yeinyeg (928) N& N8 N& 616 qyueo 19d $9 yuao 10d QZ quoo 10d QZ (queo 19d QZ) pe7yBInyeg qyuoo z3ed ee N Fl UOT}RAJUIIUOD, ®(FON) IA “(°ON)Ad ®EON)IV “(ON )UZ 2(°ON)®4 *(®ON)IS *(7ON)*®O “(ON) SIN ‘ONPO “(ON )°G f‘ONSV 2ON)NO "ON’HN *ONSO *ONdU ‘ONM ‘ON®N *ON?T sounysqng 294. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 The intensity of these three lines varies with dilution. This is demon- strated in Figure 8. While NaHS exhibits an S—H line, neither H;PO, nor H2SO, shows any linkage between the phosphorus or sulfur and the hydrogen atoms. H, SQ, . s c AV 992) ¢ 1048 “a 8 i . ¢ = zy ° = C Q C Qo as S) d So : y N) 7) 2 90 Lt) Q t a Fig. 8.—Changes in the characteristic Raman frequencies of sulfuric acid with varying concentrations. Ay 908 characteristic of sulfuric acid molecule decreases in intensity with dilution; Ay 1048 characteristic of HSO, ion, and Ay 982 characteristic of SO, ion increases in intensity with dilution (after Woodward). Nitric acid also possesses different lines at varying concentrations. In dilute solution there is Av 1046 for the NO;- ion which appears only very weakly, if at all, in the concentrated acid. On the other hand, as the acid becomes more concentrated there appear two fre- quencies Av 1300 and 1665. These are more or less analogous to the JULY 15, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 295 similar frequencies appearing in CH;—O—NO,, and give some evi- dence of the existence of the ester form of nitric acid in concentrated solution. These changes are indicated in Figure 9. Stepwise dissocia- tion is also shown from the spectra of selenious and selenic acid as well as for phosphoric acid. —> Decreasing Concentration of NO, TOCA Pte ANSE 2 aa SEE EE RSE Sh ohA RN SERS ENNIS itty ~J Fig. 9.—Changes in the characteristic Raman frequencies of nitric acid with vary ing concentration. Showing increase in nitrate ions and decrease in nitric acid mole cules with dilution (after Rao). Perhaps one of the more interesting applications of the Raman effect in inorganic chemistry is in the investigation of the constitu- tion of water. The anomalous behavior of water from the physico- chemical point of view has long been ascribed to various types of polymers. The explanations have varied from postulating the exist- . ence of (H.O). and (H.O); to the assumption of a quasi-crystalline ar- rangement having respectively a tridymite, quartz, and close-packed ideal structure. It has been postulated that these modifications change as a function of temperature. The difference between these concepts is more illusory than real. The essential fact is that there is a profound influence on the Raman spectrum of water as changes in its constitu- tion take place. This is prima facie evidence of the existence of the intermolecular interaction in water. Other methods of arriving at this conclusion are less direct and more susceptible to error. Water may have theoretically but three fundamental frequencies. These occur near A> 1600 (6,), 3600 (v,) and 3757 (v,) from the vapor. In the liquid 296 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 the second of these three is lowered and split into three components. The last one, observable in infra-red absorption, is forbidden in the Raman effect. The Raman spectrum of water, however, has three other broad frequencies, namely, at approximately Av 150, 450, and 2118. Of these Av 2118 is probably a combination of the frequencies Az 1630 and 450. This leaves the Az 150 and 450 as impossible of exist- ence, from a theoretical standpoint, in the simple H.O molecule and therefore must be ascribed to intermolecular perturbation. The second of these, Av 450, is probably due to the hindered rotation of the hydro- Fig. 10.—A microphotometer tracing of the principal Raman bands for water excited by the 2537 A mercury line. The bands are indicated by arrows from left to right to correspond to Ay 150, 445, 1628, 2170 and the broad band extending from Ap 3220 to 3600. gen atoms in a given molecule, and the first to the hindered transla- tional motion of the molecules as a whole. Both of these effects are therefore directly attributable to the influence of one molecule on the other and constitute a phenomenon unique in Raman spectra unless there is a close chemical or physical combination. The assignment of vibrational and rotational motion to these two frequencies is further substantiated by the spectrum from deuterium oxide. In this com- pound the Az 450 for hydrogen rotation is diminished, but Av 150 is little affected. A microphotometer tracing of the Raman spectrum of water is shown in Figure 10. Instead of reasonably sharp lines there are ob- served broad bands due to the lack of specific quantitization in the energy changes. The values given for the shifts represent the peaks of the bands. It may be pointed out that the maxima of the broad juny lo, 1937 HIBBEN: RAMAN EFFECT 297 bands between Az 3200 and 3600 change somewhat with temperature, and, as may be expected, the two lower frequencies, A7 140 and 450, diminish markedly with an increased temperature. As ice is supposed to be polymerized, one would expect an increase in the intensity of the lower frequencies accompanying a change in state from water to ice. This is indeed the case, as is shown in Figure 11. c a = he Fig. 11.—A microphotometer tracing of the Raman spectrum of ice showing the enhancement in intensity of the lower frequency shifts occurring in ice at Ap 205 and 601 as a result of intermolecular interaction. Another interesting application from the point of view of inorganic chemistry is the demonstration of the common ion effect. This is shown in Figure 12. Zine chloride has at least one strong line at Ax 280. The top curve in the figure represents a one-molal solution which shows the zinc chloride line with fair intensity. On further dilu- tion the line practically disappears, indicating an increase in ioniza- tion which is more rapid than the corresponding dilution. However, as is shown in the lower curves, the addition of the common chloride ion by means of NaCl causes a suppression of this ionization, so that 298 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 the actual concentration of un-ionized zine chloride is greater in the half-molal ZnCl, solution under these circumstances than it was origi- nally in the one-molal solution. These examples will suffice to demonstrate that the constitution of inorganic as well as organic compounds can be determined in many ZnCh, / molal ZnCl, : +molal yee Ch xmolal Na Ch; /melal ZnCl» 4molal NaCl, 2 mofal 2n Ch, £ molal NaCl, 2molal Fig. 12.—An enlarged microphotometer tracing of zine chloride and zine chloride- sodium chloride solutions showing the common ion effect which results in the repres- sion of ionization in zinc chloride. cases. This is of particular interest in those examples where there is either a change in passing from a pure compound to solution or where there is an alteration in composition or constitution induced by any modification of environment. All the general types of Raman spectra investigations enumerated in the course of this presentation have been undertaken in the Geo- physical Laboratory. This work has included a study of many organic and inorganic compounds from a structural standpoint, those com- Jury 15, 1937 LOTKA: POPULATION ANALYSIS 299 pounds whichexhibit peculiarities such as oxalic acid and formaldehyde solutions, and finally the mechanism of polymerization and associa- tion. It has been assumed that any method which will not yield logical results in the field of organic chemistry is inapplicable to the invest- igation of properties of inorganic compounds which are, in turn, more directly concerned with geophysics. Most of the common inorganic salts, bases and acids have been examined and the results applied to the constitutional problems of these substances, in solution, and as crystals, amorphous compounds and inorganic complexes. The dem- onstration of common ion effects and of the “‘association’’ of water and ice has likewise been realized. In brief, fundamental physical and chemical information has been obtained concerning those substances which compose the earth. SUMMARY It has been the purpose of this presentation to outline the inter- pretation, the development and application of Raman spectra and, to a certain extent, to analyze the data upon which such interpreta- tions and applications are predicated. The contributions already made to physics and chemistry by the Raman effect are undisputed. It is of interest to the physicist, the crystallographer, and the chemist. It provides information concerning the behavior of atoms within the molecule and of the molecules themselves, which knowledge neces- sarily must be a prerequisite for the better understanding of the com- position and behavior of all forms of matter. Notre.—No attempt has been made in the course of this presentation to recognize the contributions of individual workers, as the number of citations would be too numer- ous to be practicable. The reader is referred to the reviews by the author appearing in the Chemical Reviews 13: 345. 1933 and 18: 1. 1936 for most of the original cita- tions. + MATHEMATICS.—Population analysis: a theorem regarding the stable age distribution... ALFRED J. LotKa, New York. The author has elsewhere? stated without proof what amounts es- sentially to the theorem set forth below. As the proof is a little intri- cate it seems desirable to put it on record, as follows: Theorem:—A closed population which is increasing at a constant rate r per head, under the régime of a constant age schedule of mor- tality and fertility, can have no other than the stable age distribution. 1 Received May 18, 1937. 2 Human Biology 9: 104. 1937. 300 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 (That is, it can not be merely approaching that distribution, the stable distribution must be actually established.) Concentrating attention exclusively on the female population, that is, dealing exclusively with mothers and daughters,’ Let N(t), b(t) and d(t) denote, respectively, the number of the (female) population, its birth rate per head and its death rate per head at time ¢. Let p(a) be the probability at birth of reaching age a, and let p'(a) denote the derivative dp(a)/da, these quantities being independent of ¢. Let m(a) be the frequency of female births by women at age a, independent of ft. It is to be noted that p(a) and m(a) from their nature can never be negative, while p’(a) can never be positive. Putting Bit) =b(t) N(@) (1) and Dit) = d(t) N@) (2) we have the well known and essentially obvious relations NW) = f BO + a)p(ada (3) BW) = {BU — a)p(a)m(a)aa (4) iG) eee [ 2 ee Oda. (5) Hence Bt) — Dit) _f,°Bt — a)[p(a)m(a) + p’(a) |da 6) N(t) - SZB(t — a)p(a)da = constant (independent of t) =r (7) by hypothesis, since this quotient is the rate of natural increase per head. Two trivial cases may first of all be disposed of. 3 As set forth in previous publications, e.g., Jour. American Statistical Association 20: 307, 329. 1925. JULY 15, 1937 LOTKA: POPULATION ANALYSIS 301 1. The condition (7) would be satisfied if p(a) m(a) + p’(a) = constant (independent of a). (8) But this is contrary to biological facts. 2. The condition (7) is also satisfied if the numerator vanishes for all values of ¢. But in that case r=0 and hence ii i B(t — a) p(a) da = constant (9) 0 that is, B(t) = constant (10) and we have simply the case of a stationary population under the régime of a constant life table. Furthermore the equation BO = f Be - a) pla) ma) da (4) here becomes | t= fp ma) aa (11) so that peer (12) satisfies the condition for stability of age distribution‘ = few p(a) m(a) da. 3 (13) 0 3. There remains to be considered the general case, when the nu- merator of (6) does not vanish, and r+#0. If, under these conditions, the quotient (6) is to be constant, B(t—a) must be the product of a factor conta‘ning only ¢ and a fac- tor containing only a, that is, we must have Bit a) =QF@f@) (4) where Q is an arbitrary constant. We can so choose it that f(0) = 1. (15) 4A. J. Lotxa. Jour. American Statistical Association 20: 329. 1925. 302 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 Then Q F(t) = BY) and Bit — a) = Bit) f(a). Furthermore Bi -— a — dz) = Bt — a) f(ae) that is Bit — [a: + a@]) = Bit) f(a) f(a) = Bit) f(a + a) Hence f(a: + a2) = f(ai) fae), and similarly fatata+---) =f(na) = [f@ = [f(n)]" by symmetry. Again, fa xa) = [fa] But f(1) is a constant. Let us put fl) =e where s is a constant still to be determined. Then, by (24) LAC oe ie and by (17) Be =-6).= Boe (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) that is, the births per unit of time increase in geometric progression at the rate s. Furthermore, this is also the rate of natural increase per head of the population, for according to (5), (6) and (27) we have BY) — Dt) — BO + BOSe e* p'(a) da Nit) =——s BY) f“e-**_p(a) da (28) JULY 15; 1937 LOTKA: POPULATION ANALYSIS 303 1 — {1 — sfxe~r p(a) da} Sve pla) da = 8. (30) But by hypothesis this quotient is equal to the constant rate of in- crease r of the population. Hence S$ =F. (31) Now, according to (4), (27) and (31) (29) Bit) = BY f ayia) de (32) i [ = n@ m(a) da. (33) Therefore r is a root of (33). But 7, the rate offnatural increase, is constant by hypothesis. Therefore it must be a real root of (33), for complex roots would introduce oscillations. But (83) has only one real root, because p(a), m(a) is nowhere negative. If we denote this real root by p, we have therefore Shp (34) and the coefficient of age distribution is given by Bit — a) = —__— 35 e(a) = a Pla) (35) BG) e-2 NO p(a) (36) = DeaP* DG): (37) But this is the stable age distribution. Thus, the conditions of the problem fully determine the age distribution (37) and none other is possible. The theorem enunciated at the outset is therefore established. 304 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 BOTANY.—New species of Costa Rican plants C. V. Morton, U. S. National Museum. (Communicated by Wi.uiam R. Maxon.) During the last two years the region about El General in the Provy- ince of San José, Costa Rica, has been intensively explored by Dr. Alexander F. Skutch. The flora has proved of great interest and the author plans to publish later a general discussion of its composition and relationships. The following new species represent only a portion of those thus far discovered by Dr. Skutch within this comparatively small area. It may be noted with pleasure that Professor Pax and Dr. K. Hoffmann have dedicated to him an interesting new genus of Euphorbiaceae. Dioscorea borealis Morton, sp. nov. Sect. Centrostemon. Herba dextrorsum volubilis; folia alterna longe petio- lata, petiolo ca. 6 cm longo glabro sulcato; lamina foliorum late ovata, maxima 11.2 cm longa et 9.8 cm lata, apice acriter acuminata, basi leviter cordata, membranacea, utrinque concolor glabra integra, nervis primariis 9-11; inflorescentiae o axillares, geminae vel ternae, usque ad 17 cm longae, non ramosae, rhachibus rectis subglabratis, floribus racemosis solitariis, numerosis, pedicellis 1-1.5 mm longis minute puberulis basi bracteatis, bracteis minutis subulatis puberulis; perianthii segmenta purpurea ovato- oblonga, 1.75 mm longa, patula, glabra; stamina 6, filamentis in tubum 1 mm longum connatis, antheris connatis sursum dehiscentibus; rudimen- tum stylinum nullum; flores 2 ignoti. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,638,052, collected in the vicinity of El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 880 meters, June, 1936, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2638). The only previously known North American species of the section Centro- stemon, D. panamensis Knuth, is quite different from the present, which doubtless finds its closest relationship with D. larecajensis Uline, of Bolivia, Peru, and Ecuador. Of this I have examined a specimen of the type collection (Mandon 1231) and find that the floral structure is essentially like that of D. borealis, but that the leaves are thicker, more prominently veined, and minutely puberulous on the nerves beneath. The leaves of D. borealis are perfectly glabrous. Dioscorea remota Morton, sp. nov. Sect. Cryptantha. Herba volubilis, caulibus dextrorsum scandentibus flavidis glabris striatis subangulatis; folia alterna longe petiolata, petiolo ca. 8.5 cm longo glabro paullo supra basin tumido; lamina foliorum late ovata, ca. 15 cm longa et 10.5 cm lata, integra, apice breviter (1.5.cm) acuminata, basi cordata, utrinque glabra, 7-9 nervia, nervis medianis areolam ovalem formantibus; inflorescentiae © axillares, solitariae vel binae, perlongae, usque ad 90 cm longae, rhachi glabra non flexuosa, 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- ceived March 1, 1937. JuLy 15, 1937 MORTON: COSTA RICAN PLANTS 305 internodiis 1-6 cm distantibus, ramulis geminis simplicibus vel raro semel ramosis 4-11 cm longis, rhachibus interdum paullulum flexuosis basi brac- teatis, bracteis lanceolatis ca. 5 mm longis; flores solitarii remoti sessiles bracteolati, bracteolis latis scariosis cucullatis concavis apiculatis glabris; perianthium purpureum glabrum, tubo cylindrico 2.75 mm longo, ca. 0.9 mm lato, lobis patulis ovatis 1.5 mm longis et 1 mm latis; stamina longe supra basin tubi perianthii inserta, filamentis alternatim inaequalibus, eis segmentis interioribus oppositis longioribus, ca. 1.2 mm longis, ceteris ca. 0.6 mm longis, antheris introrsis oblongis ca. 0.9 mm longis, ex fauce paullo exsertis; rudimentum stylinum nullum; flores 2 ignoti. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,642,272, collected in the vicinity of El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 975 meters, December, 1935, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2197). This, the first North American species of the section Cryptantha, need not be compared minutely with any of its Brazilian relatives, for it is well distinguished from all by its exceedingly long and relatively sparsely branched inflorescences, remote flowers, broad scarious bracteoles, and large flowers with elongate perianth tube, and by its large, ovate, deeply cordate leaves. Costus formosus Morton, sp. nov. Subg. Eucostus. Herba erecta caulescens 3.5 m alta; folia alterna, vagina brevi 4—5 cm longa inflata striata ubique brevissime puberulenta, ligula brevi usque ad 5 mm longa biloba margine longe ciliata; lamina foliorum sessilia oblanceolata vel oblonga, usque ad 23 cm longa et 7 cm lata vel verisimiliter majora, apice breviter acuminata, basi lata obtusa, supra glabra costa excepta, subtus ubique puberula; spica terminalis erecta sessilis cylin- drica 19 cm longa et 4 cm lata, bracteis late ovatis obtusis dense imbricatis rubris (siccitate castaneis apice rubescentibus), ca. 4.7 em longis, glabres- centibus, margine scariosis pilosulis, lineam dorsalem callosam flavam gerentibus; calyx ruber campanulatus glaber perspicue striatus, tubo 5 mm longo, 6 mm lato, lobis deltoideis ca. 5 mm longis margine scariosis pilosis; corollae tubus cylindricus 2—2.5 cm longus, 2.5-3.5 mm latus, flavus, lobis rubris oblanceolatis, ca. 4.38 cm. longis, 10-12 mm latis, glabris acutis; labellum flavum ca. 5.5 cm longum quam corolla brevius, glabrum, apice trilobum, lobis lateralibus ca. 6 mm longis et 5 mm latis apice leviter bilo- bulatis margine integris, lobo medio anguste lineari ca. 7 mm longo et 0.7 mm lato integro obtuso; stamen longissimum (ca. 7 cm longum), labellum et corollae lobos evidenter superans, filamento rubro petaloideo glabro 3-5 mm lato apice rotundato antheras 5 mm superante; ovarium 6-7 mm longum glabrum album; stylus gracilis glaber; stigma ca. 3.5 mm latum. Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,638,056, collected near El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 850 meters, July, 1936, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2775). The most nearly related species is undoubtedly Costus sanguineus Donn. Sm., which agrees in corolla color, shape of bracts, and trilobed labellum, but nevertheless differs in many important characters, as follows: Exterior corolla segment longer and broader than the remaining two, sericeous-pilose on the margins, about equaling the labellum; ovary densely pilose; middle lobe of the labellum shorter than the two lat- 306 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 eral lobes; filament produced above the anthers in a triangular acutish apex, this often inrolled; corolla tube over 5 mm. side; calyx sparsely sericeous; leaves densely long-hirsute on both surfaces; sheath long, tightly appressed, long-hirsite, 22) es > ee ene C. sanguineus Exterior corolla segment equal to the others, glabrous, much exceeding the labellum; ovary glabrous; middle lobe of the labellum linear, exceeding the lateral lobes; filament produced above the anthers in a semi-orbicu- lar plane apex; corolla tube slender, not over 3.5 mm. wide; calyx glabrous, except on the margins; leaves glabrous above, minutely pu- berulous beneath; sheath short, inflated, puberulous....... C. formosus For definite determinations in Costus it is usually necessary to have flow- ers. Several non-flowering specimens from Costa Rica and Panama that have been identified as C. sanguineus are certainly not that species, and may be- long to C. formosus, but I do not cite them because the leaf and sheath char- acters listed above may not hold when further collections are available. Costus Skutchii Morton, sp. nov. Subg. Hucostus. Herba caulescens; folia distincte sed breviter petiolata, petiolo glabro ca. 15 mm longo, vagina glabra longissima striata, ligula ca. 7 mm longa, aequaliter biloba haud truncata vel fissa, infra petiolum pu- berula, marginem versus pilosa; lamina foliorum oblongo-oblanceolata 25 em longa et 7.2 cm lata (inferiores verisimiliter longiores), apice acriter acumi- nata, basi obtusa, supra glabra (nervo mediano excepto), subtus glabra; spica erecta ellipsoidea obtusa terminalis, 9 em longa et 3.5 cm lata, bracteis rubris, siccitate nigrescentibus, dense imbricatis coriaceis, ca. 3.5 cm longis, apice rotundatis scariosis ciliatis non appendiculatis, linea callosa non per- spicua, externe apicem versus glabratis inferne sericeopilosis, intus glabris; calyx tubulosus 7 mm longus, coriaceus sericeus, leviter trilobatus; corollae tubus flavus ca. 2 cm longus, anguste cylindricus, lobis anguste obovatis coccineis, ca. 3 cm longis et 1.2 cm latis, integris glabris, apice rotundatis; labellum corolla longius, ca. 7 cm longum, cucullatum, rubro-purpureum, venis pallidis, non lobatum, apice ca. 4.5 cm latum subtruncatum perspicue lacerato-dentatum, basin versus squamiferum; ovarium cylindricum ca. 4.5mm longum, glabrum. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,638,054, collected near El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 850 meters, July, 1936, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2690). The most nearly related species is probably Costus cylindricus Jacq., which has yellow corollas, with the tube only 1 cm long, and a smaller, yellow, en- tire labellum. Costus spicatus L. differs in its smaller, yellow, differently formed flowers, as well as in other characters. The corolla lobes of C. san- guineus Donn. Sm. are similar in color to those of the present species, but the labellum is entirely different in color, size, and shape. Costus splendens Donn. Sm. differs widely in the shape of the labellum, as well as in other characters. Skutchia Pax & K. Hoffm., gen. nov. Flores dioici, o apetali, Q@ nudi. Sepala o’4, ad medium fere connata, imbricata. Stamina 4, episepala; filamenta libera, sepalis longiore, in ala- Juny 15, 1937 MORTON: COSTA RICAN PLANTS 307 bastro incurva; antherae biloculares, introrsae. Discus O. Ovarii rudimen- tum columnare. Ovarium biloculare, loculo uno abortivo; styli 2, fere liberi, papillosi; ovulum solitarium, pendulum.—Arbor, partibus juvenilibus et in- florescentiis exceptis, glabra. Folia alterna, petiolata, penninervia; stipulae deciduae. Inflorescentiae axillares, satis longae, o& amentiformes, squamis parvis, triangularibus, juxta vel interflores sitis onustae. Flores o’ sessiles, 2 pedicellati. Fructus ignotus. Skutchia caudata Pax & K. Hoffm., sp. nov. Arbor, ca. 18 m alta. Ramuli graciles, Juveniles compressi breviter pu- beruli; rami teretes, glabri, striati, cortice rubro-brunneo tecti. Petiolus ca. 1 em longus; limbus 10-12 em longus, 3—3.8 cm latus, lanceolatus, leviter faleatus, caudato-acuminatus, basi acutus, integer, chartaceus, eglandulosus, reticulato-venosus; costae secundariae ca. 8, arcuato-adscendentes, prope marginem anastomosantes; stipulae ca. 1 mm longae, triangulares, breviter acuminatae. Inflorescentiae o ca. 8 cm longae, satis densiflorae, @ ca. 10 cm longae, pendulae, utriusque sexus breviter puberulae et glandulis parvis adspersae. Flores &@ ca. 2 mm lati. Calycis o lobi ovati, acuti, basi subsaccati, extus parce pilosi, apice fimbriati. Filamenta ca. 3 mm longa, calyce duplo longiora. Ovarii rudimentum calyce brevius, pilosum. Pedicelli 2 1-3 mm longi. Ovarium verrucosum; styli ad 3 mm longi. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,641,605, a pistillate plant collected near El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 950 meters, January, 1936, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2383). The staminate specimen collected at the same time and place is no. 2386. “Mr. C. V. Morton, who is working on the Skutch collection, has already recognized that these specimens represent a new genus, which he believes related to Tetrorchidium. Skutchia belongs, to be sure, to the Gelonieae, but is nevertheless tolerably isolated in the group and is not more nearly related to Tetrorchidium than to other genera of this tribe. It is distinguished from all other Gelonieae by the naked pistillate flowers and by the ovary being one-celled through abortion of the second cell. Furthermore the inflexed stamens are remarkable.” Heliocarpus excelsior Morton, sp. nov. Arbor altissima, 36 m alta, ramuli teretes stellato-puberulenti lenticellis conspicuis praediti; folia alterna stipulata (stipulis deciduis), petiolata, petiolo tereti usque ad 12 cm longo stellato-puberulento; lamina foliorum usque ad 19 cm longa et 18 cm lata, apicem versus sinuato-triloba lobo terminali et lobis lateralibus acuminatis, basi leviter cordata, appendiculata, appendiculis ca. 4, glanduliferis, membranacea serrulata utrinque concolor minute stellato-puberulenta, nervis 7 primariis digitatis; inflorescentia magna terminalis, 15 cm alta et 23 cm lata, rhachibus stellato puberulentis, pedicellis gracilibus usque ad 8 mm longis; alabastra obovata ca. 4.5 mm longa; sepala oblonga 6 mm longa, ca. 1.6 mm lata, acuta exappendiculata externe puberulenta; petala sepalis breviora spathulata ca. 4 mm longa glabra plerumque leviter crispa; stamina 16-19; stylus 2 mm longus, breviter bifidus, ovario longior; capsula cum radiis 6-8 mm lata, stipitata (5 mm), corpore capsulae anguste elliptico, 4 mm longo, 1.6 mm lato, dense piloso, radiis ca. 4 mm longis, longe pilosis. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,642,302, a fruiting specimen 308 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 collected in the vicinity of El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 1100 meters, December, 1935, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2250). The flowers are described from Skutch 2266, collected near the same locality at an altitude of 825 meters. The only related species are Heliocarpus appendiculatus Turez. and A. chontalensts Sprague, both of which may be at once distinguished by their conspicuously discolorous leaves with a conspicuous, dense, whitish or yel- lowish tomentum beneath. The leaves of H. excelsior are concolorous and the hairs are minute, sparse, and scarcely visible except under a lens. The leaves of H. excelsior differ in shape also, being almost square in outline, with cordate base, trilobate apex, and lightly serrulate margins; on the con- trary those of H. appendiculatus and H. chontalensis are ovate, usually un- lobed and in H. appendiculatus coarsely serrate. Other differences are also apparent, such as the narrower capsule body, the fewer stamens, and the differently shaped leaf appendages. Helzocarpus excelsior is the largest known tree of the genus. Begonia lignescens Morton, sp. nov. Sect. Ruzzopavonia? Caules elongati scandentes lignosi glabri, nodis in- crassatis radicantes; folia alterna stipulata, stipulis caducis, cicatricibus per- spicuis, petiolata, petiolo brevi ca. 3 mm longo fuscescente glabro; lamina foliorum anguste oblonga, 7-9 cm longa et 2-—2.6 cm lata, obliqua, apice breviter acuminata, basi cuneata obliqua, membranacea apicem versus paullo denticulata utrinque glabra non squamosa, pennivenia, venis primariis 4—5- jugis subtus fuscescentibus; inflorescentiae monoicae terminales usque ad 16 cm longae et 20 cm latae, pedunculatae (pedunculo 3.5-4 em longo), cymosae, multoties dichotomae, rhachibus glabris leviter angulatis, bracteis caducis longe lanceolatis acutis glabris; sepala floris & duo alba lancolata, 15 mm longa et 5 mm lata, acuta glabra; petala 2 minuta ca. 2.5 mm longa; stamina numerosa, filamentis liberis quam antheris multo brevioribus; sepala floris 9 alba duo elongato-lanceolata, fere 2 cm longa et 5 mm lata, glabra acuta; petala nulla; ovarium glabrum triloculatum trialatum, ala una (immatura) 1 cm longa cultriformi, alis ceteris reductis minimis, placentis bilamellatis ubique ovuliferis; styli tres basi connati sursum abrupte expansi bifidi, ramis spiraliter contortis ubique papillosis. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,638,058—9, collected in the vicinity of El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 1160 meters, August, 1936, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2853). Although similar in leaves and habit to Begonia estrellensis C. DC., the large acute narrowly lanceolate sepals of B. lignescens are distinctive and like no other species of the genus that I know. The sepals of B. estrellensis are small, rounded, and orbicular. These two species seem to be most natu- rally placed in the section Ruizopavonia, as characterized by Irmscher, from which they differ, however, in having male flowers with petals. Cavendishia Skutchii A. C. Smith, sp. nov. Frutex epiphyticus; ramulis subteretibus glabris rugosis; petiolis glabris rugosis 5-10 mm longis; laminis tenuiter coriaceis, in sicco metallico-sub- JULY 15, 1937 MORTON: COSTA RICAN PLANTS 308 caeruleis, oblongis, 10-15 cm longis, 3.5-5 cm latis, basi subcordatis vel subtruncatis, apice obtusis vel breviter et obtuse acuminatis, margine leviter incrassatis, supra glabris nitidis, subtus parce brunneo-pilosis vel punctatis, 5-pli-nerviis, nervis prope basin orientibus, supra impressis (vel inferioribus elevatis), subtus prominentibus, venulis utrinque prominulis; inflorescentiis axillaribus aliquot ad apices ramulorum, racemosis, 15—20-floris, subglabris, basi bracteis deciduis instructis; rhachide 5—7 cm longa; floribus in axillis bractearum alternarum solitariis, bracteis membranaceis integris oblongis vel late ovatis, 18-23 mm longis, 12-15 mm latis; pedicellis subteretibus 6-12 mm longis, basi et apice incrassatis, prope basin bibracteolatis, brac- teolis membranaceis oblongis, 3-4 mm longis, margine sparse fimbriatis; calyce coriaceo, 4-5 mm longo et diametro, limbo suberecto tubum sub- aequante, lobis 5 deltoideis 1-1.5mm longis acutis, margine breviter glandu- loso-fimbriatis; corolla membranacea vel tenuiter carnosa, cylindrica, basi et apice alba, medio rosea, maturitate 13-15 mm longa, 3-4 mm diametro, apice contracta, lobis 5 parvis subacutis; staminibus subaequalibus, fila- mentis ligulatis tenuiter carnosis, superne intus breviter pilosis, alternatim 2 mm et 5 mm longis, connectivis nigrescentibus carnosis, antheris mem- branaceis flavis, alternatim 12 mm et 10 mm longis, tubulis amplis quam -loculis 3-plo longioribus, per rimas elongatas dehiscentibus; stylo corollam subaequante, stigmate capitato. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,642,549, collected in forest in the vicinity of El General, Province of San José, Costa Rica, at 1100 meters altitude, in August, 1936, by A. F. Skutch (no. 2802). The closest ally of the new species appears to be C. crassifolia (Benth.) Hemsl., of southern Mexico and Guatemala. The present species differs from that by its slightly larger and metallic-colored leaves, which are usually sub- cordate rather than cuneate at base. In floral characters the two species are very similar; C’. Skutchiz has larger bractlets of the pedicels and has the calyx glabrous rather than brown-pilose distally. Ardisia Skutchii Morton, sp. nov. Subg. Graphardisia. Frutex 7.5 m altus; ramuli subteretes ca. 3.5 mm diam. glabri leviter striati; folia alterna estipulata, subsessilia, lamina ob- lanceolata usque ad 26 cm longa et 7 cm lata, apice acuminata, basi longe attenuata, papyracea integra utrinque pallidi concolori glabra eglanduliferi, venis primariis ca. 12-jugis arcuatis; inflorescentia alba terminalis ca. 10 cm longa et 12 cm lata, brevissime pedunculata bracteis magnis obovatis ca. 25 mm longis suffulta, rhachibus plus minus flexuosis robustis glabris eglanduliferis, inflorescentiis ultimis corymbosis paucifloris bracteis oblongis vel obovatis magnis suffultis, pedicellis 12-15 mm longis gracilibus glabris apice incrassatis; sepala alba imbricata late ovata, ca. 5.5 mm longa et 4 mm lata, rotundata glabra punctis lineatis satis paucis perspicuis picta; corolla alba roseo-tincta, ca. 15 mm lata, rotata, tubo ca. 2 mm longo, lobis late ovatis ca. 7 mm longis, 5 mm latis, obtusis glabris punctis dissite pictis; filamenta ca. 2 mm longa, crassa eglandulifera, basin versus latioribus et in tubum brevem connata; antherae lanceolatae 3 mm longae, non exsertae, poris apicalibus dehiscentes; ovarium glabrum conicum; stylus gracilis 4.5 mm longus glaber. Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,638,053, collected in the vicinity of El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 1070 meters, June, 1936, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2660). 310 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 The only related species is Ardisza opegrapha Oerst., which differs as fol- lows: Sepals oblong, 6 mm long, 2-3 mm wide; filaments and filament tube glandu- liferOUS «220 e ede. 4). shee ee eee eee A. opegrapha Sepals broadly ovate, 5.5 mm long, 4 mm wide; filaments and filament tube eglanduliferous ... -..0'.. 40lee oe ee A. Skutchi Other differences also exist. The leaves of A. opegrapha are obviously petiolate, but those of A. Skutchz are almost sessile. The entire inflorescence of A. opegrapha is said by Mez to be deep rose and is so figured by Hooker (Bot. Mag. pl. 6357); that of A. Skutchi1 is, according to the collector, en- tirely white except for a faint pink tinge on the corolla. Leiphamos lutea Morton, sp. nov. Herba parasitica alba vel flavescens; caules 10—20 cm alti, ca. 1 mm lati, glabri teretes uniflori, bracteis 7—16-jugis lanceolatis ca. 6.5 mm longis, inter- dum apice unidenticulatis, basi fere ad medium connatis; pedunculus sub- nullus, vix 2 mm longus; calycis tubus ebracteatus 5 mm longus corollae arcte appressus, lobis 5 lanceolatis 2.75 mm longis, 1 mm basi latis, integris, acutis; corolla hypocrateriformis, tubo flavo 3.2—3.6 em longo, basi et apice inflato, medio cylindrico, ca. 2 mm lato, glabro, fauce intus papilloso, lobis luteis late ovatis 6-9 mm longis, obliquis glabris cuspidatis patentibus; antherae sessiles exappendiculatae liberae faucem versus insertae; ovarium substipitatum ca. 13 mm longum glabrum eglanduliferum; stylus inclusus glaber ca. 15 mm longus; stigma compressum. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,638,055, collected near El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 1130 meters, July, 1936, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2767). Letphamos aphylla (Jaeq.) Gilg of the West Indies and South America is closely related but may be distinguished by its narrower, obtuse or merely acute corolla lobes; those of the present species are abruptly cuspidate- acuminate. Lerphamos costaricensis Standl. differs in its corolla lobes, as well as in its stamens. Another recent segregate from L. aphylla is L. eximia Sandw. of British Guiana, which also differs from L. lutea in its anthers and corolla lobes. Columnea florida Morton, sp. nov. Subg. Collandra. Frutex epiphyticus; caules crassi ca. 1 em diam., pallidi vel rubescentes purpureo-maculati perspicue sulcati, hornotini hirsuti, pilis flaccidis multiseptatis, annotini glabrescentes; folia opposita valde in- aequalia, majora breviter petiolata, petiolo 1 cm longo crasso densissime hirsuto; lamina foliorum majorum oblanceolata, maxima 35.5 em longa et 10.5 cm lata, siccitate chartacea vel subcoriacea, apice breviter et acriter acuminata (ca. 2 cm), basi obtusa obliqua, margine integra, supra glabra vel basin versus pilis perpaucis instructa, apicem versus maculas 2 rubras gerens, subtus pallidior, apicem versus perspicue rubro-maculata, ubique appresso-pilosa, costa basi hirsuta, venis primariis ca. 12-jugis arcuatis; lamina foliorum minorum subsessilia anguste elliptica, ca. 3 em longa, longe acuminata, supra glabra, subtus dense pilosa, venis paucis obscuris; flores axillares, in ramulis annotinis defoliatis et in hornotinis fasciculati, pauci vel duny 15, 19357 MORTON: COSTA RICAN PLANTS dll plures, pedicellis crassis usque ad 1 cm longis, dense hirsutis, medio brac- teatis, bracteis parvis lanceolatis dense hirsutis; calycis lobi 5 liberi, ambitu ovati, 2.3 em longi, ca. 1 cm lati, utrinque densissime hirsuti, pectinato- incisi, dentibus numerosis anguste linearibus viridibus viridi-hirsutis corolla crassa flava (fide Skutch), ca. 25 mm longa, 9 mm lata, tubo cylindrico vix ventricoso externe densissime brunneo-hirsuto, intus sparse puberulo, fauce paullo contracto, limbo vix 5 mm lato, lobis parvis erectis suborbiculatis ca. 2.5 mm longis et 3mm latis crassis glabratis; filamenta basi in tubum liberum postice fissum 5 mm altum connata, partibus liberis pilosulis contortis; antherae per paria leviter connatae, connectivo oblongo crasso, loculis contiguis oblongis discretis 3 mm longis glabris; discus ad glandulam dorsalem magnam crassam 1.5 mm altam 3.5 mm latam leviter trilobatam glabram reductus; ovarium conicum dense pilosum; stylus 12 mm longus pilosulus; stigma leviter bilobum; bacca globosa, ca. 12 mm diam., pericarpio coriaceo; placentae lamellae intus solum ovuliferae; semina rubra fusiformia, ca. 1.2 mm longa, 0.5 mm lata striata, striis leviter et spiraliter contortis. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,642,394, collected in the vicinity of El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 915 meters, January, 1936, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2436). Additional specimens referable to this species are: Costa Rica: Type locality, January, 1891, P2tizer 4020. Cafias Gordas, alt. 1100 meters, February, 1897, Pzttzer 11198. PaNnaMa: Cerro de Garagara, Sambti Basin, southern Darien, alt. 500-974 meters, Feb. 7, 1912, Pzttzer 5664. All these older specimens have been previously identified as Columnea sanguinea Hanst., but this West Indian species differs widely in its thinner, toothed leaves, these pilose above, in its differently shaped, fewer-toothed calyx lobes, and in several other important points. The related Costa Rican species, C. consanguinea Hanst. and C. purpurata Hanst., differ also in both leaves and flowers. The above description of the fruit and seeds is drawn from Pittier 5664. Drymonia fimbriata Morton, sp. nov. Frute 1.5 m altus; caules argute quadrangulati, hornotini minute strigil- losi, annotini glabrescentes pustulati; folia opposita aequalia petiolata, petiolo usque ad 4.7 cm longo, strigilloso pustulato vel transverse corrugato, lamina foliorum late ovata 22 cm longa et 11 cm lata, obliqua, apice breviter acuminata, basi obliqua in petiolum longe decurrens, supra viridis fere glabra pilis paucis antrorsis appressis subsetulosis adspersa, subtus pallida in meso- phyllo parcissime strigillosa, costa et venis pustulatis strigillosis, margine denticulata, venis primariis 6 vel 7-jugis; flores in axillis defoliatis aggregati numerosi, pedunculo communi nullo, pedicellis ca. 13 mm longis strigillosis apicem versus sulcatis basi bracteatis, bracteis lanceolatis integris puberulis ca. 5 mm longis, calycis lobi oblongi subaequales liberi, ca. 15 mm longi, 6 mm lati, accrescentes tum 20 mm longi et 9 mm lati, utrinque puberuli, longe pectinato-fimbriati, dentibus filiformibus puberulis inaequalibus usque ad 10 mm longis basi saepe furcatis; corolla alba basi longe calcearata (4.5 mm), tubo externe ubique pilosulo obliquo ca. 28 mm longo, basi 2.5 mm lato, sursum inflato fauce non contracto 10-12 mm lato, limbo rubro-venoso glabro obliquo bilabiato, lobo inferiore flabelliformi 11mm longo apice 22 mm lato lacerato-dentato, lobis lateralibus integris late deltoideis 9 mm longis et 312 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 11 mm latis, lobis superioribus minoribus subrotundis 8 mm longis apice eroso-laceratis; filamenta in tubum 14 mm longum liberum postice fissum connata, partibus liberis glabris non contortis; antherae oblongae connatae; discus in glandulam posticam glabram 1.5mm longam 3 mm latam reductus; ovarium conicum puberulum; stylus brevis crassus glaber ca. 12 mm longus; stigma latum bilobum; placentarum lamellae intus solum ovuliferae. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,638,057, collected near El General, Prov. San José, Costa Rica, altitude 880 meters, August, 1936, by Alexander F. Skutch (no. 2839). The filiform-pectinate calyx lobes of this species are unique in the genus Drymonia. ZOOLOGY.—A necessary change in an amphibian name. Doris M. Cocuran, U. S. National Museum. (Communicated by Routanp W. Brown.) In 1935? I described some new species of frogs collected by P. J. Darlington in the La Selle Range of southwestern Haiti. It now ap- pears that the frog which I named Leptodactylus darlingtont (p. 372) is in reality an Eleutherodactylus with very narrow T-shaped terminal phalanges even though in the form of its digits it is a distinct approach to Leptodactylus. Dr. E. R. Dunn has pointed out this structural feature, and Dr. G. K. Noble has confirmed it. As I had already named a different frog from the same locality Eleutherodactylus dar- lingtont on pl. 368 of the same publication, it becomes necessary to change the name of Leptodactylus darlingtoni Cochran. I therefore propose the name Eleutherodactylus jugans to take the place of Lepto- dactylus darlingtona Cochran. ENTOMOLOGY.—WNotes on Curculionidae (Coleoptera).1 L. L. BucHANAN, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine. (Communicated by C. F. W. MuESEBECK.) Most of the following notes are here put on record as a basis for the use of certain names in forthcoming papers. Trachyphloeus bifoveolatus Beck Trachyphloeus bifoveolatus Beck 1817, Beitrage zur baierischen Insecten Fauna, p. 22. The U. 8. National Museum collection contains specimens of this Euro- pean species from New York (Barneveld, 1917, and Oriskany, 1931); Nova Scotia (Riverport, 1936); New Brunswick (Chipman, 1936). The New York specimens previously were identified as TJ. davisi Blatchley, a species de- 1 Received April 29, 1937. * Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. Proc. 40 (6): 367-376. 1935. 1 Received March 17, 1937. JULY 15, 1937 BUCHANAN: CURCULIONIDAE 313 scribed from Staten Island, N. Y., in 1916 (Rhynchophora of Northeastern America, p. 115). Blatchley’s species evidently is closely related to bzfoveola- tus, but differs, by description, in having only 2 spines at the apex of the front tibia (8 or 4 distinct spines, and often 2 or more shorter ones, in b7- foveolatus), and presumably in lacking the pronotal foveae which are usually well developed, though sometimes encrusted, in bzfoveolatus. T. asperatus Boh. 1843 (Genera et Species Curculionidum, VII, 1, p. 116) described from ‘America borealis ad Boston,’”’ remains unrecognized. GYMNAETRON Schoenherr Three species of this genus, all of European origin, are now known from North America. In the males of all three the tibiae are mucronate, the mucro of each tibia projecting at a right, or slightly obtuse, angle. In the females the front and middle tibiae are mucronate about as in the males; but the hind tibia is unarmed in teter, or armed in netum with a black spine which differs from the male mucro in being more slender and in being porrect or subporrect. In antirrhini the female hind tibia is virtually unarmed, al- though a minute spine is present in some specimens. The derm is black in all three species but in teter and netum the vestiture is paler, somewhat coarser, and more generally prostrate, and covers a greater proportion of the surface, resulting in a lighter ground color; whereas in the blackish ap- pearing antirrhini the vestiture, besides being darker, is somewhat finer, and (at least on pronotum) more generally erect, thus leaving exposed a greater proportion of the dermal surface. In the following summaries the two varie- ties of teter—subrotundatum Reitter and plagiellum Gyll—are not distin- guished, the former apparently being no more than a depauperate form, the latter including specimens having the elytra more or less extensively dull reddish apically. The rostral length is the shortest distance between the apex of the rostrum and the front margin of the eye at its middle. SUMMARIES OF DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERS 1. Average length about 2.5 mm (extremes, 2.2-3 mm); ground color black- ish; rostrum two-thirds to three-fourths as long as pronotum, rather strongly tapering in dorsal view from antennal socket to apex; rostrum in side view thick at base, tapering throughout, apical half (especially in male) more strongly tapering; prothorax about three-fourths as long as wide; scutellum about as long as wide; elytral striae half to two- thirds as wide as the intervals, the intervals flat and irregularly, bi- seriately punctate; femora similar in the sexes, of normal size, each with a minute tooth. Massachusetts, Connecticut, New York, New Jersey. Reared from seed pods of Linaria vulgaris by P. H. Timberlake and bye), £1... Blakerre es 6 hes. SRB re Shi bree antirrhint Paykull Length usually 2.7 mm or more; ground color brownish to gray; rostrum longer, often virtually as long as pronotum; prothorax about two-thirds © as long as wide; elytral striae narrower, the intervals relatively much wider and normally with 3 very irregular rows of punctures (2 rows in soime of the very Sarl spetimens). 2.2.2 2540.) wade sae els os 2 314 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 2. Average length between 2.7 and 3.2 mm (extremes 2-3.5 mm); rostrum five-sixths to nearly as long as pronotum (longer in females) ; scutellum about as long as wide; femora not dilated, of subequal size in the sexes, each femur with a small to moderate sized tooth. o: No fringe on lower edge of hind tibia; rostrum, in dorsal view, very feebly tapering from antennal socket to apex. 92: Rostrum slightly but obviously arcuate, apical half cylindrical, polished, and sparsely punctulate (often appearing smooth). Connecticut, New York, New Jersey, Pennsyl- vania, Virginia, lowa. Reared from Linarza vulgaris by J. C. Bridwell and by A. B, Champlain. se: sy<-2 fey ee ee netum Germar Average length between 3.2 and 4 mm (extremes, 2.5—4.25 mm); rostrum averaging a little longer, often virtually as long as pronotum in female and only a trifle shorter in male; scutellum distinctly, usually much, wider than long. co: Femora dilated and strongly toothed (especially front pair); lower edge of hind tibia fringed with long, suberect hair in apical half; rostrum, in dorsal view, more distinctly tapering apically. 2 : Rostrum straight or nearly so, distinctly tapering from base to apex in side view, apical half rather strongly, not densely, punctate. Gen- erally distributed east of the Mississippi River from southern Canada to Georgia; west of the Mississippi, specimens are at hand from Min- nesota, Iowa, Missouri, Kansas, Oklahoma, Texas, Colorado, Washing- ten, Oregon: On mullein: 2.2 2 ee eee teter Fabricius Ceutorhynchus punctiger Gyllenhal Ceutorhynchus punctiger Gyllenhal (C. marginatus of American authors, not Paykull). This European species seems to be established in North America. Speci- mens in the Museum collection are from Ontario, Quebec, Massachusetts, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Michigan, Indiana. Perigaster lituratus (Dietz), n. comb. Coelogaster lituratus Dietz 1896, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 23: 457. Perigaster longirostris Buchanan 1931, Jour. Wash. Acad. Sci. 21: 323 (new synonymy). Dietz did not describe the minutely toothed tarsal claws and the obso- lescent antennal scrobe of lituratus, important characters in which it differs from zemmermanni Gyll., the genotype of (Coelogaster) = Dietzella. In zim- mermanni the claws are strongly toothed and the scrobe is deep and com- plete. Although lzturatus has an ocular lobe, a structure not found in the other species of Perigaster, its characters in general place it with Perzgaster and not with Dvetzella. P. lituratus is known from Ontario, New York, New Jersey, Michigan, Illinois, lowa, Washington. PuytTosius Schoenherr, and allied genera Different interpretations of Phytobius and allied genera have resulted in considerable confusion, and, at least in North America, misidentifications and omissions have further clouded published records. The data here as- sembled, though incomplete, tend to harmonize contradictions in the nomen- clature. Juuy 15, 1937 BUCHANAN: CURCULIONIDAE 315 Schoenherr erected Phytobius (evidently a Schmidt manuscript name) in 1836, citing in its synonymy Hydaticus Schoenherr 1826 (preoccupied by Hydaticus Leach 1817 in Dytiscidae). In his 1826 description of Hydaticus Schoenherr designated velatus Beck as type, but in his 1836 description of Phytobius he failed to set a type although it is obvious from the context that he intended Phytobius primarily as a substitute genus for Hydaticus, and that he intended velatus, the type of Hydaticus, to “‘carry over’’ and be- come the type of Phytobius. However, because Hydaticus 1826 and Phytobius 1836 are not co-extensive, and because Schoenherr did not set a type for Phytobius in unequivocal terms, it seems necessary to accept C. G. Thom- son’s 1859 type designations in Phytobius, Pelenomus, Eubrychius, and Lito- dactylus. On this basis, the American genera and species take the following arrangement: PuytTosius Schoenherr Phytobius Schoenherr 1836, Gen. et Sp. Curc., III, 1, 458; genotype, 4-tuberculatus F. , designated by Thomson 1859, ned iens Coleop- tera, I, p. 138. ei Thoms., ibid.; genotype, comarz Hbst., ae by Thomson, ibid. Phytobius thus becomes the valid generic name for the American species cavifrons Lec. to pusillus Dtz., inclusive, now listed in the Leng catalogue under Pelenomus. Evuprycuius Thomson Eubrychius Thomson 1859, ibid., p. 138; genotype (aquaticus Thoms.) = velatus Beck, designated by Thomson, ibid. Includes only the genotype species, which is apparently confined to Eu- rope, though wrongly recorded from North America. The American species concerned is Hubrychiopsis lecontei Dtz. (See below.) Liropacty.Lus Redtenbacker Intodactylus Redtenbacker 1849, Fauna Austriaca, I, p. 399; genotype (myriophylli Gyll.) =leucogaster Marsham, designated by Thomson 1859, Skand. Coleop., I, p. 138. Includes 1 American species, griseomicans Schwarz (griseomicans Dtz.) which is closely related to the European L. leucogaster Marsh. Specimens of griseomicans are at hand from Dane County, Wisconsin; Okoboji, lowa; Wahpeton, North Dakota; Kansas; Richfield, Utah; Kahlotus, Washington; Medicine Hat, Alberta. Schwarz lists two localities (Kansas and Dakota) in the original description. The type specimen, now in the National Museum, is labeled ‘‘Ks”’ (Kansas). EvuBRYCHIOPSIS Dietz Eubrychiopsis Dietz 1896, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., v. 23, p. 474; monobasic genotype, E. lecontei Dtz. (Phytobius velatus of American authors, not _ Eubrychius velatus Beck). 316 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 7 As far as known, Hubrychiopsis includes only the 2 American species, leconte: Dtz. and albertanus Brown. Specimens of lecontez in the National Museum are from Detroit, Michigan (type locality); Dane County and Madison, Wisconsin; Lake Okoboji, Iowa. The Massachusetts and Van- couver localities mentioned by Blatchley and Leng 1916, p. 464, may not refer to this species. Dietz’s original description of lecontez calls for 2 small cusps on the anterior margin of the prothorax; but Dr. Darlington has ex- amined Dietz’s type and found no such cusps present, nor are they present on any of the specimens in the Museum collection. Specimens of albertanus in the Museum are from Creston, British Columbia, and Last Mt. Lake, Saskatchewan. The type locality is Waterton Lakes, Alberta. For key to the 3 American species discussed above, see Brown, Can. Ent., vol. 64, 1932, pp. 10-12. CONOTRACHELUS Schoenherr Conotrachelus Schoenherr 1837, Gen. et Sp. Curc., IV, 1, p. 392. Loceptes Casey 1910, Can. Ent. 42: 130 (new synonymy). Conotrachelus recessus (Casey), n. comb. Loceptes recessus Casey 1910, Can. Ent. 42: 130. Conotrachelus atokanus Fall 1913, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 39: 65 (new synonymy). Casey placed Loceptes in the Tychiini, although the monobasic genotype, recessus Csy., clearly belongs in Conotrachelus. Mr. Fall has compared speci- mens of recessus Csy. with the type of atokanus Fall and has verified the species’ synonymy recorded above. Examples of C. recessus in the Museum are from Atoka, Oklahoma (type locality) ; Douglas County, Kansas; Aberfoyle, Bonham, Clarksville, Greenville, and Dallas, Texas. Mr. Fall has specimens from Oklahoma and Arkansas (Hope). CONTENTS a b eee eu ¥ - ~*~ en re ett Marnmmartes. (ae analysis: a theorem pa ita age distribution. A trrep J. LOTKA.. ................ 7 3 Botany.—New species of Costa Rican plants. G: Vv. Mormon ous ZooLoGy.—A necessary change in an amphibian name. Doris Me. CocHRAN..... neces sees t ec geaite ca sue chewed tate = sne Entomo.Locy.—Notes on Curculionidae (Coleoptera)... fe Ae 1 Bromine ie + AS ‘ ae -— d a te a ‘ This Journal is indexed in the International Index to Periodicale ve i, : BOARD | OF EDITORS .: _EBeN H. Toorz Frederick D. Rosstnt so nuREAT OF PLANT INDUSTRY z BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSO I STATE EDITORS va +i Wee bee C.F. W. Mussennox. : a eR ae tae _ ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY rae A W. Rusey : _ «GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY — j Henry B. Couns, Jr. _ ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY R ~ +: rman ( c. Kecox 7. , 1933. This J OURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Acaieeay of aiiencus publis hess. 5) eee (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the socio, Pe. proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNAL is issued monthly, on the fifteenth of each month. Volumes correspond to calendar years. =. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is ora eesti ae > quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JourNaLand conform their SAC manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn-— Aes ee onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. >, ia oi Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should ~ Se oat 4, be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not ae es assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undecteke to ‘43 iS ae correct other than obvious minor errors. — mek sae ; Illustrations in excess of one full-page halftone or two eae line drawings may be paid for by the author. Line drawings are preferred. Proof—lIn order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will genannten eis the Treasurer within thirty days after date of following issue. Igoe pan OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: CHARLES THOM, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: NATHAN R. Smit, Bureau of Plant Industry. Recording Secretary: Oscar S. ApAms, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Treasurer: Hmnry G. Avprs, Coast and Geodetic Survey. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 27 Aveust 15, 1937 No. 8 PHYSICS.—The fundamentals of photosynthesis... JAMES FRANCK, The Johns Hopkins University. For the topic of the lecture in honor of the memory of Joseph Henry which I have the great privilege to deliver today, I have chosen a discussion of photosynthesis in plants for two main reasons. The first is the importance of this photochemical reaction and the second that it belongs simultaneously to the fields of biology, chemistry, and physics, and may therefore be suitable for a discussion before this audience in which students of so many different branches of science are present. But being a physicist I cannot avoid laying the main emphasis on the physical side of the problem, and for this purpose I shall make use of an attempted theory which Dr. Herzfeld and I have worked out within the last year. To remind you of the importance of photosynthesis, I only mention the well-known fact that photosynthesis in plants—the inverse process of animal metabolism—is the only source of all food which makes animal life possible on earth, furthermore it is responsible for the relatively great amount of molecular oxygen in our atmosphere. As we learn from the geochemists, the atmosphere contained, after the formation of the solid crust, hardly enough oxygen to make breathing possible, but a very great excess of CO, and water rendered conditions favorable for the development of plants. By reduction of CO, and water, to sugar and molecular oxygen, under the influence of light, plants have produced the conditions now prevailing in the atmosphere. We shall restrict ourselves in our discussion to processes by which CO, and water are reduced by light to the state of reduction of sugar, or expressed in the language of a chemical formula, to the reaction HO C= ps - ©=0-10; (1) HO H 1 The seventh Joseph Henry Lecture of the Philosophical Society of Washington, presented on March 13, 1937 in honor of Joseph Henry, first president of the Philo- sophical Society. Received March 25, 1937. 317 ALG 2.0 1997 318 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 8 where zhy is the symbolism for the number of light quanta used to take out one oxygen molecule from one molecule of carbonic acid, H and ye =O is formaldehyde, which has the state of reduction H of sugar and is able to form sugar by combination of several of its molecules, the so-called process of condensation. (Whether formalde- hyde actually occurs in the plant as an intermediate product is of less interest for the subject of our discussion. ) ; Since carbonic acid does not absorb the light available as sunlight filtered by the earth’s atmosphere, the reaction has to be sensitized by a dye, which as its colour shows, absorbs visible light. This is the function of the chlorophyll in the plant, a green dyestuff with a mo- lecular weight of about 1000 whose chemical constitution is entirely known, thanks especially to the work of Willstatter and his co- workers. Since, according to Willstatter, the chemical constitution of chlorophyll enables it readily to form loosely bound complexes with HO acids, the complex Chph-carbonic acid, Chph Se =O, is the com- HO pound which by absorption of light starts the photochemical re- actions.” Chph acts, according to our present information, only as a sensitizer, and is not changed in the course of photosynthesis. The physical properties which make it specifically fit for photosynthesis are connected with the ability of Chph, under the conditions pre- vailing in the plant, to fluoresce. If molecules absorb light, they may reemit it as fluorescence, or convert the energy absorbed into heat, or use it for chemical reactions. Since reemission of light takes time, the occurrence of fluorescence shows that the conversion into heat or the use for a photochemical reaction does not take place im- mediately after the absorption act, but that the energy remains for a time in the molecule as excitation energy of the electronic system. One can show, for instance, that the lifetime is between 10-° to 10-*° seconds if the plant is irradiated with red light in the presence of an excess of CQO.. Since under these conditions a dissipation of the energy into the degrees of freedom of thermal motion does not take place, the lifetime of the excited state must represent the time elapsed be- tween the process of light absorption and the conversion of the energy absorbed in chemical energy. The lifetime of the excited state is 1000 times greater than the duration of molecular oscillations, therefore ? Chph is used as an abbreviation for chlorophyll. Aue. 15, 1937 FRANCK: PHOTOSYNTHESIS | 319 the atoms forming the complex Chph-carbonic acid have time to make all possible movements with respect to one another until the right relative position for the photochemical transition is reached. The ability to fluoresce reduces therefore possible influences of steric factors which otherwise would hinder the reaction. It also makes pos- sible the use of a relatively large amount of thermal energy stored up in the many degrees of freedom of the polyatomic complex. In these complexes, the energy migrates from one bond to another, and it oc- curs sometimes that by so-called fluctuations an energy amount is transferred to a single bond which is many times greater than the average caloric energy for one degree of freedom. The lifetime of the excited state allows one to wait until some such unusual condition is reached; then the energy amount absorbed together with the thermal energy piled up in one bond is transferred into the potential energy of the chemical products. A calculation shows that with normal tem- peratures 6 to 7 kcal. per mole out of the caloric heat can be gained by fluctuation during the lifetime of the excited state and can be added to the energy of each light quantum within the lifetime mentioned above. While these properties of the chlorophyll would also occur in every other fluorescent dyestuff built up out of many atoms, the nature of its absorption spectrum and its relations to its fluorescence spectrum are specific, and have also specific applications for photosynthesis. It has three main absorption regions, red, blue, and near ultraviolet, separated from one another by regions of weak absorption. If thick layers of chlorophyll are irradiated,—for instance the whole amount of leaves in a thick forest—practically all visible light can be used for photosynthesis. The red absorption band has a special interest. It shows a very steep rise on the long wave-length side at \ 6700 A. Wave lengths longer than 6700 A are absorbed only by those mole- cules which have some oscillation energy by thermal excitation. d 6700 A seems to produce the transition from the non-oscillating level of the normal electronic state to the non-oscillating level of the first excited state. The blue and the ultraviolet absorption regions correspond to transitions to higher excited electronic levels. Under all conditions the fluorescence lies in the wave-length region cor- responding to the red absorption, whether it is excited by red, blue, or ultraviolet light. The interpretation of this fact is that the energy surplus of the second and third excited levels over the first excited level is transformed into oscillation energy by an internal transition— a process. which, according to a recent paper. of Teller, is possible in 320 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 complicated molecules. Since the molecule in the liquid is always in a state of impact with its neighbors, the oscillation energy is im- mediately distributed as heat motion among the adjacent particles and is lost for photochemical reaction. The result is that the energy amount available for the photochemical process in the plant is always the same whether red, blue, or ultraviolet light is absorbed, and it corresponds to the energy quanta of » 6700 A, or 43 keal., plus the amount of 6 to 8 kcal. from thermal agitation. If we compare this energy with the known amount necessary for the reduction of carbonic acid to formaldehyde and molecular oxygen, it turns out that at least three quanta are necessary for this process. But if the oxygen molecule is not taken out in one single elementary act, it is more probable that the energy amount necessary for the photochemical processes becomes greater than that calculated for equation 1. The oxygen atoms taken out separately must, for instance, enter into intermediate compounds like peroxides which set free oxygen molecules by an exothermic reaction. Consequently it is not astonishing that, as Warburg found, even under the most favor- able conditions, four quanta of light have to be absorbed for each carbonic acid molecule reduced. From the discussions on the lifetime of the excited Chph complex molecules, it is obvious that the energy absorbed stepwise can be stored up only as potential chemical energy. In other words, each absorption act has to result in an intermediate chemical product of photosynthesis which is stable enough to wait for the next photochemical step. The question of which intermediate products are formed in the plant can be answered with certainty only by direct chemical analysis. But since this is for many reasons at best an exceedingly difficult problem, for the present one is forced to make hypotheses. But such hypotheses are not entirely arbitrary, for they must be in accordance with experience in chemistry and physics, and they must explain quantitatively and in a natural way all the well-established observa- tions made hitherto on photosynthesis. In addition they may at least show that it is not necessary, as many authors believe, to assume that in this biological problem processes occur which are of quite another character than those so far observed in vitro. To show that such hypotheses can be made, we consider briefly the main observations on photosynthesis. As mentioned above, Warburg has shown that four quanta are used to reduce one molecule of carbonic acid under the most favorable conditions. These conditions are that all chlorophyll is in working Aue. 15, 1937 _ FRANCK: PHOTOSYNTHESIS 321 condition, that a great surplus of CO, is present, and that the light intensity is not too great. If one plots in a diagram the production of oxygen for a living leaf or algae, against light intensity, one gets first a linear relation; but in going to higher intensities the production of oxygen increases less rapidly; then, it is proportional to the light intensity; and finally becomes constant and independent of the in- tensity of irradiation. The occurrence of light saturation has been interpreted by the fact that in the course of photosynthesis not only photochemical reactions but also dark reactions play a role. Now the sequence of reactions cannot proceed more quickly than the slowest component reaction. If, in the present case, the photochemical partial reactions proceed with a velocity proportional to the light intensity, while the velocity of the dark reaction is of course independent of the illumination, there must be a light intensity for which the dark re- action becomes the slowest one and is alone responsible for the velocity of the total reaction. While this point of view is undoubtedly right, the application to the shape of the curve actually observed encounters difficulties. One can calculate the velocity of the photo- chemical reactions. It is inversely proportional to the time in which each chlorophyll molecule takes up four quanta of light. Furthermore, one can, as Emerson and Arnold have shown, measure directly the velocity of the dark reaction. In calculating the curve from these data, one predicts saturation with light intensities which are about 1000 times greater than the actually observed values for saturation. The measurements of the velocity of the dark reaction are made by studying the oxygen production by plants illuminated with light flashes of a very short duration and changing the time distance be- tween the flashes. The amount of oxygen produced per flash will become independent of the duration of the dark periods between the flashes if they are longer than the time needed for the dark reaction. Emerson and Arnold found that at room temperature the time neces- sary for the course of the dark reaction is 2/100 of a second, and at 1° C it is 4/10 of a second. They studied also the influence of poisons — on the velocity of the dark reaction, and found, for instance, that HCN slows it down considerably. The general behavior of the dark reaction in respect to poisons and temperature is in accordance with Warburg’s statement that the dark reaction is apparently an enzy- matic decomposition of peroxides into normal oxides and molecular oxygen. Arnold and Emerson’s important results show indirectly that the saturation observed with continuous irradiation is influenced by the velocity of this dark reaction. The saturation production of 322 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 8 oxygen is diminished by low temperatures and by HCN in the same way as is the velocity of the dark reaction, while on the other hand the oxygen production with low light intensities is practically un- influenced by the lowering of temperature and adding of small doses of HCN. , We must mention another kind of light saturation which occurs with flash illumination if the intensity of the individual flashes is raised more and more. The shape of these saturation curves resembles that with continuous irradiation, but the saturation value is here only dependent upon the intensity in the single light flashes, and its time integral can, by using long dark periods between the flashes, be made many times smaller than the light intensity per unit of time which produces saturation with constant irradiation. Since enough time is left in the dark periods for the completion of the dark reaction, the flash saturation becomes independent of its velocity. Therefore Arnold tried to explain this type of saturation by the assumption that in a flash of very -high intensity all carbonic acid in contact with Chph is reduced. The number of such carbonic acid molecules must then be equal to the number of O, molecules developed per flash. A comparison with the known number of Chph molecules present gave the unexpected result that in the presence of a surplus of CO, the number of H.CO; molecules in contact with Chph should be several thousand times smaller than the number of Chph molecules. The deviation is here of the same order of magnitude as with the normal saturation curve, and Arnold and others tried to explain both devia- tions by the assumption that in the plant so-called photosynthetic units exist which contain about a thousand Chph molecules for each carbonic acid molecule. The Chph molecules should absorb the light practically independent of one another, but each quantum absorbed in the unit is used for the reduction of just one carbonic acid molecule. Such a state of affairs is not quite impossible, but certainly highly improbable. According to my opinion, it is in contradiction to the chemical instability of Chph, and to the fact that the Chph can give fluorescence in the plant, while Chph molecules coupled together do not. Nevertheless the existence of the unit was assumed as the only possible solution. The hypothesis of the photosynthetic unit has been further supported because it offered also an explanation for the lack of an induction period. If after a dark period leaves are irradiated with weak light, the oxygen production starts immediately at practically the final rate, although one should expect that if four quanta have to be absorbed Ave. 15, 1937 FRANCK: PHOTOSYNTHESIS’. 320 by the same Chph molecule before oxygen molecules are liberated, the time lapse between the start of irradiation and the start of oxygen production should be very great with low light intensity. The exist- ence of a unit of about 1000 Chph molecules which cooperate would reduce this time by a factor 1000, and would make the induction period so short that it might easily have been overlooked. According to the point of view of Herzfeld and myself, it is possible to explain quantitatively all the facts mentioned above, and many others not mentioned here, without the assumption of a photosyn- thetic unit. This we have done by using as photochemical inter- mediate reactions processes which are inverse to the established intermediate steps of autoxidation and photoxidation of organic matter. Since peroxides and peracids are formed by autoxidation, they should also occur in the stepwise reduction. The dark reaction is then, in accordance with Warburg, simply the enzymatic decomposition of the per-compounds to molecular oxygen and ordinary acids or aldehydes. The absence of an observable induction period forces us to the assumption that a peracid is formed out of the Chph-carbonic acid complexes by a single absorption act. One quantum of red light corresponding to 43 kcal. has enough energy to form a peracid, if the excited Chph-carbonic acid complex has always the chance to react with an organic molecule of the structure ROH. To secure such a reaction ROH has to be in contact with each Chph molecule. We assume, therefore, that the compound ROH is the bearer substance of the Chph, which will mean that a sphere, or a particle with a more complicated surface consisting of ROH, should have on its surface adsorbed Chph molecules which in the usual way may move around on the surface as a two-dimensional gas (as has been established for adsorbed molecules by Volmer). ROH should have the usual strength of binding between C and OH, and may perhaps be a protein. The first photochemical equation is HO HO a | NE Chph C=O, ROH+hy—Chph C—O-—-OH (2) HO isle followed by a dark reaction HO R HO R DV alee Chph bay: + Enzyme—Chph C +3 On. (3) HO O—OH HO OH 324 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 The expression $O, means, of course, that the enzyme has to react with two peracids to form one O, molecule. (The reaction can take place without triple collisions if the enzyme takes an O atom away from the peracid and transports it to the next peracid where the O; molecule is then formed.) By splitting off water HO R R VA . * Chph C will go over into Chph C=O0+H,0. HO OH OH The second photochemical equation replaces, by a reaction with water, the R by an H atom and restores ROH. We have R H te hy Chph C=04+H.,0+h»—Chph C=O, ROH. (4) OH OH Thus formic acid is formed as an intermediate product, as was as- sumed by Willstétter and Stoll. (Dr. Rieke and I have started measurements on the quantum yield of a plant fed with formic acid instead of carbonic acid. We expect that two quanta will reduce formic to formaldehyde; see equations 5, 6 and 7.) The following equations are entirely analogous to equations 2, 3 and 4: HO HO R I es Chph C=0, ROH+hv—Chph C (5) al 7 H H O—OH HO R HO R NE iw Chph C + Enzyme—Chph in +302 (6) H O—OH H OH HO R H NN A Chph C +hv—Chph C=0+ROH. (7) H OH H These transform the formic acid, in two light reactions and one dark reaction, into formaldehyde and oxygen. This system of equations is at least a possible one. It offers, as far as our information goes, no difficulties with respect to the energy Ave. 15, 1937 FRANCK: PHOTOSYNTHESIS 325 relations; it is in accordance with Warburg’s quantum yield and with the experiments on the dark reaction; and explains the lack of an induction period for the experiments made with moderate illumina- tion. This set of equations also offers simple explanations for the occur- rence of saturation curves for continuous and flash irradiation, and furthermore makes it possible to calculate their shape. The deviation from a linear relation between oxygen production and light intensity is produced by the instability of the peracid and the peraldehyde toward light. Each light quantum absorbed by the complex HO R HO R NES Nee Chph C , or by Chph C : HO O= Olel H O=Olal will break the bond between the O and the OH in the per-compounds, since this bond is a very weak one, as one can calculate from well known heats of reaction. The resulting peracid or peraldehyde radicals and OH radicals produce chains of back-reactions for which the following equations give an example. HO R HO R ee SEA Chph C + hy—>Chph Go 2 Lon. (8) HO O—OH HO O This reaction is followed by a spontaneous splitting off of the radical R— and the formation of a double bond between O and C HO i HO Nee x Chph a —Chph C=O0O+R-. (9) HO O- HO The radical R— will attack another peracid complex and continue the chain HO R HO R Nye ues Chph C +R——-ROH+Chph oe (10) HO O—OH HO4-. .O= The OH radical starts similar chains. The chains will break by side reactions in which R and OH are consumed. The result is that relatively rare absorption acts of Chph connected with peracids or with peralde- 326 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 Photosynthesis Log photosynthesis a 4 A-D Cabomba (Smith) va E&F Chlorella (Emerson) Wy Photosynthesis per flash Relative Light tatensity Fig. 1—Warburg’s results on photosynthetic oxygen production plotted against light intensity. Fig. 2—Results of other authors plotted on a logarithmic scaie. Fig. 3.—Flash saturation (points) compared with the theoretical curve (solid line). Auge. 15, 1937 FRANCK: PHOTOSYNTHESIS 327 hydes produce back reactions to carbonic acid and formic acid, which proceed in chains and therefore reduce the O, production consider- ably. With small intensities such absorption acts will not occur, since the average time between two consecutive absorption processes tak- ing place in the same Chph molecule is large compared with the time used by the enzyme to reduce the peracid (time 1/50 sec.), but with rising intensity more and more chains start and finally produce saturation. These processes are, according to our viewpoint, respon- sible for flash saturation and for saturation with continuous illumina- tion, the difference between them in respect to the saturation values being caused by the higher instantaneous density of light quanta in flash illumination. The following figures show the good agreement between observation and theoretical calculation. The points repre- sent observed values, the drawn lines the results of theory. Fig. 1 contains Warburg’s results on photosynthetic oxygen pro- duction plotted against light intensity. The only point which deviates from the calculations is not very reliable, according to a remark by Warburg. Fig. 2 shows results of other authors plotted on a logarith- mic scale. The data for this figure have been taken from a paper of Smith which contains Smith’s own measurements and results of other observers. Deviations between theory and experiment are not greater than the possible error of the observations. Several points which correspond to measurements with very low light intensity have con- siderable possible errors, since according to Smith the correction necessary for respiration processes in the plant is here very large and not exact. In Fig. 3, observations on flash saturation (points) made by Emerson and Arnold are compared with the theoretical curve (solid line). The dotted line represents an empirical formula suggested by Kohen. The great reduction of the oxygen production at light saturation caused by HCN or low temperature fits very well in the theory, since every influence which lowers the velocity of the enzy- matic decomposition of the peracid and peraldehyde increases the concentration of these substances and makes the starting of back reaction chains more frequent. The proposed chemical mechanism has of course also a biological aspect. The back reactions proceeding in chains give us an under- standing of how the plant protects itself against overfeeding. The plant, having no other possibilities to get rid of a surplus of food, uses the light which produces the food to destroy the excess. There is not sufficient time to go further into details. I wish only to add that, according to the theory, not only carbonic acid and for- 328 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 8 mic acid are photosynthesized, but also all plant acids which are pro- duced as intermediate products of respiration which combine with chlorophyll in the way characteristic of acids. In this case also per- acids and aldehydes will occur in the course of photosynthesis, and are reduced by the enzyme. But there is one striking difference be- tween these plant acids on the one hand and carbonic and formic acids on the other. The difference is that the plant acids, having a great number of —C—H bonds, provide a great chance for photoxidation which again proceeds in chains. The result is that the —C—H groups are partially | replaced by Henao ves groups, and these groups also give to the molecule the properties of a peracid. Consequently, a great excess of peracids is built up if photosynthesis and photoxidation of the plant acids take place as parallel processes. This will occur whenever the plant contains a large concentration of plant acids and is strongly illuminated in the presence of molecular oxygen. The plant acids are produced and consumed at a constant rate by respiration, but since with illumination there is an additional consumption of plant acids by photosynthesis and photoxidation, the equilibrium concentration is lower in the light than in the dark. The transition of the concentra- tion of plant acids from the value in the dark to that prevailing in light takes time. This time will be longer with a weak illumination than with strong. Since in the transition period an excess of peracids is present, the probability of starting chains of back reactions by photolysis is enhanced, thereby diminishing the production of oxygen. Weak illumination should have only a small influence, since the enzyme is able to reduce the extra amount of peracids formed by photoxidation before they absorb light quanta and split into radicals. However, with strong irradiation, radicals are produced and the number of back reaction chains should become considerable. This explains Warburg’s observation that there is a considerable induction period in the oxygen production if a plant after a dark pause is il- luminated with strong light, although with weak illumination this phenomenon is not found. The induction period occurring with strong illumination is intimately connected with the abnormal behavior of the fluorescence of a living leaf strongly illuminated after a dark period. This phenomenon, first observed by Kautski and studied in more detail by R. W. Wood and myself, can be easily interpreted in Aue. 15, 1937 GRIGGS: HYBRIDITY IN EVOLUTION 329 terms of the photoxidation of plant acids. Time does not permit me to discuss this point in more detail. I hope that this survey of the problem of photosynthesis, which could touch only the main points, will leave you with the impression that, while the problem is by no means entirely solved, many features are made understandable by the application of normal physical and chemical experience, and that one is no longer forced to assume that in this biological problem processes occur which are of an entirely different character from those with which we deal in studying in- organic matter. I wish again to express my thanks to the Philosophical Society for the great honor of being invited to give this Joseph Henry lecture, and to the audience for listening with such patience to my remarks. GENETICS.—Aybridity as a factor in evolution! Rospertr F. Griacs, George Washington University. Of all the various factors that have been suggested as causes of evolution, hybridity looks, on first sight, the least probable. The limits within which species are cross-fertile are so narrow that there would seem to be little possibility of any such wholesale hybridization in nature as would appear to be demanded if the motive power of evolution is to be found in hybridity. In fact, the suggestion that hybridization may have been a major factor in evolution sounds to most people almost absurd. The very idea of origin of species by hybridization involves almost a contradiction in terms. The best criterion of specific separability that can be framed is that the types in question will not interbreed. If, therefore, it is only exceptionally that hybrid intermediates be- tween species can be obtained, how much less likely is it that new genera, families, orders, or classes could owe their origin to hybridiza- tion? The mere suggestion that even such closely related animals as dogs and cats could hybridize is too far-fetched to be considered by anyone. This being the case, we should perhaps drop the whole matter here and go no further. Yet, since evolution by hybridization has been advocated by stu- dents whose biological contributions in other fields are respectable, it cannot be dismissed so cavalierly as that. The repute of the sponsors of the theory demands for it consideration on its merits. 1 Address to the Paleontological Society of Washington, March 17, 1937. Received April 1, 1937. 330 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 In the first place, we may observe that the apparent absurdity of a scientific theory does not necessarily throw it out of court. While biology is still on a basis where nothing that does not appeal to “common sense’’ can command a hearing, the physical sciences have long since passed beyond that stage. Indeed, we biologists might well ponder the fact, for it is a fact, that the recent revolution in physics, with its many brilliant theoretical advances and its equally spectacu- lar practical applications, was made possible only by the willingness of physicists to follow theories which led them to tenets quite contrary to any common sense view of the universe. Einstein’s doctrines that time is not the same at the same instant in different places, or that a straight line is not the shortest distance between two points certainly cannot be fitted into any common sense ideology. The interesting thing about these seemingly nonsensical ideas of modern physics is that they seem to be true in spite of their apparent absurdity. The point for us, however, is not whether new ideas appeal to our common sense (which is, I fear, only another name for the complex of our prejudices and preconceptions) but whether they are sus- ceptible of objective test, observational or experimental. That is the great feature of Einstein’s ideas which the layman often overlooks. They were not such wild speculations as they sound, for, along with their very enunciation went concrete suggestions for quantitative experimental tests by which they could be established or rejected. We will do well in biology if we will consider new ideas in the same spirit. In the past we have done our science great harm by hastily accept- ing ideas which appealed merely to our ‘‘common sense.’ A very large part of the success of the theory of Natural Selection lay in the vivid appeal of the phrases “struggle for existence” and “‘survival of the fittest.’’ Everybody thought he knew what the struggle for existence was and that he understood the survival of the fittest, and he straight- way adopted the ideas without critically thinking about them. The unfortunate fact is that three-quarters of a century after Darwin his ideas are still as he left them, mere phrases without experimental substantiation. As a matter of fact, nothing is less understood than the struggle for existence. The proper way for us to examine the role of hybridity in evolution is, therefore, to inquire, first, what was the factual basis for its enun- ciation, and second, how can it be examined objectively. If we discover no way of attacking the problem, we should follow our first reaction and drop it. If it should become merely a speculative football it would do biology no good. But if it can be tested by a large body of Ave. 15, 1937 GRIGGS: HYBRIDITY IN EVOLUTION gal data, experimental or otherwise, it may lead us somewhere. The ques- tion which I shall consider tonight, then, is whether any such ob- jective approach to the idea is feasible. Going a little further now with the negative side of the question, we may point out that the difficulty suggested of accounting for the larger groups—genera, families, orders, classes, and phyla—is not peculiar to the hybridity theory but is shared by most other theories of evolution. It was not by accident that Darwin titled his book The origin of species. He supposed that he had discovered the factor responsible for the differentiation of homogeneous stocks into separate species, and he believed, or perhaps it would be more accurate to say that he hoped, that the operation of the same factor could, by something like extrapolation, account for the origin of genera, families, and larger groups. The same might be said of Lamarck with even greater emphasis, for while the differences between species are to a certain extent due to adaptations which might, perhaps, be acquired by something like use or disuse, the characters which distinguish the great groups are very much less adaptive. For example, the aorta in birds turns to the left and in mammals to the right; the one has feathers and the other hair, and it would be very difficult to believe that either of these conditions was brought about by adaptation to environment. As for mutation, we have plenty of experience with mutations in- volving superficial characters like pigmentation, but after all, a mutated cat is still a cat and we cannot imagine even so similar an animal as a puppy in a litter of kittens. For orthogenesis the case is different, because with orthogenesis, as with creation, all things are possible. But also, orthogenesis has little more to offer in the way of circumstantial explanation than did special creation. The fact that we cannot imagine hybridization to have played a role in the evolution of the higher categories of plants and animals does not, therefore, militate against the theory as heavily as might have been supposed. Historically, the hybridity theory of evolution was propounded twenty years ago by Lotsy” of Leiden. Lotsy emphasizes the impor- tance of the recombination of Mendelian factors, and in the mere reassortment of these factors sees the explanation of the evolution of Ut ota J. P. Evolution by means of hybridization. M. Nijhoff. The Hague, 332 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 8 many species. He specifically disclaims any attempt to explain the whole of evolution. For him the biological unit is the ‘Jordanon”’ or Jordanian species, a group of completly homozygous individuals. Any heterozygosity to him is proof of hybridity. ‘All individuals able to produce more than one kind of gametes, e.g. gametes of different constitutions, are hybrids’’ (p. 28). Lotsy considers genera and all groups of a higher order as largely figments of the human mind, with only doubtful reality in nature. But he asserts that these higher orders also originated by crossing. “Crossing was the origin of the new classes; selection, the result of exter- mination by the struggle for life, the cause of their gradual extinction. [Italics in original.] Such extinction of classes must proceed con- tinuously until a happy meeting between two sufficiently differently constituted gametes, causes the origin of a new class.” (p. 135). But ‘“‘A formation of new classes is not in action at the present moment, so that it is illegitimate to claim that one who wants to explain evolution must demonstrate how such a formation of new classes goes on” (p. 136). Nor does he believe in any progress in evolution. “‘Consequently the geological record gives no support to progression either, and we are perfectly justified to say that progression is a human conception and that progressive evolution does not exist’’ (p. 118). Lotsy thus considers only a small fragment of the problem of bio- logical relationship. And even within the circumscribed field which he has undertaken to elucidate he submits almost no evidence that his theory does, in fact, explain the origin of the phenomena ascribed to it. Considering the vast body of evidence which might have been marshalled for his proposition, it is very surprising that he should have contented himself with so speculative, not to say dogmatic, a treatment of the subject. - Lotsy’s ideas of what amount to miraculous origins of new forms by rare chance fertilizations and his consequent disbelief in the gradual origin of families and other larger groups led him to value lightly all the homologies by which the comparative anatomists have built up their conceptions of relationship. Evidence that hybridism has something to do with variation and hence with evolution was brought forward half a century before Lotsy—before Darwin and before Mendel. Lotsy’s whole proposition is obviously a reaction to Mendelian thinking, but Mendel himself did not indulge in any such speculation. Rather, in the latter part of his paper he shows how the supposed transmutation of one type into Aue. 15, 1937 GRIGGS: HYBRIDITY IN EVOLUTION 339 another through successive generations of hybrid stock is to be ex- plained by the operation of the principles of heredity he had dis- covered. Antedating Mendel’s publication, however, is a paper by Naudin? on hybridism considered as a cause of variability. Naudin’s work, unlike Mendel’s, attracted such considerable attention at the time that it was translated in the newly established Journal of the Royal Horticultural Society. Naudin records what we now know as Mendelian segregation in the second generation of his hybrid plants, but failed to understand it. He also described hybrid vigor as regu- larly occurring in the first generation of his crosses and as disappear- ing in subsequent generations. He gave much experimental data, e.g. he made 130 hybrids of Datura. He recognized that reciprocal hybrids are identical, which was one of the great contributions of Mendel also. He believed that the variability of such genera as Salix was due to hybridity. First-generation hybrids of Datura feraxXlaevis were uniform and the reciprocal hybrids identical, but in the second generation ‘‘the most astonishing diversity succeeded the former great uniformity.... “T could bring forward many other examples of the excessive varia- bility which arises in consequence of crossing.” He recorded striking hybrid vigor between Mirabilis longiflorax jalapa, whose progeny in the first generation ‘“‘became enormous. Intermediate in the same degree between the parent species, which they far surpassed in stature, they resembled each other as exactly as possible, which might be expected as they belonged to the first generation.”’ Of the second generation he said: “‘None of them ac- quired the large stature of the hybrids of the first generation; none, moreover, resembled them’’—two were similar, the others very diverse. More recently many writers have discussed hybridism as an evolu- tionary factor, and much controversy has developed as to the means of recognizing hybridity. Into this question it would not be appro- priate to go in this place. The whole subject is in an incoherent amorphous stage. Doubtless, as more work is done, definite canons for research will crystallize out of the heterogeneous mass of facts and ideas floating around at present. | Meanwhile, further comparisons with other types of evolutionary theory may be useful. 3 NaupIn, Cu. On hybridism considered as a cause of variability in vegetables. C. R. Nov. 21, 1864. Trans. Jour. Roy. Hort. Soc. 1(1). 334 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 Natural Selection drewa large part of itssupport from analogy with Artificial Selection, the process by which the extremely diverse types of domestic animals and cultivated plants (cultigens, as they have been called) were supposed to have originated. It was because of the importance of this analogy to his theory that Darwin devoted so large a part of his time to searching out the origin of domesticated types. It is a curious fact that in all the battle over Darwinism nobody ques- tioned the efficacy of Artificial Selection. The validity of the analogy between breeds and species was vigorously attacked but not the origin of breeds. Agassiz said: ‘“‘Selection is no doubt the essential principle on which the raising of breeds is founded and the subject of breeds is presented in its true ight by Mr. Darwin.’’* Yet we know now that the origin of cultigens was one of the things least understood in Darwin’s time. The present knowledge of cultigens was, indeed, one of the chief agencies in undermining Natural Selection. It was on the same rock that DeVries’ theory of mutation struck. It was later proved that the true-breeding Oenothera mutants which DeVries had found, sprang, not as he supposed, from a wild species, but from a cultigen which, as he discovered later very much to his chagrin, grows wild nowhere in the world. Oenothera lamarckiana is a hybrid which has been reproduced by crossing two wild species, Oenothera biennis and O. franciscana.’ In the hybrid origin of DeVries’ oenotheras we have, naturally, a strong suggestion of the possibility of the hybrid origin of mutants in general and so of the whole of evolution. We will return to this. Mean- while, we may take the other hint given us by DeVries’ experience and examine cultigens more closely. It is hardly too much to say that the origin of a majority of our staple food plants is as much a mystery as the origin of Orders and Familes. No man has ever seen growing in the wild, maize, bananas, sweet potatoes, cocoanuts, garden peas, tobacco, peanuts, lentils, or cassava. Neither has any wild species ever been discovered which, by such selection as Darwin relied on, could give rise to them.’ No wild plant bearing anything even remotely similar to an ear of corn has been found after the most thorough search of the territory in which 4 Acassiz, L. Am. Jour. Sci. 30: 147. 1860. wee BrapDLEY More. Oenothera neo-lamarckiana. Am. Nat. 50: 688-696. 6 The experiments of Johannsen (Ueber Erblichkeit in Populationen und in reinen Linien, Jena 1903) on garden beans and of many later workers on both plant and animal material have shown that within the limits of experimental experience, selec- tion by itself is able to make practically no change whatever in an organism. Aug. 15, 1937 GRIGGS: HYBRIDITY IN EVOLUTION 300 maize must have originated.’ If we consider domestic animals, the ease for nearly all of them, on Darwin’s own showing, is nearly as bad. There would be little profit for us here to go off into speculation as to the factors which have been at work in producing these old culti- gens. But it may be worthwhile to look around among them for some whose origin is more recent and better authenticated. Such are not to be found among the domestic animals or the staple crop plants of any people. All of these go back into the obscurity of antiquity, where they cannot be traced. But fortunately there is one type of cultigen. which has been produced very recently and con- cerning which in some cases we have fairly detailed records. I refer to ornamental plants, nearly all of which have Ug euE Oe great develop- ment within the past century. Even among ornamentals of recent origin, recorded pedigrees of sufficient detail and accuracy for analysis are scarce. But wherever the facts have been obtainable the course of events has proved sub- stantially the same. In the beginning, nature lovers have dug up wild plants and grown them in gardens. Despite the belief entertained by Darwin and his con- temporaries that domestication by and of itself in some mysterious way induced variability, many of these old species have been culti- vated for centuries without undergoing much of any modification. Foxgloves and canterbury bells, geese and guinea fowl are very much as they were when first domesticated. In contrast with such types others, like roses, dahlias, sheep, and dogs, show a diversity under domestication without parallel in the wild. When we search for the differences between the stable and the variable domesticated types, we find in every case where the facts are obtainable that hybridization has preceded the production of the polymorphic cultigens, while the stable types have no close relatives in domestication with which they could have been crossed. A list of familiar cultigens which owe their character largely to hybridization includes azalea, begonia, calceolaria, cineraria, citrus, clematis, columbine, dahlia, delphinium, freesia, fuchsia, geranium (pelargonium), gladiolus, hibiscus, iris, ixia, peony, petunia, potato, rhododendron, rose, strawberry, sweet pea, tomato, tulip, verbena. But polymorphic cultigens are not, for the most part, simple hy- | brids. Where their history can be made out the sequence of events has generally included three stages: (1) the collection of numerous wild 7 Kempton, J. H. Mazze, the plant breeding achievement of the American Indian, Smithsonian Scientific Series. 11: 319-349. 1931. 336 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 species of a group; (2) a preliminary period of hybridization in which the results follow the ordinary expectations of Mendelian segregation and recombination; (3) what the horticulturists call a ‘‘break,’’ when suddenly and all at once a large number of new forms burst forth unexpectedly as a result of further crossings. These breaks are entirely unpredictable in the light of our present knowledge and they have usually arisen in the gardens of practical men who could better preserve and disseminate the wonderful new varieties they had found than analyze the biology of what had occurred. I doubt if anything could be more conducive to one’s understanding of the processes of evolution than detailed consideration of the history of a cultigen in which such a “‘break”’ has occurred. There is no time here to go into the minutiae of the case, but I shall recount briefly the history of garden cannas. Because of their luxuriant tropical foliage, cannas early attracted the attention of connoisseurs of exotics. A number of species were introduced from the wild during the first half of the nineteenth cen- tury. Bouché in 1833 grew in Berlin 37 of the 48 known species. The cultivation of these wild unimproved forms, however, died out soon after the middle of the century, and many of them have since been lost. An index of the interest in this line is afforded by the plates of Curtis’ Botanical Magazine, which made a practice of figuring the novelties that were brought to British hothouses. Between 1787 and 1904 this serial gives 12 plates of cannas. All were before 1856 and all but two before 1825. During this early period nobody thought of growing cannas except as foliage plants in the greenhouse. Outdoor culture was a daring innovation, as witness the following comment by Seeman in 1855 on C. warscewiczii, from Central America, one of the three most important parents of present varieties (see Fig. 1): In German gardens this canna is planted during the summer in open borders where it succeeds extremely well, as is also the case with other cannas, marantas, musas, begonias, bambusas, etc. In England this mode of culture has not yet been tried, probably from the prevailing notion that the difference of temperature of the two countries from May to October is too great to allow the experiment to succeed. There is no harm in trying it, especially as the case is not quite a hopeless one. The Germans formerly never dreamed that they should one day behold broad-leaved banana trees and cannas in their gardens flourishing with tropical luxuriance.* The second period of canna culture centered about the work of Théodore Année who, enthused about cannas by a sojourn in South America, undertook to transform cannas from greenhouse curiosities 8 Curtis’ Bot. Mag., table 4854, June, 1855. Auge. 15, 1937 GRIGGS: HYBRIDITY IN EVOLUTION ood to outdoor plants. A good measure of his success is the fact that 20,000 clumps of his best variety, C. annéez, were planted in the public grounds of Paris in 1861.° His spirit was that of an amateur lover of fine flowers rather than that of a scientist or even a commercial horti- culturist. Consequently we have very scanty records of the parentage of his varieties. And as all later work was based on his, this becomes an irretrievable gap in our knowledge of the evolution of garden cannas. Nevertheless, there are few even of ornamentals for which the de- ficiencies in our knowledge are not worse. Fic. 1—Ancestors of modern cannas—wild species and early hybrids. Flowers half natural size. A, Canna annéei, plant and flower. E, C. ehemanni (1 X W). Semipendent. G, C. glauca, source of the gene for yellow in cannas. I, C. iridiflora, pendent. W, C. warscewiczii, source of the gene for red in cannas. From the original figures. See text for citations. Canna année was a lanky plant more than 13 feet tall with a few small salmon-pink flowers about the size of a snapdragon (Fig. 1). No one could imagine it being planted today, but it was a great favorite for several decades. : From the point of view of usefulness for further breeding and of beauty of its flowers the most noteworthy of the early hybrids was ° Rev. Hort., p. 469, 1861. 338 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 8 C. ehemanni, which is also attributed, though somewhat doubtfully, to Année. Positive and definite reports have it that this came from a cross of the small-flowered, brilliant red C. warscewiczii, alluded to above, and the pale, large-flowered C. iridiflora from Peru (Fig. 1).!° It is probably safe to conclude that it sprang from the parents reputed, for no other plants known at the time could well have pro- duced it. But it is doubtful whether it was a simple hybrid between these species. The cross was said to have been made by Année in 1863, but the hybrid plant was not described until 1875 and it seems un- likely that the finest canna of its time could have remained in ob- scurity for twelve years." In view of its remarkable advance over either of its reputed parents, it is most unfortunate that we have no exact record of the time and place of its origin and of the name of the hybridizer. While Canna ehemanni might be classed as intermediate between its parents, its flowers far surpassed either in effectiveness. They were nearly as large as the larger (irzdiflora) and twice as numerous as the more floriferous (warscewicziz). The staminodes of zridiflora measured about 15 sq. cm., those of warscewiczii 2 sq. em., and those of ehemanni 12 sq. cm. The number of flowers in zridzflora was about 6, in warscewiczi about 20, in ehemanni 40. Again, in color it was superior to either parent, for the deep scarlet of the petals had spread over the calyx, which had scarcely a trace of color in either parent. The important thing to keep in mind with Canna ehemannz is its progress beyond anything known in the wild. The “‘break’’ was com- ing. In the next decade, that following 1880, the French breeders, of whom Antoine Crozy was the most celebrated, developed what were known as “gladiolus-flowered” cannas. This name, said a horti- cultural periodical’ of the time ‘“‘has been suggested for a remarkably beautiful class of cannas whose blossoms are almost as large and showy as those of the gladiolus.”’ The tradition concerning the origin of these gladiolus-flowered or French cannas was given in a letter by Henry L. de Vilmorin, one of the leading horticulturalists of his day, as follows: “It is the current belief in this country [France] and it seems confirmed by experiment that the new breed of floriferous cannas (i.e. the French dwarfs) originated by the crossing of Canna ehemanni with C. warscewiczit and with C. glauca’ (see Fig. 1), the former producing red flowers and 10 Rev. Hort. p. 111, 1861. 11 Rev. Hort., pp. 291 and 321, 1875. 2 Garden. March 2, 1889. 1 SmitH. Exot. Fl. 2: t102. 1805. C. glauca is an aquatic plant from the West Indies and South America.. Aue. 15, 1937 GRIGGS: HYBRIDITY IN EVOLUTION 339 the latter specially yellow-flowered varieties. Both original crosses intercross readily, and in later years I have had many crosses made every year and raised and named several dozen new seedlings using the best varieties of my own and Crozy’s raising, without introducing new blood into the breed.’’!* Our credence of this straight-forward statement of ‘‘current belief”’ in the origin of French cannas must be modified by two circumstances: (1) Our knowledge that Année’s early hybridization involving addi- tional species had more to do with the foundation stock than Vil- morin realized. (2) From the species listed it is difficult to account for the numerous purple-leaved varieties of canna. This character, it would seem, must have come from C. discolor, which has such leaves. However, the flowers of that species (or perhaps it was itself a hybrid) have not had any discernible effect on modern cannas. Turning now to a more detailed consideration of the methods used by the French breeders, we are told by the most famous of them, Antoine Crozy: As to the number of crosses raised by me, I suppose that I have raised without exaggeration some 180 to 200 varieties which, step by step, showed improvement over the older kind. Among my varieties not yet in commerce are cannas with flowers measuring from 44 to 6 inches in diameter. These have all very glowing colors and bear immense flower trusses. My constant zeal for superior varieties shows successes every year in regard to color as well as size and number of flowers. The flowers now are borne more erect, are of better substance, and show broader, rounder petals, and some are of a size not known before." Examination of Crozy’s catalogs shows that his claim of 180-200 varieties is not an exaggeration but an understatement. I have not been able to lay hands on the full series of catalogs, but among those available an even 200 novelties are listed as produced by himself before the date of his statement. It is clear from the literature that in the production of cannas, once the right foundation stock was ob- tained, there was very little artificial selection of the sort hypothe- cated by Darwin. Though Crozy says he threw away many inferior sorts, rejection of culls played a very small role. Rejection likewise was of no importance in the next great step in the improvement of the canna. Sprenger,!® who originated modern or “orchid flowered” cannas, fertilized the flower of the most cele- brated of the French cannas, Madame Crozy (Fig. 2), with pollen z 14 In a letter published by F. A. Waugh in the Tenth Ann. Rept. Vermont Expt. tation. 146 Gard. Chron. Ser. II] 21:362. 1897. 16 SPRENGER, CHAs. Rev. Hort., p. 85, 1896. ' 340 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 from the wild Canna flaccida. There was produced only one pod with three seeds, each of which gave rise to a new variety with flowers of a size previously undreamed of. The average staminode in these flowers attained an area of about 27 sq. cm. as compared with 9 sq. em. in one parent and 7 in the other. Fig. 2.—The first modern canna and its parents. Half natural size. C, Canna Madame Crozy (a complex hybrid involving the stocks shown in Fig. 1). I, Canna italia. F, Canna flaccida, native to Southeastern U.S.A. From the original figures. Further testimony as to the small réle played by rejection in plant improvement comes from Marion Shull, who relates (oral com- munication) the following experience with a cross between the iris varieties King and Julia Marlowe. A single pod with 8 seeds was ob- tained. Three of the plants from these received honorable mention among the novelties sponsored by the American Iris Society. Two more, though very fine varieties, were not sufficiently distinctive for exhibition, yet have been kept in the garden ever since for his own enjoyment. A sixth was practically identical with one of the parents, leaving only two to be rejected, and Shull adds that these were better than many of the “‘choice”’ varieties commonly grown. To one who supposes that selection on a large scale is a necessary part of plant Ava. 15, 1937 GRIGGS: HYBRIDITY IN EVOLUTION 341 improvement, a visit to Shull’s garden is highly instructive. There, on a little plot of ground about 50X50 feet, have been originated probably more superior varieties of iris than in any other garden, and yet more ground is given over to the multiplication of old varieties than to the production of new ones, and a large fraction of the space is occupied by other plants grown entirely for ornament. Further, the rejects that are culled out are nearly all thrown away because they are not sufficiently different from older types rather than because they are inferior. The most important feature of the origin of cultigens through hy- bridization is its progressive character, which is recognized by all breeders. The new forms cannot be interpreted at all as due to re- combinations of characters already present. There is an emergence of new characters previously considered impossible. In the light of what has since occurred the following rebuke by André, the experi- enced editor of Revue Horticole, 1866, to the enthusiasm of Sisley, who encouraged by a preliminary success, dared predict cannas with flowers ‘‘as big as gladioli’’ is significant as well as amusing. He says that while he fully appreciates the marvelous improvements made by breeding, ‘“‘the cannas already obtained clearly reveal the limit which we may not pass beyond—it is not possible to nourish the hope of those famous cannas with flowers like gladioli on which M. Année counted formerly but no more.’’’ To appreciate the force of this opinion one must remember that it was written before even C. ehemanni was known. The nature of the “breaks’’ by which cultigens rise out of the apparent limitations of their ancestry into new classes of utility in size or productiveness is not at all adequately understood. In some cases they are due to the incidence of polyploidy, as discussed below. The phenomenon of the break can be expressed in the terminology of genetics!® by using the conception of latent genes. To speak of a latent gene does, however, little more than name a phenomenon which is as mysterious as ever. Yet it might perhaps provide a point of view from which experimentation could start. In the light of our present knowledge of cultigens, then, it begins to appear possible once more that Darwin was right in supposing that the improvement of domestic plants and animals was the key to the origin of species. Meanwhile, there are some other phenomena more or less con- 17 Gard. Chron., p. 537, 1866. : ds R. K. Napors. Emergent evolution and hybridism. Science 71: 371-375. 930. 342 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 8 nected with hybridity which have a very interesting relation to the origin of hereditary variants and are probably significant to evolu- tion in the large, namely, polyploidy and various aberrations in the chromosome numbers. Each of these in itself is a very large subject which would demand a paper like this for its presentation even in a general way, so that they can be no more than alluded to here. It is now well known that in many series of related plants the vari- ous species are characterized by chromosome numbers in some small (polyploid) multiple of a single number which appears to be the fundamental or original ancestral number for the group. The various types of wheat, for example, have 7, 14, 21, or 28 chromosomes. The chrysanthemums 9, 18, 27, 36, 45, or 90. Domesticated genera in which polyploids play a part include blackberries, blueberries, can- nas, cottons, daturas, day-lilies, hyacinths, oenotheras, primulas, roses, solanums, and tomatoes, to name only a few, and the list is being extended every day. For some reason not at all understood polyploidy is all but un- known among animals. Until this apparent divergence between the two kingdoms is accounted for one must, of course, have some reserva- tions concerning the general importance of polyploidy because, as- suredly, the forces at work in the evolution of plants and of animals are essentially similar. Some polyploids originate through irregularities in chromosome re- duction incident to partial incompatibility of hybrid plasmas. In this way triploids may occur when types having n and 2n chromosomes are crossed. Or, failure in reduction may result in 2n gametes and so in 4n or tetraploid individuals which differ from either of the parent stocks. Such irregularities as these may be found to account for much of the emergence of new characters in hybrids. But polyploidy is by no means exclusively a result of hybridization; it has been induced artificially a number of times by a sudden chill to a greenhouse in which plants were at the critical stages. Partial incompatibility of germ plasms frequently results in more irregular differences in chromosome distribution whereby offspring arise which lack one or two of the parental chromosomes or have one or two supernumerary chromosomes. Once established, these irregu- larities are often hereditary, and they have a pronounced effect on the character of the offspring. Blakeslee’s researches on the jimson weed are the most thoroughgoing and outstanding work of this field.!° 19 BLAKESLEE, ALBERT F. New jimson weeds from old chromosomes. Jour. Hered. 25: 81-108. 19384. Aug. 15, 1937 YOUNG: PHYLLOSTACHYS 343 But enough has yet been done to permit a satisfactory opinion as to the importance of polyploidy and chromosome aberration in the grand sweep of evolution, but it is clear that there is here a field of very great interest and importance. Neither is the relation of these phenomena to hybridity entirely clear. The cytologists who have done the work have been markedly reti- cent as to the ultimate origin of the plants in which they found this remarkable chromosome behavior. Some, like Datura and Oenothera, belong to groups in which hybridity is known to have occurred on a large scale. But no very definite correlations between the aberrant eytology and hybridity have been made. One of the most promising fields for research in the whole field of biology, so it seems to me, lies just here. A detailed understanding of what happens cytologically and genetically when horticultural breaks occur is very much needed and ought to throw a flood of light not only on the origin of cultigens but on the fundamental problems of evolution as well. BOTANY.—Phyllostachys sulphurea var. viridis var. nov. and P. edulis (Carr.) H. de L.1. Roperr A. YounGa,? Bureau of Plant Industry. (Communicated by 8. F. BLaxkz.) The name Phyllostachys mitis as used by A. & C. Riviére’ has been a source of confusion. The name itself was based on Bambusa mitis Poiret,* which in turn was based on Arwndo mitis Lour. Loureiro’s species has not been identified; Merrill’ refers it to Dendrocalamus, the species undetermined. Loureiro describes the flowers as having 6 stamens, the culms as terete, and the panicle as simple, whereas in Phyllostachys the stamens are always 3, the culms are flattened or grooved on one side of each internode, and the inflorescence is com- pound and not a simple panicle.® ““Bambusa edulis,” without author, 1 Received March 1, 1937. 2 The author is indebted to Dr. 8. F. Blake, Mrs. Agnes Chase, the late Dr. A. S. Hitchcock, Dr. F. A. McClure, and Paul Russell, of the Division of Plant Exploration and Introduction, Bureau of Plant Industry, for valuable assistance and counsel in the preparation of this paper. 3 Riviere, A. & C. Les Bambous 231. 1879. 4 Lam. Encycl. 8:704. 1808. The name as published there is Bambos mitis Lour., but Loureiro’s name was Arundo mits. 5 MERRILL, E. D. A Commentary on Loureiro’s Flora Cochinchinense. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. n. s. 24(2): 85. 1935. 6 The fact that Bambusa mitis Poir., the name-bringing synonym of ‘‘Phyllostachys mitis A. & C. Riv.,”’ belongs to a different genus was pointed out by J. Houzeau de Lehaie, under the caption Les Deux Phyllostachys mitis, in Le Bambou, 1: 38-40. 1906. He attempted to show that the Riviére species should have been based on B. mitis Hort. ex Carr. but this was an error, since on this species Carriére (Rev. Hort. 37: 380. 1866) based his Bambusa edulis. In the paper by Houzeau de Lehaie, just cited, it was also shown that Carriére’s edulis is an earlier valid name for the previously pub- lished Phyllostachys pubescens Mazel ex Houzeau de Lehaie. 344 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 8 cited as a synonym by A. & C. Riviére, is, if B. edulis Carriére is re- ferred to, a very different species. If not Carriére’s species, the name as given has no standing. It is certain that A. & C. Riviére misapplied the name mitis and that another name must be found for the species in cultivation com- monly known as Phyllostachys mitis. The detailed description given by the Riviéres of their so-called P. mitzs shows conclusively that it is a green-stemmed form closely related to P. sulphurea A. & C. Riv.’ Study of living plants of the forms now known in Europe as P. mitis and P. sulphurea has convinced the writer that though varie- tally distinct the two belong to the same species, a conclusion tenta- tively reached by Freeman-Mitford® and Houzeau de Lehaie.® Among other characters, the buds of the rhizomes of these bamboos have been examined by the writer and they furnish confirmatory evi- dence of the specific identity of the two forms; the buds are of dif- ferent shape from those of P. bambusoides Sieb. & Zucc., with certain varieties of which P. sulphurea has been confused in the literature. Such confusion could hardly take place if the student of bamboos were acquainted with the plants of P. sulphurea as well as with those of P. bambusovdes and its varieties. Makino” in 1912 erroneously identified Phyllostachys sulphurea A. & C. Riv. with a rare cultivated variety, Ogonchiku, or Kinchiku (golden bamboo), of P. bambusoides Sieb. & Zuce. (P. reticulata (Rupr.) C. Koch) and published the name P. reticulata var. sulphurea Makino. The brief description does not include characters that dif- ferentiate P. sulphurea. Takenouchi! in 1932 accepted Makino’s judgment in the matter and repeated the statement that the variety is cultivated (in Japan). However, the well-known Japanese horti- culturist and bamboo specialist, Isuke Tsuboi,!* was unable to find 7 Riviere, A. & C. Les Bambous, 285. 1879. The plant of Phyllostachys sul- phurea, upon which the somewhat meager description was based, received at the Jar- din de Hamma, Algiers, in 1871, is stated not to have survived the first summer, hence the lack of details concerning it. The Riviéres cited Bambusa sulphurea Hort., a name without standing. They do not refer to Bambusa sulfurea of Carriére (Rev. Hort. 45: 379. 1873), which fact obviates any need to discuss in this paper the question of what the identity of that species may be. 8 FREEMAN-MITFORD, A. B. Bamboo Garden, 122. 1896. 9 HovuzeEAv DE Lenaiz, J. Le Bambou, 1: 57; 1: 134. 1906; 2: 214. 1907; 2: 261; 288; pl. 8, 1908. Bul. Soc. Dendrol. de France, No. 14, 254. Nov. 15, 1909. 10 Makino, T. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 26: 24. 1912. 11 TAKENOUCHI, YosHIO. Studies of Bamboos (in Japanese, except scientific names) 145. 1932. (Tokyo). 122 TsuBol, IsuKE. Monogr. of Bamboos (Japanese text, 63 pp., and set of 109 colored plates), item no. 9; pl. 5. ed. 2. 1916. The author states that while Kinchiku was reported in older Japanese works to be growing in Satsuma, Ryukyu, and Abo he failed to find a single plant when he visited those localities. He illustrates culm, rhi- zome, and leaves but the yellow culm does not display the characteristic narrow green Auge. 15, 1937 YOUNG: PHYLLOSTACHYS 345 (1916) the variety Kinchiku in any of the places in which it had been reported to be grown and had doubts of its continued existence in those localities. Houzeau de Lehaie, indeed, once doubtfully sug- gested Japan as the country from which P. sulphurea had been in- troduced into Europe, but there appears to be no substantial evidence that it occurs in Japan. Nakai“ in 1933 erroneously referred Phyllostachys sulphurea to P. reticulata var. holochrysa Nakai, as a synonym. Nakai’s variety, based on P. bambusordes var. Castilloni holochrysa Pfitzer ex Houzeau de Lehaie,! is not known to the present writer but the brief descrip- tion precludes the possibility of its identity with P. sulphurea. Nakai™ adds in a note (in Japanese) following the synonymy in his publica- tion of var. holochrysa that it is of Chinese origin, is said to have been introduced into Europe from China in 1865, and that the history of the variety in Japan is not known. From this it may fairly be inferred that he had not seen a plant either of var. Castilloni holochrysa Pfitzer or of P. sulphurea A. & C. Riv. Although the characters indicate that the plant hitherto known as Phyllostachys mitis probably represents the original wild form of the species and that known as P. sulphurea (biologically) a variety of it (as proposed and informally published by Houzeau de Lehaie),® under the rules of nomenclature the name P. sulphurea A. & C. Riv., pub- lished in 1879, becomes the specific name of the aggregate, whereas the plant until now known as P. mitis becomes the variety. For this the following name is proposed. Phyllostachys sulphurea var. viridis R. A. Young, var. nov. Phyllostachys mitis, as misapplied by A. & C. Riviére, Les Bambous 231. 1879. Culmi omino virides, usque ad 14 m alti, quam ei formae typicae altiores sed infra tenuiores; folia viridia numquam striata. Type deposited in the U. S. National Herbarium, nos. 1682470 and 1682471, collected in Plant Introduction Garden, Savannah, Georgia, Jan. 11, 1937, by D. A. Bisset; grown from material obtained from Gaston Negre, Generargues, France, under the name Phyllostachys mitts. stripe of Phyllostachys sulphurea on any of the internodes, and the other characters shown are not sufficiently distinctive to establish identity with any bamboo known to the present writer. The source of the material from which the illustration was prepared is not indicated and no description of the plant is given. Furthermore, the author finally expresses the opinion that the yellow color mentioned for the culm of Kinchiku probably was of a kind that he had observed in another bamboo to result from high summer humidity. (The foregoing is based on a translation by Saburo Katsura, Bu- reau of Plant Industry.) 13 HOUZEAU DE Lenal£, J. Le Bambou, 2:230. 1908. 44 Naxal, T. Journ. Japanese Bot. 9: 34. 1933. In his synonymy Nakai omits ek name Castillont, which was part of the full name as published by Houzeau de ehaie. 16 HOUZEAU DE Lenais£, J. III Cong. Int. Bot. Brux. 228. 1910. 346 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 The varietal name Phyllostachys sulphurea var. viridis refers to the green color of the culm and branches as contrasted with the clear sulphur yellow of the species itself. There are also other distinguishing characteristics in the species, P. sulphurea, such as the presence of one or two narrow green stripes on the rounded part—never on the grooved or flattened side—of most of the internodes of the yellow culm, an irregular broken ring of green beneath each node, and a tendency of the evenly tapering culm to be larger in diameter at the base for its height than in the green-stemmed form. A single green stripe is present on many of the lower internodes of the main branches, and an occasional leaf has one or a few slender white or yellowish stripes. The green striping of the culm was observed by Lehaie,’ though other authors fail to mention this character. Mitford’ says of P. sulphurea that it is much hardier than ‘‘P. mztzs’’ and of inferior stature, but no definite confirmation of the reported hardiness can yet be given from observations in the United States. Phyllostachys sulphurea has never been adequately described, a fact which largely accounts for the uncertainty as to its identity and the resulting con- fusion in nomenclature. For this reason the following description of the vegetative characters is here offered. Culms about 5 m (may later reach 10 m) high, not as tall as those of var. viridis but somewhat thicker at base for the height and tapering evenly to the tip. Supranodal rings of culm, except in upper part, only a little more prominent than the nodal rings. Culm and branches of a clear sulphur yellow, but frequently with 1 or 2 rather narrow green stripes variously situated on the rounded part of each internode of the culm and one stripe on some of the lower internodes of the branches, beneath each node of the culm a broken ring of green, jagged in outline on the lower edge, often later obscured by a sooty fungus. Rhizome buds circular in outline. Culm sheaths entirely glabrous, margins smooth, outer surface of lowest ones brownish yellow when fresh, blotched and spotted with brown, those above sixth node yellowish with green veins, irregularly and often sparsely speckled and spotted with paler brown; ligule distinctly truncate, membranaceous, 2.5 mm high at about the eighth node of a culm 2.5 cm in diameter at base, glabrous, margin slightly irregular, minutely fimbriate; pseudophylls linear, ribbonlike, about 4.5 em long and 5 mm wide on sheath of eighth node, two- thirds the width of the ligule, glabrous, margins of uppermost slightly sca- brous, others smooth, all without auricles or bristles at the base or, at most, with rudimentary auricles, all except the lowest pseudophylls tessellated. a narrow, bright-green stripe in center, pale maroon to salmon on margins. Branches two at each node, unequal, as usual in Phyllostachys. Leaves 2-3, proximate at tips of twigs (branchlets), the lower sheaths almost completely overlapping those above, the lowest slightly pubescent on upper part, oc- casionally with outer margins obscurely ciliate near summit, upper sheaths densely puberulent, especially at summit, the collar densely pubescent at first; auricles more or less prominent, with whitish radiating scabrous bristles (oral setae) 3-5 mm long; ligule rather prominent, about 1.5 mm high, except on uppermost sheath of twig, notched and minutely ciliate on margin, densely puberulent outside at base; petiole 3 mm long; blade lance-oblong to lanceolate, acuminate, somewhat rounded at the base, 4.5-12.5 cm long, Avg. 15, 1937 YOUNG: PHYLLOSTACHYS 347 8-17 mm wide, green and glabrous above, rarely with one or a few slender white or yellowish stripes, paler, secaberulous, densely puberulent along the midnerve and toward the base beneath, otherwise scabrous, cilio-scabrous on one margin, secondary veins 5-6 pairs, rarely 4 or 7, intermediate veins 7-9, rarely fewer. Since Phyllostachys sulphurea and its variety viridis have been confused with P. bambusoides Sieb. & Zucc. and some of its varieties, it may be well to mention a few characters that clearly differentiate the latter group from the former. In P. bambusoides the internodes of the young culms are at first a brilliant green, in contrast with the glaucous green of P. sulphurea var. viridis, and the rhizome buds are somewhat triangular in outline instead of circular. The culm sheaths from the eighth node upward bear conspicuous auricles with bristles, the sheaths are ciliate on the outer margin, and they commonly have a darker ground color and are more profusely spotted, blotched, and streaked than in P. sulphurea or its variety; the culm-sheath ligule is usually more or less obtuse rather than truncate. The leaves are 3—4 on a twig, usually larger and more undulate than in either of the forms of P. sulphurea, and the sheath ligule is less than 1 mm high. This study of Phyllostachys sulphurea and its variety viridis is based on living material grown from plants obtained under the names P. mitis and P. sulphurea by the United States Department of Agri- culture from French and English nursery firms between 1920 and 1930. They are growing at the Barbour Lathrop Plant Introduction Garden of the Department, at Savannah, Ga. Plants of P. sulphurea var. viridis, under the name P. mitis, were received twice, from nurser- ies in southern France. There are minor differences between these two introductions but the plants of both agree in essential respects with the Riviére description. It appears that the bamboos grown by the Riviéres in the Jardin du Hamma at Algiers, were not kept labeled, hence the identities of these plants are now known only by imperfect tradition among the present gardeners at Hamma. Even with the hearty cooperation of Dr. R. Maire, of the University of Algiers, it has not been possible to obtain positive evidence from that source on the more difficult questions of identity concerning the Riviére bamboos now growing at Algiers. It has recently been learned from the Museum d’Histoire Naturelle, of Paris, that these species are not represented there by authentic specimens. Allusion was made at the beginning of this paper to the confusing by A. & C. Riviére of a Bambusa edulis (without name of author) with their so-called Phyllostachys mitis. The Riviere publication naturally involved B. edulis Carr. in the confusion. Phyllostachys 16 CARRIERE, E. A. Rev. Hort. 37: 380. 1866. 348 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 edulis (Carr.) H. de L. based on that species, is an edible bamboo with hairy blackish sheaths, while the culm sheath of “P. mitis’’ was described by A. & C. Riviére as being entirely glabrous. Carriére’s description of the sheaths of ‘B. edulis” applies fairly well to P. edulis (Carr.) H. de L. and does not well apply to any other known species. It is of interest that as early as 1897 Makino!’ had observed (presumably from the Riviére illustration of a young culm with heavily spotted sheaths) that ‘‘P. mitis,’ described by A. & C. Riviére, bore a strong likeness to Madake (P. bambusoides) but did not resemble Mosochiku (P. edulis, for which at that time Makino apparently had no scientific name). As his note on the question was published in Japanese, however, this important observation of the distinctness of Mosochiku from ‘‘P. mitis’’ seems to have remained unknown to European botanists until the facts concerning Mosochiku were recognized by Houzeau de Lehaie,'* in 1906. In 1906 Houzeau de Lehaie’® published the name Phyllostachys pubescens Mazel, presumably because Mazel, the deceased horticul- turist by whom it had been grown for many years, had called it by that name. In another article in the same publication Houzeau de Lehaie!® showed that the correct name for the species was Phyllo- stachys edulis, based on Bambusa edulis Carr., and formally pub- lished it. He reverted shortly afterward to the name P. pubsecens, but instead of using Mazel’s name as authority he gave his own initials and continued to use them in his later published references”?! to the species. The specific name edulis was again taken up by Makino” in 1912 and was also used by Tsuboi” in 1916, though both authors erred in citing A. & C. Riviére instead of Houzeau de Lehaie as authority for the combination. The explanation for this appears to be that Makino was misled by the form in which the synonymy of ‘Phyllostachys mitis”’ was stated by the Riviéres and assumed that ‘‘ — edulis” meant “Phyllostachys edulis A. & C. Riv.,” whereas it simply indi- 17 MaxINo, T. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 11: 158. 1897. A translation by Saburo Kat- sura of the note by Makino reads: “‘Phyllostachys mitis, described by A. & C. Riviére, is in question as to whether or not it is Poiret’s Bambusa mitis. It bears a striking like- ness to Madake but does not resemble Mosochiku.”’ 18 HouzEAU DE Lenatz, J. Les Deux Phyllostachys mitis. Le Bambou 1: 38-40. Bat Hovuzeavu DE Lenatz, J. Phyllostachys pubescens Mazel. Le Bambou 1: 7: es ican pE Lenarg, J. Le Bambou 1: 97, 117, 129. 1906; 2: 214. 1907; 2: 290. 1908. 21 HOUZEAU DE Lenalrs, J. III Cong. Int. Bot. Brux. 1: 232.1910. 2 Makino, T. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 26: 21. 1912. 23 TsuBol, IsuKE. Monogr. of Bamboos, item no. 23; pl. 15, 71, 93. ed. 2. 1916. Ave. 15, 1937 DAYTON: HARMEL 349 cated a Bambusa edulis, without name of author. Carriére, of course, was the author. The correct combination of name and authority, P. edulis (Carr.) H. de L., appears to have been used first by Gallo- way. in 1925. 7 For reasons not entirely clear, T. Nakai” in 1933 reverted to the name “‘P. pubescens Mazel ex Houzeau de Lehaie,’’ with the citation “Bambusa edulis (non Poiret) Carriére in Revue Hort. XX XVII, p. 380 (1866) cum. syn. B. mitis Hort.’’ included in the synonymy. Again, however, explanation is perhaps to be found in a misinter- pretation of the Riviére form of citation. Unlike Makino, Nakai as- sumes that Bambusa edulis, the second synonym of ‘Phyllostachys mitis,’’ was intended to be understood as a Poiret species, as well as B. mitis Poiret, the first synonym cited. This would account for the fact that Nakai ignores (1) the explicit and well-substantiated state- ment by Houzeau de Lehaie!* that Carriére’s name (edulzs) for ‘‘Moso- chiku”’ should be retained, and (2) the actual publication by Houzeau de Lehaie, in the same paragraph, of ‘Phyllostachys edulis nom. nov.” The facts cited in this account of Phyllostachys mitis, so-called by _A. & C. Riviére, and P. edulis seem to constitute a veritable ‘‘comedy of errors.”’ The former name is clearly invalid, as has been shown, but P. edulis (Carr.) H. de L. is obviously a valid name and must stand. BOTAN Y.—WNotes on harmel, or “Syrian rue.”? Wiiu1am A. Day- TON, U.S. Forest Service. Messrs. W. L. Black and K. W. Parker of the New Mexico College of Agriculture and Mechanic Arts have published a very informing and valuable paper, Toxicity tests on African rue.” The Mediterranean- west Asiatic plant referred tois Peganum harmala L., which, the au- thors report, is introduced, established, and spreading in an area 4 miles east of Deming, New Mexico,—apparently the first record of its occurrence in this country. The species appears to have been con- sidered promising for erosion-control experiments in our semiarid Southwest, because of its marked drought-resistance, somewhat mat- like growth, and copious seeding. However, the authors (op. cit., p. 11) sound a note of warning from Arthur B. Clawson, well-known toxi- cologist of the federal Bureau of Animal Industry, because of the 24 GaLLowAY, B.T. Bamboos: their culture and usesinthe United States. U. 8. Dept. Agr. Bull. 1329: 10. 1925. 2 Naxal, T. Jour. Japanese Bot. 9: 27. 1938. 1 Received April 14, 1937. 2 Buack, W. L., and Parker, K. W. Toxicity tests on African rue (Peganum har- mala L.). N. Mex. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull. 240, 14 pp., illus. 1936. 350 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 8 poisonous properties of the seed and herbage; Clawson fears ‘‘that African rue may cause losses in livestock, especially on ranges heavily populated with the plant,’’ whose palatability, however, is admittedly very low. In view of the interest that this plant has aroused in New Mexico and the possibility of a further extension of the range of this species in the Southwest, it seems desirable that, if possible, a generally ac- ceptable English name for it should be adopted. Harmel is here recommended. The writer feels that the name “African rue”’ for this plant not only is unnecessary but is seriously objectionable, for the following reasons: 1. This plant, though apparently with a somewhat rue-like odor, does not have punctate leaves and is not a true rue (Ruta); by the majority of botanists it is not placed in the rue family (Rutaceae) but in the caltrop family (Zygophyllaceae). Asa Gray, in his Synoptical flora of North America, although placing Peganum in Zygophyllaceae, indicates that the genus is anomalous because of its relatively numer- ous (12-15) stamens, few (2 to 4) carpels, and numerous (45 to 60, fide Black and Parker, op. cit., p. 5) seeds. 2. There are true species of Ruta indigenous to Africa. One or more of these conceivably may some day get into cultivation in this coun- try and would be much more entitled to the name ‘‘ African rue.”’ 3. The recorded history of Peganum harmala seems to be concerned much more with Syria, Turkey, and Arabia than with Africa. 4. Peganum harmala already has other and better known English names. For example, Van Wijk, in his encyclopaedic A dictionary of plant names,’ lists the names harmel, harmal, harmala, hurmul, and Syrian rue. Incidentally, the generic name Peganum is derived from the Greek rnyavov, a term used by Theophrastus both for the com- mon, or garden rue (Ruta graveolens) and for ‘‘wild rue.’’ Harmala (Greek, apuada), used by Tournefort as a generic name, was em- ployed by Dioscorides, and is said to be the Syrian (or Arabic) name for ‘‘wild rue,’’—very likely Peganum harmala. Peganum harmala is reported by Baillon‘ to be cultivated in French botanical gardens. Nicholson’ states that it is “‘occasionally . . . met with in English gardens.’’ As yet, the plant does not appear to have been cultivated in this country as an ornamental. Black and Parker (op. cit., p. 3) refer to the fact that ‘‘an eye oint- 3 Van Wisk, H. L. Gertu. A dictionary of plant names 1: 961-962. 1911. 4 Bartuon, M.H. Dictionnaire de botanique 3: 526. 1891. 2 NicHoLson, GrorGE. The illustrated dictionary of gardening, a practical and scientific encyclopaedia of horticulture, for gardeners and botanists 3: 58. (1886). Ava. 15, 1937 HURD-KARRER: RUBIDIUM AND STRONTIUM TOXICITY aol ment was made from the seeds in Arabia’’; that the plant is reputed to possess anthelmintic properties, and that it possibly contains a narcotic, hasheesh-like or marihuana-like alkaloid. It seems desirable to add that Peganum harmala is known to contain the alkaloids har- malin (Ci3Hi,N.O) and harmin (Ci3Hi.N.O), which have been em- ployed as drugs in the treatment of cerebral paralysis, encephalitis lethargica, and Parkinson’s disease. Baillon (loc. cit.) speaks of the plant as a sudorific, as well as vermifuge, and states that the French call the plant “armel.” Lieut. W. F. Lynch, U. 8. N.,° indicates that Peganum harmala is widely distributed in Judaea, and that its seeds are both intoxicating and soporific. Before the advent of aniline dyes, Peganum harmala was, at least in large part, the ultimate source of the brilliant scarlet dye known as “Turkey red’ (alizarin). Engler, in Die naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien, speaks of the cells of the middle layer of the seed coats as the seat of this dyestuff as well as of the alkaloid harmalin. He also mentions the sudorific and vermifugal properties of the seed, and adds that the Turks use the plant as a condiment. There is a native congener of this plant in our Southwest and north- ern Mexico, Peganum mexicanum, originally collected by the ill- fated Dr. Gregg. In his original description of this species Dr. Gray’ quotes Gregg that it “‘is evidently well known to the Mexicans, who ... call it Garbanzilla, Romero del Campo, or Limoncillo, and use a decoction of it for gonorrhoea. It is said to be poisonous to cattle.” PLANT PHYSIOLOGY.—Rubidium and Strontium Toxicity to Plants Inhibited by Potassium and Calcium Respectively.1 ANNIE M. Hurp-Karrer, Bureau of Plant Industry. Last year the writer reported? that the toxicity of sodium arsenate to wheat plants varies inversely with the concentration of available phosphate. The possibility of such an effect had been postulated on the basis of the fact that the positions of phosphorus and arsenic in Group V of the periodic arrangement of the elements are analogous to those of sulphur and selenium in the adjoining Group VI. The hypothesis proposed to explain the selenium-sulphur antagonism? 6 Lynceo, W. F. EHzxamination of the Dead Sea. Senate Exec. Doc. 34, 30th Con- gress, 2nd Sess. 1849. 7 Gray, Asa. Plantae Wrightianae Texano-Neo-Mezxicanae 1: 30. 1852. 1 Received July 1, 1937. 2 Hurp-Karrer, ANNIE M. Inhibition of arsenic injury to plants by phosphorus. Jour. Wash. Acad. Sci. 26: 180-181. 1936. 3 Hurp-KarReR, ANNIE M. Selenium injury to wheat plants and its inhibition by sulphur. Jour. Agr. Research 49: 343-357. 1934. 352 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 suggested that the injurious effects of a toxic element could be coun- teracted by an excess of a chemically similar nutritive element, the ~ assumption being that such elements would enter the plant alike without selective discrimination (but with unlike effects on the plant). If the gradient established by the plant’s metabolism of the nutritive element should determine the total absorption of the two, the amount of the toxic element taken in would decrease as the pro- portionate amount of the nutritive element in the substratum in- creased. The experimental results showing reproducible ratios associ- ated with given degrees of injury to the plant in the case of arsenic and phosphorus as well as of selenium and sulphur were in accord with this supposition, and, in fact, could only be explained on some such line of reasoning.’ The confirmation of the idea supplied by the arsenate/phosphate relation led to the testing of other similarly related pairs of elements. The pairs that could be selected on this basis were very limited, since, other than sulphur and phosphorus, there are only five major min- eral nutrients—nitrogen, iron, magnesium, potassium, and calcium. Next to potassium in Division A of Group I is the toxic element ru- bidium, and next to calcium in Division A of Group II is the mod- erately toxic strontium. These two pairs were accordingly chosen for experimentation. The plants were grown in nutrient solutions, according to pro- cedures described in the earlier papers. For the study of rubidium toxicity, low- , medium- and high-potassium solutions were made by varying the amounts of KCl in otherwise identical solutions. Their pH values were brought near 6.5 with equal amounts of NaOH. Con- trols without rubidium showed that plant injury in the low-potassium cultures containing rubidium was not due to the low KCl content. In some of the experiments duplicate series of the low-KCl cultures were set up, for one of which the low chlorine content was compen- sated for by adding sufficient calcium chloride to make the chlorine equal to that of the high-potassium solution. The plants of these cul- tures gave evidence that neither chlorine nor calcium was a factor in the results. The characteristic symptom of the injury produced by rubidium chloride on both wheat and barley was a stunting and peculiar thick- ening of the roots, resulting eventually in stunting of the tops also. The 4 The antagonism is much more marked with selenates than with selenites, so it should be emphasized that only sodium arsenate ae 7H:O) has been used in studying the arsenic/phosphorus relation. Aug. 15, 1937 HURD-KARRER: RUBIDIUM AND STRONTIUM TOXICITY 353 degree of injury varied with the proportionate amount of potassium present, twice as much potassium as rubidium effectually preventing the appearance of the root injury. Thus with 60 p.p.m. of rubidium, injury could be detected in both wheat and barley with 60 but not with 120 p.p.m. of potassium; with 120 p.p.m. of rubidium, there was definite injury with 150 but not with 240 p.p.m. of potassium. For the study of strontium toxicity, low- , medium- and high-cal- cium solutions were made by varying the amounts of calcium nitrate, the resulting differences in nitrogen being compensated for by the addition of requisite amounts of ammonium nitrate. The pH values of the low- and high-calcium solutions were both near 6.5. Controls without strontium showed that the peculiar injury attributed to strontium in the low-calcium solutions was not due to calcium de- ficiency. The characteristic symptom of strontium injury was a stimulation of tillering with stunting, so that the plants were thick, short bunches of as many as twelve tillers instead of the usual four much taller tillers of the controls. The effect was extreme with 500 p.p.m. of strontium supplied as either SrCl, or Sr(NOs)2 in solutions containing but 50 p.p.m. calcium, slight with 230 p.p.m. calcium, and absent with 500 p.p.m. calcium. Controls with the same amounts of chlorine and nitrate in the form of potassium salts proved that the effect was produced by the strontium alone. Under the conditions of these ex- periments, then, strontium produced detectable injury with but half as much calcium as strontium present, but with the amounts equal it was nontoxic. The accuracy of these ratios may be questionable, however, because of a considerable precipitate in the high-calcium flasks, suggesting that the calcium did not all remain in solution. Tests to determine the specificity of the relations by interchanging the nutrient solutions showed that excess potassium did not inhibit strontium toxicity, nor did excess calcium inhibit rubidium toxicity. Insofar as the establishment of predicted relations by actual ex- periment constitutes evidence, the observed antagonism of arsenic, rubidium and strontium by phosphorus, potassium and calcium, re- spectively, substantiates the generalization suggested by the se- lenium-sulphur antagonism. Briefly stated, this hypothesis is that in proportion to its relative concentration an essential nutritive element reduces the absorption and consequent toxicity of a toxic element sufficiently similar chemically to preclude selectivity on the part of the plant. 354 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 ORNITHOLOGY .—Descriptions of three new screech owls from the United States.1 Harry C. OBERHOLSER, Bureau of Biological Survey. The identification of screech owls, Otus aszo, from various sources, including Texas, has made necessary the examination of a consider- able number of these birds from various parts of the United States. In addition to the collection of the U. 8. National Museum, including that of the Biological Survey, there have been examined a large number of specimens from other museums and from individuals. The writer is, therefore, indebted for the loan of comparative material to Dr. Frank M. Chapman, Dr. A. I. Ortenburger, Dr. Louis B. Bishop, Dr. Max M. Peet, Professor Myron H. Swenk, Dr. Joseph Grinnell, Dr. Josselyn Van Tyne, Dr. D. Elton Beck, Dr. John W. Sugden, Dr. Vasco M. Tanner, Miss Edith R. Force, Ralph H. Imler, C. D. Bunker, J. L. Peters, H. V. Williams, Edwin D. McKee, C. C. Presnall, E. R. Warren, and C. Lynn Hayward. Study of the material thus brought together has resulted in the dis- covery of three apparently new subspecies of Otus aso, which it seems worth while to describe. Perhaps the most interesting, as well as the most beautiful, of these is: Otus asio swenki,” subsp. nov. Nebraska Screech Owl Subspecific characters—Similar to Otus asio aikeni, of central Colorado, but smaller; in gray phase much paler on the upper surface and somewhat so below, the face lighter, more whitish; both upper and lower parts more finely marked with blackish; in red phase also paler. Measurements.—Adult male*: wing, 153-170 (average, 160.6) mm; tail, 75-82 (78.6); culmen from cere, 13.5—16 (15.2); tarsus, 35-40 (37.6) ; middle toe without claw, 17-20 (18.6). Adult female‘: length in flesh (type), 221 mm; wing, 162-169 (average, 164.7); tail, 79-85.5 (82.2); culmen from cere, 14-17 (15.8); tarsus, 36-39.5 (37.6); middle toe without claw, 18-20 (18.9). Type.—Adult female, collection of Prof. Myron H. Swenk; Chadron, Dawes County, Nebraska, altitude 3,450 feet; February 1, 1918; L. M. Gates. Geographic distributcon.—Resident and breeds in the middle United States, north to central southern Manitoba; west to western Nebraska and central western Oklahoma; south to central western Oklahoma, and central southern Kansas; and east to central Kansas, central eastern Nebraska, western Minnesota, and central southern Manitoba. - Remarks.—The discovery of this interesting new owl came as a decided 1 Received May 22, 1937. 2 Named for Prof. Myron H. Swenk, of Lincoln, Nebraska. 3 Meebo specimens, from Nebraska, Kansas, Manitoba, Minnesota, and North akota. ~ 4 Ten specimens, from Nebraska, Kansas, Minnesota, and North Dakota. Aue. 15, 1937 OBERHOLSER: NEW SCREECH OWLS 355 surprise in the course of a study to determine the actual range of Otus aszo hasbrouckt. From that form it differs so decidedly in its much paler coloration that it scarcely needs comparison. From Olus asio naevius in gray phase it differs in its much paler and less coarsely dark-marked upper surface, paler and more whitish face; and in red phase by its decidedly lighter color. From Otus asio maxwelliae in gray phase it differs in its decidedly darker and more finely marked upper surface, less whitish face, and darker, i.e., more ex- tensively black-streaked and barred lower surface. Birds from eastern Kansas (Douglas County, and west to east central Kansas in Harvey County) are darker and mostly more brownish, thus verging so much toward Otus asio naevius that they are referable to that race. On the other hand, birds from eastern Nebraska (Lincoln and other localities) are rather darker and more brownish than typical Otus asio swenki, and thus verge a little toward Otus asio naevius, but they are de- cidedly nearer to Otus asio swenkz. While no specimens of this new race from Colorado have been examined, it probably ranges at least to the eastern border of that state. It probably occurs also in the Panhandle of north- western Texas (although no specimens from that region have been seen), since a specimen from Ellis County, Oklahoma, which borders on the Texas Panhandle, is Otus asio swenkt. The examination in this connection of a considerable number of screech owls from central and eastern Oklahoma, Benton County, northwestern Arkansas, with a few from central northern Texas, and from Greenwood County and Cedar Vale, southeastern Kansas, now shows that these areas are occupied by Ctus aszo hasbrouckt. It gives me great pleasure to name this handsome screech owl for Prof. Myron H. Swenk, of the University of Nebraska, who has done so much to advance the study of ornithology in the state of Nebraska. Furthermore, it is appropriate that the bird should be called the Nebraska screech owl, since it apparently reaches its maximum differentiation in that state. Following is a list of the localities from which specimens of Otus asio swenki have been examined: Kansas: Stockton (Feb. 22, 1936); Hamilton County (Nov. 19, 1934); Wallace County (June 24 and 29, 1911); Comanche County (May 25 and 29, 1911); Coolidge (July 12, 1921). MANITOBA: Winnipeg (June 4, 1930); Deer Lodge, Winnipeg (Nov. 12, 1928). MINNESOTA: Beaver, Roseau County (Jan. 7, 1932); Stafford, Roseau County (Nov. 20, 1926); Poklitz, Roseau County (March 3, 1927); Badger, Roseau County (Feb. 27, 1927); Mickinock, Roseau County (March 8, 1930); Dieter, Roseau County (March 10, 1932); Jadis, Roseau County (Dec. 28, 1926). | NEBRASKA: Spencer (Dec. 14, 1931); Scottsbluff (June 28, 1916); Cha- dron (Feb. 1, 1918); Lincoln (Nov. 138, 19382; Dec. 26, 1934); Kearney (Dec. 14, 1924); Union (May 6, 1933). 356 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 8 Norty Daxota: Grafton (May 18, 1933; Nov. 10, 1933; Dec. 6, 1923; April 25, 1923; Feb. 19, 1924); Hankinson (July 22, 1912). OKLAHOMA: 7 miles south of Arnett, Ellis County (May 18, 1936). Otus asio mychophilus, subsp. nov. Grand Canyon Screech Owl Subspecific characters.—Similar to Otus asio inyoensis Grinnell® from Inyo County, California, but upper parts darker, usually more brownish; lower parts more numerously vermiculated with blackish, thus appearing darker. Measurements.—Adult male®: wing, 159-170 (average, 164) mm; tail, 81.5—94 (85.2); culmen from cere, 14—16 (15); height of bill at base, 12-13.5 (12.6); tarsus, 35-39 (37.3); middle toe without claw, 18-19 (18.4). Adult female’: wing, 168-173 (169.3); tail, 86-92 (89.5); culmen from cere, 15— 16.5 (15.9); height of bill at base, 12.5-14 (13.3); tarsus, 36-40 (37.8); middle toe without claw, 18.5—-21.5 (19.8). Type.—Adult female, No. 340593, U. S. National Museum, Biological Survey collection; south rim of Grand Canyon, 6,900 feet altitude, Grand Canyon Village, Arizona; January 28, 1935; Russell K. Grater, original number, 23. Geographic distribution.—Northern Arizona and southern Utah, north to north central Utah (Provo); west to southwestern Utah; south to northern Arizona; and east to central eastern Utah (Moab). Remarks.—Specimens of this new race have heretofore sometimes been identified as Otus asio aikeni, but proper comparison indicates at once that they do not belong to this race, since they differ in their darker, more finely vermiculated upper parts, and more finely vermiculated and less streaked lower surface. From Otus asio cineraceus of southern Arizona this new race differs in much larger size, darker and usually more uniform and more finely vermiculated upper surface. Specimens from Vernon and Jensen, northern Utah, are decidedly paler and less marked below than the birds from central and southern Utah, here referred to Otus asio mychophilus, and are apparently referable to Otus asio inyoensis from southeastern California, which would indicate that the range of the latter subspecies extends over Nevada as far north as Fallon and east to northeastern Utah. The specimen of this new subspecies here made its type has been gener- ously donated to the Biological Survey Collection by Edwin D. McKee, Park Naturalist of the Grand Canyon National Park, Arizona. Seventeen specimens of Otus asto mychophilus have been examined, these representing the following localities: Arizona: Grand Canyon, South Rim (Oct. 2, 1934; Jan. 28, 1935); Grand Canyon Village (May 4, 1931); 15 miles south of Grand Canyon Village (Nov. 30, 1934); 10 miles south of Grand Canyon Village (Oct. 29, 1934). Urtan: Springdale (Jan. 27, 1935); Provo (Feb. 11, 1984; May 19, 1933; 6 The Auk, Vol. XLV, No.2, April 16,1928, p. 213. 6 Six specimens, from southern Utah and northern Arizona. 7 Six specimens, from southern Utah and northern Arizona. Aue. 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY O00 July 19, 1933); Moab (June 9, 1927); Zion Canyon, Washington County (July 8, 1933); St. George (spring, 1937; Nov., 1933). Otus asio clazus, subsp. nov. San Jacinto Screech Owl Subspecific characters Similar to Otus asio quercinus, but very much darker, more purely grayish (less brownish); lower parts more broadly streaked and more densely and numerously barred. Measurements.—Adult male (type); length (in flesh) 212 mm; extent of wings, 560; wing, 160; tail, 90; culmen from cere, 16; height of bill at base, 13.5; tarsus, 36; middle toe without claw, 19. Adult female: wing, 167 mm; tail, ; culmen from cere, 15.5; tarsus, 35.5; middle toe without claw, 19.5. Type.—Adult male, No. 186186, U. 8. National Museum, Biological Sur- vey collection; San Jacinto Mountains, altitude 5,500 feet, California; April 28, 1903; Frank Stephens; original number, 6,221. Geographic distribution.—San Jacinto and San Gabriel Mountains, south- ern California. Remarks.—While we have seen only two specimens of this screech owl, these are so much darker than any of the races of Otus asio the ranges of which approach the San Jacinto Mountains, that is, Otus aszo quercinus and Otus asio inyoensis, that they apparently represent a distinct race confined probably to this limited area. The bird here described as Otus asio clazus is, in fact, the darkest of all the California races of the species. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 546TH MEETING The 546th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club January 13, 1937, President R. C. WELLS presiding. Informal communications.—H. D. Misir spoke on some peculiar mark- ings on surfaces of Pennsylvanian sandstone beds. C. Max Bauzr described recent work in the Yellowstone National Park. Program.—C. E. VAN ORSTRAND: Temperatures in the lava beds of East Central and South Central Oregon. Temperature records of 7 springs, 7 flowing wells, and 9 non-flowing wells were discussed with reference to the hydrology and voleanology of the area. A new type of depth-temperature curve was introduced. The curve con- sists of a series of steps instead of the smooth uniform curves of sedimentary areas in which the temperature gradients increase with the depth. The hori- zontal portion of the step is supposed to be due to convection of water within and between the lava beds. The general rise of the series of steps varies from about 20 to 40 feet per degree Fahrenheit (1° C. in 11.0 to 21.9 meters). At Lakeview, Oregon, a temperature of 190° F. was found at a depth of 600 feet in a well located on the mountain ridge at an estimated elevation 358 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES’ VOL. 27, NO. 8 of about 500 feet above the level of Goose Lake plain. This evidence suggests the possibility that the mountain ridge is the source of the heat and water in the hot springs and flowing wells located on the floor of the Goose Lake valley at a distance of about 4 mile from the well in which the high tem- perature was recorded. The temperature of the water is near the boiling point (203—4° F., 95.0-95.6° C.) at that elevation. The possibility that the hot water rose to the surface of the ground along the fault in the plain or that it originated in a magma at a moderate depth were considered. A final decision in regard to the three possibilities was not reached. (Author’s abstract.) G. R. MansFiELD: Hrosional history of the Paradise Valley quadrangle, Idaho. The Paradise Valley quadrangle, which lies a few miles southeast of Idaho Falls, Ida., adjoins on the northwest other areas previously studied and described by the writer. The Blackfoot River, which crosses it, con- nects by transverse canyons a series of intermontane valleys. Its present canyon in the Paradise Valley quadrangle is bordered by remnants of older and higher valley systems. In the higher parts of the quadrangle remnants of older valley systems are preserved also. These, together with those near the Blackfoot River, include a succession of 11 rather distinct erosion stages. The pattern of these remnant surfaces, together with other features of this and adjoining areas, suggests that the present drainage systems of the quadrangle have been developed by superposition from a former widely extended cover of Tertiary sediments, of which considerable remnants now remain in the quadrangle. The relations of the erosion surfaces here de- scribed to earlier published views of the erosional history of the region as a whole have not been worked out. However, it is believed that a number of the lower and newer surfaces are related to temporary base levels estab- lished by basalt flows, now more or less dissected, and that these base levels have served to protect and preserve in the Paradise Valley quadrangle records of brief stages in erosional history that in the higher adjoining county have largely been destroyed. (Author’s abstract.) 547TH MEETING The 547th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club January 27, 1937, Presi- dent R. C. WELLS presiding. Informal communications —JEWELL J. Guass: Sodalite from Magnet Cove, Arkansas. A specimen of a translucent light violet blue mineral was collected by Mr. H. D. Miser from a quarry owned and operated by Mr. J. W. Kimzey, at Magnet Cove, Arkansas, and submitted to the U. S. Geological Survey Petrology Laboratory for identification. On examination it was found that the mineral was sodalite. The sodalite is found in veins and lenses varying from a few to several inches in thickness in a dense dark-greenish gray tinguaite dike rock which is now being crushed and used as shingle material. The tinguaite dikes in which the sodalite is found are located near the extreme south rim of the Magnet Cove intrusive complex. This unusual blue mineral attracted the quarry owner’s attention as a curiosity, but has proved of exceeding mineralogical interest, because among the minerals described from that unique assemblage of Magnet Cove minerals, this is the first occurrence of sodalite to be reported from that locality. (Author’s abstract.) F. L. Hess spoke on the peculiar odor of microcline from the Black Hills. Program.—EUGENE CALLAGHAN: Alunite deposits of the Marysvale region, Utah. The alunite deposits are in the western part of the High Plateaus of Ava. 15,1937 © PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 309 Utah. The rocks in the region range in age from Carboniferous to Recent. However, the alunite is restricted to the lower part of a series of Tertiary voleanic rocks, which lie upon Wasatch and older sedimentary rocks. The voleanic rocks are overlain by a sedimentary formation tentatively called the Sevier River, which contains diatoms regarded by Mr. K. E. Lohman, of the Geological Survey, as of Upper Pliocene or Lower Pleistocene age. The deposits are of two types, called the replacement type and the vein type. Those of the replacement type are chiefly altered volcanic rock with variable proportions of alunite, some of which is sodic. They commonly have a large proportion of impurities. Deposits of the vein type are mostly coarsely crystalline and much purer than those of the replacement type. Though there is evidently considerable alunite of both types in this region, - work done thus far does not justify revision of earlier estimates of reserves. (Author’s abstract.) H. G. Byers: The distribution of selenium, with geologic implications. 548TH MEETING The 548th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club February 10, 1937, President R. C. WELLS presiding. Informal communications —E. INGERSON described an instrument for more accurate determination of structural features of rock specimens for petrographic studies. F. C. Cauxins described gold deposits in the Slumbering Hills of Nevada. Program.—G. A. Coopsr: The Centerfield limestone of New York and tts equivalents in the midwest. RaupH Tuck: The Matanuska coal field, Alaska. The Matanuska coal field, one of the two commercial coal-producing fields in Alaska, is located in the south central part of the Territory, near the head of Cook Inlet, and on a branch line of the Government-owned-and-operated Alaska Railroad. Coal has been produced from this field since 1916, and although the pro- duction is relatively small as compared with the coal fields of the United States, it plays an important part in the economic development of this part of Alaska. From this field the railroad, as well as the towns situated along its southern part are furnished with a cheap and reliable fuel. A few thousands tons are also annually exported to coastal towns and canneries. The coal field is in the Matanuska Valley, an east-west valley about 50 miles long and 5 miles wide, which lies between the Talkeetna Mountains on the north and Chugach Mountains on the south. Cretaceous sandstone and shale, and Tertiary (Eocene) rocks. of which the lower member is an arkose, the middle, sandstone and shale with interbedded coal seams, and the upper, a conglomerate, crop out in the valley. In the upper part of the valley, both the Cretaceous and Tertiary are intruded by diorite dikes and sills. The valley was occupied by a glacier during the Pleistocene, so that glacial deposits cover the valley floor, and in great part obscure the bedrock formations. In general the Cretaceous and Tertiary formations of the valley are a downfaulted block between the dioritic rocks of the Talkeetna Mountains on the north, and the metamorphosed sediments, volcanics, and intrusive rocks of the Chugach Mountains on the south. The valley formations are folded and faulted to a high degree in the upper part of the valley, and pro- gressively to a lesser extent in the lower part of the valley, likewise, the coal changes in rank from high rank bituminous and anthracite in the upper part to lignite and lower-grade bituminous in the lower part of the valley. 360 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 Considerable exploration and development has been done on the higher rank coal in the upper part of the valley, but at present they are not mined because of high mining costs resulting from the complex structure. All of the commercial coal production now comes from the lower part of the valley, in an area dominated by a distinctive topographic feature called Wishbone Hill, which is the surface expression of a southwest plunging syncline. The hill is capped by 1,200 feet of massive conglomerate, and underlying it is the coal bearing series, so that the coal crops out only around the margin of the hill. In the eastern part of the area, from which the greater part of the coal production has come, 2,000 feet of coal bearing formation is exposed. Over 20 coal beds with thicknesses of more than 3 feet are known to occur. Most of the seams are from 3 to 5 feet thick, and a high volatile bituminous coal is produced from them. Both the coal beds and the intervening sandstone and shale vary in thickness and composition within short distances, and the whole formation indicates rapid deposition in a number of small basins. Strike and transverse faults are common. The strike faults have small dis- placements, but the transverse faults—most of which are normal faults— have displacements up to 350 feet. Geological work has shown that there are reserves of a number of million tons recoverable above the present mine workings, and a similar amount below—a supply sufficient for local needs for a long time in the future. (Author’s abstract.) 549TH MEETING The 549th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club February 24, 1937, President R. C. WELLS presiding. Informal communications.—Taisia STADNICHENKO gave a brief report on what is being done by Arctic Institute in Soviet Russia. W. C. ALDEN spoke on condition of glaciers in Glacier National Park. Program.—E. N. Gopparp and T. 8. Lovrerine: Laramie fault pattern in the Front Range mineral belt, Colorado. C. H. Brrpstye: The uses of aerial photography. 550TH MEETING The 550th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, March 10, 1937, Presi- dent R. C. WELLS presiding. Informal communications.—W. T. ScHALLER discussed consideration of candidates for President of the Washington Academy of Sciences. J. P. MarsueE spoke on the age of Pitchblende from Great Slave Lake. E. INGERSON discussed temperature range of formation of hydrothermal and pneumatolitic minerals. Program.—N. H. Heck: Geological factors in safeguarding against earth- quakes. D. F. Hewett: Environment and relations of the hypogene manganese minerals. 551st MEETING The 551st meeting was held at the Cosmos Club March 24, 1937, Presi- dent R. C. WELLS presiding. Informal communications —M. I. GoupMAN described corroded pebbles in the Morrison formation on north end of Henry Mountains, Utah. Program. —J. H. Swartz: Some resistivity determinations of salt water boundaries. Ave. 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 361 C. F. Stewart SHARPE: Physiographic research on soil erosion. One phase of Soil Conservation research is the physiographic study of soil erosion. Investigations are under way in several representative areas. The most extensive work has been done in the southern Piedmont where conditions are particularly bad due to deep weathering and long cultivation of open- tilled crops. By combining physiographic, climatic, ecologic, and soil evi- dence, with field and library studies in erosion history since colonial times, the life histories of several selected gullies near Spartanburg, 8. C., have been reconstructed. Most gullying results from artificial concentration of flowing water. The gully hazard in the Piedmont is greatest in soils developed on acid igneous and metamorphic rocks. Such soils have porous sandy or silty topsoils, tight clay subsoils extending to a depth of three to five feet, and weak underlying parent material of rotten rock. Most gullies in these soils head in active ‘plunge pools” formed where a lip of subsoil projects over a recess in the weak parent material. During rains some of the run-off flows as a waterfall into the plunge pool, but an important part of the flow clings to the lip and and trickles back under the overhang, softening the parent material and causing it to fall or crumble away. The projecting lip is left unsupported and caves off in large blocks. Water seeping downward through tension cracks aids both softening and caving. Many gullies which have long been stable are found to be threatened with rejuvenation resulting from an increased flow of water or a lowering of base- level which initiates headward migration of a fall or “knickpoint.”’ Sheet erosion, a less obvious process, attacks primarily the topsoil and removes the most valuable part of the land. Evidence of recent sheet erosion and an estimate of the amount is given by exposed tree roots, and miniature pillars of earth capped by stones, lichens, leaves, etc. Small test plots are being studied to learn more about the method and rate of formation and removal of the loose granular surface layer of “‘crumb- mulch” characteristic of bare ground on certain soil types. Production of crumb-mulch is found to be greatly accelerated by the action of needle-ice during frost. Removal of as much as two and one quarter inches of this mulch in six weeks has been recorded. The importance of mass movement, particularly soil-creep, in the Pied- mont and southern Blue Ridge areas is shown by the very general presence of a line of rock fragments at the approximate base of the subsoil or B horizon and above the parent rock. Rock structure below and downhill flowage lamination in the soil above this ‘‘stone-line’’ indicate that it is the base of effective creep. (A uthor’s abstract.) 552ND MEETING The 552nd meeting was held at the Cosmos Club April 14, 1937, Vice- President F. C. CaLkIns presiding. Program.—D. A. ANDREWS: Asymmetrical distribution of stream terraces in southeastern Montana. Gravel terraces, many of which are of Pleistocene age, occur along most of the stream valleys in eastern Montana. These terraces have been mapped in considerable detail in the parts of Custer, Powder River, and Rosebud counties included in the coal reports on the Ashland, Rosebud, and Mizpah fields published by the U. 8. Geological Survey. These terraces lie from a few feet to 500 feet or more above the alluvium levels of the streams. Many terraces are preserved along Yellow- stone River flowing east and the Tongue River flowing northward; these are 362 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 8 the largest streams in the area and the terraces on the right sides of each of these valleys equal in size and number the terraces on the left sides of each valley. Terraces are few and widely separated along Powder River but are abun- dant on the west side of Mizpah, Pumpkin, and Rosebud Creeks, all of which flow northward; only a very few are preserved on the east side of these stream valleys. Several of the westward and northwestward flowing tribu- taries of these streams have terraces on the south and southwest sides but have few or none on the opposite side of the valleys. In contrast, terraces are preserved on the north and northwest sides and few or no terraces occur on the opposite sides of the east or northeast flowing tributaries of the same streams. There are no southward-flowing streams in the mapped portions of Custer, Powder River, and Rosebud Counties. In addition the profiles across these valleys are asymmetrical. The long gentle slope which bears the terraces is on the left side of the valleys. Tongue River, however, does not show this marked asymmetrical profile and inadequate information is available to draw conclusions about the profile of Yellowstone River. These observations show that the streams with asymmetrical valleys have mi- grated to the right and that they are still crowding their right banks. The stream valleys of the area here described are carved in thick beds of soft sandstones and shales which have a regional dip of about 50 feet per mile to the west toward the axis of the Tongue River syncline which follows the valley of Tongue River. On the west side of Tongue River the beds have a comparable dip to the east toward this syncline. The deflection of moving objects to the right in the northern hemisphere due to the rotation of the earth (a principle that is known in the United States as Ferrell’s law and in Europe as Baer’s law) is postulated as the dominant force that has caused the streams to migrate to the right. The application of Ferrell’s law indicates that the effect of the deflective force due to the earth’s rotation is greater in a stream whose flow has high velocity and whose course has meanders with small radii of curvature. The behavior of the streams in this part of Montana appears to be in accord with the application of Ferrell’s law; the small streams, whose velocities are high and whose courses have meanders with small radii of curvature, have mi- erated strongly to the right and the larger streams—Tongue and Yellow- stone Rivers—have not migrated dominantly either to the right or left. The approximate equal development of the high, intermediate and low ter- races along either side of the streams may indicate that the force has been acting continuously since the formation of the high terraces. In addition the application of Ferrell’s law indicates that this deflective force increases directly with the sine of the latitude of an area. (Author’s abstract.) W. G. Prerce: The Heart Mountain Overthrust near Shoshone Reservoir, Wyoming. Additional information on the nature of the Heart Mountain overthrust has been sought by the author in 1935 and 1936 by detailed plane table mapping of the areal and structural geology of the sedimentary rocks exposed in the valleys of the North and South Forks of Shoshone River. In 1916 Dake recognized two overthrusts, superimposed one above the other: The upper is the main thrust and the overlying block is mostly Madison limestone (Mississippian) ; the lower one is a thrust slice below the sole of the main Heart Mountain overthrust and contains over 5,000 feet of rock strata ranging in age from the Jurassic: Sundance to the Tertiary Wasatch. The limestone on Sheep: Mountain and Logan Mountain is part of the upper. thrust block. ’'The lower thrust slice is found on the southeast Auge. 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 363 side of Sheep Mountain and a small mass is exposed on the east side of the Shoshone Reservoir, but it is most conspicuous and best exposed on the south side of the South Fork of Shoshone River in a belt from half a mile to four miles wide and about 15 miles long. Throughout a large part of its ex- tent on the south side of South Fork Valley, the lower slice has been folded into a trough which roughly parallels the valley. Its trough-like form, which is the main controlling feature for the present areal distribution, is not easily discernible because the synclines, anticlines, faults, and overturned folds within the strata of the lower thrust slice tend to divert attention from the thrust fault at its base. | A transverse fault trending southeastward from Sheep Mountain passes beneath the upper thrust but cuts the lower thrust slice. Southwest of the transverse fault the lower thrust is deformed into the trough just described, but to the northeast the thrust plane is nearly horizontal. Evidence indicates that the block southwest of the transverse fault moved laterally southeast- ward. Slickensides observed on the lower thrust on the east side of Shoshone Reservoir indicate that there the lower thrust slice moved due east. The relation of the lower thrust to the upper thrust is obscure. None of the formations found in one of the thrust blocks are repeated in the other. Therefore, the relationship of the upper thrust to the lower one is such that they do not form an imbricate structure. Another uncommon, although not a unique, feature of the thrust blocks is that the lower one is a slice below the main Heart Mountain overthrust. The western limit of the lower thrust slice has not yet been definitely determined, but it seems probable that it does not extend westward beyond Logan Mountain or Sheep Mountain. - It is more extensive on the south side of the South Fork of Shoshone River, and west of Rock Creek it crosses from the south to the north side of the South Fork. The early basic breccias are the oldest volcanic rocks in the area, except for tuffaceous beds in the Wasatch and some of the older formations. Al- though the greater part of the early basic breccia is composed of surface flows, a considerable amount of breccia was intruded as sills, plugs, and dikes of large size. The volcanic breccia is definitely later than the over- thrusting, for not only does it rest on top of the upper thrust block, but fissures through which it rose to the surface cut through the upper block and continue down into the autochthon. Work by C. B. Read and others indi- cates that the early basic breccia is of upper Eocene or lower Oligocene age, and as the Wasatch formation is involved in the thrusting, the age of the overthrust is probably middle or upper Eocene. (Author’s abstract.) W. O. FIELD, JR.: Some recent changes in Alaskan Coast Glaciers. 553RD MEETING The 553rd meeting was held at the Cosmos Club April 28, 1937, President R. C. WELLs presiding. Program.—N. W. Bass: Origin of the oil bearing shoestring sands of north- eastern Oklahoma and southwestern Kansas. D. C. Barton: Petroleum geophysics. | M. N. BRAMLETTE, Secretary. 364 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 8 @Obituary ARTHUR Brooks CLAwson, physiologist in charge of investigations of stock poisoning by plants of the Bureau of Animal Industry, U. 8. Depart- ment of Agriculture, suffered an attack of cerebral thrombosis while engaged in studying problems on the Utah deserts and died at his home in Washing- ton, June 30, 1937. Mr. Clawson was born June 18, 1878 at Green Lake, Wis. Specializing in biology he was educated at Ripon College, the University of Michigan from which he was graduated in 1904, and at the University of Wisconsin. He taught biology at Lake Forest College for two years and in*1909 joined the group studying plant-poisoning of livestock, then in the Bureau of Plant Industry. He was identified with these researches during the remainder of his life making many contributions of fundamental importance in that field. He was acknowledged the foremost American authority on stock-poisoning by plants and enjoyed the confidence of the livestock breeders as well as of his scientific associates. He published a number of papers reporting his observations among which special mention may be made of his work on loco- weeds, larkspurs, lupines, cyanogenetic plants, milkweeds and Senecio poisoning. He had already made substantial progress in the solution of the problem of bighead in sheep, the study on which he was engaged at the time of his death, and had succeeded in demonstrating for the first time the causes of this condition which annually results in a large loss of livestock. Mr. Clawson was in charge of the Experiment Station at Salina, Utah, operated by the Bureau of Animal Industry for the study of stock-poisoning plants. He was a member of the Washington Academy of Sciences, a fellow of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, a member of the Botanical Society of Washington, Biological Society of Washington, Illinois Academy of Science, Wisconsin Academy of Science, the Cosmos Club and Sigma Xi. He was interred at his old home, Green Lake, Wis- consin. Pauu VERE Rovunpy, geologist of the U. 8. Geological Survey, died sud- denly of heart failure June 21, 1937, at his home, Chevy Chase, Md., following many months of ill health caused by high blood pressure. Mr. Roundy was born January 8, 1884, at Cooperstown Junction, N. Y. His collegiate education was begun at Syracuse University and completed at George Washington University, from which he received his A.B. degree in 1912. He was appointed to the U. 8S. Geological Survey in 1908, retaining that connection as geologist and paleontologist until his death. During the World War he collaborated with other members of the Survey in working out the geology of the Osage oil field in Oklahoma. Later he was employed with others in estimating the resources of the Elk Hills Naval Reserve No. 1, in California, and within the last two years he has been at work on a report upon the phosphate deposits of Florida. He is widely known for his contri- butions to the study of the ostracods and conodonts. Mr. Roundy was a member of the Paleontological Society, the American Association of Petroleum Geologists, the Society of Economic Paleontolo- gists and Mineralogists, the Geological Society of Washington, and the Washington Academy of Sciences. at ‘ rt rt eo 5 tee ee Pe aii x x ho» > 9 . Ty wi ve [oa ts oe <5 3G ‘ t \ 4 eke oF rane ~3 ; <3) wee €e er se: > ae 5 } = ¥ ‘ Sis $ ; NS Spe tia? 4 wi AH ~ ~ ‘J t YN og + ae he 4 But a nae > niet , a Ai aii AS gmt yo 7 ‘ ~ ‘ } r+ > \ Puysics.—The fundamentals of photosynthesis. JAamEs Franck... “e oe Genetics.—Hybridity as a factor in evolution. Rosert F. Gi Botany.—Phyllostachys sulphurea var. viridis var. nov. and PA 4 (Carr.) H.de L. Rosert A. YounG............ weccee Borany.—Notes on harmel, or ‘Syrian rue.”” Wiitam A. Dar Piant PuysioLocy.—Rubidium and strontium toxicity to plants in hibited by potassium and calcium tea tessa: ANNIE | HURPORARRER. 155 cee «| cate eek oreeeeeeenererensee _ ORNITHOLOGY.—Description of three new screech owls from t United States. Harry C. OBERHOLSBR.......... 2 ae PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY............ te eae wre ‘ ¥ Osrrvary: ArTHur Brooxs Cuawson, Paut VERE Rounpy......._ ina | a This Journal is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals emacs ORE 1 oc eee Sen. i ont ete Freperick D. Rossini BUREAU OF STANDARDS IATE EDITORS ees oe Ok. w. igeinctn: ites Miia oa _ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY ; Ras ; %, aa Ret, re pe? wW. W. Rusey Sac | GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Ee Henry ise Cotas, ; J R. ANTHROPOLOGICAL ‘SOCIETY oe Fie oe ren eka _ CHEMICAL SOCIETY _ 5 cate BY THE Y ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Si: ae ter under the Act of Gn pust 24, 1912, at Menasha, Wis. 4 ata a aspirate of postage rs for in the Act of February 28, 1925. e,, This JouRNAL, the official organ of the , Wasbineton Aapaaatygt Seie 28, (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated socie notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouaNat is issue monthly, on the fifteenth of each month. Volumes correspond to calendar ye ai : Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgent! quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JourNAL and conform manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other m 2D a <é Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should d- * be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The Gelert Be pa assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they unde arta hay ae correct other than obvious minor errors. aus Ep. Shy? Illustrations in excess of one full-page halftone or two full-page tae draw vings 0 be paid for by the author. Line drawings are preferred. _ Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will Sones bee to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be a in form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. cana Se bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive paginatio ion ae Oe ‘i date of issue, and a ie pad will be furnished at cost when ordered, in acoordanee Wiig ae the following schedule of prices. 2 ag 4 ies ow : ¥ sa 43 Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers => 50 Gy - pias sus ee $2.00 See 100 $ .75 $1.20 $1.50 $2.00 $2.75 <4) 150 1.25 1.90 2.55 3.25 3.50 “ee 200 1.75 2.60 3.60 4.50 4.26 “oo tae 250 2.00 3.30 4.65 5.75 °-0) Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed ir corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional Rah Subsertption Rates.—-Per volume@.ic's a vos acto ss Voaseye wae ek + el ae Ag e 6 ee To members of affiliated societies; per volume...... Yeh aeta eh vane alice - 22 is hO es eee Single MUMBENG.:... acs aivci¥ vie degli Wale a ere ce te San ae ie rain aati vee i - ee Si - Remittances should be made payable to ‘““‘Washington Academy of Sciences rar addressed to 350 Ahnaip Street, Menasha, Wis., or to the Treasurer, H. G. ‘oe = Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C. “ an ey Sa) i 4 Exchanges.—The JourNnat does not exchange with other publications. ate og oy, was ree ; %, Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that nines is made to ay the Treasurer within thirty days after date of following issue. ke a en OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY je a Ohaaee President: Caartes Tuom, Bureau of Plant Industry. Tel aa Corresponding Secretary: NaTtHAN R. Smitu, Bureau of Plant Industry. ae Recording Secretary: Oscar S. ApAms, Coast and Geodetic Survey. _ 4 Treasurer: Hpnry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Pall : De Te ., Sl de a =) * 7 f | + ear “ = ¥ — a. ¢ 2) ie > — 5 it Pe s a oe) >» Fak + Fine JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mou. 27 SEPTEMBER 15, 1937 No. 9 CHEMISTRY.—Some aspects of the study of insulin. VINCENT DU VIGNEAUD, George Washington University. Mr. President, fellow-members of the Washington Chemical So- ciety, I wish to thank you for this award. I deeply appreciate it. There is nothing that so warms one’s heart as the recognition of one’s work by his fellow workers. In accepting this award, I should like to make sincere acknowledgment of the loyal and enthusiastic co- operation of a group of graduate and post-graduate students, whom I have had the pleasure of working with in these sulfur studies. I should like to mention particularly Lewis Butz, Wilbur Patterson, Hubert Loring, Helen Dyer, Chase Jones and Gail Miller. Your tribute I feel is as much to them and their work as to me and the part that I have played in the accomplishment of these researches. On their behalf as well as my own permit me to thank you once more. In addressing you this evening, I shall not discuss with you the researches directly mentioned in your award, that is, the synthesis of glutathione, nor the fields closely allied to it on the cystinyl pep- tides and homocystine, for all of these researches have been pre- sented before this society on former occasions. I thought I would discuss with you, instead, the problem out of which these researches arose and the possible significance that these studies may have in the understanding of the original problem. I think it is always interest- ing to trace the origin of research ideas. Seldom do ideas spring forth wholly formed as did the goddess Athena from the brow of Zeus; nor are they spontaneously generated. They are no more spontaneously generated than living matter itself. Ideas are propagated by other ideas, and develop slowly, nurtured by facts and observation. It is in this way, step by step, that a research program develops, and it is interesting and sometimes profitable to retrace the devious trail along which it has traveled. It is like tracing the family tree of re- search. | Most of our own researches in the field of sulfur chemistry have 1 Address on the occasion of the award of the Hillebrand Prize for 1936, delivered before the Chemical Society of Washington, March 11, 1937. Received March 29, 1937. 365 366 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 had their outgrowth from our studies on the chemistry of insulin. In some instances the new research problem has arisen unexpectedly, as did the homocystine problem through our trying to work out a particular phase of the chemistry of insulin; while in other instances the researches have come about through a realization that more fun- damental knowledge was needed of the chemistry of certain com- pounds in order the better to understand the chemistry of insulin, as exemplified by our studies on cystine and cystinyl peptides. At first sight many of these sulfur problems might appear to have no con- nection with insulin. It is true they have seemingly wandered far afield, but there is an underlying connection. I shall endeavor to show you this connection and how some of these problems have arisen. I shall also try to interweave through this discussion some of the results of our own studies of insulin itself, and finally present to you a glimpse of our present chemical knowledge of this hormone and the effect which the study of insulin has had on our conception of proteins and certain other hormones. Quite early in the study of insulin it was suspected by various workers that insulin might be a sulfur-containing compound. This was very shortly after the demonstration, with which you are all acquainted, of the presence of this hormone in the pancreas by Bant- ing and Best in 1921. It was not until 1926, however, that the sus- picion of its being a sulfur compound grew into a very definite pos- sibility out of the work of Professor Abel of Johns Hopkins. It is rather interesting how this came about. Professor Abel had heated some insulin preparations with phenol in sealed tubes for some pur- pose, and, when one of the tubes was opened, Professor Abel noticed an odor of hydrogen sulfide. He followed this up and subsequently found that the amount of sulfur, labile to weak alkali, paralleled the activity of certain preparations, and that when the sulfur was split out, the activity was destroyed. Shortly thereafter he succeeded in isolating insulin in crystalline form. He found that the crystalline material likewise contained sulfur in a labile form. These findings led Abel to suggest that the Islets of Langerhans might be depend- ent upon the presence in our food of a special labile sulfur compound, a precursor indispensable for the elaboration of the hormone, in the absence of an adequate supply of which pathological alterations in the cells of the Islets of Langerhans would take place. It is quite clear that the question of the identity of the sulfur moiety became one of paramount importance. At that time we were studying the problem at Rochester in Pro- SEPT. lo, 1937 VIGNEAUD: INSULIN 367 fessor Murlin’s department and had obtained evidence that the in- sulin contained cystine and that the labile sulfur could be accounted for on that basis. When the sulfur was split out, the disulfide linkage was destroyed and the test for cystine greatly reduced in intensity, indicating that the cystine was the source of the labile sulfur. Al- though the sulfur of the insulin was labile, the sulfur in the hydroly- sate of the insulin became stable like that of free cystine. This change in lability upon hydrolysis was identical with what would be expected of amino acid derivatives of cystine based on the work of Brand on the lability of the sulfur of peptides of cystine. In this work at Rochester we were also able to confirm Abel’s crystalliza- tion of insulin. From our studies we came to the conclusion that the sulfur was present as the disulfide linkage and that insulin was most likely a derivative of cystine, and we suggested that cystine in insulin was linked to the rest of the molecule by peptide linkages. The conclusive demonstration of the actual presence of cystine in crystalline insulin, however, had to rest on isolation; so later, when we had the opportunity of working in Professor Abel’s laboratory, we took up the isolation of cystine from crystalline insulin. Of course, this isolation work had to be carried out on a very small scale and we had to work out our own methods. We hydrolyzed a gram of crystalline insulin and immediately ran into difficulties with the iso- lation of the cystine. We soon recognized that one of the difficulties was that we had partially racemized the cystine, and in looking into the literature we found that racemized cystine was far more soluble than [-cystine. It was here that our interest in the isomers of cystine arose. We found that in spite of the great amount of work that had been done on the problem, the isomers had not been isolated and, in fact, there was much difference of opinion as to whether the in- active material was the meso or racemic form or a mixture of the two. Somewhat later when the opportunity arose we undertook the resolution of cystine, and succeeded in isolating the other isomers of cystine, the dextrorotatory form, the racemic and the meso forms. We then became interested in the utilization of the isomers by the animal body and studied their ability to promote growth of animals on a cystine-deficient diet, finding that the d-isomer could not be utilized. This in turn led to studies of oxidation of these isomers and also to the behavior of the optical isomers of other amino acids in the body. It also made possible a study of the solubilities of the isomers, and we were finally able to show why the mixture of isomers was so 368 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 soluble, which led us back to the point from which we had started some five years earlier in the insulin work. To go back now to the isolation of cystine from crystalline insulin, I might say that this was readily accomplished when care was taken to avoid as much as possible the racemization of cystine, and when we had worked out a method which would separate tyrosine from cystine in such small quantities. Thus the isolation of cystine from the insulin demonstrated beyond any argument that cystine was present in the insulin molecule. Knowing that cystine was present naturally brought many ques- tions to mind. One of the first questions to arise was whether cys- tine peptides might affect the lowering of blood sugar. It was then we realized that as yet no peptide of cystine through the carboxyl group of cystine had been prepared, and that no method was avail- able at the time for the accomplishment of this type of peptide synthesis. Cystinyl peptides were also necessary from other stand- points, both chemical and biological and, somewhat later, it was clear that such a step was vital for a convenient synthesis of gluta- thione. While continuing the insulin researches we, therefore, car- ried on parallel studies on the synthesis of peptides of cystine, the successful outcome of which placed us in a position to accomplish the synthesis of glutathione and isoglutathione. The synthesis of glutathione, if I might say so, was really inci- dental to the larger study we were interested in, that is, cystinyl peptides. We were interested in the development of convenient and workable methods for getting these compounds and then in the study of their physiological and chemical properties. The experience gained with this tripeptide puts us one step further towards making more complicated peptides of cystine. What I should like to emphasize is that the glutathione synthesis was not an end in itself but merely a step in a general program. In addition to knowing that cystine was present in insulin, it was important to know whether all of the sulfur was present as cys- tine sulfur or whether there was present some other sulfur-containing compound. We first determined the cystine content by the Folin- Looney method and by the amazingly specific Sullivan method. The Folin-Looney method gave much higher values than the Sul- livan, and, in fact, higher than could be accounted for on the basis of the total sulfur. With the specific Sullivan method, only about three-fourths of the sulfur could be accounted for on the basis of cystine. SEPT. 15, 1937 VIGNEAUD: INSULIN 369 A number of possibilities might account for this situation. One, a strange sulfur compound might be present; two, a difficultly hydro- lyzable peptide of cystine might have remained in the hydrolysate which would react in the Folin-Looney reaction but not in the Sul- livan method; three, the cystine might be partially destroyed during hydrolysis; and, four, some substance might be generated during the hydrolysis which would account for the high Folin-Looney reaction; and, finally, various combinations of these possibilities might exist. One of the first things we did when we undertook to settle this question was to heat various amino acids with hydrochloric acid and sulfuric acid to see if such treatment would produce substances that would be chromogenic with the Folin-Marenzi method, which was a modification of the Folin-Looney procedure. Interestingly enough, methionine upon being heated with strong sulfuric acid was found to give a positive reaction with the Folin- Marenzi reagent for cystine. This was the start of our series of in- vestigations concerning homocystine. In searching for the substance in the reaction mixture responsible for the positive test, we isolated a crystalline compound which we were able to demonstrate to be the next higher symmetrical homologue of cystine. The possibility of this compound being involved in the intermediary metabolism of methio- nine in the body immediately occurred to us. Investigations concern- ing the utilization of the homocystine by animals on a cystine-de- ficient diet and studies of the oxidation of the compound were there- fore undertaken. Synthesis of the homocystine, resolution of it into its optical isomers, and the demonstration of the steric relationship between its isomers and those of methionine soon followed, as well as studies of the higher homologues of homocystine and methionine. Although this observation of the effect of sulfuric acid on methio- nine led to some rather interesting results, it did not explain the par- ticular thing we were after. In the first place, the difference between these reactions existed in hydrochloric acid hydrolysates, and hydro- chloric acid did not yield a chromogenic substance from methionine; and, secondly, methionine was not present in insulin in more than traces, if at all. We still had the original question to solve, and we worked off and on on this problem during the next few years and just within the past few months we have obtained results which lead us to believe that we have finally accounted for the sulfur of insulin. It is rather amusing that the entire homocystine work with which we have been engaged during the past six years would not have taken place had we been able to account for the sulfur of insulin at 370 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 that time. It is indeed curious the path which research may take, and perhaps it is these queer turns and quirks that make it fun to try to follow the pathway. Although this particular path of homocystine researches appeared to have no connection with insulin, a recent turn of events has brought the two fields back together again and serves as an interesting example of how offshoots of a research may wander away and bend back again, touch, and even aid the original research. I refer here to the recent work on the question of whether or not a trace of methio- nine is present in crystalline insulin, and to the fact that one of the methods for determining methionine depends on the determination of the homocysteine thiolactone formed from methionine by hy- driodic acid. I shall refer to this again later. Along with attempts to fractionate insulin hydrolysates to see if a strange sulfur compound were present, and testing for the presence or absence of known sulfur-containing compounds such as thiol- histidine, we have also studied the question of the completeness of hydrolysis of insulin and the prevention of destruction of the cystine during hydrolysis. To make a very long story short, after trying various procedures, we finally found that if we hydrolyzed insulin with twenty per cent hydrochloric acid and 50 per cent formic acid we were able to ac- count by the Sullivan method for all of the sulfur as cystine within the experimental error of the method. We were able, furthermore, to adduce evidence that the previous low results were really due to a destruction of the cystine on the one hand and incomplete hydrolysis on the other. Whether or not a trace of methionine is present cannot be stated definitely. Our own results on the study would indicate that if it is present at all it is even less than that reported by Brand. You can readily understand the difficulty of proving the presence or absence of a very slight trace of methionine in dealing with such a compound as insulin. One is dealing with such small amounts that one is at the borderline of the accuracy of the methods. Much more work will be needed before reaching a final decision. Another aspect of the sulfur of insulin that has intrigued us, which even more forcibly brings out the importance of the sulfur, is the effect of reduction upon the activity of insulin. Earlier work had shown that various reducing agents destroyed the activity, but the reagents used were quite vigorous ones and one would have reason to believe that groupings other than the disulfide may have been re- Sept. 15, 1937 VIGNEAUD: INSULIN 371 duced. We thought it would be rather interesting to study the effect of such mild reducing agents as cysteine and glutathione, which were more specific for the disulfide grouping. Even with such subtle reducing agents as these the insulin became inactivated. From much experimentation we finally came to the conclusion that the reduction of the disulfide grouping was the cause of the inactivation. It is interesting that reoxidation did not restore the activity. These results have been confirmed and extended by other workers, and it has been found that the rate of inactivation proceeds faster than that of re- duction. This has led some to conclude that there are certain group- ings particularly sensitive to reduction and that one or two disulfide linkages have a special function in insulin. Our own tendency is to regard the architecture of the molecule as a whole as the important factor with regard to its hypoglycemic action and that any change which would produce a change in this architecture is apt to produce a destruction of physiological activity. From this standpoint no one particular disulfide linkage is neces- sarily more important than another as far as being responsible for the activity. The rupture of a given disulfide linkage might modify the architecture sufficiently to destroy its ability to bring about the oxidation of carbohydrates. Although the disulfide linkage per se may not be responsible for the insulin action, I should like to emphasize the fact that so far no one has split out or changed the disulfide grouping without destroying potency. I would like to add, parenthetically, that there are some who speak in terms of a prosthetic grouping being present in insulin, that is, the presence of some smaller grouping attached to the protein molecule which is responsible for the activity; while there are others who like to speak of a nucleus of certain amino acids responsible for the activity as an integral part of the protein molecule. I should like to emphasize that at the present time these are assumptions. Of course, I do not mean to intimate that these things can not be so. There simply is no evidence for them as yet and one should recognize these views for the assumptions that they are. No criticism can be leveled, of course, at anyone for using them as working hypotheses. In summing up what we actually know of the chemistry of insulin, we might say that all the evidence points towards the fact that in- sulin is a protein. But we must admit that from the standpoint of actual chemical structure we know very little about it, even though we probably know more about the chemistry of this protein than of any other. In fact, it is one of the most thoroughly studied proteins. 372 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 In judging what is known of the chemistry of insulin one should compare it, not with certain of the other hormones such as adrenalin or thyroxin, but rather with what is known of other crystalline proteins. In closing I should like to call to your attention the role that in- sulin has played in bringing the field to the realization that a protein may have hormonal properties, or should I say, that a hormone could actually be a protein. We almost forget now the strong prejudice that existed at the time of the isolation of crystalline insulin, that the crystalline ma- terial could not be the hormone because it was, to all intents and pur- poses, a protein. Yet as the work progressed the conclusion began to take form that insulin was truly a protein-like substance. The actual isolation of various amino acids from the compound, the study of the nitrogen distribution, the ‘studies on the heat precipita- tion, the crystallization by various methods, and many other studies all pointed inevitably in this direction. As time went on the idea of a hormone being a protein became less objectionable to the field as a whole, and the possibility that other hormones might be proteins became plausible. This was true of the parathyroid hormone which controls calcium metabolism and the hormones of the pituitary gland—both the anterior and the posterior lobes. Of course, these latter hormones that I have just mentioned have defied isolation as yet, and we must withhold final judgment until they have been iso- lated, but the available evidence indicates that they are polypeptide or protein-like compounds. This realization that a hormone could be a protein has been hastened by the recognition of other physiologically active substances which have also appeared to be proteins or protein-like substances. Within the past few years we have had the isolation of a number of enzymes starting with the isolation of urease in crystalline form by Sumner and culminating in the isolation of certain proteolytic en- zymes, such as pepsin and trypsin, in crystalline form by Northrop. All of these crystalline enzymes appear to be proteins and present chemical problems quite analogous to insulin. The crystalline plant virus recently isolated by Stanley also appears to be a protein. Fur- thermore, it seems that toxins, antitoxins, antigens and antibodies and the like are proteins. We have, therefore, a growing list of com- pounds possessing remarkable physiological action, all of which ap- pear to be proteins. Sept. 15, 1937 KIRK: CLITHROCRINUS 373 The studies that have been carried out on insulin become, there- fore, of more fundamental value because of their possible signifi- cance to the study of these other crystalline physiologically active proteins. It should also be apparent from what I have just said about this entire group of substances that one of the greatest needs of biochemistry today is an understanding of protein structure itself. PALEONTOLOGY .—Clithrocrinus, new name for Clistocrinus Kirk. Epwin Kirk, U.S. Geological Survey. In this JouRNAL? J described‘a new genus to which I gave the name Clistocrinus. My attention has been called to the fact that Springer’ had erected the genus Clezstocrinus. Incidentally, this latter name had previously appeared in print in error for Clezocrinus Billings.‘ Springer in describing the genus gave the Greek words from which he derived the name. They are the same as used by me. According to classical usage with these words as given, the generic name could be written Clestocrinus or Clistocrinus, with preference given the lat- ter by the International Rules of Zoological Nomenclature. There is also a variant spelling in the Greek that would give Clestocrinus directly. Clezstocrinus is an improper transliteration of the words as given. However, there is an Ionic variant of the Greek that would give this spelling. It thus appears that properly transliterated Clesto- crinus, Cleistocrinus, and Clistocrinus could all be derived from the Greek and with the same meaning. Pronunciation would vary with the nationality of the speaker. There seems to be nothing in the Code clearly prohibiting the use of more than one of the variant spellings given above, although naturally their use should be discouraged. There is, however, owing to opinions handed down by the Commission, some doubt as to whether Clistocrinus Kirk is a homonym of Cleistocrinus Springer. In order to clarify the meaning of the Code and obtain a ruling from the Commission, I am proposing a new generic name to supplant Clistocrinus. I propose the name Clithrocrinus, with C. pyriformis (Kirk) as genotype. The genus and species thus stands as Clithro- crinus pyriformis (Kirk). The doubtful status of Clistocrinus primarily rests on the incom- 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. 8S. Geological Survey. Received July 21, 1937. 2 This JOURNAL 27: 106. 1937. 3 SPRINGER, FRANK. The Crinoidea Flezxibilia. Smithsonian Inst. Pub. 2501, 1930. 4Lupwic, H. Zool. Jahresber. for 1905, Echinoderma, pp. 4, 8, 1906. 374 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 patibility of Articles 8 and 19 of the Code. It may be held under Article 19 of the International Rules that Clezstocrinus is an error of transcription (seu transliteration) or a lapsus calami and should be changed to Clistocrinus. On the other hand, under Article 8 k and l words formed by an arbitrary combination of letters, or names formed by anagram, are held to be in good standing. If such be the case, rigid adherence to classical orthography and transliteration in isolated cases would seem to be hypercritical. After all, an im- properly transliterated word may legitimately be considered an arbi- trary combination of letters and would fall under Article 8 k. In a somewhat similar case (Opinion 26) nearly a hundred years after publication the Commission changed the spelling of a generic name on the somewhat easy assumption that a typographical error was involved. In the present instance one could as well assume that the typographical error or lapsus calamz lay in the printing of the Greek word and that Springer really intended to use Clezstocrinus. BOTAN Y.—Eleven new Asteraceae from North and South America.} S. F. Buaxe, Bureau of Plant Industry. This paper contains descriptions of eleven new species of Astera- ceae (two from the United States, four from Mexico, five from South America), as well as two new varieties and several new names and combinations. Bipontia Blake, nom. nov. Soaresia Sch. Bip. Pollichia 20-21: 376. 1863. Not Soaresia Allem. Rev. Braz. 1: 210. pl. 1857, and Arch. Palestr. Sci. Rio de Janeiro 1: 142. pl. 1858 (1859?). Argyrophyllum Pohl, ex parte; Baker in Mart. Fl. Bras. 67: 150. 1873, as syn. Bipontia velutina (Sch. Bip.) Blake. Soaresia velutina Sch. Bip. Pollichia 20-21: 377. 1863. Argyrophyllum ovali-ellipticum Pohl; Baker in Mart. Fl. Bras. 67: 150. 1873, as syn. In selecting a new name for this rare Brasilian monotype of the tribe Vernonieae I have sought to commemorate the work of Karl Heinrich Schultz (1805-1867), its original describer, one of the most active and en- thusiastic students of Compositae of the last century, who was known as Schultz Bipontinus (from Zweibriicken, his birthplace) to distinguish him from a homonymous botanist of Berlin as well as from other botanists of the same family name. The fuller and preferable form, Bzpontinia, is not 1 Received June 23, 1937. Sept. 15, 1937 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE 375 available for use, having been employed by Alefeld (1866) for a segregate from Psoralea now generally regarded as a synonym of that genus. The name Bipontina was published by Schultz? himself, but only as a section of Matricaria, and has never appeared in generic rank. Pohl’s herbarium name Argyrophyllum, known only from its use in synonymy by Baker, deserves only to be passed over. It was employed by Pohl, according to Baker’s synonymy, for two quite unrelated species, Vernonia venosissima Sch. Bip. (Argyrophyllum lanceolato-ellipticum Pohl; Baker, |. c. 30, a name omitted from Index Kewensis) and Soaresia velutina (A. ovali-ellipticum Pohl). The name Argyrophyllum is omitted from Engler & Prantl’s Natiirlichen Pflan- zenfamilien and from Dalla Torre & Harms’ Genera Siphonogamarum. The earlier genus Soaresia Allem&o is now referred to Clarisia R. & P. (Moraceae). The genus and its single species Soaresia nitida were published by Allamao (Archivos de Palestra Scientifica do Rio de Janeiro 1: 142. 1858 [1859?] ) with a combined generic-specific description, which is valid publication according to the International Rules as revised in 1930. I have not seen the supposedly earlier publication of the same names in the Re- vista Brazileira, but it has been checked for me by Dr. L. R. Abrams in the Stanford University Library, and from his notes it would appear that the same text and plate that were published in the Archivos were published also in the Revista. The date of publication of both papers of Allem4o is somewhat uncertain, but in any case is several years earlier than Schultz’s use of the same name. In the Index Londinensis the date 1854 is assigned to Allem4o’s plate published in the Archivos, but this is merely the author’s date at the close of his paper, which follows immediately another paper dated 1856. The title page date of the volume is 1858, but the Library of Congress copy bears in pencil the date 1859. This change of name, obligatory under the International Rules, will cause little inconvenience, as the plant concerned is apparently very rare and has probably not been referred to in botanical literature more than_ half a dozen times. It is figured by Baker in the Flora Brasiliensis (67: pl. 38), Alomia stenolepis Blake, sp. nov. Herba, caule tenui glandulari-pilosulo et sparse longius piloso; folia oppo- sita remota ovata acuminata basi subcordata dupliciter crenato-serrata utrinque viridia sparse pilosa et brevius glandulari-pilosa, petiolis aequi- longis tenuibus glandulari-pilosis; capitula 105-flora per 3-8 in apicibus pedunculorum terminalium et e axillis superioribus orientium folia superan- tium subdense cymosa, pedicellis 3-6 mm longis; involucri paullum gradati 3—4-seriati 4 mm alti phyllaria angustissime linearia subsetaceo-acuminata parum pilosa et glandulari-pilosa; receptaculum nudum; achenia glanduloso- adspersa 1.4 mm longa. “In a clump 0.6 m high and as broad’’; stem with weak branches above, terete, striatulate, greenish, about 2mm thick above, rather densely pilosulous 2 Ueber die Tanac. 26. 1844. 376 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 with spreading white hairs about 0.1—-0.3 mm long, tipped with purplish glands, and, especially above, more sparsely pilose with many-celled eglandular hairs about 0.7 mm long; uppermost internode 15-17 cm long; leaves opposite, or the uppermost alternate but approximate; petioles very slender, unmargined, purplish, glandular-pubescent like the stem, 3-5.5 em long; blades ovate, 5-6 cm long, 3.5—-4.7 em wide, acuminate, at base subtruncate or shallowly cordate and often slightly inequilateral, thin, 3—-5- nerved from the very base (the veins prominulous, the veinlets scarcely so), simply or usually doubly crenate-serrate essentially to the base (the teeth about 12-20 pairs, 1.5-3 mm high, obtusely callous-mucronulate), above sparsely short-pilose on veins and surface with several-celled mostly eglan- dular hairs, glabrescent, beneath equally green, on the veins pilose and with a few shorter hairs tipped with purplish glands, on the surface thinly short-pilose with many of the hairs tipped with pale yellow glands, or the latter often subsessile; peduncles terminal and in the uppermost axils, 3-5 per stem, pubescent like the stem, naked or with a single leaf-like bract, 5-10.5 cm long, very slender, bearing 3-8 heads; heads (as pressed) 5-6 mm high, 5 mm thick, hemispheric; involucre 3—4-seriate, slightly graduate, the phyllaries all similar, very narrowly linear (0.2—0.3 mm wide), rather firm, greenish with purplish tips, 2-ribbed, sparsely pilose and glandular-pubes- cent much like the stem; corollas very slender, deep purple above, subsessile- glandular below and on the teeth, otherwise glabrous, 3-3.3 mm long (tube 0.8-1 mm, throat scarcely distinguishable from tube, 2 mm, teeth ovate, obtusish, about 0.3 mm long); achenes 5-angled, sessile-glandular chiefly above, 1.4 mm long, blackish-brown, with short whitish crustaceous base and terminal whitish collar, epappose; styles (dried) white. Mexico: On rocks at water’s edge, in Lower Sonoran zone, Canyon Guadalupe, Sierra Chiribo, Rio Mayo, Sonora, 11 March 1935, Howard S. moe 1434 (type no. 766039, Field Mus.; photog. and fragm., U. 8. Nat. Herb.). In characters of involucre and corolla, this species seems somewhat inter- mediate between the subgenera Geissanthodium and Eualomia as dis- tinguished by Robinson. The corollas, as in the first group, are not differ- entiated into tube and throat, and the phyllaries are 3—4-seriate. They are, however, firm and only 2-ribbed, and the species, on the whole, seems best referred to Hualomza. It is readily distinguished by its foliage, its pubescence, and especially by its very narrow phyllaries. Chrysothamnus nauseosus var. psilocarpus Blake, var. nov. Rami arcte flavescenti-viridi-tomentosi vix striati; folia anguste linearia 4—5.5 em longa 1.5—-2.5 mm lata acuminata plana 1—nervia lutescenti-viridia subglabra v. tenuiter laxeque pilosula; capitula cymoso-paniculata, panicu- lis planiusculis 3—5 cm latis; involucri gradati 3-seriati (seriebus perpendicu- latis sat distinctis) 8.5-10 mm alti phyllaria exteriora lanceolata acuminata interiora lineari-lanceolata acuta (ca. 1.3 mm lata) omnia praecipue ad apicem ciliata dorso glabra vittato-carinata; corollae 10 mm longae (dentibus ovatis 1—1.2 mm longis inclusis) in tubo et basi faucis sparse puberulae pilis clavellatis; achenia glaberrima 5 mm longa; styli ramorum appendices (2.2 mm longae) parte stigmatifera (1.5-1.6 mm longa) sesqui longiores. Utah: Huntington Canyon, Emery Co., 21 July 1935, A. O. Garrett 7021 (type no. 1,679, 641, U.S. Nat. Herb.); also 7048, same data. Sept. 15, 1937 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE 377 In Hall & Clements’ monograph of Chrysothamnus’ this plant keys out to C. nauseosus ssp. lerospermus (A. Gray) Hall & Clements.‘ In that plant the leaves are filiform or nearly so, the involucre only 6-8 mm high, the corolla 5-8 mm long, and its lobes only about 0.5 mm long. From the two other forms of C. nauseosus with glabrous achenes, C. nauseosus var. glareo- sus (Jones) Hall and var. bigeloviz (A. Gray) Hall, var. psilocarpus differs in its merely ciliate, not dorsally tomentose phyllaries. Var. glareosus dif- fers also in its obtuse phyllaries, var. bigeloviz in its nearly or quite filiform leaves. APHANOSTEPHUS PINULENSIS Coulter, Bot. Gaz. 16: 98. 1891. _ The type or type collection of this species, J. D. Smith 2407, from Pinula, Dept. Guatemala, Guatemala, alt. 1340 meters, came to the U.S. National Herbarium in the John Donnell Smith collection. It proves to be Chrysan- themum parthenium (L.) Bernh., a frequent escape from cultivation in Cen- tral America and Mexico. Aster coahuilensis Blake, sp. nov. Perennis bipedalis ubique (involucris exceptis) pilosus viridescens; folia inferiora ovata majuscula obtusa basi alte cordata papyracea grosse crenata longe petiolata, petiolis parum marginatis; folia media multo minora ovata acuminata crenato-serrata petiolis laminam semiaequantibus late margina- tis prope basin saepe ampliatis; capitula vix numerosa (ca. 14-25 per caulem) mediocria corymboso-paniculata, bracteis ramealibus parvis linearibus v. subulatis; involucri turbinato-hemisphaerici 7 mm alti 4—5-seriati gradati phyllaria subappressa lineari-lanceolata acuta v. acuminata infra (circiter ad medium) indurata albida 1-suleata supra herbacea (apice herbaceo anguste rhombico-lanceolato) sparse ciliolata ceterum glabra, exteriora cal- loso-apiculata; radii (sicc.) pallide violacea ca. 19 ca. 8 mm longa; achenia hispidula. Herb 57 cm high, the stem (in the single specimen examined) bifurcate near the base, otherwise essentially simple below the inflorescence, green, subterete, not densely spreading-pilose with white hairs, eglandular; leaves rather crowded toward base of stem, the petioles of these leaves broad, flat, very narrowly or not at all margined, 6-10 cm long, 2-3 mm wide, widened and submembranaceous at base, rather densely spreading- or de- flexed-pilose, the blades ovate, 8-11 cm long, 4.5-6.7 cm wide, very obtuse, rather deeply cordate (sinus 3-10 mm deep), coarsely crenate nearly throughout (the teeth about 10-15 pairs, very blunt, about 1 mm high, mostly 5-10 mm apart), feather-veined (chief veins 2-3 pairs), above rather 3 Phylog. Meth. Taxon. 210. 1923. 4 Chrysothamnus nauseosus var. abbreviatus (Jones) Blake.—Bzigelovia letosperma A. Gray, Syn. Fl. 12: 1389. 1884. Aster lecospermus Kuntze, Rev. Gen. 1: 318. 1891. Chrysothamnus letospermus Greene, Erythea 3: 113.1895. Bigelovia leiosperma var. ab- breviata Jones, Proc. Calif. Acad. II. 5: 693.1895. Chrysothamnus nauseosus var. leto- spermus Hall, Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 7: 173. 1919. Chrysothamnus nauseosus [ssp.] leiospermus Hall & Clements, Phylog. Meth. Taxon. 217. 1923.—Jones’s var. ab- breviata is merely an insignificant form or condition of lecospermus, and his name, as the earliest published in the varietal category, must be adopted when the plant is treated as a variety. 378 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 light green, evenly but not densely spreading-pilose with several-celled hairs obscurely enlarged at base, soft or in age roughish to the touch, be- neath rather lighter green, evenly but not densely pilose on surface with spreading hairs, densely so along costa; middle leaves not numerous, longer than the internodes, pubescent like the lower leaves, the blades ovate or lance-ovate, 4-6 cm long, about 2.2 cm wide, acute or acuminate, rounded at base, crenate-serrate mostly near middle with 3-7 pairs of teeth, the peti- oles 2-3.5 em long, 2-5 mm wide; upper leaves (subtending the lower branches of the inflorescence) lanceolate, acuminate, narrowed at base, ses- sile, entire or nearly so, 3-5 cm long, 5-9 mm wide; inflorescence occupying about 4 the height of the plant, corymbiform-paniculate, rather few-headed, about 13-18 cm long, 8-10 cm wide, the branches divergent-erectish, not densely short-spreading-pilose all around or more or less in lines, the primary branches mostly 2—5-headed, not in the least racemiform, the ultimate pedicels mostly 5-22 mm long, mostly with a few small subulate or linear bracts above; phyllaries 0.5-0.8 mm wide, the green tips somewhat thick- ened; heads about 2.2 cm wide; disk about 9 mm high, 6-8 mm thick (as pressed); rays about 19, the tube sparsely pilose above, 2.5 mm long, the lamina linear, 2—3-denticulate, 4-nerved, about 8 mm long, 1.8 mm wide; disk corollas essentially glabrous, soon purplish above, 7 mm long (tube 2.2 mm, throat 4mm, teeth triangular-ovate, acutish, 0.8 mm long); achenes (immature) oblong, subcompressed, hispidulous, 5-nerved, 1.8—2.2 mm long; pappus rather copious, brownish white, 6.5 mm long. Mexico: Moist wooded canyon on the eastern slope of the Sierra de San Manuel, Municipio de Musquiz, Coahuila, 30 June 1936, F. Lyle Wynd & C. H. Mueller 372 (type no. 1,638,865, U. S. Nat. Herb.). Allied to Aster drummondii Lindl., but apparently specifically distinct in its longer pubescence, its merely crenate lower leaves, and particularly in its relatively few-headed and open corymbiform panicle with the heads conspicuously pedicellate and not at all racemosely arranged. The inflo- rescence, in fact, is more like that of the average Aster laevis than that of A. drummondii. Aster intricatus (A. Gray) Blake. Linosyris ? carnosa A. Gray, Pl. Wright. 2: 80. 1853. Aster carnosus A. Gray; Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 2: 120. 1881. Not A. carnosus Gilib. 1781. Bigelovia carnosa Benth. & Hook.; Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. 2: 120. 1881, as synonym. Bigelovia intricata A. Gray, Proc. Amer. Acad. 17: 208. 1882. Linosyris carnosa Greene, Fl. Franc. 384. 1897. The well known name of this very characteristic plant, Aster carnosus, must be changed, owing to the existence of an earlier homonym in Aster carnosus Gilib.6 The latter is merely an illegitimate name, published with a description and with A ster tripoliwm L. cited as a synonym, but nevertheless, according to Art. 61 of the International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature (1930) precludes the use of the same name for a later described species. The species was redescribed as Bigelovia intricata by Gray in 1882, and this 5 Fl, Lit. 1: 214. 1781. SeprT. 15, 1937 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE 379 specific name must be taken up for it. I am indebted to Dr. F. W. Pennell for a transcript of Gilibert’s description from the copy of his work in the library of the Philadelphia Academy. Aster horridus (Woot. & Standl.) Blake. Herrickia horrida Woot. & Standl. Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 16: 186. pl. 50. 1913. Although this species, the type and sole member of the genus Herrickia Wooton & Standley, is not readily placed in any of the sections into which the genus Aster is divisible, it is certainly not worthy of generic separation. Its closest relationship, especially evident in the involucre, is apparently with Aster wasatchensis (Jones) Blake, a member of the group often sepa- rated under the generic name Eucephalus Nutt. Aster wasatchensis itself is anomalous in its group by reason of its herbaceous-tipped phyllaries, and could not be run down to EHucephalus by the generic key given in Rydberg’s “Flora of the Rocky Mountains and adjacent plains.” Erigeron allocotus Blake, sp. nov. Perennis caespitosus spithamaeus ubique patenti-hispidus et minute glan- duloso-hispidulus subcinerascens; caules decumbentes paene e basi ramosi foliosi, ramis divergenti-erectiusculis; folia cuneata v. spathulata 3—5-fida v. 3-partita, lamina in petiolum multo longiorem sensim angustata, seg- mentis oblongo-ovatis v. lanceolatis v. linearibus obtusis v. acutis, folia superiora minora linearia v. lineari-spathulata integra v. 3-fida; capitula parva radiata apicibus ramorum et ramulorum solitaria longe pedunculata; involucri ca. 4-seriati parum gradati 4.5 mm alti phyllaria acuta v. breviter acuminata extima lineari-lanceolata herbacea interiora oblonga latiuscule subscarioso-marginata medio viridia; radii ca. 22—26 breves ‘‘albi’’ (sicc. pal- lide lavendulacei v. rosei); discus luteus; achenea compressa 2—nervia his- pidula; pappus simplex fragilis. Leafy-stemmed herb 13-18 cm high, many-stemmed from a slender, branched, apparently oblique caudex, the bases of the stems of the year covered with the imbricated marcescent bases of petioles, the whole plant moderately densely hispid with wide-spreading many-celled acuminate white hairs up to 1.5 mm long and also finely glandular-hispidulous; stems slender, subterete or subangulate; leaves (except the reduced upper ones) longer than the internodes, those toward base of stem crowded but not at all rosu- late; lower leaves 1.7—-3 (—4) em long including petiole, light green, rather thick, the blade (about 4-8 mm long, 3-5 mm wide) 3-—5-fid for about half its length or sometimes parted essentially to base, the segments mostly ob- long or ovate-oblong, 1—6 mm long, 0.7—2.5 mm wide, acute or obtuse, entire or the lateral sometimes 2—lobed; middle stem leaves similar but more often deeply parted, sometimes with linear lobes; upper leaves much smaller, mostly 4-8 mm long, entire or 2—3-toothed or -fid; peduncles (naked tips of branches) mostly 3—4.5 cm long; involucre hemispheric, appressed, the outer- most phyllaries herbaceous essentially throughout, 0.4—-0.5 mm wide, spread- ing-hispid and glandular-hispidulous, the inmost about 0.8 mm wide, simi- larly pubescent on the green midline, this about equaling in breadth the subscarious whitish margin; heads 1—-1.2 em wide; disk 5 mm high, 6-8 mm thick (as pressed); rays about 6—7 mm long, the tube pilose above, 1.5 mm 380 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 long, the lamina narrowly elliptic, subentire or 2—denticulate, 3—5-nerved, -4.3-5.3 mm long, 1.5 mm wide; disk flowers numerous, their corollas sparsely hispidulous on base of throat, papillose-crested on the teeth, 2.7 mm long (tube 0.5 mm, throat subcylindric, 1.8 mm, teeth ovate, 0.4 mm); achenes obovate, compressed, 2.3 mm long, 0.7 mm wide, nerved on the margin, appressed-hispidulous, whitish; pappus strictly simple, of about 22 fragile hispidulous white bristles 2.2-2.5 mm long, readily detergible, leaving a minute toothed crown. Wyoming: Dry rocky hillside, near Grouse Creek, Shell Creek Canyon, Big Horn Co., Township 53 N., Range 89 W., alt. 2285 m, 8 July 1936, Louis O. & Rua Williams 3283 (type no. 1,684,047, U.S. Nat. Herb.). The 3-—5-fid or -parted leaves of this plant would seem to place it in the group of Hrigeron compositus, but it differs from the several known mem- bers of that group in its freely branched leafy stems bearing rather numerous heads, as well as in details of foliage and pubescence. Erigeron trihecatactis Blake, sp. nov. Annuus erectus subvalidus infra inflorescentiam simplex dense foliosus ubique dense stipitato-glandulosus in caule patenti-pilosus; folia uniformia anguste oblonga v. oblanceolata obtusa apiculata sessilia amplectentia grosse serrata lutescenti-viridia ca. 5 em longa 1 cm lata; capitula ca. 10 cymoso-paniculata mediocria brevissime radiata; involucri ca. 4-seriati paullum gradati 6.5 mm alti phyllaria lineari-lanceolata acuminata tenuia anguste pallideque marginata; radii numerosissimi 5—6-seriati albi non ex- serti, lamina suberecta ca. 1 mm longa elliptica; flores disci 31 flavi; achenia 2-nervia hispidula; pappus albidus simplex corollam subaequans. Stem rather stout, subterete, inconspicuously striate, about 65 cm high, 4 mm thick at base, yellowish green, brownish green above, densely stipi- tate-glandular and more sparsely pilose with slender few-celled white hairs about 1 mm long; internodes about 1 cm long; leaves mostly with fascicles in their axils, the lower deflexed, the upper erectish; blades below the middle of stem somewhat smaller than the others, about 3.5-4 cm long, 5-8 mm wide, similar to the upper in shape and cutting; middle and upper leaves 4—5.8 cm long, 9-11 mm wide, shallowly cordate-amplexicaul at the not narrowed base, not decurrent, firm, plane or very narrowly revolute on margin, coarsely serrate except toward base (teeth about 4—6 pairs, obtuse, apiculate, 1-2 mm high, 5-10 mm apart), densely stipitate-glandular and (chiefly along margin) more or less pilose, feather-veined, the veins prominu- lous and loosely reticulate beneath; inflorescence rounded, about 8 cm long, 6 cm wide, the heads 1—4 at tips of the few branches, the principal bracts similar to the leaves but much smaller, the pedicels 3-22 mm long, pubescent like the stem, naked or with 1 or 2 subulate bracts; heads hemispheric, i-1.4 cm wide (as pressed), 6 mm high; involucre densely stipitate-glandular and very sparsely pilose, inconspicuously graduated, the phyllaries erect, yellow- ish green with narrow yellowish white subscarious margin and tip, 0.6—1 mm wide; receptacle broad, flat, alveolate especially toward the center, the margins of the alveolae toothed; rays 333 (in 1 head), fertile, the tube 2.5-3 mm long, very sparsely puberulous with several-celled blunt slightly clavel- late hairs, the lamina elliptic, emarginate, 1—3-nerved, 1—1.3 mm long, about 0.3 mm wide; disk flowers 31, fertile, their corollas yellow, puberulous above the middle like the ray corollas, 3.7 mm long (tube 1.4 mm, throat Sept. 15, 1937 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE 381 eylindric-funnelform, 1.6 mm, teeth 5, ovate, 0.7 mm long) ; achenes obovate- oblong, 0.8—1 mm long, 0.4 mm wide, nerved on the margin, whitish; pappus sparse, of about 17 hispidulous bristles about 3.8 mm long; style branches with deltoid-ovate obtuse papillose appendages. Colombia: ‘‘Ad ripam rivi et in paramos,’ Chapinero, near Bogota, on road to Usaquén, Dept. Cundinamarca, 12 Sept. 1926, S. Juzepczuk 6724 (type, Herb. Leningrad; photo. and fragm., U.S. Nat. Herb.) ; same locality, 28 May 1926, Juzepczuk 5015 (Herb. Leningrad). This strongly marked species is a member of the Section Caenotus, and seems to be very distinct from any described species. Clibadium glabrescens Blake, sp. nov. Frutex; rami et ramuli glabri v. subglabri; folia ovata acuminata basi cuneata tenuiter petiolata serrata utrinque viridia tripli- vel quintuplinervia supra scabriuscula subtus sparse strigillosa; capitula mediocria mox remoti- uscula subsessilia; phyllaria 4 late ovata v. suborbicularia obtusa saepius 9—-11-nervia; receptaculum ubique paleaceum; flor. fem. 5-6, hermaph. 9-11; ovaria flor. fem. apice dense pilosa. ‘Slender shrub, 4-6 ft.’’; branches slender, subterete, striatulate, 2—-2.5 mm thick, olive-green, glabrous; branchlets glabrous or very sparsely strigillose; internodes 2-10 cm long; petioles very slender, unmargined, 2—2.5 em long, sulcate above, strigillose in the sulcus, otherwise glabrous; blades 8-11 cm long, 4-5 cm wide, caudate-acuminate, acutely cuneate at base, serrate or serrulate from about the middle of the cuneate lower part to below the tip (teeth about 19—22 pairs, acutely callous-pointed, about 0.5 mm high, mostly 3-4 mm apart), thin-papery, above deep green, roughish, evenly but sparsely strigillose and short-strigose, beneath brighter green, evenly but sparsely strigillose on veins and surface, tripli- or usually quintuplinerved within 1—2 em of the base; panicles terminating stem and branches, sur- passed by the subtending leaves, strigillose or subappressed-puberulous, somewhat convex, at maturity 6-7 cm wide, the heads at first approximate, at submaturity mostly 2-4 mm apart; heads at submaturity (corollas fallen) depressed-subglobose, 2.5-3 mm high, 4.5 mm thick (moistened); phyllaries 4, broadly ovate to suborbicular, obtuse to very obtuse, ciliolate, toward apex sparsely strigillose, the outermost about 5—nerved, the others 9-11- nerved, 2.2-3.5 mm long, 2.5-4 mm wide; pistillate flowers 5-6, all paleate, their pales similar to the inner phyllaries, the corollas (scarcely mature) sparsely hirsutulous at apex, 1.8-2 mm long, the ovaries densely pilose at apex, the achenes obovoid, obcompressed, plump, rounded at base, densely villosulous toward apex, 2.4 mm long, 1.8 mm wide; hermaphrodite flowers 9-11, their pales much narrower than the pistillate and only 1—3-nerved, their corollas white, hispidulous toward apex, 3 mm long, their ovaries 2—2.3 mm long, pilose throughout or glabrous toward base, sometimes bearing near apex a few long gland-tipped hairs. Colombia: Mountains between Mosoa and Sibundoy, Comisario del Putu- mayo, 19 May 1935, W. A. Archer 3415 (type no. 1,619, 557, U. S. Nat. Herb.). A member of the section Trizidium, nearest Clibadium terebinthinaceum (Swartz) DC., in which the branches and branchlets are densely pu- bescent, the leaves larger, more coarsely serrate, and more densely pubescent beneath, and the heads larger. 382 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 9 Clibadium leiocarpum Steetz var. strigosum Blake, var. nov. Rami petioli foliaque strigosa vel accumbenti-hirsuta. Costa Rica: On brushy slope, Cerro de Piedra Blanca, above Escasu, Province of San José, 31 January 1924, P. C. Standley 32593 (type no. 1,225,816, U.S. Nat. Herb.). Although this specimen may represent only a chance variation, it differs from other specimens of the species examined in a feature which is usually of considerable significance in the genus, and its separation as a variety seems advisable. The achenes in this specimen are sometimes merely clavel- late-puberulous at apex, sometimes also sparsely villous. Steiractinia lucidula Blake, sp. nov. Frutex; rami dense strigosi, pilis basi incrassatis; folia magna ovata acuta v. acuminata basi rotundato-cuneata crenato-serrata firme pergamentacea triplinervia subtus reticulata utrinque asperula et lucidula; capitula radiata flava pro genera minuscula per 1—3 apicibus ramorum et ramulorum cymosa paniculam foliosam efformantia, pedunculis pollicaribus; involucri ca. 4- seriati gradati 9-10 mm alti phyllaria oblonga v. oblongo-ovata saepius obtusa exteriora herbacea parum strigosa et ciliata interiora tenuiora apice subscariosa et purpurascentia ciliolata; radii 5, ca. 7 mm longi; achenia alata. Branching shrub 7-10 ft. high; stem (or branch) subterete, solid, pithy, olivaceous, 1 cm thick; leaves opposite; internodes 7—9.5 cm long; petioles stout, unmargined, densely strigose or strigillose with thickened-base hairs, those of the larger leaves 2—2.5 cm, of the leaves at base of inflorescence about 8 mm long; blades of the larger leaves ovate, about 15-18 cm long, 8—9.5 cm wide, of the leaves at base of inflorescence oblong-ovate, 9.5 em long, 3.5 cm wide, the larger crenate-serrate from the upper part of the cune- ate-rounded base nearly to apex (teeth about 20 pairs, bluntly callous- pointed, 0.5-1 mm high, mostly 5-8 mm apart), about equally green and somewhat shining on both sides, above evenly but not densely strigillose with mostly deciduous hairs with small lepidote-tuberculate persistent bases, beneath rather sparsely strigillose or antrorse-hispidulous especially along the veins and veinlets with slightly tuberculate-based hairs, triplinerved 0.8-2 em above the base, the chief veins prominulous above, prominent be- neath, the others impressed above, whitish and prominulous-reticulate be- neath; peduncles in clusters of 1-3 at tips of branches and branchlets and in the upper axils, slender, mostly naked, densely erectish-hirsutulous (the hairs with small blackish tuberculate bases), 2.2—-4 em long, the whole form- ing a convex leafy-bracted panicle about 28 cm wide; heads about 1.5 em wide; disk 9-12 mm high, about 7 mm thick in flower, 8-11 mm thick in fruit (as pressed); involucre campanulate, 9-10 mm high, appressed or the outermost phyllaries sometimes loose-tipped, the outermost phyllaries about 5 mm long, 1.8-2.5 mm wide, narrowly oblong or oblong-ovate, thick- herbaceous essentially throughout or pale and indurated at base, obtuse to acutish, rather sparsely strigose or strigillose and short-ciliate, the inner broader (3-3.5 mm), oblong, obtuse or rounded, above subscarious and pur- plish, erose, ciliolate, otherwise nearly or quite glabrous; rays yellow, neu- tral, sparsely ciliolate at base of limb, otherwise glabrous, the tube 2.5 mm long, the lamina oblong, bluntly 2—3-dentate, 8—9-nerved, papillate on upper surface and margin, 7 mm long, 2.5 mm wide; disk flowers not very numer- ous, their corollas yellow, glabrous outside, 7.5 mm long (tube 2 mm, throat Sept. 15, 1937 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE 383 funnelform, 5 mm, teeth ovate, strongly recurved, 0.5 mm long, densely papillose and almost hirsutulous inside); pales scarious, obtuse or acutish, usually winged on the keel, ciliolate toward tip and also on the keel, 6.5-8 mm long; ray achenes (immature) inane, trigonous, not winged, erect- hirsute on the angles, about 2.7 mm long, their pappus of about 27 unequal slender hispidulous deciduous awns 1—2.5 mm long; disk achenes cuneate- obovate, compressed, 5 mm long, 3.5 mm wide (including wings), the body mottled gray and brown, erect-pilose chiefly toward apex, 2-winged, the wings thin, olivaceous, ciliate, truncate at apex and there 1 mm wide, the body contracted into a short neck which is widened into the pappiferous disk, the pappus of about 33 slender hispidulous deciduous awns, mostly subequal and about 2.5 mm long. Colombia: Edge of woods, Mesa de los Santos, Dept. Santander, Eastern Cordillera, alt. 1500 m, 11-15 Dec. 1926, EF. P. Killip & A.C. Smith 15366 (type no. 1,351,249-50, U.S. Nat. Herb.). Stezractinia lucidula is most nearly related to S. schlimiz Blake, also from the Department of Santander (Ocafia), in which the leaves are densely pubescent beneath and not shining, and the outer phyllaries rather densely strigose or accumbent-hirsute, some of them usually equaling the inmost in length. Helianthella ciliata Blake, sp. nov. Herba perennis pedalis, caulibus suberectis simplicibus strigoso-hirsutis foliosis monocephalis; folia subuniformia elliptica v. elliptico-obovata v. suprema lineari-lanceolata ca. 4 cm longa 1.2 cm lata obtusa v. acuta basi cuneata subsessilia integra triplinervia margine tuberculato-hispido-ciliata in paginis minute hirsutula; capitulum breviter pedunculatum ca. 4 cm latum; involucri ca. 10 mm alti ca. 3-seriati vix gradati phyllaria lineari- lanceolata acuminata laxa omnino herbacea hispido-ciliata ceterum glabra; radii ca, 11—14 aurei ca. 1.5 cm longi; corollae disci apice purpureae; paleae infra scariosae apice subherbaceae; achenia ciliata et pilosa; pappi exaristati squamellae ca. 6—8 alte laciniato-ciliatae ca. 1.3 mm longae. Perennial with short caudex; stems few, apparently erectish, somewhat curved, 27-38 cm high, slender, striate, whitish or somewhat purplish-tinged, rather densely or sparsely strigose or substrigose and also usually spreading or ascending-hispid with several-celled white hairs; lower leaves (2-4 pairs) opposite, the others alternate; internodes 3-20 (—28) mm long; lowest leaves much reduced, obovate, about 1 cm long, those just above them elliptic- obovate, 2.5-4.2 cm long, 8-14 mm wide, obtuse, the middle ones elliptic or oblong-elliptic, 3.5—5 em long, 7-15 mm wide, obtuse to acutish, the upper lance-linear, 2.5-3 cm long, 3-6 mm wide, acute, all light green on both sides, tuberculate-hispid-ciliate, on both sides minutely hirsutulous along the veinlets, sometimes with a few stiff white hairs along costa beneath, 3- or obscurely 5-plinerved from near the base with whitish nerves and finely reticulate, the veinlets somewhat impressed on both sides; peduncle 1—3.5 em long, pubescent like the stem; involucre 10 mm high, 2 cm wide (as pressed), the phyllaries loosely spreading or perhaps reflexed, 1.2-2 mm wide at base, inconspicuously 3—nerved; disk (as pressed) 1 cm high, 1.2-1.5 em thick; rays neutral, oval or oval-oblong, rather deeply and irregularly 2-3-toothed (teeth up to 3 mm long), hirsute on tube above and hirsutulous on nerves of back, about 1.5-2 cm long, about 5-9 mm wide, about 12- 384 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 nerved; disk corollas purple on the teeth, glabrous except for the densely hirsutulous teeth, 5 mm long (tube 1 mm, throat cylindric-funnelform, 3 mm, teeth 1 mm long); pales rather soft and thin, scarious below, blackish- green toward the subherbaceous somewhat hooded tip, obtuse, carinate, ciliate on keel above and densely hirsutulous at apex, about 8 mm long; disk achenes (very immature) obovate, flatly compressed, 3 mm long, 1.7 mm wide, narrowly 2-margined, notched at apex, ciliate, pilose on the sides; pappus squamellae about 3—4 on each side of achene, deeply laciniate-ciliate, connate at base, 1-1.3 mm long, equaling or surpassing the long hairs at apex of achene; style branches hispid toward apex, the appendages short, deltoid, merely finely hispidulous, acutish. Mexico: Majalca, Chihuahua, 6 Sept. 1935, Harde LeSueur 156 (type no. 837153, herb. Field Mus.; photog. and fragm., U. S. Nat. Herb.); same locality, 18-20 Aug. 1935, LeSueur 157 and 244 (Field Mus.). Nearest Helianthella mexicana A. Gray, of San Luis Potosi and Coahuila. In that species the basal leaves are much longer than the cauline and drawn down into a petiole; the stems are less leafy, with the internodes mostly longer than the leaves; the leaves are more or less hispid on both faces as well as on the margin; and the phyllaries are hispid along the back above as well as on the margin. Verbesina callilepis Blake, sp. nov. Herba bipedalis; caulis simplex hispidulus usque ad medium foliatus, supra nudus; folia inferiora (4-juga) opposita obovata obtusa v. acuta basi cuneata sessilia non amplectentia crenato-serrata laete viridia supra scabre tuberculato-hispidula subtus in venis sparse hispidula, superiora 3 alterna multo minora oblanceolata; capitula 3 longe pedunculata mediocria radiata aurea; involucri late campanulati 7 mm alti 3-seriati phyllaria exteriora (2-seriata) subequalia cuneato-obovata v. spathulato-obovata herbacea sub- appressa obtusa v. rotundata subglabra v. in margine et sparse in dorso his- pidula, interiora (radios subtendentia) paullo longiora spathulato-obovata rotundata submembranacea saturate viridia aurea-marginata supra erosa: radii 9, ca. 1.2 cm longi; achenia alata glabra epapposa. Base not seen, but doubtless perennial; stem erect or erectish, slender, 68 cm high (including peduncles), subterete, striate, purplish toward base and there rather densely hispidulous with spreading few-celled hairs, green above and more sparsely hispidulous with shorter hairs, leafy about to middle; principal internodes 4—5 cm long; lowest pair of leaves obovate, 4 cm long, 2 cm wide; next 3 pairs similar but larger, 7.5-8 cm long, 3-3.8 cm wide, apiculate, gradually cuneate-narrowed to the sessile not clasping base, crenate-serrate above the subentire cuneate base (teeth about 9-11 pairs, 3-9 mm apart, under 1 mm high, callous-apiculate), plane, papery, light green with the costa purple-red at base above for half its length, evenly but not densely tuberculate-hispidulous above (the tuberculate bases of the hairs more conspicuous toward the margin), beneath somewhat paler green, smooth to the touch, very sparsely hispidulous on veins, featherveined, the lateral veins about 5-7 pairs, with the veinlets lightly prominulous-reticulate on both sides; upper leaves 3, alternate, remote, 2.3-5 cm long, 7-15 mm wide, oblanceolate, acute, followed by a couple of remote linear-oblanceolate bracts 1 cm long or less; heads 3, about 2.5 em wide, single on slender ter- minal and subterminal remote peduncles 3.5-10.5 cm long, the subtending Sep. 15, 1937 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE 385 bracts minute, the peduncles naked, rather densely tuberculate-hispidulous below the heads; outer phyllaries 2—2.2 mm wide, the inner 2.2—2.8 mm wide; rays golden yellow, neutral, the tube hispidulous, 1.2 mm long, the lamina oval, 3-denticulate, sparsely hispidulous toward base below, 9-nerved; disk corollas (immature) golden, sparsely hispidulous on the short tube, 3.38 mm long; pales (immature) acute, sparsely hispidulous, with broad scarious mar- gin below, above blackish green with golden yellow erect tip and margin; disk achenes (very immature) subquadrate-obovate, 1.7 mm long, 1.2 mm wide, narrowly winged, essentially glabrous, epappose. Mexico: Infrequently scattered on tolerant pine slopes, Transition Zone, Los Cascarones, Rio Mayo, Chihuahua, 11 Sept. 1936, H. S. Gentry 2682 (type a 862339, Field Museum; photograph and fragments, U.S. Nat. Herb.). A species of the Section Pterophyton, nearest Verbesina mixtecana Brandeg. of Oaxaca. In V. mizxtecana the stem is stipitate-glandular as well as spread- ing-hispid, the lowest leaves are narrowed into a petioliform base half as long as the blade, the leaf blades are smaller and much more densely pu- bescent with longer more or less spreading hairs, and the phyllaries are narrow, lance-oblong, and acute or subacuminate. Coreopsis integra Blake, sp. nov. Frutex dichotomus glaber, pedunculis et involucris subtomentoso-pilosis exceptis; folia opposita lineari-filiformia integra acuta sessilia 1.7-3 cm longa 0.5-0.8 mm lata; capitula mediocria solitaria pedunculata radiata aurea; involucri flavescenti-tomentoso-pilosi phyllaria exteriora 7-8 oblonga obtusa 4-5 mm longa, interiora 8 oblonga 9-10 mm longa; achenia longe ciliata in ventre dense pilosa in dorso subglabra; pappi aristae 2 dense antror- sim pilosae. Shrub, 0.6 m high; stem and branches subterete, grayish brown, glabrous; branchlets greenish, striate, slender, glabrous; internodes 0.3—-5 cm long, usually 1.5-4 cm; leaves acutely subulate-tipped, connate at base into a glabrous sheath 1 mm high, coriaceous, subterete in cross-section, above obscurely flattened, 1- or 3-sulcate, sordidly pilosulous along the impressed costa, beneath glabrous, rounded, (in the dried state more or less 1-sulcate), erect or ascending, light green, often with axillary fascicles; peduncles 1 or 2 at tips of branches, monocephalous, slender, pilose-subtomentose especially toward apex with flavescent hairs, naked or few-bracted, 2.3-3.2 cm long; heads 3-38.5 em wide; disk 8—(fruit) 11 mm high, about 1 cm thick; involucre 2-seriate, 9-10 mm high, densely and flavescently subtomentose-pilose on the exposed surface of the phyllaries, the outer 1-seriate, 7-8, herbaceous, oblong, 4-5 mm long, 1.3-1.8 mm wide, obtuse, obscurely apiculate, 3- nerved, glabrescent above outside, inside densely stipitate-glandular and toward apex pilosulous, the inner 8, thick-membranous, oblong or oval-ob- long, 3-4 mm wide, obtusely pointed, very many-nerved, deep brown, nar- rowly yellow-margined, glabrous or glabrate on margin, pilosulous toward apex inside; rays 8, neutral, golden yellow, the tube puberulous, 2.5 mm long, the lamina oval, 11-nerved, weekly 3-denticulate, 16 mm long, 6-8 mm wide; disk corollas golden yellow throughout, puberulous on upper part of tube, 5.8 mm long (tube 2 mm, throat funnelform, 2.8 mm long, teeth ovate, 1 mm); pales linear-lanceolate, 7 mm long, acuminate, about 5-nerved, pilose-ciliate, pilose dorsally; ray achenes (inane) linear, pilose-ciliate, gla- 386 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 brous on outer face, glabrous or pilose along midline on inner; disk achenes obcompressed, linear-oblong or linear-obovate, 4.8 mm long, 1.3 mm wide, blackish brown, densely long-pilose-ciliate on margins and at apex, on outer face glabrous or pilose toward margin, on inner face densely long-pilose; awns 2, densely upward-pilose, 2.8 mm long; style tips short-deltoid, hispi- dulous, apiculate. Peru: On rocky eastern slope at San Carlos Mines, 6 miles west of Hual- lanca, Dept. Huanuco, alt. about 2745 meters (9000 ft.), 30 Sept. 1922, J. F. Macbride & W. Featherstone 2469 (type no. 518895, herb. Field Mus.; dupl. no. 1,198,895, U. S. Nat. Herb.). Nearest Coreopsis longula Blake, from Chachapoyas, Peru, which has much longer and obtuse leaves, smaller heads (usually in 2’s or 3’s), much less pubescent involucre, and lance-subulate outer phyllaries. Coreopsis sherffii Blake, sp. nov. Frutex trichotome ramosus, ramis hexagonis glabratis, ramulis bifariam pilosulis; folia opposita internodiis saepius breviora ca. 2 cm longa, petiolo anguste cuneato-marginato ciliato, lamina ambitu deltoidea tripartita coria- cea, lobis saepius anguste cuneatis 2-4 mm latis apice acute 2—3-dentatis, interdum oblongis v. oblongo-lanceolatis integris acutis; capitula mediocria usque ad 3 cm lata radiata aurea modice pedunculata in apicibus caulis et ramorum solitaria v. 3-5 cymosa; involucri glaberrimi v. solum basi ima pilosi phyllaria exteriora 8 crasse herbacea paullum obovato-oblonga obtusa v. acute apiculata 3.5-4.5 mm longa 1-2 mm lata, interiora duplo longiora membranacea oblonga rotundata saturate brunnea anguste aureo-margi- nata; achenia dense ciliata in ventre pilosa in dorso glabra; pappi aristae lanceolatae antrorsim pilosae. Shrub ca. 7.5 dm high; stem subterete, striate, gray-barked, glabrous, 4 mm thick; branches of the year light brown, slender, hexagonal, pilosulous in 2 grooves, otherwise glabrous; internodes of branches mostly 2.5—4.5 cm. long, much exceeding the leaves, of the branchlets mostly 0.5-2 cm long and surpassed by the leaves; petioles very narrowly cuneate-margined to base, 5-11 mm long, pilose-ciliate with jointed hairs especially toward base, usually with fascicles in their axils, connate at base for 1-1.5 mm; blades deltoid in outline, 6-10 mm long, 6-12 mm wide, cuneate at base, 3-parted, the lobes mostly 4-7 mm long, 2-4 mm wide, plane, light green, the lateral usually acutely 2-toothed at apex, the terminal 3-toothed or 3-fid, sparsely short-pilose along costa above or usually glabrous; leaves of the branchlets mostly smaller and merely 3-fid, with linear-oblong or oblong- lanceolate entire acutely subulate-pointed lobes; peduncles 1-headed, densely spreading-pilose with flavescent hairs, 1-2.3 cm long; heads (as pressed) 2.7-3 cm wide; disk about 6-8 mm high, 7-10 mm thick (as pressed); involucre double, the outer phyllaries essentially 1-seriate, more or less obovate-oblong, appressed, pale green with 3 black vittae, the inner about the same number, 7-9 mm long, 3.5—-4 mm wide, minutely erose cilio- late at the broadly rounded apex, densely brown-lineate; rays 8, neutral, golden yellow, subglabrous, the tube 1-1.5 mm long, the lamina broadly oval, shortly and bluntly about 3—4-dentate, 1l-nerved, 11-14 mm long, about 7 mm wide; disk corollas golden yellow, glabrous, 4-4.5 mm long (tube 1.5 mm, throat campanulate or funnelform-campanulate, about 2 mm, teeth broadly ovate, 0.8 mm long); pales in flower oblong-obovate, obtuse, sometimes emarginate, about 4 mm long, short-ciliate toward apex, Sept. 15, 1937 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE 387 erect-pilose on middle of back, 5—7-vittate; ray achenes inane, oblong, sparsely short-ciliate above, glabrous on the faces, epappose, 2 mm long; disk achenes (submature) narrowly obovate-oblong, 4.5 mm long, 1.5 mm wide, densely long-ciliate, sparsely erect-pilose in middle on inner face, glabrous on outer, their pappus of 2 lanceolate basally antrorse-pilose, apically hispidulous awns 1.8 mm long; style branches with deltoid acute not penicillate-tufted hispidulous appendages. Peru: Small neat very erect (2.5 ft.) clumps on steep grassy slopes, Chin- chapalca, 6 miles above Mito, Dept. Hudénuco, alt. about 2900 m (9500 ft.), 16-27 July 1922, J. F. Macbride & W. Featherstone 1596 (type no. 518100, herb. Field Mus.; dupl. no. 1,198,886, U.S. Nat. Herb.); in half-hanging ragged clumps on steep sunny slopes, with very brittle stems, Mito, Dept. Huanuco, alt. about 2745 m (9000 ft.), 8-22 July 1922, Macbride & Feather- stone 1482 (Field Mus., U.S. Nat. Herb.). This fine species, distinguished from most of its allies by the cutting of its foliage, appears to be nearest Coreopsis microlepis Blake & Sherff, from the Province of Chachapoyas, Peru. In that plant the upper leaves are very greatly reduced, so that the heads appear to be rather numerous in an essentially naked panicle; the leaves, although sometimes rather closely similar to those of C. sherffii, usually have the terminal segment of the ter- nately parted leaf so deeply 3-lobed as to give the appearance of a pin- nately 5-lobed leaf; the heads are smaller; and the outer phyllaries are ovate or oblong-ovate, only 1.5-2 mm long, 0.6—0.8 mm wide. The dried heads of C. sherffic impart a deep orange color to the water in which they are boiled. The species is dedicated to my friend Dr. Earl E. Sherff, whose quarter century of botanical activity, devoted primarily to the study of the Coreopsidinae, has resulted in revisions of the genera Coreopsis, Bidens (in press), Isostigma, Cosmos, Tetramolopium, Lipochaeta, Dubautia, and Rail- liardia, and in papers on various other groups of plants. Calea marginata Blake, nom. nov. Meyeria longifolia DC. Prodr. 5: 671. 1836. Calea longifolia Baker in Mart. Fl. Bras. 6%: 260. 1884. Not C. longifolia Gardn. 1848. The name longifolia is not available for this species, having been used by Gardner for a species described from Goyaz. The new name assigned refers to the conspicuous thickened margins of the leaves. Vasquezia oppositifolia (Lag.) Blake. Villanova oppositifolia Lag. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 31. 1816. Vasquezia titicacensis (Meyen & Walp.) Blake. Wedelia titicacensis Meyen & Walp. Nov. Act. Acad. Caes. Leop.-Carol. Nat. Cur. 19: Suppl. 1: 269. 1843. 7 Vill_..nova titiczcensis Walp. Nov. Act. Acad. Caes. Leop.-Carol. Nat. Cur. 19: Suppl. 1: 296. 1848. The name Villanova Lag. (1816) being preoccupied by Villanova Orteg. 388 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 (1797), it seems necessary to replace it by Vasquezia Phil. (1860), as has already been done by Rydberg (in the spelling Vasquesia). The few species of the genus are closely related, and require a revision based on examination of the types. The two names here proposed, together with V. anemonifolia (H.B.K.) Blake,* represent the only South American species that seem to be distinct on the basis of a preliminary survey of the genus. The name Vasquezia titicacensis (Meyen & Walp.) Blake has already appeared in print,’ but without the name-bringing synonym necessary for proper publi- cation. The proper spelling of Philippi’s generic name is uncertain. It occurs five times in his Florula Atacamensis (p. 1, 31 (twice), 62, and on pl. 5). In the formal description of the new genus, and in every other case except one, the name is spelled Vazquezza; in the description of the new species, it is Vas- quezia. Years later, when treating his genus as a synonym of Vzllanova, Philippi’ twice used the spelling Vasquezza. The derivation of the name, ob- viously personal, is nowhere explained. In view of Philippi’s later use of the spelling Vasquezia, and particularly since there was an A. Vasquez,° for whom the genus was presumably named, who was publishing chemical analyses of plants at the time Philippi was preparing his Florula Atacamensis, it seems advisable to adopt the form Vasquezza. In any case, there is no evident ex- cuse for the spelling Vasquesia used by Rydberg in the North American Flora; and Philippi’s single species was V. biternata, not V. biterna as given by Rydberg. I am indebted to Dr. Ivan M. Johnston for assistance in this matter. Helenium arizonicum Blake, sp. nov. Bienne paene glabrum, radice perpendiculato anguste conico; caulis vali- dus 5.5 dm altus foliosus ubique erecto-ramosus; folia basalia anguste ob- lanceolata acuminata in petiolum multo breviorem anguste marginatum angustata irregulariter sinuato-dentata, caulina anguste lanceolata v. line- ari-lanceolata acuminata integra basi dilatata breviter decurrente sessilia; capitula mediocria ca. 7-15 per caulem in apicibus caulis et ramorum soli- taria; radii flavi feminei ca. 12 mm longi; discus subglobosus purpureo- brunneus 1.5-2 cm diam.; receptaculum ovoideum obtusiusculum; achenia 2 mm longa in costis pilosa; pappi paleae ca. 2 mm longae e basi lanceolata longe aristatae. Root biennial, vertical, slenderly conic, about 10 em long, 1 em thick above, with few strong rootlets; stem solitary, erect, stout, striate-angled and sulcate, greenish-white, erect-branched essentially from base to apex, obscurely incurved-puberulous below, nearly glabrous above, dotted with yellow-brown glands; lower leaves 8-10 cm long (including petiole, this about 2 cm long, narrowly margined, at base ampliate, purplish, and about 7-nerved), 6-10 mm wide, triplinerved, essentially glabrous, densely glandu- 6 Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 26: 261. 1930. 7 Herrera, Pl. Cuze. Herrer. (Estud. Fl. Depart. Cuzco) 205. 1930. 8 Cat. Pl. Itin. Tarapaca 47. 1891. 9 Listed in the bibliography in Reiche, Grundz. Pflanzenverbr. Chile (Veg. der Erde 8:) 45. 1907. Sept. 15, 1937 BLAKE: NEW ASTERACEAE 389 lar-punctate on both sides, pale green; stem leaves numerous, much exceed- ing the internodes, the larger 6.5—-13 cm long, 4-10 mm wide, long-acuminate, at base usually abruptly widened (up to 1 cm wide), semi-amplexicaul, and decurrent for 1-4 mm, the uppermost linear or linear-subulate, 2.5-3.5 cm long; peduncles solitary at tips of stem and branches, enlarged just below the head, many-sulcate, 2-11 cm long; involucre soon reflexed, the phyllaries about 14, narrowly triangular, acuminate, 7-9 mm long, 1—1.5 mm wide at base, sparsely pilose below, densely so toward tip, punctate; disk subglobose, 12-17 mm high, 15-20 mm thick; submature receptacle 5 mm. long, 3 mm thick; rays about 12 or more, cuneate, deeply 3-lobed (lobes blunt, 2.5-3.3 mm long), 9—11-nerved, 12-138 mm long, 6-7 mm wide, densely gland-dotted outside; disk corollas yellow, tipped with purple-brown, short-pilose on teeth with several-celled hairs, 3.4 mm long (tube 0.2 mm, throat thick- cylindric, 2.6 mm, teeth ovate, 0.6 mm long); disk achenes erect-pilose on the ribs with rufescent hairs, sessile-glandular between the ribs, 2 mm long; pappus paleae 6—7, subequal, 1.8—2.3 mm long, the body lanceolate or lance- ovate, 0.6—0.8 mm long, gradually narrowed into the awn. Arizona: Near Mormon Lake, about 20 miles southeast of Flagstaff, Coconino Co., 17 June 1892, J. W. Touwmey 681 (type no. 212077, U.S. Nat. Herb.). Additional specimen in the Gray Herbarium, with same number and locality, but dated 18 July 1892. Both the specimens cited have been identified as Helenium bigelovir A. Gray, the type being so labeled in the hand of the late Dr. Rydberg. Hele- nium bigeloviz, which ranges from Oregon to southern California and is not known from Arizona (Rydberg’s record in the North American Flora being presumably based on this specimen), is a perennial with short nearly hori- zontal rootstock, simply or above few-branched stems terminated by very long-peduncled heads, entire long-petioled basal leaves, and usually broader stem leaves not abruptly ampliated at base. In Rydberg’s key in “‘North American Flora” Helenium arizonicum runs down to the group containing H. linifolium Rydb. and H. laciniatum A. Gray, both of which have a slender annual root, much smaller heads, and various other distinctive characters. Culcitium ovatum (Schlecht.) Blake. Gnaphalum umflorum Lam. Encyl. 2: 752. 1788. Not G. uniflorum Mill. 1768. Lasiocephalus ovatus Schlecht. Ges. Naturf. Fr. Berl. Mag. 8: 309. 1818. Culcitium reflecum H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 4: 171. pl. 362. 1820. Culcitium uniflorum (Lam.) Hieron. Bot. Jahrb. Engl. 19: 63. 1894. The genus Lasiocephalus Schlecht., with the two species L. ovatus and L. lingulatus Schlecht., was published in 1818.1° Schlechtendal remarked 10'The date assigned in the Index Kewensis is 1814. In Dalla Torre & Harms’ Genera Siphonogamarum the data 1818 is given on p. 562, and corrected on p. 637 to 1814. The title page date of vol. 8 of the Magazine is 1818. Schlechtendal’s paper ap- peared in the ‘‘Viertes Quartal 1814. October, November, December,”’ containing p. 241-312. As this number includes an article ‘‘Uber die Witterung des Jahres 1816,”’ beginning on p. 259, it is obvious that the number could not have been published in 1814, and, in the apparent absence of any evidence to the contrary, the title page date 1818 must be accepted. 390 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 that his material consisted of single branches from the collection of Hum- boldt and Bonpland furnished him by Prof. Willdenow, ‘‘der diese Gattung zuerst untersuchte, den Character essentialis feststellte und die Nahmen des Genus und der Species wahlte.’”’ Despite this remark, the names have uni- versally been attributed to Schlechtendal, and it seems as well to follow custom in this matter, since Willdenow’s name is not further mentioned in connection with the descriptions. Lessing (1832), by some error, cites the name as Oresigonia Schlecht. — The genus Laszocephalus has been referred by authors to Culcitiwum Humb. & Bonpl. (1809), but no attempt to identify Schlechtendal’s two species seems to have been made. His first species, L. ovatus, from ‘monte Pichin- cha,” is obviously the same as the later Culcitium reflerum H. B. K., de- scribed as from Mt. Antisana. His second L. lingulatus, from ‘‘America meridionali,’’ is not so readily identified. It is natural to look for it among the six species of Culcitiwm described in the Nova Genera et Species. Among these, only C. ledifoliwm can possibly be identical. It is described as with sim- ple, 1-flowered stem, whereas L. lingulatum is described as branching and with heads sometimes almost forming a panicle, sometimes solitary, binate, ternate, etc. On the whole, Schlechtendal’s description is perhaps more sug- gestive of Culcitiwm adscendens Benth. than of C. ledifoliwm, which is known to me only from the original description. Hieronymus (l.c.), on the basis of an original specimen in the Berlin Herbarium, has referred C. ledifolium H. B. K. to C. uniflorum (C. reflecum), but the original descriptions indicate that the plants are specifically different, and one cannot help suspecting that some error is involved. Weddell (Chlor. And. 1: 141. 1856), who ex- amined original specimens of both C. reflerum and C. ledifolium, kept them distinct, and his descriptions indicate that this course was correct. Schlech- tendal’s descriptions of LZ. ovatus and L. lingulatus surely refer to two differ- ent species. Under the circumstances, it seems best to transfer Schlechten- dal’s second name, which has obvious priority, to the genus Culcitium for convenience in handling it, without attempting to identify it at present with any later described species. It is difficult to reconcile his account of the varia- bility of the inflorescence with his statement that he had only single branches of the species described; perhaps this item came from notes of Willdenow. Culcitium lingulatum (Schlecht.) Blake. Lasiocephalus lingulatus Schlecht. Ges. Naturf. Fr. Berl. Mag. 8: 309. 1818. Hieracium dysonymum Blake, nom. nov. Hieracium junceum Fries, Symb. Hist. Hierac. 144. 1848. Not H. gunceum Bernh. Syst. Verz. Erf. 137. 1800. Fries’ name for this little known Mexican plant is preoccupied by Bern- hardi’s use of the same name, based on his transfer of Chondrilla guncea L. to Hieracium. I am indebted to the Lloyd Library for a copy of the entry from Bernhardi’s work, which is not in any Washington library. Sept. 15, 1937 DRECHSLER: TRIDENTARIA 391 Hieracium junceum Fries was originally based on material collected by Liebmann in pine woods at Cambre de Ixlepec, Sierra de Oaxaca, Mexico, altitude 3050 meters (10,000 ft.). Later Fries" cited additional material from “Sierra de Moucayo (Herb. Mart. varietas angustifolia’). It is fairly clear from the general style of Fries’ treatment that he was not formally naming a var. angustifolia here, but was merely stating that this specimen was a narrow-leaved form, and in any case no description was given. Zahn,” however, lists “‘subvar. angustifolium Fr. Epicr. 149,’’ and adds the charac- ter ‘“‘folis angustioribus, acheniis distincte attenuatis,”’ although he does not indicate that he had examined material. He gives the locality as “Sierra de Moncayo (ex Fr. I.c.).”’ BOTANY.—A species of Tridentaria preying on Difflugia constricta.1 CHARLES DRECHSLER, Division of Fruit and Vegetable Crops and Diseases, Bureau of Plant Industry. In earlier papers I described four fungi that subsist by the de- struction of testaceous rhizopods inhabiting different vegetable ma- terials undergoing decomposition in contact with the soil. Two of the fungi (4), Cochlonema cylindricum, endoparasitic on Euglypha denticulata Brown, and Zoopage tryphera, predacious on Geococcus vulgaris Francé, belong in the Zoopagaceae, a family of conidial Phycomycetes living for the most part on terricolous amoebae. The other two fungi both belong in an interrelated series of Hyphomycetes which has become known more especially, perhaps, through some widely distributed and comparatively robust members variously adapted for the capture of free-living nematodes. One of the two mucedinous forms in question (3), Dactylella passalopaga, preys on G. vulgaris and E. laevis Perty; while the other (2), Pedilospora dacty- lopaga, is predacious in Difflugia globulosa Duj. and Trinema en- chelys Ehrenb. A fungus strongly reminiscent of Pedilospora dactylopaga appeared recently in some old maizemeal agar plate cultures of Pythium Butleri Subr. to each of which had been added a small quantity of leaf mold collected in deciduous woods with an undergrowth of coarse her- baceous weeds. No special organs of capture could be discovered on the slender hyphae that made up its scanty mycelium. Nevertheless, when filaments on the surface of the agar substratum were traced for any considerable distance, they were found here and there to pass along the oral end of a shelled rhizopod, through the mouth of 11 Kpicr. Hierac. 149. 1862 12 Pflanzenreich (Heft 79) 4:280 1109. 1922. 1 Received June 20, 1937. 392 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 Sept. 15, 1937 DRECHSLER: TRIDENTARIA 393 which invariably a branch entered to ramify irregularly within the protoplasmic interior (Fig. 1, A, B). Manifestly the ramifying ele- ments functioned in assimilating the fleshy contents since some of the invaded animals had been depleted to such an extent that nothing remained but the more or less crusty tests. Despite the sluggishness of their locomotion the animals presumably endured invasion and appropriation of their digestible substance only because they were prevented from escaping. Appearances indicated that capture very probably was effected through adhesion of the hypha to the extruded sarcode, although direct optical evidence of an adhesive secretion on the mycelial filaments has not yet been obtained. In view of its normally slanting posture, much like that of Trinema enchelys, of its usually brownish or light brownish coloration, of its compressed ovoid shape, its inflexed mouth and its somewhat pro- truded anterior lip, the rhizopod destroyed by the fungus is clearly referable to the widespread Dzfflugia constricta (Ehrenb.) Leidy. Most of the specimens encountered measured about 55u in length from anterior lip to fundus (Fig. 1, A), about 45 uw in width as viewed flatways from above or below (Fig. 1, B), and about 30 wu in thickness from front to rear at a right angle to the inclined axis (Fig. 1, A). In dimensions, therefore, they were comparable to the smaller spineless individuals of D. constricta figured by Leidy (11: plate 18, figs. 12, 14, 17, 18, 19,), by Penard (14: page 212, fig. 37), and by Cash (1: plate 19, figs. 14-16). The conidiophores (Fig. 1, C; D; E, a-c; F) produced by the fun- gus in small numbers, show general similarity to those of Pedilospora dactylopaga with respect to stature, and like them also, bear curiously forked solitary conidia. A very pronounced difference however is at once apparent in that the spores terminate regularly in three rather than in two prongs. One of the prongs represents merely a prolonga- tion of the basal portion of the conidium, with which portion it con- tinues the axis of the conidiophore and forms an element analogous Fic. 1.—Tridentaria carnivora, drawn from material developed in mixed culture on maizemeal agar, with the aid of a camera lucida, at a uniform magnification; 1000 throughout. A.—Portion of hypha with a captured specimen of Dzifflugia constricta in lateral view. B.—Portion of hypha with a captured specimen of D. constricta in oral-posterior aspect. C.—Portion of hypha bearing a conidiophore with conidium attached. D.—Portion of mycelium with an old conidiophore that has declined to the substratum; from the prostrate conidiophore has arisen a secondary conidiophore whereon is borne a conidium. E.—Portion of hypha with three conidiophores, each bearing a conidium. F.—Portion of mycelium from which has arisen a relatively tall conidiophore whereon a conidium has been produced. G—Q.—Conidia, showing varia- tions in size, shape and arrangement of component elements; all being of the usual three-pronged type except the two-pronged specimen I. 394 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 9 to the entire conidium of Dactylella passalopaga. At a distance from its base often equal to about one-third of its length, this axial ele- ment bears laterally a broad process that immediately divides dichot- omously in a transverse plane to provide the other two prongs. Though the paired prongs are sometimes rather widely divaricate especially in conidia that have been in contact with the substratum for some time (Fig. 1, J, K, N, O), they are more usually directed upward at narrowly divergent angles to one another as well as to the axial prong (Fig. 1, D; E, a-c; F, G-I; L; M; P; Q). From the manner of its development the three-pronged conidium obviously is symmetrical with respect to only one plane, that being the plane passing through the axial element and bisecting the angle between the paired prongs. When viewed lengthwise from this plane, the spore (Fig. 1, G, H, Q), especially if considered together with the hypha supporting it, presents an appearance suggestive of a trident. The similitude is of consequence in encouraging, or, per- haps, even necessitating assignment of the fungus to 7’ridentaria, a genus erected by Preuss (15) in 1852 on a single species found by him on moist disintegrating stems of Brassica oleracea L. and described very sketchily under the name 7’. alba. The diagnosis of the genus likewise is exceedingly brief, consisting of only a dozen words. There can be no question, at least, that the conidia were intended to be described as simple and as being united in the form of a trident, but whether the conidiophore was considered as being included in the union remains open to speculation. Owing to its inadequate characterization the genus has not been at all kindly received by compilers. Saccardo (16), who set forth the conidiophores as terminating in simple conidia joined together in the form of a trident—an arrangement certainly not easy to relate to ordinary modes of development—added the comment that the genus had been imperfectly and obscurely described by Preuss, and hence was dubious. Lindau (12) in his first treatment of the genus char- acterized it in part as having very short conidiophores, and as bearing on these conidiophores solitary triradiate conidia. The portion of the description concerning the shortness of the conidiophores appears to have been based primarily on inference. On the other hand, the ref- erence to production of solitary triradiate conidia instead of simple conidia joined in the form of a trident, is evidently to be explained as expressive of an interpretation—lI believe a justifiable interpreta- tion—whereby the individual spore was looked upon as a more in- clusive unit than originally. One is tempted to submit, possibly, that Sept. 15, 1937 DRECHSLER: TRIDENTARIA 395 a structure held to resemble a trident might have been more accu- rately described by words meaning ‘‘three-pronged”’ or “‘three-tined”’ (as, for example “‘dreizackig” or “dreizinkig’’) than by the expres- sion ‘‘3 strahlige’’; since the proximal part corresponding to the shaft of a trident constitutes obviously a fourth radial and thus, strictly speaking, makes for a quadriradiate condition. In his key to the genera of the Hyalostaurosporae in a later work (13: page 535) Lindau, indeed, referred to the conidia of Tridentaria as three-pronged and treated them as analogous in outward make-up to the two-pronged conidia of Pedilospora. Then, however, somewhat inconsistently, in defining the genus (13: page 543) he characterized the conidia as being simple and as concreted in the form of a tri- dent,—exactly, therefore, as Saccardo had characterized them pre- viously. Complaining, not without reason, that it was impossible to gather from Preuss’ description how the conidia really look, he held that the genus might better have been rejected,—a course from which he was dissuaded by the small membership of the Mucedina- ceae-Staurosporae, and the hope of arousing some profitable atten- tion. Since its erection Tridentaria has had committed to it only one additional species, that being 7’. setigera published by Grove (8) in 1912. The original account of this species was accompanied by figures of compound branching structures which from the descrip- tion were evidently considered as being composed individually of a - three-celled conidiophore tapering toward its base and widening like a fan toward its apex, together with three conidia palmately united at their bases and collectively flanked on both sides by an acute seta. As Preuss made no mention of setae in his diagnosis of 7'r- dentaria, the authors dealing with 7. setigera in the “‘Sylloge fun- gorum”’ (17) quite properly raised the question whether the fungus might not perhaps better be regarded as a species of Titaea. The similarity of the branching structures to the conidia of Tetracladium marchalianum De Wild., especially as figured in a recent paper by Karling (10), suggests an alternative disposition, if, indeed, the dis- tinction between Titaea and Tetracladium can still be maintained. Undoubtedly the fungus preying on Difflugia constricta fits into Tridentaria better than does T’. setigera; and better, too, than it fits into any other genus. Though its conidial prongs do not lie in one plane, and though the shoulders of its lateral prongs are compara- tively narrow, yet the general resemblance of its reproductive ap- paratus to a trident seem more realistically suggestive than the resemblances underlying most of the names applied to fungi. The 396 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 structural design here is conspicuously different from the triradiate design that was set forth by Fresenius (6) as characteristic of the conidia of T’rinacrium subtle Riess, and that accordingly may be held more or less typical of the genus erected on this species. To be sure, in application Trinacriwm has not been strictly limited to tri- radiate forms, having been made to include 7’. subtropicale Speg. with quadriradiate conidia, as well as 7’. tropicale Speg. with conidia com- posed mostly of three or four radial elements whereof the proximal one is pedicelliform and shorter than the others. The former species differs markedly from the fungus destructive to D. constricta in the greater width (5 to 6u) and cruciate arrangement of its conidial branches, while the latter presents equally decisive differences in its shorter ascending conidiophores and shorter conidial radiants. The genus T'etracium P. Henn. with quadriradiate, elongate-fusoid, pluri- septate conidia may be dismissed from consideration, for although originally described as presumably eligible for inclusion in the Muce- dineae, Hohnel’s study (9) of its type species, 7’. Auwrantiz P. Henn., refers it definitely to the Tuberculariaceae. From its thoroughgoing similarity in biological relationship and reproductive habit to some of the Hyphomycetes known to prey on animals, the fungus under discussion must be regarded as unques- tionably a member of the same predacious series. Its distinctive - conidial apparatus is easily derived from that of the genus Dactylella Grove through branching of the solitary conidium; thereby offering an analogy to Pedilospora dactylopaga and to the nematode-captur- ing species I have described elsewhere (5) under the name T'ripo- sporina aphanopaga. In P. dactylopaga such derivation comes about through a single bifurcation of a narrow elongate conidium of the type found in Dactylella passolopaga and D. leptospora Drechsl. (5), provided that the distal elements or prongs be oriented parallel to one another; in the present fungus a similarly narrow elongate conidium bears a lateral branch that immediately bifurcates into two prongs usually diverging little from the axial prong; in 7’. aphanopaga, on the other hand, a swollen conidium of the type produced in D. el- lipsospora Grove (7), D. gephyropaga Drechsl. (5) and D. bembicodes Drechsl. (5), bifurcates twice successively, the four distal apices di- verging widely from one another. As Preuss attributed to Tridentarza alba “‘Sporis oblongis vel clavaeformibus” it may be inferred that what would now be regarded as the complete conidium of his species could be derived through appropriate branching of a clavate spore of the type represented, for example, in D. asthenopaga Drechsl. (5). Sept. 15, 1937 DRECHSLER: TRIDENTARIA 397 In any event the clavate elements ascribed to the type species of Tridentaria sets it apart from the fungus subsisting on Dzifflugia con- stricta. Since this fungus appears specifically distinct also from the few other quadriradiate species in the Mucedinaceae-Staurosporae, it is described as new under a name suggestive of its predacious character. Tridentaria carnivora sp. nov. Mycelium sparsum, effusum; hyphis sterilibus hyalinis, parce ramosis, mediocriter septatis, 1—2u crassis, hac illac animalcula testacea adhaerendo capientibus, ramulum in orem cujusque intrudentibus, hyphas intus evol- ventibus quae carnem assumunt. Hyphae fertiles sparsae, hyalinae, septa- tae, erectae, simplices sed post maturitatem procidentes diende tum saepius hyphas fertilis ordinis secundi proferentes, plerumque 32-85y altae, basi 1.7—3.3u crassae, sursum leviter fastigatae, apice .9—1.4u crassae, in unicum conidium abeuntes; conidiis hyalinis, vulgo ex tribus partibus ad instar fuscinae compositis,—parte longissima quae lineam hyphae fertilis producit elongato-fusoidea, recta vel leviter curvata, 5—-8- loculari, 35-63y longa, 2.8- 3.8u crassa, deorsum in hastili 1-3- loculari, 12—21y longo, sursum in dente 3—5- loculari, 23-43 longo consistente, inter hastile et dentem unum ramu- lum lateralem ferente; hoc ramulo infimo furcato atque in duos dentes 1—6- loculares 17—44y longos apicem versus attenuatos vulgo abeunte, rarius simplici manente tum conidium bidens faciente. Difflugiam constrictam capiens consumensque habitat in humo silvestri prope Beltsville, Maryland. Mycelium scanty, spreading; the vegetative hyphae hyaline, sparingly branched, septate at moderate intervals, 1 to 2u wide, here and there cap- turing testaceous rhizopods by adhesion, thrusting a branch into the mouth of each captive and giving rise inside to assimilative hyphae that appropriate the protoplasmic contents. Conidiophores sparsely scattered, hyaline, sep- tate, erect, typically simple though after maturity declining to the sub- stratum and then often putting forth secondary fertile hyphae, in any case mostly 32 to 85u (average 60u) high, 1.7 to 3.3u (average 2.5u) wide at the base, tapering slightly upward, .9 to 1.4u (average 1.2u) wide at the tip, terminating in a single conidium. Conidia hyaline, usually composed of three elements in trident-like arrangement,—the longest element elongate- fusoid, straight or slightly curved, divided by septa into 5 to 8 (average 6.4) cells, measuring 35 to 63u (average 52y) in length, 2.8 to 3.8u (average 3.2y) in width, its axis prolonging the axis of the supporting hypha, its proximal portion of 1 to 3 cells forming a shaft 12 to 21u (average 18x) long, its distal portion of 3 to 5 cells forming a somewhat tapering prong 23 to 43u (average 34u) long, between shaft and prong bearing a lateral spur; the spur usually bifurcating near its base into two prongs, each divided by septa into 1 to 6 (average 4) cells and measuring 17 to 44u (average 34) in length; occa- sional elongation of spur directly into a simple branch leading to develop- ment of atypical two-pronged conidia. Capturing and consuming Difflugia constricta, it occurs in leaf mold near Beltsville, Md. LITERATURE CITED 1. Casa, J., and Hopkinson, J. Rhizopoda, Part II. In Casu, J., Wartss, G. H., 398 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 and Hopkinson, J. The British freshwater Rhizopoda and Heliozoa. Lone don, 1915. . : 2. Drecusier, C. Pedilospora dactylopaga n. sp., a fungus capturing and con- suming testaceous rhizopods. This JOURNAL 24: 395-402. 1934. 3. DrecusierR, C. A Fusarium-like spectes of Dactylella capturing and consuming testaceous rhizopods. This JOURNAL 26: 397-404. 1936. 4. Drecusier, C. New Zoopagaceae destructive to soil rhizopods. Mycologia 29: 229-249. 1937. 5. Drecuster, C. Some Hyphomycetes that prey on free-living terricolous Nema- todes. Mycologia 29: 447-552. 1937. 6. Fresenius, G. Bettrdgezur Mykologie. Hefte 1,2. 80p. Frankfurt. 1852. 7. Grove, W. B. New or noteworthy fungi.—Part III. Jour. Bot. 24: 129-137, 197-206. 1886. 8. Grove, W.B. New or noteworthy fungi.—Part IV. Jour. Bot. 50: 9-18, 44-55. 1912. 9. Hounen, F. v. Fragments zur Mykologie (XIII Mitteilung, Nr. 642 bis 718). Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien Naturw. Kl]. 120(1): 378-484. 1911. 10. Karuine, J.S. Tetracladium marchalianum and its relation to Asterothrix, and Cerasterias. Mycologia 27: 478-495. 1935. 11. Lerpy, J. Freshwater rhizopods of North America. (Rep. U. 8. Geol. Surv., vol. 12.) 7 1879: 12. Linpavu, G. Hyphomycetes. In ENauer, A., and Pranti, K. Dvie natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien. 1. Teil, Abteilung 1**: 415-517. 1900. 13. Linpau, G. Die Pilze Deutschlands, Osterreichs und der Schweiz. VIII. Ab- teilung: Fungi imperfecti: Hyphomycetes (erste Halfte). In RABENHORsT, L. Kryptogamen-Flora. Ed. 2, 18: 1904-1907. 14, Prnarp, E. Faune rhizopodique du bassin du Léman. 714 p. Geneva, 1902. 15. Preuss, G. T. Uebersicht untersuchter Pilze, besonders aus der Umgegend von Hoyerswerda. Linnaea 25: 71-80. 1852. 16. Saccarpo, P. A. Sylloge fungorum 4: 231-232. 1886. 17. Saccarpo, P. A., Saccarpo, D., Traverso, G. B., and Trotrsr, A. Sylloge fungorum 25: 750. 1931. BOTAN Y.—Notes on the genus Staurogyne.!. E. C. Lronarp, U.S. National Museum. (Communicated by WiLi1am R. Maxon.) Staurogyne, a genus of Acanthaceae, subfamily Nelsonioideae, was described? by Wallich in 1831. He published at that time a single species, S. argentea, citing as type a specimen collected in Sillet by F. D. Silva. The following year Nees established* the genus Eber- matera, now considered a synonym of Stawrogyne, describing four species, H. humilis and EF. thyrsoidea from Burma, E. axillaris from Penang, and EF. mandioccana from Brazil. Up to the present, various authors have recognized about 80 species. The majority of these however, were published under Ebermaiera, and although Kuntze‘ in 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- ceived May 5, 1937. 2 Pl. Asiat. Rar. 2: 80. pl. 186, 1831. 3 Pl. Asiat. Rar. 3: 75. 1832. 4 Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 497. 1891. SEPT. 15, 1937 LEONARD: STAUROGYNE 399 Fic. 1.—Staurogyne agrestis Leonard, sp. nov. A, portion of horizontal branch; B, capsule; C, the posterior calyx lobe and one of the lateral and anterior pairs; D, bractlets; EE, bract; F, corolla, opened to show stamens. (All nat. size.) Fic. 2.—Staurogyne trinitensis Leonard, sp. nov. A, portion of plant, nat. size; B, bract; CC, bractlet; D, posterior calyx segment and one of the lateral and anterior pairs. (B, C, D, twice nat. size.) 400 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 1891 made numerous transfers, a considerable number remain to be reclassified. The genus Staurogyne consists of shrubby or herbaceous plants with usually yellow or purplish flowers borne in spikes or narrow racemes. It is readily distinguished from other genera of the sub- family by its 4 stamens (usually with a minute sterile fifth stamen or staminode) and by its irregular calyx, the posterior segment being broader and usually longer than the others. The species of this genus are widely distributed in the tropics of both hemispheres; in America they are most numerous in the moun- tainous regions of eastern Brazil. Unfortunately many are still un- represented in America herbaria. Two new species are described in the present paper, one from Panama and Nicaragua, the other from Trinidad. Also, three are transferred from Hbermaera to Staurogyne, one is renamed, and another is reduced to synonymy. Staurogyne agrestis Leonard, sp. nov. Herba; caules erecti vel procumbentes, subteretes, pilosi; folia ovata vel oblongo-ovata, apice obtusa, basi angustata, parce pilosa, petiolis pilosis; spicae terminales; bracteae oblongo-ovatae, apice acutae, basi angustatae, pilosae et glanduloso-pubescentes; bracteolae lanceolatae; calycis laciniae inaequales, pilosae et glanduloso-pubescentes, posteriore oblongo-lanceolata, 3-nervia, ceteris linearibus, acutis, l-nerviis; corolla glabra, labio superiore bilobo, inferiore trilobo, lobis rotundatis; capsula oblonga, glabra vel apice minute pubescens; semina minuta, ovoidea, minute papillosa. A low herb, becoming subligneous at base; stems much branched, erect or procumbent, subterete, often purplish, the lowermost branches spreading, up to 20 cm long, curved upward at tip, pilose, the hairs up to 1.5 mm long; petioles up to 7 mm long, pilose; leaf blades ovate to oblong-ovate, up to 3.5 cm long and 2 cm wide, obtuse at apex, narrowed at base, sometimes purplish with age, sparingly pilose, the hairs of the lower surface confined chiefly to the costa and lateral veins (6 to 9 pairs); flowers borne in narrow spikelike racemes (these terminating all the branches), crowded or the lowermost distant, the rachis pilose; bracts oblong-ovate, the lowermost about 10 mm long and 5 mm wide, thence successively smaller upward, acute at tip, narrowed at base, faintly 3-nerved, appressed-pilose or subglabrous above, the lower surface pubescent with short straight glandular hairs about 0.25 mm long or the costa bearing a few longer slender eglandular ones; pedicels up to 1.5 mm long, bearing at middle a pair of 1-nerved, lanceolate bractlets 5 mm long and 1.5 mm wide; calyx segments unequal, the posterior segment oblong-lanceolate, 5 mm long and 1 mm wide, 3-nerved, the anterior pair linear, 4.5 mm long, 0.5 mm wide, 1-nerved, the lateral pair subulate, 4 mm long and about 0.25 mm wide, 1-nerved, all pilose or shortly glandular- pubescent; corolla 5 or 6 mm long, glabrous, purple (?), the tube 1 mm in diameter below middle, thence enlarged to 1.5 mm at throat, the 2 upper lobes rounded, about 1 mm wide, the lower middle lobe obovate, 1.5 mm long, 1.75 mm wide, the lateral lobes oval and somewhat smaller; filaments SHptT.-15, 1937 LEONARD: STAUROGYNE 401 1 mm long, glabrous; anther lobes 0.5 mm long; staminode slender, 0.5 mm long; style 2 mm long, glabrous; capsule oblong, 1.5 mm wide at base, gradually narrowed to 0.75 mm near tip, glabrous or bearing a few minute hairs at tip; seeds ovoid, light brown, 0.5 mm long, minutely roughened. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,225,111, collected in a wet field between Matias Hernandez and Juan Diaz, Province of Panama, Panama, January 21, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 31936).A plant col- lected in Nicaragua by Charles Wright on the U.S. North Pacific Exploring Expedition under Commanders Ringgold and Rodgers is of this species. Staurogyne agrestis is probably a close relative of S. repens (Nees) Kuntze, from Matto Grosso, Brazil, but differs in its bushy habit and much larger leaves. The leaves of S. repens are described as oblong-lanceolate, 6 to 7 lines long and 2 to 23 lines wide, and its habit as repent, but in S. agrestzs we have a bushy herb with possibly the lower branches procumbent and the leaves ovate to oblong-ovate and as much as 3.5 cm long and 2 cm wide. The inflorescence, bracts, corollas, capsules, and pubescence of the two spe- cies are similar, however. Staurogyne trinitensis Leonard, sp. nov. Herba; caules decumbentes, pilosi; folia ovata, apice obtusa, basi angus- tata, utrinque parce pilosa; racemi compacti, breves, terminales; bracteae oblongae, apice acutae vel subobtusae, parce pilosae; bracteolael anceolatae, apice acutae, pilosae; calycis laciniae inaequales, pilosae, ciliatae, posteriore lineari, ceteris subulatis; corolla parva, glabra, labio superiore bilobo, infer- iore trilobo, lobis rotundatis; capsula glabra. Decumbent herb; stems about 30 em long, rooting at the lower nodes, pilose, the hairs up to 1 mm long; leaf blades ovate, up to 3.5 cm long and 1.7 cm wide, obtuse at apex, narrowed at base, thin, sparingly pilose on both surfaces, the hairs of the lower surface confined chiefly to costa and lateral veins (4 or 5 pairs); petioles up to 1 em long, pilose; flowers borne in short terminal spikelike racemes up to 1.5 cm long; bracts oblong, 7 to 12 mm long, 1.5 to 3 mm wide, acute to subobtuse at apex, sparingly pilose; pedicels 0.5 to 1 mm. long, bearing at middle a pair of lanceolate pilose bractlets 5 to 6 mm long and 1 mm wide, acute at apex; calyx segments 5 to 6 mm long, pilose and ciliate, the hairs up to 1 mm long, the posterior segment linear, about 0.7 mm wide, 3-nerved, the others subulate, barely 0.5 mm wide near base, 1-nerved; corolla 5 or 6 mm long, glabrous, the lobes of the upper lip rounded, about 1 mm wide, the middle lower lobe ovate, about 1 mm wide, the two lateral ones similar but somewhat smaller; filaments 2 mm long, glabrous; anther lobes barely 0.5 mm broad; style 2.5 mm long, glabrous; capsule (immature) glabrous, about 1 cm long. Type in the Britton Herbarium, New York Botanical Garden, collected on the road to Caroni Estate, Arima, Trinidad, April 5, 1866 (Trinidad Her- barium no. 2900, the collector unknown). Apparently unrelated to any other American member of the genus. An appended note by N. E. Brown states that the specimen does not match any American material at Kew but is near the Indian S. zeylanica (Nees) Kuntze. 402 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 Staurogyne brachiata (Hiern) Leonard, comb. nov. Ebermaiera brachiata Hiern in Nat. For. Kjébenhaven Vid. Medd. 1877: 69. 1877. , Type collected at Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, by Glaziou (no. 3070). Staurogyne wawrana Leonard, nom. nov. Ebermaiera graciis Wawra, Itin. Princ. Coburgi 1: 94. pl. 10. 1883; not Ebermatera gracilis T. Anders. (1867). Type collected in ‘‘Walder von Alto d’Imperador,”’ Petropolis, Brazil (Coll. Il. 55). Staurogyne itatiaiae (Wawra) Leonard, comb. nov. Ebermaiera Itatiaiae Wawra, Itin. Prine. Coburgi 1: 93. pl. 11. 1883. Type collected in ‘““Hochwalder des Itatiaia,’’ Brazil (Coll. II. 434). Staurogyne warmingiana (Hiern) Leonard, comb. nov. Ebermaiera Warmingiana Hiern in Nat. For. Kj6benhavn Vid. Medd. 18/7763. 1377..* Type collected ‘‘in marginibus silvarum ad Serra da Piedade,”’ Brazil, by Warming. STAUROGYNE VAUTHIERIANA (Nees) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 497. 1891. Hbermaiera Vauthieriana Nees in Mart. FI. Bras. 9: 15. 1847. Staurogyne macrantha Lindau in Bull. Herb. Boiss. 5: 648. 1897. Type collected at Villa Rica, Prov. Minas Geraes, Brazil, by Vauthier (no. 182). The type of Stawrogyne macrantha was collected near Itacolumy, Prov. Minas Geraes, Brazil, by Schwacke (no. 10495). ZOOLOGY .—A new pocket gopher of the genus Cratogeomys from Mexico.: E. A. GotpMan, Bureau of Biological Survey. In a revision of the pocket gophers of the genus Cratogeomys by E. W. Nelson and the writer,” 25 geographic races assigned to four species were recognized. Since the revision was published I have had occasion to examine three specimens from near timber line on Mount Orizaba, Vera Cruz, the highest mountain in North America south of Alaska. The specimens were referred by Elliot’ to typical 1 Received May 24, 1937. 2 Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 47: 135-154. 1934. 3 Cat. Coll. of Mammals in Field Columbian Mus., Pub. 115, Zool. ser. 8: 310. 1907. Sept. 15, 1937 GOLDMAN: NEW POCKET GOPHER 403 Cratogeomys perotensis but are now found to exhibit characters that are distinctive. For the opportunity to describe this new subspecies I am indebted to Dr. Wilfred H. Osgood of the Field Museum of Natural History Cratogeomys perotensis peraltus, subsp. nov. Timber-line Pocket Gopher Type.—From near timber line on Mount Orizaba, Vera Cruz, Mexico (altitude about 12,500 feet). No 13831, adult, skin and skull, Field Museum of Natural History, collected by Edmund Heller, July 5, 1904. Distribution Known only from the type locality on the upper slope of Mount Orizaba, western Vera Cruz, Mexico. General characters.—Similar in size and color to Cratogeomys perotensis perotensis of the higher slopes of the Cofre de Perote, and to Cratogeomys perotensis estor of Las Vigas, at a lower elevation on the eastern edge of the interior plateau in western Vera Cruz. Differing notably from both perotensis and estor in cranial details, especially the peculiar form of the nasals and adjoining bony elements. Color.—Type (acquiring fresh pelage): Upper parts from top of head over - back to rump near ‘‘sayal brown” (Ridgway, 1912) moderately mixed with black, becoming lighter and near “cinnamon” along sides, forearms, and thighs; under parts thinly overlaid with dull buff, the light plumbeous basal color showing through; middle of face and muzzle blackish; auricular patches deep black; a white patch at upper base of tail; fore feet brownish; hind feet white; tail thinly haired, dark brownish above, somewhat paler below. Skull—vVery similar to that of perotensis in general form, but nasals shorter, barely reaching anterior plane of zygomata, less tapering and wedge- shaped, the posterior ends decidedly broader, more rounded; premaxillae narrower, less extended posteriorly, ending in plane of lachrymals (usually reaching slightly beyond this plane in perotensis); frontals broader between premaxillae and reaching farther forward along median line to meet corre- spondingly broad ends of nasals; squamosal portion of lambdoid crest lower, less trenchant, rising more nearly vertically over mastoid process, instead of strongly bent forward as in perotensis; jugal broader anteriorly, inserted farther forward in maxilla; lateral margins of palate more excised behind posterior molars; pterygoids rather broad, with more prominent lateral wings; molariform teeth slightly narrower; crown of last upper molar some- what more quadrate, less triangular, the posterior lobe broader, and the outer side less oblique. Compared with that of estor the skull is similar in size, but departs in detail as follows: Nasals broader, less tapering and wedge-shaped posteriorly; premaxillae narrower, about equaling nasals in transverse plane near posterior ends of latter (premaxillae wider than nasals near posterior ends in estor); braincase broader anteriorly, tending to develop more prominent postorbital processes at fronto-parietal suture; zygomata lighter, slightly more squarely, spreading anteriorly, the upper surface of maxillary roots narrower; frontals broader anteriorly between premaxillae; palatal grooves shorter, ending at posterior palatine foramina which are placed farther forward near transverse plane between first and second upper molars (grooves longer and ending at palatine foramina near plane between second and third upper molars in estor); crown of last upper molar somewhat more quadrate, less triangular, the outer reéntrant angle little developed; tubercle over root of lower incisor less prominent. 404 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 9 Measurements—Type: Total length, 315 mm; tail vertebrae, 90; hind foot, 42.5. Two adult male topotypes, respectively: 300, 305; 92, 82; 41, 41. Skull (type): Greatest length (median line), 57.6; zygomatic breadth, 41.3; width across squamosals (over mastoids), 36; interorbital constriction, 8; length of nasals, 21.3; maxillary toothrow (alveoli), 10.7; upper incisors (width of cutting edge), 8.2. Remarks.—Cratogeomys p. peraltus is apparently restricted to the upper slopes near timber line (about 12,500 feet) on Mount Orizaba. Its range may be interrupted below by that of the much smaller pocket gopher, Thomomys umbrinus orizabae, which is very numerous, at least on the west slope, at 9,500 feet. Specimens examined.—Total number four, three skins and skulls and one additional skull, all in the Field Museum of Natural History. CONTENTS CHEMISTRY.—Some aspects of the study of insulin. rca | VIGNEAUD... 20s sees e eee eee entree tte e es PALEONTOLOGY.—Clithrocrinus, new name for Cistocrinus EpwIn Kirk. sige aks sae ae Borany.—Eleven new Asteraceae from North and South / ‘ics S. F. BAR, cs. ys a oe: Borany.—A species of Tridentaria preying on Difflugia const Cuanims DRECHSLER.....:.<.4+4+ses-* aah toccihes EG 4 Botany.—Notes on the genus Staurogyne. E. C. Lnonanp . ZooLtoay.—A new pocket gopher of the genus Cratogeomye f Mexico. E. A. oO aE i * This Journal is indexed in the International Index to Periodicale _ Seacanli [hath “ ee *-¢ i: > © oes ary: § A } be «steady Ne : OcToBER 15, 1937 No. 10 S43, th ew . SN Al MUSE ae i ; Se te ie a a sie ee , . _— JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY 3 OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Rotanp W. Brown Esen H. Toore FrepvericK D. Rossini U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS e RayMonD J. SEEGER C. F. W. Mueseseck “a PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY . E. A. GoLDMAN W. W. Rosey S BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Aanes CHASE Henry B. Coins, Jr. a BOTANIOAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 2 Frank C. Kracex : : CHEMIOAL SOCIETY a PUBLISHED MONTHLY 4 BY THE a WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Be 450 Aunalp St. 4 at MENASHA, WISCONSIN 4 Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Menasha, Wis. a Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized January 21, 1933. my i. © = This JOURNAL, the official organ of ‘es Washi (1) short original papers, written or communi proceedings and programs of meetings notes of events connected with oe scientific life Manuscripts may be sent to any acdbce é ie Paine Editors. It is quested that contributors consult the latest. numbers of the JournaLand conf. manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of erie pet onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good » mee fometan be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editor assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor Sue ee correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of one full-page halftone or nee full-page line drat be paid for by the author. Line drawings are preferred. ae eee ae Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will cckoate to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted | nD form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. f in ee Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be firtiabed gra' tis. or ’ bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive Let date of issue, and Sapiaee will be furnished at cost when ordered, in acco _ the following schedule of prices. | 3 Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. ; 12 pp. 16 pp. 100 $ .75 $1.20 $1.50 © $2.00». 150 1.25 1.90. 2.55 8.25). 200 P75 2.60 3.60 i Ahh GME RS 250 2.00 3.30 ae. 65 “ “3 75 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and Be a prin . he corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 108 Hi 0) ee om “a pot at bu e Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy o Selena ae addressed to 350 Ahnaip Street, Menasha, Wis., 0 or te 6; “Treanor, _ oe wan Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C. Subscription Rates:—Per volupie:.. -isa.3 dsc age ees See To members of affiliated societies; per volume. eae Fe Se See: F Single numbers. . o 60-4. © S o > + se 200 w o RS = uu) Re = = B < <3 : I50 > Oo we 2 Black Creek = 8 < = : = a) (220 — = BS . 100 K it O ee, ©, eS 2 O £2525 QS SI III LAA A/ 02 605 OO /\ AG S29 5°, a 25 co OUR RR EER O £52555 2050 a "e es es KR C525¢ 2 KOO We o, o% 5 5 > 6; es 5050 . oS<5 OO 25 (A) 625 xm BS 5 a5 orate’ =o 525250 0525225 52505 &s 2. > \7 525 O en = > O .°, O 2 2625 x ’e $2525 Ox S509 S26 \7 xp °, 2 4 oS¢ oo ¢ Xs -@'@'@, Pas 50 oO ° 525252 2 Mereteren ae 5.250505 525 <5 i) S505 x 55 OO — e 6; ¢ "es 2S ? 2. eo, O ere’ 25 oO 8 O an 62525 5 O ere" O 2. y, © e076" °, O e 000 OO ©. ®, S856 S509 O > er © O oS Oo one, 29 > 0605 635 @, SS %e OO YS \; > © 2D Cx) & 625 O 252 SOS a 2, <0; ?. 50 99,9, °' > 5 5 ‘es OR es 2 & 5 , > 5 6 os QO = KX O WA BSS 1 LZBS ‘2 > $25 o, oO ®, OD oS e °, 25 °, MG'_ CNN Ee 2 seseceass Ri LS .) wrerete”, res eS 5 NN NI OO oe > © eter’ eS ‘ras NN oe 5 ‘es 5 Gi O OO ° S| RS ZG: A F SC D E F G H | Fig. 1—Composition of typical well waters in the Coastal Plain of Virginia and South Carolina. (Names above columns refer to stratigraphic units; numbers refer to depth of wells in feet.) Soe e: DDO 0 & OY D> o GZ exchange, derived from the weathering of crystalline rocks, may also make up part of the clastic material of these sediments. The depth at which softening begins varies with the relative pro- portion of calcium and magnesium carbonates to base-exchange minerals in the materials through which the water passes. If the base- exchange minerals are present in an amount at least proportional to 408 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 the carbonates, the two processes are probably almost simultaneous, the calcium being exchanged almost as soon as it is taken into solu- tion. If, however, the carbonates are present in the rock materials in amounts more than equivalent to the exchange minerals, or if the exchange capacity of the base-exchange minerals has been exhausted in the shallower materials, the ground waters must travel farther before being softened. This phenomenon of natural water softening is particularly pro- nounced in the formations that underlie Virginia and North and South Carolina. In Virginia most of the waters from a depth of more than 100 or 150 feet are sodium bicarbonate waters, and many waters from even shallower depths contain some sodium bicarbonate, indicat- ing that softening has begun to take place. The chemical composition of typical well waters in the Coastal Plain of Virginia from different depths in different formations is shown graphically on Fig. 1, A, B, C, D, and E. Many of the Virginia waters are characterized by a very high content of sodium bicarbonate, with as much as 250 to 350 parts per million of sodium and 500 to 700 parts of bicarbonate; the calcium and magnesium content of these waters is very low, and in many the sulfate and chloride are low (diagrams C, D, and E). The high content of bicarbonate in these waters and the comparatively shallow depths at which softening takes place indicate that (1) the percolating waters had, at the outset, a high content of carbon dioxide and, consequently, a high capacity for solution of calclum and magnesium carbonate, (2) the rock materials through which they passed were relatively calcareous, and (3) the proportion of base-exchange minerals to cal- cium and magnesium carbonates in the materials was relatively high. There is little detailed information on the ground waters of North Carolina. The few analyses at hand indicate that softening is fairly complete at depths of about 100 or 150 feet. The three most important water-bearing formations in South Caro- lina are the Tuscaloosa, the Black Creek, and the Peedee. Typical waters from different depths in the Black Creek formation are shown graphically in Fig. 1, diagrams F, G, H, and I. The waters from this formation are usually fairly low in dissolved mineral matter, generally containing less than 200 parts per million. The waters from the Tus- caloosa formation are similar in character to those from the Black Creek formation, although they generally contain less than 150 parts per million of dissolved mineral matter. The waters from the Peedee formation are more highly mineralized, usually having a mineral con- tent of 500 to 750 parts per million. The deeper waters from the Oct. 15, 1937 FOSTER: GROUND WATERS 409 Peedee formation are similar to the highly mineralized sodium bi- carbonate waters in Virginia, shown diagrammatically in Fig. 1, C, D, and E. The predominating chemical constituent of the waters in all these formations shows a gradual alteration with increasing depth, from calcium bicarbonate, which characterizes the shallower waters, to sodium bicarbonate, which characterizes the deeper waters. The depth at which softening takes place differs in the different forma- tions. In the Tuscaloosa it apparently takes place at less than 150 feet, in the Black Creek at about 150 to 200 feet, and in the Peedee at about 200 feet. The ground waters from the other formations of South Carolina show the same alteration in character with depth. In the Cooper marl and Santee limestone the softening apparently takes place at a depth between 200 and 300 feet. The phenomenon of base exchange is much less pronounced in the formations that underlie Georgia. These formations contain a larger proportion of limestone than those in the area to the north. The deep waters, as well as the shallow waters, are for the most part calcium bicarbonate waters, although wells more than 800 feet deep may yield sodium bicarbonate water. This is brought out in Fig. 2, dia- grams A, B, C, D, E, and F, which show graphically the composition of typical waters from different depths in different formations in the Coastal Plain of Georgia. The data at hand indicate that the ground waters of Georgia are remarkably uniform in chemical composition, regardless of the formation from which they come. The general range in total dissolved mineral matter for the waters from the various formations is 150 to 250 parts per million, and in total hardness 100 to 200 parts, although there are waters with more dissolved mineral matter or with less. Apparently there is, then, in Georgia, no forma- tion which yields markedly superior or inferior water, and the choice of the proper horizon to tap for a water supply depends on local conditions. The rocks of Florida are, properly considered, the southward extension of the formations in Georgia and Alabama. In Florida, as in Georgia, calcium bicarbonate waters predominate. The diminution of the tendency of the formations to soften the waters in them, noted in Georgia, is apparently carried to completion in Florida, where a sodium bicarbonate water is rare. Two have been noted in the Okeechobee area. These are from shallow wells, however, and may be considered a local phenomenon. The calcium bicarbonate waters of Florida do not show the same uniformity in chemical composition as those of Georgia. The range in total dissolved mineral matter is 410 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 greater, and the relative content of the different constituents is much more variable. In this respect the relative amounts of calcium and magnesium are particularly to be noted. In some waters the calcium content is relatively high and the magnesium content is very low, as fe») “N Oo > as aN 5 x XxX HARDNESS PARTS PER MILLION W \A 658 Zs: one rex 080% este Ye “tetas cesses 7 atetet sete: Z RSo5e4 08 oy stones wt p 525 504 4 MILLIGRAM EQUIVALENTS PER KILOGRAM SRE Ros ee SX MSY Se 509 Ree seeee roren RS 7 5525 G Wt Th Wl ch Tel Gs Fig. SE ait of typical well waters in the Coastal Plain of Georgia and in Florida. (Names above columns refer to stratigraphic units; numbers refer to depth of wells in feet.) 5% SS SS Se $52 one oeestetet shown in diagram G in Fig 2; in others these two constituents are present in almost equivalent amounts, as shown in diagram H, Fig. 2. In general, waters containing more than 400 parts per million of total solids and having a total hardness of more than 400 parts have, pro- portionately, considerably more sulfate and chloride than waters containing less than 400 parts of total solids, although some waters Oenr. 15,1937 FOSTER: GROUND WATERS 411 with less than 400 parts of dissolved mineral matter also contain notable quantities of these constituents. The best water is generally obtained from the younger formations. These deposits usually yield soft water of low mineral content (Fig. 2, I), but in some areas they may not yield enough water for more than small domestic supplies. Near the coast along the whole area another factor may enter in the determination of the chemical character of the waters. Most of the formations are assumed to have submarine outcrops. If the head of fresh water in a formation is sufficient to balance the head of heavier sea water, which tends to force salt water into the formation at its submarine outcrop, salt water will not enter the formation, and the normal chemical relations of the waters in the formation will be undisturbed. If, however, the fresh-water head is not sufficient, sea water will enter the formation to the point where it is balanced by the fresh-water head. If this point lies somewhere inland from the coast line, salty waters will be encountered by wells drilled into the forma- tion between this point and the coast. The chemical composition of many of these salty waters shows them to be normal ground waters to which more or less sea water has been added. Formations con- taining fresh water may be found below those containing salt water. As arule, however, the probability of finding fresh water below salty water is slight. The problem of finding sufficient fresh water for a municipal supply is a serious one for-many cities on the coast. The deep formations may all yield salty water, and the superficial deposits, while yielding fresh water, may not yield a sufficient supply for the use of a city. Away from the coast salt water from deep wells may represent an admixture of meteoric water with sea water entrapped in the formation at the time of its deposition. Waters of high chloride content are also obtained from many shallow wells throughout the area. In many of these waters the high chloride is accompanied by high nitrate, which is usually derived from the oxidation of nitrog- enous organic matter. Waters in which sulfate is the predominant acidic constituent are comparatively rare in this area. They are usually of only local occur- rence and the result of strictly local conditions. As a rule sulfate is a subordinate constituent in the ground waters of the South Atlantic Coastal Plain. In general, then, the wells of shallow or moderate depths in Vir- ginia and North and South Carolina yield calcium bicarbonate waters, the deep wells yield sodium bicarbonate waters; both shallow and deep wells in Georgia and Florida yield calcium bicarbonate waters; 412 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 but along the whole coast these normal ground-water relationships may be disturbed by the admixture of more or less sea water with the normal ground waters. LITERATURE CITED . SANFORD, 8S. The underground water resources of the Coastal Plain Province of Virginia. Virginia Geol. Survey Bull. V. 1913. . Cooks, C. W. ‘Geology of the Coastal Plain of South Carolina. U. 8S. Geol. Survey Bull. 867. 1936. . STEPHENSON, L. W., and Veatcu, J.O. Underground waters of the Coastal Plain of Georgia. U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 341. 1915. . Matson, G. C., and Sanrorp, S., Geology and ground waters of Florida. U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 319. 1913. . Cottins, W. D., and Howarp, C. S., Chemical character of waters of Florida. U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 596-G. 1928. Cr oP OF NWN = BOTANY.—WNew species of Sphaceloma on Aralia and Mentha.! AnNA E. JENKINS, Bureau of Plant Industry. (Communicated by Joun A. STEVENSON.) Four new American species of Sphaceloma were listed in a synoptic table (table 1) included in a paper presented at Rio de Janeiro, in January, 1936, giving the known species of Elsinoe and Sphaceloma.? Names and brief descriptions of the two North American species are here supplied. The two from South America will be named and de- scribed elsewhere. | Sphaceloma araliae sp. nov. Produces conspicuous spots or galls on stems and leaves, including mid- rib and veins; spots solitary or closely grouped, linear to elliptical or elon- gate, or, particularly on leaves, circular to irregular, up to 12 mm long by 5 mm wide, ocher red,*? becoming pale ochraceous buff in central region; acervuli erumpent superficial, 20-50u in diam., often continuous over large areas; hyphae or stromata hyaline; stromata reaching 80y in thick- ness; palisade of conidiophores compact, light fulvous, often 8-20 thick; conidia oblong-elliptical, 1-celled, hyaline, 5-10ux*2.5-4u (measurements include conidia in culture); on potato-dextrose-agar medium, thallus ochra- ceous tawny. Macules vel gallas insignes, 5 mm latas, 12 mm longas, ochraceorubras, in centro ad ochraceo-alutaceas pallescentes, in caulibus et foliis producens; acervulis erumpente superficialibus, 20—50u in diam., saepe per superfici- entem latam continuis; stromatibus saepe bene evolutis, usque 80u ecrassis, hyalinis; palis conidiophorum compactis, crassis, pallide fulvis; conidiis uni- cellularibus, oblongo-ellipticis, hyalinis, 5-10uX2.5—5y. On living stems and leaves of Aralia spinosa L., causing a scab disease, Edgewater, Md., July 2, 1934, Peter Bisset. In the Mycological Collections of the Bureau of Plant Industry (No. 69462, type), and in Phytopathologi- cal Herbarium, Instituto Biologico, Sao Paulo, Brazil. 1 Received September 14, 1937. 2 Jenkins, A. E. and A. A. Brrancourt, Doencas das plantas causados por fungos dos generos Elsinoe e Sphaceloma. Rodriguésia 2: (Numero especial. Annaes da Pri- meira Reunido de Phytopathologistas do Brasil) 305-3138. 2 tables. 1936. 3 Ripaway, R. Color standards and color nomenclature, 43 pp. 1912. Oct. 15, 1937 JENKINS: SPHACELOMA 413 Fig. 1, A-G.—Sphaceloma araliae on Aralia spinosa. A—D, on leaf parts, E and F, on stem; G, acervulus, a, palisade of conidiophores, 6, underlying stems. A-F, X1; G, X400. H, 25-day-old culture of the fungus on potato-dextrose agar. X1. I-O.—S. menthae on Mentha piperata. I, on leaves, J-N, on stems, M, on rootstock; N, conidia, and C, acervulus on upper surface of leaf; I-M, X1; N and O, 400. P, old culture on oatmeal agar. X1. 414 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 10 Sphaceloma menthae sp. nov. Produces spots on leaves, stems and rootstocks; spots often numerous, raisin black, central part becoming pallid to pale vinaceous drab, circular to elliptical or irregular, up to 3-5 mm in diam.; stem lesions at first sunken, sometimes elevated, often becoming crateriform with concavity light- colored; acervuli erumpent superficial, more or less hemispherical or flat- tened, 15-80 or more in diam.; palisade of conidiophores compact, very light yellow, 10—-25yu thick; conidia spherical to elliptical, hyaline, 3-8y 2.5-4u. Characters of thallus in culture resembling those of Myriangium. Color of young thalli on potato dextrose agar medium Varley’s brown sur- rounded by Hay’s maroon, older pubescent thalli pallid to light brownish drab, medium becoming light yellowish olive (Fig. 1, I-P). Maculis numerosis, in foliis, caulibus et radicibus, purpureo-nigris, in centro pallidis ad pallide vinaceo-griseis, ellipticis vel rotundis vel irregulari- bus, 3-5 mm in diam., vel in caulibus interdum extensis et saepe crateri- formibus; acervulis erumpente superficialibus, 15—80u in diam. vel ampli- oribus; palis conidiophorum compactis, 10—25y crassis; conidiis sphaericis ellipticisve, hyalinis, 3-8 X 2.5—4y. On leaves, stems, and rootstocks of cultivated Mentha piperata L., causing the disease known as leopard spot, Lafayette, Ind., Aug. 21, 1934, R.C. Baines; Breeman, Ind., Sept. 1, 1937, H. A. Edson; Mentha, Mich., Aug. 3, 1937, Ray Nelson and Anna E. Jenkins; and July31,1935,and Aug. 20 and 29 (type), 1937, Ray Nelson. Type in the Mycological Collections of the Bureau of Plant Industry (No. 72538). Portions of the type collection also deposited in the following herbaria: Farlow Cryptogamic Herbarium of Harvard University, New York Botanical Garden, Herbarium of the University of Michigan, and the Phytopathological Herbarium, Instituto Biologico de Sao Paulo, Brazil. PALEOBOTAN Y.—Fossil legumes from Bridge Creek, Oregon.! Ro- LAND W. Brown, U. 8. Geological Survey. The reddish shales occurring along Bridge Creek, 9 miles north- west of Mitchell, Ore., and recognized as equivalent to the upper part of the Clarno formation (Oligocene, according to the usage of the U. 8. Geological Survey), have long-been noted for the abundant and well-preserved fossil plants they carry. This flora, together with that from similar rocks of the same or approximately the same age and horizon in the Crooked River basin, 35 miles southward, includes ferns, pines, firs, sequoias, cattails, willows, sweet-ferns, hazelnuts, hornbeams, ironwoods, alders, beeches, chestnuts, oaks, hickories, elms, hackberries, barberries, umbellularias, sycamores, mock-oranges, service-berries, hawthorns, lindens, black-gums, sweet-gums, dog- woods, and madrones. Although this flora is, relatively speaking, fairly large and well known, it is nevertheless possible to find new species, even among the old collections, as was my good fortune recently when, for other reasons than looking for a new species, I had 1 Received July 29, 1937. Oct. 15, 1937 BROWN: FOSSIL LEGUMES 415 occasion to split a piece of the shale from Bridge Creek. To my sur- prise the unusually fine legume pod illustrated in Fig. 1 was un- covered. This pod belongs to a species of Cladrastis, a genus hitherto unreported from Bridge Creek, and may be described as Cladrastis oregonensis Brown, n. sp. Fig. 1 Description.—A linear-compressed pod, 6.5 em long and 1.2 ecm wide, with acute apex and base, the latter surrounded by the remains of the cam- panulate calyx. The placental suture line is marked by a wide keel or wing, but the other margin does not appear to be appreciably winged. One large Fig. 1.—Cladrastis oregonensis Brown, n. sp. Fig. 2.—Micropodium ovatum (Les- quereux) Brown, n. comb. Both specimens are from the reddish shales along Bridge Creek, 9 miles northwest of Mitchell, Ore. Natural size. oblong seed, 1 cm long and 5 mm wide, has a position near the center of the pod. It is attached at the upcurved end to the placenta, the free rounded end pointing backward to the base of the pod so that the long axis of the seed is parallel to the placental line. Five minute aborted seeds of the same shape as the large seed are also present. Only a faint suggestion of reticulate veining is preserved on the pod in the region near the large seed. Occurrence.—In reddish shales along Bridge Creek, 9 miles northwest of Mitchell, Ore. Type—Deposited in the U. S. National Museum. - Remarks.—The characters displayed by this fossil pod are distinctive and indicate the genus Cladrastzis. Confusion might be made with the pods of Robinia, which resemble those of Cladrastis closely, but the pods of Robinia are in general blunter at both ends, and its seeds are about two- thirds the size of those of Cladrastzs, with their long axes somewhat oblique to the placental line. I have, however, been unsuccessful in matching the fossil exactly with typical pods from any of the 4 or 5 living species of Cladrastis. Most of the pods of C. lutea, the yellow-wood of a restricted area in the southeastern United States, have a comparatively narrow wing along the placental suture. The other species are natives of eastern Asia, and among these the best matches for the fossil are the pods of C. amurensvs, which compare well in wing characters but are somewhat more rounded at the apex. The leaves of Cladrastis are odd-pinnate, with leaflets that vary from broadly oval in C. lutea to oblong and lanceolate in some of the Asiatic species. It would seem that a scrutiny of the more or less doubtfully assigned 416 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 fossil leaves from Bridge Creek might give a clue to the probable affinity of the fossil pod with living species of Cladrastis. At least two kinds of such leaves, present in the collections, may be leguminous. They are the leaves identified as Fraxinus denticulata Heer?? and some of those originally called Fraxinus integrifolia Newberry’ but now Umbellularia oregonensis (Knowl- ton and Cockerell) Chaney.* The enlarged petioles and the secondary vena- tion of Fraxinus denticulata can be matched fairly closely in some of the leaflets of Cladrastis lutea and some Asiatic species of Cladrastis. As for Umbellularia oregonensis, there seems to be little question that most of the leaves assigned to that species are Umbellularza. However, among these leaves in the collection at the U. 8. National Museum are some that in shape, venation, and enlarged petioles resemble the lanceolate leaflets of Cladrastis amurensis. Thus, with two sets of leaves or leaflets as possible candidates for sharing specific relationship with the fossil pod, apparently no satisfactory conclusion can be drawn, and the question as to what leaflets go with the pod must wait for solution upon the finding of further evidence. Among fossil species the pod called Leguminosites sp. by Dorf,’ may be compared with Cladrastis oregonensis, but it has wide wings on both margins and thus resembles the living C. platycarpa of Japan. This pod also belongs to a later geologic horizon than C. oregonensis. The pod described as C. eocenica Berry® from the Eocene of Tennessee may belong to Cladrastis, but as figured it does not show the shape and posture of the seeds and thus fails to be entirely convincing. Two other kinds of leguminous pods have been described from the shales of Bridge Creek and Crooked River, Ore. One of these is Cercis sp. from Crooked River.’ This is the distal half of a pod showing a thick suture line and three elliptic to circular seeds. The shape of these seeds clearly distinguishes this pod from Cladrastis oregonensis. LaMotte® has synonymized Cercis sp. with Cercis spokanensis Knowl- ton® from the Latah formation. It seems to me, however, that La- 2 NEWBERRY, J.S. The later extinct floras of North America. U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 35: 128, pl. 49, fig. 6, 1896 —CuaNnry, R. W. Geology and paleontology of the Crooked River Basin, with special reference to the Bridge Creek flora. Carnegie Inst. Wash. Pub. 346 (pt. 4): 132, pl. 19, figs. 5-7, 1927. 3 NEWBERRY, J.S. Opcit., p. 128, pl. 49, figs. 1-3. 4 CHaney, R. W. A record of the presence of Umbellularia in the Tertiary of the Cee United States. Carnegie Inst. Wash. Pub. 349 (pt. 4): 60, pl. 1, figs, 1, 3, 5, , 1925: 5 Dorr, Eruine. A late Tertiary flora from southwestern Idaho. Carnegie Inst. Wash. Pub. 476 (pt. 2): 119, pl. 3, fig. 1, 1936. 6 Berry, E. W. Revision of the lower Eocene Wilcox flora of the southeastern States. U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 156: 84, pl. 41, fig. 12, 1930. 7 CHangEy, R. W. Opcit., Pub. 346 (pt. 4): 125, pl. 15, fig. 5, 1927. 8 LaMorrs, R. 8S. The upper Cedarville flora of northwestern Nevada and adjacent California. Carnegie Inst. Wash. Pub. 455 (pt. 5): 182, pl. 10, fig. 4, 1936. ® KNow.ton, F. H. Flora of the Latah formation of Spokane, Washington, and Coeur d’ Alene, Idaho. U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 140: 43, pl. 29, fig. 9, 1926.— Brown, R. W. Additions to some fossil floras of the western United States. U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186: 177, pl. 54, figs. 10-12, 1937. Ocrs15; 1937 BROWN: FOSSIL LEGUMES 417 Motte’s figured specimen from 49 Camp, Washoe County, Nev. is not C. spokanensis, nor is it the same species as the Crooked River specimen, for the latter appears to be more membranous and lacks the wide wings on the margins. The other species of pod is that originally called Ailanthus ovata Lesquereux but now Micropodium ovatum (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Fig. 2 Ailanthus ovata Lesquereux, U. S. Geol. Survey Terr. Rept. 8:254, pl. 51, figs. 7, 8. 1883. [Fig. 8 is a branch, probably unidentifiable, and there- fore not further considered here.] Knowlton, U. 8. Geol. Survey Bull. 204: 69. 1902. Description.—Small oblong-ovate pods, rounded at the apex, acute at the base, 1.5 em long and 8 mm wide, with a broad wing on the placental suture line. In Fig. 2 the apex is broken and the base is slightly eroded. Seeds apparently one to several, elliptic, 2 mm long, with the long axis per- pendicular to the placental line. No venation appears to be present on the specimens. Such markings or striations as have been reported seem to have been caused by the processes of fossilization. Occurrence.—In reddish shales along Bridge Creek, 9 miles northwest of Mitchell, Ore. Type.—The original figured specimens are at the University of California. Fig. 2 is in the U. 8S. National Museum. Remarks.—These small pods are obviously those of a species of legume and not of Azlanthus, for they show neither the longitudinal veins and reticulations, nor the small notch or emargination that is usually present on the wing beneath the seed of Azlanthus. Characteristic samaras of Azlanthus americana Cockerell are present in the flora from the Green River formation and in that from the Florissant lake beds but they can be distinguished readily from these pods. Because of their nearly uniform small size these pods seem to represent a single species distinct from that called Cercis sp. by Chaney, referred to above. Although Cerczs leaves are known from the Florissant lake beds, the Latah formation, and other strata in the regions adjacent to the John Day Basin of Oregon, none have yet been identified as such from the shales of Bridge Creek and Crooked River in the latter area. Nevertheless Cercis sp. appears to be a true Cercis. It is possible that the small pods under discussion here may be the dwarf pods of that species, but until more conclusive evi- dence appears it seems desirable to regard them as distinct and to adopt Saporta’s generic name for similar pods from the Tertiary of southeastern France, his type being Micropodium oligospermum.' Saporta himself found it difficult to distinguish his specimens from Cercis but concluded that be- cause they were apparently produced in a raceme they should be considered as belonging to a different genus. If these fruits were produced in a raceme it is possible that they too may represent Cladrastis, resembling the smaller 10 Saporta, G. pE. Etudes sur les végétation du sud-est de la France a l’époque tertiare. 1: 137, pl. 14, figs. 8A, 8B, 1863.—Suppl. 1. Révision de la flore des gypses d’ Aix. 3: 221, pl. 18, fig. 1, 1873. 418 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 pods of C. platycarpa of Japan. What appear to be 2 or 3 closely spaced seeds may in reality be folds in the pod overlying a single large seed. If this inter- pretation be the correct one, then it is possible that the aforementioned specimen referred by LaMotte to Cercis spokanensis and the strikingly similar specimen called Dalbergia? coloradensis Knowlton" from the Floris- sant lake beds, may also be large specimens of this or a closely related species of Cladrastis. Obviously, not having Saporta’s specimens at hand, it is impossible to make detailed comparisons between them and Micropodium ovatum. Super- ficially they seem to be identical species, but only a comparison of the specimens can establish the fact. The known fossil legumes from the shales on Bridge Creek and Crooked River, Ore., now appear to be: Cercis sp., Cladrastis oregonensis, and Micropodium ovatum—all represented by pods. No leaves have yet been identified as definitely leguminous, although suspicion rests upon several species now assigned to other genera. ZOOLOGY .—WNew rodents from Middle America. E. A. GOLDMAN, Bureau of Biological Survey. Studies of the genera Heteromys and Nyctomys have resulted in the detection of the new subspecies here described. Two of these were obtained by the veteran collector, C. F. Underwood, who has been making notable contributions to knowledge of the fauna of Costa Rica for many years. Specimens of a new subspecies of Nyctomys, from Salvador, have been made available through the courtesy of Mrs. Florence V. V. Dickey. For the loan of other specimens required for comparison in this connection my thanks are due to Dr. Roy Chapman Andrews, Dr. H. E. Anthony, George G. Goodwin, and John Eric Hill, American Museum of Natural History, New York, and to Dr. Glover M. Allen, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Heteromys desmarestianus planifrons, subsp. nov. Pirris Spiny Pocket Mouse Type.—From San Geronimo, Pirris, western Costa Rica. No. 250348, Q adult, skin and skull, U. 8S. National Museum (Biological Survey col- lection), collected by C. F. Underwood, April 12, 1931. X-Catalog number 26914. Distribution —Western Costa Rica; limits of range undetermined. General characters ——Closely resembling Heteromys desmarestianus des- marestianus of Guatemala; color, general size and proportions very similar, but dusky of forearms tending to extend farther down on wrists; pelage 1 Know.uton, F. H. Fossil plants from Florissant. U. S. Nat. Mus. Proc. 51 (2151): 278, pl. 19, fig. 4, 1916. 1 Received May 24, 1937. Oct. 15, 1937 GOLDMAN: NEW RODENTS 419 sparser; light tawny lateral line usually present as in desmarestianus; skull usually broader and differing in other details. Similar to Heteromys des- marestianus fuscatus of central Nicaragua, but larger; light tawny lateral line usually present (usually absent or indistinct in fuscatus) ; cranial features distinctive. Not very unlike Heteromys desmarestianus repens of the moun- tains of western Panama, but larger with relatively larger ears; pelage coarser and sparser; differing otherwise in about the same characters as from fuscatus. Smaller than Heteromys oresterus of the Cordillera de Tala- manca; pelage more bristly; slender hairs among bristles deeper ochraceous buff; ears without white edging usually in oresterus. Color.—Type: Upper parts blackish, becoming very dark brown or ‘mouse gray” (Ridgway, 1912) along flanks and outer sides of limbs, the slender light tawny hairs present but inconspicuous among the bristles; en- tire under parts, feet, and a line down inner side of hind leg to metatarsus white; a narrow but distinct light tawny line of demarcation along flanks; ears blackish; tail brownish above, whitish below, becoming dusky all around at tip. Skull—Large, with broad braincase and broad frontal and _ parietal regions. Closely resembling those of desmarestianus but usually broader, the lateral margins of frontals somewhat more prominent and projecting as supraorbital shelves; interparietal broader, more extended transversely, more evenly oval in outline, the anterior angle less developed; supraoc- cipital more produced on the median line, tending to bulge farther posteri- orly over foramen magnum; dentition about the same. Similar to those of fuscatus and repens, but larger; interparietal relatively broader, with less evident anterior angle; supraorbital ridges more projecting and shelf-like. Compared with that of oresterus the skull is relatively shorter and broader; nasals about conterminous with premaxillae posteriorly (premaxillae ex- tending well beyond nasals in oresterus); supraorbital ridges more project- ing; angle of mandible more everted; tubercle over root of lower incisor more prominent; molariform toothrows narrowed posteriorly (sides of toothrows nearly parallel in oresterus); posterior upper molar smaller, the closure of the reéntrant angles through wear leaving smaller enamel islands. Measurements.—Type: Total length, 303 mm; tail vertebrae, 169; hind foot, 35. An adult female topotype: 302; 174; 35. Skull (type): Greatest length, 37.7; zygomatic breadth, 18.1; interorbital breadth, 9.9; length of nasals, 16.3; width across squamosals in front of auditory meatus, 16.3; interparietal, 9.84.9; maxillary toothrow (alveoli), 5.5. Remarks.— Heteromys d. planizfrons is a rather slightly differentiated form bearing a closer resemblance to typical desmarestianus than to some of its nearer geographic neighbors. Comparison of 13 topotypes of Heteromys desmarestianus psakastus of Salvador with series of desmarestianus assumed to be typical from Chipoe and other localities in the Coban region of Guate- mala, indicates that the two are identical and that, therefore, psakastus does not have to be considered in this connection. The new form requires no close comparison with Heteromys oresterus, which is a very distinct species assign- able to the subgenus Xylomys. Specimens examined.—Total number, 14, all from western Costa Rica as follows: San Geronimo, Pirris (type locality), 8; Jabillo, 1; Sabanilla, 1; San Ramon, Tres Rios, 4. 420 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Heteromys desmarestianus subaffinis, subsp. nov. Reventazon Valley Spiny Pocket Mouse Type.—From Angostura, southern side of Rio Reventazon, opposite Tur- rialba, Costa Rica (altitude about 1,980 feet). No. 12904/38591, o@ adult, skin and skull, U. 8. National Museum, collected by José C. Zeledon, May 1876. Original number 98. Distribution.—Rio Reventazon and Pacuare River valleys, eastern Costa Rica; limits of range unknown. General characters.—Similar in size and color to Heteromys desmarestianus planifrons of western Costa Rica, but tawny lateral line apparently ab- sent; cranial details, including the broader rostrum, distinctive. Resem- bling H.d. fuscatus of central Nicaragua, but larger, with broader, more mas- sive skull. Somewhat similar to H. d. repens of the mountains of western Panama, but larger; ears relatively larger; skull heavier. Contrasted with H. d. zonalis of the Canal Zone, the slender hairs among the bristles are more tawny, and cranial features are quite different. Color.—Type: Upper parts blackish or very dark brownish, finely mixed with light tawny due to the tone of the slender hairs among the dark bristles; outer sides of forearms, thighs, lower part of rump and scrotum mouse gray; under parts in general, inner sides of forearms, and feet white; light tawny lateral line usually present in some forms of the group absent; ears brownish; tail light brownish above, white below. Skull.—Very similar in size and general form to that of planzfrons, but rostrum broader; interparietal narrower, less extended transversely, with more prominent anterior angle; dentition about the same. Differing from those of fuscatus and repens mainly in decidedly larger size, the supraorbital ridges more strongly developed as projecting shelves. Compared with that of zonalis the skull is larger, with much broader braincase and more widely separated supraorbital and temporal ridges, but the rostrum is relatively narrower, the nasals less expanded anteriorly, and the maxillary root of the zygoma much less strongly developed; molariform teeth similar, but in- cisors relatively narrow. Measurements.—Type (no body measurements available): Hind foot (dried skin), 34.5 Skull (type): Greatest length, 36.9; zygomatic breadth, 17.3; interorbital breadth, 10; length of nasals, 15.9; width across squa- mosals in front of auditory meatus, 15.8; interparietal, 8.95.3; maxillary toothrow (alveoli), 5.5. Remarks.—Specimens on which this form is based were referred by me (North Amer. Fauna, No. 34, p. 28, 1911) to Heteromys repens with the statement that they seemed larger and somewhat different in cranial details. More extended knowledge of the group now seems to warrant their segrega- tion as representatives of a lowland form inhabiting eastern Costa Rica. Specimens examined.—Four, all from Costa Rica, as follows: Angostura (type locality), 3; Pacuare, 1. Nyctomys sumichrasti pallidulus, subsp. nov. Oaxaca Vesper Rat Type.—From Santo Domingo, 8 miles west of Lagunas, on the Mexican National Railroad, Isthmus of Tehuantepec, Oaxaca, Mexico (altitude 900 feet). No. 73302; @ adult, skin and skull, U. 8S. National Museum (Bio- logical Survey collection), collected by Nelson and Goldman, June 13, 1895. Original number 8079. Oct. 15, 1937 GOLDMAN: NEW RODENTS 421 Distributton.—Known only from the type locality in the Arid Tropical belt on the southern side of the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, Oaxaca; probably has an extensive range in the arid Pacific coast region of southwestern Mexico. General characters —Color palest of the known forms of the genus; size medium. Similar to Nyctomys sumichrasti sumichrasti, of the eastern slope of the mountains in Vera Cruz and to Nyctomys sumichrasti salvini of Duenas, Guatemala, but upper parts decidedly paler than either—near cinnamon buff instead of tawny; pelage much shorter than in salvinz. Color.—Type: Upper parts near ‘‘cinnamon-buff” (Ridgway, 1912), purest on head and along sides, including outer surfaces of forearms and thighs, the back inclining toward very light tawny slightly darkened by a thin admixture of dusky hairs; entire under parts white, the line of demarca- tion along lower part of sides sharp as usual in the genus; ears brownish; fore feet white; hind feet with only a trace of the dusky metatarsal areas so conspicuous in the other subspecies, the toes white; tail unicolor, dark brown. Skull——Closely resembling that of typical suwmichrastz, but broader, with more widely spreading zygomata. Similar to that of salvinz, but smaller, with relatively smaller molars. Measurements.—Type: Hind foot measured in flesh, 25 (no other external measurements available). Skull (type): Greatest length, 31.3; zygomatic breadth, 17.9; interorbital breadth, 6; greatest width between temporal ridges, 13.4; length of nasals, 11.2; length of anterior palatine foramina, 4.5; length of palatal bridge, 4.8; maxillary toothrow, 4.8. Remarks.—The geographic races of Nyctomys sumichrasti are all very closely allied. N. s. pallidulus approaches typical swmichrastz which inhabits the humid mountain slopes of eastern Mexico, but the coloration is quite distinctive. As in other species the pale coloration of N. s. pallzdulus is probably associated with its more arid environment. Specimens examined.—Five, all from the type locality. Nyctomys sumichrasti florencei, subsp. nov. Salvador Vesper Rat Type.—From Barra de Santiago, Department of Ahuachapan, Salvador (sea level). No. 12765, Q adult, skin and skull, collection of Donald R. Dickey, collected by R. A. Stirton, April 6, 1927. Distribution.—Pacific coastal region of Salvador: altitudinal range from sea level to at least 2,600 feet. General characters.—Size smallest of the known forms of the genus; color light tawny. Closely resembling Nyctomys sumichrastz decolorus of northern Honduras, but very much smaller. Similar to Nyctomys sumichrasti palli- dulus of Oaxaca, Mexico, but much smaller and color brighter, differing from Nyctomys sumichrasti salvini of the high mountains of Guatemala in much smaller size and more vivid coloration. Color—Type: Upper parts, including outer surfaces of forearms and thighs, nearly uniform light, but rich tawny, the back faintly lined with black, the dark hairs scarcely numerous enough to alter the general tone; under parts, including inner surfaces of limbs, pure white; ears brownish; fore feet white; hind feet dusky over metatarsus, the toes white; tail uni- color, dark brown. Color varying to light brownish, less vivid tawny in some specimens. 422 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Skull—vVery similar to those of decolorus, pallidulus and salvini, but much smaller than any of these; dentition very light. Measurements.—Type: Total length, 238 mm; tail vertebrae, 127; hind foot, 21. Average of eight typical adults from Hacienda Chilata, Depart- ment of Sonsonate, Salvador (altitude 2,000 feet) : 230 (208-255); 117 (107— 1380); 22.5 (22-23). Skull (type): Greatest length, 29; zygomatic breadth, 16.4; interorbital breadth, 5.5; greatest width between temporal ridges, 12.8; length of nasals, 9.2; length of anterior palatine foramina, 4.5; length of palatal bridge, 4.2; maxillary toothrow, 4.1. Remarks.—The diminutive size and light, but vivid tawny coloration distinguish Nyctomys s. florencet from its allies. The type was taken by the collector on a leaning tree in a swamp forest at sea level. This handsome subspecies is named for Mrs. Florence V. V. Dickey, in recognition of her interest in furthering contributions to general knowledge of natural history initiated by her husband, the late Donald R. Dickey, in a wide field. Specimens examined.—Total number, 14, all from Salvador, as follows: Barra de Santiago (type locality), Department of Ahuachapan, 1; Hacienda Chilata, Department of Sonsonate (altitude 2,000 feet), 10; Lake Olomega, Department of San Miguel (altitude 300 feet), 1; Puerto del Triunfo, De- partment of Usulatan (sea level), 1; Volean de San Miguel, Department of San Miguel (altitude 2,600 feet), 1. Nyctomys sumichrasti costaricensis, subsp. nov. Costa Rican Vesper Rat Type.—From San Geronimo de Pirris, hamlet on the main road to Pir- ris before reaching Jabillo, near the west coast of Costa Rica, about two miles before the abrupt descent to the lowlands of Pozo Azul and about 12 miles inland from Pirris (altitude about 100 feet). No. 250331, @ adult, skin and skull, U. 8. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), col- lected by C. F. Underwood, April 12, 1931. X-catalog number 26896. Distribution —Valley of the Rio Grande de Pirris, western Costa Rica; limits of range undetermined. General characters —A large dark tawny subspecies; anterior palatine foramina about equal in length to palatal bridge (shorter than palatal bridge in neighboring subspecies of the genus). Closely allied to Nyctomys sumichrasti nitellinus of the lower slopes of the Volean de Chiriqui, Panama, but somewhat larger; upper parts brighter, the general tone near tawny in- stead of cinnamon; incisive foramina distinctly longer. Similar to Nyctomys sumichrasti venustulus of the Caribbean coast region of Nicaragua, but some- what paler, the back less obscured by dusky hairs and differing otherwise in about the same characters as from nztellinus. Color—Type: Upper parts near “tawny” (Ridgway, 1912), slightly darkened on top of head and over back by a fine admixture of black-tipped hairs; cheeks, flanks, outer sides of forearms and thighs, purer, paler tawny; entire under parts, including lips, inner sides of forearms and thighs white; ears blackish; fore feet white; hind feet dusky over metatarsus, the toes white as in the other members of the genus; tail unicolor, brownish black. Skull.—Similar to those of nitellinus and venustulus, but larger than either; nasals more pointed and usually about conterminous with premaxil- lae posteriorly (usually exceeded by premaxillae in posterior extension in Ocr: 15; 1937 WILSON: PARASITIC COPEPODS 423 nitelinus and venustulus); anterior palatine foramina longer, about equal in length to palatal bridge (instead of shorter than palatal bridge); denti- tion similar. Measurements—Type: Total length, 270 mm; tail vertebrae, 139; hind foot, 24. An adult male topotype: 246; 126; 25. An old adult female from Jabillo, Pirris: 263; 189; 24. Skull (type and an old adult female from Ja- billo, Pirris, respectively): Greatest length, 33.3, 31.7; zygomatic breadth, 17.7, 18.4; interorbital breadth, 5.8, 6.5; greatest width between temporal ridges, 14.1, 14.3; length of nasals, 11.6, 10.5; length of anterior palatine foramina, 5.3, 5.2; length of palatal bridge, 5.2, 5.2; maxillary toothrow (alveoli), 5, 4.9. Remarks.— N. s. costaricensis is distinguished from the neighboring sub- species by rich tawny coloration, and the cranial detail of unusual length of anterior palatine foramina compared with the length of the palatal bridge. In point of size it is about equal to the geographically distant form JN. s. salvint of Guatemala, but the back less obscured by dusky hairs is brighter tawny; the anterior palatine foramina are longer, and the molars smaller. Specimens examined.—Total number, 10, all from Costa Rica, as follows: Jabillo, 5; San Geronimo (type locality), 5. ZOOLOGY .—Some parasitic copepods from Panama Bay.1_ CHARLES B. Witson, State Teachers College, Westfield, Massachusetts. (Communicated by Waupo L. ScHMITT.) A small collection of parasitic copepods taken from marine fish in Panama Bay by Dr. A. O. Foster was recently sent to the author for identification. Dr. Foster is helminthologist at the Gorgas Memorial Laboratory of Panama and the copepods were captured during various laboratory investigations. Although the collection includes but eleven species, two of them prove to be new to science, and the male of a third species is here described for the first time. In addition, the host or the locality or both are new for every one of the species. The Bay of Panama lies off the Pacific end of the Panama Canal and hence is traversed by such shipping as makes use of the canal. In recent years the Galapagos Islands have been a sort of Mecca for many scientific expeditions, the great majority of which have passed through the canal. But, as a rule, the scientists have been so intent upon reaching their ultimate goal that they have made but few in- vestigations enroute. A notable exception is the Third Hancock Expedition to the Galapagos Islands recently made by the University of Southern California. This expedition did not go through the canal, but went down the Pacific coast of Mexico, Central America, and South 1 This paper was prepared under the auspices of the Gorgas Memorial Laboratory, Panama, Dr. H. C. Clark, Director. Received August 30, 1937. 424 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 America, stopping at many places along the way and securing valu- able specimens. The parasitic copepods of that expedition have been reported elsewhere” and included some from the Panama coast. This local collection from Panama Bay admirably supplements that list and should serve as an incentive to similar collections from the Pacific coasts of Mexico, Central and South America. Caligus bonito Wilson - Taken in considerable numbers from the mouth and gill cavity of a bonito (Sarda sp.), and in a single instance from the mouth of another bonito identified as Sarda velox. The former host is probably the California bonito, Sarda chilensis, found on the Pacific coast from San Francisco to Patagonia. Caligus coryphaenae Steenstrup & Liitken Three females were taken from the mouth of a bonito (Sarda sp.) in com- pany with the preceding species. This copepod is well distributed and has been reported from both sides of the Atlantic, as well as the Pacific. Caligus diaphanus Nordmann A single female was taken from the body of the common jack, Caranz hippos. This species is even more widely distributed than either of the pre- ceding and infests a great variety of hosts, to which the present record adds one more. Caligus monacanthi Krgyer Krgyer founded his new species, monacanthi, in 1863 upon a single speci- men taken from the skin of a leather fish (Monacanthus sp.) in the West Indies. He identified the specimen as a male and gave a detailed description accompanied by 5 figures. Up to the time of the present collection, no further specimens had been obtained during the seventy odd years since the original discovery. Krgyer was in error as to the sex of his specimen, which was cer- tainly a female without egg strings, rather than a male. This mistake, coupled with the entire lack of further specimens, induced the present author, when dealing with the parasites of West Indian fish, to suggest that Krgyer’s specimen might well be the undeveloped female of another species.* But twenty specimens, including both sexes, taken from the gills of a bonito (Sarda sp.) and included in the present collection, definitely prohibit such an inference. The females agree with Krgyer’s description and figures in every detail with one exception and, in addition, carry ovisacs to show that they are fully developed. The exception lies in the fact that these Panama specimens have a two-segmented abdomen, while Krgyer’s figure represents the abdomen as one-segmented and the text states that it shows no trace of segmentation. But Krgyer does say in parentheses that the abdomen is con- tracted for a distance at its base and then widens. The jointing is at the 2 University of Southern California Publications. The Hancock Pacific Expeditions 2 (4): 23-30, pl. 3. 1937. 3 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 28: 607. 1905. Oer: 15, 1937 WILSON: PARASITIC COPEPODS 425 point where the diameter changes and might easily escape notice, and is scarcely visible in some of the present specimens. A female and male have been selected and given Cat. No. 69867 U.S.N.M. Female.—Kr¢yer’s statement that this species is marked by an elongation of the carapace, genital segment, and abdomen applies to both sexes. Cara- pace of female three-sevenths of the entire length and considerably narrowed anteriorly; lunules of medium size and not projecting. Median posterior lobe half the entire width of the carapace, its margin not evenly rounded but with the tip projecting a little. Lateral lobes curved inward and not quite reaching the tip of the median lobe. Free segment t;wo-thirds as wide as the genital segment and strongly narrowed in front of the fourth legs. Genital segment elongate elliptical, three-fourths as long as the carapace, nar- rowed anteriorly into a short neck and lobed posteriorly. Each of the lobes is as wide as the abdomen, broadly rounded, and does not quite reach the joint in the abdomen. The latter is one-third as wide and nearly as long as the genital segment, and indistinctly two-segmented, the distal segment the longer. Caudal rami nearly as wide as long and well separated. Ovisacs at- tached to the ventral surface of the genital segment just inside the base of each posterior lobe and as long as the genital segment. Second antenna large and sickle-shaped ; terminal segment of second max- illa slender, longer than the basal segment, with two terminal setae but no lateral spine. Maxilliped with a swollen basal segment and a stout terminal claw. Basipod of first leg with a minute process representing the endopod; terminal segment of the exopod with 3 end spines and a long naked seta, but with no plumose setae on its posterior margin. The armature of the second legs is very peculiar; the basal segment of the exopod carries a long filose spine at the center of the outer margin and a stout spine at the distal corner, bent down across the ventral surface, with a fringe of long hairs be- tween the two spines. The distal segment has 3 setae at its outer corner, flanged on their outer margins and plumed on their inner margins. The basal segment of the endopod has a fringe of small curved spines on the distal half of its outer margin. The second segment has a row of 6 stout spines along its outer margin; the bases of these spines are swollen, cover the whole length of the margin, and are somewhat imbricated. In the third legs the spine on the basal segment of the exopod is nearly straight and reaches the entire length of the second segment. The fourth legs are three- segmented with 5 spines, the second segment as long as the third and the two combined as long as the basal segment, which is moderately swollen. There are no rudiments of fifth legs anywhere visible. Small spherical sper- matophores are attached in pairs at the opening of the sperm receptacle. Total length 4.40 mm. Carapace 2 mm long, 1.90 mm wide. Ovisacs 2 mm long. Male.—Carapace similar in shape to that of the female, but relatively longer, being just half of the entire length; lunules larger and suborbicular, but scarcely projecting. Posterior median lobe a little more than half the entire width and evenly rounded, extending a little beyond the lateral lobes. Free segment wider than the genital segment, greatly narrowed in front of the fourth legs. Genital segment barrel-shaped, not narrowed to a neck anteriorly and without posterior lobes. Abdomen distinctly two-segmented, the distal segment nearly twice the length of the basal, both segments of the same width throughout with straight sides. Caudal rami nearly twice as long as wide and curved inward. Appendages like those of the female with the following differences. 426 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 10 Maxillary hooks considerably enlarged and strongly curved; maxillipeds with a row of 3 short triangular spines on the inner margin of the basal segment, the terminal claw shutting down against the two distal spines. The claw itself has a slender spine at the center of its concave margin, which is close to the distal spine of the basal segment when the claw is closed. The terminal segment of the first legs carries the usual 3 plumose setae on its posterior margin. In the second legs the fringe of spines on the outer margin of the second segment of the endopod is here replaced by a row of 8 to 10 chitin scales closely imbricated. Total length 4.50 mm. Carapace 2.25 mm long, 1.90 mm wide. Remarks.—The armature of the second endopod segment of the second legs in both sexes is not known in any other species of the genus and evi- dently escaped Krgyer’s notice. It lends a distinctive character to the species and with the other details fully establishes its validity after 75 years of waiting. Caligus patulus, n. sp. Twelve females were obtained from the outer skin of a milkfish (Chanos sp.) captured in the Bay. One of them bearing ovisacs has been chosen as the type of the species with Cat. No. 69869 U.S.N.M. Female.—Carapace five-eighths of the entire length, almost as wide as long; frontal plates wide and separated by a deep median incision; lunules of moderate size and not projecting. Posterior median lobe half the entire width, with prominent posterior corners; lateral lobes broadly rounded and the same length as the median lobe. Free segment two-fifths as wide as the carapace and thickened through the bases of the fourth legs. Genital seg- ment two-thirds as wide as the carapace and almost twice as wide as long, contracted to the width of the free segment where it joins the latter, Its posterior lobes are broadly rounded and carry rudiments of the fifth and sixth pairs of legs and wide processes at their inner corners, giving them a sinuous outline. The abdomen is quadrangular and one-segmented, as wide as long; the caudal rami are also as wide as long and well separated at the posterior corners of the abdomen. The ovisacs are a little narrower than the abdomen and two-thirds as long as the entire body. The antennae and maxillae are of the usual pattern; the claw of the maxilliped is as long as the basal segment and abruptly bent near the tip. The basal segment of the first leg has at its posterior distal corner a finger process tipped with a short spine representing the endopod. The proximal segment of the exopod has a fringe of hairs on its posterior margin, and a spiny process at its anterior distal corner; the end segment has two ter- minal claws and three stout plumose setae. In the third legs the spine on the basal segment of the exopod is short and blunt, and the two rami are close together. The fourth legs are three-segmented with four spines; the second segment is longer than the third and the two combined are the same length as the basal segment. The fifth and sixth legs are represented by small processes tipped with minute setae. The base of the furca is longer than wide, the arms are shorter than the base, nearly parallel and flattened. Total length 6 mm. Carapace 3.60 mm long, 3.59 mm wide. Remarks.—The distinguishing characters of this species are the large and roomy genital segment (whence the specific name) with its sinuous posterior Oere 15.1937 WILSON: PARASITIC COPEPODS 427 Fig. 1.—Dorsal view of female Caligus constrictus. Fig. 2.—Second antenna. Fig. 3—Maxilliped. Fig. 4.—Thirdleg. Fig. 5—Fourth leg. Fig. 6—Dorsal view of female Caligus monacanthi. Fig. 7.—Dorsal view of male. Fig. 8.—Second an- tenna of female. Fig. 9—Second maxilla. Fig. 10.—Furea. Fig. 11.—First leg. Fig. 12.—Second leg. Fig. 13.—Third leg. Fig. 14.—Fourth leg. Fig. 15.—Maxil- lary hook of male. Fig. 16.—Second antenna. Fig. 17.—Mazxilliped. Fig. 18.— Second leg. Fig. 19.—Fourth leg. lobes, and the long fourth legs, which reach beyond the posterior margin of the genital segment. The relative lengths of the second and third segments in these fourth legs are also useful for identification since it is usual for the third segment to be the longer. 428 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Caligus constrictus Heller Nine females were obtained from the gills of the crevalle, Caranz hippos, and three females from the gills of the dolphin, Coryphaena hippurus. This species, established by Heller 72 years ago upon a single male and not reported since then, was confirmed in the paper on the parasitic copepods of the Third Hancock Expedition, to which reference has already been made. It is pleasing to obtain so promptly these additional specimens from the same host and locality, and also the others from a new host. It is evident that the crevalle is to be regarded as the chief host and that the parasite is by no means as rare as the long intervals between its appearances would seem to suggest. These new specimens vary somewhat from those already described and the differences are as follows. In the carapace the eye is visible, while it could not be located in previous specimens. The posterior corners of the median lobe project laterally and overlap the tips of the incurved lateral lobes. The genital segment has no attached spermatophores, the abdomen is as wide as long and the caudal rami are relatively larger. The base of the terminal claw of the second antenna is armed with two minute spines on its inner margin. The basal segment of the maxilliped has a small seta on its posterior margin near the proximal end. The basal segment of the fourth leg has a spine at its distal end similar to those on the other three segments. These slight differences simply emphasize the validity of the species and show that it does exhibit certain variations. Caligus tenuifurcatus, n. sp. Nine specimens, including both sexes, were obtained from the gill cavity of the papagallo, Nematisteus pectoralis Gill. A male and female have been selected for types with Cat. No. 69874 U.S.N.M. Female.—Carapace ovate, narrowed anteriorly, a trifle longer than wide and 40 per cent of the entire length; frontal plates wide and without a central incision; lunules large, circular and projecting considerably. Median posterior lobe more than half the entire width and evenly rounded; lateral lobes curved inward but not meeting the median lobe. Free segment short and one-fourth as wide as the carapace; genital segment a little longer than wide, subquadrangular, with rounded anterior and pointed posterior cor- ners, and slightly convex sides. There are no posterior lobes and no visible leg rudiments. Abdomen nearly as long as the genital segment, tapering a little posteriorly and two-segmented, the distal segment longer than the proximal. Caudal rami twice as long as wide, close together and curved in- ward. Ovisacs as long as the urosome and somewhat divergent. First antennae short and turned backward; second antenna stout, its terminal claw bent into a half circle. Basal segment of maxilliped also stout, the terminal claw half as long as the segment with two unequal small spines near the center of its concave margin. Rudimentary endopod of the first legs a very small triangular spine; end segment of exopod with three terminal claws and a much longer spine, and three plumose setae. Fourth leg three-segmented with six spines, including the very small one at the tip of the basal segment. Second and third segments of equal length and to- gether as long as the basal segment. Oct. 15, 1937 WILSON: PARASITIC COPEPODS 429 Total length 5 mm. Carapace 2.10 mm long, 2 mm wide. Male.—Carapace proportionally larger, a little more than half the entire length and longer than wide; frontal plates with even larger lunules than in the female. Free segment wider than the genital segment and strongly contracted anteriorly. Genital segment a parallelogram, one-half longer than wide, with straight sides. Abdomen a trifle longer than the genital segment and two-segmented, the distal segment one-third longer than the proximal. Caudal rami twice as long as wide and curved inward at their tips. The antennae, mouth parts, and legs are like those of the female with minor differences. The furea, like that of the female, is more than four times as long as wide, with slender and slightly divergent arms about as long as the base. Total length 5.40 mm. Carapace 2.81 mm long, 2.50 mm wide. Remarks.—The relative size and shape of the genital segment and abdo- men in both sexes are characteristic of this new species and will serve well for identification. Gloiopotes costatus Wilson Thirty specimens, including both sexes, were taken from the outside surface of a sailfish, Istcophorus greyz. Some of these were larger than the dimensions originally given for the species, but not otherwise different. Lernaeenicus longiventris Wilson Two mature females and a development stage were taken from the body wall of the common jack, Caranz hippos. As this is the first development stage of the female after attachment to the host to be reported for the entire genus, two figures and a brief description are here given. Young female.—Head elliptical, narrowed anteriorly, slightly projecting on either side at the center, swollen and evenly rounded posteriorly and ex- tended backward a little over the anterior thorax. The latter joins the head not at its posterior end but on the ventral surface a little in front of it, and without definite segmentation. Nearly as wide as the head where it joins the latter, and somewhat flattened dorsoventrally, it quickly tapers backward into a narrow cylinder and passes insensibly into the abdomen. This abdo- men is cylindrical and exceptionally elongated to more than forty times the length of the head. It maintains the same diameter throughout its entire length without any traces of segmentation, and the posterior end is smoothly rounded with no caudal rami. The first antennae are turned back along the surface of the head and are almost invisible. The second antennae have two short and stout basal joints and a strong terminal claw. They are situated just beneath the frontal margin of the head, and behind them on the midline of the ventral surface projects the short mouth tube, on either side of which is a maxilla with very long setae. Farther back the second maxillae project from the ventral surface of the head, each tipped with a bifid claw. The anterior thorax carries four pairs of legs which diminish in size backward; the first two pairs are bira- mose, the last two pairs uniramose, all the rami two-segmented. Total length 25 mm. Head 0.50 mm long, 0.25 mm wide. Remarks.—Evidently the first thing that happens to the young female after attachment to the host is the excessive elongation of the body behind the head. In this there is no differentiation of body regions; thorax, genital 430 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Fig. 20.—Dorsal view of female, Caligus patulus. Fig. 21.—Maxilliped. Fig. 22.—Furea. Fig. 23.—First leg. Fig. 24.—Third leg. Fig. 25—Fourth leg. Fig. 26.—Dorsal view of female Caligus tenutfurcatus. Fig. 27—Dorsal view of male. Fig. 28.—Second antenna of female. Fig. 29.—Maxilliped. Fig. 30.—Furea. Fig. 31.—First leg. Fig. 32—Fourthleg. Fig. 33.—Dorsal view of a female Lernaeenicus longiventris just after attachment to the host. Fig. 34.—Side view of same more highly magnified. segment, and abdomen are all the same diameter and just alike. Later, with the development of the ovaries, oviducts, and cement glands, the center of the long cylinder is swollen into the genital segment, while the anterior and posterior portions remain unchanged. Oct. 15, 1937 FRIEDMANN: BIRD BONES 431 - Pennella species Two adult females were taken from the body wall of the same sailfish Isttophorus grey?, that yielded the Gloiopotes specimens. These were a large species, 150 mm in length or more, but as the heads were lacking in both specimens, the species could not be determined with certainty. ORNITHOLOGY.—Bird bones from archeological sites in Alaska.! HERBERT FRIEDMANN, U. 8S. National Museum. The following collections of bird bones were gathered by Dr. A. Hrdlicka ‘during archeological excavations in the summers of 1935 and 1936. Inasmuch as Kodiak Island was the only area worked in 1935 (also worked to a lesser extent in 1936), we may dispose of it first, and then go on to the Aleutian areas explored in 1936. 1. BIRD BONES FROM KODIAK ISLAND During 1935, the whole season was spent on Kodiak Island, and a very large collection of bird bones was made. The bones were marked according to the depths from which they came, and therefore, by inference, dated chronologically. Dr. Hrdlicka tells me that the oldest may be 1,500—2,000 years old; the most recent are just pre-Russian, or about 150 years old. Previous collections of bird bones made in 1932 and 1934 have been reported on elsewhere? and a complete account of the avifauna of the island has also been published.® | The present collection adds but two new birds to the Kodiak list— the golden eagle and the red-legged kittiwake—a clear indication that the bird life of that area is now fairly well-known. The absence of bones of the white-winged scoter and the pigeon guillemot in the present collection is the chief point of contrast with the earlier series of bones collected on Kodiak. The bones that were perfect enough to be useful as specimens, or that were of particular interest as records, have been saved and in- corporated into the skeletal collections of the U.S. National Museum. Gavia immer (Brunnich). Common Loon. In the 1935 excavations, bones of this bird were unearthed at all levels (superficial, intermediate, and deep)—2 humeri, 2 tibiotarsi, 3 tarsometatarsi, and 2 metacarpals. In 1936 a tarsometatarsus and a metacarpal were collected. It is not possible to identify these bones subspecifically, but the small form elasson Bishop is the one known (from skins) to occur on Kodiak Island. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- ceived August 30, 1937. 2 This JOURNAL 25: 44-51. 1935. 3 Chicago Acad. Sci. Bull. 5: 13-54. 1935. 432 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Gavia adamsi (Gray). Yellow-billed Loon. All but the deepest layers exposed in 1935 revealed bones of this loon—1 humerus, 3 coracoids, 3 meta- carpals, 1 femur, 2 tarsometatarsi, 1 pair of mandibles, and 2 tibiotarsi. A skull was unearthed in the course of the 1936 operations. Gavia arctica pacifica (Lawrence). Pacific Loon. The presence of os- seous remains in all depths excavated indicates the regularity of occurrence of the Pacific Loon in Kodiak Island. In 1935 2 tibiotarsi, 3 tarsometatarsi, and 5 metacarpals were collected; in 1936, 1 skull, 1 femur, and 1 tarsometa- tarsus. Gavia stellata (Pontoppidan). Red-throated Loon. A single tibiotarsus was collected in 1936; no bones referable to this species were gathered in 1935. Colymbus grisegena holboelli (Reinhardt). Holboell’s Grebe. Ten hu- meri and 9 tarsometatarsi, representing all age levels, were taken in 1935; 1 humerus was found in the 1936 collections. Colymbus auritus Linnaeus. Horned Grebe. Two humeri, one from the deepest and one from the superficial layer, were unearthed in 1935. Diomedea albatrus Pallas. Short-tailed Albatross. Numerous osseous parts were found at all levels in 1935—2 tibiotarsi, 1 synsacrum, 3 skulls, 1 humerus, 1 coracoid, 3 metacarpals, 8 tarsometatarsi; in 1936—1 skull, 1 synsacrum, 3 metacarpals, 2 tarsometatarsi, 1 femur, and 1 ulna. Puffinus sp. Shearwater. The following bones, obviously those of shearwaters and probably referable to Puffinus tenwirostris, cannot be identified with certainty, due to lack of named comparative material. In 1935 all levels revealed a total of 14 humeri and 3 tarsometatarsi; in 1936, 2 skulls and 6 humeri were obtained. Fulmarus glacialis rodgersi Cassin. Pacific Fulmar. A lone skull of this bird was collected in 1936. Phalacrocorax pelagicus Pallas. Pelagic Cormorant. An abundantly represented species with all levels yielding quantities of bones. In 1935, over 200 tibiotarsi, more than 100 femurs, 66 tarsometatarsi, 165 humeri, and 28 synsacra were collected; in 1936, the material involved 1 skull, 25 humeri, 9 tibiotarsi, 2 synsacra, 1 ulna, 1 coracoid, 3 tarsometatarsi, and 5 femurs. Cygnus columbianus (Ord). Whistling Swan. The 1935 diggings un- earthed 4 fragmentary humeri and 1 synsacrum, all from the more super- ficial layers. Cygnus buccinator Richardson. Trumpeter Swan. A synsacrum and 2 tarsometatarsi were found in the superficial levels and another tarsometa- tarsus in the intermediate depths in 1935; in 1936 a metacarpal and the head of a humerus were collected. Philacte canagica (Sevastianoff). Emperor Goose. All age levels yielded a small number of bones of this goose in the 1935 diggings—1 tarsometa- tarsus, 1 femur, and 5 tibiotarsi; the 1936 operations netted 3 skulls and 3 tibiotarsi. Ocr. 15, 1937 FRIEDMANN: BIRD BONES 433 Anser albifrons (Scopoli). White-fronted Goose. Two tarsometatarsi, one superficial and one deep, were exhumed in 1935. This bird is still known from Kodiak Island solely on the basis of osseous remains. Glaucionetta clangula americana (Bonaparte). Golden-eye. During the 1936 diggings, 9 humeri referable to this duck were found. The subspecific determination is based merely on the knowledge that americana has been found to be the subspecies of golden-eye found on the island. Clangula hyemalis (Linnaeus). Old-squaw. The intermediate layers worked in 1935 yielded 9 humeri of this duck; the 1936 operations likewise turned up 9 humeri. Histrionicus histrionicus (Linnaeus). Harlequin Duck. Eleven humeri, from all but the deepest deposits, were taken in 1935. They probably belong to the subspecies paczficus Brooks. Polysticta stellert (Pallas). Steller’s Eider. In the 1935 diggings, 34 humeri, representing all age layers, were collected; 3 additional humeri were dug up in 1936. Somateria v-nigra Gray. Pacific Eider. Hrdlicka obtained 1 skull, 5 humeri, and 7 tarsometatarsi in the superficial diggings in 1935; in 1936 he collected 3 skulls. Somateria spectabilis (Linnaeus). King Eider. Large numbers of bones were found in all the layers excavated in 19835—73 coracoids, 36 tarsometa- tarsi, 122 humeri. In 1936 some 25 humeri and 3 tarsometatarsi were ob- tained. Melanitta perspicillata (Linnaeus). Surf Scoter. In 1935 Hrdlicka col- lected 12 humeri, 8 from superficial deposits, 4 from intermediate depths; in 1936 he obtained 3 humeri. : Oidemia americana Swainson. American Scoter. Eight humeri, rep- resenting all depths, were collected in 1935; in 1936, in a collection much smaller in extent, no fewer than 25 humeri and 1 skull were unearthed. Aquila chrysaetos canadensis (Linnaeus). Golden Eagle. A sternum from the superficial layers excavated in 1935 is the only record for this eagle from Kodiak Island. There is nothing surprising, however, in the occurrence of this species there, as it occurs on the neighboring mainland. Haliaeetus leucocephalus (Linnaeus). Bald Eagle. The bald eagle is very common on Kodiak Island, and its bones were found in good numbers in all diggings during both years. In all, some 5 skulls, 4 pairs of mandibles, 23 humeri, 95 metacarpals, 2 pairs of clavicles, 2 radii, 7 ulnae, 9 sterna, 1 scapula, 18 coracoids, 12 synsacra, 14 femurs, 27 tibiotarsi, and 35 tar- sometarsi were collected. Lagopus rupestris kelloggae Grinnell. Kellogg’s Ptarmigan. A single humerus and a synsacrum taken in the superficial layers in 1935 represent this bird. Haematopus bachmani Audubon. Black Oyster Catcher. In the super- ficial strata dug up in 1935, Hrdlicka found a humerus of this shore-bird. 434 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Larus hyperboreus Gunnerus. Glaucous Gull. Six tarsometatarsi were found in the upper levels in 1935. Larus glaucescens Naumann. Glaucous-winged Gull. All depths ex- cavated in 1935 revealed osseous remains of this gull—1 skull, 6 tarsometa- tarsi, 9 coracoids, and 14 humeri; in 1936 another humerus was collected. Larus argentatus smithsonianus Coues. Herring Gull. The herring gull is represented by bones from all age levels in the 1935 diggings—5 coracoids, 24 humeri, 12 tarsometatarsi; it is also represented by 3 humeri collected in 1936. The subspecific determination is a geographic inference. Rissa tridactyla pollicaris Ridgway. Pacific Kittiwake. Twelve humeri from all depths in the 1935 diggings are referable to this gull. Rissa brevirostris (Bruch). Red-legged Kittiwake. Two humeri from the superficial layers of the 1935 excavations appear to represent this spe- cies, and thereby constitute the first record for Kodiak Island and a note- worthy extension in range for the gull. Uria sp. Murre. Undoubtedly both species of murres, Uria aalge californica and Uria lomvia arra, are represented, but it is not possible to distinguish them on the basis of osseous remains. All diggings yielded large quantities of murre bones—23 skulls, 13 coracoids, 3 sterna, 3 synsacra, and about 500 humeri. Synthliiboramphus antiquus (Gmelin). Ancient Murrelet. This species is represented by 3 humeri in the 1936 collection. Cyclorrhynchus psittacula (Pallas). Paroquet Auklet. Bones of this auklet were found sparingly in all the diggings of both years—25 humeri in all. Aethia cristatella (Pallas). Crested Auklet. Seven humeri of this form were taken from the superficial and intermediate levels, both years. Fratercula corniculata (Naumann). Horned Puffin. Considering the abundance of this bird on Kodiak Island, it is surprising that so few of its bones were found—2 humeri from the superficial levels of the 1935 diggings are the only bones collected. Lunda cirrhata (Pallas). Tufted Puffin. Found in all but the deepest levels, both years. Altogether some 8 tarsometatarsi, 1 skull, and 1 humerus were unearthed. Surnia ulula caparoch (Muller). American Hawk Owl. A skull found in the upper layers in 1935 represents this bird. Pica pica hudsonia (Sabind). American Magpie. In the superficial levels excavated in 1935, Hrdlicka collected a skull, 1 humerus, and 1 tar- sometatarsus of the magpie. Corvus corax principalis Ridgway. Northern Raven. Commonly rep- resented in all diggings both years. The following bones were collected: 10 skulls, 3 synsacra, 40 metacarpals, 35 humeri, and 25 tarsometatarsi. Corvus brachyrhynchos caurinus Baird. Northwestern Crow. Found in all diggings but in much smaller quantities than the previous species—4 skulls and 7 humeri. Ocr: 15, 1937 FRIEDMANN: BIRD BONES 435 In the Aleutian Chain excavations were made in 1936 in four islands—Unalaska, Little Kiska, Atka, and Attu. 2. BIRD BONES FROM DUTCH HARBOR, UNALASKA Gavia adamsi (Gray). Yellow-billed Loon. One skull, 2 tibiotarsi, 2 metacarpals, and 1 pair of mandibles represent this species. Gavia arctica pacifica (Lawrence). Pacific Loon. A single metacarpal of this bird was collected. Diomedea albatrus Pallas. Short-tailed Albatross. This albatross is well represented by many bones—4 humeri, 3 synsacra, 1 ulna, 4 pairs of maxillae, 1 tibiotarsus, 5 metacarpals, 9 tarsometatarsi, and 7 femurs. Puffinus griseus (Gmelin). Sooty Shearwater. Some 18 humeri are ref- erable to this bird. Puffinus sp. Shearwater. The bones here included are probably to be referred to P. tenuzrostris, but in the absence of comparative, named ma- terial, I cannot be certain. Fulmarus glacialis rodgerst Cassin. Pacific Fulmar. Two skulls were collected. Phalacrocorax pelagicus Pallas. Pelagic Cormorant. Represented by 16 humeri, 3 tibiotarsi, 7 femurs, and 3 tarsometatarsi. _Philacte canagica (Sevastianoff). Emperor Goose. Three humeri of the emperor goose were collected. Nyroca valisineria (Wilson). Canvas-back. Five humeri are refer- able to this duck. Glaucionetta clangula americana (Bonaparte). American Golden-eye. The subspecific determination of the single humerus collected is based on geography alone. Clangula hyemalis (Linnaeus). Old-squaw. Of this duck 8 humeri were found. Histrionicus histrionicus (Linnaeus). Harlequin Duck. Twelve humeri. Probably of the western subspecies, paczficus. Somateria v-nigra Gray. Pacific Eider. A skull and 4 humeri repre- sent this duck. Somateria spectabilis (Linnaeus.) King Eider. More commonly repre- sented than the preceding species—24 humeri and 2 skulls were found. Melanitta deglandi (Bonaparte). White-winged Scoter. Of this species 13 humeri were collected. Melanitta perspicillata (Linnaeus). Surf Scoter. A single humerus ap- pears to be of this species. Oidemia americana Swainson. American Scoter. One humerus. Mergus merganser Linnaeus. Merganser. One humerus; probably of the American subspecies. Haliaeetus leucocephalus (Linnaeus). Bald Eagle. Represented by 3 coracoids, 2 metacarpals, and 3 tibiotarsi. Curiously enough, 2 of the tibio- tarsi had been broken and healed. 436 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Lagopus sp. Ptarmigan. Two humeri of a ptarmigan, probably L. rupestris, were found. Larus hyperboreus Gunnerus. Glaucous Gull. One femur of this gull was found. Larus glaucescens Naumann. Glaucous-winged Gull. Of this species, 1 skull and 4 humeri were unearthed. Larus argentatus smithsonianus Coues. Herring Gull. Six humeri. Rissa brevirostris (Bruch). Red-legged Kittiwake. A single humerus appears to be of this species and constitutes an interesting geographical record. Uria sp. Murres. Undoubtedly the 2 species aalge and lomvia are here mixed, but it is not possible to tell their bones apart. All in all, 148 humeri, 1 skull, and 3 tibiotarsi were found. Cepphus columba Pallas. Pigeon Guillemot. One humerus. Synthliboramphus antiquus (Gmelin). Ancient Auklet. Four skulls ap- pear to be referable to this species. Aethia cristatella (Pallas). Crested Auklet. Five humeri. Fratercula corniculata (Naumann). Horned Puffin. One humerus. Lunda cirrhata (Pallas). Tufted Puffin. Two humeri. Corvus corax principalis Ridgway. Northern Raven. Of this bird, 3 humeri and 3 metacarpals were dug up. 3. BIRD BONES FROM LITTLE KISKA Gavia immer (Brunnich). Common Loon. One humerus, 1 metacarpal, 1 tibiotarsus. Gavia adamsi (Gray). Yellow-billed Loon. One sternum, 1 humerus, 1 tibiotarsus. Diomedea albatrus Pallas. Short-tailed Albatross. Four tarsometatarsi, 3 metacarpals, 13 fragments of synsacra, 3 fragments of sterna, 7 humeri (5 fragments only), 5 skulls, 15 pair of maxillae, 1 pair of mandibles, 1 pair of clavicles, 15 femurs, 1 tibiotarsus. Puffinus griseus (Gmelin). Sooty Shearwater. Two humeri. Phalacrocorax pelagicus Pallas. Pelagic Cormorant. Three tarsometa- tarsi, 62 humeri, 26 femurs, 6 skulls, 14 sterna, 12 synsacra, 1 coracoid, 8 tibiotarsi. Cygnus columbianus (Ord). Whistling Swan. Two ulnae, 2 radii. Branta nigricans (Lawrence). Black Brant. One skull, 2 sterna. Philacte canagica (Sevastianoff). Emperor Goose. Forty-seven humeri, 1 ulna, 2 synsacra, 3 femurs, 4 metacarpals, 3 tarsometatarsi. Anser albifrons (Scopoli). White-fronted Goose. Eleven humeri, 2 femurs. Mareca americana (Gmelin). Baldpate. Three humeri. Charitonetia albeola (Linnaeus). Buffle-head. One humerus. Clangula hyemalis (Linnaeus). Old-squaw. One humerus. Oct... 15, 1937 FRIEDMANN: BIRD BONES 437 Histrionicus histrionicus (Linnaeus). Harlequin Duck. Three humeri, 1 skull. Polysticta stelleri (Pallas). Steller’s Eider. Five humeri. Somateria v-nigra Gray. Pacific Eider. Thirteen sterna, 8 skulls, 2 clavicles, 7 metacarpals, 3 coracoids, 1 ulna, 29 humeri, 2 synsacra, 1 tar- sometatarsus, 2 tibiotarsi. Somateria spectabilis (Linnaeus). King Hider. Three humeri, 1 femur, 3 metacarpals, 3 sterna, 1 synsacrum, | tibiotarsus. Melanitia degland: (Bonaparte). White-winged Scoter. Eight humeri, 1 skull. Melanitta perspicillata (Linnaeus). Surf Scoter. One humerus. Mergus serrator Linnaeus. Red-breasted Merganser. One skull. Haliaeetus leucocephilus (Linnaeus). Bald Eagle. One humerus. 2 metacarpals. Larus hyperboreus Gunnerus. Glaucous Gull. One skull, 1 femur. Larus glauscens Naumann. Glaucous-winged Gull. Eight humeri, 1 femur. Larus argentatus smithsonianus Coues. Herring Gull. Four humeri, 1 skull. Uria sp. Murres. Probably both species aalge and lomvia mixed to- gether. One skull, 13 humeri, 1 femur, 4 sterna. Cepphus columba Pallas. Pigeon Guillemot. Two skulls, 8 humeri. Brachyrhamphus marmoratus (Gmelin). Marbled Murrelet. One ster- num. Synthliboramphus antiquus (Gmelin). Ancient Murrelet. One humerus, 1 sternum. | Aethia cristatella (Pallas). Crested Auklet. Twenty-one humeri, 5 sterna. Aethia pusilla (Pallas). Least Auklet. Three sterna. Cerorhinca monocerata (Pallas). Rhinoceros Auklet. Three humeri. Fratercula corniculata (Naumann). Horned Puffin. Twenty-nine humeri. Lunda cirrhata (Pallas). Tufted Puffin. Twenty-one humeri, 4 sterna. Nyctea nyctea (Linnaeus). Snowy Owl. One femur. Corvus corax principalis Ridgway. Northern Raven. Eleven humeri, 3 metacarpals, | synsacrum. 4. BIRD BONES FROM ATKA ISLAND Diomedea albatrus (Pallas). Short-tailed Albatross. One humerus. Branta nigricans (Lawrence). Black Brant. One humerus. Philacte canagica (Sevastianoff). Emperor Goose. One humerus. Melanitta deglandi (Bonaparte). White-winged Scoter. One humerus. Haliaeetus leucocephalus (Linnaeus). Bald Eagle. One synsacrum. Larus glaucescens Naumann. Glaucous-winged Gull. One tibiotarsus. Corvus corax principalis Ridgway. Northern Raven. Four humeri. 438 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Qo. BIRD BONES FROM ATTU ISLAND Diomedea albatrus Pallas. Short-tailed Albatross. Three skulls, 1 pair of maxillae, 2 synsacra, 3 tarsometatarsi, 2 metacarpals, 7 femurs. Puffinus griseus (Gmelin). Sooty Shearwater. Five humeri. Puffinus sp. Shearwater. Six humeri, probably P. tenuzrostris. Fulmarus glacialis rodgerst Cassin. Pacific Fulmar. One humerus. Phalacrocorax pelagicus Pallas. Pelagic Cormorant. Four sterna, 3 synsacra, 4 skulls, 3 coracoids, 11 ulnae, 31 humeri, 1 tarsometatarsus, 26 femurs, and 16 tibiotarsi. Branta nigricans (Lawrence). Black Brant. Four humeri. Philacte canagica (Sevastianoff). Emperor Goose. One femur, 14 hu- meri. Anser albifrons (Scopoli). White-fronted Goose. Two tarsometatarsi. Somateria v-nigra Gray. Pacific Eider. One sternum, 4 skulls, 1 cora- coid, 4 humeri. Melanitta deglandi (Bonaparte.) White-winged Scoter. One humerus. Larus hyperboreus Gunnerus. Glaucous Gull. Two skulls. Larus glaucescens Naumann. Glaucous-winged Gull. Eleven humeri, 17 ulnae, 2 metacarpals. Larus argentatus smithsonianus Coues. Herring Gull. Three humeri. Larus canus brachyrhynchus Richardson. Short-billed Gull. Two hu- meri. Uria sp. Murres. Four humeri, 1 skull. Cepphus columba Pallas. Pigeon Guillemot. Two humeri. Corvus corax principalis Ridgway. Northern Raven. Two humeri, 1 tarsometatarsus, 2 ulnae, 1 skull. ENTOMOLOGY.—The genus Lysiognatha Ashmead.! R. A. CusH- MAN, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine. (Com- municated by C. F. W. MUESEBECK.) Many “‘rare”’ insects are rare only until something of their seasonal and environmental habits is discovered. Until the spring of 1933 Lystognatha was a “‘rare’”’ insect. In 1895? Ashmead described the genus and its type species, comstocki1, from three specimens collected near Ithaca, N.Y., in 1872 by H. H. Smith. No other specimens had been recorded, and so far as I know only one other, a specimen with- out abdomen taken in Colorado by C. F. Baker and for many years reposing among unclassified material in the National Museum, had been collected. 1 Received July 20, 1937. 2 Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash. 3: 276. 1895. Oerls 1937 CUSHMAN: LYSIOGNATHA 439 REDISCOVERY OF LYSIOGNATHA In 1933 J. C. Bridwell became interested in the sawflies of the genus X yela, and observed them ovipositing in the young staminate cones of the Virginia pine (Pinus virginiana) at Clifton, Va. He also col- lected some of the parasitic Hymenoptera that he found frequenting the pine trees. These he submitted to me for identification. Among them I was surprised to find four female specimens representing two species of Lyszognatha, collected about May i, 1933. SEASONAL HISTORY AND BIOLOGY On April 28 and 29, 1934, Mr. Bridwell and I visited groves of young pine trees in Virginia a few miles from Washington, D. C., and found Lysiognatha very abundant. At this time a large majority of the specimens were males. A week later specimens were much less numerous and all were females. This indicates that the males emerge before the females, and also that April 28 was not far from the earliest emergence date for Lysiognatha. During this period the larvae of Xyela were reaching full growth, and about May 5 were leaving the cones in large numbers. Examination of the nearly 200 specimens of Lysio- gnatha collected disclosed the same two species taken in 1933 by Mr. Bridwell and also many specimens of a third species. While examining larvae of Xyela for evidence of parasitization we found many bearing on or near their heads peculiar eggs, which we were able, by comparing them with ovarian eggs, to identify as those of Lysiognatha. The egg of Lysiognatha is comparatively large, white, elongate oval, slightly curved, and slightly larger at the cephalic end. It is attached to the host by a short pedicel thrust through the skin of the host. Imbedded in the foot of the stalk is a black heavily sclero- tized body that apparently serves as an anchor. Fig. 1,6, shows an egg dissected from the ovary of Lysiognatha and Fig. 1,c, three eggs attached to a Xyela larva.’ The position of the egg on the host sug- gests the surmise that the peculiar mandibles of Lysiognatha may be employed for holding the host during oviposition. It is very evident that hatching never takes place until after the host has entered the soil for pupation, for of the many eggs that we observed on Xyela larvae just after their emergence from the cones, none had hatched. In fact, it was not until July 3, more than two months after the discovery of the egg, that a newly hatched larva was observed. In hatching the larval Lysiognatha does not entirely 3 Preliminary notice of the rediscovery of Lysiognatha and of the identity of its egg was published in Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash. 36: 262. 1934. 440 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 emerge from the eggshell, but uses it as an anchor for holding to its host. On August 6 the first full-grown larva was found. It is a typical ichneumonid larva of the externally parasitic type, as shown by the figure of the head, Fig. 1,d. Subsequently many larvae were found in their thin, shining, transparent cocoons within the cocoons of X yela. The first pupa was found on September 20 and by September 26 most of the larvae had pupated. Although Xyela cocoons were col- lected and examined as late as December 17, Lysiognatha had not advanced beyond the pupal stage, and it is evident that it hibernates in that stage. TAXONOMY Position in classification.—At the time of the original description of Lysiognatha, Ashmead created for it the subfamily Lysiognathinae, which he placed as the first subfamily of the Ichneumonidae. In 1900, however, in his Classification of the ichneumon flies, he treated it as a subfamily of the Alysiidae because of the position and form of the mandibles. The Spanish hymenopterist, G. Ceballos, examined the types of L. comstocki at the National Museum in 1928, and sub- sequently’ expressed the opinion that it is ichneumonid. ‘In my opinion the cephalic and mandibular characters are adaptive, whereas the venation and the free second abdominal suture, together with the characters of the larva, are phylogenetic characters and hence of much more significance in determining the affinities of the group. In venation and abdominal structure there is no essential difference between Lysiognatha and many ichneumonid, especially ichneumonine, genera, and it is to the Ichneumonidae that I think it should be relegated. The association of Lysiognatha with the primitive Xyela would seem to indicate a primitive position for it within the Ichneumonidae. On the other hand, the form of the head and of the mandibles and the method of reproduction indicate a much more recent origin than that of many other Ichneumonidae. Whatever the placing, the form of the head and of the mandibles would render the group anomalous. In the more conservative characters of venation, form of abdomen, and form of ovipositor it is perhaps most like the Ichneumonini, while its method of reproduction allies it with the Tryphonini. In my opinion the proper placing of the group is low on the phylogenetic line be- tween the Ichneumonini and the Tryphonini. The anomalous form of the head and that of the mandibles are sufficient to warrant the rec- ognition of the Lysiognathinae as a distinct subfamily. 4 Mem. Real Soc. Esp. Hist. Nat. 25:20. 1929. Ocriid, L937, CUSHMAN: LYSIOGNATHA 441 Subfamily and generic characters—Head in front view (Fig. 1,a) broader than long, with mouth very broad, mandibles articulating below eyes, the articulating membrane extending upward behind eyes; malar space oblit- erated; mandible nearly twice as long as broad at base, nearly parallel sided, with two large, slightly out-turned teeth, from each of which a promi- nent carina runs back along margin toward base so that outer face of mandible toward apex is concave; clypeus correspondingly broad, extending from eye to eye, ten or more times as broad as long medially, where it is Fig. 1—a, head of Lysitognatha longicauda Cushman; b, ovarian egg of Lysio- gnatha sp.; c, eggs of Lystognatha sp. in situ on larva of Xyela sp.; d, head of larva of Lysiognatha sp. shortest; maxillary palpus 5-jointed; labial palpus 4-jointed (erroneously given as 3-jointed by Ashmead); head behind eyes buccate, temple nearly or quite reaching outside tangent of eye, occiput deeply concave and mar- gined by a distinct carina; antennae short, slender, filiform, about 22—25- jointed, scape semiglobose, squarely truncate at apex, first joint of flagellum shorter than second and slightly thickened toward base. Thorax stout, shining, weakly sculptured; epomia lacking; notauli shal- low; sternauli lacking; prepectus defined; mesolcus deep, not closed pos- teriorly ; propodeum incompletely areolated, median carinae diverging from base to apex, basal area small quadrangular, areola and petiolar area con- fluent; lateral carinae present or absent; spiracle very small, circular, situ- ated somewhat before middle. Legs stout, rather long; calearia 1:2:2, short, inner calcaria on middle and hind legs not much longer than outer; claws small, simple. 442 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Wings broad; stigma broadly triangular; areolet deltoid, oblique, sessile or petiolate; second recurrent with separated bullae; second discoidal cell broad at base; abscissula shorter than intercubitella; nervellus broken below middle. Abdomen in female short and broad, sessile, little longer than thorax; first tergite large, slightly longer than broad, sides divergent, dorsal carinae extending well onto disk, spiracle basad of middle; other tergites strongly transverse, apical ones weakly sclerotized; ovipositor long, subsagittate but not serrate at apex; hypopygium rather prominent; venter entirely mem- branous. Abdomen in male more slender than in female, broadest near apex; first tergite much longer than broad; second nearly as long as broad; apical tergites more strongly sclerotized than in female. KEY TO SPECIES 1. Vertex with a deep median, longitudinal sulcus extending back onto occiput and interrupting the occipital carina............2.. 7. 2 Vertex with at most a faint sulcus; occipital carina not interupted....3 2. Female largely. ferruginous.~ 2. >... }220. comstockit Ashmead Female largely blackisi. 2... te aes 2 ee ee sulcata, n.sp. 3. Occipital carina sharply curved or angulate medially; ovipositor sheath hearly. as' long as: bodys... cee vo ah eee ee longicauda, n. sp. Occipital carina evenly and broadly curved medially; ovipositor sheath much :shorter. than’ Dody. o.4.. 2s. .e=ne an eee es bridwelli, n. sp. Lysiognatha comstockii Ashmead Lysiognatha comstockit Ashmead, Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash. 3: 276. 1895. Known only from the three specimens of the type-series. The two females are in the U. 8. National Museum, the holotype without wings and anten- nae and the paratype without abdomen. This is the palest of the four species, at least in the female, being of a ferruginous color with abdomen almost stramineous. It also differs from the next following species, to which it is most closely related by the possession of the vertical sulcus, in having the thorax polished and virtually without sculpture and the tergites beyond the second evenly sclerotized throughout. Lysiognatha sulcata, n. sp. Closely related to comstocki and possibly not distinct, but judging from the meager material in both species it differs constantly in the female in the blackish head and thorax and the more distinctly sculptured and less pol- ished thorax, and in having the tergites beyond the first so weakly sclero- tized along the apical and lateral margins that in dried specimens they are much distorted. The last may be due to a teneral condition, but the fully developed color argues against this possibility. Furthermore, the difference of nearly two months in the collecting dates could hardly be accounted for by the difference in latitude. Female.—Length 3.25 mm; antenna 2.75 mm; ovipositor sheath 1.75 mm. Head polished, virtually without sculpture; a deep sulcus extending from between the ocelli nearly to the occipital foramen and interrupting the occip- ital carina. Thorax subpolished, subtly alutaceous; mesoscutum weakly and sparsely punctate; propodeum more strongly alutaceous, the carinae faint; areolet sessile. Oor ls, 1937 CUSHMAN: LYSIOGNATHA 443 Abdomen beyond first tergite weakly sclerotized around margins of ter- gites, first tergite subpolished, distinctly longer than broad. Black; face, clypeus, mouthparts (except mandibular teeth), lower margin of cheek, frontal orbit, under side of scape, of pedicel, and of base of first flagellar joint, tegulae, radices of wings, and front and middle coxae and all trochanters whitish; abdomen beyond first tergite brown fading to yel- lowish toward apex; wings hyaline, stigma testaceous, veins darker; front and middle femora pale stramineous, their tibiae and tarsi somewhat in- fuscate; hind coxa piceous with apex pale, femur stramineous, tibia and tarsus fuscous. Male.—Essentially like female except that abdomen is narrower and’ evenly sclerotized; first tergite nearly twice as long as broad with sides parallel beyond spiracles; abdomen darker, with tergites except first mar- gined with yellow; and stigma fusco-testaceous. Type-locality.—Clifton, Va. Type.—No. 52160, U. S. National Museum. Two females from the type-locality Apr. 26—May 3, 1933; 2 males, Dale- earlia, D. C., June 1, 1934, and one male, Alexandria, Va., Apr. 28, 1934; all taken by J. C. Bridwell on Pinus virginiana. Lysiognatha longicauda, n. sp. Distinct from sulcata in the obsolete sulcus of vertex and merely angu- lated, not interrupted, occipital carina; and, in the female, in the completely sclerotized tergites and much longer ovipositor. Female.—Length 3.25 mm; antenna 2.75 mm; ovipositor sheath 2.75 mm. Head finely but distinctly punctate; sulcus of vertex distinct only just before occipital carina, which has a distinct angulation but is not inter- rupted medially. Thorax shining, alutaceous especially on pleura and propodeum, mesoscu- tum and scutellum distinctly finely punctate; propodeal carinae distinct; areolet subsessile or petiolate. Abdominal tergites completely sclerotized; first tergite distinctly aluta- ceous, very slightly longer than broad. Color pattern the same as in sulcata, but the dark color more piceous, sometimes largely replaced by reddish; dorsal part of head, scutellum and the thoracic sutures frequently paler; legs usually darker; abdomen beyond first tergite, except apical 2 or 3 tergites, piceous; stigma fusco-testaceous, paler at base and apex. Male.—Abdomen more slender than in female, first tergite nearly twice as long as broad; dark color of head and thorax black, rather than piceous; abdomen dorsally piceous, except narrow yellowish margins of tergites. Host.—Xyela sp. Type locality.—Alexandria, Va. Type.—No. 52161, U. S. National Museum. Forty-six females and 54 males taken on pine at Clifton, Va. (Apr. 26- May 3, 1933), Alexandria, Va. (Apr. 28, May 2 and May 6, 1934), and Bar- croft, Va. (May 6, 1934), all by J. C. Bridwell, and at Falls Church, Va. (Apr. 29 and May 6, 1934) by R. A. Cushman. 444 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 Lysiognatha bridwelli, n. sp. Female.—Length 3.0 mm; antenna 2.0 mm; ovipositor sheath 1.75 mm. Distinct from all of the other species in the evenly curved, neither inter- rupted nor angulated occipital carina and barely visible median sulcus of vertex; and from longicauda, which it most closely resembles, in the much shorter ovipositor. Otherwise the species agrees with the above description of longicauda, except that the ground color of head and thorax, whether piceous or reddish, is more nearly uniform. Male.—Differs from the female as does the male of longicauda from its female. Host.—X yela sp. Type locality —Alexandria, Va. Type.—No. 52162, U.S. National Museum. Thirty-nine females and 38 males taken on pine at Alexandria, Va. (Apr. 28-29 and May 2 and 6, 1934), Barcroft, Va. (May 6, 1934), and Dalecarlia, D. C. (May 1, 1934) by J. C. Bridwell, and at Falls Church, Va. (Apr. 29 and May 6, 1934) by R. A. Cushman. MALACOLOGY.—Four new species of fresh-water mollusks from China.t Sur Fone CHEN. (Communicated by Paut Bartscu.) In a collection of Chinese fresh-water mollusks received by the U.S. National Museum from the Rev. D. C. Graham are four un- described species which are here described and named. I wish here to express my appreciation to the authorities of the U.S. National Museum and to Dr. Paul Bartsch, the Curator of the Division of Mollusks, for the privilege of studying the family Melani- idae from China in their collection. Melania (Melanoides) suifuensis, n. sp. Figs. 1, 2.—1 Shell of medium size, stout, elongate-conic, turreted, pale yellow through- out excepting the interior of the aperture, which is whitish. The nuclear whorls are decollated in all the specimens before me. Postnuclear whorls well rounded, marked with axial crescentic ribs of which 14 occur on the second and third of the remaining whorls, 15 on the fourth, 17 on the fifth and sixth, 19 on the penultimate, and 18 on the last whorl. The spaces separating the ribs about equal them in width. The spiral sculpture consists of fine threads of which 16 occur between summit and periphery on the last whorl. The suture is strongly impressed. Periphery strongly angulated with the axial ribs terminating at the angulation. Base short, well rounded, and marked by the feeble continuations of the axial ribs; it is also marked by obsolete microscopic spiral threads. The aperture is elliptical; the peristome is thin, simple; parietal wall covered with a slight callus; columella arched. The operculum is thin with 3.2 turns and has left subcentral nucleus. The radula has the formula: 3-1-3 :2-1-3:4:5. The type of U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 365666, was collected by Rev. D. C. Graham at Suifu, Szechuan Province, China. It has 8 whorls remaining 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- ceived July 30, 1937. Ocr, 15, 1937 CHEN: FRESH-WATER MOLLUSKS 445 which yields the following measurements: Length 21.1 mm; diameter 8.0 mm; length of aperture 6.6 mm. Twenty-one specimens from the same source as the type, yield the fol- lowing additional information: They have an average number of 7.9 whorls; the greatest number of whorls being 9.1, and the least 7.2. They present an average length of 18.6 mm; the greatest length being 20.9 mm, and the least 15.8 mm. Their average diameter is 7.0 mm; the largest is 7.8 mm. and the least 5.9 mm. The length of aperture averages 5.9 mm; the largest length of aperture is 6.5 mm, and the least 5.2 mm. They have an average number of ribs as follows: 14.7 on the second of the remaining whorls, 14.6 on the third, 14.8 on the fourth, 15.5 on the fifth, 17.0 on the sixth, 18.0 on the seventh and last whorls. This species resembles Melania ningpoensis Lea, but lacks the spiral keels on the base. | 2 3 Fig. 1.—1, Melania (Melanoides) suzfuensis. X2. 2, Paludomus (Hemimitra) yun- nanensis. X5. 3, Paludomus (Hemimitra) kwetchowensis. X5. 4, Paludomus minen- Sis. 2: Paludomus (Hemimitra) yunnanensis, n. sp. Figs. 1, 2.—2 Shell quite small, ovate-conic, olive brown. Nuclear whorls eroded in all the specimens before me. Postnuclear whorls inflated, strongly rounded, and marked with microscopic incremental lines; spiral sculpture absent. The last whorl shows three dark brown bands. The first which is much narrower and darker is a little below the summit, the second one is half way between the first and third, the latter being at the periphery; a lighter zone equalling the medium dark band separates this from the other two. The suture is well impressed. The last whorl is rather inflated with rounded periphery. The base is short, well rounded, with a dark brown median spiral band. Aperture pyriform; peristome thin, simple; parietal wall with a thin callus; columella arched. The operculum is thin, horny with 2.4 turns, bluntly pointed pos- teriorly, and broadening anteriorly with subcentral nucleus. The radula has the formula: 2-1-2:2-1-3:6:11. The type, U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 467598, was collected by Rev. D. C. Graham in the Yangtze River, near Shiikiang, Yunnan Province. China, and yields the following measurements: Number of whorls 3.0; length 6.9 mm; diameter 4.5 mm; length of aperture 4.0 mm. 446 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 10 Twenty-nine specimens from the same source give us the following addi- tional information: They have an average number of 2.9 whorls remaining; the greatest number of whorls is 3.3, and the least 2.3. They present an average length of 5.7 mm; the greatest length is 7.3 mm, and the least 3.6 mm. Their average diameter is 4.0 mm; the largest is 4.8 mm, and the least 2.6 mm. The length of aperture averages 3.4 mm; the largest length of aper- ture is 4.3 mm, and the least 2.2 mm. This species is also found in Suifu, Szechuan Province, China. Twenty- two specimens, U.S. National Museum Cat. No. 467599, collected by Rev. D. C. Graham, give the following measurements: They have an average number of 3.0 whorls remaining; the greatest number of whorls is 3.6, and the least 2.1. They present an average length of 5.6 mm; the greatest length is 7.1 mm, and the least 4.5 mm. Their average diameter is 4.0 mm; the largest is 4.9 mm, and the least 3.2 mm. The length of aperture averages 3.3 mm; the largest length of aperture is 4.0 mm, and the least 2.5 mm. This species resembles Paludomus baccula Reeve in many respects but it is much smaller, and the anterior end of the aperture is more pointed; it is also spirally banded. Paludomus (Hemimitra) kweichowensis, n. sp. Figs. 1, 2.—3 Shell rather small, solid, smooth, elongate-conic, dark brown throughout excepting that part immediately below the suture which is greenish yellow. The apex is eroded. The postnuclear whorls are inflated, well rounded, and marked with fine lines of growth. Spiral sculpture is absent. Three spiral dark brown bands are present on each whorl; they are especially conspicu- ous on the last turn. One of these, much narrower, is slightly below the summit, the second one, much lighter than the other two, is half way be- tween the first and third, the latter being at the periphery; a lighter zone equalling the medium dark band separates this from the other two; there may also be a more or less well developed basal band. Suture strongly im- pressed. Periphery well rounded. The base is moderately long and well rounded. The aperture is ovate-pyriform; peristome simple, slightly reflexed; parietal wall covered with a slight callus; columella arched. The operculum is thin with 3.2 turns, ovate, bluntly pointed posteriorly and broadly rounded anteriorly with subcentral nucleus, that is somewhat to the left of and below the center. The radula has the formula: 3-1-3 :2-1-3:5:8. The type, U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 467596 was collected by Rev. D. C. Graham at Shih-men-kan, Kweichow Province, China. It has 6.5 whorls and measures: Length 10.7 mm; diameter 5.7 mm; length of aperture 5.0 mm. Ninety-three additional specimens from the same source give the following measurements: They have an average number of whorls 5.0; the greatest number of whorls is 6.5, and the least 3.8. They present an average length of 9.7 mm; the greatest length is 13.5 mm, and the least 5.6 mm. Their average diameter is 5.2 mm; the largest is 6.2 mm, and the least 3.5 mm. The length of aperture averages 4.6 mm; the largest length of aperture is 5.9 mm, and the least 3.0 mm. This species is very much like Melania leprosa Heude, but is much smaller and has the columella more uniformly arched, and the body whorl larger; it is also spirally banded. Paludomus minensis, n. sp. Rigs: LZ Shell thick, stout, ovate, bluish purple covered with a greenish yellow periostracum; the interior of the aperture is chestnut colored. Nuclear Oct. 15, 1937 CHEN: FRESH-WATER MOLLUSKS. 447 es) Q) (9 i | a Fig. 2.—1, Melania (Melanoides) suifuensis. a Paludomus (Hemimitra) yunnan- ensis. 3, Paludomus (Hemimitra) kweichowensis. 4, Paludomus minensis. Radulae, x 200. Opercula, X15. 448 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 10 whorls 2.0, smooth and well rounded, forming a blunt apex. Postnuclear whorls strongly rounded and marked with axial incremental lines. Spiral sculpture absent. Suture moderately impressed. Periphery well rounded. Base short and well rounded. Aperture ovate-pyriform, bluntly pointed posteriorly and broadly ovate anteriorly; peristome simple, slightly thick- ened internally; parietal wall heavily calloused; columella arched. Oper- culum ovate and moderately thick, with 2.7 turns. The radula has the for- mula: 4-1-4:3-1-2:3:4. The type U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 467605, was collected by Rev. D. C. Graham in Min River near Kienway, Szechuan Province, China, and yields the following measurements: Number of whorls, 4.8; length 21.2 mm; diam- eter 15.1 mm; length of aperture 12.9 mm. Three specimens from the same source yield the following additional in- formation: They have an average number of 4.4 whorls; the greatest num- ber of whorls is 4.6, and the least 4.2. They present an average length of 22.2 mm; the greatest length is 23.3 mm, and the least 21.6 mm. Their average diameter is 14.9 mm; the largest is 15.6 mm, and the least 14.1 mm. The length of aperture averages 13.4 mm; the largest length of aperture is 13.7 mm, and the least 12.9 mm. The species, most closely resembling this form, is Paludomus conicus Gray. The present species, however, is stouter and has a smooth surface without sculpture. 7 S CONTENTS Hypro.tocy.—The chemical character of the erotind waters of ee South Atlantic Coastal Plain. Margaret D. Fostmr......... 4 Botany.—New species of Sphaceloma on Aralia and Mentha. By. JENKIN ALS iS, die te ie nis mk oie eae ee ee a PALEOBOTANY.—Fossil bea Ope from eg ey Oregon AN Wi SRO WN hoa ews ie ieee ees ZooLogy.—New rodents from Middle America. E. A. GoLpMAN. . ZooLocy.—Some parasitic copepods from Panama Bay. Connon, ee y WILSON 6c 0 io gle On Ua den wo Rees g' cutee ee eae’ Windus ee ORNITHOLOGY.—Bird bones from pais tage sites in Alaska. Her- ion BERT FRIEDMANN........-. vista 4 fate Datel Ce ee heat gerne ae eat nls gmat genus Lysiognatha sagas Ss ae. Guise bs MM as. is SE ein: | a ee eee je? Maxaco.ocy.—Four new species of fresh-water mollusks from China, Be ond Cont ee This Journal is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals othe No. 11 ak ee « th nN Bs Sod I a z pi BOARD OF EDITORS | cece SN / 8, Sema bee Esen” iH. Toouz Lis Freverick D. ‘Rossini as Ss. GxoLoctcat, SURVEY | BUREAU oF PLANT INDUSTRY © BUREAU OF STANDARDS | a ae ey 3 oar : a | mrontozosreat SOCIETY ; Haney B. ek JR. ANTHROPOLOGICAL soctery even OF SCIENCES... ge a ae: Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; st proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNnaAt is issued monthly, on the fifteenth of each month. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JourNnAt and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good cares, Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than Sopsatta minor errors. Illustrations in excess of one full-page halftone or two full-page line drawings may be paid for by the author. Line drawings are preferred. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and date of issue, and reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accordance with the following schedule of prices. Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers 50 PaaS be ti etek Site $2.00 100 $..75 $1.20 $1.50 $2.00 $2.75 150 1.25 1.90 2.55 3.20 3.50 200 1.75 2.60 3.60 4.50 4.25 250 2.00 3.30 4.65 §.75 5.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. Subscription Rates.—Per yvounime. . . 6... . +. eats aos ae Owes ae eee $6.00 To members of affiliated societies; per volume. .............5-00eeeeeees 2.50 Sinwle num bers 0) cs. ae vs bce on nice une kip aca ghee .50 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and addressed to 450 Ahnaip Street, Menasha, Wis., or to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C. : Exchanges.—The JouURNAL does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within thirty days after date of following issue. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: CHARLES THOM, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: NATHAN R. Smiru, Bureau of Plant Industry. Recording Secretary: Oscar S. Apams, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 27 NOVEMBER 15, 1937 No. 11 PALEONTOLOGY .—Linter, a new taxodont genus from the Upper Cretaceous of Texas... Luoyp WILLIAM STEPHENSON, U. 8. Geo- logical Survey. An elegant little taxodont bivalve mollusk from the Nacatoch sand of the Navarro group of Texas appears to belong to a heretofore un- described genus and species for which the name Linter acutata is now proposed. This shell has been found at three localities in Navarro County. The genus is also represented by one specimen belonging to a dis- tinct species, here named Linter burrana, from the San Miguel for- mation of Maverick County, Texas, a formation stratigraphically lower than the Nacatoch sand, and correlated with the upper part of the Taylor marl of central Texas. These species belong to a group of taxodont shells having vertically striated ligamental areas, to which F. Stearns MacNeil, in an accom- panying paper in this JOURNAL, and in a paper now in press as United States Geological Survey Professional Paper 189-A, applies the new family name Noetidae, based on the genus Noetia Gray, and the new subfamily name Trinacriinae, based on the genus T'rinacria. Genus LINTER Stephenson, n. gen. Type species: Linter acutata Stephenson. Etymology: Latin linter, a boat or skiff.. This genus is characterized by its long and sharply acute umbonal ridge, its short Arca-like hinge, and its broadly excavated triangular cardinal area situated mainly back of the beak; at the forward end of the area under the beak is a small, triangular, amphidetic, ligamental area, faintly stri- ated at right angles to the hinge line; the rest of the area is smooth with only incremental lines showing. The hinge is slightly arched and is set with 10 or more irregular, short, transverse to slightly oblique teeth, separated by deep sockets. The genus is represented by 8 specimens from Texas, 7 from the Nacatoch sand, described below under the specific name Linter acutata, and 1 from the stratigraphically lower San Miguel formation of Maverick County, de- scribed under the name Linter burrana. 1 Published by permission of the Director, U. 8. Geological Survey. Received September 13, 1937. 450 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 Linter acutata Stephenson n. sp. Figs. 1-3 Shell small, subtrigonal in outline, strongly convex. Beaks prominent, opisthogyrate, slightly separated, situated about 3/10 the length of the shell from the anterior extremity. The umbonal ridge is sharply angular, the median surface meeting the postero-dorsal slope at an acute angle, the crest of the ridge slightly overhanging as it approaches the beak. A broad, very shallow radiating depression extends to the postero-ventral margin in front of the umbonal ridge. The umbonal ridge stands higher than any other part of the shell, and from it the surface rounds down gently to the anterior and ventral margins; the posterodorsal slope is long, broad, and broadly excavated, the concavity being slightly modified by a broad median swell; this surface meets the cardinal area at a broad, obtuse angle. The cardinal Figs. 1-5.—Linter acutata Stephenson. 1, side view of the holotype, a right valve, <2 (U.S.N.M. no. 75974). 2, dorsal view of the holotype, X2. 3, an enlarged, some- what generalized drawing of the hinge and cardinal area of the holotype, X9. Figs. 4, 5.—Linter burrana Stephenson. 4, side view of the holotype, X2 (U.S.N.M. no. 75978). 5, dorsal view of the holotype, x2. area is triangular and broadly excavated; its lower straight edge is about 2.25 mm long in the holotype, and its posterior edge meets the posterodor- sal slope at an obtuse angle; the anterior edge is partly concealed by the in- curving of the sharp tip of the beak. Under the beak is a small, shallow, triangular, ligamental pit, which bears 5 or 6 obscure, transverse striations; the rest of the area is smooth with the exception of fine incremental lines. The hinge plate is short and narrow; as seen on the holotype it is obscure but appears to be set with 10 or more irregular taxodont teeth which cen- trally are nearly transverse to the hinge line but toward the ends become more or less oblique; the anterior teeth are chevron-shaped. The inner sur- face is partly exposed posteriorly in one shell and exhibits radial striae which are strongest near the pallial line. The anterodorsal margin is steeply inclined but curves below into the regularly rounded anterior margin, which in turn curves into the broadly convex to nearly straight ventral margin; the long, nearly straight, though slightly sinuous, posterodorsal margin meets the ventral margin at a sharp acute angle, forming a pointed extrem- ity; the posterodorsal margin is strongly inclined forward and meets the hinge line at a very wide obtuse angle. The surface is marked with fine, Nov. 15, 1937 STEPHENSON: LINTER 451 somewhat irregular incremental lines, crossed by very fine, obscure, radiat- ing ridges which are a little stronger and wider apart on the antero- and posterodorsal slopes; the crossing of the two sets of lines tends to form a faint punctate sculpture; these features are too fine to show clearly in the illustration, and vary in strength on different individuals. Dimensions of the holotype, a right valve: Length, 11.3 mm; height, 6.8 mm; convexity, 3 mm. Types: Holotype, a right valve, U.S.N.M. no. 75974; 2 paratypes, U.S.N.M. no. 75975; 1 paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 75976; 4 paratypes, U.S. N.M. no. 75977. Distribution in Texas ——Navarro group, Nacatoch sand: Public road south of the St. Louis Southwestern (Cotton Belt) Railroad, about 5 miles south- southwest.of Corsicana, Navarro County (holotype and 2 paratypes, U.S. G.S. coll. 7573) ; from a small branch west of the Corsicana-Chatfield road, at the north end of M. R. and M. J. Thompson’s property, 2 miles north of Corsicana, Navarro County (1 paratype, U.S.G.S. coll. 9553, collected by O. B. Hopkins in 1916); borrow pit just east of U.S. Highway 75, at foot of the north-facing slope of Chambers Creek valley, 4 miles north of the Court House at Corsicana, Navarro County (4 paratypes, U.S.G.S. coll. 17366). Linter burrana Stephenson n. sp. Figs. 4, 5 One incomplete individual from the San Miguel formation, Maverick County, differs from Linter acutata mainly in its proportionately greater length and in its greater size, being nearly twice as long. In L. acutata the height is about 0.60 or 0.61 times the length, whereas in L. burrana the height is about 0.53 times the length. The specimen is an internal mold of both valves with the thin shell peeled off and lost from more than half the surface; the portion of the shell that remains is badly corroded, but shows the growth lines fairly completely; the posterodorsal slopes also show a series of fine, obscure radiating lines which are strongest near the acutely angular umbonal ridge, and become fainter inward toward the margin. The shell is gone from the beaks, and also from the forward portion of the cardinal area. The posterodorsal slopes are long, broad, broadly excavated, and extend with a moderately steep descent to the posterior extremity. The an- terior adductor scar is proportionately small and elongated and is bordered posteriorly by a narrow radial internal rib that appears on the mold as a groove. The mold bears the impressions of fine, somewhat irregular, radiat- ing, internal lines that are strongest toward the marginal ends. Dimensions: Length 20.8 mm, height 11 mm, diameter 10.8 mm. The species is accompanied at its type locality by a goodly number of poorly preserved pelecypods and gastropods (U.S.G.S. colls. 1887 and 8233), most of which have been only generically identified; among them are shells of Ostrea saltillensis Bose, and Polinices rectilabrum (Conrad). Holotype: U.S.N.M. no. 75978. | Occurrence.—San Miguel formation (upper Taylor age): From layers of indurated calcareous sandstone in the north-facing slope of Sauz Creek, just north of the abandoned stone headquarters house of the old Burr Ranch, 2 miles northwest of Paloma siding, 23 miles north by east of Eagle Pass, Maverick County, Texas (U.S.G.S. coll. 8233). 452 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 PALEONTOLOGY.—The systematic position of the pelecypod genus Trinacria.!| F. Srgarns MacNee, U. S. Geological Survey. (Communicated by Ltoyp W. STEPHENSON.) During the course of some researches into the structure and evolu- tion of the ligament of arcid pelecypods the writer was fortunate enough to find, in a collection recently acquired by the U.S. National Museum, a few specimens of T’rinacria cancellata (Deshayes) from the Calcaire Grossier, on which the fibrous ligament was perfectly pre- served. These throw new light on the relationships of this genus. In addition some specimens of a new genus from the Upper Cretaceous of Texas, collected and described in manuscript by L. W. Stephen- son of the U. 8S. Geological Survey, were recognized as representing a primitive type of Trinacriinae. It is the purpose of this paper to make the structure of the ligament of Trznacria known, to outline briefly the evolution of the genus, and to delimit the subfamily Trinacriinae which was recently proposed by the writer in U. 8. Geological Survey Professional Paper 189-A. The writer is indebted to the authorities of the U. S. National Museum for the privilege of studying Museum collections and to Dr. L. W. Stephenson for making the name of his Upper Cretaceous genus, Linter, available under separate title in this publication. NOMENCLATURE The availability of the name Trigonocoelia Nyst and Galeotti (1835) for the group of shells generally referred to as Trinacria Mayer (1868) has been a subject for difference of opinion since Deshayes usage of the former in 1860. Wood and Stoliczka expressed the opin- ion, which was probably shared by Conrad and Newton, that, inas- much as the original list for T’rzigonocoelia contained two distinct genera, and one of them, the “‘pectunculacés”’ species, belonged to the genus Limopsis Sasso (1827) (type by monotypy, Arca aurita Broc- chi), the name Trigonocoelia was still available for the ‘“‘nuculacés”’ species. Mayer was apparently unaware that the original list for Trigonocoelia was divided into shells of two types, for he accused Deshayes of applying the name to an entirely different type of shell than that for which it was proposed. Mayer believed that Nyst and Galeotti’s name was proposed as a substitute for Limopsis, because the latter was a hybrid name, and accepted the substitution on that 1 Published by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. Re- ceived September 8, 1937. Nov. 15, 1937 MACNEIL: TRINACRIA 453 ground. He was thus incorrect in suppressing Limopsis and for the reasons he gave he was equally incorrect in proposing the new name Trinacria. His name is a valid one, however, by virtue of Herrmann- sen’s designation of Arca aurita Brocchi as the type of T'rigonocoelia in 1849 (1). This is the first and only valid designation of a type for Trigonocoelia the writer has been able to find, and curiously enough it appears not to have been mentioned by later authors. On whatever nomenclatorial errors the name Trinacria has gained acceptance, Herrmannsen’s designation settles the problem unless a contrary designation made between 1835 and 1849 is discovered. Dall raised the question as to whether Trigonocaelix Conrad (1865) [a typo- graphical error] was not to have priority over Trinacria. Had not Conrad later corrected it to Trigonocaelia (2) a telling case might be made for it. Conrad’s correction differs from Nyst and Galeotti’s spelling by the diphthong ae for oe. Inasmuch as the name had been spelled indiscriminately before, Deshayes spelling it ae in the generic discussion and oe in the systematic text, and Chenu spelling it oe in his index and ae in the text it appears best to disregard both Trigonocaelix and Trigonocaelia. RELATIONSHIPS OF TRINACRIA Type (by subsequent designation, Gardner, U. S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 142-A, p. 21, 1926), Trigonocoelia crassa (Deshayes). Eocene, Paris Basin. The almost universal assignment of Trinacria to the Limopsidae has been based on its possession of a deep ligamental pit, the assump- tion being that both Trznacria and Limopsis possessed a simple liga- ment connection partly submerged in the shell. A critical study of the structure of the ligament in these genera revealed that they are of two distinct types, that of Limopsis being a modification of the chevroned type, whereas that of Trinacria is a highly specialized form of the vertically striated type. This knowledge, along with the discovery of the Upper Cretaceous genus Linter (Fig. 1a), makes it possible to trace almost without interruption the steps in the evolu- tion of Trinacria from its ancestral form to the highly specialized Miocene species occurring in the Alum Bluff group of Florida. Presumably Linter was derived from some early member of the Striarcinae. It differs from Breviarca principally in being considerably lighter and in being strongly opisthogyrate, with a sharp umbonal keel and a small ligament area, nearly all of which is restricted to the part of the cardinal area anterior to the beaks. The cardinal area is 454 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 also well developed posterior to the beaks but devoid of ligament except for a narrow, sub-umbonal wedge. This posterior cardinal area appears to be slightly out of the plane of the ligament area. The vertical ligament elements of [inter are delicate, being of about the same texture as in Breviarca. Development of Trinacria from Linter consisted of the beaks be- coming more opisthogyrate and nearer the hinge line so as to cut off the anterior extension of the ligament. The posterior end of the car- dinal area became shorter and more out of the plane of the ligament area, merging directly with the posterior slope. With the anterior part of the area cut off and the posterior end obsolete the narrow, subumbonal, posterior wedge of ligament remaining had to become thickened and submerged to retain strength. The central teeth on the types of Linter are not well preserved but there appears to be a break between the anterior and posterior rows. In Trinacria, owing to a much shortened hinge line, the two rows often come together but are sharply divided by a difference in direction. Two species referable to T’rzinacria have been described from the Cretaceous, Trinacria galeata (Miller) (3) from the Greensands of Vaals, Aachen; and T'rinacria cor Popenoe (4) from the Upper Cre- taceous of California. A line drawing of the latter made from speci- mens kindly loaned the writer by W. P. Popenoe is shown in Fig. 1b. This species shows the characters mentioned above for early forms of Tronacria. The beaks are completely opisthogyrate, the umbonal keel very sharp, the ligament restricted and slightly entrenched, the cardinal area narrow and indistinct posteriorly, and the hinge line short. Evolution within the genus Trinacria consisted of a secondary lengthening of the shell, orthogyration of the beaks and greater re- moval of them from the hinge line, lessening angulation and final rounding of the umbonal ridge, deeper entrenchment of the ligament with a tendency to grow more to the anterior in later species, and a greater separation of the anterior and posterior rows of teeth. Trinacria deltoidea (Lamarck) (Calcaire Grossier) (Fig. lc, drawn from a specimen from Houdan, France) shows the secondary ortho- gyration of the beaks with the consequent widening of the antero- dorsal growth lines. The ligament is more deeply entrenched and ex- tends more to the anterior than in the extremely opisthogyrate Cre- taceous species. This species is very similar to 7. cuneus (Conrad), from Claiborne, Alabama. Trinacria cancellata (Deshayes) (Calcaire Grossier), the species in Nov. 15, 1937 MACNEIL: TRINACRIA 455 which a perfectly preserved ligament was found, is very similar to T. deltordea, differing mainly in being less inflated, more elongate, and in having more pronounced radial sculpture. — ~QDpe= SPCC + ; e€ Fig. 1.—a. Linter acutata Stephenson. 0. Renee sé cor Popenoe. c. Trinacria deltoidea (Lamarck). d. Trinacria media (Deshayes). e. Trinacria meeki Dall. f. Trinacria pectuncularis (Lea). g. Halonanus (Trinacriella) cossmannt (Dall). h. Halonanus (Trinacriella) perplana (Conrad). 1. Halonanus pulchra (Gabb). The lengths indicated by the straight lines below the individual figures are over-all dimen- sions of the shell, natural size. Remnants of the fibrous layer have also been observed in speci- mens of 7’. media (Deshayes) (Fig. ld, Bartonian, Ezanville, France), a species closely related to 7. ledoides (Meyer) from Claiborne. In these specimens the ligament material is somewhat disarranged but three ligament grooves are quite clearly indicated on one specimen. 456 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 11 This species is more elongate than 7’. deltoidea and the beaks are more orthogyrate. The umbonal ridge is not sharply carinate but sharply rounded and approaches that of T’.. crassa (Deshayes), the genotype, in which the umbonal ridge is definitely rounded in adults. Trinacria media and T. crassa approach the Miocene species from Florida, T. meeki Dall (Fig. le), in the rotundity of the umbonal ridge but differ in being more trigonal and in that the rows of teeth are not widely separated as in the latter. In 7. meeki the umbonal ridge is broadly rounded in adults and the beaks have returned to a nearly orthogyrate attitude. The base of the ligament is more expanded. Trinacria meeki might be regarded as subgenerically distinct from typical Trinacria, but it seems just as satisfactory to regard it as a terminal species of the genus. T'rinacria pectuncularis (Lea) (Fig. 1f) from Claiborne has a moderately expanded, somewhat anteriorly directed ligament pit and separated rows of teeth, but differs from T. meeki mainly in being higher and subquadrate rather than elongate and subovate. In addition to the typical species of T’rinacria found in the Clai- borne group of the southeastern United States there exist two other groups of shells that appear closely related to them. It will be difficult to discuss these forms specifically until they have been monographed, but they are typified by Noetia pulchra Gabb (Fig. 12) from Texas, for which the generic name Halonanus (5) has been proposed, and Pectunculus perplanus Conrad (6) from Claiborne; and Trinacria perplana (Conrad) Harris (7) (Fig. 1h) for which the subgeneric name Trinacriella is here proposed under the genus Halonanus. Trinacriella ranges in shape from subquadrate to subelliptical or subovate, some forms being nearly circular. Aside from the difference in shape it is distinguished from T’rinacria by its heavier shell and wider cardinal plate. The widening of the cardinal plate enabled the anterior and posterior rows of teeth to reestablish contact with each other and a series can be seen ranging from 7’. cossmanni Dall (Fig. 1g), in which the rows are well separated, to 7. perplana (Conrad) (Fig. 1h) in which they run together. In addition the ligament pit exhibits a series ranging from nearly equilateral in 7’. cossmanni to more anteriorly directed as in 7’. perplana and T’. ellipsis (Lea). The former pattern is regarded as aberrant whereas the latter bears re- semblance to that of some species of T’rinacria, especially the Clai- borne species 7’. pectuncularis (Lea), through which the two genera may be connected. The ligament pattern of 7’. perplana also ap- proaches that of typical Halonanus. Nov. 15, 1937 MACNEIL: TRINACRIA 457 Halonanus differs from both Trinacria and H. (Trinacriella) in being definitely noetiform with a well developed cardinal area, although H. decisa (Conrad) (not figd.) appears to be intermediate between the typical form and Trinacriella perplana. Halonanus differs from the Noetinae in that its sculpture consists of only one set of ribs whereas the Noetinae are characterized by both primary and second- ary ribs. Its ligament differs from that of Noetza in that in that genus there is an initial vertical element beginning directly beneath the umbo whereas in Halonanus pulchra there is an initial anterior diago- nal groove which later develops into a vertically striated ligament. This condition has been observed nowhere else among the prionodont bivalves and is accounted for by the fact that the cardinal area of Halonanus is a secondary structure analogous to the primary cardinal area of Linter, the initial anterior diagonal ligament groove being a remnant of the anteriorly directed ligamental pit observed in T'r- nacriella and still well developed in Halonanus decisa. The ligament material is usually lost in specimens of T'rinacriella and Halonanus decisa but a few specimens seen by the writer retain enough to show that the ligament contained vertical elements, even in the forms with more oblique pits. The secondary cardinal area of Halonanus, sensu stricto, is foreshadowed in the incipient cardinal area observed in some species of Trinacriella, particularly T. perplana. CLASSIFICATION? A partial classification of arcid Pelecypoda to include the subfamily Trinacriinae follows. This arrangement is based primarily on liga- ment structure but is correlated with dentition, orientation, sculp- ture, and other shell characters. Order FILIBRANCHIA Pelseneer Suborder PRIONODONTA MacNeil Superfamilies CYRTODONTACEA, PARALLELODONTACEA, GLYCYMERACEA, ARCACEA Superfamily GLYCYMERACEA MacNeil Families GLYCYMERIDAE, CUCULLAEIDAE, NAVICU- LIDAE, LIMOPSIDAE, NOETIDAE The superfamily Glycymeracea exhibits much less stability in ligament structure than the Parallelodontacea and Arcacea, and most of the aber- rant types of ligaments are found here. It is interesting to note that all 2 This classification is based on Arca antiquata as type of Arca. If the Commission should accept a recommendation before it at the present time to regard Arca noae as type, the following changes would become necessary: Glycymeracea would become Arcacea; Arcacea would become Anadaracea; and Naviculidae would become Arcidae. 458 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 11 opisthogyrate shells and all shells bearing a flange on the muscle scars fall in this superfamily. Family NOETIDAE MacNeil Subfamilies STRIARCINAE, TRINACRIINAE, NOETINAE The family Noetidae includes all of the forms having vertical ligament elements. Subfamily TRINACRIINAE MacNeil This subfamily includes the three genera, Linter Stephenson, Trinacria Mayer, and Halonanus Stewart, and the subgenus Trinacriella MacNeil (under Halonanus). LITERATURE CITED . HERRMANNSEN, A. N. Indicis generum malacozoorum 2: 600. 1849. . Conrad, T. A. Jour. Am. Conchology 1(2):190a. 1865. HouzaPFeL, E. Paleontographica 36: 213, pl. 23, figs. 3-5. 1889. Porrenog, W. P. Jour. Paleontology 11(5): 380, pl. 45, figs. 1-8. 1937. Stewart, R. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia Special Pub. 3: 78. 1930. . Conrad, T. A. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia Jour., Ist ser., 7: 134. 1834. . Harris, G. D. Bull. Amer. Paleontology 6(31): 43, pl. 19, figs. 10, 11. 1919. NO oR WN ~ PALEOBOTAN Y.—On the presence of the fern Weichselia 7n Colom- bia, South America.1 Epwarp W. Berry, Johns Hopkins Uni- versity. | Some months ago I received from Phillip L. Merritt, under the label of the Ministerio de Industrias y Trabajo, Bogota, Colombia, a package of fossil plants. These were collected near Mutiscua, which is between 10 and 11 miles slightly south of west of Pamplona in the northern part of the Department of Santander, and is shown on Hettner’s map of the Cordillera of Bogota.? This material is of considerable interest and comprises 6 specimens which are covered with the impressions of the rachis and fronds of the fern known as Weichselia, which was almost world-wide in its dis- tribution during the Mesozoic. The matrix is a rather soft, grayish mudstone, very similar to the shales on the Island of San Lorenzo, off the port of Callao, Peru, which are also packed with Wezchselza, the only apparent lithologic difference being that the shales from Peru are slightly lighter in color. The Colombian matrix has not been studied petrographically, but from its somewhat soapy feel, and its general similarity to that con- taining the Peruvian fossils, I regard it as probably representing a carbonaceous pyritiferous mudstone in which, because of tectonic 1 Received August 23, 1937. 2 HETTNER, ALFRED. Die Kordillere von Bogotd. Petermann’s Mitt. Erginzung Bd. 22, No. 104, 1891. Nov. 15, 1937 BERRY: WEICHSELIA 459 movements and circulating waters, the carbon and the sulfide were oxidized. The plant impressions are typical of Weichselia, the larger frond fragments showing a stipe of about 3.5 millimeters diameter, and elongated parallel pinnae of lengths up to 10 or 11 centimeters, with the characteristic netted venation of the pinnules frequently in ex- cellent preservation. Associated with the frond fragments are im- pressions of the sort that have often been interpreted as stems of Equisetites, as by Neumann, Schlagintweit, and others, which Zeiller considered, in the case of the Peruvian material, as the larger stems or petioles of Wezchselia. Impressions of this sort, indistinguishable from the Peruvian material, are associated with the frond fragments in the present collection in lengths of about 11 centimeters, and with diameters of 2.5 to 3 centimeters. The impression material of this frond genus, first described as a species of Pecopteris by Stokes & Webb in 1824, and named by Stiehler in 1857, is rather readily recognizable, and has been dis- covered in many parts of the world. It has been discussed by many authors, the bibliography amounting to upwards of fifty titles. In the latest discussion, that by Edwards in 1933, a rather good case is made out for correlating the impressions known as Weichselia with the structural material of stems, or more probably petioles, which have been described under the name of Paradoxopteris.* Despite all the available evidence and this correlation, the botanical affinity of Weichselia is not settled beyond a strong presumption that it is to be found in the family Marattiaceae, or in an allied and wholly extinct group. A number of different species of Wezchselia have been proposed. In describing the Mesozoic flora of Peru I followed Zeiller in using the specific designation Wezchselia peruvianum,* which was based in the first instance on the impressions of large petioles which Neumann had mistakenly described as Equisetites peruanus. Although I saw no fertile specimens from Peruvian localities such as Zeiller thought he had, I considered that the reflexed basal pinnules might serve to differentiate the Peruvian from the European material. Edwards has shown, however, that this feature occurs also in some specimens of the European genotype Weichselia reticulata. In spite of the lack of definite distinguishable characters I find it 2 Epwarps, W. N. On the Cretaceous fern Paradoxopteris and its connection with Weichselia. Annals of Botany 47: 317-341. 1933. 4 Berry, E. W. Johns Hopkins Studies in Geology 4: 52-55. 1922. 460 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 hard to believe that a single botanical species ranged over five conti- nents—Europe, Asia, Africa, North and South America—and from at least the dawn of the Lower Cretaceous® to the Cenomanian stage of the Upper Cretaceous. Peruvian material was recorded in 1922 from ten different localities, and subsequently in the collections made by the Ellsworth Expedition from the coal measures of Huallanca in the Department of Ancachs, this species was found to be exceedingly abundant. I may add that the North American occurrence of Weichselia in the Black Hills, about which I expressed some doubt in 1922, is per- fectly authentic. I have since had a large amount of typical but very fragmentary material from that region. Karsten, years ago, collected Weichselia at Santa Maria in north- eastern Venezuela. This find was discussed by Schlagintweit® who concluded that its age was Neocomian. From Santa Maria through Mutiscua via the Andean geosyncline to the southernmost of the abundant Peruvian occurrences is a distance of about 2,500 miles. Occurrences of this species in Texas and in the Black Hills region of South Dakota carry its range northward to 44° north latitude, so that its known north-south range in the western hemisphere covers about 55° of latitude. Regarding the exact age of the new material from Colombia no conclusion based upon paleobotanical evidence is possible. The Euro- pean type is more common at Neocomian and Barremian horizons than later in the Cretaceous, but according to Edwards it ranges up through the Aptian to the Albian (upper Greensand) in England. In eastern Asia an Aptian age is supposed, and some of the north African occurrences have been regarded as Cenomanian. The Black Hills occurrences in North America are associated with a dicotyledonous flora and have been regarded as of Albian age. All that can be said of the age of the Mutiscua specimens is that they are probably Lower Cretaceous, but whether early or late in that period can not be deter- mined, although, if the Peruvian occurrences have any weight, which is by no means certain, the balance of evidence would point to an earlier rather than a later Lower Cretaceous age. Schuchert’s map of the early Lower Cretaceous in the Caribbean and northern South America shows no seaway on the site of the 5 The horizon of the Peruvian material in the Department of Lima has been in- correctly termed Wealden. It is considered by Peruvian geologists to be Neocomian, but it may well be as old as Portlandian. Probably Tithonian would be the proper designation. 6 SCHLAGINTWEIT, O. Centralblatt f. Min. Geol. & Pal. 19(20): 315-319. 1919. Nov. 15, 1937 FOX: NEARCTIC SPIDERS 461 Venezuelan Andes, such a seaway first appearing on his map of the early Middle Cretaceous, whatever that may mean.’ It is, of course, impossible to criticize such generalized maps covering such synthetic geologic time, but it is certainly a fact that Lower Cretaceous is present throughout the extent of the Venezuelan Andes from Colom- bia eastward to Trinidad. ZLOOLOGY.—The Nearctic spiders of the family Heteropodidae.' Irvine Fox, lowa State College, Ames, lowa. (Communicated by C. F. W. Muesebeck.) The spiders of the group under discussion are generally held to comprise a distinct family having affinities with the Thomisidae and the Clubionidae; from the former they are distinguished particularly by the possession of teeth on the cheliceral margins and from the latter chiefly by the laterigrade legs and the more or less distinct membranes at the apices of the metatarsi. They are further charac- terized by the possession of a carapace which is as wide as long or slightly longer than wide, and by the scopulate tarsi which are armed with two claws. The eyes are eight in number and arranged in two transverse rows of four each. The conception that these characters are of sufficient importance to warrant the maintenance of a distinct family is generally sub- scribed to by modern arachnologists, but there yet exists some dis- agreement concerning the proper family denomination. Two names have been commonly used, Heteropodidae Thorell and Sparassidae Simon; the former name appears to be the correct one. Thorell in 1873 suggested that Heteropoda and related genera be separated from the Thomisidae and combined into a new family, Heteropodidae.’? In 1874 Simon revised the European species of this group under the family name Sparassidae,* and this and subsequent revisions had the effect of making Sparassidae the more extensively used name. On the basis of priority, however, Heteropodidae is the correct family name and Sparassidae is its synonym. There is evident considerable confusion among authors concerning the proper usage of the names, Sparassus, Olios, and Eusparassus. The genus Sparassus was erected by Walckenaer in 1805,‘ and S. 7 ScHUCHERT, CHARLES. AHistorical geology of the Antillean-Caribbean region, maps 4 and 5, 1935. 1 Received August 18, 1937. 2 Remarks on the Synonyms of European Spiders, Upsala, p. 606, 1870-1873. 3 Ann. Soc. Ent. France 4: 2438. 1874. 4 Tableau des Araneides, p. 40, 1805. 462 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 11 argelasius Walck. was subsequently designated as type by Thorell.® S. argelasius was re-described by Walckenaer in 1806,° by Latreille (under Micrommata) in 1818,’ and again by Walckenaer in 1837.8 Simon considered S. argetasitus Walck. 1805 to be a nomen nudum and accepted M. argelasius Latreille 1818 as the earliest available name.°® At the same time he decided that M. argelasius Latreille represented a group distinct from any previously described and made it the type of his new genus Eusparassus. Since publication of these views Simon’s arrangement has been generally accepted, and Eusparassus has been considered a good genus, while Sparassus has been com- pletely ignored. Walckenaer’s original description of 1805, while not detailed enough to permit recognition of the species, is sufficient to constitute a valid description, hence S. argelasitus Walck. 1805 can not correctly be regarded as a nomen nudum, but must be considered a valid name. Latreille in his description of 1818 indicated conclusively that he was re-describing Walckenaer’s species rather than describing a new one of his own, and further states that the species was recognized by Walckenaer as his argelaszus. If the species that Latreille described in 1818 was different from the one described in 1805 by Walckenaer, as Simon apparently believed, the later name rests upon an error of identification and is invalid under Article 31 of the International Rules of Zoological Nomenclature. Since Latreille expressly states that Walckenaer recognized the species as the one he himself had described, there seems to be little reason to assume that Walckenaer’s descriptions of 1805, 1806, and 1837, and Latreille’s of 1818 do not refer to the same species. From this discussion it is apparent that the genus Sparassus Walck. is available and has as a synonym Fusparas- sus Simon; its type is Sparassus argelasius Walck., which name is to be used for the not uncommon European species now known as Eusparassus argelasvus (Latreille). The genus Olzos, as it was originally described by Walckenaer in 1837 included an extremely heterogeneous assemblage of several gen- era. In 1880 Simon restricted it to the species congeneric with O. spongitarsus (Dufour) which he selected as the type.!° He also indi- cated that Sparassus argelasitus Walckenaer 1805 was the same as 5 Nova acta. Reg. Soc. Sc. Upsaliae 7: 176. 1869-1870. 6 Histoire Naturelle des Aranevdes, facic. 4: fig. 2. 1806. 7 Nouveau Dictionnaire d’ Histoire Naturelle 20: 516. 1818. 8 Histoire Naturelle des Insectes Apteres 1: 584. 1837. ° Histoire Naturelle des Araignees 2: 1020. 1903. 10 Act. Soc. Linn. Bordeaux 34: 297. 1880. Nov. 15, 1937 FOX: NEARCTIC SPIDERS ~ 463 Dufour’s species, yet he retained the later name. Subsequent authors were divided in their usage of the names Olios and Sparassus, some considering Olzos a good genus, while others reasoned that since O. spongitarsis (Dufour), the type of Olios, was asynonym of S. argelasius Walck., the type of Sparassus, then Olios was a synonym of Sparas- sus." However, Simon in 1903 stated that the previous synonymiza- tion of O. spongitarsis (Dufour) with S. argelasius Walck. was entirely gratuitous, as Walckenaer’s original description was too brief to per- mit identification. On this account Olzos is, in the present paper, re- garded as the proper name for the species related to spongitarsus Dufour, while Sparassus is applied to the argelasius Walckenaer group. The following pages are concerned with only the nearctic species of Heteropodidae; three new species and a new genus are described, and keys to the nearctic genera and species are given. The family is repre- sented in the United States by three genera of which two, Tentabunda and Heteropoda, contain but one species, while the third, Olios, com- prises six species. I wish to express my appreciation to the authorities of the United States National Museum for the courtesy shown me while studying the collections in their charge. I am deeply obliged to Miss Elizabeth B. Bryant of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, to Dr. W. J. Gertsch, and Mr. H. K. Wallace of the American Museum of Natural History, and to Professor R. V. Chamberlin of the University of Utah for their generosity in lending material for study. KEY TO THE NEARCTIC GENERA OF SPARASSIDAE 1. Spinnerets set upon a distinct basal segment........... Tentabunda Spinnerets normal, not set upon a distinct basal segment............ 2 2. Anterior median eyes as large as or larger than the anterior lateral. Clypeus much lower than the diameter of an anterior median eye.. Bee ey oe te weet pee a Wis ee (hanes eee Ses hah chet RPL. pola Olios Anterior median eyes smaller than the anterior lateral. Clypeus higher than the diameter of an anterior median eye............ Heteropoda TENTABUNDA, N. gen. A genus in the subfamily Sparianthidinae. Cephalothorax robust, longer than wide. Eyes in two rows, with the anterior row straight or slightly pro- curved, the posterior row very procurved and broader than the anterior. Anterior median eyes slightly larger than the anterior lateral; posterior eyes subequal or with the posterior lateral eyes slightly larger than the posterior median. Median ocular quadrangle wider than long. Clypeus equal in height 11 CAMBRIDGE, F. Biologia Centrali-Americana 2: 122. 1905. 464 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 to at least more than half the diameter of an anterior median eye. Lower cheliceral margin armed with six or seven small denticles, upper margin armed with three or four robust teeth. Anterior tibiae provided with 2-2-1 or 2-2-2 spines below; anterior metatarsi provided with one pair of spines below. Spinnerets six in number, set upon a distinct common basal segment. Genotype.—Pseudosparianthis cubana Banks, 1909, known from Cuba and Florida. Tentabunda cubana (Banks), n. comb. Figs. 5 and 11 Pseudosparianthis cubana Banks. Second Rep. Centr. Exper. Sta. Cuba, p. 165, pl. 45, fig. 4, 1909. Pseudosparianthis cubana Bryant, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoo. Cambridge, 74:192. 1933. Female.—Total length, 10.69 mm. Carapace, 5.45 mm long, 3.86 mm at the widest place, 2.77 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 5.25 mm long, 2.97 mm wide. Carapace uniform reddish brown above without distinct markings, clothed with sparse pubescence. Sides concolorous with the dorsum, lack- ing distinct submarginal stripes. Chelicerae dark brown, much darker than the carapace. Sternum and coxae light yellowish brown, labium and endites reddish with white distal patches. Legs clear light yellow below and reddish above, without annulations. Dorsum of the abdomen with a grayish ground color upon which is a dark pattern consisting of a series of six or seven chev- rons continuing to the spinnerets. Venter much lighter than the sides being light gray with sparse dark punctations. Spinnerets six in number, set upon a distinct common basal segment. Anterior row of eyes slightly procurved, narrower than the very procurved posterior row (17/21). Anterior median eyes slightly closer to each other than to the anterior lateral and somewhat larger than the latter. Eyes of the posterior row subequal and equidistant, separated by more than two diameters. Median ocular quadrangle wider than long (18/15), narrower in front than behind (16/18), the posterior eyes about four-fifths as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to about four-fifths the diameter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 2.07 mm in length, lower cheliceral margin armed with seven small denticles, upper margin armed with four robust teeth. Tibiae I and II with 2-2-1 spines below, metatarsi I and II armed with one pair of spines below. Tibia and patella I, 6.24 mm long (tibia alone, 3.96 mm); tibia and patella IV, 5.25 mm long (tibia alone, 3.47 mm). Epigynum wider than long (25/20), anteriorly provided with a wide atrium from which a distinct median suture extends posteriorly dividing the caudal portion of the epigynal plate into two equal halves. For further details regarding the structure of the epigynum see Fig. 5. Described from a female specimen collected by T. H. Hubbell fourteen miles west of Palm Beach, Florida, October 29, 1934 and in the possession of the American Museum of Natural History. Male.—Total length, 7.00 mm. Carapace, 3.56 mm. long, 3.27 mm at the widest place, 1.68 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 3.56 mm long, 2.48 mm wide. Carapace lighter than in the female, being yellowish rather than reddish and having a sparser pubescence. Chelicerae light yellowish brown, con- colorous with the carapace. Sternum, coxae, labium, and endites whitish without distinct markings. Legs clear, concolorous with the sternum be- low, above yellowish and concolorous with the carapace. Dorsum of the abdomen as in the female, but in general somewhat lighter. Anterior row of eyes slightly procurved, narrower than the very pro Novy. 15; 1937 FOX: NEARCTIC SPIDERS 465 curved posterior row (12/14). Eyes of the anterior row subequidistant with the anterior median slightly larger than the anterior lateral. Eyes of the posterior row subequal and equidistant, separated by about one and one- half diameters. Median ocular quadrangle wider than long (14/12.5), nar- rower in front than behind (12/14), the posterior eyes about four-fifths as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to about four-fifths the diam- eter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 1.19 mm long; lower cheliceral margin armed with seven small denticles, upper margin armed with four robust teeth. Tibiae I and II with 2-2-2 spines below, metatarsi I and II with one pair of spines below, and unlike the female with a basal and sub- median lateral spine on each side. Tibia and patella I, 5.835 mm long (tibia alone, 3.86 mm); tibia and patella IV, 4.75 mm long (tibia alone, 3.27 mm). Tibia of the palpus wider than long (22/15), expanded retrolaterad and more or less triangular in shape, tribranchiate with the tarsus articulated to the prolateral branch. For further details regarding the structure of the palpal organ see Fig. 11. Described from a male specimen collected by M. Broyles at Coronado Beach, Volusia Co., Florida in August, 1935 and in the possession of the American Museum of Natural History. The genus Tentabunda according to the present interpretation includes also the species described as Pseudosparianthis variabilis Cambridge,” known from Mexico, and Pseudosparianthis antiguensis Bryant,? known from the West Indies. The members of Pseudosparianthis are distinct from those of Tentabunda particularly in that the anterior metatarsi are armed with two pairs of spines rather than with one pair. The genus Pseudospari- anthis is not known to occur in the nearctic region. Oxios Walckenaer Ins. apteres, 1: 563, 1837. Genotype: Micrommata spongitarsis Dufour. Cephalothorax robust, not at all or but slightly longer than wide. Eyes in two rows, each of which may be procurved, straight, or less commonly recurved, with the anterior row narrower than the posterior. Eyes of the anterior row subequal or with the anterior median eyes slightly larger than the anterior lateral and closer to the latter than to each other. Eyes of the posterior row subequidistant and subequal or with the posterior median eyes slightly smaller than the posterior lateral. Clypeus much narrower than the diameter of the anterior median eyes. Lower cheliceral margin armed with three or four teeth. Anterior tibae normally armed with 2-2 spines below. KEY TO THE NEARCTIC SPECIES OF OLIOS'* 1. Chelicerae yellowish or reddish brown, not contrasting strongly with the GOSH Oh-bMeseATa PACE mer te Gu aeie WIE a tal! etkhet 5 ee Seta 2 Chelicerae jet black, contrasting strongly with the dorsum of the cara- PACE hn ee ae eS 5 Le SULT a O. fasciculatus he WEAR . O01, a aapa np eins oe ROW ep ha Men. 4 Sia a ae RE RNC Ale te ai JEsA SEE ae Rew Aes ak at ihre cat ee ee) a Ra | SAS a eterna 2 Se We Pho I 5 12 CAMBRIDGE, F. Biol. Centr. Amer. II: 119, pl. VIII, fig. 21. 1900. 3 Bryant, EF. B. Univ. lowa Studies X: 13, pl. I, fg. 4 1923. 14 It has not been possible to place Olios franklinus Walckenaer because of the in- adequate original description 466 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 3. Tibial apophysis divided into two distinct branches which are not longer than the: tibia... es) es ke ee 4 Tibial apophysis not divided into two distinct branches, and as long as the ‘tibiae: Link ao eee O. schistus (Fig. 10) 4. Distal spinose process of the tibia about two and one-half times as long as either of the branches of the tibial apophysis... .O. TS ee Fig. 8 Distal spinose process of the tibia not longer than the branches of the tibial apophysis: 4..2.404 ee eee ee eee O. abnormis (Fig. 2) 5. Epigynal atrium much wider than long...... O. bibranchiatus (Fig. 6) Epigynal atrium as long.as or longer than wide. ........... 2) ee 6. Epigynal atrium much longer than wide...... O. mohavensis (Fig. m Epigynal atrium about:as wide’as long. .¢..... “2s. ... 22). ) eee 7. Anterior border of the epigynal atrium with a large posteriorly ieee lobes: fe Ain Salida ea ee ee ee O. albinus (Fig. 3) Anterior border of the epigynal atrium without such a lobe. .O. schistus (Fig. 7) Olios fasciculatus Simon Figs. 1 and 9 Olios fasciculatus Simon. Act. Soc. Linn. Bordeaux 34: 307. 1880. Olios giganteus Keyserling, Verh. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien 33: 681, pl. X XI, fig. 28, 1883. Olios concolor Keyserling, Verh. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien 33: 682, pl. XXI, fig. 29, 1883. Olios fasciculatus Banks, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 23: 585. 1901. Olios pragmaticus Chamberlin, Proc. California Acad. Sci. 12: 659, fig.102. 1924. Female.—Total length, 19.00 mm. Carapace, 6.93 mm long, 7.43 mm at the widest place, 4.65 mm wide in front. Abdomen 11.78 mm long, 9.00 mm wide. Carapace irregular light reddish brown above, pars cephalica with a median longitudinal light narrow band extending from a short distance an- terior to the thoracic groove to a point midway between the posterior me- dian eyes; pars thoracica provided with a deep groove from which light bands radiate. Sides of the carapace with light submarginal bands. Chelicerae black, contrasting strongly with the carapace. Sternum and coxae light yellowish brown; labium and endites somewhat darker bearing white distal patches. Legs concolorous with the sternum being light yellowish brown without distinct annulations. Dorsum of the abdomen lighter than the cara- pace, grayish with brown streaks and spots, provided with a basal white mark outlined with dark which extends caudad in the form of a dark line reaching to the posterior termination of the abdomen. Venter lighter than the sides with indications of two median parallel dark lines. Anterior row of eyes slightly recurved and narrower than the procurved posterior row (22/27). Eyes of the anterior row subequal, the anterior median eyes closer to the anterior level than to each other, being separated from each other by more than a diameter, from the anterior lateral by two- thirds of a diameter. Eyes of the posterior row subequidistant, separated by more than twice the diameter of a posterior median eye, the posterior median eyes two-thirds as large as the posterior lateral. Median ocular quadrangle slightly wider than long, slightly wider in front than behind, the posterior eyes about two-thirds as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to about two-thirds the diameter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 3.56 mm in length; lower cheliceral margin armed with four Nov. 15, 1937 | FOX: NEARCTIC SPIDERS 467 teeth of which the basal two are small and weak while the distal two are large and robust, upper margin armed with two small teeth, one large and one small. Tibiae I and II with 2-2 spines below. Tibia and patella I, 11.39 mm long (tibia alone, 7.43 mm); tibia and patella IV, 9.41 mm (tibia alone, 6.24 mm). Epigynum very small, about as long as wide with the atrium about as wide in front as behind and provided with an incomplete median septum which extends barely half-way down its length. Side pieces lightly or not at all chitinized. For further details regarding the structure of the epigynum see Fig. 1. Described from a female specimen collected at Oracle, Arizona, July, 1898 by E. A. Schwartz and in the possession of the United States National Museum. Male.—Total length, 12.00 mm. Carapace, 6.44 mm long, 6.04 mm at the widest place, 3.56 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 5.94 mm long, 3.47 mm wide. Dorsum of the carapace somewhat darker than in the female, but with the same markings. Chelicerae dark brown to black. Sternum orange brown lighter than the legs which are dark brown. Dorsum, sides, and venter of the abdomen colored as in the female. Anterior row of eyes slightly recurved or straight, narrower than the procurved posterior row (22/27). Anterior median eyes slightly larger than the anterior lateral, closer to the anterior lateral than to each other being removed from each other by one-half a diameter, from the anterior lateral by one-third of a diameter. Eyes of the posterior row subequidistant, sep- arated by more than twice the diameter of a posterior median eye, the poste- rior median eyes two-thirds as large as the posterior lateral. Median ocular quadrangle about as wide as long, about as wide in front as behind, the posterior eyes two-thirds as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to one-third the diameter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 2.38 mm long; lower cheliceral margin armed with three robust teeth, upper margin armed with two teeth. Tibiae I and II with 2-2 spines below. Tibia and patella I, 11.48 mm long, (tibia alone, 7.92 mm); tibia and patella IV, 9.90 mm long (tibia alone, 7.13 mm). Patella of the palpus longer than wide (11/8), tibia longer than the patella (15/11), armed with a subapical apophysis extending retrolaterad which is longer than the width of the tibia and more or less hook-like distally. The tarsus is wide and provided with an embolus that completes at least five turns. For further details regarding the structure of the palpus see Fig. 9. Described from the holotype of Keyserling’s O. concolor, collected at Punta del Aqua, New Mexico and in the possession of the United States National Museum. Records.—Arizona: Fort Yuma, immature female; Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mountains, June, 1898, male (E. A. Schwartz, collector). Mexico: Sonora, female (H. M. Stanley, Collector); Guanajuato, two females, Sep- tember 1, 1886 (Alfred Duges, Collector); Guaymas, female, (all in the United States National Museum). Utah: Zion Park, 1937, male and female (A. M. Woodbury, Collector) in the Collection of Prof. R. V. Chamberlin. ; St. George, July 6, 1931, several males and females (W. J. Gertsch, Collec- tor) in the American Museum of Natural History. I wish to express my appreciation to Miss Elizabeth B. Bryant of the Museum of Comparative Zoology for comparing specimens of O. fasciculatus Simon with the paratype of O. pragmaticus Chamberlin. o- I ar es : : yp a in gh 1 Fi a igs. 1-11. (See opposite page for explanation.) Nov, 15,1937 FOX: NEARCTIC SPIDERS 469 Olios schistus Chamberlin Figs. 7 and 10 Olios schistus Chamberlin, Pomona College Jour. Ent. and Zoo., 12:10, pl. 4, figs. 2 and 3, 1920 (Advance Reprint in 1919). Female.—Total length, 12.5 mm. Carapace, 4.95 mm long, 4.55 mm at the widest place, 3.17 mm in front. Abdomen, 7.5 mm long, 5.64 mm wide. Cara- pace irregular dark reddish brown above, the pars cephalica noticeably lighter than the pars thoracica; dorsal groove distinct, from it light bands radiate to the sides which are provided with light sub-marginal bands. Cheli- cerae reddish brown more or less concolorous with the pars cephalica. Ster- num orange brown, lighter than the coxae which are dark brown; labium and endites reddish bearing white distal patches. Legs reddish with numer- ous small punctations on all the joints, the tibiae with indications of a nar- row dark annulus basally. Dorsum of the abdomen irregular-reddish brown streaked with light and dark, and in this specimen, without distinct mark- ings. Sides densely provided with dark spots and streaks; venter somewhat lighter, with a broad median dark band extending from the epigynum to the spinnerets. Anterior row of eyes slightly recurved, narrower than the slightly pro- curved posterior row (19/23). Eyes of the anterior row subequal, the ante- rior median eyes closer to the anterior lateral than to each other, being sep- arated from each other by more than a diameter, from the anterior lateral eyes by five-sevenths of a diameter. Eyes of the posterior row subequal and subequidistant, separated from each other by about two and one-half diameters. Median ocular quadrangle about as long as wide, slightly wider behind than in front, the posterior eyes about five-sevenths as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to slightly more than one-half the diameter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 2.08 mm long; lower cheliceral mar- gin armed with four teeth of which the basal two are small and weak, while the distal two are large and robust; upper margin armed with two teeth, one large and one small. Tibiae I and II with 2-2 spines below. Tibia and patella I, 7.23 mm long (tibia alone, 4.74 mm); tibia and patella IV, 5.64 mm long (tibia alone, 3.56 mm). Epigynum consisting of a more or less oval atrium flanked by heavily chitinized side pieces. For further details regarding the structure of the epigynum see Fig. 7. Described from a female specimen collected at San Diego, California and in United States National Museum. A female from San Jacinto is also in that institution. Male.—Total length, 8.10 mm. Carapace, 4.00 mm long, 4.16 mm at the widest place, 2.48 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 4.85 mm long, 3.46 mm wide. Carapace light brown above with distinct reddish punctations. Chelicerae concolorous with the carapace, bearing reddish punctations. Sternum and coxae yellowish brown with minute punctations; labium and endites red- dish with distal white patches. Legs light brown, densely provided with dark punctations, tibiae with an annulus basally. Dorsum of the abdomen Fig. 1.—Olios fasciculatus Simon, epigynum. Fig. 2.—O. abnormis Keyserling, male palpus, ventral view. Fig. 3.—O. albinus, n. sp., epigynum. Fig. 4.—0O. mo- havensis, n. sp., epigynum. Fig. 5.—Tentabunda cubana (Banks), epigynum. Fig. 6. —Olios bibranchiatus, n. sp., epigynum. Fig. 7.—O. schistus Chamberlin, epigynum. Fig. 8.—0O. bibranchiatus, n. sp., male palpus, ventral view. Fig. 9.—O. fasciculatus Simon, male palpus, ventral view. Fig. 10.—0O. schistus Chamberlin, male palpus, lateral view. Fig. 11.—Tentabunda cubana (Banks), male palpus, ventral view. . 470 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 11 gray with dark brown maculations; the distinct design consists of a basal gray lanceolate mark outlined in dark which extends to the posterior termi- nation of the abdomen in the form of an irregular dark band. Sides and ven- ter streaked with reddish maculations. Anterior row of eyes slightly recurved, narrower than the procurved posterior row (32/39). Eyes of the anterior row subequal, the anterior me- dian eyes separated from each other by slightly more than a diameter, from the anterior lateral by about one-third of a diameter. Eyes of the posterior row subequal and equidistant, separated by more than two diameters. Median ocular quadrangle about as long as wide, slightly wider behind than in front, the posterior eyes about two-thirds as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to about one-half the diameter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 1.68 mm long; lower cheliceral margin armed with four teeth of which the basal two are small and weak, while the others are large and robust; upper cheliceral margin armed with two teeth, one small and one large. Tibiae I and II with 2-2 spines below. Tibia and patella I, 7.23 mm long (tibia alone, 5.15 mm); tibia and patella IV, 6.53 mm long (tibia alone, 4.46 mm). Patella of the palpus about as long as wide, tibia more than twice as long as the patella, with a broad distally expanded apophysis which is as long as the joint, and two distal processes of which one is longer than the other. For further details regarding the structure of the palpal organ see Hig e: Described from a male specimen collected at Claremont, California and in the Collection of Prof. R. V. Chamberlin. This species is most closely related to O. peninsulans Banks, known from Baja California, and is distinguished from the latter primarily by the char- acter of the tibial apophysis of the male palpus which is distally truncate and bifid instead of sloping to a point. In general structure and appearance it resembles O. abnormis Keyserling from which it may also be differentiated by the structure of the tibial apophysis. Olios bibranchiatus, n. sp. Figs. 6 and 8 Sparassus minax Banks, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 23:585. 1901. (Not Olios minax (Cambridge)) Male.—Total length, 11.00 mm. Carapace, 5.25 mm long, 4.95 mm at the widest place, 2.97 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 5.45 mm long, 3.96 mm wide. Dorsum of the carapace orange brown with lighter bars and streaks. Clypeus and chelicerae more or less concolorous with the carapace, the claws black- ish. Sternum and coxae clear light brown, without dark markings; labium and endites somewhat darker, bearing white distal patches. Legs reddish brown with minute dark punctations but without annulations. Abdomen irregular brown and gray above, with evidences of dark chevrons posteriorly. Venter and sides lighter than the dorsum, clear yellowish without dark markings. Anterior row of eyes slightly recurved, narrower than the procurved pos- terior row (17/21). Anterior median eyes slightly larger than the anterior lateral, separated from each other by about a diameter, somewhat closer to the anterior lateral than to each other. Eyes of the posterior row subequi- Nov. 15, 1937 FOX: NEARCTIC SPIDERS 471 distant and separated by about twice the diameter of a posterior median eye, the posterior lateral eyes somewhat larger than the posterior median. Median ocular quadrangle about as long as wide, wider behind than in front, the posterior eyes about five-sevenths as large as the anterior. Cly- peus equal in height to about five-sevenths the diameter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 2.18 mm long; lower cheliceral margin armed with four teeth of which the basal is small and weak while the distal three are large and robust; upper margin armed with two teeth, one large and one weak. Tibiae I and II with 2-2 spines below. Tibia and patella I, 10.30 mm long (tibia alone, 7.33 mm); tibia and patella IV, 8.81 mm long (tibia alone, 6.34 mm). Patella of the palpus longer than wide, tibia slightly longer than the patella; tibial apophysis bibranchiate, the anterior branch with a conspicu- ous node distally, from the base of this branch a pointed process as long as the tibia itself extends anteriorly. For further details regarding the structure of the palpus see Fig. 8. Female.—Total length, 14.85 mm. Carapace, 6.44 mm long, 5.74 mm at the widest place, 3.66 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 8.22 mm long, 5.00 mm wide. Carapace yellowish brown above without dark markings, clothed with a white pubescence. Clypeus and eye region concolorous with the dor- sum; chelicerae dark brown, the claws blackish. Sternum and coxae yellow- ish brown without dark markings; labium and endites darker, with white distal patches. Legs concolorous with the dorsum of the carapace being clear light yellowish brown without annulations. Abdomen light brown, with indications of a basal dark median lanceolate mark; venter lighter than the dorsum, unmarked. Anterior row of eyes recurved, narrower than the procurved posterior row (21/26). Eyes of the anterior row subequal, the anterior median eyes closer to the anterior lateral than to each other, being separated from each other by slightly more than a diameter, from the anterior lateral by five- eighths of a diameter. Eyes of the posterior row subequidistant, separated from each other by about twice the diameter of a posterior median eye, the posterior lateral eyes slightly larger than the posterior median. Median ocular area wider than long (23/18), somewhat wider behind than in front, the posterior eyes about five-eighths as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to five-eighths the diameter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 3.46 mm long; lower margin armed with four teeth, of which the basal is small while the distal three are large, upper margin armed with two teeth of which one is large and the other small. Tibiae I and II with 2-2 spines below. Tibia and patella I, 9.00 mm long (tibia alone, 5.94 mm); tibia and patella IV, 7.72 mm long (tibia alone, 5.25 mm). The epigynum is subject to some variation; in some cases a distinct median inverse T-shaped septum is present (as in the allotype, Fig. 6), while in others the longitudinal bar of the septum is indistinct or lacking. Para- typic material in the American Museum of Natural History exhibits this difference, but the transverse bar of the septum is the same in each case. Type locality—Arizona: Male holotype from Madera Canyon, Santa Rita Mountains, May, 1898 (E. A. Schwartz, Collector), in the United States National Museum (U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1274). Female allotype from Santa Fe, New Mexico, also in the United States National Museum. Two male paratypes and three female paratypes from Oro Blanco Mts., 12 miles from Nogales, Arizona, July, 1937, in the American Museum of Natural History. 472 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 Olios abnormis Keyserling Fig. 2 Olios abnormis Keyserling, Verh. Zool. Bot. Ges. Wien 33: 679, Pl. XXI, Eig Zi soe: Male.—Total length, 8.10 mm. Carapace, 4.36 mm long, 3.96 mm at the widest place, 2.28 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 3.96 mm long, 2.87 mm wide. Carapace light reddish brown above, with streaks of dark brown on the pars cephalica, sides without submarginal light bands. Clypeus, eye region, and chelicerae concolorous with the dorsum. Sternum yellowish, with minute reddish punctations; coxae and endites clear yellowish brown, without red- dish markings, labium somewhat darker. Legs reddish brown with numerous minute punctations; tibia with a dark annulus at their proximal ends. Ab- domen yellowish brown, provided with a distinct median design which con- sists of a basal lanceolate white mark outlined with reddish brown which extends to the posterior termination of the abdomen in the form of an irregu- lar dark brown line. Sides and venter densely provided with reddish macula- tions. Anterior and posterior eye rows slightly procurved, the former shorter than the latter (85/42). Anterior median eyes separated from each other by about a diameter, from the anterior lateral by about three-fifths of a diame- ter and larger than the latter (6/5). Eyes of the posterior row subequal and equidistant separated from each other by about two diameters. Median ocular quadrangle wider than long (17/15), about as wide in front as be- hind; the posterior eyes about five-sevenths as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to about three-sevenths the diameter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 1.68 mm long; lower cheliceral margin armed with four teeth of which the distal three are large and the basal is weak; upper margin armed with two teeth one large and the other small. Tibia I and II with 2-2 spines below. Tibia and patella I, 6.43 mm long (tibia alone, 4.36 mm); tibia and patella IV lacking in the specimen. Patella of the palpus longer than wide (15/12), tibia about twice as long as the patella, with a thick retrolateral bibranchiate apophysis, about as long as the width of the joint, and two distal processes, one of which is spinose while the other is distinctly hook-like. For further details regarding the structure of the palpus see Fig. 2. Described from a male specimen collected at Kits Peak, Rincon, Babo- quivari Mountains, Arizona, July 31—Aug. 3, 1916, by F. E. Lutz and in the Collection of the American Museum of Natural History. A single male in poor condition from Los Angeles, California, is in the United States National Museum. Olios mohavensis, n. sp. Fig. 4 Female.—Total length, 16.80 mm. Carapace, 6.83 mm long, 6.04 mm at the widest place, 4.06 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 9.91 mm long, 5.60 mm wide. Dorsum of the carapace muddy brown, the pars cephalica much lighter than the pars thoracica and provided anteriorly with two parallel lines which extend forward between the posterior median eyes. Clypeus and chelicerae concolorous with the pars cephalica, the claws blackish. Sternum and coxae light yellowish brown; labium and endites somewhat darker, bearing white distal patches. Legs uniform light yellowish brown without annulations. Abdomen orange brown above, provided with a dark basal lanceolate mark from whose sides project several dark lines; this mark is flanked. on each side by a submedian and a subterminal punctation. Venter lighter than the sides, provided with two short dark lines. Nov. 15, 1937 FOX: NEARCTIC SPIDERS 473 Anterior and posterior rows of eyes slightly procurved, the former nar- rower than the latter (22/27). Eyes of the anterior row subequal, the anterior median eyes closer to the anterior lateral than to each other, being separated from each other by more than a diameter, from the anterior lateral by five- eighths of a diameter. Eyes of the posterior row subequidistant, separated by more than two times the diameter of a posterior median eye, the posterior lateral eyes somewhat larger than the posterior median. Median ocular quad- rangle about as wide as long, as wide in front as behind; the posterior eyes about two-thirds as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to about five-eighths the diameter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 3.00 mm long; lower cheliceral margin armed with four teeth of which the basal is small and weak while the distal three are large and robust, upper margin armed with two teeth, one large and one small. Tibiae I and II with 2-2 spines below. Tibia and patella I, 10.49 mm long (tibia alone, 7.52 mm); tibia and patella IV, 9.41 mm long (tibia alone, 6.73 mm). Epigynum about as long as wide, consisting of a deep chitinized atrium flanked by heavy side pieces. For further details regarding the structure of the epigynum see Fig. 4. Type locality —California: Female holotype from Mohave Desert (no further data) in the United States National Museum (U.S.N.M. Cat. No. 1273). Olios albinus, n. sp. Fig. 3 Female.—Total length, 12.87 mm. Carapace, 4.95 mm long, 4.65 mm at the widest place, 3.17 mm wide in front. Abdomen, 7.43 mm. long, 5.94 mm wide. Dorsum of the carapace whitish, the pars cephalica outlined with minute punctations. Eye region, clypeus, and chelicerae tinged with orange, the claws of the chelicerae blackish. Sternum and coxae white, labium and en- dites light brown with whitish distal patches. Legs uniform white below, above whitish with sparse punctations except for the metatarsi and tarsi which are brown contrasting with the other joints. Dorsum of the abdomen whitish tinged with brown, a basal lanceolate mark is outlined by brown spots and continues posteriorly in the form of an irregular median longitudi- nal. band. Venter lighter than the dorsum and sides, being white and un- marked. Anterior row of eyes straight, narrower than the slightly procurved pos- terior row (19/23). Anterior median eyes closer to the anterior lateral than to each other, separated from each other by about a diameter, from the anterior lateral eyes by about five-sevenths of a diameter and larger than the latter. Eyes of the posterior row subequal and equidistant, separated by about two diameters. Median ocular quadrangle wider than long (20/17), slightly wider behind than in front, the posterior eyes about five-sevenths as large as the anterior. Clypeus equal in height to about one-half the diame- ter of an anterior median eye. Chelicerae, 2.18 mm long; lower cheliceral margin armed with three teeth, upper margin armed with two. Tibiae I armed with 2-2 spines below; spination of the animal’s left tibia II irregular, apparently involving 2-1r-2-Ir spines below, spination of the right tibia normal, involving 2-2 spines below. Tibia and patella I, 7.13 mm long (tibia alone, 4.65 mm); tibia and patella IV, 5.45 mm long (tibia alone, 3.66 mm). Epigynal area small, the atrium more or less heart shaped, provided with a lobe which extends caudally from the anterior border and divides the an- terior three-fourths of the atrium into two parts. For further details regard- ing the structure of the epigynum see Fig. 3. 474 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 Type localityi—Arizona: Female holotype from Phoenix, May, 1935, in the Collection of Prof. R. V. Chamerlin. HETEROPODA Latreille Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat., XXIV: 135. 1804. Genotype: Aranea venatoria Linnaeus. Cephalothorax about as wide as long or slightly longer than wide. Eyes in two rows with the anterior row straight or procurved and narrower than the straight or slightly recurved posterior row. Anterior median eyes smaller than the anterior lateral and usually closer to the latter than to each other. Posterior median eyes usually smaller than the posterior lateral. Clypeus higher than the diameter of an anterior lateral eye. Lower cheliceral margin armed with four teeth, upper margin armed with two or three teeth. Anterior tibiae armed with 2-2-2-2 spines below. Heteropoda venatoria (Linn.) Aranea venatoria Linnaeus, Syst. Nat. 12th Ed. p. 1035, 1767. This often-described cosmopolitan tropical species has long been known to occur in our Southwestern states and in Florida. Inasmuch as it has been considered by many authors and good descriptions and figures are generally available, it is not redescribed at this time. ENTOMOLOGY.—The cinerosus group of the genus Laevicephalus (Homoptera: Cicadellidae).1 P. W. Oman, Bureau of Entomol- ogy and Plant Quarantine. The six species treated in this paper form a remarkably homo- geneous group on the basis of habitus, coloration, and certain struc- tural details of the genitalia, and by these characters may be dis- tinguished from other members of the genus Laevicephalus. The ground color of the head is pale cinereous to pale, sordid yellow; never green or greenish tinged. The crown has a pair of oblique fus- cous or brown dashes at the apex and two pairs of similarly colored, irregularly quadrate spots on the disk. The facial sclerites are usually fuscous, the clypeus, at least laterally, is marked with transverse bars of brown or fuscous, and the thorax and abdomen are variously marked with fuscous. The male valve is large and triangular, the plates broad and rather short and furnished laterally with a few spine-like setae. The distal portion of the style is definitely foot-shaped in outline and serrate on the posterior margin. The base of the aedeagus is furnished with a more or less flaring, submembranous portion for muscular attach- 46 Excellent figures may be found in F. Cambridge’s Biologia Centrali-Americana, II: 120, pl. VIII, figs. 22a—c, 23a-f. 1905. For the synonymy of this species see also Petrunkevitch’s catalogue in Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 29: 488. 1911. 1 Received August 12, 1937. Nov. 15, 1937 OMAN: LAEVICEPHALUS A475 ment. The pygofers of both sexes are densely set with numerous stout setae and the seventh sternite of the female has the posterior margin either incised or emarginate and bordered with fuscous or black medially. With the exception of specimens from southern Utah and south central Washington, all the available distribution records for members of the cinerosus group are from California. KEY TO THE SPECIES OF THE CINEROSUS GROUP 1 Posterior margin of seventh sternite of female broadly emarginate; male preces buntly “rounded distally. 5.27... ea incongruus, N.sp. Posterior margin of seventh sternite of female not broadly emarginate; Mate PI hess POUNCE CISA er eres ro ote, fe APS MONO Yl . 2 2(1) A rather short and robust species, fore wings not extending beyond tip Gime ORV er ie Pe Mee Ee rin eS aa A OS es, pacificus, D.sp. Elongate and slender species, fore wings extending beyond tip of 2 NEU RDSSVERD S02 Ce Wg eG gh EG CP Nr SE ae AR ae ee EA Rae = 3(2) Male plates not contiguous for entire length, the tips diverging. Pos- terior margin of seventh sternite of female with two pairs of dentate projections, the inner pair nearly as large as the outer pair.......... Re eit ee ar Curate RT Nh aM eee ee Se! Sty 3 cinerosus (Van D.) Male plates contiguous for entire length. Posterior margin of seventh sternite of female either not quadridentate or, if so, with inner pair of BIpleciiens much smaller than.outer pair.) .: 0.2... ee at 4 4(3) Processes of aedeagus reduced to short, dentate projections. Posterior margin of seventh sternite of female triangularly produced and nar- RONG ABEISCOn Cpe tau cite wey (eee etree ne Oe joaquinus, N.sp. Processes of aedeagus longer, not dentate. Posterior margin of seventh SPcemite OL fcniale NOt Garrowly Weised 4.0. 2 Pesbe. oases os les 5 5(4) Aedeagus with two pairs of pointed processes distally. Inner pair of dentate projections on posterior margin of seventh sternite of female TEL UUTO ET CEN acne at ry ME RO ek ge dO A Pe ae ef angelus, n.sp. Aedeagus with one pair of pointed processes distally. Inner pair of dentate projections on posterior margin of seventh sternite of female MTEL IIRC E Fe sors tis) Oe Das aif RRR se siskiyou, n.sp. Laevicephalus incongruus, n. sp. igs. to Larger and paler than cinerosus, with the male plates blunt and the pos- terior margin of the seventh sternite of the female broadly emarginate. Length of male 4—-4.5 mm, of female 4.5-4.9 mm. Ground color sordid yellowish white, oblique dashes on anterior margin of crown fuscous, marks on disk of crown pale brown, fuscous borders of cells of fore wing faint or absent, fore wings subhyaline. Seventh sternite of female rather short, the median one-half of the pos- terior margin emarginate about one-third the distance to base. Male valve unusually large; plates short and blunt, not contiguous on median line. Distal portion of aedeagus slender and strongly decurved, apex bifurcate. Basal portion of aedeagus unusually large and flaring. Style slender. Holotype male, allotype female, and 85 paratypes, including specimens of both sexes, collected above Mint Canyon, Calif. June 8, 1935, by the writer 476 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 11 3S-CINEROSUS /-INCONGRUUS JIA Ch ww) iF 5-sisxivou 4-ANGELUS 4A 5A 6-JOAQUINUS 8-PACIFICUS 9- 7-INCONGRUUS CINEROSUS 12-JOAQUINUS jSoncoNenone. /4-CINEROSUS IS-PACIFICUS Fig. 1.—Laevicephalus incongruus, dorsal view of internal genital structures of male; 1A, lateral view of aedeagus. Fig. 2.—L. pacificus, dorsal view of internal geni- tal structures of male; 2A, lateral view of aedeagus. Fig. 3.—L. cinerosus, dorsal view of internal genital structures of male; 3A, lateral view of aedeagus. Fig. 4.—L. an- gelus, dorsal view of internal genital structures of male; 4A, lateral view of aedeagus. Fig. 5.—L. siskiyou, dorsal view of internal genital structures of male; 5A, lateral view of aedeagus. Fig. 6.—L. joaquinus, dorsal view of internal genital structures of male; Nov. 15, 1937 OMAN: LAEVICEPHALUS A77 and Mrs. Oman. Types in the collection of the United States National Museum (No. 52203). In addition to the type series, there are specimens at hand from Mint Canyon, Calif. (Oman), and Mt. Diablo, Calif. (Oman). Laevicephalus cinerosus (Van Duzee) Figs. 3, 9, 14 Deltocephalus cinerosus Van Duzee, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 19: 305, 1892. Length 3.5-4 mm. Ground color pale, sordid yellow; markings varying from pale brown to fuscous. Marks on disk of crown faint, longitudinal lines on pronotum indistinct. Cells of fore wing bordered with fuscous, veins pale. Fore wings extending beyond tip of abdomen. Seventh sternite of female short laterally, posterior margin with a small median emargination and on each side of this a pair of short, angled, den- tate projections. Male plates rather short, diverging posteriorly, tips pointed. Aedeagus rather stout, with three pairs of pointed projections arising from near tip and extending basad and slightly outward as follows: An elongate, slender pair laterally, a short, slender pair latero-ventrally, and a short pair latero-dorsally. Style relatively slender. Originally described from 1 male and 4 females collected in California by Coquillett. The male of this series, which is in the collection of Iowa State College, Ames, Iowa, is here designated lectotype. I am indebted to Mr. L. D. Tuthill for drawings of the aedeagus of this specimen. Material from the following California localities has been examined: Los Angeles County (Coquillett), Warner Springs (Oman), Cajon Pass (Oman), Del Mar (Oman), Newton (Oman), and Perris (Oman). Two females from southern Utah are referred here also. Laevicephalus pacificus, n. sp. Figs, 228, 15 Smaller and more robust than cznerosus, with the male plates contiguous for their entire length and the aedeagus with only two pairs of processes. Length of male 3-3.25 mm, of female 3.5-3.75 mm. Ground color as in cinerosus, oblique dashes at apex of crown short, markings on disk of crown pale brown. Fore wings of male equalling ab- domen in length, those of female shorter than abdomen, cells marked with fuscous especially around edges. Hind wings of both sexes much shortened. Posterior margin of seventh sternite of female with a small median emargi- nation, and a pair of blunt, dentate projections on each side of this. Male plates rather broad, contiguous on median line, and tapering abruptly to pointed apices. Aedeagus rather stout, with two pairs of pointed processes as follows: A slender pair arising laterally on shaft before apex and extending laterad and basad, and a stout pair arising from a latero-ventral position near the apex and extending ventrad, basad, and slightly laterad. Style slender. Holotype male, allotype female, and 17 male and 19 female paratypes 6A, lateral view of aedeagus. Fig. 7—L. incongruus, seventh sternite of female. Fig. 8.—L. pacificus, seventh sternite of female. Fig. 9.—L. cinerosus, abe sternite of female. Fig. 10.—L. siskiyou, seventh sternite of female. Fig. 11.—L. angelus, seventh sternite of female. Fig. 12.—L. joaquinus, seventh sternite of female. Fig. 13.—L. incongruus, external genitalia of male. Fig. 14.—L. cinerosus, external geni- talia of male. Fig. 15.—L. pacificus, external genitalia of male. 478 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 from Montara, Calif., June 13, 1935, collected by the writer and Mrs. Oman. Types in collection of the United States National Museum (No. 52204). In addition to the type series there are specimens at hand from San Fran- cisco, Calif. (Oman). Laevicephalus siskiyou, n. sp. Figs. 5, 10 Related to pacificus by the shape of the male plates, but less robust; similar to cinerosus in general form; markings darker than in either of those species. Length 3.6—4.2 mm. Ground color as in cinerosus. Oblique fuscous dashes at apex of crown fused posteriorly with the anterior pair of marks on disk of crown. Posterior pair of marks on crown brown. Longitudinal stripes on pronotum distinct. Fore wings subhyaline, veins whitish cinereous, cells bordered with brown or fuscous. Seventh sternite of female similar to that of cinerosus, but with median emargination smaller and inner pair of dentate projections shorter. Male plates as in paczficus, but shorter and more sharply pointed. Aedeagus relatively slender and elongate, with a single pair of short, stout, pointed processes extending basad and laterad from near the tip. Style rather broad, outer point very blunt. Holotype male, allotype female, and 2 male and 36 female paratypes from Mt. Shasta City, Calif., June 29, 1935, collected by the writer and Mrs. Oman. Also 3 male and 8 female paratypes from south of Mt. Shasta City, same date and collectors. Types in collection of the United States National Museum (No. 52205). In addition to the type series there are specimens at hand from the following localities in Siskiyou County, Calif.: north of Weed (Oman), Bray (Oman), and Dunsmuir (Oman). Specimens of this species are also at hand from Cliffdell, Wash. (Oman), and Cottonwood Flats, Mt. Ranier, Wash. (Oman). Laevicephalus angelus, n. sp. Figs. 4, 11 Superficially identical with siskiyou, but with the dentate projections of the seventh sternite of the female even shorter and the aedeagus with two pairs of pointed processes. Length 3.75—4.25 mm. Color as in siskiyowu but with marks on crown either fused or divided and usually not so dark as in that species. Seventh sternite of female as in cinerosus but with median emargination and dentate projections of posterior margin even smaller than in szskiyou. Male plates as in siskzyou. Aedeagus shorter than that of s¢skiyou and with two pairs of rather short, curved processes arising from near the tip, one pair extending dorsad, lat- erad, and slightly basad, the other pair extending laterad and basad and slightly ventrad. Style relatively slender, outer point blunt. Holotype male, allotype female, and 10 male and 37 female paratypes from above Mint Canyon, Calif., June 8, 1935, collected by the writer and Mrs. Oman. Also 3 male and 11 female paratypes from Mint Canyon, June 7, 1935, same collectors. Types in collection of the United States National Museum (No. 52206). Laevicephalus joaquinus, n. sp. Figs. 6, 12 Larger, paler, and with less definite markings than cinerosus, and with the posterior margin of the seventh sternite of female produced medially. Length of male 4 mm, of female 4.5 mm. Nov. 15, 1937 BALL: NEW MEMBRACIDAE 479 Ground color pale creamy white, oblique, dashes at apex of crown short, markings on disk of crown pale brown. Fore wing subhyaline brown; veins white, occasionally bordered with brown or fuscous. Seventh sternite of female very short laterally, postero-lateral portions somewhat membranous, posterior margin produced medially and with a very narrow median incision which extends nearly half way to base of seg- ment. Male plates rather broad and short, similar to those of pacificus but slightly broader near tips. Pygofer longer than in paczficus. Aedeagus rather slender, bearing near the tip two pairs of short, tooth- like projections in the dorso-lateral and ventro-lateral positions. Style broad. Holotype male, allotype female, and 1 male and 6 female paratypes from Califa, Calif., June 12, 1935, collected by the writer and Mrs. Oman. Types in collection of the United States National Museum (No. 52207). ENTOMOLOGY.—Some new North American Membracidae E. D. Batu, University of Arizona. The writer is planning a revision of the tribe Ceresini along similar lines to that of his Telamoninae and finds as usual that a number of new species must be characterized before it can be completed. The occasion is taken to describe a number of new forms in the different groups. Ceresa ancora Ball, n. sp. Larger than bubalus with much longer, heavier and strongly recurved horns. The metapodium convex in both diameters. Length 10 mm, width across horns 7-8 mm. Metapodium widening more rapidly than in bubalus to the stout recurved horns that are about twice as long as those in that species, as seen from above the metapodium across the horns is straight in bubalus but strongly convex in this species. As soon from the side, the pronotum is arched about as in buba- lus, not nearly as strongly as in testacea. Female segment with a deep triangu- lar notch reaching to the base. Male genitalia of the testacea pattern with the genital box usually open, the plates vertical, the styles flat tapering to acute black tips and are incurved and pressed against the plates. The oedaegus long, spatulate, with an acute apex and a pair of backward point- ing spines at the base. In testacea, the styles are much narrower and more curved, the oedaegus is spoonshaped and the basal spines curve out. Color green with a submarginal light line on pronotum which broadens and runs up under the horns. The posterior face of the horn and the tip of pronotum brown. Holotype & and a paratype male Patagonia, Oct. 5, 1935, allotype 9 and two paratype females Atascasa Mt., Sept. 29, 1935, four paratypes Nogales and four Patagonia taken from the 7th of September till the 20th of October. All taken along the Mexican border in Arizona by the writer. Ceresa infantilis Ball, n. sp. Smaller than vitulus or constans, the smallest species known. With the metapodium strongly convex, shining, and the horns reduced to mere points, scarcely longer than the humerals. Length 6 mm, width 2 mm. 1 Received September 20, 1937. 480 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 11 Metapodium short, rapidly expanding to the blunt horns, as seen from the side the pronotum slopes to the middle, with a stronger arch than in vitulus. The disc of the metapodium is convex, the lateral margins thick and rounding, resembling a Stictocephala but with the small but definite horns of a Ceresa. Female segment rather long with a deep triangular notch reaching nearly to the base. Male plates short, stout, triangular, held almost vertical by the broad stout styles that are black-tipped and obliquely truncate, behind them an anchor-like structure appears, and then the long oedaegus resembling the head of a needle. Color (green in life) fading to tawny, the nervures darkening toward the tip. A white margin to the apical part of the pronotum and a white arch on each side starting behind the horn and bordering the curve of the pronotum till it joins the lateral white line. Holotype 2 and three paratypes labeled Acapulco, Mex., Aug. 24, 1936, taken at kilometer post 299, allotype o& and four paratypes taken at kilo- meter post 426, three at post 382 Aug. 29, 1936; all taken on the Mexico City to Acapulco Road by Ball and Stone, and five paratypes labeled Guacimo, Costa Rica, June 16, 1903 J.C.C. This species is described at this time to call attention to the fact that there are two widely different types of male genitalia found in the material that has been included under vitulus Fab. This is the oldest (1775) described species and one of the smallest, and as now determined has the widest dis- tribution (from the sand hills of Dakota and Nebraska through both Mexico and the West Indies to most of South America). Goding lists ten synonyms and there are probably others. No one has mentioned the male genitalia in descriptions (although Fowler mentions as a generic character “The elon- gate styles of the male.’’ He must have seen them in vitulus, his first species and assumed that they were generic), but the widely distributed tropical and subtropical species that fits the size, shape of horns and the white arch on the sides of the pronotum of vitulus has the plates compressed and the styles extending as long, double curved horn-like appendages, two or three times their length beyond them, while in infantilis the styles are flat, swordlike and stand at right angles to the pygofers on either side of the plates. There is a wide variation in horn length in both groups but as far as observed the genital characters are constant. Stictocephala fulgida Ball, n. sp. Resembling collina Van D. in the smooth, rounding pronotum, still broader and more shining. Pale green with milk-white mottling and a milky ‘“Y”’ on the dorsum. Length 6-7 mm, width 3 mm. Metapodium nearly one-half broader than in collina and much lower, as low as in gillettez but with the metapodium smoother than in collina instead of much rougher and more deeply pitted as in gilletter. Female segment very short with a broad rectangular notch. Male plates broad at base, slightly inflated before the two tall, curved brown-tipped pygofer spines, then con- stricted and almost parallel to the broad slightly divaricate tips. Color pale greenish and milky, polished, the pronotum with milky spots and a definite ‘‘Y’’ running from the shoulders nearly to the apex. The male with the last abdominal segment usually black. Nov. 15, 19387 BALL: NEW MEMBRACIDAE 481 Holotype o allotype 9 and five paratypes St. Johns, Arizona, Aug. 27, 1934 seven paratypes Granite Dells, Oct. 6, 1929, and two Huachuca Mts., June 15, 1930, all taken in the mountains of Arizona by the writer. Stictolobus juniperinus Ball, n. sp. Resembling trilineatus Funk, smaller, narrower with the three white lines replaced by five broken lines in front and three pair of white flecks poste- riorly. Pale green, lined and mottled with white. Length 6 mm, width 2 mm. Metapodium low, overhanging the face instead of vertical as in trilineata, pronotum slightly sinuate anteriorly, then nearly straight to the slightly depressed apex, transversely rounding instead of laterally compressed. Elytra with three discoid cells as in subulata, the apical cell large, triangular, with the petiole usually shorter than the cell instead of longer as in trilineata. Female segment long, deeply, acutely notched. Male plates small constricted and depressed between immense flat black-tipped erect pygofer spines, that are narrowed to blunt points and expose a dark anchor-like structure and a long needle-like oedaegus. Holotype o& allotype 2 and 10 paratypes, Patagonia, Sept. 20, 1930, and eight paratypes Tucson Oct. 20, 1929, all taken in the mountains of Arizona by the writer. This species is strikingly distinct in its color pattern and unique male genitalia. Atymna reticulata Ball, n. sp. Resembling szmplex Van D. much smaller with a lower crest, size of querci, nearly, but with a very different male. Pale green, unmarked except for a row of dots along crest. The elytra with a number of extra cells in the apical part. Length 2 6mm; o' 5mm. Metapodium much less elevated than in szemplex, very similar to querct but with the apex much more produced. The clypeus produced into an acute point. Venation typical; the apical cell large, almost oval, an irregu- lar number of supernumerary cells in the apical part. Color pale green, the male slightly tawny, a row of fine dots along the crest. Holotype 2 and paratype female Santa Rita Mountains, July 13, 1930, allotype & Santa Rita Mountains, July 5, 1933, and a paratype female Tucson, Sept. 29, 1929. All taken in the mountains of Arizona by the writer. The acute clypeus will at once separate this from any other described species. Xantholobus arenatus Ball, n. sp. Resembling coconinus Ball in size and general form of the rounding crest, much narrower and less inflated posteriorly and with a ‘“‘ten pin’’ color pattern like nigrocincta. Female gray with a double saddle. Male tawny gray with a white margined red “‘ten pin.”’ Length 2 4.8mm; o 4.5 mm. Pronotum from the side a uniform crescent in the female, low and but slightly curved back of the humerals in the male. In the female tectiform with a double inflation posteriorly and a single median one. The inflations tan colored with white borders on a gray background. Male tawny with white irrorations, the face and below including the femora black. A tawny red, white-bordered ten pin resting on the two humps with a white dot be- tween. Elytra subhyaline, the nervures broad, dark, the appendix smoky. Holotype 2 one paratype female allotype o and six paratype males to- gether with the nymphs taken at Leverton, Texas, May 5, 1934, by the 482 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 writer. The triangular shape and striking pattern make this species an easy one to recognize. BrYANTOPSIS Ball, n. gen. A typical Polyglyptint resembling Publilia Stal., except that there is a definite anterior horn especially marked in the female, superficially re- sembling Metheisa Fowl, especially in the shape and length of the horn in the male, but differing radically in venation which has warranted Goding in placing this latter genus in the Smilinz. As seen from the side with an anterior horn extending obliquely upwards as in Phyla for one-third the body length in the female the horn compressed at apex, cut off obliquely and occasionally expanded. There are three lateral carinae. The pronotum covers most of the elytra, is acutely tectiform with four or five lateral carinae, the inner one with branches to the highest part of crest. The face is slightly longer than in Publilia, the venation of the elytra similar. Type of the genus Bryantopsis ensiger, n.sp. Named in honor of O. W. Bryant, whose careful and painstaking observations have brought to light this as well as many other rare forms. Bryantopsis ensiger Ball, n. sp. Resembling Polyglyptoides cornigerus Stal in general size and appearance, but with a much broader horn in the female and different venation which allies it with Publilia. Resembling Publilia modesta in body shape and vena- tion, larger with a long flattened horn in the female and a shorter pointed one in the male. Length with horn 2 7mm; o% 6mm. Female with the dorsal line in profile a uniform arch slightly higher than in P. modesta. The horn extending upward and forward at an angle of 45° from the line of the costa, strongly compressed, the apex acute and cut off horizontally. The margins are parallel or it is slightly widened at apex. The male horn is about half as long as the female, compressed, but triangular in profile. There are three lateral carinae on the horn and about five on the sides of the pronotum. Color light brown, the males a little darker, a narrow oblique white band before the apex of pronotum. The tip of horn darker, the dorsal carina broadly light with dark interruptions, the lateral carinae are often light with dark interruptions giving a grizzled appearance. Holotype @ allotype & and 9 pairs of paratypes taken by O. W. Bryant in White House Canyon, Santa Rita Mountains, Arizona, Sept. 25, 1936. Var. humerosus Ball, n. var. Form and size of the species except that there are large elongated cres- centiform ivory or pale yellow areas extending from the humeri half way back on each side. In the male, only the crescentiform margin appears. Holotype 9 Huachuca Mountains, July 29, 1935, taken by the writer and allotype © and 6 paratypes taken with the species Sept. 25 and Oct. 5, 1936 by O. W. Bryant. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 1105TH MEETING The 1105th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, October 10, 1936, President SILSBEE presiding. The program consisted of an invited paper by Bruno LANGz of the Kaiser Wilhelm Institute, Berlin-Dahlem, and informal communications by Messrs. Brice and W. J. Humpureys. These were discussed by Messrs. KRacEK, McNisu, Mouuer, Brice, and others. Bruno Lanes: The theory and application of photo-electric cells —The first part dealt briefly with the photo-electric cell and its physical properties. Tracing photo-electric experiments to Hallwachs, who in 1888 demonstrated the emission of electrons from certain metals when exposed to light, the alkali cells and their limitations were described. The new photo-elements, _the development of which was begun in 1884 by Fritts in New York, produce considerably greater currents without booster circuits. In describing the self-generating photo elements in some detail, especial reference was made to their physical and chemical properties by means of actual demonstrations. The second part dealt with the use of photo-electric cells for radiation measurements, particularly light meters, in conjunction with various filters. With the Multiflex Galvanometer a sensitivity up to 1/100th foot candle per scale division is obtainable. This outfit is of great value in micrometric measurements for microscopes with slit ocular and ocular photo-cell. In describing the recording light meters, it was pointed out that the Multiflex Galvanometer may also be fitted with a photographic recording device to accurately determine the duration of light intensities. A “Sun Motor” the armature of which was rotated by a current generated in a small photo- electric cell, the size of a pocket watch, was demonstrated. It was pointed out that photo-electric measurements can also be made of ultraviolet and x-ray radiation. The third part dealt with photo-electric elements in optical instruments, particularly in replacing the human eye for accurate measurements of luminosities. The ocular photo-cell on standard microscopes used in evaluat- ing line spectra as well as micro specimens, x-ray films and sound film strips was demonstrated. The fourth part dealt with special apparatus for testing the permeability of filters. The photo-electric reflexion meter for the rapid and convenient determination of absolute values was demonstrated in detail. Another form, known as the gloss meter, is finding applications in many major industries. A colorimeter for turbidity measurements, that will duplicate readings on the same substance, regardless of time elapsed between readings, and un- affected by the visual acuity of the observer, was described. In addition to fluids, solid and powdered substances can be measured, and filters may be employed. It is also suitable for pH measurements. Its application in the determination of iron, manganese, titanium, phosphorous, silicic acid and arsenic, as well as of mercury, of sulphatic ions, of methylene blue, chinolin red, and phenol, aluminum, chlorophyll and vitamin, was stressed, and its industrial applications for the control of signals and switching mechanisms, for water works turbidity control, and smoke alarms aboard ocean liners and 484 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 for electric power house generators were discussed. A new type of coherer relay as light barrier and as twilight switch was demonstrated. It was pointed out that invisible rays may be employed for the protection of homes, banks and vaults, introducing a new factor of safety. (Author’s Abstract.) In an informal communication, Mr. Brice described and demonstrated a photo-electric apparatus built by the American Instrument Company for the Department of Agriculture, for the purpose of measuring the colors of sugar, resins, etc. In a second informal communication Mr. Humphreys, under the title ‘“Tuckerman vindicated” exhibited a slide of an old print showing the scene after a “‘ball of lightning’’ had fallen into a barnyard, and by thus presenting photographic evidence, claimed to have demonstrated the truth of a story attributed to Mr. Tuckerman that such an event had occurred. 1106TH MEETING The 1106th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, October 24, 1936, President SILSBEE presiding. The program consisted of an invited paper by Karu F. Herzrep of the Catholic University of America entitled: Recent investigations on the liquid state. Discussed by Messrs. Gipson, KRAcEK, FRANKLAND, HAWKESWORTH, HumpuHreyYs, WHITE, and BRICKWEDDE. 1107TH MEETING The 1107th meeting of the Society was held in the Cosmos Club Audi- torium, November 7, 1936, Vice-President GIBSON presiding. Program: R. L. Sanrorp: Magnetic testing of prison bars.—A brief de- scription of an instrument developed primarily for the purpose of testing prison bars but which can be used for other practical applications of mag- netic analysis. It is essentially an alternating-current bridge whose indica- tions depend upon differences in the shapes of the magnetic hystereses loops of the test specimen and a reference specimen of known quality. The instru- ment is simple to operate, portable, comparatively rugged, and operates from the ordinary alternating-current lighting circuit. (Author’s Abstract.) W.H. Swancer: Failures in metals —In the examination at the National Bureau of Standards of many metal structural members that failed in serv- ice, defective material has seldom been found as the cause of the failure. By far the greatest number of failures resulted because the member, al- though sound metallurgically, did not have adequate resistance to the imposed service conditions. Resistance to corrosive conditions can be pro- vided by inert coatings. Adequate resistance to service stresses must be provided by the design. Incorrect calculation of stresses or incorrect infor- mation on the strength of the material are infrequent causes of failure. Errors in executing the design are frequent sources of failure. Inadequate fillets, sharp re-entrant angles or projecting fins, machine tool marks, con- stitute points of localized stress concentration which are much more damag- ing to the resistance of the material to dynamic or cyclic stresses than to static stresses. Fatigue fractures almost invariably originate at a point of localized stress concentration. Corrosion acting simultaneously with cyclic stresses accentuates the localized stress concentration effect, thereby causing a further decrease in resistance to fatigue fracture. Fatigue fractures or fractures resulting from corrosion-fatigue are the most commonly occurring causes of failure in metals used as structural or machine members. (A uthor’s Abstract.) Nov. 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 485 These papers were discussed by Messrs. WHITE, HAWKESWORTH, GISH, HeEY.L, SALE, TUCKERMAN, and BAECHER. 1108TH MEETING The 1108th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, November 21, 1936, President SILSBEE presiding. The program consisted of reports on the Edinburgh Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics. WILuiaM Bowie: General report on meeting. —The Sixth General Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics was held in Edin- burgh, Scotland, in September, 1936. There was a large attendance of dele- gates and guests from thirty-one countries. The assembly was marked with great friendliness on the part of the delegates and a spirit of cooperation in the attack of geophysical and geodetic problems that extended beyond the areas of any one country. The International Geodetic and Geophysical Union was organized at Brussels in 1919, when delegates from a number of the allied powers as- sembled to provide an organization that would care for the international aspects of scientific research. There was created at the Brussels meeting the International Research Council with a number of unions. The Union of Geodesy and Geophysics has as branches seven associations representing geodesy, seismology, terrestrial magnetism and electricity, meteorology, hydrology, vulcanology and oceanography. The statutes of the Council and the Union had provisions that were rather distasteful to the scientific men of the central powers. This was inevitable because war fever had not abated in July 1919, when the scientific meeting was held at Brussels. A few years later, however, the statutes were modified and all references to the war were eliminated. There are now thirty-five countries adhering to the Inter- national Union of Geodesy and Geophysics although some of them are not active members since they are delinquent in their dues. Guests from Ger- many and Austria were present at the Edinburgh meeting. It is expected that those countries will join the Union in the not distant future. The Soviet government has decided to adhere to the Union in 1937, The Union has as its objective the coordination of the efforts of the work- ers in the fields of earth sciences of all of the countries of the world. Triennial assemblies are held at which the delegates set forth what work has been accomplished, what problems remain and how those problems may be suc- cessfully attacked. During the seventeen years of existence the Union and its associations have been very effective in advancing the several branches of the earth sciences with which they are concerned. Without such an organiza- tion there would be little or no opportunity for effective coordination of effort. The opening meeting of the Assembly was a very interesting one with speeches of welcome made by the Lord Provost of Edinburgh, the Principal of the University of Edinburgh, the President of the Royal Society of Lon- don and the President of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. These speeches of welcome were responded to by the President of the Union. Aside from the scientific meetings of the Union, the associations and the committees, there were a number of social events, which were enjoyable in themselves and which enabled the delegates and guests to become better acquainted. One of the outstanding accomplishments of the Assembly was the crea- tion of a committee on Continental and Oceanic Structures, of which Prof. Ricuarp M. Fiexup of the Department of Geology of Princeton University 486 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 is chairman. It is expected that a committee in each of the adhering coun- tries will be organized for the purpose of cooperating with the international one. Another event that occurred which is of interest to all American scien- tific men was the unanimous decision to accept the invitation presented by the chairman of the American delegation to hold the next general assembly of the Union at Washington, D. C. in 19389. There were 33 delegates and 18 members of their families representing the United States at the meeting in Edinburgh. They were unanimous in their praise of the Assembly and of the friendship and courtesy shown by the officials and citizens of Edinburgh. (Author’s Abstract.) W. D. Lampert: Report on geodesy.—The work of the Association of Geodesy at Edinburgh was done mainly in committee. The speaker reported briefly on those committees the sessions of which he was able to attend. These were: (1) Earth tides; (2) Variation of Latitude; (3) Gravity; (4) the Geoid. Oddly enough, the last-named committee is a new one. A center to further the work of isostatic reduction was established under the direction of Prof. Hn1skaNeNn of Helsingfors. He expects to do the work mainly with the aid of his students; he will receive a small grant from the Association and perhaps a further grant from the Finnish Government. A Committee on Continental and Oceanic Structure was established by the union. This is an inter-associational committee to promote the applica- tion of geophysical methods to the large-scale problems of geological struc- ture. Prof. R. M. Frevp of Princeton is chairman and Dr. J. A. FLEMING is secretary; the membership includes geologists as well as geophysicists of various sorts. (Author’s Abstract.) EK. W. EickeLBEerG: Report on secsmology.—The history of the Interna- tional Seismological Association itself merging with the International Asso- ciation of Geodesy and Geophysics and American participation in the meet- ings was reviewed. From the contributions of the adhering countries the Secretary maintains the Central Bureau at Strasbourg, France. Normal expenses include the reports of meetings, preliminary determinations of earthquake epicenters, support of the International Seismological Summary and other useful activities. The purpose of the meeting was to report prog- ress, discuss new projects and present papers of broad significance; and to standardize methods. Among the subjects discussed were the significance of the first motions given on the earthquake record and the importance of making this information available. Methods of developing travel time tables and curves received consideration. There were discussions of papers by delegates from the United States covering a wide field of activity and among them a discussion of shaking platform tests at the National Bureau of Standards by WENNER and McComs and the torsion pendulum as an ac- celerograph analyzer, by NruMANN. Four members of the PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY were on the program. The national reports show that the United States is well to the fore in seismological investigation. A joint Commission on Ocean Basins was formed to study the application of geophysics in this part of the earth. There were several excursions to regions where known faults are associated with earth- quake activity. (Author’s Abstract.) J. A. Fuemine and L. V. BerKNER: Report on Terrestrial Magnetism and Electricity The Edinburgh meeting of the Association was noteworthy be- cause of its distinctly international aspect. Sixty-five delegates and guests represented 17 countries—Austria, Australia, Czechoslovakia, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Great Britain, Holland, Japan, Latvia, Norway, Nov. 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 487 Poland, Portugal, Sweden, Switzerland, and the United States of America. Eight meetings were held. Part of a day was taken in one joint meeting of the Commission on Oceanic and Continental Structure and one full day was given over to a delightful excursion to inspect the Eskdalemuir Observatory. There were 20 reports from national committees and over 60 communica- tions, the majority of which concerned researches requiring international coordination and cooperation. Good progress in the geophysical sciences during the three years since the Lisbon Assembly was reflected in the address of the President, in the report of the Secretary, and in the reports of the national committees. Of particular significances were the important advances indicated by the presidential address and the suggested directions which future geophysical investiga- tions might advantageously follow. The President noted the full cooperative and harmonious relations maintained by the Association with the Commis- sion of Terrestrial Magnetism and Atmospheric Electricity of the Interna- tional Meteorological Organization. These relations make the two bodies of mutual benefit and assure elimination of duplication of effort and expense. The wise use of the Association’s resources, both moral and financial, in support of the Polar-Year Commission’s Bureau in Copenhagen has greatly advanced the reductions of data obtained during the second Polar Year. An outstanding announcement at the meeting was that by the Hydrog- rapher of the British Admiralty who informed us that the plans for the non- magnetic vessel Research, to resume the magnetic and electric surveys of the oceans originally carried on by the Carnegie, had been completed, and that in this effective assistance had been received from Mr. W. J. PETERS of the Carnegie Institution of Washington as also in the design and plans for the necessary instruments to be used on board. He further advised that just as the meeting was being held the contract for the construction of this vessel, which is but slightly larger than the Carnegie, had been let at a cost approximately twice the original estimate. Other outstanding events since the Lisbon meeting include development of magnetic observatories in the world net, more intensive research of observational data, progress in inter- national magnetic standards, and development of methods for recording continuously electric conditions in the ionosphere. Nineteen resolutions pertaining to international research and cooperation in the fields of our Association were adopted. Emphasis was laid on the necessity of distributing adequately publications of the Association in a resolution adopted also by the Union as a whole. The preparation and publication of a list of magnetic and electric observatories, together with a thesaurus of values, was authorized, this material to be prepared by the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of the Carnegie Institution of Wash- ington and the Potsdam Observatory of Germany. The necessity of control of variometers and of examination at regular intervals in the operation of observatories was emphasized. The Association recommended that every observatory provide means to secure registration of extreme values during severe magnetic storms and also that reproductions of magnetograms be supplied the Central Bureau of the Association for photographic reproduc- tion on film, thus permitting economical and widespread distribution of records for purposes of discussion and study. A committee was appointed to consider and report during the next three years upon steps to promote inter- national intercomparisons of magnetic standards. Two resolutions dealt with the effect on magnetic observatories of electrification of railways, and it was requested that information concerning effects be sent to the Central 488 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 11 Bureau of the Association so that material might be available for the use of those organizations whose effectiveness is threatened by proposed elec- trification of railways. It was agreed to continue the magnetic character-numbers on the scale of 0, 1, and 2, and also the numerical magnetic activity-figures according to the agreement at the Stockholm Assembly in 1930 but to replace the sum (HRy+ZRz) by the daily range of declination expressed in minutes of arc. Arrangements were made for the printing and distribution of activity-figures for the Polar Year 1932-33 and for the extension of magnetic character- numbers to observatory results obtained prior to 1906. The importance of suitable arrangements by all governments for the com- plete realization and continuation of the minimum program for interna- tional repeat-observations as adopted at the Lisbon Assembly was empha- sized. A resolution was passed congratulating the British Admiralty, the Astronomer Royal, and the Chairman of the British National Committee for Geodesy and Geophysics upon the realization of the plans for the non- magnetic ship Research, and it was suggested that other maritime nations should consider the construction of such non-magnetic vessels. Already the U.S.8.R. is building a ship for such investigations in the arctic seas and the Japanese Government is making arrangements for magnetic observa- tions at sea. The reports of frequent records during the International Polar Year of giant pulsations in Iceland led to the adoption of a resolution authorizing the Executive Committee to arrange for the installation of recording vari- ometers in Iceland and to invite collaboration of magnetic observatories. This phenomenon is one which seems to be somewhat local in character. With regard to investigations in atmospheric electricity, a resolution was adopted recommending continued investigations of the atmospheric-electric elements at observatories now recording their variations and the initiation of such studies at other observatories. It was especially emphasized that observational data about the electrical state of the troposphere and of the stratosphere over land and sea should be augmented. Emphasis was given in a resolution on the need of more earth-current data and the provision of additional earth-current stations at well-distribut- ed points and especially on islands surrounded by the deep sea. It was rec- ommended that the field-intensity component of the electric current in the Earth be taken as positive when it corresponds to a flow either towards the north or towards the east and, further, that the azimuth of the resultant earth-current intensity-vector be reckoned from north through east to 360°. The desirability of prompt publication of Polar-Year data was expressed in one resolution. The Association is in favor of having a classification of literature on terrestrial magnetism and electricity drawn up as a part of the international decimal system. To carry on the activities of the Association until the General Assembly which is to be held in Washington in 1939, existing committees were con- tinued as follows: On the selection of sites of new observatories for terrestrial magnetism and electricity; Auroral committee; Committee on the study of the relationship between solar activity and terrestrial magnetism; Commit- tee on magnetic secular-variation stations; Committee on the study of elec- trical characterization of days. Three reporters were designated, namely: On numerical characterization of days, on international collaboration for pro- moting the study of the influence of the moon on geophysical phenomena, and on ion-counters. Nov. 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 489 One joint committee of the International Commission of Terrestrial Mag- netism and Atmospheric Electricity and of the Association was continued, namely: On methods and codes to adequately describe magnetic disturb- ances and perturbations. A joint committee of the International Scientific Radio Union and of the Association was also formed. New committees were established as follows: On magnetic charts—(1) organization of work, and (2) methodology; on registration of giant pulsations in Iceland; on methods of observatory-publication; on classification of magnetic literature; to pro- mote comparisons of international magnetic standards. _ Administrative matters included the adoption of statutes and election of officers. The new officers are as follows: President, FLEMING; Vice-Presi- dents, MaurRaIn, and CHAapMaAn; Secretary and Director of Central Bureau, Gopi; additional members of the Executive Committee, KERANEN and TANAKADATE through 1939, and van Disk, Cricuton, MITCHELL, and STORMER through 1942. In conclusion, this Assembly of the Association has shown fruitful colla- boration and progress during the last three years; it is to be hoped that the ever-widening prospects presented may furnish ample incentive to achieve further understanding and interpretation of the many experimental data nature so generously provides. (Author’s Abstract.) Mr. WrEIGHTMAN: Report on meteorology.—In organizing the program for the meeting it was decided to adopt as the basic theme The problem of atmospheric disturbances, which resolves itself quite easily and naturally into Six separate divisions covering the different branches of meteorology, as follows: (A) Definition of the disturbances; (B) Origin of disturbances; (C) Structure of cyclones; (D) Interaction of different atmospheric layers; (E) Radiation and its role in atmospheric disturbances; (F) Precipitation, rime and fog. In addition to seventeen papers on the first five of these divisions, there were about a dozen of a nature difficult to classify under the above heads. The papers were mentioned by title and some comments made con- cerning a few of them. The meetings were well attended and many interesting discussions fol- lowed the reading of the papers. A few of the papers were read by title. In all, it was the feeling of the delegates that the gathering had been an unquali- fied success. The officers elected were as follows: President: Dr. 8. CHAP- MAN; Vice-Presidents: P. WEHRLE and W. R. Greaa; Secretary: J. BJERK- NES. 1109TH MEETING The 1109th meeting, constituting the 66th annual meeting, was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, December 5, 1936, President SILSBEE pre- siding. The treasurer reported that exclusive of liquidation of securities the in- come of the Society during the past fiscal year was $1400.26, the expendi- tures, excluding reinvestment of funds, amounted to $1410.71. The fiscal year was entered with $1000 of the investment account in cash. During the year $500 of the invested funds of the Society were liquidated and $1386.29 were invested. , The treasurer’s report showed an active membership of 298 of whom 255 were in good standing. The secretaries reported the following were elected to membership during the year: S. F. Acker, Norwoop Apams, N. G. ANDERSON, C. E. BENNETT, W. M. Bueaxney, Horace R. Byzrs, Irwin L. Cootmr, R. C. DARNELL, 490 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 11 CuHaRLes E. Gauss, Karu F. Herzretp, Peter Hipnert, D. P. JoHNson, H. Paut Kaurman, M. Fauu Kersey, R. H. Lex, A. HucHierr Mason, G. H. Morsz, Oscar NorGorpen, Ernest J. PARKIN. FRaNcIS E. WASHER, ALBERT WERTHEIMER, H. M. Woo.ery. The following deaths were reported: CHRISTIAN Hurr (a member since 1926), Henry B. Heprick (a member since 1918). The following officers were declared elected for the year 1937: President, F. WENNER; Vice-Presidents, F. G. BRicKWEDDE and E. W. Woo.uarp; Recording Secretary, H. E. McComs; Treasurer, W. G. BRoMBACHER; and Members-at-large of the General Committee, F. E. Jounston and J. A. DUERKSEN. During the year the sixth Joseph Henry Lecture, in memory of the first president of the Philosophical Society, was given by Hrerpert DINGLE, Imperial College of Science and Technology, London. At the conclusion of the business meeting a humorous talk was presented by G. Gamow entitled Cosmos-rays. Informal communications were presented by Messrs. A. G. McNisH and Ey TELUER: L. R. Harstap, Recording Secretary 1110TH MEETING The 1110th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, Saturday, December 19, 1936, President WENNER presiding. Program: T. WAYLAND VAUGHAN: Notes on Proceedings of the Association of Physical Oceanography, September 17 to 24, 1936, at the Sixth General Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics in Edinburgh. Officers. The President of the Association was Martin Knudsen, Vice-Pres- . ident, E. Fichot, Secretary, J. Proudman. The members of the Executive Committee who were present were D. J. Matthews, B. Helland-Hansen, and Thomas G. Thompson. Since the meeting in Lisbon in 1933 two mem- bers of the Executive Committee, J. Joubin and G. Magrini, had died. T. Witting, Caballero y Lastres, and Odén de Buen were absent. Attendance. Although I made no attempt to keep a record of the attend- ance at the different sessions of the Association, I noted that there were representatives from the following countries: Austria, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Great Britain, Indo-China, Monaco, Morroco, Nether- lands, Norway, and the United States of America, making twelve countries altogether. A few other countries may have been represented. The total attendance at the sessions was about fifty, but, again as no accurate record of those who were present was kept, there may have been a few more. One or more representatives from each of the countries listed presented papers or took part in the scientific discussions. It is to be regretted that several coun- tries that are active in oceanographic research were not represented, for instance the U.S.S.R. and Japan. Regions covered by Scientific Papers. There were scientific papers on the Norwegian Sea, Atlantic Ocean, Mediterranean Sea, Indian Ocean, and Pacific Ocean including Bering Sea. One paper dealt with the seas surround- ing Antarctica. A regrettable gap in the program was that we had no paper on the Arctic Ocean. Subject covered. Nearly every aspect of physical oceanography received consideration. There were papers on the cetermination of gravity at sea, bottom configuration, marine bottom deposits, oceanic circulation, tides, Nov. 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 491 submarine solar radiation, the chemical features of sea water, and the inter- relations of the sea and the atmosphere. Reports on the result of several important expeditions were presented and accounts were given of the work of leading organizations, such as that of the International Hydrographical Bureau. Cooperative Projects. A number of projects that require international co- operation were discussed. Among them were: a proposal for an international survey of the Gulf Stream area; the units which should be used in the specifi- cation of the different common constituents of sea water and on the neces- sity of a world-wide uniformity of procedure; the desirability of fixing stand- ard levels for oceanic observations; the new edition of the general bathy- metric chart of the oceans; the criteria and nomenclature for the major divisions of the ocean bottom; the study of ocean swell in the proximity of shore and a plan for the international study of marine erosion on the sea- shore; and the organization of geophysical work in the Mediterranean sea. There were discussions jointly with other associations of the Union. One of these, the interaction between the sea and the atmosphere, was at a joint meeting of the Association for Meteorology and that for Physical Oceanog- raphy. Another joint discussion with other Associations was the use and value of geophysical methods in the attack upon the structural problems of oceanic and continental areas. The discussions were very stimulating, even inspiring. Committees. The old Committees on tides, mean sea level and its varia- tions, and (jointly with other Associations) the study of so-called tidal waves (raz de marée), were continued. Several new Committees were appointed covering several of the subjects that were topics for general discussion. Among these there were committees for an international survey of the Gulf Stream, for the units to be used in the specification of the different chemical constituents of sea water, for the designation of standard levels for oceanic observations, for the criteria and nomenclature of the major division of the ocean bottom, and jointly, with the Association for Meteorology, one on the interaction between the sea and the atmosphere. As I did not take down the names of all those who were appointed as members of the different Commit- tees, it seems inadvisable to give an incomplete list. New Officers. The following officers of the Association were elected, B. Helland-Hansen, President; Fichot, Vice-President; J. Proudman, Secretary. During the meeting there was on September 19 an excursion of particular interest to the oceanographers, on the Scottish Fisheries steamer Explorer, under the able leadership of J. B. Tait, hydrographer of the Scottish Fish- eries Service. It was an all day excursion on the Firth of Forth. The vessel went from Leith docks to the mouth of the Forth. On the excursion Mr. Carruthers gave a demonstration of the use of a current meter designed by him; and D. J. Matthews demonstrated the use of a frameless water bottle recently designed by him. On the same day there was a parallel excursion on the Armauer Hansen, the research vessel of the Geophysical Institute in Bergen, under the leadership of Helland-Hansen. Those who took part in the excursion had an opportunity to see both vessels. Conclusions. From the notes above made it will be seen that great interest was manifested in the proceedings of the Association by the presence of delegates from many countries and the rather large attendance at the dif- ferent sessions of the Association. Nearly all of the important oceanic areas of the world were considered and there were papers of high quality on almost every aspect of physical oceanography. Many projects requiring interna- 492 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 11 tional cooperation were discussed and committees were appointed to bring about appropriate international action. The meeting was very successful. (Author’s Abstract.) | Discussed by Messrs. McNisu, Humpureys, SMirH and WENNER. O. E. Muinzer: Notes on Proceedings of the Association of Hydrology, September 1936, at the Sixth General Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics in Edinburgh.—The outstanding feature of the hydrology meetings in Edinburgh was the three-day conference on snow, conducted by the Commission on Snow, with the cooperation of the Com- mission on Glaciers. This conference was arranged through the energetic and cooperative efforts of Dr. J. E. Church, of the University of Nevada, who was the organizer of the Commission on Snow and is still its Chairman. Unfortunately, on account of serious illness in Moscow, he did not reach Edinburgh until after the snow conference, but the conference was neverthe- less very successful. The American Section of Hydrology was represented by four eminent authorities on ice and snow, namely, Professors Hobbs and Gould and Messrs. McLaughlin and Elges. At the regular hydrology meetings about one day each was devoted to the Commissions on Streams, Lakes, Underground Waters, and Practical Ap- plications, and many important problems covering a wide range in the science of hydrology were discussed. The meetings were attended by a small group of able hydrologists, most of whom have a broad scientific interest in hydrology but with less specialization than among the hydrologists in the United States. There was an enthusiastic delegation from France and most of the smaller European countries were represented by one or more able men, among whom I may mention Mr. Smetana, of Czechoslovakia, the genial and energetic President of the Association of Hydrology, Mr. Lutschg, of Switzerland, the President elect, and Mr. Slettenmark of Sweden, the Vice- President elect. Mr. Dienert, of France, continues as the Secretary of the Association. Action was taken to hold a round table at the Washington meeting in 1939 on the problem of making greater use of the hydraulic laboratories in research in hydrology and other departments of earth physics. Discussed by Messrs. VAUGHAN and Heck. H. E. McComps, Recording Secretary is et bod > A v od a: i 4 ES CONTENTS| PALEONTOLOGY.—Linter, a new caxoahy genus from the upper taceous of Texas. Luoyp W. STEPHENSON.............. PALEONTOLOGY.—The systematic position of the Sagan zen : Trinacria. F. Stearns MAcNEW............--.2.....04) coe PaLuosorany.—On the presence of the fern Weichselia in Colombit South America. Epwarp W. Burry...... Soa. eda ae mn ZooLoGy.—The Nearctic “Soya of the eters Heteropodidae, - VING FO seus oe Py tia os aR Peeves eee ee ° K.NtroMoLoGy.—The cinerosus ny of the aan Laev e a (Homoptera: Cicadellidae). P. W. Oman.......... te EnromoLogy.—Some new North American Menitueaalaeet? ofa 3! Bae eres tek eM Die en's Me's Te) omer ee PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY. . so ah ae This Journal is indexed in the International Inder to Periodicals , - *. DECEMBER 15, 1937 No, 12 Ww PEL AS ae Ye Cc Sn Foe, aj “TN AL MISES Sng — sy : OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Roitanp W. Brown Espen H. Toot FREDERICK D, Rossini U. 8S. @EOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS RAYMOND J. SEEGER C. F. W. Mvurseseck 4 PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GotpMAN W. W. Rusey BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY AGNES CHASE Henry B. Cot.ins, Jr. BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY FRANK C. Kracek CHEMICAL SOCIETY wr PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 450 Aunaip Sr. at MENASHA, WISCONSIN Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Menasha, Wis. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized January 21, 1933. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JOURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; G proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3 notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issu monthly, on the fifteenth of each month. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is es eg re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate cae The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of one full-page halftone or two full-page line drawings may be paid for by the author. Line drawings are preferred. Proof.—lIn order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and date of issue, and reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accordance with the following schedule of prices. e) Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers 50 cate hey a PR Ohta eee $2.00 100 $ .75 $1.20 $1.50 $2.00 $2.75 150 1.25 1.90 2.55 3.25 3.50 200 1.75 2.60 3.60 4.50 4.25 250 2.00 3.30 4.65 5.75 5.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices: First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. Subscription Rates —Per volume... ... 0... ses cscedesevcdsaes sane $6 .00 To members of affiliated societies; per volume...............0eeeceeeeee 2.50 Single nium DOES 6 6G ois 6 eis ne nn 6 Njets dw pv islinh bo sya piles Pea alge -50 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and addressed to 450 Ahnaip Street, Menasha, Wis., or to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C. Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within thirty days after date of following issue. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: CHarLes THOM, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: NaTHAN R. SmitH, Bureau of Plant Industry. Recording Secretary: Oscar §. Apams, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES MOL. 27 DECEMBER 15, 1937 | No. 12 CHEMISTRY.—The carotenoid pigments of the sweet potato (Ipomoea batatas, Poir.).1|. M. B. Martacx, Food Research Division, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. It has been shown (1, 2) that the sweet potato is a good source of vitamin A. This fact and the natural color of the tuber leads one to suspect the presence of at least one of the four known carotenoids which possess the property of acting as a precursor of vitamin A. For the purpose of identifying the predominant carotenoid pigments from the sweet potato, the deeply colored variety known as ‘‘Porto Rico” was obtained from the local market. Twenty pounds of fresh tubers were ground through a meat grinder and allowed to fall into a salt solution. To this mixture was added an equal volume of ninety- two per cent alcohol. The excess solvent was removed in a press and the process repeated with sixty per cent alcohol. The alcoholic ex- extracts were discarded. Alternate extraction with acetone and petroleum ether yielded solutions which were worked up as follows: In each case the solution was evaporated to dryness in vacuo and taken up in a small amount of carbon disulphide, and absolute alcohol was added. This yielded a crop of large pleochromatic crystals. On concentration of the mother liquor considerable colorless material separated, and, therefore, saponification with sodium methylate was resorted to. The petroleum ether solution from the saponified material was repeatedly shaken with eighty-five per cent alcohol. The residue remaining after evaporation of the petroleum ether layer was taken up in a small volume of carbon disulphide, and abso- lute alcohol was added. Crystals of pigment separated on standing and after concentration of the mother liquor. Attempts to isolate crystalline xanthophylls from the alcohol phase proved futile because of the small amount of pigment and the large amount of colorless impurities. However, a fraction was obtained which gave a blue color with formic acid and with concentrated hydrochloric acid, indicating the presence of violaxanthin. A spectro- 1 Food Research Division Contribution No. 340. Received September 20, 1937. 493 494 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 gram was obtained, the absorption maxima of which were very close to that of the mixture known as leaf xanthophyll. Chromatographic adsorption (8) of the recrystallized pigment on a Tswett column of calcium hydroxide yielded four colored zones rang- Fig. 1.—Sweet Potato Carotene. ing from reddish-brown at the top through purple and pale yellow to orange at the bottom. On further treatment of these bands only the TABLE 1.—POSITIONS OF CENTERS OF THE ABSORPTION BANDS, IN ANGSTROM UNITs. NS) t Potat Leaf Xanthophyll Fracti Carotene NCanetene 1 Xanthophyll enon eka Sect Potts Room Liquid Air Room Liquid Air Room Liquid Air Room Liquid Air Temperature |Temperature|Temperature| Temperature] Temperature| Temperature| Temperature| Temperature 4815 5000 4825 5010 4760 4900 4755 , ~ 4895 4490 4670 4500 4680 4430 4580 4440 4590 4230 . 4375 4230 4375 4190 4300 4190 4310 lowest one produced sufficient material for actual isolation of crystals. These (Fig. 1) melted at 182° and gave absorption maxima? as shown in Table 1. These data indicated the coloring matter to be 6-carotene. 2 The writer is indebted to G. E. Hilbert and E. F. Jansen for all of the spectro- photographic work presented in this paper. Duc. 15, 1937 SWALLEN: CATHESTECUM 495 It is evident from the above results that the predominant pigment of the sweet potato is beta carotene with a small amount of xantho- phylls, one of which is violaxanthin. LITERATURE CITED 1. MacLeop, F. L., Tatpert, A., and Toousz, L. E. The Vitamin A and B Con- ee of the Nancy Hall Sweet Potato. Jour. Home Economics 24: 928-929. 1 2. MacLeop, F. L., Armstrone, M. R., Heap, M. E., and TALBERT, LL. A. . The Vitamin A Content of Five Varieties of Sweet Potato. Jour. Agr. ‘Research 50: 181-187. 1935. 3. ZECHMEISTER, L., und CuHounoxy, L. v. Dreissig Jahre Chromatographie. Monatshefte fur Chemie 68: 68-80. 1936. BOTANY.—The grass genus Cathestecum.! Jason R. SWALLEN, Bureau of Plant Industry. Cathestecum was described in 1830 by Presl, based on a single species, C. prostratum. A second, C. erectum, was described by Vasey and Hackel in 1884. Griffiths in 1912 added two more, C. multifidum and C. stoloniferum, the latter invalid. The genus was placed in Zoysiae by Bentham and Hooker, in Festuceae by Hackel, and in Chlorideae by Griffiths as an ally of Pentarrhaphis and Bouteloua, the position accepted by Hitchcock and the writer. Because of insufficient. material, the genus has not been well under- stood. Griffiths noted that the species are variable, but a study of more specimens has made it possible to coordinate specific characters and recognize three additional species, C. annuwm, C. varium, and C. brevifolium. Cathestecum stoloniferum Griffiths was based on Atheropogon stolonifer Fourn. The type (Liebmann 588) was not examined by Griffiths, but was later found among specimens kindly lent by the Copenhagen Herbarium in 1915. It is a pistillate plant of Pringleochloa stolonifera Scribn. as Scribner supposed, although Fournier described the lower florets as hermaphrodite. The species figured as C. stoloniferum by Griffiths in his revision is new, C. varium. Griffiths included in C. erectum and C. stoloniferum some specimens which are here referred to three new species. Presi’s description of the florets as hermaphrodite is scarcely correct since they are nearly always unisexual, sometimes sterile, and very rarely perfect. The genus is complicated by the fact that two of the species, C. erectum and C. brevifolium, have dimorphous spikes. The two forms are sometimes on different parts of the same plant, as on two adjoining tufts connected by a stolon, but usually they are ap- 1 Received October 13, 1937. 496 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 parently on entirely separate plants. In one form all the florets are staminate, or the upper sterile, whereas in the other the florets of the lateral spikelets are staminate or sterile, and the lower floret of the central spikelet is pistillate, the upper ones staminate, or the upper- most sometimes sterile. The structure of the lemmas is also different in the two forms as described under each species. A fragment from the type of C. prostratum was kindly deposited in the U. S. National Herbarium in 1907 by the Botanischer Garten, Deutsche Universitat, Praha, Czechoslovakia. Types of all the other species are in the U. 8. National Herbarium. CATHESTECUM Presl, Rel. Haenk. 1: 294. pl. 42. 1830. Annual or perennial grasses, frequently stoloniferous, with relatively short flat blades and 3 to 10 V-shaped or rhomboid spreading spikes, evenly ar- ranged on opposite sides of the slender flattened axis; spikes falling entire, consisting of three spikelets, the lateral ones 2-flowered, staminate or sterile, rarely pistillate, the upper floret sometimes much reduced; central spikelet 3-flowered, the lower floret usually pistillate, sometimes staminate, very rarely perfect, the upper florets staminate or sterile; first glume short, that of the central spikelet usually flabellate; second glume about as long as the spikelet, acuminate, sometimes minutely lobed and mucronate; lemmas dissimilar, the lower ones cleft about one fourth their length, the awns from between the lobes equaling or slightly exceeding them, the upper ones deeply cleft, the awns villous in the lower part, extending as much as 3 mm beyond the lobes; in spikes wholly staminate, the lemmas all alike; palea nearly equaling the lemma, the nerves excurrent in short awns. Type species: Cathestecum prostratum Presl. Distribution: Endemic to Mexico and Central America, one species extend- ing into southern Texas and Arizona. KEY TO THE SPECIES Plants annual. Culms slender, not more than 25 cm long (usually less than 15 em), freely branching from all the nodes, the upper one with two or more slender leafless: flowerme branches... .. .. as)... skal oe ee 1. C. prostratum Culms coarse, as much as 50 cm long, if less than 25 em long the upper node with a single inflorescence or sometimes a second hidden in the mICet tins Staak tetatias 70) ck Seales ah wel) ek WR ae ge 2. C. annuum Plants perennial. Plants cespitose; third floret reduced to a cluster of 5-7 awns on a naked SUID E CE iy eee Aenea OEOURE, 6 HEME doe eth, o oe eee eee 3. C. multifidum Plants stoloniferous; third floret glumaceous, 3-awned. Lower florets of lateral spikelets pistillate, rarely one of them staminate, the upper usually sterile, rarely pistillate or staminate; lower lemmas usually densely pubescent. ................ 4. C. varium Lower florets of lateral spikelets staminate or sterile; lower lemmas glabrous or only sparsely pubescent. Spikes dimorphous. Lateral spikelets with well developed usually staminate florets; blades, at least some of them, commonly more than 2 cm long, often involute, not becoming curled: stolons comparatively short, conspicuously, EU CMMMA aioe 5 «SRS ais oN 5e ale 5. C. erectum Dec. 15,1937 | SWALLEN: CATHESTECUM 497 Lateral spikelets imperfectly developed, the florets mostly sterile, the lemmas reduced; blades flat, mostly 1-2 cm long, rarely longer, becoming curled with age;stolons long, widely spreading, WGe eam C Myla, ee eis eee ee ee Ra 8 ay? 6. C. brevifolium 1. Cathestecum prostratum Presl Cathestecum prostratum Presl, Rel. Haenk. 1: 295. pl. 42. 1830. Type collected in Mexico by Haenke, the exact locality not given. Annual; culms slender in small dense tufts, decumvbent-spreading, genicu- late at the nodes, freely branching, 4-35 cm long, glabrous; sheaths, except the lowermost, shorter than the internodes, glabrous, or sparsely pilose near the margins and in the mouth, with a pubescent line across the collar; ligule ciliate, about 0.3 mm long; blades flat, acute, glabrous on the lower surface, scabrous and sparsely pilose on the upper, the margins scabrous, 1-5 cm long, 1-2 mm wide, the upper ones and those on the short branches much reduced; inflorescences terminal and axillary from the upper sheaths; spikes ascending or finally spreading, about 4 mm long not including the awns; first glume of lateral spikelets narrow, acuminate, about 2 mm long, that of the central floret broad, scale-like, less than 1 mm long; second glume 3 mm long, hirsute, those of the lateral spikelets acuminate, that of the central spikelet broader, abruptly acute or subobtuse, sometimes lobed, mucronate; florets 3 mm long, dissimilar; lower floret of the lateral spikelets sterile, the lemma glabrous or sparsely pilose, shallowly lobed, the awns equaling or only slightly exceeding them, the upper floret staminate, the lemma cleft to the middle, the awns extending 1 mm beyond the lobes, hispid on the lower part; lower floret of the central spikelet pistillate, the lemma, sparsely pilose on the back and on the margins, the lobes about 1 mm long, the awns sub- equal, 1.5 mm long, scabrous and more or less hispid, the upper florets staminate, the lemmas similar to those of the upper florets of the lateral spikelets, but more deeply lobed, the awns extending 2-3 mm beyond the lobes; stamens 1.5 mm long. Limestone hills, central Mexico. More tos: Jojutla, Pringle 8707. Without locality, Haenke (type). 2. Cathestecum annuum Swallen, sp. nov. Annuum; culmi ramosi, geniculati, decumbentes, 15-50 cm alti; vaginae internodiis multo breviores, glabrae, marginibus pilosis; ligula ciliata, 0.5-1 mm longa; laminae planae, firmae, acuminatae, infra glabrae, supra pilosae, marginibus scabris, 3-8 cm longae, 2-3 mm latae, superiores reductae; spicae 5-9, 6 mm longae, rachi producta; gluma prima spicularum lateralium acuminata, 2 mm longa, spiculae centralis flabellata; gluma secunda acuminata, 4-5 mm longa, mucronata, hirsuto-villosa; flosculi spicularum lateralium masculi vel steriles, leommatibus 3.5-4 mm longis, lobatis, aristis quam lobis paulo longioribus; flosculus inferior spiculae centralis femineus, lemmate 4 mm longo, lobato, aristis quam lobis 0.5-1 mm longioribus; flosculi superiores spiculae centralis masculi, glabri, fissi, aristis quam lobis 2-3 mm longioribus, subtus hispidis, superne scabris. Annual; culms branching, geniculate, decumbent-spreading, rooting at the lower nodes, 15-50 em tall, glabrous; sheaths mostly shorter than the internodes, glabrous or more or less pilose in the throat and on the margins; ligule ciliate, 0.5-1 mm long; blades flat, firm, acuminate, glabrous on the 498 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 lower surface, pilose on the upper, the margins very scabrous, 3-8 cm long, 2-3 mm wide, the upper ones reduced; spikes 5-9, about 6 mm long, the rachis prolonged as a slender hairy bristle; first glume of the lateral spikelets acuminate, 2mm long, that of the central spikelet minute, flagellate; second glume acuminate, often minutely lobed and mucronate, 4-5 mm long, hirsute-villous at least on the lower half of the keel; florets of the lateral spikelets staminate or sterile, the lemmas 3.5—-4 mm long, sparsely pilose on the margins, the lobes 1.5 mm long, the awns equaling or slightly exceed- ing them, appressed hispid; lower floret of the central spikelet pistillate, the lemma 4 mm long, glabrous or sparsely pilose on the lower part of the back, shallowly lobed, the lateral lobes 1 mm long, the awns strong, extending 0.5-1 mm beyond the lobes, glabrous, the upper florets staminate, the lem- mas a little shorter than that of the lower floret, glabrous, deeply cleft, the lateral lobes 2.5 mm long, the awns extending 2-3 mm beyond the lobes, hispid on the lower half, scabrous on the upper; stamens 3 mm long. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium no. 1720269, collected on open gravelly ground, Balsas, Guerrero, Mexico, altitude 1500 feet, September 9, 1910, by A. 8. Hitchcock (no. 6776) (Amer. Gr. Nat. Herb. no. 393, distrib- uted as Cathestecum erectum Vasey & Hackel). Prairies and open ground along railroad, Guerrero, Mexico. GUERRERO: Balsas, Hitchcock 6776 (type), 6800. Apipiluleo, Hitchcock 6697. 3. Cathestecum multifidum Griffiths Cathestecum multifidum Griffiths, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 14: 360. f. 24. 1912. Type collected at Iguala, Mexico, by Griffiths, September 9, 1909. Perennial; culms slender, densely tufted, erect or geniculate at the lower nodes, branching, 15-40 cm tall, glabrous, the nodes pubescent; sheaths glabrous, pilose in the throat, the lower crowded, the upper much shorter than the internodes; ligule ciliate, 0.56 mm long; blades flat, acuminate, glabrous or sparsely pilose on the upper surface, the margins very sparsely papillose-pilose, 2.5—-8 em long, 1—1.5 mm wide, the upper culm blades much reduced; spikes, 5-10 mostly secund, 3-4 mm long excluding the awns, the rachis prolonged as a slender bristle; first glume very narrow, acuminate, about 2 mm long, sparsely hirsute; second glume of lateral spikelets acumi- nate, hirsute, 2.5 mm long, of the central spikelet broader, pilose, notched, with a stout awn nearly 1 mm long from between the teeth; lower floret of the lateral spikelets staminate, the lemma 2.5 mm long, 3-lobed, the lobes mucronate, the upper florets staminate or sterile, 2mm long, deeply 5-cleft, the divisions aristate; lower floret of the central spikelet pistillate, the lemma 3 mm long, glabrous on the back, the margins sparsely pilose, the tip 3- lobed, the lobes acuminate, sometimes mucronate, the upper florets stami- nate or sterile, about 2.5 mm long, deeply 5-cleft, sometimes to the base, the lobes narrow, acuminate, the awns 2-3 mm long, the uppermost floret sometimes reduced to awns. Rocky hills, Oaxaca, Mexico. Oaxaca: Iguala, Griffiths without number (type). Oaxaca, Hitchcock 6120, 6164. Monte Alban, C. L. Smith 950. Ixcotel (Distrito del Centro), Conzatti 3607. 4. Cathestecum varium Swallen, sp. nov. Perenne, stoloniferum, stolonibus gracilibus, internodiis 3-15 em longis; culmi graciles dense caespitosi, ramosi, erecti vel geniculati, 10-15 cm alti; Dec. 15, 1937 SWALLEN: CATHESTECUM 499 vaginae glabrae, infirmae basi dense villosae; ligula ciliata, 0.3 mm longa; laminae planae, firmae, acutae, pungentes, infra glabrae, supra scabrae et sparsae pilosae, 1-6 cm longae, 1-2 mm latae, superiores reductae; spicae 3-5, divergentes; gluma prima spiculorum lateralium truncata vel acumi- nata, 1.5-2.5 mm longa, spiculae centralis flabellata, 1 mm longa; gluma secunda hirsuto-villosa, acuminata, minute lobata, aristis ad 1 mm longis; flosculus inferior spicularum lateralium femineus, lemmate 4 mm longo, dense pubescente, lobato, aristis quam lobis 1—-1.5 mm longioribus, flosculus superior neuter, raro masculus vel femineus, fissus, aristis quam lobis 2.5-3 mm longioribus; flosculus inferior spiculae centralis femineus, lemmate eis inferioribus spicularum lateralium simili, flosculi superiores neutri vel masculi, glabri, eis superioribus spicularum lateralium similes. Perennial, stoloniferous, the stolons slender, wiry, with commonly arched internodes, 3-15 em long; culms in small dense tufts, slender, branching, erect or geniculate at the nodes, 10-15 cm tall, glabrous; lower sheaths crowded, glabrous, or the lowermost densely villous at the base, pilose in the throat, the upper ones much shorter than the internodes, glabrous; ligule ciliate, about 0.3 mm long; blades flat, firm, acute, pungent, glabrous on the lower surface, scabrous and sparsely pilose on the upper, the margins scabrous, 1-4 cm long (rarely to 6 cm), 1-2 mm wide, the uppermost culm blades much reduced; spikes 3-5, spreading, on a slender flexuous axis 1.5—2 cm long; first glume of lateral spikelets irregular, truncate to acumi- nate, 1.5-2.5 mm long, that of the central spikelet flabellate, about 1 mm long; second glume hirsute-villous, acuminate or minutely lobed, awned from between the lobes, the awn as much as 1 mm long, that of the central spikelet broader than those of the lateral spikelets; lower floret of the lateral spikelets usually pistillate, sometimes staminate, the lemma 4 mm long, usually densely pubescent but occasionally glabrous, lobed, the lobes about 1 mm long, awned from between the lobes, the lateral awns about equaling them, the central extending 1—1.5 mm beyond them; upper floret usually neuter, rarely staminate or pistillate, sometimes much reduced, the lemma 4 mm long, cleft to below the middle, the awns from between the lobes ex- tending 2.5-3 mm beyond them, villous on the lower part; lower floret of;the central spikelet pistillate, sometimes apparently perfect, the lemma similar to the lower lemmas of the lateral spikelets, the upper florets neuter or staminate, glabrous, the lobes and awns as in the upper florets of the lateral spikelets. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium no. 1720270, collected on dry soil under mesquite, Tehuacan, Puebla, Mexico, August 9, 1910, by A. 8. Hitch- cock (no. 6072; Amer. Gr. Nat. Herb. no. 395, distributed as Cathestecum stoloniferum). Dry rocky hills and in mesquite, Puebla and Oaxaca, Mexico. PureBLa: Tehuacan, Hitchcock 6072 (type); Rose & Hay 5924. San Luis Tultitlanapa, Purpus 3569. Oaxaca: Tomellin, Hitchcock 6238; Griffiths 9764. San Antonio Valley, C. L. Smith 958. 5. Cathestecum erectum Vasey & Hack. Cathestecum erectum Vasey & Hack. Bull. Torrey Club 11: 37. pl 45. 1884. Type collected between El Paso and Presidio, Texas, by Havard (no. 2). Perennial, stoloniferous, the stolons slender, wiry, conspicuously arching, the internodes elongate; culms in small dense tufts, simple or branching, 500 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 erect or somewhat geniculate-spreading, 15-380 cm tall, glabrous; lower sheaths crowded, pilose in the throat, the lowermost densely villous at the base, the upper ones more distant, glabrous; ligule ciliate, about 0.3 mm long; blades flat or commonly loosely involute, 3-6 mm long, 1—-1.5 mm wide, glabrous on the lower surface, scabrous and sparsely pilose on the upper; spikes usually pale, dimorphous, one form entirely staminate, the other with the lower floret of the central spikelet pistillate, the upper floret and those of the lateral spikelets staminate or neuter, the spikes all of the same kind in a single inflorescence, parts of the same plant (joined by stolons) some- times with both kinds of spikes; staminate spikes: first glume 1 mm long; second glume acuminate, glabrous or nearly so, that of the lateral spikelets 3 mm long, that of the central spikelet about 4 mm long; lemmas similar, 3 mm Jong, glabrous, irregularly lobed, awnless or mucronate; pistillate spikes: glumes villous, otherwise like those of the staminate spikes; lemmas of the lateral spikelets similar, 3 mm long, glabrous, cleft to the middle, the awns from between the lobes equaling or barely exceeding them, more or less hispid; florets of the central spikelet unlike, the lower lemma glabrous or sparsely pubescent, cleft one third of the length, the awns from between the lobes glabrous, subequal or the central a little longer, somewhat exceed- ing the lobes; upper florets similar to those of the lateral spikelets, the awns slightly longer, extending 1-2 mm beyond the lobes; anthers 2 mm long. Dry rocky hills and prairies, southwestern Texas, Arizona, and northern Mexico to Salvador. Texas: Presidio, Szlvews 734; Havard 30. Hot Springs, Silveus 649. Bone Spring (Tornillo Cr.), Havard 2. Study Butte (Brewster Co.), Moore & Steyermark 3300. South of Marathon, Swallen 1123. Without locality, Nealley in 1890. ARIZONA: Without locality, Palmer in 1869. Sonora: Alamos, Palmer 705 in 1890. Guaymas, Palmer 161 and 345 in 1887; Hitchcock 3546, 3551. Yaqui River, Palmer 17 and 18 in 1869. Imuris to Santa Ana, Griffiths 6834. Hermosillo, Hitchcock 3535, 3597. Altar, Wig- gins 5974; Pringle in 1884. Llano, Hitchcock 3528. CHIHUAHUA: Batopilas, Palmer 66 in 1885. SINALOA: Imala, Palmer 1459, 1460 in 1891. Culiacan, Brandegee 1, 2. “La Noria,”’ Mexia 295. Couima: Armeria, Hitchcock 7024. GUERRERO: Rio Balsas, Orcutt 4166. Oaxaca: San Geronimo, Mell 2144. GUATEMALA: Zacapa, Kellerman 7887. SALVADOR: La Union, Hitchcock 8776. 6. Cathestecum brevifolium Swallen, sp. nov. Perenne, stoloniferum, stolonibus gracilibus, late repentibus, internodiis ad 12 cm longis; culmi caespitosi, graciles, ramosi, erecti vel geniculati, 5-10 cm alti; vaginae glabrae vel sparse pilosae, imae basi dense villosae; laminae planae, acutae, cirratae, infra glabrae, supra scabrae et pilosae, 1—2.5 cm longae, 1—2 mm latae; spicae 3-8, purpureae, divergentes, biformes; spica mascula: gluma prima angusta, 1 mm longa; gluma secunda latior, acuta vel acuminata, glabra vel sparse pilosa, 2.5-3 mm longa, minute lo- bata, mucronata; lemma inferius 3 mm longum, sparse pilosum, lobatum, mucronatum, lemma superius 2.5 mm longum, lemmata inferiori simile sed lobis longioribus; spica feminea: spiculae laterales imperfectae; gluma prima 1 mm longa; gluma secunda acuminata, 2.5 mm longa, pilosa vel hirsuto- Dec. 15, 1937 BERRY: GYROCARPUS 501 villosa; flosculi reducti, steriles, raro masculi; gluma prima spiculae cen- tralis 1 mm longa, secunda 3 mm longa, lobata, mucronata, hirsuto-villosa; flosculus inferior femineus, lemmate 3 mm longo, sparse pubescente, lobato, aristis quam lobis paulo longioribus; flosculi superiores masculi vel neutri, lemmata 2.5 mm longa, fissa, aristis quam lobis 1-3 mm longioribus. Perennial, soloniferous, the stolons slender, wiry, widely spreading, the internodes as much as 12 cm long (usually less than 10 em), not conspicu- ously arched as in C. erectum; culms in small dense tufts, slender, usually branching, erect or geniculate at the nodes, 5-10 em tall (rarely to 15 em), glabrous; lower sheaths crowded, glabrous or sparsely pilose with a tuft of long hairs at the mouth, the lowermost densely villous at the base; blades firm, flat, acute, becoming conspicuously curled with age, glabrous on the lower surface, scabrous and pilose on the upper, the margins scabrous, 1—2.5 em long (rarely to 5 em), 1-2 mm wide; spikes 3-8, usually purple, spreading, dimorphous as in C. erectum; staminate spike: first glume narrow, 1 mm long; second glume broader, acute or acuminate, usually glabrous or sometimes sparsely pilose on the keel, those of the lateral spikelets 2.5 mm long, that of the central spikelet 3 mm long, minutely lobed, mucronate; lower lemmas 3 mm long, sparsely pilose, shallowly lobed, mucronate from between the lobes, the upper ones 2.5 mm long, similar to the lower but with somewhat deeper lobes; pistillate spikelets: lateral spikelets imperfectly developed, the first glume 1 mm long, the second glume acuminate, 2.5 mm long, pilose to hirsute-villous on the keel, the florets much reduced, sterile, or the lower one rarely staminate; first glume of central spikelet similar to those of the lateral spikelets, the second 3 mm long, minutely lobed, mucronate, hirsute-villous at least on the keel, the lower floret pistil- late, the lemma 3 mm long, sparsely pubescent on the back, the lobes one fourth the length of the lemma, the awns from between the lobes slightly exceeding them, the upper florets staminate or neuter, the lemmas 2.5 mm long, deeply cleft, the awns extending 1-3 mm beyond the lobes; stamens 1.3-1.6 mm long. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium no. 884043, collected on thin grav- elly soil, Tequila, Jalisco, Mexico, October 5, 1893, by C. G. Pringle (no. 4559). Sterile clay or rocky hills and gravelly soil, Jalisco and Colima, Mexico. JALisco: Guadalajara, Palmer 270 in 1886; Hitchcock 7278, 7300; Pringle 4046. San Nicolas, Hitchcock 7200, 7202. Tequila, Pringle 4559 (type). Valencia, Hitchcock 7003. GUANAJUATO: Irapuato, Hitchcock 7436. Couima: Colima, Palmer 12 in 1897, and 1261 in 1891. PALEOBOTAN Y.—Gyrocarpus and other fossil plants from the Cumarebo field in Venezuela. Epwarp W. Brrry, The Johns Hopkins University. Through the friendly interest of Dr. H. G. Kugler, the Trinidad Leaseholds, Limited, forwarded to me in the late summer of 1936, a small collection of fossil plants which had been collected by Dr. Suter of that company near the village of Cuque in the Cumarebo oil 1 Received September 20, 1937. 502 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 field of Venezuela. This field is on the Caribbean coast of the state of Falcon a few miles east of the base of the Paraguana peninsula. The horizon is the ‘‘Mammonal zone”’ of the Damsite series, which is considered to be of upper Miocene age. The matrix is a fine, light buff or brownish clay, said to be separated by well developed bedding planes of coarser material. The clay is crowded with plant fragments, mostly leaves, and its texture indicates accumulation in quiet water, so that one would expect perfectly preserved leaves rather than the more or less comminuted fragments such as have been found. The collection is of special interest from several points of view, notably in that it consists of but 26 small pieces of matrix of which half contain nothing that is determinable and the remaining 13 pieces contain not only four new species but four additional known species that can be positively identified with forms described from the Forest sand of the Island of Trinidad, B.W.I. From the character of the material contained in this small collection from Cuque it would seem that a much more extensive and varied suite of plants could be obtained from this horizon. The Damsite series, according to Liddle, comprises 3000 feet of shales, limestones and sandstones, with extensive marine faunas of upper and middle Miocene age. It is considered to be of about the same age as the Palmarejo formation and younger than the lower Miocene Betijoque formation, from both of which I have described a few fossil plants. It can not be said that the printed information on the stratigraphy of Venezuela is either complete or precise, despite the brave showing of Liddle’s useful account, nor is this the place to discuss it even were the facts available. The present collection is too limited to afford conclusive evidence as to its precise age or environment, but I see no reason for doubting that it is upper Miocene, since the four previously known species were all described from the Forest sand of Trinidad and three of these, Anacardites americanus, Colubrina miocenica and Sideroxylon masti- chodendroides, were definitely from the upper part of that formation. Recent collections of fossil plants from Trinidad, not yet described in print show the Szderoxylon in the Forest clay overlying the Forest sand, and both the Sideroxrylon and Anacardites at a locality known as the Mud Plant which is said to lie 1700 feet above the plant horizon in the Forest clay. As will be seen from the following list of species represented, all of the plants are angiosperms and all but one are dicotyledons. They represent 8 genera in 7 families and 7 orders, and it would seem that Dec. 15, 1937 BERRY: GYROCARPUS 503 the presence of the unique aroid Caladiosoma is sufficiently conclusive evidence of a wet tropical climate in a densely forested region, were such evidence thought necessary. Two of the genera, both represented by fruits or seeds—Melloa doubtfully, and Gyrocarpus more certainly —have not before been found fossil and the latter is of unusual interest. Monocotyledonae Arales Araceae Caladiosoma miocenica Dicotyledonae Rosales Leguminosae Mimosites suterr Leguminosites cuquensis Sapindales Anacardiaceae Anacardites americanus Rhamnales Rhamnaceae Colubrina miocenica Laurales Hernandiaceae Gyrocarpus miocenica Ebenales Sapotaceae Sideroxylon mastichodendroides Personales Bignoniaceae Melloa (?) cuquensis Caladiosoma miocenica Berry Caladiosoma miocenica Berry, Pan. Am. Geol. 44: 38, pl. 5, 1915; Johns Hopkins Studies in Geology 6: 83, pl. 10, figs. 1-4, 1925. A single fragment collected by Dr. Suter in the Cumarebo field shows a two centimeter length of two stout secondaries with the intervening lamina and with the absolutely characteristic tertiary venation of this species. Had it not been for the more complete material known from Trinidad, B.W.I., it would have been impossible to identify the tiny fragment from near Cuque. As it is the identification is as certain as anything can be on this mundane sphere. The type was described from the Forest sand of Trinidad and a reference 504 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 to the published figures, particularly of the tertiary venation, will convince the student that my statement of the impossibility of making a mistake has not been exaggerated. Mimosites suteri Berry, n. sp. Fig. 1 Leaflets small, elongate elliptical, somewhat inequilateral, widest me- dianly, slightly more narrowed at the rounded tip than at the rounded base, apparently sessile. Margins entire. Texture subcoriaceous. Length about 11 mm. Maximum width about 4.5mm. Midvein stout, straight, prominent. Secondaries numerous, thin, partially immersed, comptodrome. The species is represented by a complete leaflet and several fragments. It is a type of leaflet not uncommon in the various families of this extensive alliance and can be compared with existing leaflets in Cassia, Drepanocarpus, 2 Fig. 1.—Mimosites sutert Berry, n. sp. Fig. 2.—Leguminosites cuquensis Berry, n.sp. Fig. 3—Melloa? cuquensis Berry, n. sp. Fig. 4.—Gyrocarpus miocenica Berry, Nn. sp. Platypodium, Mimosa, Caesalpinia, and many other genera. It can probably be matched by fossil forms described under a variety of names from other regions and different geological horizons, but such comparisons are lacking in significance. It is referred to the form genus Mzmosites following tradition, and also because the Mimosaceae probably contains more genera with leaf- lets of this type than do the other families of Leguminosae. The species is named in honor of the collector, Dr. Suter of Trinidad Leaseholds, Ltd. Leguminosites cuquensis Berry, n. sp. Fig. 2 Leaflets elliptical, nearly symmetrical, widest medianly, with full and rounded entire margins and about equally rounded at the apex and base. No trace of a petiolule. Extremely thick and coriaceous in texture. Midvein very stout, straight and prominent. Secondaries thin, diverging from the midvein at wide angles, regularly curved and camptodrome, almost com- pletely immersed in the leaf substance, as are the tertiaries. Length about 3 cm. Maximum width about 2 cm. Dec. 15, 1937 BERRY: GYROCARPUS 505 This is a type of leaflet which is frequently referred to Sophora and might well represent that genus. It is referred to Leguminosites since it might equally represent Cassia, Dalbergia, Copacfera or other unrelated genera in this prolific alliance. Lacking generic certainty there is little point in com- parisons with either fossil or living species. Description is attempted since it may have stratigraphic value at some future time. Anacardites americanus Berry Anacardites americanus Berry, Johns Hopkins University Studies in Geology ~ Gs 104) pled dies 3. 1925, This species was described from the Forest sand of the Island of Trinidad, B.W.I. A single incomplete specimen is contained in the small collection from near Cuque, Venezuela. It represents a leaflet of some undeterminable member of the Anacardiaceae, Anacardites being a form genus proposed especially for material of this sort and the name does not imply any close relationship to the existing genus Anacardium. It has recently been found in the Forest clay and at the Mud Plant in Trinidad. Colubrina miocenica Berry Colubrina miocenica Berry, Johns Hopkins University Studies in Geology 6: 106, pl. 13, figs. 1-3, 1925. The type is not uncommon in the upper part of the forest sand of the Island of Trinidad, B.W.I. A single specimen with the base missing is present in the small collection from near Cuque, Venezuela. Gyrocarpus miocenica Berry, n. sp. Fig. 4 The present species is based upon a single fairly complete specimen and a few small fragments of the rather coriaceous wings. It does not differ ap- preciably from the immature fruits of the existing Gyrocarpus jacquini Roxburg except that the essential part was apparently spherical instead of being the very prolate spheroid of both the immature and mature fruits of the existing species. The thickened covering of the fruit is continued upward to form two, narrow, thickened, spatulate, mostly longitudinally parallel- veined wings which in the fossil specimen are pressed in a divergent position just as are the majority of recent immature fruits in herbarium material. Carpel about 4 mm in diameter. Wings about 4 cm long (estimated) and about 7 mm in maximum width. The mature fruits of the existing species may become very large and leathery, with opposite wings up to 10 or more centimeters in length, but they show great variation in size and some are scarcely if any larger than the fossils. There seems slight doubt but that the fossil represents a Miocene ancestor of the existing species. The supposedly single existing species is a stately tree with large quinque- palmate leaves much like those of Sterculia platanifolia Linné fils. It is not uncommon in northern South America and is common in the tropics of both the new and old worlds. The variation in the fruits alone seen in comparing 506 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 the fossil with the existing forms leads me to doubt the wisdom of referring all of the existing forms to a single botanical species. The present is the first fossil record of the genus and fulfills the necessary corollary that a genus found in both hemispheres must have had a geological history. Sideroxylon mastichodendroides Berry Sideroxylon mastichodendroides Berry, Johns Hopkins University Studies in Geology 6: p. 124, pl. 13, figs. 4-8, 1925. This is a common species in the upper part of the Forest sand of the Island of Trinidad, B.W.I. A part of a leaf and its counterpart are contained in the small collection from near Cuque, Venezuela. It has also been found recently in the Forest clay and at the Mud Plant in Trinidad. Melloa? cuquensis Berry, n. sp. Fig. 3 A single specimen and its counterpart of a small winged seed are doubt- fully referred to this genus of the Bignoniaceae on the basis of descriptions and figures as I have been unable to see seeds of the existing species. Seed circular, flatly compressed, about 5mm in diameter, with a thickened border, surrounded by a narrow fairly thick rim-like wing about 2 mm wide; no venation visible. The hilum and chalaza are at opposite poles of the seed dividing the wing into 2 equal semicircular segments. The reference to the Bignoniaceae appears to be reasonably certain but the genus is somewhat problematical, for adequate comparisons could not be made because specimens of seeds of the recent genera are seldom pre- served in available herbaria. No related fossil forms have heretofore been described. The genus comprises 2 or 3 existing species of lianas ranging from Venezuela to Brazil. Another genus with similar seeds is Eccremocarpus with several species of climbing shrubs in the Peruvian region. PALEOBOTANY.—Further additions to some fossil floras of the western United States.. Rotanp W. Brown, U. 8. Geological Survey. During the interval between the writing and publishing of my last paper on this subject? new collections have been received, some old collections have been reexamined, and several articles by other students dealing with the fossil floras of the western United States have been published. A survey of this material makes the following additions and changes necessary. Unless otherwise stated, the speci- mens figured are deposited in the U. 8S. National Museum. Populus jenningsi Brown, n. sp. Fig. 3 Description.—A 4-valved, open capsule, 1.8 cm in diameter; valves lance- 1 Received September 238, 1937. 2 Brown, Rotanp W. Additions to some fossil floras of the western United States. U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186: 163-206. 1937. Dre ib, 19SF BROWN: FOSSIL FLORAS 507 ovate, showing the broad placental lines with raised scars where the seeds were attached. The matrix in which this fossil was found is similar to that near Missoula, Mont., from which Jennings? in 1920 described a small flora assigned by him to the Oligocene. Although he reported two species of Populus—P. smilaci- folia and P. zaddachi—it seems now that neither of these belongs to Populus but can be referred to another genus. Fruits generally similar to this fossil have been described under one name or another from foreign countries, but so far as I know none has hitherto been reported as Populus from strata in the United States. I take pleasure in naming this fossil fruit for Dr. O. E. Jennings, of the Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. Occurrence.—Near O’Keefe Canyon, 11 miles northwest of Missoula, Mont. Collected by Earl Douglass. Populus lamottei Chaney & Elias Figs. 4, 5 Populus lamottei Chaney & Elias, Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 476 (1): 35, pl. 4, figs. 4, 5, 1936. Cercidiphyllum crenatum (Unger) Brown. Chaney and Elias, idem, p. 40, ml ye hese 3: A reexamination of both the follicle and leaf considered by Chaney and Elias to be Cercidiphyllum crenatum shows that they represent Populus instead. The features that more particularly distinguish the typical leaves of Cercidiphyllum from those of Populus, especially P. tremulozdes, the leaves of which are most nearly comparable to those of Cercidiphyllum, are the presence of 3 pairs of lateral veins arising from the top of the petiole, and the departure of the first prominent secondary vein from the midrib at a point above the middle of the blade. In the leaf (Fig. 5) assigned to Cercidiphyllum by Chaney and Elias there are only 2 pairs of lateral primaries, and the first strong secondary emerges from the left side of the midrib well below the middle of the blade. The venation is therefore populoid, and the leaf ap- parently belongs to Populus lamottet. The follicle (Fig. 4) represents the impression of the interior of two ane separated valves of a Populus fruit. On the dark placental line the scars where the seeds were attached can be seen faintly. What appears to be venation on the valves may be folds or cracks developed before or during fossilization. This follicle most likely also belongs with Populus lamottez, for it was found at the same locality as the leaves. It compares in size with the fruits of a number of cottonwoods, more particularly those of the South- western States. Occurrence.—Pliocene, locality P-42, sec. 3, T. 3 N., R. 25 E., southwest of Beaver, Beaver County, Okla. (Fig. 5); locality P- 44, 34 nites east of locality P-42, sec. 5, T. 3 N., R. 26 E. (Fig. 4). 3 JENNINGS, O. E. Fossil plants from the beds of volcanic ash near Missoula, western Montana. Carnegie Mus. Mem. 8(2): 385-450. 1920. 508 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 Fagus pacifica Chaney Fig. 11 Fagus pacifica Chaney, Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 346 (4): 108, pl. 10, figs. 6-9, 1927. Chaney described the leaves and fruit of this species from the Gray ranch, 11 miles east of Post, in the Crooked River basin, Oreg. The impres- sion of the fruit figured here (Fig. 11) comes from the reddish shales along Bridge Creek, Oreg., and is the first evidence of the presence of Fagus in the flora from the shales in that area. The flanges of the nut and the three per- sistent styles are well preserved. Occurrence.—Oligocene (according to the usage of the U. S. Geological Survey), 9 miles north of Mitchell, Oreg. Quercus bretzi Chaney Fig. 7 Quercus bretzi Chaney, Contrib. from Walker Mus. 2 (5): 171, pl. 12, fig. 4; pl. 138, fig. 3, 1920. These oblong to obovate shallowly lobed leaves with broad undulate apexes exhibit characters that suggest relationship to such living American white oaks as the bur oak, Quercus macrocarpa, and the swamp white oak, Q. bicolor, of the eastern United States. The type figured by Chaney (his pl. 12, fig. 4) is a well-nigh perfect example as such paleobotanic materials go. Occurrence.—Latah formation (Miocene), Spokane, Wash. Collected by E. E. Alexander. Quercus columbiana Chaney Figs. 6, 12 Quercus columbiana Chaney, Contrib. from Walker Mus. 2 (5): 170, pl. 13, firs. 1; 2, 1920: These elliptic to oblong leaves with relatively acute lobes and apexes of a single lobe only slightly larger than the lateral lobes may be compared to a number of living American white oaks, such as the white oak, Quercus alba, the valley oak, Q. lobata, the Oregon white oak, Q. garryana, and the Rocky Mountain white oak, Q. utahensis. To which of these specifically, if any, the fossil species may be related, it seems impossible to determine with the scanty material now at hand. The only other definite representative of the white oak group so far re- corded from the Latah formation is Quercus mccanni Berry’ from Grand Coulee, Wash. These leaves are remarkably like those of the chestnut oak, Q. prinus, of the eastern United States. The species, Q. spokanensis Knowl- ton,® founded on the upper half of a leaf, appears to be the tip of Castanea orientalis Chaney. The leaves of the white oak group are distinguished, in most species, from those of the black oak group by having rounded, blunt lobes, whereas those 4 Berry, E. W. A Miocene flora from Grand Coulee, Washington. U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 170: 36, pl. 11, figs. 5-7. 1931. 5 KNOWLTON, F. H. Flora of the Latah formation. U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 140: 37, pl. 19, fig. 3. 1926. Dec. 15, 1937 BROWN: FOSSIL FLORAS 909 of the black oaks are generally acute and bristle-tipped. On this basis the black oaks now recognized in the Latah formation are: Quercus merriami and Q. payettensis. It is possible that these two should be synonymized. The status of two other species, Q. szmulata and Q. consimilis, has not yet been satisfactorily determined. Occurrence.—Latah formation (Miocene), on Poorman Creek, 22 miles east of Orofino, Idaho (Fig. 6). Collected by Boyd H. Olson. On Potlatch Creek, between Arrow Junction and Juliaetta, Idaho (Fig. 12). Collected by Roland W. Brown. Cercidiphyllum crenatum (Unger) Brown Fig. 9 Cercidiphyllum crenatum (Unger) Brown, Jour. Paleont. 9 (7): 575-577, pl. 68, figs. 1, 6, 8-10, 1985.—_U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186: 175, 1937. In my 1935 paper I reported the leaves and capsules, but no seeds, of this species from the reddish shales along Bridge Creek, Oreg. The seeds are small and difficult to detect in the reddish matrix, but recently I succeeded in finding one and its counterpart. These small seeds, averaging 5 mm in length, are generally crescent-shaped, the seed portion being long and slender and about the same length as the wing which is attached laterally to the seed at almost a right angle. Small coniferous seeds (Fig. 8) from the same strata should not be confused with Cercidiphyllum, because their wings extend in the direction parallel to the linear axis of the seed. Occurrence.—Oligocene (according to the usage of the U. 8S. Geological Survey), 9 miles north of Mitchell, Oreg. Nymphaeites nevadensis (Knowlton) Brown, n. comb. Fig. 10 Spathyema? nevadensis Knowlton, U. 8. Geol. Survey Ann. Rept. 21 (2): 211 pl. 30, figs. 17, 18, 1900. Unknown plant. Idem, 212, pl. 30, figs. 16, 24, 25. Nymphaea diatoma MacGinitie, Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 416 (2): 55, pl. 7, fig. 6; pl. 8, 1933. Nymphaeites diatoma (MacGinitie) Arnold, Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 85, 1937. The impressions described by Knowlton from the Esmeralda formation of Nevada as an “unknown plant” are on the same piece of rock as those he called Spathyema? nevadensis. An examination of the surface of a rhizome of a living water lily shows large single petiole scars flanked by aggregates of small root scars; and it is to these, respectively, that Knowlton’s specimens correspond. It is possible that some of the smaller aggregates showing a gradation in size from large to small may be the impressions of the scars on a stem of Trapa americana, the nuts of which are abundant in the same strata. The seeds called Castalia? by Berry® also from the Esmeralda formation, 6 Berry, E. W. The flora of the Esmeralda formation. U.S. Nat. Mus. Proc. 72(23): 12, pl. 1, fig. 1. 1927. 510 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 — A Le WY Ws LoS Fi Populus 7,2 Sp 2 Figs. 6, 12 U Fig. 7.—Quercus bretzi Chaney. Fig. 8.— ig. comb. ig. 11.—Nut (Newberry) La Motte. Dec. 15, 1937 BROWN: FOSSIL FLORAS 511 may have been produced by Nymphaeites nevadensis, but as their identity is in doubt, they are not now synonymized with the latter species. It is not pos- sible to determine from Arnold’s sketch whether his N. rotundus, also from Trout Creek, should be synonymized here. The fossil figured here (Fig. 10) is an aggregate of circular to polygonal root sears showing central pits. Occurrence.—Miocene. Esmeralda formation, Nev.; Trout Creek, Oreg.; Payette formation, on east side of Snake River, 12 miles west of Weiser, Idaho (Fig. 10). Collected by Roland W. Brown. Amelanchier dignatus (Knowlton) Brown Celastrus dignatus Knowlton, U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 204: 71, pl. 11, fig. 5, 1902 Phyllites couleeanus Berry, U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 170: 42, pl. 18, fig. 12, 1931. Amelanchier scuddert Cockerell. Berry, U. S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 154: 252, pl. 55, fig. 4, 1929. Amelanchier dignatus (Knowlton) Brown, Jour. Paleont. 9: 577, pl. 69, figs. a0, 1935-—U). &: Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186:.176, pl. 53, fie. 11, 1937. Amelanchier magnifolia Arnold, Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 89, pl. 4, figs. 1, 4, text figs. 2, 3, 1937. Since my publication of the new combination, Amelanchier dignatus (Knowlton) Brown, in 1935, I have compared the specimens there combined with recently acquired new material and have concluded that the types of A. peritula Cockerell and A. scudderz Cockerell, from Florissant, Colo., and of A. grayi Chaney, from Crooked River, Oreg., on both stratigraphic and morphologic grounds, are different from A. dzgnatus and should not be synonymized with it. The three species thus removed from A. dignatus may represent a single species, but they at least are uniformily smaller and dis- play sharper apexes than A. dignatus. Arnold’s A. magnzfolia is clearly the same as A. dignatus as can be seen by comparing his figures with Knowlton’s Celastrus dignatus and Berry’s Phyllites couleeanus. The statement that the leaves of the living A. alnzfolia are much smaller than those of A. magnifolra is unfortunate. It is true that the average leaf of A. alnzfolia is smaller, but in my herbarium material of A. alnzfolia collected in Idaho in 1934 are speci- mens that easily match Arnold’s figures of A. magnifolia. Cedrela merrilli (Chaney) Brown, n. comb. Rhus merrilli Chaney, Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 346 (4): 125, pl. 16, figs. 1,2, 1927. Cedrela pteraformis (Berry) Brown, Jour. Paleont. 9 (7): 579, 1935. Referring only to Acer sp.? Newberry.— U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186: 179, 1937. Referring only to Pinus knowltoni Chaney [Mason]. Although the resemblance between the fossil leaflets called Rhus merrilla to those of the living Rhus sylvestris, of China, is very striking, as pointed out 512 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 by Chaney, two considerations cast doubt on their identification as Rhus. First, between the secondaries of Rf. sylvestris there are usually two or more very prominent, short, intermediate secondaries, but in the fossil leaflets these intermediates are thin, few, and commonly, none. Second, the winged seeds of Cedrela have been found in the same strata as the leaflets. Because these leaflets can be matched easily with those from living species of Cedrela and because they are associated with Cedrela seeds it seems more probable that they represent Cedrela than Rhus. In 1935 when I made the discovery that the winged seeds theretofore identified as Acer and Gordoniza were in reality Cedrela, | was unaware that fossils of this genus were of widespread occurrence in the middle Cenozoic floras of the western States. Since then, remains of Cedrela, either leaflets, capsules, or seeds, have been identified in the collections from Florissant, Colo.; Crooked River and Bridge Creek, Oreg.; Mascall formation, John Day basin, Oreg.; Tipton, Sumpter quadrangle, Oreg.; Sucker Creek, Oreg.; 49 Camp, Nev.; Hog Creek, Idaho; and Latah formation, Spokane, Wash. These occurrences cover a large area, geographically, and a span of time from upper Oligocene to early Pliocene. It seems probable therefore, that, instead of a single species, Cedrela pteraformis, several species were in exist- ence during that interval. Can these postulated species be distinguished in the fossil materials now at hand? The earliest western species now known, Cedrela lancifolia (Lesquereux) Brown’ from Florissant, has narrowly lanceolate leaflets and small seeds. It can apparently be separated readily from the other species which exhibit great variability in the size and form of their leaflets and seeds. The leaflets from Crooked River and Bridge Creek, Oreg., are uniformly elongate elliptic. Those from the Latah formation are in general relatively short, elliptic in outline, with rather blunt apexes. Those from the John Day basin, Trout Creek, and Sucker Creek, Oreg., are lanceolate to broadly ovate- lanceolate with rather acute apexes. As regards the seeds from these several localities I have not yet detected in them such morphologic differences as would serve to distinguish them specifically, but I assume that the capsules and seeds found at any given locality belong with the leaves occurring in the same formation. The fossil species of Cedrela from the western United States, on the basis of differences in foliage, therefore, now appear to be: C. lancifolia (Les- quereux) Brown, C. merrilli (Chaney) Brown, C. oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, and C. pteraformis (Berry) Brown. Occurrence.—Oligocene (according to the usage of the U. S. Geological Survey), Gray ranch, Crooked River basin; and 9 miles north of Mitchell, Bridge Creek basin, Oreg. 7 Brown, Rotanp W. Additions to some fossil floras of the western United States. U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186: 178, pl. 60, figs. 3, 4. 1937. Dec. 15, 1937 BROWN: FOSSIL FLORAS 513 Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Ficus? oregoniana Lesquereux, U. 8. Nat. Mus. Proc. 9: 18, pl. 9, fig. 3, 1888.—Knowlton, U. 8. Geol. Survey Bull. 204: 56, pl. 10, fig. 3, 1902. Sapindus oregonianus Knowlton. LaMotte, Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 455 (2): 37, pl. 1, fies..2. 3, o2upl..2. figs. 1—4; pl... 3, figs. 2, 4, 5, 1935. Sapindus affinis Newberry? MacGinitie, Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 416 (2): 60, 1933. Cedrela browniana Arnold, Amer. Midland Naturalist 17 (6): 1019, fig. 11, 1936.—Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 95, pl. 7, figs. 1, 2, 1937. Cedrela trainit Arnold, Amer. Midland Naturalist 17 (6) : 1018, figs. 1, 2, 1936—Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 95, pl. 6, figs. 1-3, 6, 1937. Apocynum indiana MacGinitie, Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 416 (2) : 66, pl. 12, fig. 1, 19383. Cedrela pteraformis (Berry) Brown, U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186: 179, pl. 60, fig. 9, 1937. Including also Pinus monticolensis Berry [LaMotte], Pinus russelli LaMotte, Pseudotsuga masont MacGinitie [LaMottel], Libocedrus sp. Dorf, and Cedrela pteraformis (Berry) Brown in Arnold, Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 95, pl. 6, figs. 4. 7-10, 1937. The leaflets of this species were characterized in the preceding discussion of Cedrela merrillz. Occurrence.—49 Camp, Nev.; Mascall formation (Miocene), John Day basin, Oreg.; Tipton, Oreg.; Trout Creek, Oreg.; Sucker Creek, Oreg.; Hog Creek (according to Dorf, Upper Miocene or lower Pliocene), Idaho. Cedrela pteraformis (Berry) Brown Cedrela pteraformis (Berry) Brown, Jour. Paleont. 9 (7): 579, 1935. Referring only to Carpolithus pteraformis Berry and Gordonia pteraformis Berry. —U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186:179, pl. 52, fig. 12; pl. 60, figs. 5-8, 10, 1937. Referring only to Umbellularia dayana (Knowlton) Berry and Sapindus armstrong: Berry. Cassia spokanensis Berry; U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 156: 253, pl. 63, fig. 8, 1929. The specimen called Cassza spokanensis by Berry is the impression of a large capsule that simulates those of Cedrela. The seeds of Cedrela are abundant in the Latah formation at Spokane, Wash. The leaflets of this species were characterized in the discussion of Cedrela merrilli. Occurrence.—Latah formation (Miocene), Spokane, Wash. Acer osmonti Knowlton Kiet Acer osmonti Knowlton, U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 204: 72, pl. 13, fig. 3, 1902. —Brown. U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186: 180, pl. 58, figs. 16-18, 1937. (See synonymy and discussion.) Rhus diluvialis Arnold, Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 93, pl. 5, fig. 4, 1937. 514 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 Both the samaras and leaves of this species are clearly of the silver maple (Acer saccharinum) type and may be readily identified. The fragment figured by Arnold as Rhus diluvialis is the lobe, probably apical, of a leaf of A. osmonti. The living Rhus trilobata to which this fragment was compared has rounded not sharp marginal teeth as displayed by the fossil. In the Sucker Creek collection of the U. 8S. National Museum are specimens of Acer bendirer Lesquereux, A. glabroides Brown, and A. osmonti Knowlton. Occurrence.—Latah formation (Miocene) on Orofino Creek, 20 miles east of Orofino, Idaho. Collected by Boyd H. Olson. Acer scottiae MacGinitie Fig. 2 Acer scottiae MacGinitie. Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 416 (2):62, pl. 11, figs. 4, 8; pl. 12, fig. 4, 1933. Acer septilobatum Oliver. Dorf, Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 476 (2): 122, pl. 3, fig. 5, 1936. The samara figured here (Fig. 2) is almost identical with that figured by Dorf. Both, however, differ somewhat from the type in having the distal end of the wing less prominently upturned. All, having long, squarely trun- cated, proximal ends (the line of attachment to the twin), seem clearly to belong to the Platanoidea section of Acer. Occurrence.—Diatomite (probably the Idaho formation of Kirkham) in road cut 11 miles south of Horseshoe Bend toward Boise, Idaho. Collected by Roland W. Brown and Don Emigh, Aug. 25, 1934. Tilia aspera (Newberry) LaMotte Fig. 13 Tilia aspera (Newberry) LaMotte, Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 455 (3): 45, pl. 1, figs. 1-8; pl. 2, figs. 1, 2, 1933. Tilia oregona LaMotte. Idem, 47, pl. 3, fig. 6. [Platanus aspera Newberry, U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 35: 102, pl. 59, fig. 3. 1898.] Tilia sp. Arnold, Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 94, pl. 5, fig. 1, 1987. The fragmentary bract figured here (Fig. 13) is the sole evidence of Tzlia so far reported from Sucker Creek, Oreg. A portion of the peduncle bearing the fruit is preserved, and that is connate with the midrib of the bract for only a short distance. The peduncle of the bract, it should be noted, is un- ~ usually long as compared with those of most living species of T7lza. The leaf originally called Platanus aspera Newberry, from Bridge Creek, Oreg., and referred by LaMotte to Tilia oregona, is a small leaf of T. aspera, because it has the long, coarse teeth and the conspicuously asymmetric base that characterize the latter species. Occurrence.—Miocene, on Sucker Creek, near the Idaho-Oregon boundary. Nyssa hesperia Berry Nyssa knowltont Berry. Brown, U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 186: 184, pl. 62, figs. 1-3, 1987. [Not Nyssa knowltoni Berry, U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 154: 261, pl. 59, fig. 7, 1929.] Nyssa hesperia Berry, U. S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 170: 42, pl. 13, figs. 9-11, 1931. Dec. 15,1937 BROWN: FOSSIL FLORAS 515 With the acquisition of new material from the Latah formation at Spo- kane, Wash., it becomes apparent that the specimens figured by me as Nyssa knowltoni in 1937 differ so markedly in form and secondary venation from the type described by Berry in 1929 that they should be segregated from the latter and retain the name N. hesperza. Whether the type of N. knowltoni is in reality a Nyssa is problematical. Its form and venation find counterparts in some of the leaves of the living Magnolia acuminata and also in the entire, somewhat asymmetric leaflets of Rhus toxicodendron. CHANGES OF NAME AND NEW COMBINATIONS Acer aquilum Chaney (Contrib. from Walker Mus. 2 (5): 178, pl. 17, figs. A, 5; pl. 18, fig. 1; pl. 19, fig. 1, 1920)—Acer negundoides MacGinitie. Acer completum Chaney (idem, 179, pl. 18, fig. 2)—Acer negundoides Mac- Ginitie. Acer merriami Knowlton (U. 8. Geol. Survey Bull. 204: 74, pl. 14, fig. 7, 1902) = Platanus dissecta Lesquereux. Acer septilobatum Oliver (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 455 (1): 25, pl. A, figs. 1, 2, 1934)=Acer bendzrex Lesquereux. The coarse marginal teeth distinguish this species from the circinnatum type to which it was likened, and relate it to the macrophyllum type. I can match Oliver’s septilobate leaves with specimens of macrophyllum I collected near You Bet, Calif., in 1936. Acer septilobatum Oliver. Dorf (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 476 (2): 122, pl. 3, fig. 5, 1936) =Acer scottiae MacGinitie. Acer sp.? Newberry (U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 35: 115, pl. 46, fig. 8, 1898) = Cedrela merrilli (Chaney) Brown, n. comb. Amelanchier magnifolia Arnold (Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 89, pl. 4, figs. 1, 4, text figs. 2, 3, 1937) =Amelanchier dignatus (Knowlton) Brown. Apocynum indiana MacGinitie (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 416 (2): 66, pl. 12, fig. 1, 1933) =Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Cassia spokanensis Berry (U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 156: 253, pl. 63, fig. 8, 1929) =Cedrela pteraformis (Berry) Brown. Cedrela browniana Arnold (Amer. Midland Naturalist 17 (6): 1019, fig. 11, 1936) =Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Cedrela trainii Arnold (idem, 1018, figs. 1, 2) =Cedrela oregoniana (Lesque- reux) Brown n. comb. Cedrela pteraformis (Berry) Brown (part) = Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Cercidiphyllum crenatum (Unger) Brown. Chaney and Elias (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 476 (1): 35, pl. 4, figs. 4, 5, 1936) = Populus lamottez Chaney & Elias. Diospyros elliptica Knowlton (U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 204: 83, pl. 16, figs. 5, 1902) = Castanopsis convexa (Lesquereux) Brooks. Fagus? bonnevillensis Chaney (Contrib. from Walker Mus. 2 (5): 167, pl. 11, fig. 1, 1920) = Fagus washoensis LaMotte. Ficus? oregoniana Lesquereux. Knowlton (U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 204: 56, pl. 10, fig. 3, 1902) = Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Libocedrus sp. Dorf (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 476 (2): 108, pl. 1, fig. 4, 1936) =Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. 516 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 Liriodendron trilobatum Chaney (Contrib. from Walker Mus. 2 (5): 173, pl. 14, fig. 4) =Acer negundoides MacGinitie. Nymphaea diatoma MacGinitie (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 416 (2): 55, 7, fig. 1, 1933) = Nymphaeztes nevadensis (Knowlton) Brown, n. comb. Nymphaeites diatoma (MacGinitie) Arnold (Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of ee 5 (8): 85, 1937) = Nymphaeites nevadensis (Knowlton) Brown, n. comb. Nyssa knowltoni Berry (part) = Nyssa hesperia Berry. Philadelphus bendiret (Knowlton) Chaney. Arnold (Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8):88, pl. 3, fig. 4, 1937) =Sassafras hesperia Berry. Arnold’s leaf figured as Philadelphus bendtrez is a fragment of an unlobed leaf of Sassafras hesperia. Picea? sp. Chaney (Contrib. from Walker Mus. 2 (5): 159, pl. 5, fig. 2, 1920) = Betula fairza Knowlton. Pinus knowltont Chaney. Mason (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 346 (5): 148, pl. 2, fig. 3, 1927) = Cedrela merrill: (Chaney) Brown, n. comb. Pinus monticolensis Berry. LaMotte (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 455 (5): 110, pl. 5, figs. 1, 4, 1936) =Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Pinus russella LaMotte (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 455 (5): 110, pl. 5, figs. 2, 3, 1936) =Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Populus lindgreni Knowlton. LaMotte (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 455 (5): 115, pl. 5, fig. 1, 1936) = Populus washoensis Brown, new name. The type of P. lindgrent Knowlton has numerous, relatively small, somewhat crenate, rounded, marginal teeth, whereas the specimen figured by LaMotte has few, large, dentate, blunt-pointed teeth, and a longer, slenderer petiole. Pseudotsuga masoni MacGinitie. LaMotte (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 455 (5): 111, pl. 2, figs. 6, 7, 1936) =Cedrela oregoniana (Lesque- reux) Brown, n. comb. Quercus duriuscula Knowlton. Dorf (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 476 (2): 114, pl. 2, fig. 8, 1936) =Quercus columbiana Chaney. Quercus spokanensis Knowlton (U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 140: 37, pl. 19, fig. 3, 1926) = Castanea orientalis Chaney. Quercus sp., unnamed leaf. Berry (U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 156, pl. 50, fig. 15, 1929) = Salix spokanensis (Berry) Brown. Rhus diluvialis Arnold (Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 93, pl. 5, fig. 4, 1937) = Acer osmonti Knowlton. Rhus merrilli Chaney (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 346 (4): 125, pl. 16, figs. 1, 2, 1927) =Cedrela merrilli (Chaney) Brown, n. comb. Rhus payettensis Knowlton (U. 8. Geol. Survey Ann. Rept. 18 (3): 733, pl. 101, figs. 6, 7, 1898) = Fraxinus idahoensts Brown. Sapindus affints Newberry? MacGinitie (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 416 (2): 60, 19383) =Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Sapindus oregonianus Knowlton (U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 204: 79, pl. 15, fig. 3, 1902) = Castanopsis convexa (Lesquereux) Brooks. Sapindus oregonianus Knowlton. LaMotte (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 455 (2): 37, pl. 1, figs. 2; 3, 5; pl. 2, figs. 1-4; pl. 3, fies: 2745 1935) =Cedrela oregoniana (Lesquereux) Brown, n. comb. Scale. Chaney (Contrib. from Walker Mus. 2 (5): 181, pl. 22, fig. 5, 1920) = Libocedrus praedecurrens Knowlton. Spathyema? nevadensis Knowlton (U. 8S. Geol. Survey Ann. Rept. 21 (2): Dec. 15, 1987 CHITWOOD AND CHITWOOD: NEMIC ESOPHAGI 517 211, pl. 30, figs. 17, 18, 1900) =Nymphaeites nevadensis (Knowlton) Brown, n. comb. Sterculia aceroides Knowlton (U. 8. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 131: 191, pl. 43, fig. 12, 1923) = Mahonia marginata (Lesquereux) Arnold. Tilia sp. Arnold (Contrib. Mus. Paleont., Univ. of Mich. 5 (8): 94, pl. 5, fig. 1, 1937) = Tilia aspera (Newberry) LaMotte. Tilia oregona LaMotte (Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub. 455 (3): 45, pl. 1, fig. 6, 1935. [Platanus aspera Newberry, U.S. Geol. Survey Mon. 35: 102, pl. 59, fig. 3, 1898] ) = T7zlia aspera (Newberry) LaMotte. Unknown plant. Knowlton (U.S. Geol. Survey Ann. Rept. 21 (2): 212, pl. 30, figs. 16, 24, 25, 1900) = Nymphaeites nevadensis (Knowlton) Brown, n. comb. ZOOLOGY .—The histology of nemic esophagi. VIII. The esophagus of representatives of the Enoplida.!. B. G. Cuirwoop, Bureau of Animal Industry, and M. B. Cuirwoop. This paper is the eighth of a series (Chitwood and Chitwood, 1934— 1936) describing the esophagi of representatives of various groups of the Nematoda. In previous papers representatives of the suborders Rhabditina, Strongylina, Ascaridina, Chromadorina, and Monhys- terina have been studied. The present paper deals with representa- tives of the three suborders of the Enoplida, namely, Enoplina, Dory- laimina, and Diocotophymatina. Of the free-living representatives of this group only Enoplus, Oncholaimus, Thoracostoma, Cylicolaimus, and Dorylaimus have received any attention by previous authors and even these were not studied from the standpoint of nuclear distribu- tion and nuclear constancy. Among the parasitic forms Hexamermis, Trichuris, Trichinella and Capillaria have been studied, but recent observations (Chitwood, 1935) make it necessary to reinvestigate the esophagi of the trichuroids and mermithoids from the comparative standpoint. References to the results of previous authors will be made in the text wherever closely related forms are treated. The nomenclature and general approach in this paper is the same as that in previous papers and is explained in Part I of the series. As in the sixth paper of the series, data are presented in tabular form, wherever possible, in order to avoid extended descriptions. Prionchulus muscorum (Mononchidae) The esophagus of this species is cylindrical, only slightly larger at the posterior end than at the anterior end, and its proximal-end surrounds the basal part of the stoma. Grossly, the anterior part differs from the posterior part in being completely muscular, the posterior part containing lobulations of the esophageal glands. The lumen varies with the region of the esophagus but retains a peculiarly modified triradiate character throughout its length. 1 Received August 13, 1937. 518 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 This is due to 6 thickenings of the esophageal lining which serve as attach- ment points for the radial muscles. The esophagus cannot clearly be subdivided into regions homologous with those of rhabditids, but in general the muscular part is comparable to the corpus and the glandular part to the bulbar region. There are 36 radial muscle nuclei arranged in 6 groups, the first and second groups (11-12) being anterior to the nerve ring, and the fourth, fifth, and sixth groups (ri3_3.) posterior to the nerve ring. The nuclei of the first two groups are consider- ably smaller than those of the remaining groups. There are 9 marginal nuclei arranged in 3 groups, the first group (mj_3) being immediately anterior to the third group of radial nuclei (13-13), the second (mys) lying between the fourth and fifth groups of radial nuclei (19-24 aNd e539) and the third group (m;_») near the base of the esophagus and near the level of the sixth group of radial nuclei (131_3.). There are 44 nerve cell nuclei, 25 being situated anterior and 22 posterior to the fourth group of radial nuclei. The peculiarities of the pattern of dis- tribution of nerve cell nuclei are distinctive and, with modifications, char- acteristic of the Enoplina and close relatives. Five esophageal gland nuclei are present, 1 (g:) in the dorsal sector and 2 (go 4) in each of the subventral sectors. The dorsal nucleus lies anterior to the others, near the fourth group of radial nuclei (Fig. 2) while the subven- tral nuclei are arranged in tandem and posterior to the fifth group of radial nuclei. Each esophageal gland possesses a separate opening close to the nucleus. The esophago-intestinal valve consists of a short internal triradiate layer of tissue outside of which there is a circular layer, the whole containing 22 nuclei. Tripyla papillata (Tripylidae) The esophagus of this species is cylindrical throughout, terminating in a complex, lobular, esophago-intestinal valve. The stoma is rudimentary, the stomatal region being entirely surrounded by esophageal tissue; the lumen is simple, triradiate, and the lining without thickened attachment points for the radial muscles which are dispersed throughout the sectors rather than concentrated in special areas. There are 36 radial nuclei, 12 marginal nuclei, 45 nerve cell nuclei, 5 gland cell nuclei and 1 nucleus (si) of undetermined character. The relative posi- tion of most of the nuclei is essentially the same as in Prionchulus except that there are 4 groups of marginal nuclei instead of 3, the fourth group being situated anterior to the first group of radial nuclei; the dorsal esophag- eal gland nucleus (gi) is situated posterior to n39 in Tripyla whereas in Prionchulus it is anterior to ngs. The dorsal gland nucleus is the largest nucleus of the esophagus; the gland in which it lies opens through the small dorsal denticle at the base of the stomatal region; throughout the anterior part of the esophagus the gland is small and occupies only a small part of the dorsal sector, but becomes lobed and extensive in the posterior part of the esophagus. The nuclei of the first pair of subventral glands are but little larger than the radial nuclei, and those of the second pair are intermediate in size between the first pair of subventral gland nuclei and the dorsal gland nucleus. The first pair of subventral glands have orifices near the level of the dorsal gland orifice, while the second pair appears to have separate orifices situated near the nerve ring, a short dis- tance anterior to their nuclei; no subventral gland tissue extends anterior to the fifth group of radial nuclei. Dec. 15, 1937 cHITWOOD AND CHITWOOD: NEMIC ESOPHAGI o19 The posterior lobed structure (commonly termed the ‘“‘pseudobulb,’’) at the base of the esophagus apparently represents an unusual development of the esophago-intestinal valve and does not correspond to the base of the esophagus as commonly supposed. The external, lobed part of this structure contains 7 large nuclei and the internal part of this structure contains about 96 small nuclei; some of these nuclei lie in a triradiate tissue surrounded by the external lobed layer, while the others lie posterior to this structure; the anterior (internal) portion is continuous posteriorly with the intestine. The above-described formation is homologous with the ‘‘pseudobulb”’ of Trilobus and does not correspond to the bulbar region of other nematodes. Prismatolaimus sp. (Tripylidae) The prismatolaim esophagus resembles that of Trzpyla in being cylindrical and terminating in a massive esophago-intestinal valve; here, however, the resemblance ceases. There is a well developed cylindroid stoma surrounded only at its base by esophageal tissue, and there are three inconspicuous teeth projecting from the base of the stoma which are very similar to those of the oncholaims. The lumen is simple, with very faint indications of terminal dilation of the radii; the lining is unmodified but the radial muscles are con- centrated rather than dispersed as in Tripyla. The radial nuclei (30 in number) as well as the marginal and nerve cell nuclei are arranged in a pattern somewhat closer to that found in Eury- stomina than to that occurring in any other form. The five subequal esophag- eal gland nuclei are located in the posterior part of the esophagus, and a gland duct extends anteriad through the center of each sector to the anterior end where each opens into the stoma through an orifice in the corresponding tooth. Orifices of the second pair of subventral glands, if separate from the first pair, are probably situated near the nerve ring. The esophago-intestinal valve is triradiate, massive and apparently con- tains 13 nuclei. Aliamus sp. (Alaimidae) The esophagus of this form consists of a rather elongate anterior part and a moderately short, wide, glandular posterior part. Since the stoma is rudi- mentary, the stomatal region is surrounded by esophageal tissue. A complete enumeration of the nuclei was not possible. There are 5 subequal esophageal gland nuclei, the nucleus of the dorsal gland being slightly larger than the nuclei of the subventral glands; the orifice of the dorsal gland is situated at the base of the stomatal region while those of the subventral glands are in the posterior part of the esophagus. The radial muscles are concentrated but no attachment points are present. The esophago-intestinal valve is short, triradiate, and appears to contain 9 nuclei. Metoncholaimus pristiurus (Oncholaimidae) The esophagus of Metoncholaimus pristiurus is cylindrical, and esophageal tissue surrounds only the base of the stoma. Grossly, the anterior and pos- terior parts of the esophagus are very similar; the part of the esophagus an- terior to the nerve ring is uniformly muscular while in the part posterior to the nerve ring the muscle tissue is broken up to a slight extent by lobulations of the esophageal glands. The lumen is simple, closed and triradiate through- out, and the cuticular lining is thin and without modified regions for the attachment of muscles. 520 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 There are 12 marginal nuclei arranged in 4 groups of 3 nuclei each, this distribution being similar to that in Tr7zpyla except that the third group of marginals is between the third and fourth groups of radial nuclei instead of between the fourth and fifth groups of radials as in Trzpyla. The radial nuclei are only 27 in number; they are arranged in 4 groups of 6, and 1 group of 3 radial nuclei each. The first three groups undoubtedly correspond to the first 3 groups of radial nuclei in other forms; the fourth group corresponds to METONCHOLAIMUS EURYSTOMINA PHANODERMOPSIS ANTICOMA LEPTOSOMATUM ENOPLUS TRIPYLA PRIONCHULUS DORYLAIMUS AGAMERMIS TRICHURIS DIOCTOPHYMA Fig. 1—Diagrams of esophagi in the Enoplida. the fifth group in other forms. The last group (re5_27) is composed obviously of giant nuclei resulting from the failure of one nuclear division (Fig. 2). There are 43 nerve cell nuclei which correspond in general to the nerve cell nuclei described in previous forms; the chief differences from forms such as Tripyla is that there is 1 additional nucleus (n43) in the mid-dorsal row an- Dec. 15, 1937 CHITWOOD AND CHITWOOD: NEMIC ESOPHAGI 521 terior to the peculiar dorsal group (Ne9-32) and there are 2 less subdorsal nerve cell nuclei at the posterior end of the esophagus (ny3_44 of Tripyla). Three esophageal glands open into the stoma through the 3 teeth. From their orifices posteriorly, each gland is represented by a small strand of tissue containing the duct in the center of each sector extending approximately to the level of nzo_31; posterior to this level they become branched and enter other intermuscular regions of the sectors. Rauther (1907) described Oncho- laimus sp. (?vulgaris) as having 5 esophageal glands, 1 dorsal, 2 lateral, and 2 ventral. The lateral glands according to Rauther, open into the lumen some distance from the anterior end of the esophagus. in Metoncholaimus pristiu- rus, however, the present writers observed 1 dorsal and 4 subventral glands, all 5 nuclei being approximately the same size. In so far as the writers have been able to observe, the 2 subventral glands of each sector have but 1 orifice and their cytoplasm is continuous. If additional orifices are present, they are probably situated near the subdorsal margins of the subventral sectors near Ns3o_21. The esophago-intestinal valve is elongated, triradiate and consists of an internal trilobed layer containing radial fibers, and a double external layer of circular fibers; the whole is inclosed in a trilobed mass of tissue. The nuclei are numerous (number not determined). A single large nucleus, simi- lar to those of the radial muscle tissue of the esophagus, is situated at the junction of the esophagus and the esophago-intestinal valve. Eurystomina americana (Oncholaimidae) The esophagus of this species is of the type generally termed ‘‘conoid’’; the anterior end is narrow and muscular, gradually increasing in diameter posterior to the nerve ring, the posterior third being wide, glandular, and cylindrical. The lumen is simple, triradiate, but the esophageal lining carries paired cuticular thickenings in the form of attachment points for the radial muscles; these thickenings, similar to those of Prizonchulus, Dorylaimus, Ironus and Cryptonchus, extend from the anterior end of the esophagus to a short distance posterior to the nerve ring or approximately to the begin- ning of the glandular part of the esophagus. The number (12) and arrangement of marginal nuclei is like that in Tripyla and Oncholaimus. There are 44 nerve-cell nuclei as in T'rzpyla and Prionchulus, the first 28 of which are arranged as in those forms, while the remainder differ in many respects in their distribution. Only 30 radial nuclei are present, these being arranged in 5 groups of 6 each. Only 3 nuclei have been identified with certainty as belonging to the esophageal glands; all three of these nuclei are gigantic, the right subventral being considerably larger than the other two. All three glands open through teeth into the cavity of the stoma, the right subventral tooth, like the right subventral gland, being much larger than the other two. In some series there appear to be 2 additional small subventral gland nuclei situated anterior to the large ones. The esophago-intestinal valve contains only 8 nuclei; the anterior part is triradiate in cross section while posterior part is dorso-ventrally flattened. Enoplus communis v. meridionalis (Enoplidae) The esophagus of Enoplus is cylindrical, slightly enlarged posteriorly, and shows moderate ‘‘vesiculation”’ in the glandular region. Since the stoma is reduced—the stomatal region being indicated by the large bifurcate teeth— this region is entirely surrounded by esophageal tissue. The lumen is simple 522 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 and the esophageal lining unmodified (1.e., without cuticular thickenings) throughout the length of the esophagus. There are 12 marginal nuclei, arranged approximately as in Tripyla. Only 33 radial muscle nuclei are present and of these the first 30 comprise the first 5 groups of radial nuclei which correspond to the first 5 groups of Tripyla, while the last group of 3 nuclei (r3i_33) apparently represents the 6 nuclei (r3i_3s) composing the sixth group of radial nuclei in that form. The nerve cell nuclei, 44 in number, correspond to the 44 nerve cell nuclei of Prionculus and Tripyla, but their arrangement differs considerably. There are 3 large similar esophageal-gland nuclei (gli_;) and 2 smaller subventral gland nuclei (g2_3). Just posterior to the latter. an additional pair of ventro- lateral nerve cell nuclei (si_2) are present. The three large esophageal glands have their orifices at the base of the teeth as Rauther (1907) has already shown in Enoplus sp. The vesiculate appearance of the esophagus when viewed in toto is due to the separation of radial muscle fibers by gland tissue. The cytoplasm of the glands is rela- tively greater in proportion to the muscular tissue than in any of the forms previously described. The esophago-intestinal valve is short, consisting of an internally trilobed and an externally circular part; the entire valve contains 12 or 13 nuclei (actual number not ascertainable). Anticoma litoris (Enoplidae) The esophagus of Anticoma is cylindrical and similar to that of Hnoplus; the anterior part surrounds the stomatal region. Since all of the nuclei have their homologues in Enoplus, they are arranged in a practically identical pattern (Fig. 2) and further description seems unnecessary. The gland ori- fices all appear to be situated at the anterior end of the esophagus, the 2 small subventral glands ending in the marginal regions of the dorsal sector. The esophago-intestinal valve is like that of Enoplus. Rhabdodemania minima (Enoplidae) The esophagus of Rhabdodemania is also like that of Enoplus, except that the orifice of the dorsal gland is some distance from the anterior end of the esophagus; the small subventral glands (g2_3) extend nearly to the anterior end as in Anticoma, and the large subventral glands (gs-s) have swollen ampulla near the level of their orifices. Leptosomatum elongatus v. acephalatum (Enoplidae) The esophagus of Leptosomatum is grossly conoid, of smooth contour and internally vesiculate. The lumen is simple, triradiate, and the lining thick but unmodified. The relative proportions of muscular and glandular tissue give to the esophagus a consistency somewhat like that observed in Hurysto- mina or Enoplus. There are 2 groups of 3 marginal nuclei, 3 groups of 6 radial nuclei and 18 nerve cell nuclei anterior to the nerve ring as in Eurystomina and Enoplus. Posterior to the nerve ring nuclear identification becomes extremely difficult due to a great increase in the number of these structures, there being ap- proximately 105 nuclei in the remainder of the esophagus. The ventral gland nuclei have apparently undergone multiple division, since nuclei lie in all possible positions and have little or no definite arrangement. The numerous small nuclei extend into the dorsal as well as the subventral sectors, although Dec. 15, 1937 CHITWOOD AND CHITWOOD: NEMIC ESOPHAGI 523 the dorsal gland nucleus has retained its individuality. There is no evidence of atypical division such as nuclear budding, for the small nuclei are all of about equal size. The subventral esophageal gland orifices are near the an- terior end of the esophagus while that of the dorsal gland is situated some- what posterior. Leptosomatum is provided with pigment spots or ‘‘ocelli’’ which are gen- erally considered to be situated dorsal to the esophagus; the spots are acorn- 2 2 ae | eee a BS) ees Ly | SVIDCICOT D-ILDIOLISV TY) PRIONCHULUS Fig. 2.—Tables of nuclear distribution in the Enoplida. shaped and contain a distinct lens. Schulz (1931) described such ocelli in Parasymplocostoma formosum, stating that the lens is a continuation of the external cuticular covering of the body and that the presence of a special cell lying outside of the esophagus is responsible for this formation. In the present form, such is not the case. The pigment spot and lens form a swelling in the wall of the esophagus and are clearly of esophageal derivation. This is a peculiar situation in the origin of photoreceptors, if such they be, and supplies definite evidence of the homology of this type of ocellus with the pigment spots of forms such as Enoplus. Cryptonchus nudus (Ironidae) The esophagus of Cryptonchus grossly resembles that of Dorylaimus since it is clearly divisible into a narrow anterior muscular part and a wide pos- 524 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 terior glandular part. The long cylindrical stoma is surrounded by esophag- eal tissue throughout its. length and the esophageal lining has marked at- tachment points for the concentrated radial muscles except in the basal region. The esophageal nuclei seem to follow the pattern seen in Prionchulus more closely than to any of the other enoploids, but the dorsal gland nucleus is situated near the level of g,_; instead of being far anterior as in Prionchu- lus and Dorylaimus. Apparently the glands have orifices in the posterior part of the esophagus since no tubes extending anteriorly were observed. The rather thick esophago-intestinal valve is very well developed, triradiate, and consists of an anterior part which contains at least five nuclei of obvious esophageal origin followed by a posterior part (cardiac column) containing about 35 nuclei and apparently represents a differentiated region of the intestine. . Tronella prismatolaima (Ironidae) The esophagus and stoma of Ironella are both cylindroid, the latter being surrounded by esophageal tissue and the stomatal region set off from the remainder of the esophagus as a distinct enlargement. The esophageal lining has large thickened attachment points for the radial muscles. The nuclear arrangement is apparently like that of Cryptonchus, and the 5 esophageal gland nuclei are subequal but the glands extend anteriorly through the sto- matal region nearly to the base of the three bifurcate teeth. Tronus ignavus (Ironidae) This form appears to be somewhat intermediate between Cryptonchus and Tronella, having the gross morphology of Cryptonchus but the teeth of Iron- ella; the esophageal glands have orifices anterior to the base of the stomatal region, the subventrals opening near the teeth and the dorsal about midway between the teeth and base of the stoma. Phanodermopsis longisetae (Enoplidae) The general outline of the esophagus of Phanodermopsis, like that of Eurystomina, is of the type described as “‘conoid,’’ but unlike the latter the margin of the posterior part of the esophagus is ‘‘crenate.’”’ The crenate ap- pearance is due to development of the esophageal glands and reduction in the relative amount of muscular tissue, the strands of which are set off in relief causing the illusion of cells. The lumen is usually open toward the margins; the esophageal lining is simple. The nuclear arrangement anterior to the nerve ring in this form appears to agree with that of Enoplus, except that the fourth group of radial nuclei is anterior to Nyo_13 instead of posterior to Nyg—27 as in Hnoplus. Posterior to the nerve ring the number and distribution of nerve cell nuclei and marginal nuclei appear to be as in Hnoplus, while there is a fifth group of 6 radial nuclei near the level of n37_33 (not far from the position of the fourth group of radial nuclei in Enoplus), and there appears to be 2 groups of 3 radial nuclei, or a complete sixth group, instead of 1 group of 3 radial nuclei (the diminished sixth group in Hnoplus) near the posterior end of the esophagus. There are 2 extremely large subventral gland cell nuclei situated not far from the posterior end of the esophagus. Near the anterior end of the glandu- lar region in the dorsal sector there are three bands of tissue each containing a nucleus; these probably are the dorsal and small subventral (g2-3) gland nuclei which in this case have moved to the dorsal sector. The subventral esophageal glands extend to the anterior end of the Dec. 15, 1937 CHITWOOD AND CHITWOOD: NEMIC ESOPHAGI 525 esophagus where they open directly into the lumen. The glandular tissue of the dorsal sector stains very intensely with hematoxylin, and near the level of m7_» the tissue is distinctly subdivided into a dorsal and 2 subdorsal marginal lobes, each of which may represent a separate gland. While no orifice has been observed, it is certain that no glandular material extends anterior to ngo in the dorsal sector. The esophago-intestinal valve is short, internally triradiate and externally circular, the whole containing 8 nuclei. Soboliphyme baturini (Soboliphymatidae) The esophagus of Soboliphyme is cylindrical and without subdivisions. Since there is no stoma, the anterior end of the esophagus projects slightly into the muscular oral sucker. The esophageal lumen is simple and trira- diate throughout its length. The orifices of the three esophageal glands are situated at the extreme anterior end of the esophagus. From each of these orifices a short terminal cuticle-lined duct extends to a short distance posterior to the nerve ring where it bifurcates. Each branch is thick-walled and lined by a peculiar fibrillar layer which is apparently composed of “cilia.”’ Still further posteriad the ‘‘cilia’’ disappear and the branches fur- ther subdivide until there may be as many as six parallel tubes in each sector of the esophagus. At times some of the tubules end blindly, while others divide. As a rule, the outer or most marginal tubules in each sector are the ones which terminate blindly while the others continue. There is little difference in the appearance of the glands except near the base of the esophagus. At this point the protoplasm of the dorsal gland tubules is reticu- late and the lumen may contain a reticulated mass; the subventral gland tubules appear to have acidophilic granules imbedded in the tubule wall and the protoplasm is more dense than that of the dorsal gland tubes. Exact information cannot be given regarding the nuclei of the esophagus since only one complete series of sections was available for study, and in places these sections may not have been correctly placed. However, the esophageal glands are multinucleate, each gland containing several hundred nuclei scattered throughout the length of the esophagus. The radial nuclei are in groups of 3, there being 2 groups anterior to the nerve ring and 5 or more groups posterior to that region. The marginal nuclei are likewise arranged in groups of 3. Between the second radial group and the first mar- ginal group of nuclei 11 nerve cells were observed. The determination of other nuclei was difficult because of the great number of esophageal gland nuclei which obscured the picture. The esophago-intestinal valve is triradi- ate. Other dioctophymatids Dioctophyma renale, Eustrongylides ignotus and E. perpapillatus, none of which has an oral sucker, were all studied in comparison with Soboliphyme. The esophagus of Dioctophyma is similar to that of Soboliphyme except that no ‘‘cilia’”’ were observed in the esophageal gland ducts. The dorsal gland ducts, after their primary bifurcation, were never seen to subdivide though every section in an incomplete series of 2000 sections was studied. The esoph- agi of Hustrongylides ignotus and E. perpapillatus were also studied in in- complete series, the findings agreeing with those in Soboliphyme except that no cilia or granules were observed in the gland tubules. The tubule branching occurs in all three glands and only the outer or marginal tubules in each sector terminate blindly. Slides of these forms always show a marked 526 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 differential staining of the glands, the dorsal being acidophilic and the sub- ventrals basophilic. This is particularly marked when stained in a Mallory triple stain, the subventrals being orange or red, the dorsal blue. Subventral gland tubules entering the dorsal sector were only observed in Dioctophyma but whether or not this occurs in Soboliphyme or Eustrongylides is not known; no such case has been observed. Unfortunately our observations of the esophagi of this particular group, the Dioctophymatina, are not so complete as might be desired. Nevertheless it does serve further to indicate the possible relationships of the forms. In this connection, it may be noted that the dorsolateral mesenteries of the intestinal region begin anteriorly as a single ventral mesentery from the esophagus, which splits before reaching the body wall subventrally. Gradu- ally as one traces the mesentery posteriad the split becomes wider, the single mesentery ultimately forming two subventral mesenteries, two ventrolat- eral, two lateral, and finally, two subdorsal. Dorylaimus obtusicaudatus (Dorylaimidae) The esophagus of this species consists of a short narrow anterior muscular part and a long wide posterior glandular part. There is no distinct stoma in the sense that this structure is present in Prionchulus, it having been re- placed by a well developed stylet. The stylet is joined at its base with the cuticular lining of the anterior end of the esophagus. The lumen of the esophagus is at first open, wide, and subtriangular (see Chitwood, 1931, fig. 22, No. 5), gradually becoming smaller, the esophageal lining thicker (Chit- wood, loc. cit. Nos. 6-7) and with radial thickenings similar to those present in Prionchulus. These thickenings are largest in the posterior part of the narrow muscular region but continue throughout the remainder of the esophagus. There are 36 radial muscle nuclei arranged in 6 groups as in Prionchulus; there are 9 marginal nuclei, also arranged as in Prionchulus; comparison with the latter form indicates that in Dorylaimus ngs, 30, and 4 are absent, but it may be that they are merely obscured by glandular tissue. It may also be noted that the group Ne9_32. is more compact than in other forms. A nucleus (st) not present in other forms, is characteristic of the Dorylaimidae. This nucleus, situated in the anterior muscular part of the esophagus is that of the formative or generative cell of the stylet. Four well developed esophageal gland nuclei, 1 in the dorsal sector (g:), 2 in the left subventral sector (gz and g,) and 1 in the right subventral sector (g5), are present. The other esophageal gland nucleus (g3) is much smaller than the former and easily overlooked. The dorsal gland nucleus lies rela- tively much farther forward than in Prionchulus. Each gland has a separate orifice situated near the level of its nucleus. The dorsal gland is very much lobed and branches of it enter into all sectors of the esophagus. The sub- ventral glands, on the contrary, remain within their sectors and their tubules are relatively smaller. The esophago-intestinal valve is elongate, dorso-ventrally flattened and contains about 27 nuclei. Other dorylaimoids The esophagi of such forms as Actinolaimus, Leptonchus and other close relatives of Dorylaimus appear to be histologically identical to that of the latter form, while that of T'rziplonchium differs considerably. The short bul- bar region in Triplonchium is literally packed with nuclei, presumably be- Dec. 15, 1937 cCHITWOOD AND CHITWOOD: NEMIC ESOPHAGI 527 cause all of the nuclei of the more elongated glandular region of Dorylaimus are concentrated in less space. The dorsal gland nucleus and those of the first pair of subventrals are subequal in size and smaller than those of the second pair of subventrals. The esophageal lining appears to be simple, un- modified, but this may be due to its extreme minuteness. Agamermis decaudata (Mermithidae) The esophagus of Agamermis decaudata undergoes considerable transfor- mation during its development. In order to understand satisfactorily the esophagus of the later parasitic stages and adults a brief résumé of the earlier stages 1s necessary. Christie (1936) described the morphology of the various larval stages of A. decaudata and the essentials of this description are as follows: In the pre- parasitic larva the digestive tract consists of a stylet followed by the esopha- gus and intestine. The anterior part of the esophagus is narrow, muscular, surrounded near the middle of its length by the nerve ring; the narrow ante- rior part is followed by a short elongated muscular swelling posterior to which there is a long glandular region. In the latter region the esophagus proper is very narrow and surrounding it are three large elongated esophageal glands and 2 rows of 8 smaller cells, the stichocytes. The largest gland is unicellular, right subdorsal in position, and extends from the esophageal swelling to the base of the esophagus; the two unicellular subventral esophageal glands are left subventral in position and extend posteriorly from the esophageal swell- ing to about ¢ the length of the glandular part of the esophagus; the sticho- eytes extend from slightly anterior to the base of the subventral glands to the posterior end of the esophagus. At this time the intestine does not extend anterior to the base of the esophagus. Shortly after entrance into the host the three esophageal glands become atrophied while the stichocytes become larger and the intestine begins grow- ing anterior to the base of the esophagus. The present study was based on partially grown parasitic larvae about 5 mm long (approximately 1 to 2 days in host) at which stage the external cuticle is still thin, though otherwise the larvae is in much the same condi- tion as it is at the time of its emergence from the host. At this stage the esophagus is no longer distinctly muscular in any region, the elongated swelling posterior to the nerve ring has disappeared, and the trophosome extends anteriorly nearly to the level of the anterior esophageal glands. The stichocytes are large, forming a double row of elongated cells with their ends touching one another. Anterior to the nerve ring the lumen is internally hexagonal, the lining thick and externally rounded to subtriangular in cross section. There is a group of 9 small nuclei near the oral opening, which appear to be radial or marginal in character. The surrounding esophageal tissue is spongy, with- out apparent symmetry. Posterior to;these nuclei, there are 12 large rather irregularly arranged nuclei (r_12) anterior to the nerve ring. Between the nerve ring and the orifice of the dorsal esophageal gland the esophageal nuclei, lining, and general structure are like,that part anterior to the nerve ring. In this region 15 large nuclei (13-37) and at least 5 nerve cell nuclei (n;_5) are present. The region of the esophageal glands contains 4 nerve cells (ng_9) and 3 large nuclei (res_39) in addition to the 3 gland nuclei (gi_3). Each gland has at least 1 distinct orifice, sometimes several. Posterior to the gland nuclei (gi_3), the chief part of the esophageal tissue containing the esophageal lumen is flattened between the two large rows of 528 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 stichocytes. The tissue surrounding the lumen (which corresponds to the ordinary muscular and fibrous parts of the esophagus) contains 18 large nuclei (r3:_43) and 2 nerve cell nuclei (ni-12) between the beginning of the stichosome and the posterior end of the esophagus. The esophageal lumen in this region varies in shape but is for the most part rounded; the esophageal lining is thin and without evidence of triradiate or hexaradiate structure. Each stichocyte is a large unicellular gland having 1 distinct orifice from which a wide irregular tubule extends into the cell where it branches into many smaller tubules. Posteriorly the esophageal lumen ends blindly in a mass of fibrous esophageal tissue and apparently is without direct connec- tion with the intestine or trophosome. Several minute nuclei present in this region may correspond to the nuclei of the esophago-intestinal valve of other nematodes. Discussion.—The fact that the 3 primary esophageal glands are highly developed in the preparasitic larva and undergo atrophy after entrance into the host indicates that they probably function during penetration into the host. The hypertrophy, during larval development, coincides with the time in parasitic life at which most rapid development takes place and, these glands are considered as being the chief digestive glands during this stage of of life. When the larva reaches maturity the stichocytes undergo reduction in size, and in the adult stage, when no nourishment is taken in, their pores are no longer apparent. Regarding the number and arrangement of non-glandular nuclei, it may be pointed out that the number of large nuclei (r_4s) corresponds with the total number of radial and marginal nuclei in Dorylaimus but the observed number of nerve cells (nj-12) and nuclei of unknown nature (the possible nerve cell nuclei (si_9)) is much smaJler. Perhaps some of the nuclei were overlooked, or perhaps the decreased number may have been due to de- generation. Since radial and muscular fibers are only represented by a spongy network in the parasitic stage studied, normal function of the esoph- agus as a sucking organ is impossible; hence, nerve cells would be of little benefit in coordinating muscular activity. Trichuris ovis (Trichuridae) The esophagus of Trichuris consists of an anterior part (corpus) and a greatly elongated posterior part (bulbar region) embedded in a series of gland cells, the stichosome. The anterior part is divisible into sections, the first part being entirely muscular, narrow, slightly constricted at the nerve ring and the second part glandular and rather wide. The lumen of the entire corpus is definitely triradiate, without special modifications. A group of 3 minute nuclei (s;_3) and a group of somewhat larger nuclei (¢:_3) are situated anterior to the nerve ring. The esophagus gradually becomes larger in diam- eter posterior to the nerve ring and a group of 3 marginal nuclei (m1_3) is followed by a group of 6 radial nuclei (rs). The first glandular substance makes its appearance in the esophagus just posterior to the radial nuclei. Between this level and the beginning of the stichosome 2 additional groups of 3 radial nuclei (r7_9) (T10-12), 6 smaller nuclei (ss;_9), and 3 large gland cell nuclei (g;-3) are situated. In one of the 6 series studied a fourth gland cell nucleus, slightly smaller than the others, appeared to be present. The esophageal gland nuclei (gi_3) extend anteriorly to within about 50y of the beginning of the enlarged portion of the corpus. Sometimes what appeared to be orifices were observed near this level but it cannot be definitely stated Dec. 15, 1937 CHITWOOD AND CHITWOOD: NEMIC ESOPHAGI 529 that what was observed were actually orifices of the esophageal glands. There was no evidence that any ducts extend anteriorly beyond this level. In the posterior or stichosome region the esophagus is embedded in a single row of large subcylindrical cells or stichocytes. The lumen varies from subtriangular to triradiate to hexaradiate. The wall and external covering of the esophagus both retain their identity throughout the stichosome region. Large and small nuclei are present within the wall, the large nuclei cor- responding to the radial nuclei of the anterior part of the esophagus and the small nuclei possibly corresponding to the s or ec types or nuclei of the esophagus of other forms. Contrary to the generai opinion, the esophagus is muscular and capable of dilation and contraction throughout its length. In areas close to the large radial nuclei only sarcoplasm is present but further distant, where the nucleus would not interfere with muscular activ- ity, well developed radial fibers may be demonstrated by proper staining. The numerous large stichocytes forming the stichosome or ‘‘cell body”’ are actually esophageal glands. Each cell has a duct through the wall of the esophagus to the lumen and this duct branches into many tubules within the cell. The orifices of the stichocytes alternate, one entering from the left subventral side, the other from the right subventral side, etc. The sticho- cytes are more numerous in Trichuris than in Agamermis, and apparently their number may vary within a limited range. Posteriorly the esophagus joins the intestine through a dorsoventrally elongated esophago-intestinal valve. The most distal stichocyte often pro- trudes posteriorly past the beginning of the intestine, and at the same level 2 large cells (cc.) are attached to the esophagus and intestine. The nature of these cells is not known; they do not appear to be in intimate protoplasmic connection with the intestine, esophagus, or stichosome, and stain differently from all three of these structures; it is suggested, without great conviction, that these cells may be coelomocytes. Discussion—Ward (1917) divided the Nematoda into two groups, Myosyringata and Trichosyringata, assuming for the latter group, which included Trichuris and Mermis, a fundamentally peculiar esophagus formed as an intracellular tube. However, Chitwood (1930) has pointed out that the esophagi of Trichuris and Trichinella are triradiate and not intracellular tubes as stated by previous writers. Concerning the nature of the stichosome or cell body, Rauther (1918) considered the stichocytes as gland cells and observed orifices of the first 2 or 3, but no orifices thereafter. Chitwood (1930) overlooked the orifices of these glands and considered the stichosome as an outgrowth of the intestine. G. W. Miiller (1929) and Christenson (1935) considered the stichocytes as intimately connected with the hypodermis. Later Chitwood (1935) corrected these errors, finding the stichocytes to be esophageal glands. Additional intraesophageal glands are described here for the first time. As regards the nature of feeding trichurids, the following are several points of interest: (1) Fiilleborn (1923) described a stylet in the larvae of Trzchuris and Li (1933) observed this structure in adult Trichuris. This point has been veri- fied by the present writers. Stylet bearing nematodes usually feed by press- ing the head against a membrane, protruding the stylet through the mem- brane and sucking the material through the stylet into the esophagus. (2) The esophagus in trichuroids always has a well developed anterior muscular part and in this paper it has been shown that muscles capable of the dilation necessary for sucking are present in the posterior part. 530 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 (8) Both Miller and Christenson regarded the stichosome a hypodermal development, which is contrary to our observations. Miiller considered the bacillary bands as regions of ‘‘feeding pores,’’ while the present writers agree with Jagerskidld (1901) in classifying them as hypodermal glands. Christenson is of the opinion that the stichosome is a hypodermal develop- ment since he states: “The writer . . . is of the opinion that they (the sticho- cytes) originate from the hypodermis since in Capillaria aerophila they are intimately connected with that layer. It seems possible that during the de- velopment the alimentary canal first forms and specializes into its com- ponent parts. As the epithelogenous muscles develop the muscle fibers arise in the subcuticular portion of the hypodermal cells, and the nucleus and cell body are ‘pushed’ toward the center of the worm where they enlarge and surround the esophagus, all the while maintaining their relationship with the hypodermis through anastomising processes. In this fashion their origin would be somewhat similar to that of the esophageal glands which are formed in many nematodes.”’ The supposed connection between the stichosome and bacillary band, namely the mesenterial tissue is zsolation tissue and belongs to neither the esophagus nor the body wall, but is mesen- chymatous in origin (see Chitwood & Chitwood, 1937) and contains its own nuclei; furthermore, as shown by Martini (1903-1910) the musculature is not epithelogenous but mesodermal and finally, the esophageal glands of nematodes are formed from the stem cell and may in development leave the esophageal wall, but they are always in the esophagus at the time the esophageal primordium is laid down. (4) Several investigators, including Guiart (1908) found blood engorged specimens of T'richuris, while G. W. Miller (1929) considered the esophagus as non-functional; apparently Miller was unaware of previous reports. G. G. Smirnov (1936) after a comprehensive survey of the literature con- cluded that there was no convincing evidence that trichuroids feed on blood; he was also unable to obtain such evidence from sectioned material. In one series of sections studied by the present writer red corpuscles were numerous in the esophageal lumen, a total estimated at about 700; this observation confirms the findings of Guiart. These above facts together with the extreme minuteness of the esophageal lumen indicate that Trichuris is possibly an obligatory hematophagous animal; this is supported by the reports of Whipple (1909) and of Garin (1913) of the occurrence of Trichuris of hemolytic enzymes. LITERATURE CITED Cuitwoop, B. G. The structure of the esophagus in the Trichuroidea. J. Parasit. 17: 35-42. 19380. —— A comparative histological study of certain nematodes. Ztschr. Morph. 23 (1/2): 237-284. 19381. —— The nature of the ‘‘Cell body” of Trichuris and ‘“‘Stichosome” of Agamermis. J. Parasit. 21(3): 225-226. Cuitwoop, B. G., and Cuitrwoop, M. B. The histology of nemic esophagi. Parts I-II. Z. Zellforsch. 22: 29-37, 38-46. 1934. Part III. This Journau 24: 557-562. 1934. Part IV. Ibid. 25: 230-237. 1985. Part V. Ibid. 26: 52-59. 1986. Part VI. Ibid. 26: 331-346. 1986. Part VII. Ibid. 26: 414-419. 1936. An introduction to nematology. Sec. 1, Part 1. 1937. CHRISTENSON, R. O. Studies on the mor phology of the common fox lungworm, Capillaria aérophila. (Creplin, 1839.) Tr. Am. Mier. Soc. 54(2): 145-154. 1935. Dre 1571937 SAYLOR: CHASMATOPTERINAE 531 CuristIb, J. R. Life history of Agamermis decaudata, a nematode parasite of grass- hoppers and other insects. J. Agric. Res. 52(3): 161-198. 1936. ExsertH, J. Beitrdge zur Anatomie and Physiologie des Trichocephalus dispar. Z. Wiss. Zool. 10: 233-258. 1860. Untersuchungen viber Nematoden. Leipzig, 77 pp. 1863. FULLEBORN, F. Ueber den ‘‘Mundstdchel’”’ der Trichotracheliden-Larven und Bemer- kungen ueber die jtingsten Stadien von Trichocephalus trichiurus. Arch. Schiffs.-u. Tropenhyg. 27: 421-425. 1928. Garin, C. Recherches physiologiques sur la fixation et le mode de nutrition de quelques nématodes parasites du tube digestif de Vv homme et des animaux. Univ. Lyon. n. s., I. Se. Med. (34): 160 pp., figs. 1-55. 1913. Gurart, J. Le trichocephale vit aussi dans V’intestin greie et se nourrit de sang. Lyon Méd. 110(6): 325-326. 1908. JAGERSKIOLD, L. A. Weitere Beitrdge zur Kenntnis der Nematoden. K. Svenska Vetenskaps-Acad. Handl. 35(2): 1-80. 1901. Li, H. C. On the mouth-spear of Trichocephalus trichurus and of a Trichocephalus sp. from monkey, Macacus rhesus. Chinese Med. J. 47(11—12): 1343-1346. 1933. Man, J. G. pz. Anatomische Untersuchungen wiber freilebende Nordsee-Nematoden. 82 pp. Leipzig. 1886. — Nématodes libres. Résultats du voyage du 8. Y. Belgica. Exped. Antarct. Belt. Anvero, 55 pp. 1904. Mituuer, G. W. Die Erndhrung einiger Trichuroideen. Z. Morph. 15(1/2): 192-212. 1929. Ueber Mermithiden. Ibid. 24(1): 82-147. 1931. RavuTHER, M. Bevtrdge zur Kenntnis von Mermis albicans. v. Sieb. Z. Jahrb. Abt. Anat. 24(1): 1-76. 1906. — Ueber den Bau des Oesophagus und die Lokalisation der Nierenfienktion bei freile- benden Nematoden. Ibid. 24: 703-740. 1907. Mitteilungen zur Nematodenkunde. Ibid. 40: 441-514. 1918. Scuuuz, E. Betrachtungen wiber die Augen freilebender Nematoden. Zool. Anz. 95 (9/10): 241-244. 1981. Smirnov, G. G. On the question of hematophagia in threadworms and whipworms. Trudy Sec. Parasit., U.S.S.R. Inst. Exper. Med. 2: 229-239 (Russian with English summary). 1936. TurxK, F. Ueber einige im Golf von Neapel freilebende Nematoden. Mitt. Zool. Stat. zu Neapel. 16: 281-348. 1903. Warp, H. B. On the structure and classification of North American parasitic worms. J. Parasit. 4(1): 1-12. 1917. WuirpeLE, G. H. The presence of a weak hemolysis in the hookworm and its relation to the anemia of uncinariasis. J. Exper. Med. 11(2): 331-3438. 1909. ENTOMOLOGY.—The beetles of the subfamily Chasmatopterinae in the New World (Coleoptera: Scarabaeidae)... LAWRENCE W. SAYLOR, Bureau of Biological Survey. (Communicated by EK. A. CHAPIN.) According to the Junk and Leng Catalogues the tribe Chasmatop- terini includes seven genera, four of which are listed from the United States. Present studies, however, indicate that of these four genera, one (Oncerus) belongs near the subfamily Aclopinae because of the presence of the exposed labrum, which is foreign to the rest of the Melolonthinae; a second (Podolasia) is very different in general habitus and does not belong here, as is explained more fully below; the third (Pseudacratus) is a synonym of the fourth (Chnaunanthus) and 1 Received October 5, 1937. 532 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 the latter then is the only representative of this group in the New World. I have seen but three examples of Podolasia, one in Mr. E. G. Linsley’s collection from Brownsville, Texas, and two in the United States National Museum from ‘Ft. Ringgold (May and June),” and from “near Hansville, base of Henry Mts., Utah, June, E. Bowles collector.’’ Although the mouthparts and connate abdominal seg- ments appear to place this genus with the Chasmatopterinae the general habitus and the remaining morphological features are radically different and prevent its inclusion in this subfamily. Until specimens can be dissected, the exact place of the genus in the scheme of classification must remain in doubt. It is quite probable, however, that Acoma will be its nearest relative. Oncerus belongs near the Aclopinae, and a paper on the species of this and a related new genus is about ready for publication. While the Chasmatopterinae is listed in our catalogues as a tribe under the subfamily Melolonthinae, a careful examination of the characters forbids its placement with that group. All species of the Melolonthinae proper have at least the last two or three spiracles in the chitinous abdominal plates while the present genera, Chnaunan- thus and Chasmatopterus (as well as Oncerus) have the spiracles entirely in the membrane, and therefore are more closely related to the Glaphyrinae, Pleocominae and others. These cannot be placed with Acoma of the Pleocominae which also has the spiracles in the membrane because of many differences: the labrum is small but near the clypeal apex in the Chasmatopterinae, but very small and far back from the apex in Acoma; the antennae are of entirely different conformation in the former, being very short and with the small, oval club composed of segments capable of fitting one into another, and the club is much shorter than the funicle, while the latter (Acoma) has the antennae quite long, much longer than the funicle and the seg- ments are not capable of folding one into the other; also, the abdomi- nal segments in the Chasmatopterinae are connate with the sutures nearly or entirely effaced, while Acoma has entirely free ventral abdominal segments and the sutures are quite obvious. Other char- acters of less importance but much supplementary value are the cleft tarsal claws, small eyes, and diurnal habits of Chnauwnanthus as opposed to the entirely simple claws and the very large eyes, fitted for noctur- nal life, of Acoma. Many characters, such as the position of the spiracles, and es- Duc. 15, 1937 SAYLOR: CHASMATOPTERINAE 533 pecially the absence of the large exposed mandibles and labrum pre- vent the placement of the Chasmatopterinae with either the Glaphy- ridae spuriae of Burmeister or the Aclopinae, so that a separate subfamily is necessary for its reception. This new subfamily may be called the Chasmatopterinae, and is characterized by the position of all the spiracles in the abdominal membrane, the hidden labrum and small concealed mandibles, the cleft tarsal claws, the small oval antennal club and the semiconnate or connate ventral abdominal segments. The genus Chnaunanthus, our sole representative of the subfamily, is represented by three species, one of which is here described as new. In contrast to the published statements of authors that in this group there is no front tibial spur I wish to point out that such is almost always present in the female, and may be absent in the male. It is more likely that it is so fragile as to be readily lost through wear. In Chasmatopterus the front tibial spurs are usually present and con- spilcuous. The two common genera of the subfamily may be more completely separated as follows (I have not seen specimens of the remaining two genera in the subfamily, the African Microdoris Burm., and the Chinese Diphycerus Fairm.): Front inner tarsal claw of male deformed, the outer as in the remaining claws on the other legs; front femora bidentate; labrum in lateral view very conspicuous, especially in @ ; front tibial spur always large and CaM MCUOUS.. BIO PCAM.) 05.05) Gee wad Lose dsheones wae Chasmatopterus Front inner claw of male not deformed, of the same size and shape as the remaining claws; front femora tridentate; labrum in lateral view very small and hardly noticeable; front tibial spur usually lacking. (Ameri- TAIL!) 5 SE ie ae ahd het ese ae ge A ke en Chnaunanthus Dr. E. A. Chapin of the National Museum has made helpful sug- gestions in the present studies, and the author also wishes to thank him for the loan of material. CHNAUNANTHUS Chnaunanthus Burmeister, Hand. Ent. 4: 31, 1844.—\Lacordaire, Gen. Col. 3: 221, 1856.—Bates, Biol. Cent. Amer., Col. 2(2): 180, t. 8, f. 2.— Dalla Torre, Coleop. Cat. 45: 7, 1912. Acraius Horn, Yrans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 1: 165; f..1, 1867.—Dalla Torre, Coleop. Cat. 45: 7, 1912. Pseudacratus Dalla Torre, Coleop. Cat. 45: 7, 1912. Oblong-oval, little wider behind, polished, pilose above. Ligula separate from mentum. Antennae 9-segmented; club 3-segmented, short and oval. Front coxae conical. Front femora tridentate. Tarsi with all claws cleft, the upper tooth noticeably shorter; tarsi noticeably longer than the tibiae, the 534 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 latter usually strongly spinose. Head slightly longer than thorax; clypeus convergent anteriorly. Thorax slightly subangulately rounded at sides, margins ciliate. Elytra not quite twice as long as thorax. Pygidium usually hidden from above. Abdominal segments closely connate, sutures barely 4 Fig. 1.—Head of Chnaunanthus flavipennis, showing clypeal shape. Fig. 2.—Male genitalia of Chnaunanthus chapint. Fig. 3.—Male genitalia of Chnaunanthus discolor. Fig. 4— Male genitalia of Chnaunanthus flavipennis. visible in the male and apparently absent in the female. Male abdomen in lateral view concave, that of female convex. KEY TO THE SPECIES 1. Hind angles of the thorax broadly rounded, not at all subangulate; cly- peus wider than long but not distinctly so, the apex always deeply emarginate; female pygidium with two longitudinally-impressed sub- apical foveate areas before apex and these often converging, forming a. U-shaped suleus. (Utah and Arizona:). 22.224. 722 flavipennis Hind angles of thorax rounded but subangular; clypeus usually notice- ably wider than long; apex of clypeus often but little emarginate; fe- male pyridium not-as:above: 2... ... 0... ee ee 2 2. Pygidium of male longer than wide, very densely hairy all over; female pygidium usually noticeably concave at apical fourth, always densely hairy all. over:..< Mexicodio: i. ha hc ee ee ee discolor Pygidium of male wider than long, moderately hairy at base, subglabrous apically; female pygidium flattened, with no trace of any apical sulci, moderately densely hairy near base, subglabrous apically. (Calif. and DOR) sedis <5 cad iG ww REE RP hea ka chapini Duc. 15, 1937 SAYLOR: CHASMATOPTERINAE 939 Chnaunanthus flavipennis (Horn) Acratus flavipennis Horn, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. I: 165, 1867. Pseudacratus flavipennis Dalla Torre, Coleop. Cat. 45: 7, 1912 (new com- bination). Chnaunanthus palmerz Horn, Proc. Calif. Acad. 4: 393, 1894.—Dalla Torre, Coleop. Cat. 45: 7, 1912. (New synonymy). This species may be quickly placed by the key characters and the male genitalia. The elytra vary from testaceous to piceotestaceous, and the thorax from rufous to rufopiceous. I have seen 11 specimens, including a pair of Horn’s paratypes; of these all but 2 Arizona specimens are from Utah. I have been able to examine the types of Pseudacratus flavipennis through the courtesy of Mark Robinson and the authorities of the Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences, and was able to confirm the suspicion I have had for some time that both genus and species are synonomous with the above, the specific name flavipennis having priority. Chnaunanthus discolor Burm. Chnaunanthus discolor Burmeister, Hand. Ent. 4: 32, 1844.—Bates, Biol. Cent. Amer., Col. 2(2): 180, 1887.—Dalla Torre, Coleop. Cat. 45: 7, 1912. . The main specific characters are given in the key and the male genitalia are shown on the plate. This species varies considerably in color, the elytra ranging from entirely testaceous, through testaceous with black cloudings on the disc, to almost entirely piceocastaneous; the thorax may be piceoru- fous, rufous with testaceous marks on the lateral margins, or may (rarely) be almost entirely testaceous. Apparently confined to Mexico and Lower California; I have examined 65 specimens from Mexico, all taken in the late fall. I have also seen two specimens from San Jose del Cabo in Lower California (Fuchs collection) in the United States National Museum. Chnaunanthus chapini Saylor, n. sp. Male.—Size, shape and many characters exactly the same as in Ch. dis- color. Head with front smooth at base, coarsely densely punctured apically; clypeus coarsely punctured, apex reflexed, emarginate. Thorax finely mod- erately densely punctured, disc glabrous (due to wear?); hind angles sub- angulate but hardly obvious, side margins ciliate. Elytra with sparse erect hairs. Pygidium convex, polished, densely hairy in basal half, smooth at apical half. Abdominal segments connate, with the sutures hardly obvious, sixth segment free. Female.—Head with front entirely punctured; pygidium flattened, pol- ished, sparsely hairy in apical two-thirds, subglabrous apically; otherwise similar to male. Length 3.5-4 mm. . Holotype and allotype (U.S.N.M. no. 5227) are from Panamint Valley, Death Valley, California, and were collected in April 1891 by A. Koebele. A single paratype male, in the author’s collection, is from Oregon, collected in July, and probably came from the arid parts of that state. I take pleasure in naming this species in honor of Dr. E. A. Chapin of the National Museum as a slight token of my appreciation for many favors. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES THE ACADEMY RECENTLY ELECTED TO RESIDENT MEMBERSHIP IN THE ACADEMY Liuoyp Vint BERKNER, physicist, Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie Institute of Washington, in recognition of his contributions to the physics of the earth’s outer atmosphere, particularly the development of methods and measurement of outer atmospheric ionization, and the study of the relation of this ionization to solar and geophysical effects and to radio wave propagation. A. Haroup Buatt, associate professor, Howard University, in recognition of his achievements in organic chemistry. WiILBuR 8S. BURBANK, geologist, Section of Metalliferous Deposits, U. S. Geological Survey, in recognition of his contributions to petrology and economic geology, in particular, his researches on the structural geology of Colorado. Epwarp A. CuaPin, curator of insects, U. 8S. National Museum, in recog- nition of his contributions to systematic entomology, especially the tax- onomy of the Scarabaeidae. WILLIAM RIDGELY CHAPLINE, principal inspector of grazing, U. S. Forest Service, in recognition of his contributions to forestry research, especially range research and erosion control. JESSE Roy CHRISTIE, associate nematologist, Bureau of Plant Industry, in recognition of his work in zoology, parasitology, and phytopathology. Mayne Rerp Cok, associate chemist, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils, in recognition of his researches on the effect of the various wave lengths of light upon the development of rancidity of oil-bearing foods. Harry Diamonp, principal physicist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to safety in aerial navigation, in particu- lar, the development of aids in blind flying and blind landing. Pau F. DIcKENs, associate in medicine in George Washington University Medical School and Chief of Medical Service, Gallinger Hospital, in recog- nition of his researches in circulatory and respiratory diseases. Rouia EvGEne Dyer, assistant director and chief of the Division of In- fectious Diseases, National Institute of Health, in recognition of his con- tributions to medical science, in particular, his researches on typhus fever. WALTER FREEMAN, professor of neurology, George Washington Univer- sity Medical School, in recognition of his researches in neurology and neuro- pathology. Karu F. Herzre.p, professor of physics and head of department, Catholic University, in recognition of his outstanding contributions in physics and physical chemistry. WaLrTER C. Huss, assistant research professor of chemistry, Georgetown 536 Dre! 15, 1937 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 537 University, in recognition of his contributions to the field of biological chemistry, especially the chemistry of the biologically important sulfur com- pounds. ANNA I. Jonas, associate geologist, U. 8. Geological Survey, in recogni- tion of her work in the geology of the crystalline schists. Myrna FrRANcEsS JONES, zoologist, Division of Zoology, National Insti- tute of Health, in recognition of her contributions to parasitology, espe- cially the life histories of bird tapeworms and their invertebrate hosts. ANNIE M. Hurp-Karrer, associate physiologist, Bureau of Plant In- dustry, in recognition of her work on plant physiology, especially on disease resistance of plants, seed disinfection, properties and buffer systems of plant sap, absorption of selenium by wheat, and the protection from selenium injury given by sulfur. THEODORE Koppanyl, professor of pharmacology and chairman of the department, Georgetown University, in recognition of his researches in pharmacology. SAMUEL Henry McCrory, chief, Bureau of Agricultural Engineering, in recognition of his contributions to agricultural engineering. ALBERT R. Merz, chemist, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils, in recognition of his achievements in the field of agricultural and fertilizer chemistry. Howarp E. MippLeTon, senior soil conservationist, U. 8. Department of Agriculture, in recognition of his contributions in soil physics and chemistry. Bren Harry NIcouet, senior chemist, Bureau of Dairy Industry, in recognition of his contributions to organic chemistry. Pau. WILSON Oman, assistant entomologist, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, in recognition of his work on leaf hoppers. JoHN W. Roserts, principal pathologist, Bureau of Plant Industry, in recognition of his researches on the diseases of apples, peaches, plums, and cherries. RoscoE Roy SPENCER, senior surgeon, U. 8. Public Health Service, in recognition of work in bacteriology and especially for his discovery of the vaccine for Rocky Mountain spotted fever. Luioyp A. SPINDLER, associate zoologist, Bureau of Animal Industry, in recognition of his contributions to parasitology. ALAN STONE, associate entomologist, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, in recognition of his contributions to the biology and taxonomy of Diptera. JAMES STEELE WILLIAMS, associate geologist, U. S. Geological Survey, in recognition of his work on the carboniferous faunas and formations of the central and western United States. Wititarp Hutt Wriaut, senior parasitologist, National Institute of Health, in recognition of his contributions in the field of therapeutics of diseases caused by internal parasites. 538 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 1110TH MEETING (continued) F. G. BRIcKWEDDE: Some recent investigations of ortho- and para-hydrogen at low temperatures.—Hydrogen, of atomic weight one, is a mixture of ortho- and para-hydrogen (0-H, and p-H2) in varying concentrations. Since the properties of o- and p-H, differ, the properties of hydrogen are variable. The hydrogen vapor pressure thermometer which is used to measure tem- peratures in the range of liquid hydrogen temperatures, 13.9 to 20.4°K, is therefore, subject to variation, and the experiments which formed the sub- ject of this report were undertaken by R. B. Scott and the speaker in the Cryogenic Section of the National Bureau of Standards for the purpose of finding ways to improve the reliability of this instrument. The results were reported, however, from the point of view of the information they reveal concerning the fundamental differences between the condensed phases of © o- and p-H, responsible for the observed differences in properties. The change with temperature of the difference between the vapor pres- sures of p-H». and n-H» (normal hydrogen whose composition is 75 per- cent o-H,), dP/dT reveals a difference between the lattice energies of p- and n-H>, in a condensed phase, the energy of liquid p-H»2 being 2.4 cal mol greater than the energy of liquid n-H , and the energy of solid p-H» 5 cal mol greater than that of solid n-H». The change of the lattice energies of liquid solutions of o- and p-H, with the composition reveals a large deviation from the law of ideal solutions which states that differences in the properties of solutions are proportional to the differences in the composition. The vapor pressure data lead to the following equation which represents the dependence of the internal or lat- tice energy of solutions of o- and p-H»2 upon the concentration: dE/dx, = Hy +(1+ 41 2%) where E, is the energy per mol of solution whose composition is given by the mol fraction #;=1 —22, EH; is the energy per mol of pure variety 1, and ai,» is an empirical constant different in value from d,1. The densities of liquid p-H»2 and n-H, differ by 0.5 percent. Orthohy- drogen, the freely rotating variety, has a smaller molecular volume and internal energy than p-H.2, the non-rotating variety. The direction of these differences is opposite to the direction of the changes observed in other sub- stances in passing through the transition from the state in which the mole- cules are oriented to the state in which they rotate freely. The application of the Heisenberg Uncertainty Principle to the problem shows that the p-H, molecules are not aligned in any preferred direction but rather that the orientation of the axes of p-H2 molecules are randomly distributed over all possible directions. The state of molecular orientation in liquid and solid p-H» corresponds, therefore, with that of free rotation in other substances. The rotating o-H2 molecules are oriented, their state corresponding more nearly with that of oriented non-rotating molecules in other substances. The difference in the intermolecular forces in liquid or solid p-H2 and o-H» arises, because of the difference in the distribution of the electron density of p-H, and o-H», molecules. The electron distribution of a p-H2 molecule at liquid hydrogen temperatures (7 =0) is spherically symmetrical. For o-H2 molecules (j=1) the electron density is greatest either along an axis (m=0) or over a plane (m= +1). The ortho-para vapor pressure difference of deuterium was compared with Dec. 15, 19387 OBITUARY 539 that of hydrogen. The ratio of the difference in the vapor pressures of the non-rotating variety and the normal mixture to the product of the change in the ortho-para composition and the vapor pressure of the normal variety, AP(p- Hy —n- Hs) AP(o0-D: —n- Dez) |—_——— SD Rl. 200 ee Ds|, is about the same for Hz and Dz. If, however, the differences in vapor pres- sures are compared subject to the condition that the change in the compo- sition of the rotating and non-rotating varieties is the same for H2 and Dz, it is found that AP/P is larger for D2 than for H». The difference in the lattice energies of a condensed phase of ortho and para varieties depends upon d/dT of (AP/P). The vapor pressure data lead to a smaller ortho-para lattice energy difference for D2 than for Ho». The vapor pressure of freshly condensed normal hydrogen increases with time because of the conversion of 0-H, to p-H2, the rate being 0.2 mm per hour. The rate of increase of the vapor pressure decreases as the concen- tration of o-H, decreases in accordance with a bimolecular reaction of 0-H, molecules. The rate of change of the vapor pressure of n-Dz, is so small that it was beyond the accuracy of our experiments to detect it, the experiments setting as an upper limit for the change 107? times the rate of change of the vapor pressure of n-H2. Conversion in the condensed phases of hydrogen and deuterium results from the collision of rotating molecules with para- magnetic molecules. The o-H». molecules, and the p-D, and 5/6 th of the o-D, molecules are paramagnetic, whereas the p-H, and 1/6 th of o0-D, molecules are diamagnetic and hence are ineffective in bringing about con- version. The probability of conversion upon collision of two molecules is proportional to the square of the force of interaction of their magnetic moments, and thus approximately proportional to the 4th power of the mag- netic moments of the nuclei. The magnetic moment of the proton is about 2.9 Bohr nuclear magnetons, whereas the magnetic moment of the deuteron is about 0.75. Taking into account the difference in the ortho-para composi- tion of n-H, and n-D, a calculation shows that the rate of change of the vapor pressure of n-Dz may be expected to be of the order of 10~* times the rate of change of the vapor pressure of n-H2, which is in accord with the experiments. The average magnetic moment of o-D, is greater than that of p-D, and, hence, it is to be expected that the order of the conversion reac- tion p-D, to o-Dz is more nearly first order than second order. (Author’s Abstract.) H. E. McComs, Recording Secretary @Obituary Lorp Ernest RUTHERFORD, noted British physicist, died October 19, 1937, at Cambridge, England. He was born at Nelson, New Zealand, August 30, 1871. Educated at Nelson College, Canterbury College, New Zealand University, and Cam- bridge University, he received in succession the M.A., B.Sc., and B.A. de- grees. New Zealand University conferred upon him the D.Sc. degree in 1901, and many domestic and foreign universities honored him during his sub- sequent career. 540 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, NO. 12 Lord Rutherford lectured at McGill University, the University of Man- chester, and Trinity College, of which he was a Fellow. Since 1919 he was Cavendish Professor of Experimental Physics and Director of the Cavendish Laboratory, University of Cambridge. He was also Professor of Natural Philosophy, Royal Institution, and Chairman of the Advisory Council of the Department of Scientific and Industrial Research since 1930. His life’s work and many publications dealt chiefly with the problems of radio-ac- tivity. He was the pioneer of the modern school concerned with the splitting of the atom and the transmutation of the elements. For his great achieve- ments he received the Rumford, Copley, Barnard, Franklin, Albert, and Faraday medals; the Bressa Prize from the Turin Academy of Science; and the Nobel Prize for Chemistry, 1908. Lord Rutherford was President of the British Association for the Advance- ment of Science, 1923; and President of the Royal Society, 1925-1930. He was knighted in 1914 and raised to a barony in 1931. He was an honorary member of the Washington Academy of Sciences. INDEX TO VOLUME 27 An asterisk * denotes the abstract of a paper presented before the Academy or an affiliated society. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES Botanical Society of Washington. 39. Geological Society of Washington. Philosophical Society of Washington. Washington Academy of Sciences. 220, 357. 483, 538. 132, 536. AUTHOR INDEX ANDREWS, D. A. *Asymmetrical distri- bution of stream terraces in south- eastern Montana. 361. ASHLEY, GEorGE H. The emergence of ideas as illustrated from geology. 45. Batt, E. D. Some new North American Membracidae. 479. BarTLeTT, H. H. *Experiences of a plant collector in Oceania. 40. Barton, D. C. *Petroleum geophysics. 363. | BARTSCH, PAUL. from Cuba. Bass, N. W. “*Origin of the oil bearing shoestring sands of northeastern Oklahoma and southwestern Kansas. 363. Beattie, R. Kent. *The Dutch elm disease in Europe. 41. Beure, C. H., Jr. *Geologic History of South Park, Colorado. 221. BERKNER, L. V. See J. A. FLEMING. 486. Berry, Epwarp W. On the presence of the fern Weichselia in Colombia, South America. 458. Gyrocarpus and other fossil plants from the Cumarebo field in Vene- zuela. 6501. BirDsEYE, C. H. *The uses of aerial photography. 360. Buake, 8S. F. Eleven new Asteraceae from North and South America. Two new land shells 130. 374, Bowie, Witiiam. *General report on meeting. 485. Bowman, Paut W. *Remarks on the 4th Annual Spring Wild Flower Show at George Washington Uni- versity. 41. BRICKWEDDE, F. G. Some recent inves- tigations of ortho- and para-hydrogen at low temperatures. 538. Brown, Routanp W. Fossil legumes from Bridge Creek, Oregon. 414. Further additions to some fossil floras of the western United States. 506. Bucuanan, L. L. Notes on Curculioni- dae (Coleoptera). 312. Byers, H. G. *The distribution of se- lenium with geologic implications. 359. CALLAGHAN, EuGENE. “*Alunite deposits of the Marysvale region, Utah. 358. CuasE, AGcnEes. New species of Pas- palum from Tropical America. 143. Cuen, Sur Fone. A new species of Melania from Szechuan Province, China. 79. Four new species of fresh-water mollusks from China. 444. Cuitwoop, B. G. and M. B. Cuirwoop. The histology of nemic esophagi. VIII. The esophagus of representa- tives of the Enoplida. 517. CuarK, Austin H. and Carroitut M. Wiuuiams. Records of Argynnis di- ana and of some other butterflies from Virginia. 209. CocuraNn, Doris M. A necessary change inanamphibian name. 312. Cooxr, C. Wytue. The Pleistocene Horry Clay and Pamlico formation near Myrtle Beach, 8. C. 1. Coorrer, G. A. *Devonian correlations in Michigan and Ontario. 221. *The Centerfield limestone of New York and its equivalents in the mid- west. 359. CovitLE, Freperick V. Phacelia mus- telina, a new plant from Death Valley, California. 196. 541 542 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 CusHMAN, R. A. The genus Lysiognatha Ashmead. 438. Darrow, GrorcE M. *Berry breeding. 42. Davis, Everett F. *Some aspects of black walnut toxicity, its cause and effects. 40. Dayton, Witi1aAM A. Notes on harmel, or “Syrian rue.”’ 349. *The range plant handbook of the Forest Service. 41. Diznnt, W. W. A basis for mycogeog- raphy. 244. DIKMANS, GERARD. A note on the mem- bers of the nematode genus T'richo- strongylus occurring in rodents and lagomorphs, with descriptions of two new species. 203. DRECHSLER, CHARLES. A species of 7'r7- dentaria preying on Difflugia con- stricta. 391. EarRpDLeEy, A. J. *Silts of the lower Yu- kon valley. 220. EIcKELBERG, E. W. *Report on seis- mology. 486. ENtow, CHARLES R. *The agronomy program of the Soil Conservation Service. 39. Frercuson, Auice L. L. Burial area in Moyaone. 261. FieLtp, Richarp M. Structure of con- tinents and ocean basins. 181. Figetp, W. O., Jr. *“Some recent changes in Alaskan Coast Glaciers. 368. FLEMING, J. A. and L. V. BERKNER. *Report in Terrestrial Magnetism and Electricity. 486. Foster, Marcaret D. The chemical character of the ground waters of the South Atlantic Coastal Plain. 405. Fox, Irvine. Notes on Chinese spiders of the families Salticidae and Thom- isidae. 12. The Nearctic spiders of the family Heteropodidae. 461. FRANCK, JAMES. The fundamentals of photosynthesis. 317. FRIEDMANN, HERBERT. Bird bones from archeological sites in Alaska. 431. Guass, JEWELL J. *Sodalite from Mag- net Cove, Arkansas. 358. Gopparp, E. N. and T. 8S. LovErina. *Laramie fault pattern in the Front Range Mineral belt, Colorado. 360. GoupMAN, E. A.~ A new pocket gopher of the genus Cratogeomys from Mex- ico. 402. — New rodents from Middle Amer- ica. 418. Go.tpmMAN, M.I. *Petrographic features of salt dome cap rock. 223. Grecor, Mrs. Hersert H. *Demon- strations of Japanese flower arrange- ment. 39. Gricas, Rosert F. Hybridity as a factor in evolution. 329. *Timber-lines as indicators of climatic trends. 221. Haut, DavinG. The North and Central American spider parasites of the genus Pseudogauraz (Diptera: Chlo- ropidae). 255. Heck, N. H. *Geological factors in safe- guarding against earthquakes. 360. HERZFELD, Karu F. *Recent investiga- tions on the liquid state. 484. Hewett, D. F. *Environment and rela- tions of the hypogene manganese minerals. 360. HispeEen, JAMES H. The chemical appli- cation of the Raman effect. 269. Hutu, Frank M. Some neotropical and oriental syrphid flies in the United States National Museum. 165. Hurp-Karrer, ANNIE M. Rubidium and strontium toxicity to plants in- hibited by potassium and calcium respectively. 351. JENKINS, ANNA E. New species of Sphaceloma on Aralia and Mentha. 412. Kitz, Burton F. *Native grasses of the prairies and plains. 40. Kirk, Epwin. Clistocrinus, a new Car- boniferous crinoid genus. 105. Clithrocrinus, new name for Clisto- crinus Kirk. 373. Ksanpa, C. J. See Grorce TUNELL. 221. LAMBERT, W. D. *Report on geodesy. 486. Lanc, WattTeR B. Sun symbol mark- mgs, 137. LANGE, Bruno. *The theory and appli- cation of photo-electric cells. 483. LEonNARD, E. C. Notes on the genus Staurogyne. 398. Dec. 15, 1937 LotKa, ALFRED J. Population analysis: a theorem regarding the stable age distribution. 299. LovERING, T.S. *Origin of the telluride ores of Boulder County, Colorado. aA ie See E. N. Gopparp. 360. MacNeiu, F. Stearns. The systematic position of the pelecypod genus Trinacria. 4652. See W. C. MANSFIELD. 5. MawnsFIELD, G. R. “*Erosional history of the Paradise Valley quadrangle, Idaho. 358. MANSFIELD, W. C. A new subspecies of Pecten from the upper Miocene of North Carolina. 10. A specimen of “‘Crassatellites’”’ from the St. Marys formation of Mary- land. 56. and F. §. MacNetru. Pliocene and Pleistocene mollusks from the Intra-coastal Waterway in South Carolina. 5. Marsie, J. P. *Age of monanite from Mars Hill, North Carolina. 221. Martin, G. W. A new type of hetero- basidiomycete. 112. Matuiack, M. B. The carotenoid pig- ments of the sweet potato (Ipomoea batatas, Poir). 493. Mernzer, O. E. *Notes on Proceedings of the Association of Hydrology, September 1936, at the Sixth General Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics in Edin- burgh. 492. Our watersupply. 865. Merritt, HE. D. *Plants and civiliza- tions. 1383. Menrti£, J. B., Jr. *Glacial features of the Nushagak district, Alaska. 222. Morton, C. V. New species of Costa Rican plants. 304. Morata, K. J. Hydrogen ion concen- tration and the formation of copper complexes. 101. OBERHOLSER, Harry C. Description of three new screech owls from the United States. 354. Oman, P. W. The cinerosus group of the genus Laevicephalus (Homoptera: Cicadellidae). 474. AUTHOR INDEX 543 Peters, James L. A new genus for Pseudoptynx solomonensis Hartert. 81. Prick, Emmett W. North American monogenetic trematodes. I. The superfamily Gyrodactyloidea. 114, 146. RAPER, KENNETH B. slime mold. 42. ReeEp, J. C. “*Significance of amygdales in Columbia River lava. 223. Ricker, P. L. *Wild flower cultural preferences. 40. Roperts, JOHN W. *The spraying of plants, botanically considered. 48. SAKANISHI, SHIO. *Japanese flower ar- rangement. -39. SANDHOUSE, GRAcE A. The bees of the genera Augochlora, Augochloropsis, and Augochlorella (Hymenoptera: Apoidea) occurring in the United States. 65. SanForD, R. L. *Magnetic testing of prison bars. 484. SayLor, LAwreENcE W. The beetles of the subfamily Chasmatopterinae in the new world (Coleoptera: Scara- *Why study a baeidae). 531. SHarpPe, C. F. Stewart. *Physio- graphic research on soil erosion. 361. SHEPARD, Francis P. *Evidence of a greatly lowered sea-level. 221. SILSBEE, Francis B. Explorations in the super-conducting state. 225. SprnDLER, L. A. Resistance to intestinal trichinosis in experimental animals induced by feeding metabolic prod- ucts of encysted trichinae. 36. STterpHENSON, L. W. *Flat-bottomed stream erosion by wetting and dry- ing; 220. Linter, a new taxodont genus from the upper Cretaceous of Texas. 449. The stratigraphic significance of Kummelia, a new Eocene bivalve genus from New Jersey. 58. Stewart, T. D. and W.R. WepEet. The finding of two ossuaries on the site of the Indian village of Nacotchtanke (Anacostia). 218. SWALLEN, JASON R. The grass genus Cathestecum. 495. 544 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 Swancer, W. H. *Failures in metals. 484. Swartz, J. H. *Some resistivity deter- minations of salt water boundaries. 360. TREADWELL, A. L. Polychaetous an- nelids collected by Captain Robert A. Bartlett in Greenland, Fox Basin, and Labrador. 28. Tuck, RaupH. *The field, Alaska. 359. TUNNELL, GEORGE and C. J. KSAnpa. *Some general conclusions from in- vestigations of the calaverite group. 221, Van DersaL, Wm. R. *Moving pictures of seed collecting in the northeastern states. 40. Van OrstTRAND, C. E. *Temperatures in the lava beds of East Central and South Central Oregon. 357. VAUGHAN, T. Wayuanp. *Notes on Proceedings of the Association of Physical Oceanography, September 17 to 24, 1936, at the Sixth General Matanuska coal Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics in Edin- burgh. 490. VIGNEAUD, VINCENT DU. Some aspects of the study of insulin. 365. WaLKER, Ecpert H. New species and nomenclatorial changes in eastern Asiatic Myrsinaceae. 198. Warp, Henry B. *Salmon phychology. 134. WEDEL, W. R. See T. D. Stewart. 213. WEIGHTMAN, Mr. *Report on Meteor- ology. 489. WILLIAMS, CARROLL M. See Austin H. CLARK. 209. Witson, CHARLES B. Some parasitic copepods from Panama Bay. 423. WooprinG, WENDELL P. *Depositional environment of Lower Pliocene oil- bearing formations of the Los An- geles Basin, California. 221. YounG, Rosert A. Phyllostachys sul- phurea var. viridis var. nov. and P. edulis (Carr.) H. de L. 348. SUBJECT INDEX Anthropology. The finding of two ossu- aries on the site of the Indian vil- lage of Nacotchtanke (Anacostia). T. D. Stewart and W. R. WEDEL. BAS: Archeology. Burial area Auice L. L. FERGUSON. in Moyaone. 261. Botany. A basis for mycogeography. W. W. Disxu. 244. A new type of heterobasidiomycete. G. W. Martin. 112. A species of Tridentaria preying on Difflugia constricta. CHARLES DRECHSLER. 391. *Berry breeding. GrorGcE M. Dar- Row. 42. *Demonstrations of Japanese flower arrangement. Mrs. HERBERT H. GREGOR. 39. Eleven new Asteraceae from North and South America. S. F. BLAKE. 374. *Experiences of a plant collector in Oceania. H. H. Bartuett. 40. “Japanese flower arrangement. SuHio SAKANISHI. 39. *Moving pictures of seed collecting in the northeastern states. Ww. R. Van Dersau. 40. *Native grasses of the prairies and plains. Burton F. Kitrz. 40. New species and nomenclatorial changes in eastern Asiatic Myr- sinaceae. Eaprert H. WALKER. 198. New species of Costa Rican plants. C. V. Morton. 304. New species of Paspalum from Tropi- cal America. AGNES CHASE. 148. New species of Sphaceloma on Aralia and Mentha. ANNA E. JENKINS. 412. Notes on harmel, or “Syrian rue.’’ WiuiiaM A. Dayton. 349. Notes on the genus Staurogyne. E. C. LEONARD. 398. Phacelia mustelina, a new plant from Death Valley, California. FREp- ERICK V. COvILLE. 196. Phyllostachys sulphurea var. viridis var. nov. and P. edulis (Carr.) H. de L. Rosert A. Youne. 348. *Plants and civilizations. E. D. MERRILL. 1338. “Remarks on the 4th Annual Spring Wild Flower Show at George Washington University. Pau W. Bowman. 41. *Some aspects of black walnut tox- icity, its cause and effects. Ev- ERETT F. Davis. 40. “The agronomy program of the Soil Conservation Service. CHARLES R. Entow. 39. “The Dutch elm disease in Europe. R. Kent Beattiz. 41. The grass genus Cathestecum. R. SWALLEN. 495. “The range plant handbook of the Forest Service. W. A. Dayton. Al. “The spraying of plants, botanically considered. JoHN W. ROBERTS. 43. “Why study a slime mold. KeEnN- NETH B. Raper. 42. “Wild flower cultural preferences. P. L. Ricker. . 40. Chemistry. Hydrogen ion concentration and the formation of copper com- plexes. K. J. Murata. 101. Some aspects of the study of insulin. VINCENT DU VIGNEAUD. 365. The carotenoid pigments of the sweet potato (Ipomoea batatas, Poir.). M. B. Matuack. 493. The chemical application of the Raman effect. JamEs H. HIBBEN. JASON 269. Entomology. Notes on Curculionidae (Coleoptera). L. L. BucHanan. a12. Records of Argynnis diana and of some other butterflies from Vir- ginia. AusTIN H. CLARK and CarRRoLL M. Wiuuiams. 209. ‘Some neotropical and oriental syr- phid flies in the United States National Museum. Frank M. Bvnn,/165. 545 546 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 Some new North American Mem- bracidae. E. D. Batu. 479. The bees of the genera Augochlora, Augochloropsis, and Augochlorella (Hymenoptera: Apoidea) occur- ring in the United States. GRAcE A. SANDHOUSE. 65. The beetles of the subfamily Chas- matopterinae in the new world Coleoptera: Scarabaeidae). Law- RENCE W. Saytor. 531. The cinerosus group of the genus Laevicephalus (Homoptera: Cica- dellidae). P. W. Oman. 474. The genus Lysiognatha Ashmead. R. A. CusHMANn. 438. The North and Central American spider parasites of the genus Pseudogaurax (Diptera: Chloropi- dae). Davin G. Hatu. 255. Genetics. Hybridity as a factor in evolu- tion. Ropsert F. Griaes. 329. Geology. *Age of monozite from Mars Hill, North “Carolina, WJ. P. MaRBLE. 221. *Alunite deposits of the Marysvale region, Utah. EuGmnm CaALuLaG- HAN. 358. *Asymmetrical distribution of stream terraces in southeastern Montana. D. A. ANDREws. 361. *Depositional environment of Lower Pliocene oil-bearing formations of the Los Angeles Basin, California. WENDELL P. Wooprine. 221. *Devonian correlations in Michigan and Ontario. G. A. CoopEr. 221. *Environment and relations of the hypogene manganese minerals. D. E. Hewett. 360. *Hrosional history of the Paradise Valley quadrangle, Idaho. G. R. MANSFIELD. 358. *Evidence of a greatly lowered sea- level. Francis P. SHEPARD. 221. *Flat-bottomed stream erosion by wetting and drying. L. W. STs- PHENSON. 220. *General report on meeting. WIL- LIAM BowIiE. 485. *Geological factors in safeguarding against earthquakes. IN EL. Heck. 360. *Geologic History of South Park, Colorado. C. H. Berunre, Jr. 74 Oi *Glacial features of the Nushagak Alaska J. B. Mertie, Jr. 222. *Laramie fault pattern in the Front Range mineral belt, Colorado. EK. N. Gopparp and T. S. Lov- ERING. 360. *Origin of the oil bearing shoestring sands of northeastern Oklahoma and southwestern Kansas. N. W. Bass. 363. *Origin of the telluride ores of Boul- der County, Colorado. T. S. LovERING. 220. *Petrographic features of salt dome cap rock. M.I. GoupmMan. 223. *Petroleum geophysics. D.C. Bar- TON. 363. *Physiographic research on soil ero- sion. C. F. Srewarp SHARPE. 361. *Significance of amygdales in Colum- bia Riverlava. J.C. RexEp. 223. *Silts of the lower Yukon valley. A. J. EaARDLEY. 220. *Sodalite from Magnet Cove, Ar- kansas. JEWELL J. Guass. 358. *Some general conclusions from in- vestigations of the calaverite group. GEoRGE TUNNELL and C. J. Ksanpa. 221. *Some recent changes in Alaskan Coast Glaciers. W. O. FIExp, JR. 363. *Some resistivity determinations of salt water boundaries. J. H. Swartz. 360. Sun symbol markings. Watrter B. Lane. 137. *Temperatures in the lava beds of East Central and South Central Oregon. C. E. Van ORSTRAND. 357. *The Centerfield limestone of New York and its equivalents in the midwest. G. A. Cooper. 359. *The distribution of selenium, with geologic implications. H. G. ByErRs. 359. The emergence of ideas as illustrated from geology. GrorGE H. AsH- LEY. 40. Dec. 15, 1937 *The Matanuska coal field, Alaska. RaupH Tuck. 359. The Pleistocene Horry clay and Pam- lico formation near Myrtle Beach, Ss. C. €C. WytHE Cooke. 1. *The uses of aerial photography. C. H. Brrpstye. 360. *Timber-lines as indicators of cli- matic trends. Rosert F. Griaes. 224 Geophysics. *Notes on Proceedings of the Association of Physical Ocean- ography, September 17 to 24, 1936, at the Sixth General Assembly of the International Union of Geod- esy and Geophysics in Edinburgh T. WayLaNpD VAauGHAN. 490. *Report on geodesy. W. D. Lam- BERT. 486. ' *Report on meteorology. Mr. WEIGHTMAN. 489. *Report on seismology. E. W. EICKELBERG. 486. *Report on Terrestrial Magnetism and Electricity. J. A. FLEMING and L. V. BERKNER. 486. Structure of continents and ocean basins. RicHarp M. Fiexp. 181. Hydrology. *Notes on Proceedings of the Association of Hydrology, Sep- tember 1936 at the Sixth General Assembly of the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics in Edinburgh. O. E. MernzeEr. 492. Our water supply. 85. The chemical character of the ground O. E. MEINZER. waters of the South Atlantic Coastal Plain. Margaret D. Foster. 405. Malacology. A new species of Melania from Szechuan Province, China. Sur Fone CuHen. 79. Four new species of fresh-water mol- lusks from China. Sur Fone CHEen. 444, Two new land shells from Cuba. Pau Bartscu. 130. Mathematics. Population analysis: a theorem regarding the stable age distribution. Aurrep J. LorkKa. 299. SUBJECT INDEX 547 Obituary. BEAMAN, WILLIAM Majsor ide CLAWSON, ARTHUR Brooks. 364. CoviLLE, FREDERICK V. 88. Hoop, Ozn1t PortTER. 267. Moore, CLARENCE BLOOMFIELD. LATS NIEUWLAND, JULIUS ARTHUR. 178. RosInson, BENJAMIN LINCOLN. 224. Rowunpy, Pau VERE. 364. RUTHERFORD, Lorp Ernest. 540. SMyTH, CHARLES Henry, Jr. 224. THOMSON, Einv. 178. WHEELER, WILLIAM Morton. 267. WHITE, WILLIAM ALANSON. 179. Ornithology. A new genus for Pseudop- tynz solomonensis Hartert. JAMES L. Peters. 81. Bird bones from archeological sites in Alaska. HERBERT FRIEDMANN. 431. Description of three new screech owls from the United States. Harry C. OBERHOLSER. 354. Paleobotany. Fossil legumes from Bridge Creek, Oregon. RoLtanpd’ W. Brown. 414. Further additions to some fossil floras of the western United States. Rouanp W. Brown. 506. Gyrocarpus and other fossil plants from the Cumarebo field in Vene- zuela. Epwarp W. Berry. 501. On the presence of the fern Weich- selia in Colombia, South America. Epwarp W. Berry. 458. Paleontology. A new subspecies of Pec- ten from the upper Miocene of North Carolina. W. C. Mans- FIELD. 10. A specimen of ‘“‘Crassatellites’” from the St. Marys formation of Mary- land. W. C. MANSFIELD. 56. Clistocrinus, a new Carboniferous crinoid genus. Epwin' KIRK. 105. Clithrocrinus, new name for Clisio- crinus Kirk. Epwin Kirk. 373. Linter, a new taxodont genus from the upper Cretaceous of Texas. Luioyp W. STEPHENSON. 449. Pliocene and Pleistocene mollusks from the Intracoastal Waterway 548 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 27, No. 12 in South Carolina. W. C. Mans- FIELD and F. 8. MacNetu. 5. The systematic position of the pelecypod genus Trinacria. F. Stearns MacNeru. 452. | Physics. Explorations in the super-con- ducting state. Francis B. S1us- BEE. 226. *Failures in Metals. SwWANGER. 484. *Magnetic testing of prison bars. R. L. Sanrorp. 484. *Recent investigations on the liquid state. Karu F. Herzretp. 484. Some recent investigations of ortho- and para-hydrogen at low temper- atures. F.G.BrIcKWEDDE. 588. The fundamentals of photosynthesis. JAMES FrRanNcK. 317. *The theory and application of photo-electric cells. BRUNO LANGE. 483. Plant Physiology. Rubidium and stron- tium toxicity to plants inhibited by potassium and calcium respec- tively. ANNIE M. Hurp-KaARReER. 351. Stratigraphy. The stratigraphic signifi- cance of Kummelia, a new Eocene bivalve genus from New Jersey. Lioyp W. STEPHENSON. 58. Zoology. A necessary change in an am- phibian name. Doris M. Cocu- RAN. 312. A new pocket gopher of the genus Cratogeomys from Mexico. E. A. GOLDMAN. 402. We H. A note on the members of the nema- tode genus Trichostrongylus oc- curring in rodents and lagomorphs with descriptions of two new spe- cies. GERARD DikmMans. 203. New rodents from Middle America. E. A. GotpmMan. 418. North American monogenetic trema- todes. I. The superfamily Gyro- dactyloidea. Emmerttr W. Pricer. 114, 146. Notes on Chinese spiders of the fam- ilies Salticidae and Thomisidae. Irvine Fox. 12. Polychaetous annelids collected by Captain Robert A. Bartlett in Greenland, Fox Basin, and Labra- dor. A. L. TREADWELL. 23. Resistance to intestinal trichinosis in experimental animals induced by feeding metabolic products of en- cysted trichinae. L. A. SPINDLER. 36. *Salmon phychology. Henry B. Warp. 134. Some parasitic copepods from Pan- ama Bay. CHARLES B. WILSON. 423. The histology of nemic esophagi. VIII. The esophagus of repre- sentatives of the Enoplida. B. G. Cuitwoop and M. B. Cuirwoop. 517. The Nearctic spiders of the family Heteropodidae. IrvING Fox. 461. CONTENTS Curmistry.—The carotenoid pigments of the sweet potato (Ipomoea batatas, Potr.).. .M.o Bo MASUAGK. . 50045 os coe fo aw ee ar Botany.—The grass genus Cathestecum. JAasoN R. SWALLEN....... PALEOBOTANY.—Gyrocarpus and other fossil plants from the Cuma- rebo field in Venezuela. Epwarp W. Brerry.............. Backs PALEOBOTANY.—Further additions to some fossil floras of the western United States. Roianp W. BROWN.. f.4..4.5 0. . whee eeue - ZooLocy.—The histology of nemic esophagi. VIII. The esop of representatives of the Enoplida. B. G. Carrwoop and M. B. CHIT WOOD celal soe edaicis oh ake «Bee od ee ee he Entomo.tocy.—The beetles of the subfamily Chasmatopterinae in the New World (Coleoptera: Scarabaeidae). LAwRENcE W. SaYLoR PrRocerbiInGs: Tam AGADBEMK:. . i205 U\s eka cs ene ee 4 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY... ...6cscc-ccc0scsuweun ; OBITUARY: LORD ERNEST RUTHERFORD.........0.0ccccececevces : InpEx TO VOLUME 22 1000 8 es UNG on oe oe : This Journal is indexed in the international Index to Periodicals 517 ESg82 Ee: SR, Ware ae eS eo he PA elt NRARRARARRRAREAAAAAAAAAAEA EA Anan AAA AAAAARAA AAAAAAA AAR a aA Easaaanay Z VAP yyw ARAAA AA AAA Wan ARAVA AAA = al A A a — AAR AA ARAAR AAR ARR GE f | aaa VAAr A aAAAAS APARNA Maoaanael eae AAR AA VA fo Ye Ps RRP AA a anna An nah GaAAAAR Aap aR RARAA | Vala an A : - I | VZ Is // _/ 1 ] \ v ’ ; M | J \ uy Y ’ J } a RM AAAL iN WAT. a Mmaeaceeaaties Apenn aA aaa a, ARRAN AC 5; IAAAAAC | ! NRRA RAR RAr aM aei yyy AARRAAAAR A AARnnaaaae AAAAARAAAAAAMAARAARAARAAR AHA? AAR AAANAARRAR A” RPERARRBRRBRALH yo De rN, \e\f lan | AWARE EEC ER BARA aaa RAAAAA AR RAAAR: AN VAlAlAVAAA | - sAAAAYYAAAAAAAY. inh 1810